Biology 8ed

Eighth Edition Neil A. Campbell Jane B. Reece Berkeley, California Lisa A. Urry Mills College. Oakland, California M...

Author: Neil A. Campbell | Jane B. Reece

4166 downloads 8774 Views 384MB Size Report

This content was uploaded by our users and we assume good faith they have the permission to share this book. If you own the copyright to this book and it is wrongfully on our website, we offer a simple DMCA procedure to remove your content from our site. Start by pressing the button below!
Report copyright / DMCA form

DOWNLOAD PDF

Eighth Edition

Neil A. Campbell Jane B. Reece Berkeley, California

Lisa A. Urry Mills College. Oakland, California

Michael L. Cain Bowdoin College, Brunswick, Maine

Steven A. Wasserman University of California, San Diego

Peter V. Minorsky Mercy College, Dobbs Ferry, New York

Robert B. Jackson Duke University, Durham, North Carolina

-PEARSON

BeI\.iamin Cummings

San Francisco Boston New York Cape Town Hong Kong London Madrid Mexico City Montreal Munich Paris

Singapore Sydney Tokyo Toronto

Editor-in-Chief: Beth Wilbur Executive Director of Development: Deborah Gale Supervising Editors: Pat Burner and Beth N, lVinickojJ Senior Editorial Manager: Ginnie Simione /lllSon Managing Editor: Michael Early Marketing Managers: Lauren Harp and Josh Frost

Library ofCongre.ss Cataloging-in-Publication Data Campbell, Neil A. Biology f Neil A. Campbell, Jane B. Reece. - 8th I'd. p,cm. [ndudes index, [SBN-13: 978-0-8053-6844-4 (alk. paJ}!'r) ISBN-IO: 0-8053-6844-2 (alk. paper) 1. Biology. I. Reece, Jane B. 11. TItle.

Developmental Editors:John Burner, Matt Lee, Alice E. Fugate, and

Suzanne Olivier Developmental Artists: Hi/air Chism, Carla Simmons, Kelly Murph),

Andrew Recher, and Connie Balek Art Editors: Laura Murray and Kelly Murphy Senior Photo Editor: Donna Kalal Photo Researcher: Maureen Spuhler Editorial Assistants: Benjamin Pearson, Logan Triglia, and Julia

Khait Production Management, Composition, and Prepress:

S4Cariisle Publishing Services Illustrations: Precision Graphics Copy Editor: Janet Greenblatt Art and Design Director: Mark Ong Design Manager: Marilyn Perry Text Design: Mark Ong. Jennifer Dunn, Jana Anderson Cover Design: Yvo Riezebos Text Printer: Courier Kendallville Cover Printer: Moore Langen/Courier Senior Supplements Project Editor: Susan Berge Supplements Production Supervisor:Jane Brundage Senior Media Producer: Jonathan Ballard Media Project Editors: Nora Lally-Graves and Brienn Buchanan

QH308.2.C34 2009 570--dc22

2007042662

Student package ISBN: 978-()"321-54325-7/0-321-54325-4 Student text component ISBN: 978-0-8053-6844-4/0-8053-68#-2 P-copy package [SBN: 978-()"321-53172-8/0-321-53172-8 P-copy text component ISBN: 978-0-321 -54727-9/0-321-54727-6 Copyright © 2008 Pearson Education, [nc., publishing as Pearson Benjamin Cummings, 1301 SansomI' St., San Francisco, CA 94111, All rights Il'served. Manufactured in the United States of America. This publication is protected by Copyright and J}!'rmission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. To obtain permission(s) to use material from this work, please submit a written request to Pearson Education, Inc., Permissions Department, 1900 E. lake Ave., Glenview, 1l6OO25. For information regarding permissions, call (847) 486-2635. Many of the designations used by manufacturers and sellers to distinguish their products are claimed as trademarks. Where those designations appear in this book, and the publisher was aware of a trademark claim, the designations have been printed in initial caps or all caps. Pearson Benjamin Cummings is a trademark, in the US. andlor other countries, of Pearson Education, [nco or its affiliates. 234567891O-CRK-I1100908

Associate Web Developer: Linda Young On the cover: Magnolia flower. Chris FoxiCorbis

Credits continue following the appendices.

Benjamin Cummings 1301 SansomI' Street San Francisco, CA 94111

-

.."S'' />'.. ~

PEARSON

Bel\iamin

Cummings

www.pearsonhighered.com

1

Introduction: Themes in the Study of life

UNIT ONE

2 3 4 5

The Chemistry of life

The Chemical Context of Life 30 Water and the Fitness of the Environment 46 Carbon and the Molecular Diversity of life 58 The Structure and Function of large Biological Molecules 68

UNIT TWO

6 7 8 9 10 11 12

The Cell

ATour of the Cell 94 Membrane Structure and Function 125 An Introduction to Metabolism 142 Cellular Respiration: Harvesting Chemical Energy 162 Photosynthesis 185 Cell Communication 206 The Cell Cycle 228

UNIT THREE

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Genetics

Meiosis and Sexual life Cycles 248 Mendel and the Gene Idea 262 The Chromosomal Basis of Inheritance 286 The Molecular Basis of Inheritance 305 From Gene to Protein 325 Regulation of Gene Expression 351 Viruses 381 Biotechnology 396 Genomes and Their Evolution 426

UNIT FOUR

22

1

Mechanisms of Evolution

Descent with Modification: A Darwinian View of life 452 23 The Evolution of Populations 468 24 The Origin of Species 487 25 The History of life on Earth 507

UNIT FIVE

The Evolutionary History of Biological Diversity

26 Phylogeny and the Tree of life 536 27 Bacteria and Archaea 556 28 Protists 575 29 Plant Diversity I: How Plants Colonized land 600 30 Plant Diversity II: The Evolution of Seed Plants 618 31 Fungi 636 32 An Introduction to Animal Diversity 654 33 Invertebrates 666 34 Vertebrates 698 UNIT SIX

Plant Form and Function

35 36

Plant Structure, Growth, and Development 738 Resource Acquisition and Transport in Vascular Plants 764 37 Soil and Plant Nutrition 785 38 Angiosperm Reproduction and Biotechnology 801 39 Plant Responses to Internal and External Signals 821 UNIT SEVEN

40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51

Animal Form and Function

Basic Principles of Animal Form and Function Animal Nutrition 875 Circulation and Gas Exchange 898 The Immune System 930 Osmoregulation and Excretion 954 Hormones and the Endocrine System 975 Animal Reproduction 997 Animal Development 1021 Neurons, Synapses, and Signaling 1047 Nervous Systems 1064 Sensory and Motor Mechanisms 1087 Animal Behavior 1120

UNIT EIGHT

852

Ecology

52 An Introduction to Ecology and the Biosphere 1148 53 Population Ecology 1174 54 Community Ecology 1198 55 Ecosystems 1222 56 Conservation Biology and Restoration Ecology 1245

Neil A. Campbell Neil Campbell combined the investigative nature of a research scientist with the soul of an experienced and caring teacher. He earned his M.A. in Zoology from UCLA and his Ph.D. in Plant Biology from the University of California, Riverside,

where he received the Distinguished Alumnus Award in 2001. Neil published numerous research articles on desert and coastal plants and how the sensitive plant (Mimosa) and other legumes move their leaves. His 30 years of teaching in diverse environments included general biology courses at Cornell University, Pomona College, and San Bernardino Valley College, where he received the college's first Outstanding Professor Award in 1986. Neil was a visiting scholar in the Department of Botany and Plant Sciences at the University of California, Riverside. In addition to his authorship of this book, he coauthored Biology: COl1cepts & COl1l1ectiol1s and Essential Biology with Jane Reece. Neil died shortly after the initial planning of this revision, but his legacy continues in BIOLOGY, Eighth Edition.

Jane B. Reece Lead author Jane Reece, Neil Campbell's longtime collaborator, has participated in every edition of BIOLOGY-first as an editor and contributor, then as an author. Her education includes an A.B. in Biology from Harvard University, an M.S. in Microbiology from Rutgers University, and a Ph.D. in Bacteriology from the University of California, Berkeley. Before mi· grating to California from the Northeast, she taught biology at Middlesex County College and Queensborough Commu· nity College. At UC Berkeley, and later as a postdoctoral fellow in genetics at Stanford University, her research focused on genetic recombination in bacteria. Besides her work on BIOLOGY, she has been a coauthor on Biology: Concepts & Conl1ections, Essential Biology, and The World ofthe Cell.

For the Eighth Edition, Jane Reece is joined by five coauthors whose contributions reflect their biological expertise as scientific researchers and their teaching sensibilities gained from years of experience as instructors.

lisa A. Urry Units 1-3 (Chapters 2-21) and Chapter 47 Lisa Urry is a professor at Mills College in Oakland, California, and was a major contributor to the Seventh Edition of BIOLOGY. After graduating from Tufts University with a double major in Biology and French, Lisa completed her Ph.D. in Molecular and Developmental Biology at MIT. Following postdoctoral appointments at Harvard Medical School, Tufts University, and UC Berkeley, she began teaching at Mills College, where she currently holds the Letts-Villard Professorship and serves as Chair of the Biology Department. She has published research articles on various topics involving gene expression during embryonic development. Her current research interest is in sea urchin development. Lisa is also deeply committed to promoting opportunities for women in science education and research.

Michael l. Cain

Peter V. Minorsky

Units 4 and 5 (Chapters 22-34) Michael Cain is an ecologist and evolutionary biologist currently at Bowdoin College. Michael earned a joint degree in Biology and Math from Bowdoin College, an M.Sc. from Brown University, and a Ph.D. in Ecology and Evolutionary Biology from Cornell University. After postdoctoral work in plant ecology at the University of Connecticut and molecular genetics at Washington University in St. Louis, Michael went on to teach general biology, ecology, and evolution in a diverse range of settings, including Carleton College, New Mexico State University, and Rose-Hulman Instihlte of Technology in Indiana. Michael is the author of dozens of scientific papers on topics that include foraging behavior in insects and plants, longdistance seed dispersal, and speciation in crickets.

Unit 6 (Chapters 35-39) Peter Minorsky revised Unit 6 for the Sixth and Seventh Editions of BIOLOGY and is a professor at Mercy College in New York, where he teaches evolution, ecology, botany, and introductory biology. He is also the science writer for the journal Plant Physiology. He received his B.A. in Biology from Vassar College and his Ph.D. in Plant Physiology from Cornell University. After a postdoctoral fellowship at the University of \Visconsin at Madison, Peter taught at Kenyon College, Union College, Western Connecticut State University, and Vassar College. He is an electrophysiologist who studies plant responses to stress and is currently exploring the possible effects of geomagnetism on plant growth.

Steven A. Wasserman

Robert B. Jackson

Unit 7 (Chapters 40-46, 48-51) Steve Wasserman is a professor at the University of California, San Diego. He earned his A.B. in Biology from Harvard University and his Ph.D. in Biological Sciences from MIT. Since a postdoctoral sojourn at UC Berkeley, where he investigated topological transformations of DNA, he has focused on regulatory pathway mechanisms. Working with the fruit fly Drosophila, he has contributed to the fields ofembryogenesis, reproduction, and immunity. As a faculty member at the University of Texas Southwestern Medical Center and UC San Diego, he has taught genetics, development, and physiology to undergraduate, graduate, and medical students. He has also served as the research mentor for more than a dozen doctoral students and nearly 40 aspiring scientists at the undergraduate and high school level. Steve has been the recipient of distinguished scholar awards from both the Markey Charitable Trust and the David and Lucille Packard Foundation. He recently received the 2007 Academic Senate Distinguished Teaching Award for undergraduate teaching at UC San Diego.

Unit 8 (Chapters 52-56) Rob Jackson is a professor of biology and Nicholas Chair of Environmental Sciences at Duke University. He directed Duke's Program in Ecology for many years and is currently the Vice President of Science for the Ecological Society of America. Rob holds a B.S. in Chemical Engineering from Rice University, as well as M.S. degrees in Ecology and Statistics and a Ph.D. in Ecology from Utah State University. He was a postdoctoral scientist in Stanford University's Biology Department and an Assistant Professor at the University of Texas, Austin. Rob has received numerous awards, including being honored at the White House with a Presidential Early Career Award in Science and Engineering from the National Science Foundation. He has published a trade book about the environment, The Earth Remains Forever, and a children's book of poetry about biology and animals called Animal Mischief His second children's book, Not Again, will be published in 2008.

Uch has changed in the world since the completion of the previous edition of BIOLOGY. In the realm of the biological sciences, the sequencing of the genomes of many more species has had deep ramifications in diverse areas of research, providing new insights, for example, into the evolutionary histories of numerous species.

M

There has been an explosion of discovery about small RNA molecules and their roles in gene regulation and, at the other end of the size spectrum, our knowledge of Earth's biodiversity has expanded to encompass hundreds of new species, in· eluding parrots, monkeys, and orchids. And during the same period, biology has become more prominent than ever in our daily lives. The news is filled with stories about the promise of personalized medicine, novel cancer treatments, the possibility of producing biofuels with the help ofgenetic engineering, and the use of genetic profiling in solving crimes. Other news stories report climate change and ecological disasters, new drug-resistant strains of the pathogens that cause tuberculosis and parasitic infections, and famine-crises in the world around us that are posing new challenges for biologists and their allies in the other sciences. On a personal level, many colleagues and I have missed our inspiring friend, the late Neil Campbell, even as our commitment to leadership in biological education has grown. Our changing world needs biologists and a scientifically literate citizenry as never be· fore, and we are committed to working toward that goal.

The New Coauthors The Seventh Edition of BIOLOGY has been used by more stu· dents and instructors than any previous edition, remaining the most widely used college textbook in the sciences. With the privilege ofsharing biology with so many students comes the responsibility of improving the book to serve the biology community even better. For that reason, Neil would have been delighted to see that this Eighth Edition fulfills our decade-long goal of expanding the author team. As biological discoveries proliferated, Neil and I realized that it was becoming harder than ever to make judicious decisions about which biological concepts are most im~ portant to develop in depth in an introductory textbook. We needed an author team with first-hand expertise across the bio-logical spectrum, and we wanted coauthors who had honed their teaching values in the classroom. Our new coauthors-Lisa Urry, Michael Cain, Steve Wasserman, Peter Minorsky, and Rob Jack· son-represent the highest standards of scientific scholarship across a broad range of disciplines and a deep commitment to undergraduate teaching. As described on pages iv-v, their scien-

tific expertise ranges from molecules to ecosystems, and the schools where they teach range from small liberal arts colleges to large universities. In addition, both Lisa and Peter, as major contributors to earlier editions, had prior experience working on the book. The six of us have collaborated unusually closely, starting with book-wide planning meetings and continuing with frequent exchanges ofquestions and advice as we worked on our chapters. For each chapter, the revising author, editors, and Itogether for· mulated a detailed plan; subsequently, my own role involved commenting on early drafts and polishing the final version. Together, we have strived to extend the book's effectiveness for today's students and instructors, while maintaining its core values.

Our Core Values What are the core values ofthis book? They start with getting the science right but then focus on helping students make sense of the science. Below I highlight our longtime values and describe how they've been put into practice in the Eighth Edition. You can see examples of many of the book's features in "To the Student: How to Use This Book" (pp. xiv-xix).

Accuracy and Currency Getting the science right goes beyond making sure that the facts are accurate and up·to-date. Equally important is ensuring that our chapters reflect how scientists in the various subdisciplines ofbiology, from cell biology to ecology, currently view their area. Changes in the basic paradigms in various biological fields may call for us to reorganize some chapters and even create new ones in a new edition. For example, a new Chapter 21 discusses genomes and their evolution, and neurobiology is now covered in two chapters (Chapters 48 and 49), one focused on the cellular level and one at the organ system leveL On pages ix-x, you can read more about new content and organizational improvements in the Eighth Edition.

A Framework of Key Concepts The explosion ofdiscoveries that makes biology so exciting today also threatens to suffocate students under an avalanche of infor~ mation. Our primary pedagogical goal is to help students build a framework for learning biology by organizing each chapter around a small number of "Key Concepts; typically three to six. Each chapter begins with a list ofits Key Concepts, a photograph that raises an intriguing question, and an Overview section that addresses the question and introduces the chapter. In the body of the chapter, each Key Concept serves as a nwnbered heading for

a major section, in which the prose and pictures tell a more detailed story. At the end of each concept section, Concept Check questions enable students to assess their understanding of that concept before going on to the next concept. Students encounter the Key Concepts one last time when they reach the Qlapter Review at the end ofthe chapter; the Summary of Key Concepts restates them and offers succinct explanatory support in both words and summary diagrams-new to this edition.

Active Learning Increasingly, instructors tell us that they want their students to take a more active role in learning biology and to think about biological questions at a higher level. In the Eighth Edition, we provide several new ways for students to engage in active learning. First, the Concept Check questions in this edition build in difficulty, and each set now ends with a new "What if?~ question that challenges students to integrate what they have learned and to think analytically. There are also questions accompanying selected figures within the text; each of these questions encourages students to delve into the figure and assess their understanding of its underlying ideas. And new "Draw It~ exercises in every chapter ask students to put pencil to paper and draw a structure, annotate a figure, or graph experimental data. In addition to appearing regularly in the Chapter Review, a "Draw It~ question may show up in a Concept Check or figure legend. Finally, the website that accompanies the book features two especially exciting new student tools, both of which focus on biology's toughest topics: MasteringBiology tutorials and BioFlix 3-D animations and tutorials. These are described on page xx.

Evolution and Other Unifying Themes Together with BIOLOGYs emphasis on key concepts, a thematic approach has always distinguished our book from an encyclopedia of biology. In the Eighth Edition, as previously, the central theme is evolution. Evolution unifies all of biology by accounting for both the unity and diversity of life and for the remarkable adaptations of organisms to their environments. The evolutionary theme is woven into every chapter of BIOLOGY, and Unit Four, Mechanisms of Evolution, has undergone a major revision. In Chapter I, the other unifying themes have been streamlined from ten to six. And throughout the book, these themes are now referenced more explicitly in Key Concepts and subheadings. The former themes of "scientific inquir( and "science, technology, and society" continue to be highlighted throughout the book, not as biological themes but as aspects of how science is done and the role of science in our lives.

Integration ofText and Illustrations We regard text and illustrations as equal in importance, and starting with the First Edition, have always developed them simultaneously. The Eighth Edition has a number of new and

improved figures, with the increased use of a more threedimensional art style where it can enhance understanding of biological structure. At the same time, we avoid excess detail, which can obscure the main point of the figure. We have also improved our popular "Exploring" Figures and have added more (see the list on p. xii). Each of these large figures is a learning unit that brings together a set of related illustrations and the text that describes them. The Exploring Figures enable students to access dozens of complex topics very efficiently. They are core chapter content, not to be confused with some textbooks' "boxes," which have content peripheral to the flow of a chapter. Modern biology is challenging enough without diverting students' attention from a chapter's conceptual storyline.

Telling the Story al the Righi level Whether in pictures or prose, we are committed to explaining biology at just the right level, and we've continued to use Neil's "quantum theory ofteaching biology~ as a touchstone. According to this idea, there are discrete levels at which a concept can be successfully explained, and a successful explanation must avoid getting "stuck bety,.·een levels." Of course, most seasoned instructors have independently recognized this issue, also known as the "too much-too little~ problem. The author team has drawn upon both scientific expertise and teaching experience to tell the story of biology at an appropriate level.

The Importance of Scientific Inquiry Another of our core values is our belief in the importance of introducing students to the scientific way of thinking. In both lecture hall and laboratory, the authors and many of our colleagues are experimenting with diverse approaches for involving students in scientific inquiry, the process by which questions about nature are posed and explored. Special features in the textbook and in inquiry-based supplements make this edition of BfOLOGY more effective than ever in helping instructors convey the process of science in their courses.

Modeling Inquiry by Example Every edition of BIOLOGY has traced the history of many research questions and scientific debates to help students appreciate not just "what we know;' but "how we know,~ and "what we do not yet know:' In BfOLOGY, Seventh Edition, we strengthened this aspect of the book by introducing "Inquir( Figures, which showcase examples of experiments and field studies in a format that is consistent throughout the book. Each of these inquiry cases begins with a research question, followed by sections describing the experiment, results, and conclusion. Complementing the Inquiry Figures are "Research Method" Figures, which walk students through the techniques and tools of modern biology. In the Eighth Edition, we have added many more Inquiry Figures; there is now at least one in every chapter and often more (see the list of Inquiry Figures on pp. xii-xiii). Each Preface

vii

Inquiry Figure now ends with a "What ift question that requires students to demonstrate their understanding of the experiment described. We have also expanded the usefulness of the Inquiry Figures in another important way: In response to feedback from many instructors, we now cite the journal article that is the source of the research, providing a gateway to the primary literature. And the full papers for nine of the Inquiry Figures are reprinted in Inquiry in Action: Interpreting Scientific Papers, by Ruth Buskirk and Christopher Gillen. This new supplement, which can be ordered with the book for no additional charge, provides background information on how to read scientific papers plus specific questions that guide students through the nine featured articles.

Learning Inquiry by Practice BIOLOGY, Eighth Edition, encourages students to practice thinking as scientists by tackling the "What if?" questions in the Concept Checks and Inquiry Figures (and occasional figure legends), as well as the "Scientific Inquiry" questions in the Chapter Review. Many of those in the Chapter Reviews ask students to analyze data or to design an experiment. The supplements for the Eighth Edition build on the textbook to provide diverse opportunities for students to practice scientific inquiry in more depth. In addition to Inquiry in Action: Interpreting Scientific Papers, these include new editions ofseveral other supplements that can be made available without cost. One is Biologicallnf[uiry: A Workbook ofInvestigative Cases, Second Edition, by Margaret Waterman and Ethel Stanley; another is Practicing Biology: A Student Workbook, Third Edition, by Jean Heitz and Cynthia Giffen. You can find out more about these and other student supplements, both print and electronic, on pages xx-xxiii.

The BIOLOGY Interviews: A Continuing Tradition Scientific inquiry is a social process catalyzed by communi~ cation among people who share a curiosity about nature. One of the many joys of authoring BIOLOGYis the privilege of interviewing some of the world's most influential biologists. Eight new interviews, one opening each unit of the textbook, introduce students to eight of the fascinating individuals who are driving progress in biology and connecting science to society. And in this edition, each unit of the text includes an Inquiry Figure based upon the research of the unit's interviewee; for example, see Inquiry Figure 2.2, on page 31. The interviewees for this edition are listed on page xi.

AVersatile Book Our book is intended to serve students as a textbook in their general biology course and also later as a useful tool for review and reference. BIOLOGY's breadth, depth, and versatile organization enable the book to meet these dual goals. Even by limiting our scope to a few Key Concepts per chapter, BIOLOGY spans more biological territory than most introductory viii

Preface

courses could or should attempt to cover. But given the great diversity of course syllabi, we have opted for a survey broad enough and deep enough to support each instructor's particular emphases. Students also seem to appreciate BIOLOGYs breadth and depth; in this era when students sell many of their textbooks back to the bookstore, more than 75% of students who have used BIOLOGY have kept it after their introductory course. In fact, we are delighted to receive mail from upper division students and graduate students, including medical students, expressing their appreciation for the long-term value of BIOLOGY as ageneral resource for their continuing education. Just as we recognize that few courses will cover all 56 chapters of the textbook, we also understand that there is no single correct sequence of topics for a general biology course. Though a biology textbook's table of contents must be linear, biology itself is more like a web of related concepts without a fixed starting point or a prescribed path. Diverse courses can navigate this network of concepts starting with molecules and cells, or with evolution and the diversity of organisms, or with the big-picture ideas of ecol· ogy. We have built BIOLOGY to be versatile enough to support these different syllabi. The eight units ofthe book are largely selfcontained, and, for most ofthe units, the chapters can be assigned in a different sequence ""ithout substantial loss ofcoherence. For example, instructors who integrate plant and animal physiology can merge chapters from Unit Six (Plant Form and FlUlction) and Unit Seven (Animal Form and Function) to fit their courses. AJ;, another option, instructors who begin their course with ecology and continue with this top-down approach can assign Unit Eight (Ecology) right after Chapter 1, which introduces the Unifying themes that provide students with a panoramic view of biology no matter what the topic order ofthe course syllabus.

Our Partnership with Instructors A core value underlying all our work as authors is our belief in the importance of our partnership with instructors. Our primary way of serving instructors, of course, is providing a textbook that serves their students well. In addition, Benjamin Cummings makes available a wealth of instructor resources, in both print and electronic form (see pp. xx-xxiii). However, our rela~ tionship with instructors is nota one-way street. In our continu~ ing efforts to improve the book and its supplements, we benefit tremendously from instructor feedback, not only in formal re~ views from hundreds ofscientists, but also via informal communication in person and byphone and e-mai1. Neil Campbell built a vast network ofcolleagues throughout the world, and my new coauthors and I are fully committed to continuing that tradition. The real test of any textbook is how well it helps instructors teach and students learn. We welcome comments from the students and professors who use BIOLOGY. Please address your suggestions to me: Jane Reece, Pearson Benjamin Cummings 1301 Sansome Street, San Francisco, CA 94111 E-mail address: [email protected]

This section provides just a few highlights of new content and organizational improvements in BIOLOGY, Eighth Edition. UNIT ONE

The Chemistry of Life

New examples make basic chemistry more engaging for students, including an explanation of why steam can burn your skin in Chapter 3, the structures of the enantiomeric medications ibuprofen and albuterol in Chapter 4, and information on trans fats in Chapter 5. A new Inquiry Figure in Chapter 3 relates acidity to the emerging global problem of ocean acidification and its effects on coral reefs. The new Inquiry Figure in Chapter 5 shows Roger Kornberg's 3-D model of the RNA polymerase-DNA-RNA complex, work for which he won the 2006 Nobel Prize in Chemistry. UNIT TWO

The Cell

The judicious addition of recent research includes updated coverage of the sensory roles ofprimary cilia in Chapter 6, new developments regarding the membrane model in Chapter 7, and Paul Nurse's Nobel Prize-winning work on the cell cycle in Chapter 12. Chapter 11 now ends with a section on apoptosis, formerly in Chapter 21. New Inquiry Figures in this unit describe research on the role of microtubules in orienting cellulose in cell walls (Chapter 6), allosteric regulators of enzymes (Chapter 8), ATP synthase (Chapter 9), yeast cell signaling (Chapter ll), and a cell cycle regulator (Chapter 12). UNIT THREE

Genetics

Chapter 14 now includes "Tips for Genetics Problems.~ In Chapter 15, sex linkage is discussed directly after the discussion of the white-eye trait in Morgan's fruit flies. Chapter 16 covers replication of the bacterial chromosome and the structure of the eukaryotic chromosome (including a new Exploring Figure), formerly in Chapters 18 and 19, respectively. We have reorganized Chapters 18-21 with the dual aims of telling a more coherent story and facilitating instructors' coverage of molecular genetics. Regulation of gene expression for both bacteria and eukaryotes is now consolidated in Chapter 18, which also includes a concept section on the crucial role of small RNAs in eukaryotes. We have streamlined material on the genetic basis of development (formerly in Chapter 21), and included it in Chapter 18, where it provides the ultimate example of gene regulation. Chapter 18 ends with a section on the molecular basis of cancer (previously in Chapter 19), to demonstrate what happens when gene regu-

lation goes awry. Material on bacterial genetics in Seventh Edition Chapter 18 has been moved to other chapters within the genetics unit and to Chapter 27 on prokaryotes. Chapter 19 now covers only viruses (from Seventh Edition Chapter 18), giving this chapter the flexibility to be assigned at any point in the course. Chapter 20 continues to cover biotechnology, but genome sequencing and analysis have been moved to Chapter 21. Cloning and stem cell production are now in Chapter 20. Newly explained techniques include the screening of an arrayed library, BAC clones, Northern blotting, RT-PCR, and in situ hybridization. The explosion of discoveries about genomes and their evolution led us to develop a chapter devoted to this subject, the new Chapter 21. This chapter consolidates new material with topics from Chapters 19-21 of the Seventh Edition. UNIT FOUR


Our revision emphasizes the centrality of evolution to biology and the breadth and depth of evidence for evolution. New examples and Inquiry Figures present data from field and laboratory studies and reveal how scientists study evolution. Chapter 22 discusses how evolution can be viewed as both a pattern and a process, and introduces three key observations about life that are explained by evolution: the match between organisms and their environments (adaptation); the shared characteristics (unity) oflife; and the diversity of life. This discussion serves as a conceptual anchor throughout Units Four and Five. Chapters 24 and 25 have been significantly reorganized. Chapter 24 is now more tightly focused on speciation, enabling better pacing of this highly conceptual material. A new concept section explores hybrid zones as naturallaboratories for studying speciation. Chapter 25 focuses on macroevolution, incorporating topics formerly in Chapters 24 and 26, such as the correlations between Earth's geologic and biological history. But the primary storyline concerns what we can learn from the fossil record about the evolutionary history of life. New text and figures explore how the rise and fall of dominant groups of organisms are linked to large-scale processes such as continental drift, mass extinctions, and adaptive radiations. Coverage of evo-devo has been expanded. Phylogenetic trees are introduced earlier, in a new section on "tree-thinking" in Chapter 22. This material supports students in interpreting diagrams before studying phylogenetics more fully in Chapter 26.

UNIT FIVE


A new Chapter 26, Phylogeny and the Tree of Life, introduces

the unit. Extending material formerly in Chapter 25, it describes how evolutionary trees are constructed and underscores their

role as tools for understanding relationships, rather than facts to be memorized. New sections address common misconceptions in interpreting trees and help motivate students with practical

applications. Chapter 27 has a new concept section on prokaryotic re-

production, mutation, and recombination (formerly in Chapter 18). This unifies the coverage of prokaryote biology and supports students in developing a fuller understanding of these microorganisms. Throughout Unit Five, along with updating the phyloge· nies of various groups of organisms-introducing, for exam· pie, the Usupergroup~ hypothesis of eukaryotic phylogeny (in Chapter 28) -we have found new opportunities to use the study of phylogeny as an opportunity to illustrate the iterative nature of the scientific process. We aim to help students stay focused on the big picture of why biologists study evolutionary relationships. Each chapter also now includes an Inquiry figure that models how researchers study organisms and their relationships. At the same time, in each chapter we highlight the key roles that various organisms play in the biosphere as well as their applied importance for humans. UNIT SIX


Revisions to this unit draw more attention to the experimental basis of our understanding of plant biology. New examples include recent progress toward identifying the flowering "hormone" (Chapter 39). Featured in new Inquiry Figures are experiments demonstrating, for example, that trichomes affect insect feeding (Chapter 35) and that informational molecules transported through the symplast affect plant de· velopment (Chapter 36). In Chapter 36, now titled Resource Acquisition and Transport in Vascular Plants, a new first concept section explores how architectural features of plants facilitate resource acquisition, helping students relate the transport of water and nutrients to what they learned in Chapter 35 about plant structure and growth. Another new concept section, on symplastic transport, discusses recent insights into changes in plasmodesmata shape and number and the transmission of electrical and molecular signals throughout the plant. This unit now has more examples of practical applica· tions of plant biotechnology. For instance, Chapter 37 dis· cusses how genetic modification has increased the resist· ance of some plants to aluminum toxicity and has improved the flood tolerance of rice crops. Chapter 38 elaborates on the principles of plant breeding and incorporates a new section on genetic engineering of biofuels. x

New to the Eighth Edition

UNIT SEVEN


An evolutionary perspective more strongly pervades this unit, underscoring how environment and physical laws shape adaptations across animal groups. Each chapter now includes at least one Inquiry Figure; together, these figures highlight the wide range of methodologies used to study animal physiology, including several experiments using molecular biology techniques students studied earlier in the book. Chapter 40 has been revised and reorganized to highlight functional relationships at all levels of organization in animal bodies; thermoregulation serves as an extended example throughout the chapter. Chapter 43, The Immune System, has been extensively revised. For instance, we now contrast recognition of pathogen class in innate immunity with antigenspecific recognition in adaptive immunity, helping overcome the common misconception that recognition is absent in innate immunity. We have divided the former nervous system chapter into m'o, enabling us to better pace difficult material and high· light dynamic current research by focusing first on cellular processes in Chapter 48, and then on nervous system or· ganization and function in Chapter 49. Chapter 50 rounds out the discussion of nervous system function by examining sensory and motor mechanisms. This sequence leads naturally into Chapter 51 on animal behavior (formerly in Unit Eight), which ties together aspects of genetics, natural selection, and physiology, and provides a bridge to the ecology unit.

UNIT EIGHT

Ecology

This unit, which now includes Chapters 52·56, incorporates many new examples that demonstrate a range of methods and scales ofstudy. For example, a new figure in Chapter 52 describes a large·scale field experiment in which researchers manipulated precipitation levels in forest plots, while new Research Method figures describe determining population size using the mark-recapture method (Chapter 53), using molecular tools to measure diversity of soil microorganisms (Chapter 54), and determining primary production with satellite data (Chapter 55). By building on earlier units, we hope to demonstrate how ecology represents a fitting capstone to the book. We provide more microbial examples and more aquatic ones, from diverse locations around the globe. For instance, Chapter 52 now discusses the importance of salinity in determining the distribution ofaquatic organisms, and Chapter 54's coverage of the intermediate disturbance hypothesis includes a new figure on a quantitative test of the hypothesis in New Zealand streams. The unit highlights the great relevance of ecology to society and to students' lives. A new concept section in Chapter 54, for example, discusses how community ecology helps us understand pathogen life cycles and control disease.

UNIT ONE

UNIT fiVE

The Chemistry of life


Deborah M. Gordon Stanford University

Sean B. Carroll University of \Visconsin-Madison Interview 534 Inquiry Figure 684

Interview 28 Inquiry Figure 31

UNIT TWO

UNIT SIX

The Cell


Paul Nurse

Patricia Zambryski

Rockefeller University

University of California, Berkeley


';f~( 1'1 • , '

~~, "


UNIT THREE

UNIT SEVEN

Genetics


Terry L. , Orr-Weaver Massachusetts Institute of Technology '


Masashi Vanagisawa University of Texas Southwestern Medical Center Interview 850 Inquiry Figure 908

UNIT fOUR

UNIT EIGHT


Ecology

Scott V. Edwards

Diana H. Wall

Harvard University

Colorado State University



,;

Exploring Figures 1.4 I...ewls of Biological Orpnization 4 Some Biologically Important Chemical Groups 64 Levels of Protein Structure 82

4.10 5.21 6.9 6.32 7.20

AnimalandPl.antCells 100 Intercellular Junctions in Animal TISSUes 121 Endocytosis in Animal Cells 139

11.7 Membrane Receptors 211 12.6 The Mitotic Division ofan Animal Cell 232 13.8 The Meiotic Division of an Animal Cell 254 16.21 Chromatin Packing in a Eukaryotic Chromosome 320

24.4 25.6 27.18 28.3 29.5 29.9 29.15 30.5 ]0.13 31.11 33.3 33.37 34.35 35.10 37.14 38.4

38.1' 40.5 41.6 42.5 46.12 50.8 50.29 52.2 52.10 52.18 52.21 55.14 56.23

Reproductive Barriers 490 The Origin ofMammals Sf3 Major Groups ofBactcria 568 Protistan Diversity 578 Derived Traits of Land Plants 602 Bryophyte Diversity 608 SeedlessVasruIar P\ant Diversity 6/4 Gymnosperm ~ty 612 Angiosperm Diversity 630 Fungal Dinnity 642 Invertebrate DiversIty 667 Insect Diversity 690 Mammalian Diversity 724 Examples of Differentiated Plant Cells 744 Unusual Nutritional Adaptations in Plants 798 Flower Pollination 804Fruit and Seed Dispersal 8/1 Structure and Function in Animal TIssues 856 Four Main Feeding Mechanisms of Animals 881 Double Circulation in Vertebrates 902 HumanGametogenesis /008 The Structure ofthe Human Ear 1093 The Regulation ofSkelet.d Muscle Contrdction /109 The Scope of Ecological Research 1149 Global Oimate Patterns JJ~ Aquatic Biomes 1162 Terrestrial Biomes 1168 NutrientC}'des 1232 Restoration Ecology \,(forldwide 1262

Inquiry Figures

6.29 What role do microtubules pby in orienting deposition of cellulose in ceII ....'alIs? 119 7.6 Do membrane proteins move? 128 8.21 Are there allosteric inhibitors ofcaspase enzymes? 158 "9.15 Is the rotation of the internal rod in ATP synthase responsible for ATP synthesis? 174 10.9 Which wavelengths of light are most effective in driving photosynthesis? 191 11.16 Howdo signals induce directional cell growth in yeast? 220 12.8 At which end do kinetochore mkrotubuJes shorten during anaphase? 235 12.13 Do molecular signals in the cytoplasm regulate the cell cycle? 238 12.16 How does the activity of a protein kinase essential for mitosis vary during the cell cycle? 240 13.10 \,('hat prevents the separation of sister chromatids at anaphase I of meiosis? 257 14.3 \''el"Y' fossil ,.\ evidence tnat 1,1" onCe th''''''ll w e", ,t now ba",'Y nISI>. Fossil, ,e""al that 50;) million years ago, the OCean " ..Ie" .urrounding Antarctica we,e warm and teeming with tropical invertebrates. Later, the continent was cowred in forests (or hundreds of millions of years. At various times, a wide range of animals stal~ed through these forests, induding 3-metertall predatory "terror Nrds" and giant dinosaurs such as the mracious CryoIopIwsaurw (fig""" 25.1), a 7-meter-long relative of TyrmJllAA:iurw rex. Fossils discm-e-red in other parts of the "...oriod tell a similar, i( not quit. as ,ml'rising. stoTy. Past organisms were '""'1' different from

V

Each Key Concept serves as ••.• the heading for a major

section of the chapter.

......... ,

,

,

When you finish reading a concept section, check your ~ understanding using the Concept Check questions at the end of the section. If you can answer them (see Appendix A to check your work), you're ready to move on.

Each set of Concept Check questions builds in difficulty, ending ~ with a "What iff" question that asks you to apply what you've learned. Work through these questions on your own or in a study group-they're good practice for the kinds of questions you might be asked on an exam.

,

.

~

biochemical

r~:~~~;i:n~5~:early Earth made the origin of life possible

Theearliest evidence of life on Earth romes from fo..ilso( microorganisms that are about 3.5 billion yea" old, But when .nd how did the first living cells appear? Observations and e~periments in chemistry, geology, and physic, have led sdentists to propose one scenario that we'll examine here, They hypothesize that chemical and physical processes on early Earth, aided by the emerging force o(

53.1 I. One species offorest bird Is highly territorial. while a Sffond lives in flocks. Predict each spedes' likely pattern of dispersion, and e~plain. 2. • II \ Ii. I'ach (emale of a particular fish spedes produces millions of eggs per year. Draw and label the most likely survivorship curve for this spedes, and explain rour choice. 3. « ii' illi_ As nOled in Figure 53.2, an impure"'l assumption of the mark-recapture method is that marked individuals have the ",me probabilityofbeing recaptured as unmarked individuals. Describe a sirnation wl>ere this assumption might not be valid, and explai" how the estimate o(population size would be affl' "",... """ of about 0.1 .'

o

In~.

IMIde.

OutsKle,

OutSIde,

unprotected protected unprotectl'd protectl'd (~-.apIlngs, InSIde and ooBldl> deW\ ~ s CONCLUSION

Some Inquiry Figures invite you to read and analyze the original research paper in its complete form. You can find the journal article, along with a worksheet guiding you through it, in the separate book Inquiry in Action: Interpreting Scientific Papers (ISBN 978-6-321-53659-4 I 0-]21-53659-2)." After exploring the featured experiment,. test your analytical skills

answering the "\Vhdt

by"-

in" question. Suggested answers are provided

AnlSdthe~~sdtl.Im¥n

k. nonhost lIftS by IIlJ(!C1ng tile ~ WIth fornuo;: aod. thus auung ho5pI~ h.abllillS (dl'vd's qardPrK) for the Ml1 colony SOUllCf.

W (~M-J Gtott,onIlO w_~.

.~~- ~

b¥..... _.J1"'1S-t'l6~

~;:;~~.~.~ RNd and ~ the ongmaI Pg w'. or to

~

1"''' tola

r-----------

~

lO"9 II ,,",'

Arnphlll'M< ~

,-

r--------

Mam"",~

.-'

!nord,

,

~

and$l13<e$

,---A o.l{h """k rep",ent(1bnetodlOro m~!Otub~

I

~

to: ~

Crocod~",

iJIwtI'

H.IwItro rolwrd'iorbOnl,

1 " r.,Vu.-. 43.7 I'M human Iymph.tic 'VSt.m. The 'ympo,t, 'Y1lem cons awe"'"

xvi

To the Student: How to Use This Book

Palents Normal

Normal

x

Aa

Aa

spermY

Eggs

o

o

0 A,

AA

Normal (carrier)

Normal

A,

""

Normal (carner)

Albino

... Figure 14.16 Albinism: Oil recessive trait. One of the two siSlers shOlNn here has normal coloration; the other IS albino Most recessive homolY9oles ale born to palents who are carriers of the disorder but themsel~es ha~e a normal phenotype. the case shown in the Punnett square

What i5 the probability that the sister with normal coloration i5 a D carrier of the albinism allele?

Figure Legend questions prompt you ... to delve into a figure's content to make sure you understand it.

, By integrating text and visuals, Exploring Figures help you learn more efficiently.

eproductive "nien ...

w __ "

_

-.- ...... ...- .......

___w_ . .. ... -....._,....,.,f .......... -_ ....... --_ --_ .... ..... .-_-"'-" ,-""" '_. . _d_ ,,_ ...... ... --....... """'-,..,.......-. _.,--..... ---. _ ..............-----. . _-_. - _. ---...- -_ ----"--."""""" --""_ _.......... _ ..... ---or ...... .........,....

....,.""-

...

......

;-

........

-..,

-~

_<J ......"""'"

' _ ...""'00;....... _

omr~"'

""'''~'''''''''''''''''''''' _ _ "i

"'-' .....-'

","""",,,""""'"

"-""""""'" _~""_rt>nc~ p;.rti.lly or tot.lly ,hift< ~1 o,idi.ed. During cellul .. respi"'ion. g1uco.. (c.H"O,j isoxidiled to CO,. .nd 0, i> r"ducod to H,O. EI"ctrOn> 100" po..nt;.1 .norgy during their tran,fer from orgonic compound< to "-'l'llen, Electron, fTom organic compound. ar~ u,u.lly p.....d rim to NAO+, r~dudng it to NAOH, NADH p.".. the electron. to'n electron t"n'port eh.in. which conducts them to 0, in .n~l}\y.r.I ••s;ng ...",. Th. "".rgy r.I••sei••nd th" citrIC acid cycl. oupply "I",tron> lvi. NADH or FAOH:J to the dtttron transport chatn. whieh driv~. o,id"iv~ pho,phoryl.tion. O.id.tive phosphor)i"ion gen.....t.. ATP. : •••

~"t..._

~

M.,T....

c1 drive,

ATP symh"';. by

ATP .ynllu.., during@
•. the oxidation of gluco:«' .nd other org;>nic compound,. b. the flo,,- of electron' do".., th. d""tron Iron,pan cholin. c. the .ffinily of oxygen for dectron' d. the H+ concentrntion grndientacrou the inner mitochondri.1 m<mbrnne, e. thet"n,f... of phosph"e to AOP.

II.

II:l::!::tZI

T""", t..... upt>l. of W,"", ,nd mi ......ol, from root hairs to the """"', in. root. foll...ing. ,yrnpla>tie rout. and .n .popl'>I": roote_ L.bd t..... rout...

3. Which rneuboIie pa.thway a common to both fennentabon

.1Id crllular respiration of. gll.lCOSe molecult? ._ the dtric .cid qde b. the dectron tnn,port ch.in c. glyeoly'i' d.•ynth..i. of .cetyl CoA from pyruvate e. reduction of PJ""v".to I"",.te 4. In mitochondria. ""erg""ie red"" re>ctioll$ •.•re the SOIlr", of energy driving prohryotic ATP

.ynthe,i. b.•re directly coupled to .ubot"",,·Ieve1 pho,phoryl.tion c. provide the energy tMt embli,he, the proton grodient. d. reduce c.rbon atom, to carbon dioxide. e.•re rouplend~. W1utehinery by making the lipid bH.j'.r "fth. inn" mitochondri.1 me.,brone ko,kyto H+ £.xplain how tIli' c>use< ",-eight loss,

The essay questions in the Chapter Review give you practice writing about biological topics and making connections between the content of different chapters, as you may be asked to do in class discussions or on exams.

SCIENCE, TECHNOLOGY, AND SOCIETY 13. N..rly all hum.n socioti.. "'" f.nnent:ltion to produce ,lcohoIic drink, b<et-.nd wi"". The """tice d,leS b>Iotkotl ,., A ........b""I'oIt..... Ipll>< e-, r.plor< r.n.-.. ..... ""'""';,,' m.·B... I«....

To the Student: How to Use This Book

xix

Supplements for the Student MasteringBiology ™ Assignments

MasteringBIOL0GY www.masteringbio.(om . . . , NEW! MasteringBiology'· offers two valuable learning systems: 1. The Study Area 2. MastcringRiology'" Assignments

MastcringBiology" offers assignable in~depth Tutorials, Chapter Quizzes with ten questions per chapter, and thousands of additional Multiple Choice Test Bank Questions.

Th, MasteringBiologyTM Tutorials guide students through difficult concepts with a series of interactive questions that build on each other.

Study Area Media assets in the Study Area include BioFlix, MP3 Tutors, Discovery Videos, Cell Biology Videos, Activities, Investiga~ tions, Graphlt!, Quizzes, Practice Tests, Cumulative Test,

Word Roots, Key Terms, Flashcards, Audio Glossary, Art, an

---,::.

cBook, and the CampbelllReece Interviews. In the Study Area, a

convenient Chapter Guide correlates the student media to the • Key Concepts of each textbook chapter.

.

----=~

. .

_._---_.... .... __ ._-

~~

.. _ " _

-.

--=;:;;::

If a student answers incorrectly, the student is given specific feedback that addresses the student's misconceptions.

_~--

-'-=-,r,..==

BioF/(1t

The student ve~ions of BioFlix offer engaging 3-D anima-

tions plus labeled

slide shows, basic tutorials, study sheets, and quizzes.

Discovery Channel lM Videos bring biology to life.

w;C:l:ouerll C .....

NN~L

• MP3 Tutors can be played from the website or downloaded onto personal MP3 players for studying anytime. • NEW! Audio pronunciations are included for every term in the Audio Glossary, Key Terms, and Flashcards.

_

...._----~-~~.....--.

Students can view hints for background information, including animations, and additional assistance.

~'

..

e- _ _

_______ M

..~~"-I

NEW!

_ __ .. ... _._....

•

"""

A poweriul Gradebook automatically records student scores. Shades of red instantly reveal ~ students in trouble or ~.~.-.-.~.~ areas of difficulty for the class. Instructors can assign questions to encourage students to read the chapter before class and then adjust their lectures to address student misconceptions. Grades can be exported to another course management system or ExcelT M, or grades can be imported into the MasteringBiology Gradebook.

. --_ ..•................... . --_..... ..•......... , , . -------_..•..•..•..•....•. , , . . --

~

.

For more information about media for students, see the card inserted at the beginning of this book and the Access Kit for MastcringBiology'·, which is included with every new copy of BIOLOGY, Eighth Edition.

NEW! Inquiry in Action: Interpreting Scientific Papers

1978-0-321-53659-4/0-321-53659-21 Ruth Buskirk, University of Texas, Austin, and Christopher M, Gillen, Kenyan College Selected Inquiry Figures in the Eighth Edition direct students to read and analyze the complete original research paper. In this new supplement, those articles are reprinted and accompanied by questions that help students analyze the article.

NEW! Into the Jungle: Great Adventures in the Search for Evolution

(978-0-321-55671-4/0-321-55671-21 Sean B, Carroll, University ofWisconsin, Madison This book of nine short tales vividly depicts key discoveries in evolutionary biology and the excitement of the scientific process.

NEW! Get Ready for Biology

Student Study Guide for Biology, Eighth Edition

(978-0-321-50057-1/0-321-50057-11

1978-0-321-50156-1/0-321-50156-XI Martha R. Taylor, Cornell University

This engaging workbook helps students brush up on important math and study skills and get up to speed on biological terminology and the basics of chemistry and cell biology.

This popular study guide helps students extract key ideas from the textbook and organize their knowledge of biology. Exercises include concept maps for each chapter, chapter summaries, word roots, chapter tests, and a variety of interactive questions in various formats.

Practicing Biology: A Student Workbook, Third Edition 1978-0-321-52293-1/0-321-52293-1 ) lean Heitz and Cynthia Giffen, University ofWisconsin, Madison This workbook offers a variety of activities to suit different learning styles. Activities such as modeling and mapping allow students to visualize and understand biological processes. New activities focus on basic skills, such as reading and developing graphs.

A Short Guide to Writing About Biology, Sixth Edition (978-0-321-51716-6/0-321-51716-41 Ian A. Pechenik, Tufts University This best-selling writing guide teaches students to think as biologists and to express ideas clearly and concisely through their writing.

An Introduction to Chemistry for Biology Students, Ninth Edition (978-0-8053-9571-6/0-8053-9571-7) George I. Sackheim, University ofIllinois, Chicago This textlworkbook helps students review and master all the basic facts, concepts, and terminology of chemistry that they need for their life science course.

Biological Inquiry: AWorkbook of Investigative Cases, Second Edition (978-0-321-51320-5/0-321-51320-71 Margaret Waterman, Southeast Missouri State University, and Ethel Stanley, Beloit College and BioQUEST Curriculum Consortium This workbook offers ten investigative cases, including new cases on avian influenza and hedgehog developmental pathways. Students pose questions, analyze data, think critically, examine the relationship between evidence and conclusions, construct hypotheses, investigate options, graph data, interpret results, and communicate scientific arguments. A student website is at www.masteringbio.com.

Study Card for Biology, Eighth Edition (978-0-321-49436-8/0-321-49436-9) This quick reference card provides an overview of the entire field of biology and helps students quickly review before a test.

Kaplan MCA~/GRf!l Biology Test Preparation Guide for Biology, Eighth Edition

NEW! Pearson Tutor Services www.masteringbio.com Access to MasteringBiology'" includes complimentary access to highly interactive one-on-one biology coaching by qualified instructors seven nights per week during peak study hours. Students can "drop_in" for live online help, submit questions to an e-structor anytime, or pre-schedule a tutoring session with an e-structor. (For college students only.)

Special Topics in Biology Series (booklets) • • • •

Alzheimer's Disease (978-0-1318-3834-5/0-1318-3834-2) Biological Terrorism (978-0-8053-4868-2/0-8053-4868-9) Biology of Cancer (978-0-8053-4867-5/0-8053-4867-0) Emerging Infectious Diseases (978-0-8053-3955-01

0-8053-3955-8) • Gene Therapy (978-0-8053-3819-5/0-8053-3819-5) • Genetic Testimony: A Guide to Forensic DNA Profiling

(978-0-l3l4-2338-l/0-13l4-2338-XI

This exclusive supplement includes sample questions from the Kaplan test preparation guides with page references to Biology, Eighth Edition.

• HIVand AIDS (978-0-8053-3956-7/0-8053-3956-6) • Mad Cows and Cannibals: A Guide to the Transmissible Spongiform Encephalopathies (978-0-1314-2339-81 0-1314-2339-8) • Stem Cells and Cloning (978-0-8053-4864-410-8053-

Spanish Glossary (978-0-321-49434-4/0-321-49434-2) Laura P. Zanello, University ofCalifornia, Riverside

• Understanding the Human Genome Project, Second Edition (978-0-8053-4877-4/0-8053-4877-8)

1978-0-321-53463-7/0-321-53463-81

4864-6)

Supplements

xxi

Supplements for the Instructor Instructor Resource CD/DVD.ROM Set (978-0-321-52292-4/0-321-52292-31 The instructor media for Campbell/Reece Biology. Eighth Edition, is combined into one chapter·by-chapter resource along with a Quick Reference Guide. DVDs provide convenient one-stop access to all the visual media for each chapter. Assets are now organized by chapter folders, making it easy to access files. The Test Bank CD-ROM includes test bank questions in Word and TestGen. Assets on the DVDs include:

JPEG Images include all the art, photos, and tables from the book with and without labels, selected art layered for step-bystep presentation, and hundreds of extra photos in JPEG format, for a total of more than 1600 photos.

....."',

_ _ .._01%" _ _ -

-_ -." _o

0.....,

•

lofflJr

NEW!

BioFlix'w 3·0 Anima-

tions invigorate lectures with movie-

..

N

"0""",

,.

.~

clude: Tour of an Ani-

- - ---. ,.. -

mal (ell, Tour of a

Plant Cell, Cellular

Respiration, Photosynthesis, Mitosis, Meiosis, Protein Synthesis,

Activities are also included.

J.J

.........

,,,,-

>0

I~

•

__

"

I.

~

""'-

"

M

.",

-

quality 3-D

animations. Topics in-

Water Transport in Plants, How Neurons Work, and Muscle Contraction. An additional 123 Animations based on student

".

Cc..-.,,-,

H",*-

..

MasteringBIOL0GY www.masteringbio.com .....,

NEW! 29 Discovery Channel'· Videos bring biology to life and show students the process of science. Plus, 65 new Cell Biology Videos have been added to the video collection, for a total of 182 videos.

-e-C_.._--_.--

PowerPoint" label Edit Images include all the art, photos, and tables from the book ~( oj embedded in PowerPointe plus Step Edit Art broken down into steps. These PowerPoint" files are on the DVDs plus the Quick Start CD·ROM for easy access. PowerPoint" Lecture Presentations include all of the above plus lecture outlines and links to animations and selected videos. In all PowerPoint files, the text and labels can be edited directly in PowerPoint" and have been enlarged for optimal viewing in large lecture halls. Multiple versions of figures are provided to choose from.

--

xxii

Supplements

NEW! The MasteringBiology" For Instructors area includes all the media from the Instructor Resource DVDs: • PowerPoint'Label Edit Images • PowerPoint'Lecture Presentations • Extra Photos Upegs) plus captions • Labeled Images (jpegs) • Unlabeled Images (jpegs) • BioFlix- Animations • Animations • Discovery Channel~ Videos plus scripts • Videos plus descriptions

Additional Online Resources: • • • •

• • • •

PowerPoint' Active Lecture Questions Lecture Outlines Student Misconceptions with Pre-Tests and Post-Tests Quick Reference Guide Practicing Biology Instructor Guide Inquiry in Action Instructor Guide Answers to selected textbook essay questions Lab Media for Instructors

Many instructor assets are also available at the Instructor Resource Center for Biology, Eighth Edition, at www.pearsonhighered.com.

Transparency Acetates 1978-0-321-52328-0/0-321-52328-81 This transparency package provides all the illustrations and tables from the text, many of which incorporate photos. In addition, key figures are broken down into steps.

Electronic Test Bank Printed Test Bank (978-0-321-49431-3/0-321-49431-8) More than 4,500 test questions are available in print, TestGen", Microsoft" Word, and from within CourseCompass, Blackboard, and WebCT Course Management Systems. Test Bank questions can also be assigned through MasteringBiology~. The questions have been refined through class testing, and over 30% of the questions are new for the Eighth Edition, including three new question types that encourage critical thinking: interpreting art questions, interpreting graphs and data questions focused on quantitative skills, and scenario-based questions.

Instructor Guide for Biological Inquiry: AWorkbook of Investigative Cases, Second Edition 1978-0-321-49435-1/0-321-49435-0) Margaret Waterman, Southeast Missouri State University, and Ethel Stanley, Beloit College and BioQUEST Curriculum Consortium This Instructor Guide provides insightful coaching for instructors on how to teach using a case-based problem-solving approach, as well as suggested answers.

Course Management Systems Test Bank questions, quizzes, and selected content from the Study Area ofMasteringBiology~ are available in these popular course management systems: • CourseCompass~ (www.aw-bc.com/coursecompass) • Blackboard (www.aw-bc.com/blackboard) • WcbCT (www.aw-bc.com/webct)

Supplements for the Lab NEW! lab Media at www.masteringbio.com A new section in the Study Area of MasteringBiology~ brings together all the media assets that can be used to teach scientific inquiry, including Investigating Biology Lab Data Tables in Excel", Biology Labs On-Line, Investigations, Graph1t!, and LabBench. In the For Instructors area, the Lab Media section includes Investigating Biology Lab Preparation Guide, Answers to Investigations, GraphIt! Instructor Versions, Answers to the LabBench Quizzes, and the Bio-Explorations Instructor Guide.

Investigating Biology, Sixth Edition (978-0-321-53660-0/0-321-53660-6) Annotated Instructor Edition for Investigating Biology 1978-0-321-54194-9/0-321-54194-41 Preparation Guide for Investigating Biology 1978-0-321-54166-6/0-321-54166-91 Judith Giles Morgan, Emory University, and M. Eloise Brown Carter, Oxford College ofEmory University This best-selling laboratory manual encourages students to participate in the process of science and develop creative and critical reasoning skills by posing hypotheses, making predictions, conducting open-ended experiments, collecting data, and applying results to new problems. The Sixth Edition includes a new Bioinformatics Lab and features references to online resources available at www.masteringbio.com, including Lab Data Tables in Excel" for recording data. The Annotated Instructor Edition provides teaching information and marginal notes. A Preparation Guide is also available for instructors in print and online.

New Designs for Bio-Explorations 1978-0-8053-7229-8/0-8053-7229-6) Instructor Guide for Bio-Explorations 1978-0-8053-7228-1/0-8053-7228-8) Janet Lanza, University ofArkansas at Little Rock Eight inquiry-based laboratory exercises offer students creative control over the projects they undertake. Each lab exercise provides students with background information and materials that can be used in the lab projects. The Instructor Guide is provided in the For Instructors area of www.masteringbio.com under Lab Media.

Symbiosis: The Benjamin Cummings Custom laboratory Program for Biological Sciences www.pearsoncustom.com/database/symbiosis/bc.html With Symbiosis, instructors can build a customized lab manual that includes selections from the Benjamin Cummings database along with their own original material.

Biology labs On-line www.biologylabsonline.com Twelve on-line labs enable students to expand their scientific horizons beyond the traditional wet lab setting and perform potentially dangerous, lengthy, or expensive experiments in an electronic environment. Each experiment can be repeated as often as necessary, employing a unique set of variables each time. The labs are available for purchase individually or in a 12-pack with the printed Student Lab Manual (978-0-80537017-l/0-8053-70l7-X). An Instructor Lab Manual is also available (978-0-8053-7018-8/0-8053-70 18-8). Supplements

xxiii

Eighth Edition Reviewers Dominique Adriaens. Ghent University George R. Aliaga, Tarrant County College J. Davkl Archibald. San Diego Stale University David M. Annstrong, Unn-ersJty ofCoIOnldo-Boulder Angela S. Aspbury, Texas State Univen.it)' Ellen Baker, Santa Monica College Rebecca A. Barto...., Western Kentucky University Tim Beilgley, Salt Lake Community College Kenneth Birnbaum. New Yon: University Mic::haeI W Black. California PoI)teehnic Stale UnMnity, San luis Obispo Edward Blumenthal, Marquette Universit)' Jason E. Bond, East Carolina University Cornelius Bondzi. Hampton University Oliver Bossdorf. State University of New York, Stony Book Edward Braun, Iowa Stale University Chad Brommer, Emory Unh-ersiry Judith L. Bronstein, University of Arirona Robb T. Brumfield, Louisiana State University Richard C. Brusa, Universit}' of Ari2.ona.. Arizona·Sonora Desert Museum Jorge Busciglio, University ofCalifornia, Irvine Guy A. Caldwell, University of Alabama lane Caldwell, West Virginia Universit)' Kim A. Caldwell, University of Alabama R. Andrew Cameron, California Institute ofTechnology W. Zacheus Cande, University of California, Berkeley Frank R. Cantelmo, St. lohn's University Jeffrey Carmichael, University of North Dakota Laura L. Carruth, Georgia State University ). Aaron Cassill, University of Texas at San Antonio P. Bryant Chase, Florida State University lung H. Choi, Georgia Institute ofTechnologr Geoffrey Church, Fairfield University Patricia). Clark, Indiana Univenity-Purdue University, Indianapolis Janice J. Clymer, San Diego Mesa College Jan Colpaert, Hasselt University Jay Comeaux, McNeese State University Gregory Copenhaver, University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill Karen Curto, University of Pittsburgh Marymegan Daly, The Ohio State University Cynthia Dassler, The Ohio State University Michael A. Davis, Central Connecticut State University Maria E. de Bellard, California State University, Northridge Patricia A. DeLeon, University of Delaware Charles F. Delwiche, University of Maryland \Villiam L. Dentler, University of Kansas Jean DeSaix, University of North Carolina Michael Dini, Texas Tech Unh'ersity Douglas J. Eernisse, California State University, Fullerton Brad Elder, Doane College Michelle 8ekonich, University of Nevada, Las Vegas Mary Ellard-Ivey, Pacific Lutheran University Johnny EI.Rady, Universit)" of South Florida John A. Endler, Universil)' of California, Santa Barbara Frederick B. E.ss.ig, University of South Florida Olukemi Fada)"omi, Ferris State Uni\'ersity Ellen H. Fanning, Vanderbilt University Lewis Fcldl'l'l.an, University of California, Berkeley

:o:iv

Rebecca Ferrell, Metropolitan Slate College of Denver Jonathan S. Fisher, SI. Louis University Kirk Fitzhugh, Natural History Museum of Los Angeles County Norma Fowler, University of Texas, Austin Robert Gilbert Fowler, San lose State University Jed Fuhrman, Univenity of Southern California Zofia E. Gagnon, Marisl College Michael Gaines, Univenity of Miami Stephen Gammie, Uni\'ersil)' of WISConsin, Madison Andrea Gargas, University ofWlSCOnsin, Madison Lauren Gamer, California Polytechnic State Unr.~rsil)·. San Luis Obispo Simon Gilroy, Pennsylvania Stlte Universil)' Alan D. Gishlick, Gustavus Adolphus College Jessica Gleffe, University of California, Irvine Trim Glidewell, Marist School Elizabeth Godrick, Boston University Ken Halanych, Auburn Uni\'ersity E. William liamilton, Washington and Let> University William F. Hanna, Massasoit Community College Laszlo Hanzely, Northern 1I1inois University lisa Harper, University ofCalifornia, Berleley Bernard A. Hauser, University of Florida Evan B. Hazard, Bemidji State University (Emeritus) S. Blair Hedges, Penns)1vania State University Brian Hedlund, University of Nevada, Las Vegas Jean Heitz, Universil)' of\Visoonsin, Madison Susan Hengeveld, Indiana Uni\'ersity Albert Herrera, University of Southern California Kenneth Hillers, California I'oI)technic State Uni\'ersity, San luis Obispo A. Scolt Holaday, Texas Tech Universil)' N. Michele Holbrook, Harvard University Alan R. Holyoak, Brigham Young University,ldaho Sandra M. Horikami, Daytona Beach Community College Becky Houck, University of Portland Daniel J. I·toward, New Mexico State Universitr Cristin Hulslander, University of Oregon Linda L. Hyde, Gordon College Jeffrey Ihara, Mira Costa College Lee Johnson, The Ohio State University Chad Jordan, North Carolina State University Walter S. Judd, University of Florida Thomas W. Jurik, Iowa State University Caroline M. Kane, University of California, Berkeley Jennifer Katcher, Pima Community College Laura A. Katz, Smith College Maureen Kearney, Field Museum of Natural History Patrick Keeling, University of British Columbia Elizabeth A. Kellogg, University of Missouri·St. Louis Chris Kennedy, Simon Fraser University Rebecca T. Kimball, University of Rorida Jennifer Knight, University of Colorado Margareta KraDbe, Uppsala University Anselm Kratoch....il, Universitit Osnabrock Deborah M. Kristan, California Stale Universil)' al San Marcos \Villiam Kroll, Loyola University, Chicago Justin P. Kumar, Indiana University Marc-Andri lachance, Universil)' of Westem Ontario Mohamed Lakrim, Kingsborough Communil)' College John latto, Universil)' of California, Santa Barbara. O3e.....oo Let>, Ohio University

Michael R. Leonardo, COl' College John I. Lepri, University of North Carolina at Greensboro Graeme Lindbeck, Valencia Community College Diana Lipscomb, George Washington University Christopher Little, The Universit}" ofTexas-l'an American Kevin D. Livingstone, Trinit}" Universit}" Andrea Uoyd, Middlebury College Christopher A. Loretz, State University of New York at Buffalo Douglas B. Luckie, Michigan State University Christine R. Maher, University of Southern Maine Keith Malmos, Valencia Communit}" College - East Campus Cindy Malone, California State Universit}", Northridge Carol Mapes, Kutztown University of Pennsylvania Kathleen A. Marrs, Indiana University-Purdue University, Indianapolis Diane L. Marshall, University of New Mexico Andrew McCubbin, Washington State University Lisa Marie Meffert, Rice University Scott Meissner, Cornell University John Merrill, Michigan State University Michael J. Misamore, Texas Christian University Alan Molumby, University of Illinois, Chicago loseph P. Montoya, Georgia Institute of Technology Janice Moore, Colorado State University Jeanette Mowery, Madison Area Technical College Tom Neils, Grand Rapids Community College Ray Neubauer, University of Texas, Austin lames Newcomb, New England College Anders Nilsson, University ofUmea Mohamed A. F. Noor, Duke University Shawn Nordell, St. Louis University Richard S. Norman, University of Michigan, Dearborn (Emeritus) Gretchen North, Occidental College Mark P. Oemke, Alma College Nathan O. Okia, Auburn University, Montgomery John Oross, University of California, Riverside Charissa Osborne, Butler University Thomas G. Owens, Cornell University Kevin Padian, University of California, Berkeley Anthony T. Paganini, Michigan State University Michael A. Palladino, Monmouth University Imara Y. Perera, North Carolina State University David S. Pilliod, California Polytechnic State University, San Luis Obispo J. Chris Pires, University of Missouri-Columbia Angela R. Porta, Kean University Daniel Potter, University of California, Davis Mary V. Price, University of California, Riverside Mitch Price, Pennsylvania State University Peter QUinby, University of Pittsburgh Robert H. Reaves, Glendale Community College Erin Rempala, San Diego Mesa College Eric Ribbens, Western Illinois University Christina Richards, New York University Loren Rieseberg, University of British Columbia Bruce B. Riley, Texas A&M University Laurel Roberts, University of Pittsburgh Mike Rosenzweig, Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State University Tyson Sacco, Cornell University Rowan F. Sage, University of Toronto Tammy Lynn Sage, UniversityofToronto Thomas R. Sawicki, Spartanburg Community College Inder Saxena, University of Texas, Austin Maynard H. Schaus, Virginia Wesleyan CoUege Renate Scheibe, University of OsnabrGck Mark Schlissel, University of California, Berkeley Christopher J. Schneider, Boston University Thomas W. Schoener, University of California, Davis Patricia M. Schulte, University of British Columbia Karen S. Schumaker, University of Arizona David I. Schwartz, Houston Community College

Robert W. Seagull, Hofstra University Duane Sears, University of California, Santa Barbara Joan Sharp, Simon Fraser University TImothy E. Shannon, Francis Marion University Richard M. Showman, University of South Carolina Rebecca Simmons, University of North Dakota Anne Simon, University of Maryland, College Park Robert Simons, University of California, Los Angeles Julio G. Soto, San lose State University John Stachowicz, University of California, Davis Gail A. Stewart, Camden County College Michael A. Sypes, Pennsylvania State University Emily Taylor, California Polytechnic State University, San Luis Obispo John W. Taylor, University of California, Berkeley William Thwaites, TIllamook Bay Community College Eric Toolson, University of New Mexico Paul Q. Trombley, Florida State University Nancy I. Trun, Duquesne University Claudia Uhde-Stone, California State University, East Bay Saba Valad khan, Case Western Reserve University School of Medicine Steven D. Verhey, Central Washington University Kathleen Verville, Washington College Sara Via, University of Maryland Leif Asbj0rn V0llestad, University of Oslo Linda Walters, University of Central Florida Nickolas M. Waser, University of California, Riverside Andrea Weeks, George Mason University Richard Wetts, University of California, Irvine Susan Whittemore, Keene State College Ernest H. Williams, Hamilton College Kathy Williams, San Diego State University Paul Wilson, California State University, Northridge Peter \Vimherger, University of Puget Sound Robert Winning, Eastern Michigan Univen;ity E. William Wischusen, Louisiana State University Vickie L. Wolfe, Marshall University Denise Woodward, Pennsylvania State University Sarah E. Wyatt, Ohio University Ramin Yadegari, University of Arizona Paul Yancey, Whitman College Gina M. Zainelli, Loyola University, Chicago Miriam Zolan, Indiana University

BioFlix Reviewers Mitch Albers, Minneapolis Community and Technical College Kirk Bartholomew, Sacred Heart University Gretchen Bernard, Moraine Valley Community College Peggy Brickman, University of Georgia UriI'I BUitrago-Suarez, Harper College Nancy Butler, Kutztown University of Pennsylvania Guy A. Caldwell, University of Alabama Kim A. Caldwell, University of Alabama Jose L. Egremy, Northwest Visla College Kurt I. Elliott, Northwest Vista College Gerald G. Farr, Texas State University Lewis Feldman, University of California, Berkeley Sandra Gibbons, Moraine Valley Community College Douglas A. Hamilton, Hartwick College W. Wyatt Hoback, University of Nebraska at Kearney Elizabeth Hodgson, York College of Pennsylvania Kelly Hogan, Universit}" of North Carolina at Chapel Hill Mary Rose Lamb, University of Puget Sound Cody Locke, University of Alabama Marvin Brandon Lowery, Sam Houston State University David Mirman, Mt. San Antonio College James Newcomb, New England College Reviewers

xxv

Thomas G. Owens, Cornell University Deb Pires, University of California, Los Angeles Mitch Price, Pennsylvania State University David A. Rintoul, Kansas State University Renee Rivas, University of Alabama Laurel Roberts, University of Pittsburgh Chris Romero, Front Range Community College Juliet Spencer, University of San Francisco Linda Brooke Stabler, Universit)' of Central Oklahoma Beth Stall, El Centro College Brian Stout, Northwest Vista College Diane S""eeney, Crystal Springs Uplands School Jamey Thompson, Hudson Valley Community College Paul Q, Trombley, Florida State University Robert S. Wallace, Iowa State University Susan \,('hittemore, Keene State College Miriam Zolan, Indiana Universit)· Michelle Zurawski, Moraine Valley Communit)' College

MasteringBiology Class-Testers and Reviewers Peter B, Berget, Carnegie Mellon University Michad W. Black, California Polytechnic State Universit)', San Luis Obispo Scott Bo",1ing, Auburn Universit)' Suzanne Butler, Miami Dade College Alejandro Calderon-Urrea, California State Universit)', Fresno Kim A. Caldwell, University of Alabama leffrey Carmichael, Uni\'ersity of North Dakota lung H. Choi, Georgia Institute ofTechnology Karen Curto, University of Pittsburgh Lydia Daniels, University of Pittsburgh Jill Feinstein, Richland Community College Donald Glassman, Des Moines Area Community College Joyce Gordon, University of British Columbia David Grise, Texas A&M University, Corpus Christi Douglas A. Hamilton, Hartwick College Mark Hens, Universit}' of North Carolina at Greensboro John C. Kay, lolani School Tracy Kickox, Universit)' of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign Mary Rose Lamb, University of Puget Sound Deb Maddalena, UniversityofVermont C. Smoot Major, University of South Alabama Nilo Marin, Broward Community College John Merrill, Michigan State University MeliS5a Michael, University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign Nanq Rice, Western Kentucky University Chris Romero, Front Range Community College, Larimer John Salerno, Kennesaw State University Brian Stout, Northwest Vista College Subnya Subramanian, Collin County Community College Elizabeth Willott, University of Arizona Lauren Yaich, Universit}' of Pittsburgh at Bradford

Reviewers of Previous Editions Kenneth Able (State Universit)' of New Yori:, Albany), Thomas Adams (Michigan State University), Martin Adamson (University of British Columbia), Shylaja Akkaraju (Bronx Community College of CUNY), John Akod: (Arizona State University), Richard Almon {State Uni\'ersit}' of New Yori:, Buffalo), Bonnie Amos (Angdo State University), Katherine Anderson (University ofCalifornia, BerkelC')'),

XX\;

Reviewers

Richard J, Andren (Montgomeq' County Community College), Estry Ang (Universit}' of Pittsburgh at Greensburg), Jeff Appling (Clemson University), J. David Archibald (San Diego State University), David Armstrong (University of Colorado at Boulder), Howard J. Arnott (University of Texas at Arlington), Mary Ashley (Universit)· of Illinois at Chicago), Robert Atherton (University of Wyoming), Karl Aufderheide (Texas A&M University), Leigh Auleb (San Francisco State University), P. Stephen Baenziger (University of Nebraska), Ellen Baker (Santa Monica College), Katherine Baker (Millersville University), William Barklow (Framingham State College). Susan Barman (Michigan State University), Steven Barnhart (Santa Rosa Junior College), Andrew Barton (University of Maine Farmington), Ron Basmajian (Merced College), David Bass (University of Central Oklahoma), Bonnie Baxter (Hobart & William Smith), Tim Beagley (Salt Lake Community College), Margaret E. Beard (College of the Holy Cross), Tom Bearry (Universit)· of British Columbia), Chris Beck (Emory University), Wayne Becker (Universit)' of WiSCOnsin, Madison), Patricia Bedinger (Colorado State University), Jane Beis....enger (University ofW)'Oming), Anne Bekoff{University of Colorado, Boulder), Marc Bekoff (University of Colorado, Boulder), Tania Beliz (College ofSan Mateo), Adrianne Bendich (Hoffman-La Roche, Inc.), Barbara Bentley (State University of New Yori:, Stony Brook), Dano.;n Berg (Universit)' of California, San Diego), Werner Bergen (Michigan State University), Gerald Bergstrom (Universit)' of Wisconsin, Milwaukee), Anna W. Berkovitz (Purdue University), Doroth)' Berner (Temple University), Annalisa Berta (San Diego State Uni\-ersity), Paulette Bierzychudek (Pomoll3 College). Charles Biggen; (Memphis State University). Robert Blanchard (University of New Hampshire), Andrew R. Blaustein (Oregon State Universit)'), Judy B1uemer (Morton College). Robert Blystone (Trinity University). Robert Boley (University ofTexas, Arlington), Eric Bonde (University of Colorado, Boulder), Richard Boohar (University of Nebraska, Omaha), Carey L. Booth (Reed College), Allan Bornstein (Southeast MiS50uri State University). James L. Botsford (New Mexico State University), Lisa Boucher (Universit)' of Nebraska·Omaha),l. Michael Bo.....es (Humboldt State University), Richard Bowker (Alma College), Robert Bowker (Glendale Community College - Arizona), Barbara Bowman (Mills College), Barry Bowman (University of California, Santa Cruz), Deric Bownds (University of Wisconsin, Madison), Robert Boyd (Auburn University), Sunny Boyd (University of Notre Dame), Jerry Brand (University of Texas, Austin), Theodore A. Bremner (Howard University), James Brenneman (University of Evansville), Charles H. Brenner (Berkeley, California), Lawrence Brewer (University of Kentucky), Donald P. Briskin (University of Illinois, Urbana), Paul Broady (University of Canterbury), Danny Brower (University of Arizona), Carole Browne (Wake Forest University), Mark Browning (Purdue University), David Bruck {San Jose State University), Herbert Bruneau (Oklahoma State University), Gary Brusca (Humboldt State University), Richard C. Brusca (University of Arizona, Arizona-Sonora Desert Museum), Alan H. Brush (University of Connecticut, Storrs), Howard Buhse (University of Illinois at Chicago), Arthur Buikema (Virginia Tech), AI Burchsted (College of Staten Island), Meg Burke (University of North Dakota), Ed",;n Burling (De Anza College), William Busa (Johns Hopkins University), lohn Bushnell (University of Colorado). Linda Butler (University ofTexas, Austin), David Byres (Florida Community College, Jacksonville), Alison Campbell (University ofWaikato), lain Campbell (University of Pittsburgh), Robert E. Cannon (University of North Carolina at Greensboro), Deborah Canington (University of California, Davis), Frank Cantelmo (St John's University), John Capeheart (Uni\-ersit)' ofHouston-Do"''lltown), Gregol')' Capelli (College of William and Mary), Richard Cardullo (University of California, Riverside), Nina Caris (Texas A&M University), Robert Carroll (East Carolina University), David Champlin (University of Southern Maine), Bruce Chase (University of Nebraska, Omaha), Doug Cheeseman (De Anza College), Shepley Chen (Universit)' of Illinois, Chicago), Giovina Chinchar (Tougaloo College), Joseph P.

Chinnici (Virginia Commonwealth University), Henry Claman (University of Colorado Health Science Center), Anne Clark (Binghamton Univen;ity), Greg Clark (Univen;ity ofTexas), Ross C. Clark (Eastern Kentucky University), Lynwood Clemens (Michigan State University), William 1'. Coffman (University of Pittsburgh), Austin Randy Cohen (California State University, Northridge), J. John Cohen (University of Colorado Health Science Center), Jim Colbert (Iowa State University), Robert Colvin (Ohio University), David Cone (Saint Mary's University). Elizabeth Connor (University of Massachusetts), loanne Conover (University of Connecticut). John Corliss (University of Maryland), James T. Costa (Western Carolina University), Stuart J. Coward (University of Georgia), Charles Creutz (University of Toledo), Bruce Criley (Illinois Wesleyan University), Norma Criley (Illinois Wesleyan University), 101' W. Crim (University of Georgia), Greg Crowther (Univen;ity of Washington), Karen Curto (University of Pittsburgh), Anne Cusic (University of Alabama at Birmingham), Richard Cyr (Pennsylvania State University), W. Marshall Darley (University of Georgia), Marianne Dauwalder (University of Texas, Austin), Larry Davenport (Samford University), Bonnie J. Davis (San Francisco State University). lerry Davis (University of Wisconsin, La Crosse), Thomas Davis (University of New Hampshire), lohn Dearn (University of Canberra), Teresa DeGolier (Bethel College), James Dekloe (University of California, Santa Cruz), Veronique Delesalle (Gettysburg College), 1. Delevoryas (University of Texas, Austin), Roger Del Moral (University of Washington), Diane C. DeNagel (Northwestern Univen;ity), Daniel Dervartanian (University of Georgia), Jean DeSaix (University of North Carolina at Cha~l Hill), Michael Dini (Texas Tech University), Biao Ding (Ohio State University), Andrew Dobson (Princeton University), Stanley Dodson (University of Wisconsin· Madison), Mark Drapeau (University of California, Irvine). John Drees (Temple University School of Medicine). Charles Drewes (Iowa State University). Marvin Druger (Syracuse University), Gary Dudley (University of Georgia), Susan Dunford (University of Cincinnati), Betsey Dyer (Wheaton College), Robert Eaton (University of Colorado), Robert S. Edgar (University of California, Santa Cruz), Douglas Eernisse (California State University. Fullerton). Betty I. Eidemiller (Lamar University). Brad Elder (University of Oklahoma), William D. Eldred (Boston University), Norman Ellstrand (University of California, Riverside), Dennis Emery (Iowa State University), John Endler (University of California, Santa Barbara), Margaret 1. Erskine (Lansing Community College), Gerald Esch (Wake Forest University), Frederick B. Essig (University of South Florida). Mary Eubanks (Duke University), David Evans (University of Florida), Robert C. Evans (Rutgers University, Camden). Sharon Eversman (Montana State University), lincoln Fairchild (Ohio State University), Peter Fajer (Florida State University), Bruce Fall (University of Minnesota), Lynn Fancher (College ofDuPage), Paul Farnsworth (University of Texas at San Antonio). Larry Farrell (Idaho State University).lerry E Feldman (University of California. Santa Cruz). Eugene Fenster (Longview Community College), Russell Fernald (University of Oregon), Kim Finer (Kent State University), Milton Fingerman (Tulane University), Barbara Finney (Regis College), Frank Fish (West Chester University), David Fisher (University of Hawaii, Manoa), Steven Fisher (University of California, Santa Barbara), Lloyd Fitzpatrick (University of North Texas). William Fixsen (Harvard University). Abraham Flexer (Manuscript Consultant, Boulder, Colorado), Kerry Foresman (University of Montana), Norma Fowler (University of Texas, Austin), Robert G. Fowler (San Jose State University), David Fox (University of Tennessee, Knoxville). Carl Frankel (Pennsylvania State University, Hazleton), James Franzen (University of Pittsburgh), Bill Freedman (Dalhousie University), Otto Friesen (University of Virginia), Frank Frisch (Chapman University), Virginia Fry (Monterey Peninsula College), Bernard Frye (University of Texas at Arlington), Alice Fulton (University of Iowa). Chandler Fulton (Brandeis University), Sara Fuln (Stanford University), Berdell Funke (North Dakota State University), Anne Funkhouser (University of

the Pacific), Michael Gaines (University of Miami), Arthur W. Galston (Yale University), Carl Gans (University of Michigan), John Gapter (Univen;ity of Northern Colorado), Reginald Garrett (University of Virginia), Patricia Gensel (University of North Carolina), Chris George (California Polytechnic State University, San Luis Obispo), Robert George (University of Wyoming), I. Whitfield Gibbons (University of Georgia), J. Phil Gibson (Agnes Scott College), Frank Gilliam (Marshall University), Simon Gilroy (Pennsylvania State University). Alan Gishlick (National Center for Science Education), Todd Gleeson (University of Colorado), lohn Glendinning (Barnard College). David Glenn-Lewin (Wichita State University), William Glider (University of Nebraska), Elizabeth A. Godrick (Boston University), Lynda Goff (University of California, Santa Cruz), Elliott Goldstein (Arizona State University), Paul Goldstein (University of Texas, £1 Paso). Sandra Gollnick (State University of New York at Buffalo) Anne Good (University of California, Berkeley). ludith Goodenough (University of Massachusetts, Amherst), Wayne Goodey (University of British Columbia), Robert Goodman (University of Wisconsin· Madison), Ester Goudsmit (Oakland University), linda Graham (University of Wisconsin. Madison). Robert Grammer (Belmont University), Joseph Graves (Arizona State University), Phyllis Griffard (University of Houston-Downtown), A. I. F. Griffiths (University of British Columbia), William Grimes (University of Arizona), Mark Gromko (Bowling Green State University), Serine Gropper (Auburn University), Katherine l. Gross (Ohio State University), Gary Gussin (Univen;ity of Iowa). Mark Guyer (National Human Genome Research Institute), Ruth Levy Guyer (Bethesda. Maryland), R. Wayne Habermehl (Montgomery County Community College), Mac Hadley (University of Arizona), Joel Hagen (Radford University), Jack P. Hailman (University of Wisconsin), leah Haimo (University of California, Riverside). Jody Hall (Brown University), Douglas Hallett. (Northern Arizona University), Rebecca Halyard (Clayton State College), Sam Hammer (Boston University). Penny HancheyBauer (Colorado State University), Laszlo Hanzely (Northern Illinois University), leff Hardin (University of Wisconsin, Madison), Richard Harrison (Cornell University), Carla Hass (Pennsylvania State University). Chris Hauf1er (University of Kansas). Chris Haynes (Shelton State Community College). H. D. Heath (California State University, Hayward), George Hechtel (State University of New York, Stony Brook), Blair Hedges (pennsylvania State), David Heins (Tulane University), Jean Heitz (University of Wisconsin, Madison), John D. Heimann (Cornell University), Colin Henderson (University of Montana). Michelle Henricks (University of California, Los Angeles). Caroll Henry (Chicago State University). Frank Heppner (University of Rhode Island), Scott Herrick (Missouri Western State College), Ira Herskowitz (University of California, San Francisco), Paul E. Hertz (Barnard College), David Hibbett (Clark University), R. James Hickey (Miami University), William Hillenius (College of Charleston). Ralph Hinegardner (University of California, Santa Cruz). William Hines (Foothill College). Robert Hinrichsen (Indiana University of Pennsylvania), Helmut Hirsch (State University of New York, Albany), Tuan-hua David Ho (Washington University), Carl Hoagstrom (Ohio Northern University), James Hoffman (University of Vermont), A. Scott Holaday (Texas Tech). James Holland (Indiana State University, Bloomington), Charles Holliday (Lafayette College), Lubbock Karl Holte (Idaho State University), Laura Hoopes (Occidental College), Nancy Hopkins (Massachusetts Institute of Technology), Sandra Horikami (Dartona Beach Communitr College), Kathy Hornberger (Widener University), Pius F. Horner (San Bernardino Valley College), Margaret Houk (Ripon College), Ronald R. Hoy (Cornell University). Donald Humphrey (Emory University School of Medicine). Robert I. Huskey (University of Virginia), Steven Hutcheson (University of Maryland, College Park), Sandra Hsu (Skyline College), Bradley Hyman (University of California. Riverside), Mark lked (San Bernardino Valley College), Cheryl Ingram-Smith (Clemson University), Alice Jacklet (State University of New York, Albany). John Jackson {North Hennepin

Reviewers

xxvii

Community College), John C. Jahoda (Bridgewater State College), Dan Johnson (East Tennessee State University), Randall Johnson (University of California, San Diego), Stephen Johnson (William Penn University), Wayne Johnson {Ohio State University), Kenneth C. Jones (California State University, Northridge), Russell Jones (University of California, Berkeley), Alan Journet {Southeast Missouri State University), Walter Judd (University of Florida), Thomas C. Kane (University of Cincinnati), Tamos Kapros (University of Missouri), E. L Karlstrom {University ofPuget Sound), Jennifer Katcher (Pima Community College), Norm Kenkel (University of Manitoba), George Khoury {National Cancer Institute), Mark Kirk (University of Missouri-Columbia), Robert Kitchin {University of Wyoming), Attila O. Klein (Brandeis University), Daniel Klionsky {University of Michigan), Ned Knight (Linfield College), David Kohl {University of California, Santa Barbara), Greg Kopf (University of Pennsylvania School of Medicine), Thomas Koppenheffer (Trinity University), lanis Kuby (San Francisco State University), David Kurijaka {Ohio University), I. A. Lackey (State University of New York, Oswego), Elaine Lai (Brandeis University), Lynn Lamoreux (Texas A&M University), William L'Amoreaux {College of Staten Island), Carmine A. Lanciani (University of Florida), Kenneth Lang (Humboldt State University), Dominic Lannutti (El Paso Community College), Allan Larson (Washington University), Diane K. Lavett (State University of New York, Cortland, and Emory University), Charles Leavell (Fullerton College), C. S. Lee {University of Texas), Robert Leonard (University of California, Riverside), John Lepri (University of North Carolina at Greensboro), Donald Levin (University of Texas), Austin Mike Levine (University of California, Berkeley), Joseph Levine (Boston College), Bill Lewis (Shoreline Community College), John Lewis (Lorna Linda University), Lorraine Lica (California State University, Ha)Ward), Harvey Liftin (Broward Community College), Harvey Lillywhite {University of Florida, Gainesville), Clark Lindgren (Grinnell College), Sam Loker (University of New Mexico), Jane Lubchenco (Oregon State University), Margaret A. Lynch {Tufts University), Steven Lynch {Louisiana State University at Shreveport), Richard Machemer Jr. (SI. lohn Fisher College), Elizabeth MachunisMasuoka (University of Virginia), James MacMahon (Utah State University), Linda Maier (University of Alabama in Huntsville),lose Maldonado {El Paso Community College), Richard Malkin (University of California, Berkeley), Charles Mallery (University of Miami), William Margolin (University of Texas Medical School), Lynn Margulis {Boston University), Edith Marsh {Angelo State University), Diane Marshall (University of New Mexico),Linda Martin Morris (University of Washington), Karl Mattox (Miami University of Ohio), Joyce Maxwell (California State University, Northridge), Jeffrey D. May (Marshall University), Lee McClenaghan (San Diego State University), Richard McCracken (Purdue University), Kerry McDonald (University of Missouri-Columbia), lacqueline McLaughlin (Pennsylvania State University, Lehigh Valley), Neal McReynolds (Texas A&M International), Lisa Meffert (Rice University), Michael Meighan (University of California, Berkeley), Scott Meissner {Cornell University), Paul Melchior (North Hennepin Community College), Phillip Meneely (Haverford College), John Merrill (Michigan State University), Brian Metscher (University of California, Irvine), Ralph Meyer (University of Cincinnati), James Mickle (North Carolina State University), Roger Milkman (University of Iowa), Helen Miller (Oklahoma State University), John Miller (University of California, Berkeley), Kenneth R. Miller {Brown University), John E. Minnich (University of Wisconsin, Milwaukee), Michael Misamore (Louisiana State University), Kenneth Mitchell {Tulane University School of Medicine), Alan Molumby (University of Illinois at Chicago), Nicholas Money (Miami University), Russell Monson (University of Colorado, Boulder), Frank Moore (Oregon State University), Randy Moore (Wright State University), William Moore {Wayne State University), Carl Moos {Veterans Administration Hospital, Albany, New York), Michael Mote (Temple University), Alex Motten {Duke

xxviii

Reviewers

University), Deborah Mowshowitz (Columbia University), Rita Moyes {Texas A&M College Station), Darrel L Murray (University of Illinois at Chicago), lohn Mutchmor (Iowa State University), Elliot Myerowitz {California Institute of Technology), Gavin Naylor (lo....oa State University), John Neess (University of Wisconsin, Madison), Raymond Neubauer (University of Texas, Allstin), Todd Newbury (University of California, Santa Cruz), Harvey Nichols (University of Colorado, Boulder), Deborah Nickerson {University of South Florida), Bette Nicotri (University of Washington), Caroline Niederman {Tomball College), Maria Nieto (California State University, Hayward), Greg Nishiyama (College of the Canyons), Charles R. Noback (College of Physicians and Surgeons, Columbia University), Jane Noble-Harvey (Delaware University), Mary C. Nolan (Irvine Valley College), Peter Nonacs (University of California, Los Angeles), Richard Norman {University of MichiganDearborn), David O. Norris (University of Colorado, Boulder), Steven Norris (California State, Channel Islands), Cynthia Norton (University of Maine, Augusta), Steve Norton (East Carolina University), Steve Nowicki (Duke University), Bette H. Nybakken (Hartnell College), Brian O'Conner (University of Massachusetts, Amherst), Gerard O'Donovan (University of North Texas), Eugene Odum (University of Georgia), Linda Ogren (University of California, Santa Cruz), Patricia OHern (Emory University), leanette Oliver (SI. Louis Community College Florissant Valley), Gary P. Olivetti (University ofVermont),lohn Olsen (Rhodes College), Laura I. Olsen (University of Michigan), Sharman O'Neill (University of California, Davis), Wan Ooi (Houston Community College), Gay Ostarello (Diablo Valley College), Catherine Ortega (Fort Lewis College), Charissa Osborne (Butler University), Thomas G. Owens (Cornell University), Penny Padgett {University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill), Kevin Padian {University of California, Berkeley), Dianna Padilla (State University of New York, Stony Brook), Barry Palevitz (University of Georgia), Daniel Papaj (University of Arizona), Peter Pappas (County College of Morris), Blliah Parker (North Carolina State University), Stanton Parmeter (Chemeketa Community College), Robert Patterson (San Francisco State University), Ronald Patterson (Michigan State University), Crellin Pauling (San Francisco State University), Kay Pauling (Foothill Community College), Daniel Pavuk (Bowling Green State University), Debra Pearce {Northern Kentucky University), Patricia Pearson (Western Kentucky University), Shelley Penrod {North Harris College), Beverly Perry (Houston Community College), David Pfennig (University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill), Bob Pittman (Michigan State University), lames Platt {University of Denver), Martin Poenie (University of Texas, Austin), Scott Poethig (University of Pennsylvania), Jeffrey Pommerville (Texas A&M University), Warren Porter {University of\Vlsconsin), Daniel Potier (University of California, Davis), Donald Potts (University of California, Santa Cruz), Andy Pratt (University of Canterbury), David Pratt (University of California, Davis), Halina Presley (University of Illinois, Chicago), Mitch Price (Pennsylvania State University), Rong Sun I'u (Kean University), Rebecca Pyles (East Tennessee State University), Scott Quackenbush {Florida International University), Ralph Quatrano (Oregon State University), Val Raghavan (Ohio State University), Deanna Raineri (University of Illinois, Champaign-Urbana), Talitha Rajah {Indiana University Southeast), Charles Ralph (Colorado State University), Thomas Rand {Saint Mary's University), Kurt Redborg (COl' College), Ahnya Redman (Pennsylvania State), Brian Reeder (Morehead State University), Bruce Reid (Kean University), David Reid {Blackburn College), C. Gary Reiness {Lewis & Clark College), Charles Remington (Yale University), David Reznick (University of California, Riverside), Douglas Rhoads (University of Arkansas), Fred Rhoades (Western Washington State University), Christopher Riegle (Irvine Valley College), Donna Ritch (Pennsylvania State University), Carol Rivin (Oregon State University East), Laurel Roberts (University of Pittsburgh), Thomas Rodella {Merced College), Rodney Rogers {Drake University), \Vllliam Roosenburg

(Ohio Universitr), Warne Rosing (Middle Tennessee State University), Thomas Rost (University of California, Davis), Stephen L Rothstein {Univel"1iity of California, Santa Barbara), John Ruben (Oregon State Univel"1iity), Albert Ruesink (Indiana Univel"1iity), Neil Sabine {Indiana University), Tyson Sacco (Cornell University), Rowan Sage (University of Toronto), Don Sakaguchi (Iowa State University), Walter Sakai (Santa Monica College), Mark F. Sanders (University of California, Davis), Ted Sargent (University of Massachusetts, Amherst), K. Sathasivan (University of Texas, Austin), Gary Saunders (University of New Brunswick), Carl Schaefer (University of Connecticut), David Schimpf (University of Minnesota, Duluth), William H. Schlesinger (Duke University), Robert Schorr {Colorado State Unive~ity), David Schwartz (Houston Community College), Christa Schwintzer {Univel"1iity of Maine), Erik P. Scully {Towson State University), Edna Seaman (Northeastern University), Orono Shukdeb Sen {Bethune-Cookman College), Wendy Sera (Seton Hill University), TImothy Shannon (Francis Marion University), Joan Sharp (Simon Fraser University), Victoria C. Sharpe (Blinn College), Elaine Shea {Loyola College, Maryland), Stephen Sheckler {Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State University), Richard Sherwin (University of Pittsburgh), Lisa Shimeld {Crafton Hills College), James Shinkle (Trinity University), Barbara Shipes (Hampton University), Richard Showman (University of South Carolina), Peter Shugarman {Unive~ity of Southern California), Alice Shuttey (DeKalb Community College), James Sidie (Ursinus College), Daniel Simberloff (Florida State University), Anne Simon (Univel"1iity of Maryland), Alastair Simpson (Dalhousie University), Susan Singer (Carleton College), Roger Sloboda (Dartmouth University), John Smarrelli (Le Moyne College), Andrew T. Smith (Arizona State University), Kelly Smith {Unive~ity of North Florida), Nancy Smith-Huerta (Miami Ohio Unive~ity), John Smol (Queen's University), Andrew J. Snope (Essex Community College), Mitchell Sogin (Woods Hole Marine Biological Laboratory), Susan Sovonick-Dunford (University of Cincinnati), Frederick W. Spiegel (University of Arkansas), Amanda Starnes (Emorr University), Karen Steudel (University of Wisconsin), Barbara Stewart (Swarthmore College), Cecil Still (Rutge~ University, New Brunswick), Margery Stinson (Southwestern College), James Stockand {University of Texas Health Science Center, San Antonio), John Stolz (California Institute of Technology), Richard D. Storey {Colorado College), Stephen Strand {University of California, Los Angeles), Eric Strauss (University of Massachusetts, Boston), Antony Strelton (University of Wisconsin-Madison), Russell Stullken (Augusta College), Mark Sturtevant (University of Michigan-Flint), John Sullivan (Southern Oregon State University), Gerald Summers (University of Missouri), Judith Sumner (Assumption College), Marshall D. Sundberg (Emporia State University), Lucinda Swatzell (Southeast Missouri State University), Daryl Sweeney (University of Illinois, ChampaignUrbana), Samuel S. Sweet (University of California, Santa Barbara),

Janice Swenson (University of North Florida), Lincoln Taiz {Univel"1iity of California, Santa Cruz), Samuel Tarsitano (Southwest Texas State University), David Tauck (Santa Clara University), James Taylor (University of New Hampshire), John Taylor (University of California, Berkeley), Martha R, Taylor {Cornell University), Thomas Terrr (University of Connecticut), Roger Thibault (Bowling Green State University), William Thomas (Colbr-Sawyer College), Cyril Thong (Simon Fraser University), John Thornton (Oklahoma State University), Robert Thornton {University of California, Davis), Stephen TImme (pittsburg State University), Leslie Towill (Arizona State University), James Traniello (Boston University), Constantine Tsoukas (San Diego State University), Marsha Turell {Houston Community College), Robert Tuveson {University ofJl1inois, Urbana), Maura G. Tyrrell (Stonehill College), Catherine Uekert {Northern Arizona University), Gordon Uno (University of Oklahoma), Lisa A. Urry {Mills College), James W. Valentine {University of California, Santa Barbara), Joseph Vanable {Purdue University), Theodore Van Bruggen (University of South Dakota), Kathryn VandenBosch {Texas A&M Unive~ity), Gerald Van Dyke {North Carolina State Unive~ity), Brandi Van Roo (Framingham State College), Moira Van Staaden (Bowling Green State), Frank Visco (Orange Coast College), Laurie Vitt (University of California, Los Angeles), Neal Voelz (SI. Cloud State University), Thomas J. Volk {University of Wisconsin, La Crosse), Susan D. Waaland {Univel"1iityofWashington), William Wade (Dartmouth Medical College), D. Alexander Wait {Southwest Missouri State University), John Waggoner (Loyola Marymount Univel"1iity), Jyoti Wagle {Houston Community College), Edward Wagner {University of California, Irvine), Dan Walker (San Jose State University), Robert L. Wallace (Ripon College), !effrer Walters {North Carolina State University), Margaret Waterman (University of Pittsburgh), Charles Webber (Loyola Unive~ity of Chicago), Peter Webster (University of Massachusetts, Amhel"1it), Terry Webster (University of Connecticut, Storrs), Beth Wee {Tulane University), Peter We;ksnora (University of Wisconsin, Milwaukee), Kentwood Wells (University of Connecticut), David J. Westen berg, (University of Missouri, Rolla), Malt White (Ohio Unive~ity), Stephen \Villiams (Glendale Community College), Elizabeth Willott {Univen;ity of Arizona), Christopher Wills (University of California, San Diego), Fred \'(lilt {University of California, Berkeley), E. William Wischusen (Louisiana State University), Clarence Wolfe (Northern Virginia Community College), Robert T. Woodland (University of Massachusetts Medical SdlOOI), Joseph Woodring (Louisiana State Unive~ity), Patrick Woolley {East Central College), Philip Yant (Univen;ity of Michigan), Linda Yasui (Northern Illinois University), Hideo Yonenaka {San Francisco State University), Edward Zalisko (Blackburn College), Zai Ming Zhao (University of Texas, Austin), John Zimmerman (Kansas State University), Uko Zylstra (Calvin College)

Reviewers

xxix

he authors wish to express their gratitude to the global community ofinstruclo~, researchers, students, and publishing professionals who have contributed. to this edition. As authors of this text, we are mindful of the daunting challenge of keeping up to date in all areas of our rapidly expanding subject. We are grateful to the numerous scientists who helped shape this edition by discussing their research fields with us. answering specific questions in their areas ofexpertise, and, often, sharing their ideas about biology education. For advice in updating the phylogeny ofGalapagos finches in Chapler I, we are indebted to Kevin Burns and Peler Grant. For assistance with the chapters ofUnils Ilhrough 3 (chemistry, cell biology, and genetics), we first wish to thank the memhers ofthe Mills College Biology and Chemistry/Physics Department, notably Barbara Bowman and Elisaheth Wade. We are also grateful to Tom Owens and Mimi Zolan, who were each exceptionally generous with their time and knowledge, and to Michael Black, Laurie Heyer, and Ed Blake, for noteworthy contributions to figures. And we thank the individuals who took thetimeto share their expertise on early atmospheric conditions {Laura Schaefer), cell biology (Pat Zambryski, Steve King, Jeremy Reiter, and Jeff Hardin), gene regulation (Phil Zamore, Dave Bartel, Tom Gingeras, Steve Bell, Saba Valadkhan, Joe Heilig, Lorraine "iIlus, and Mike Levine), current cloning approaches {Caroline Kane and Andy Cameron), genomics (Nikos Krypides, Emir Khatipov, and Rebekah Rasooly), and homeobox genes {Bill McGinnis). In addition, we thank Lisa Weasel for her feedback on the new "TIps for Genetics Problems~ For the chapters of Units 4 and 5, on evolution and the dive~ity of life, researchers who generously shared their expertise with us included Richard Anthony, Nick Barton, Toby Bradshaw, Keith Clay, Kevin de Queiroz, Peter and Rosemary Grant, Daniel J. Howard, Patrick Keeling, Andrew H. Knoll, Jon Mallatt, Amy McCune, Axel Meyer, Kevin J. Peterson, Loren Rieseberg, OIl' Seehausen, and Mark Webster. For Units 6 through 8, the units on plant and animal form and function, and ecology, we henefited greatly from the expertise of Charles Michel, Eric Britt, Don Boyer, and Alan French. In addition, Tom Deerinck, Peter Gillespie, Mark Chappell, and Doug DeSimone prOVided important assistance with figures. We also thank Eric Simon, a coauthor of the Campbell nonmajors texts, for helping us think through some terminology and presentation dilemmas in Unit 7. And finally, for her many contributions throughout the book, we sincerely thank Marty Taylor, the author of the Student Study Guide and a coauthor of Biology: Concepts & Connections. A total of228 biologists, listed on pages xxiv-xxix, provided detailed reviews of one or more chapters for this edition, helping us ensure the book's scientific accuracy and improve its pedagogical effectiveness. Specialthanks for exceptional contributions go to Johnny I:I-Rady, Graeme Undbc£k, Bruce Riley, Robert Fowler, Alan Gishlick, Alastair Simpson, Ken Halanych, Kevin Padian, John Taylor, Jay Comeaux, Grace Wyngaard, Lauren Garner, Missy Holbrook, Toby Kellogg, Eduardo Zeiger, Richard Norman, Alhert Herrera, and Patricia Schulte. Thanks also to the numerous other professors and students, from all over the world, who offered suggestions directly to the authors. Of course, we alone hear the responsibility for any errors that remain in the text, but the dedication of our consultants, reviewers, and other correspondents makes us especially confident in the accuracy and effectiveness of this edition.

T

Conducting the unit-opening interviews was again one of the great pleasures of revising BlOLOGY. For the Eighth Edition, we are proud to include interviews with Deborah Gordon, Paul Nurse, Terry OrrWeaver, Scott Edwards, Sean Carroll, Pat Zambryski, Masashi Yanagisawa, and Diana Wall (see p. xi). We thank these busy people for generously sharing their experiences with us. The value of BIOLOGY as a learning tool is greatly enhanced by the supplementary materials that have heen created for instructors and students. We recognize that the dedicated authors of these materials are essentially writing mini (and not so mini) books. We much appreciate the hard work and creativity of the follOWing: Ruth Buskirk and Christopher Gillen (authors of the new InquilJ' in Action: InU!rpreting Scientific Papers); Judith Morgan and Eloise Brown Carter (InvC5tigating Biology, 6th Edition); Jean Heitz and Cynthia Giffen (Practicing Biology, 3rd Edition); Margaret Waterman and Ethel Stanley (Biological Inquiry: A \Vorkbookoflm'Cstigatil'e Cases, 2nd Edition); Bill Barstow, Louise Paquin, Michael Dini, John Lepri, John Zarnetske, C. O. Patterson, and Jean DeSaix (Test Bank); Ed Zalisko, Margaret Ricci, Lauren Garner, Jung Choi, and Virginia White (Media Quizzes); loan Sharp (Lecture Outlines, PowerPoint Lectures, and Student Misconceptions); Erin Barley (PowerPoinl Lectures); Bill Wischusen, Ruth Buskirk, lung Choi, John Merrill, Melissa Michael, Randy Phillis, Mark Lrford, and Chris Gregg {Active Learning Questions); and Laura Zanello (Spanish Glossary). Once again, we thank our long-time colleague Marty Taylor for her excellent work on the Student Scudy Guide; she has now completed eight editions of this popular student aid. Special thanks go to Tom Owens for his visionary work on the BioFlix animations and his creative, collaborative work as lead author on our new MasteringBiology tutorials. We also thank Brad Williamson, Jennifer Yeh, Dawn Keller, and Scott Bowling for their excellent work on the BioFlix animations and the accompan}ing student tools. In addition, we are grateful to the many other people-biology instructors, editors, artists, production experts, and narrators-who are listed in the credits for these and other elements of the electronic media that accompany the book. Finally, we thank the class testers and reviewers of BioFlix and MasteringBiology who are listed on pages xxv-xxvi. BIOLOGY, Eighth Edition, results from an unusually strong synergy betv.'een a team of scientists and a team of publishing professionals. The expansion ofthe author team and major revision of manychapters, the creation of new pedagogical features and the improvement of old ones, and the exceptionally rich package of supplements created unprecedented challenges for the publishing team. The memhers of our core editorial team at Benjamin Cummingsour Fab Five-brought unmatched talents, commitment, and pedagogical insights to this revision, and working with this team over the past three rears has heen a great pleasure. Our Editor-in-Chief, Beth Wilbur, continues to he a full colleague in the book's ongOing evolution and a respected advocate for biolog}' education in the academic community. Our extraordinary Supervising Editors, Pat Burner and Beth Winickoff, once again had the awesome responsibility of ove~eeing in detail the work of all the authors, developmental editors, and developmental artists. Together, Beth and Pat ensured that every page of every chapter has the text, figures, and pedagog}' to make this edition the most effective biology textbook ever. Deborah Gale, ExC(utive Director of Development, and

our Senior Editorial Manager, the incomparable Ginnie Simione Julson, oversaw the entire project on a day-by-day basis, a feat equivalent to running a three-ring circus. Ginnie's patience and resourcefulness and Deborah's oversight o( the project as a whole have enabled the entire book team to operate at a level of sanity that would not have been possible without their guidance. We were fortunate to have on our team some ofcollege publishing's top developmental editors. In addition to Beth Wlnickoff and Pat Burner (who did important hands-on editing themselves, as well as their many other tasks), the primary developmental editors for this edition were John Burner and Matt Lee, joined as the project progressed by Alice Fugate and Suzanne Olivier. WI' are deeply grateful to all our editors for making us better writers, teachers, and biologists. Biology is a visual subjc£t, and we are indebted to our developmental artists HiiairChism, Carla Simmons, Andrew Recher, Connie Balek, and Kelly Murphy (or helping us make all our figures better tools for teaching and learning-as well as visually ap~aling. In addition, the support of our bright, efficient, and good-natured Editorial Assistants-julia Khait, Ben Pearson, and Logan Triglia-is muc" appreciated. We couldn't have finished the book without them! We also want to thank Robin Heyden for organizing the annual Benjamin Cummings Biology Leadership Conferences, which always bring us closer to the teaching community and offer a fresh supply ofcreative teaching ideas from outstanding biology educators. You would not have a book in your hands today if not for the herculean efforts of the book production team, which has the crucial responsibility ofconverting the text manuscript and illustrations to pages ready for the printer. For the Eighth Edition, these efforts were headed up by Managing Editor Mike Early. We thank him, as well as our longtime copyeditor lanet Greenblatt, proofreaders loanna Dinsmore and Marie Dartman, Permissions Editors Sue Ewing and Marcy Lunetta, and indexers Lynn Armstrong and Charlotte Shane. Handling the illustrations were Art Editors Laura Murray and Kelly Murphy: the final rendering of the new and revised illustrations was carried out by the artists of Precision Graphics, working under Kristina Seymour. Senior Photo Editor Donna Kalal and photo researcher Maureen Spuhler obtained a large number of handsome and informative photos (or this edition. We are indebted to the entire art and photo team. For the beautiful design o( the book's interior, we want to thank Art and Design Director Mark Ong and Design Manager Marilyn Perry for their design of text and art styles that show off the words and pictures in a way that will ap~alto readers and help them learn. (And thanks to both of them for their endless patience with all our concerns!) For the user-friendly page layouts, we are grateful to Jennifer Dunn and lana Anderson. And many thanks to Yvo Riezehos for designing the striking cover. Putting together all the pieces of this complicated book were the staff at $4Carlisle Publishing Services, led by Production Manager Lori Dalberg and Composition Supervisor Holly Paige. Thank you, Lori and Holly! We are pleased to thank the topnotch publishing profeSSionals who worked on the book's printed supplements: Senior Supplements Project Editor Susan Berge, who coordinated the entire print supplements package: Production Supervisor lane Brundage; Developmental Editor Susan Weisberg; and Projeroductions (animation production); and Groove II (tutorial production). For their work on MasteringBio[ogy, we thank the aforementioned Pat Burner, Ginnie Simione Jutson, and jon Ballard, plus Tania Mlawer, Director o( Content Development and Project Management; Mary Catherine Hager, Developmental Editor: Deb Greco, Media Producer: Kristen Sutton, Content Lead: and Developmental Artist lay McElroy and the artists at Pearson Production Solutions. For their hard work and support, our appreciation goes to the MasteringX Team (in alphabetical order): Ruth Berry, Lewis Costas, Katherine Foley, lulia Henderson, loseph Ignazi, jeff King, David Kokorowski, Mary Lee, Claire Masson, Nissi Mathews, Adam Morton, Fred Mueller, Ian Nordby, Maria Panos, Andrea Pascarella, Mary Ann Perry, Caroline Power, Sarah Smith, Margaret Trombley, and Rasil Warnakulasooriya. Last, but not least, we thank Lauren Fogel, Director of Media Development at Benjamin Cummings, (or her continued leadership on all things media. For their important roles in marketing the book, we are very gratefulto Director of Marketing Christy Lawrence, Executive Marketing Manager Lauren Harp, and Market Development Manager losh Frost. For the creation of visually stunning print and electronic promotional materials, we thank Creative Director Lillian Carr: Marketing Communication Specialists jane Campbell, Kristi Hlaing, and lessica Perry: Designer Laurie Campbell: Web Designer Mansour Bethoney, who led the creation of the e-brochure; and Webmaster Anna Molodtsova. Linda Davis, President of Pearson Math, Economics, and Science, has shared our commitment to excellence and provided strong support for (our editions now, and we are happy to thank her once again. We also want to thank Paul Corey, now President of PI'arson Science, for his enthusiasm, encouragement, and support. The Pearson Science sales team, which represents BfOLOGY on campus, is our living link to the students and professors who use the text. The field representatives tell us what you like and don't like about the book, and they provide prompt service to biology departments. Theyare strong allies in biology education, and we thank them for their professionalism in communicating the features of our book. For representing our book and its teaching values to our wider international audience, we thank the sustained work of our sales and marketing partners throughout the world, including (but by no means only) Marlene Olsavsky, Ann Oravetz, and Pablo Rendina. Finally, we wish to thank our families and friends for their encouragement and patience throughout this long project. Our special thanks to: Paul, Dan, Maria, Armelle, and Sean (I.R.); Lily, Grant, Ross, Lilytoo, and Alex (LU.); Debra and Hannah (M.C): Harry, Elga, Aaron, Sophie, Noah, and Gabriele (S.W.): Natalie (P.M.): and Sally, Robert, David, and Will (R.I.). And as always, Rochelle and Allison. lane Reece, Lisa Urry, Michael Cain, Steve Wasserman, Peter Minorsky, and Rob lackson

Acknowledgments

xxxi

1 Introduction: Themes in the Study of life 1 Inquiring Ahoullhe World of Life 1 CON(O' 1.1 Themes connect the concepts of biology 3 Evolution. the Overarching Theme of Biology 3 Theme: New properties emerge at each level in the

UNIT ONE

Interview wich Deborah M. Gordon

OIlUI/IEW

The Chemistry of Life 28 2

OVlItVlEW

CONCO' 1.1

Theme: Cells are an organism's basic units of structure and function

7

Theme: The continuity of life is based on heritable information in the form of DNA 8

Theme:Feedback mechanisms regulate biological systems I J COHCE" 1.1 The Core Theme: holulion ;lccounls for the unity .and diversity of life 12 Organizing the Diversity of Life

12

Charles Darwin and the Theory of Natural Selection 14 The Tree of Life 16 CON(O' 1.1 Scientists use two main forms of inquiry in their study of nature 18 Discovery Science 18 Hypothesis-Based Science 19 ACase Study in Scientific Inquiry: Investigating Mimicry in Snake Populations 20 Limitations of Science 22 Theories in Science 23 Model Building in Science 23 The Culture of Science 23 Science, Technology, and Society 24

The Chemical Conlext of Life 30 A Chemical Connection 10 Biology 30 Matter consists of chemical elements in pure form and in combinations nlled compounds 31 Elements and Compounds 31 Essential Elements of Life 32 CON CO, 1.1 An element's properties depend on the structure of its aloms 32 Subatomic Particles 32 Atomic Number and Atomic Mass 33 Isotopes 33 The Energy Levels of Electrons 35 Electron Distribution and Chemical Properties 35 Electron Orbitals 36 CONCE'" U The formation and function of molecules depend on chemical bonding between atoms 38 Covalent Bonds 38 Ionic Bonds 39 Weak Chemical Bonds 40 Molecular Shape and Function 41 CONCE,r 1." Chemical reactions make and break chemical bonds 42

biological hiernrchy 3 Theme: Organisms internet with their environments. exchanging matter and energy 6 Theme: Structure and function are corrdated at all levels of biological organization 7

3

Water and the Fitness of the Environment 46 The Molecule That Supports All of life 46 The polarity of water nlOlecules results in hydrogen bonding 46 CONCEP' 3.Z Four emergent properties of water contribute to Earth's fitness for life 47 Cohesion 47 Moderation of Temperature 48 Insulation of Bodies of Water by Floating Ice 49 The Solvent of Life 50 CONCI" u Acidic and basic conditions affect living organisms 52 Effects of Changes in pH 52 Threats to Water Quality on Earth 54 OVERVIEW

CONCE" 3.1

4

Carbon and the Molecular Diversity of life 58 OVlItVlEW CONCE"

Carbon: The Backbone of life 58

".1 Organic chemistry is the study of carbon

compounds 58 CONCE'" ... Z C.ubon atoms can form diverse molecules by bonding to four other atoms 60 The Formation of Bonds with Carbon 60 ~lolecular Diversity Arising from Carbon Skeleton Variation 61 xxxii

CONCEPT 4.3 A small number of chemical groups are key to the functioning of biological molecules 63 The Chemical Groups Most Important in the Processes of Life 63 ATP: An ImpoTtant Source of Energy for Cellular Processes 66 The Chemical Elements of Life: A Review 66

5

The Structure and Function of large Biological Molecules 68 OVERVIEW The Molecules of Life 68 CONCEPT 5.1 Macromolecules are polymers, built from monomers 68 The Synthesis and Breakdown of Polymers 68 The Diversity of Polymers 69 CONCEPT Sol Carbohydrates serve as fuel and building material 69 Sugars 69 Polysaccharides 71 CONCEPT 5.) Lipids arc a diverse group of hydrophobic molecules 74 Fats 75 Phospholipids 76 Steroids 77 CONCEPT 5.4 Proteins have many structures, resulting in a wide range of functions 77 Polypeptides 78 Protein Structure and Function 80 CONCEPT 5.5 Nucleic acids store and transmit hereditary information 86 The Roles of Nucleic Adds 86 The StructuTe of Nucleic Adds 87 The DNA Double Helix 88 DNA and Proteins as Tape Measures of Evolution 89 The Theme of Emergent Properties in the Chemistry of Life: A Review 89

UNIT TWO

The Cell 6

Vacuoles: Diverse Maintenance Compartments 108 The Endomembrane System: A Review 108 CONCEPT 6.5 Mitochondria and chloroplasts change energy from one form to another 109 Mitochondria: Chemical Energy Conversion 109 Chloroplasts: Capture of Light Energy 110 Peroxisomes: Oxidation 110 CONCEPT 6.6 The cytoskeleton is a network of fibers that organizes structures and activities in the cell 112 Roles of the Cytoskeleton: Support, Motility, and Regulation 112 Components of the Cytoskeleton 113 CONCEPT 6.1 Extracellular components and connections between cells help coordinate cellular activities 118 Cell Walls of Plants 118 The Extmcellular Matrix (ECM) of Animal Cells 119 Intercellular Junctions 120 The Cell: A Living Unit Greater Than the Sum of Its Parts 122

lnterview with Palll Nllrse

92

ATour of the Cell

7 94

OVERVIEW The Fundamental Units of Life 94 CONCEPT 6.1 To study cells, biologists use microscopes and the tools of biochemistry 94 Microscopy 95 Cell Fractionation 97 CONCEPT 6.2 Eukaryotic cells have internal membranes that compartmentalize their functions 98 Comparing Prokaryotic and Eukaryotic Cells 98 A Panoramic View of the Eukaryotic Cell 99 CONCEPT 6.3 The eukaryotic cell's genetic instructions are housed in the nucleus and carried out by the ribosomes 102 The Nucleus: Information Central 102 Ribosomes: Protein Factories 102 CONCEPT 6.4 The endomembrane system regulates protein traffic and performs metabolic functions in the cell 104 The Endoplasmic Reticulum: Biosynthetic Factory 104 The Golgi Appamtus: Shipping and Receiving Center 105 Lysosomes: Digestive Compartments 107

Membrane Structure and Function

125

OVERVIEW Life at the Edge 125 CONCEPT 1.1 Cellular membranes are fluid mosaics of lipids and proteins 125 Membrane Models: Scientific lnqlliry 126 The Fluidity of Membranes 127 Membrane Proteins and Their Functions 128 The Role of Membrane Carbohydrates in Cell-Cell Recognition 130 Synthesis and Sidedness of Membranes 130 CONCEPT 1.2 Membrane structure results in selective permeability 131 The Permeability of the Lipid Bilayer 131 Transport Proteins 131 CONCEPT 1.3 Passive transport is diffusion of a substance across a membrane with no energy investment 132 Effects of Osmosis on Water Balance 133 Facilitated Diffusion: Passive Transport Aided by Proteins 134 CONCEPT 1.4 Active transport uses energy to move solutes against their gradients 135 The Need for Energy in Active Transport 135 Detailed Contents

xxxiii

How Ion Pumps Maintain Membrane Potential 136 Cotransport: Coupled Transport by a Membrane Protein 137 CONCEPT 1.5 Bulk transport across the plasma membrane occurs by exocytosis and endocytosis 138 Exocytosis 138 Endocytosis 138

8

An Introduction to Metabolism 142 OVERVIEW The Energy of Life 142 CONCEPT 8.1 An organism's metabolism transforms mailer and energy, subject to the laws of thermodynamics 142 Organization of the Chemistry of Life into Metabolic Pathways 142 Forms of Energy 143 The Laws of Energy Transformation 144 CONCEPT 8.2 The free-energy change of a reaction tells us whether or not the reaction occurs spontaneously 146 Free-Energy Change, t..G 146 Free Energy, Stability, and Equilibrium 146 Free Energy and Metabolism 147 CONCEPT 8.3 ATP powers cellular work by coupling eliergonic reactions to endergonic reactions 149 The Structure and Hydrolysis of ATP 149 How ATP Performs Work 150 The Regeneration of ATP ISO CONCEPT 8.4 Enzymes speed up metabolic reactions by lowering energy barriers 151 The Activation Energy Barrier 152 How Enzymes Lower the EA Barrier 153 Substrate Specificity of Enzymes 153 Catalysis in the Enzyme's Active Site 154 Effects of Local Conditions on Enzyme Activity ISS CONCEPT 8.5 Regulation of enzyme activity helps control metabolism 157 Allosteric Regulation of Enzymes 157 Specific Localization of Enzymes Within the Cell 159

9

Cellular Respiration: Harvesting Chemical Energy 162 OVERVIEW Life Is Work 162 CONCEPT 9.1 Catabolic pathways yield energy by oliidizing organic fuels 162 Catabolic Pathways and Production of ATP 163 Redox Reactions: Oxidation and Reduction 163 The Stages of Cellular Respiration: A Preview 166 CONCEPT 9.2 Glycolysis harvests chemical energy by oxidizing glucose to pyruvate 167 CONCEPT 9.3 The cilric acid cycle completes the energyyielding oxidation of organic molecules 170 CONCEPr 9.4 During oliidative phosphorylation, chemiosmosis couples electron transport to ATP synthesis 172 The Pathway of Electron Transport 172 Chemiosmosis: The Energy-Coupling Mechanism 173 An Accounting of ATP Production by Cellular Respiration 176 CONCEPT 9.S Fermentation and anaerobic respiration enable cells to produce ATP without the use of oliygen 177 Types of Fermentation 178 Fermentation and Aerobic Respiration Compared 179 The Evolutionary Significance of Glycolysis 179 CONCEPT 9.6 Glycolysis and the cilric add cycle connect to many other metabolic pathways 180

xxxiv

Detailed Contents

The Versatility of Catabolism 180 Biosynthesis {Anabolic Pathways) 180 Regulation of Cellular Respiration via Feedback Mechanisms 181

10 Photosynthesis 185 OVERVIEW The Process That Feeds the Biosphere 185 CONCEPT 10.1 Photosynthesis converts light energy to th(' chemical en('rgy of food 186 Chloroplasts: The Sites of Photosynthesis in Plants 186 Tracking Atoms Through Photosynthesis: Scientific Inquiry

187

The Two Stages of Photosynthesis: A Preview 188 CONCEPT 10.2 The light reactions convert solar energy to the chemical energy of ATP and NADPH 190 The Nature of Sunlight 190 Photosynthetic Pigments: The Light Receptors 190 Excitation of Chlorophyll by Light 192 A Photosystem: A Reaction-Center Complex Associated with Light-Harvesting Complexes 193 Linear Electron Flow 194 Cyclic Electron Flow 195 A Comparison of Chemiosmosis in Chloroplasts and Mitochondria 196 CONCEPT 10.3 The Calvin cycle uses ATP and NADPH to convert CO 2 to sugar 198 CONCEPT 10.4 Alternative mechanisms of carbon fixation have evolved in hot, arid climates 200 Photorespiration: An Evolutionary Relic? 200 C4 Plants 200 CAM Plants 201 The Importance of Photosynthesis: A Review 202

11 Cell Communication 206 OVERVIEW The Cellular Internet 206 CONCEPT 11.1 External signals are converted to responses within the cell 206 Evolution of Cell Signaling 206 Local and Long-Distance Signaling 208 The Three Stages of Cell Signaling: A Preview 209 CONCEPT 11.2 Reception: A signal molecule binds to a receptor protein, causing it to change shape 210 Receptors in the Plasma Membrane 210 Intracellular Receptors 210 CONCEPT 11.3 Transduction: Cascades of molecular interactions r('lay signals from receptors to target molecules in the cell 214 Signal Transduction Pathways 214 Protein Phosphorylation and Dephosphorylation 214 Small Molecules and Ions as Second Messengers 215 CONCEPT 11.4 Response: Cell signaling leads to regulation of transcription or cytoplasmic activities 218 Nuclear and Cytoplasmic Responses 218 Fine-Tuning ofthe Response 221 CONCEPT 11.5 Apoptosis (programmed cell death) integrates multiple cell-signaling pathways 223 Apoptosis in the Soil Worm Caenorhahditis elegans 223 Apoptotic Pathways and the Signals That Trigger Them 224

12 The Cell Cycle 228 OVERVIEW The Key Roles of Cell Division 228 CONCEPT n.1 Cell division results in genetically identical daughter cells 229

Cellular Organization of the Genetic Material 229 Distribution of Chromosomes During Eukaryotic Cell Division 229 CONCEPT 12.2 The mitotic phase alternates with interphase in the cell cycle 230 Phases of the Cell Cycle 231 The Mitotic Spindle: A Closer Look 231 Cytokinesis: A Closer Look 234 Binary Fission 236 The Evolution of Mitosis 237 CONCEPT 12.3 The eukaryotic cell cycle is regulated by a molecular control system 238 Evidence for Cytoplasmic Signals 238 The Cell Cycle Control System 238 Loss ofCeH Cycle Controls in Cancer Cells 242

UNIT THREE

Interview with Terry L. Orr-Weaver

Genetics 246 13 Meiosis and Sexual life Cycles 248 Variations on a Theme 248 CONCEPT 13.1 Offspring acquire genes from parents by inheriting chromosomes 248 Inheritance of Genes 249 Comparison of Asexual and Sexual Reproduction 249 CONCEPT 13.2 Fertilization and meiosis alternate in se~ual life cycles 250 Sets of Chromosomes in Human Cells 250 Behavior of Chromosome Sets in the Human Ufe Cycle 251 The Variety of Sexual Ufe Cycles 252 CONCEPT 13.3 Meiosis reduces the number of chromosome sets from diploid to haploid 253 The Stages of Meiosis 253 A Comparison of Mitosis and Meiosis 257 CONCEPT 13.4 G('m'tic variation produc('d in sexual life cycl('s contribut('s to evolution 258 Origins of Genetic Variation Among Offspring 258 The Evolutionary Significance of Genetic Variation Within Populations 260 OVERVIEW

14 Mendel and the Gene Idea 262 Drawing from the Deck of Genes 262 Mendel used the scientific approach to identify two laws of inheritance 262 Mendel's Experimental, Quantitative Approach 262 The Law of Segregation 264The Law of Independent Assortment 268 CONCEPT 14.2 Th(' laws of probability govNn Menddian inh('ritanc(' 269 The Multiplication and Addition Rules Applied to Monohybrid Crosses 269 Solving Complex Genetics Problems with the Rules of Probability 270 CONCEPT 14.3 Inheritance patterns are often more complex than predicted by simple Mendelian genetics 271 Extending Mendelian Genetics for a Single Gene 271 Extending Mendelian Genetics for Two or More Genes 273 Nature and Nurture: The Environmental Impact on Phenotype 274 OVERVIEW

CONCEPT 14.1

, "1",..-

•

{

'1\ I } t 1 1 \., 1 ! , 1 1 •• , •~ I

,

~

}

J~ I

\

"

f

•

Integrating a Mendelian View of Heredity and Variation 275 CONCEPT 14.4 Many human traits follow Mendelian patterns of inheritance 276 Pedigree Analysis 276 Recessively Inherited Disorders 277 Dominantly Inherited Disorders 278 Multifactorial Disorders 279 Genetic Testing and Counseling 279

15 The Chromosomal Basis of Inheritance 286 Locating Genes Along Chromosomes 286 Mendelian inheritance has its physical basis in the behavior of chromosomes 286 Morgan's Experimental Evidence: Scientific Inquiry 288 CONCEPT 15.2 Sex-linked genes exhibit unique patterns of inheritance 289 The Chromosomal Basis of Sex 289 Inheritance of Sex-Linked Genes 290 X Inactivation in Female Mammals 291 COPolCEPT 15.3 Linked genes tend to be inherited together because they are located near each other on the same chromosome 292 How Linkage Affects Inheritance 292 Genetic Recombination and Linkage 293 Mapping the Distance Between Genes Using Recombination Data: Scientific Inquiry 294 CONCEPT 15.4 Alterations of chromosome number or structure caUSe some genetic disorders 297 Abnormal Chromosome Number 297 Alterations of Chromosome Structure 298 Human Disorders Due to Chromosomal Alterations 299 COPolCEPT 15.5 Some inheritance pallerns are exceptions to the standard chromosome theory 300 Genomic Imprinting 300 Inheritance of Organelle Genes 30 1 OVERVIEW

COPolCEPT 1 S. 1

16 The Molecular Basis of Inheritance 305 Life's Operating Instructions 305 DNA is the genetic material 305 The Search for the Genetic Material: Scientific Inquiry 305 Building a Structuml Model ofDNA:Scientific Inquiry 308 CONCEPT 16.2 Many proteins work together in DNA replication and repair 311 The Basic Principle: Base Pairing to a Template Strand 311 DNA Replication: A Closer Look 312 Proofreading and Repairing DNA 316 Replicating the Ends of DNA Molecules 318 COPolCEPT 16.3 A chromosome consists of a DNA molecule packed together with proteins 320 OVERVIEW

COPolCEPT 16.1

Detailed Contents

xxxv

17 From Gene to Protein

325

The Flow of Genetic Information 325 CONCE" 11.1 Genes specify proteins via transcription and translation 325 OVERVIEW

Evidence from the Study of Metabolic Defects 325

Basic Principles of Transcription and Translation 328 The Genetic Code 328 CONCO' 11.2 Transcriplion is the DNA-directed synthesis of RNA: a closer look 331 Molecular Components of Transcription 331

Synthesis ofan RNA Transcript 332 COHCEPT 11.1 EuhryOlic cells modify RNA after transcription 334 Alteration ofmRNA Ends

334

Split Genes and RNA Splicing 334 CONCEPT 11.• Translation is the R A-direcled synthesis of a polypeptide: a clOS4!r look 337 i\'lolecular Components of Translation

337

Building a Polypeptide 340 Completing and Targeting the Functional Protein 342

CONCEPT 11.5 Point mutations can affect protein structure and function 344 Types of Point ~lutations 344 Mutagens 346 COHCO' 11.1 While gene expression differs among the domains of life, the concept of a gene is universal 346 Comparing Gene Expression in Bacteria, Archaea, and Eukarya 346 \,('hat Is a Gene? Revisiting the Question 347

18 Regulation of Gene Expression

351

OVEllVIEW Conducting the Genetic Orchestra 351 CONU" n.1 Bacteria often respond to environmental change by regulating transcription 351 Operons: The Basic Concept 352 Repressible and Inducible Operons: Two Types of Negative Gene Regulation 353 Positive Gene Regulation 355 CONCEPT n.l Eukaryotic gene expression can be regulated at any stage 356 Differential Gene Expression 356 Regulation of Chromatin Structure 356 Regulation of Transcription Initiation 358 Mechanisms of Post-Transcriptional Regulation 362 CONClPT , •.] Noncoding RNAs play multiple roles in controlling gene expression 364 Effects on mRNAs by MicroRNAs and Small Interfering RNAs 365 Chromatin Remodeling and Silencing of Transcription by Small RNAs 366 CON CO, 11.4 A program of differential gene expression leads to the different cell types in a multicellular organism 366 AGenetic Program for Embryonic Development 366 Cytoplasmic Determinants and Inductive Signals 367 Sequential Regulation of Gene Expression During Cellular Differentiation 368 Pattern Formation: Setting Up the Body Plan 369 COHU" ".5 Cancer results from genetic changes that affect cell cycle control 373 Types of Genes Associated with Cancer 373 Interference with Normal Cell-Signaling Pathways 374 xxxvi

Detailed Contents

The Multistep Model of Cancer Development 376 Inherited Predisposition and Other Factors Contributing to Cancer 377

19 Viruses

381

OVEIIVIEW A Borrowed life 381 COHU" n.1 A virus consists of a nucleic acid surrounded by a protein co.at 381 The Discovery of Viruses: Scientific Inquiry 381 Structure of Viruses 382 CONelPT n.l Viruses reproduce only in host cells 384 General Features of Viral Reproductive Cycles 384 Reproductive C)'cles of Phages 385 Reproductive C)'c1es of Animal Viruses 387 Evolution of Viruses 390 COHClH ".) Viruses, viroids, and prions are formidable pathogens in animals and plants 390 Viral Diseases in Animals 390 Emerging Viruses 391 Viral Diseases in Plants 393 Viroids and Prions: The Simplest Infectious Agents 393

20 Biotechnology 396 oVEllvnw The DNA Toolbox 396 CONU" n.1 DNA cloning yields multiple copies of a gene or other DNA segment 396 DNA Coning and Its Applications: A Preview 397 Using Restriction Enzymes to Make Recombinant DNA 398 Cloning a Eukaryotic Gene in a Bacterial Plasmid 398 Expressing Cloned Eukaryotic Genes 403 Amplifying DNA in Vitro: The Polymerase Chain Reaction (PeR) 403 COHClH lO.l DNA technology allows us to study the sequence, expression, and function of a gene 405 Gel Electrophoresis and Southern Blotting 405 DNA Sequencing 409 Analyzing Gene Expression 409 Determining Gene Function 411 CONCEH lo.J Cloning organisms may lead to production of stem cells for research and other applications 412 Cloning Plants: Single-Cell Cultures 412 Cloning Animals: Nuclear Transplantation 412 Stem Cells of Animals 415 CONCl~' 10.4 The practical applications of DNA technology affect our lives in many ways 416 Medical Applications 416 Forensic Evidence and Genetic Profiles 419 Environmental Cleanup 420 Agricultural Applications 421 Safety and Ethical Questions Raised by DNA Technology 422

21 Genomes and Their Evolution 426 OVUVIlW Reading the lea\'es from the Tree of life 426 COHCl" l1.' New approaches have accelerated the pace of genome sequencing 427 Three-Stage Approach to Genome Sequencing 427 Whole-Genome Shotgun Approach to Genome Sequencing 428 CONClH l1.l Scientists use bioinformatics to analyze genomes and their functions 429

Centralized Resources for Analyzing Genome Sequences 429 Identifying Protein-Coding Genes \Vithin DNA Sequences 429 Understanding Genes and Their Products at the Systems Level 431 CONCl" 11.] Genomes vary in size, numbtr of genes, and gene density 432 Genome Size 432 Number of Genes 432 Gene Density and Noncoding DNA 433 CONU" 11.4 Multicellular eukaryotes have much noncoding DNA and many multigene families 434 Transposable Elements and Related Sequences 435 Other Repetitive DNA, Including Simple Sequence DNA 436 Genes and Multigene Families 436 CONCl" 11.S Duplication, rearrangement, and mutation of D A contribute to genome evolution 438 Duplication of Entire Chromosome Sets 438 Alterations of Chromosome Structure 438 Duplication and Divergence of Gene~Silt"d Regions of DNA 439 Rearrangements of Parts of Genes: bon Duplication and bon Shuffling 440 How Transposable Elements Contribute to Genome Evolution 441 CONU" 21.1 Comparing genome sequences provides clues to e~'olution and development 442 Comparing Genomes 442 Comparing Developmental Processes 445

UNIT FOUR

Interview with Scott V. Edwards

Mechanisms of Evolution 450 22 Descent with Modification: A Darwinian View of life 452 OVlltVllW Endless Forms Most Beautiful 452 CONCHT 11.1 The Darwinian revolution challenged traditional views of a young Earth inhabited by unchanging species 452 Scala Natllrae and Classification of Species 453 Ideas About Change over lime 453 Lamarck's Hypothesis of Evolution 454 CONCl~' 2l.l Descent with modification by natural selection erplains the adaptations of organisms and the unity and diversity of life 455 Darwin's Research 455 The Origin ofSpecjeJ

CONCE,r 23.1 Mutation and sexual reproduction produce the genetic variation that makes evolution possible 468 Genetic Variation 469 Mutation 470 Sexual Reproduction 471 CON COT U1 The Hardy-Weinberg equation can be used 10 test whether a population is evolving 472 Gene Pools and Allele Frequencies 472 The Hardy-Weinberg Principle 472 CONCI" ll.] Natural seleclion, genetic drift, and gene flow can alter allele frequencies in a population 475 Natural Selection 475 Genetic Drift 475 Gene Flow 478 CONU" 1U atural selection is the only mechanism thai consistently nuses adapti\'C evolution 479 A Ooser Look at Natural Selection 479 The Key Role of Natural Selection in Adaptive Evolution 481 Sexual Selection 481 The Preservation of Genetic Variation 483 Why Natural Selection Cannot Fashion Perfect Organisms 484

24 The Origin of Species 487 OV(lIVI(W That "'Mystery of Mysteries'" 487 CONCHr 24.1 The biological species concept emphasizes reproducti~'e isolation 487 The Biological Species Concept 488 Other Definitions of Species 492 CONCl" 14.1 Speciation can take place with or without geographic separation 492 Allopatric rOther Country~) Speciation 492 Sympatric rSame CountryM) Speciation 495 Allopatric and Sympatric Speciation: A Review 497 CONU" 24.1 Hybrid zones provide opportunities to study factors that cause reproductive isolation 498 Patterns \Vithin Hybrid Zones 498 Hybrid Zones over TIme 499 CONUPT 14.4 Speciation can occur rapidly or slowly and Can result from changes in few or many genes 501 The Time Course of Speciation 502 Studying the Genetics of Speciation 503 From Speciation to Macroevolution 504

457

CONU" 11.] Evolution is supported by an O\'erwhelming amount of scientific evidence 460 Direct Observations of Evolutionary Change 460 The Fossil Record 46t Homology 463 Biogeography 465 \VIlat Is Theoretical About Darwin's View of Life? 465

23 The Evolution of Populations 468 OVlItVllW The Smallesl Unit of holution 468 Derailed Contents

xxxvii

25 The History of Life on Earth

507

lost Worlds 507 CONCErT 15.1 Conditions on early Earth made the origin of life possible 507 Synthesis of Organic Compounds on Early Earth 508 OVERVIEW

Abiotic Synthesis of Macromolecules 509 Protobionts 509 Self-Replicating RNA and the Dawn of Natural Selection 509

The fossil record documents the history of life 510 The Fossil RKord 510 How Rocks and Fossils Are Dated 510 The Origin of New Groups ofOrganisms 512 CONUrT 15.1 Key e\'enls in life's history include the origins of single-celled and rnullicelled organisms and the colonization of land 514 CONCEPT 1U

The First Single-Celled Organisms 514 The Origin of i\'lulticellularity 517 The Colonization of land 518 CONCEPT lS... 1he rise and rail of dominant groups reflect conlinental drift, mass extinctions, and adaptive radiations 519

Continental Drift

519

~'Iass

Extinctions 521 Adaptive Radiations 523 CONCE~T 25.5 Major manges in body form can result from manges in the sequences and regulillion of dc\'clopmcntill gcnes 525 Evolutionary Effects of Developmental Genes 525 The Evolution of Development 527 CONCEPT 15.6 Evolution is not gOilI oriented 529 Evolutionary Novelties 529 Evolutionary Trends 530

UNIT FIVE

fntery;ew with Sean B. Carroll

The Evolutionary History of Biological Diversity 534 26 Phylogeny and the Tree of Life

536

OIlERVIEW Investigating the Trec of Lifc 536 COIoIaI'Tn.l Phylogenies show cvolutionary relationships 537 Binomial Nomenclature 537 Hierarchical Classification 537 Linking Classification and Phylogeny 538 What \~'e Can and Cannot learn from Phylogenetic Trees 539 Applying Phylogenies 539 CONCE" U.2 Phylogenies i1Te inferred from morphological and moleculilr data 540 Morphological and Molecular Homologies 540 Sorting Homolog)' from Analogy- 54(1 Evaluating Molecular Homologies 541 CONCE" u.) Shared characters arc used to construct phylogenetic trees 542 Oadistics 542 Phylogenetic Trees with Proportional Brandt L.engths 544 Maximum Parsimony and Maximum likelihood 544 Ph}1ogenetic Trees as Hypotheses 547 xxxviii

Detailed Contents

CONCEPT 2U An organism's evolutionary history is documented in ils genome 548 Gene Duplications and Gene Families 548 Genome Evolution 549 CONCEPT u.s Molecular clocks help track evolutionary tinle 549 Molecular Clocks 549 Applying a Molecular Clock: The Origin of HIV 550 CONCE" u., New information conlinues to revise our understanding of the tree of life 551 From Two Kingdoms to Three Domains 551 A Simple Tree of All Life 552 Is the TreeofLfe Really a Ring? 553

27 Bacteria and Archaea

556

OIlUVIEW Masters of Adaptation 556 CONCUT H.l Structural and functional adilplations contribute 10 prokaryotic success 556 Cell-Surface Structures 557 Motility 558 Internal and Genomic Organization 559 Reproduction and Adaptation 559 CONCEPT H.1 Rapid reproduction, mutation, and genetic recombinalion promote genelic diversity in prokaryotes 561 Rapid Reproduction and Mutation 561 Genetic Recombination 561 CONCEPT 11.' Diverse nulritional and metabolic adaptalions have evolved in prokaryotes 564 The Role of Oxygen in Metabolism 564Nitrogen Metabolism 565 Metabolic Cooperation 565 CONCEPT 11,. Molecular systemalics is illuminating prokaryotic phylogeny 565 lessons from Molecular Systematics 566 Archaea 566 Bacteria 567 CONC!PTll.5 Prokaryotes play crucial roles in Ihe biosphere 570 Chemical Recycling 570 Ecologicallnteractions 570 CONCE~T H.6 Prokaryotes have both harmful and beneficial impacts on humans 571 Pathogenic Bacteria 571 Prokaryotes in Research and Technology- 572

28 Protists

575

OVUlIlEW living Small 575 CONCEPT n.1 Mosl eukaryotes are single-celled organisms 575 Structural and Functional Diversity in Protists 576 Endosymbiosis in Eukaryotic Evolution 576 Five Supergroups ofEukarrotes 576 CONCEPT n.1 Excavates include prolists with modified mitochondria and protists wilh unique Oagella 580 Diplomonads and Parabasalids 580 Euglenozoans 580 CONCEPT 11.) Chromal\'coliltes may have originated by secondary endosymbiosis 582 Alveolates 582 Stramenopiles 585

CONCEPT 28.4 Rhizarians are a diverse group of protists defined by DNA similarities 589 Forams 589 Radiolarians 589 CONCEPT 28.5 Red algae and green algae are the closest relatives of land plants 590 Red Algae 590 Green Algae 591 CONCEPT 28.6 Unikonts include protists that arc closely related to fungi and animals 593 Amoebozoans 594 Opisthokonts 596 CONCEPT 28.7 Protists play key roles in ecological relationships 596 Symbiotic Protists 596 Photosynthetic Protists 597

29 Plant Diversity I: How Plants Colonized Land 600 The Greening of Earth 600 CONCEPT 29.1 land plants evolved from green algae 600 Morphological and Molecular Evidence 600 Adaptations Enabling the Move to Land 601 Derived Traits of Plants 601 The Origin and Diversification of Plants 604 CONCEPT 29.2 Mosses and other nonvascular plants have life cycles dominated by gametophytes 606 Bryophyte Gametophytes 606 Bryophyte Sporophytes 609 The Ecological and Economic Importance of Mosses 609 CONCEPT 29.3 Ferns and other seedless vascular plants were the first plants to grow tall 610 Origins and Traits of Vascular Plants 610 Classification of Seedless Vascular Plants 613 The Significance of Seedless Vascular Plants 615 OVERVIEW

30 Plant Diversity II: The Evolution of Seed Plants 618 Transforming the World 618 Seeds and pollen grains arc key adaptations for life on land 618 Advantages of Reduced Gametophytes 618 Heterospory: The Rule Among Seed Plants 619 Ovules and Production of Eggs 619 Pollen and Production of Sperm 620 The Evolutionary Advantage of Seeds 620 CONCEPT 30.2 Gymnosperms bear "naked" seeds, typically on cones 621 Gymnosperm Evolution 621 The Life Cycle of a Pine: A Closer Look 625 CONCEPT 30.3 The reproductive adaptations of angiosperms include flowers and fruits 625 Characteristics of Angiosperms 625 Angiosperm Evolution 628 Angiosperm Diversity 630 Evolutionary Links Between Angiosperms and Animals 630 CONCEPT 30.4 Human welfare depends greatly on seed plants 632 Products from Seed Plants 633 Threats to Plant Diversity 633 OIlERVIEW

CONCEPT 30.1

•

•

31 Fungi 636 Mighty Mushrooms 636 Fungi are heterotrophs that feed by absorption 636 Nutrition and Ecology 636 Body Structure 637 CONCEPT 31.2 Fungi produce spores through sexual or asexual life cycles 638 Sexual Reproduction 639 Asexual Reproduction 639 CONCEPT H.3 The ancestor of fungi was an aquatic, single. celled, flagellated protist 640 The Origin of Fungi 640 Are Microsporidia Closely Related to Fungi? 641 The Move to Land 641 CONCEPT 31.4 Fungi have radiated into a diverse set of lineages 641 Chytrids 641 Zygomycetes 643 Glomeromycetes 644 Ascomycetes 644Basidiomycetes 646 CONCEPT H.5 Fungi play key roles in nutrient cycling, ecological interactions, and human welfare 648 Fungi as Decomposers 648 Fungi as Mutualists 648 Fungi as Pathogens 650 Practical Uses of Fungi 651 OVERVIEW

CONCEPT 31.1

32 An Introduction to Animal Diversity 654 Welcome to Your Kingdom 654 Animals are multicellular, heterotrophic eukaryotes with tissues that develop from embryonic layers 654 Nutritional Mode 654 Cell Structure and Specialization 654 Reproduction and Development 655 CONCEPT 32.2 The history of animals spans more than half a billion years 656 Neoproterozoic Em (l BiUion-542 Million Years Ago) 656 Paleozoic Era (542-251 Million Years Ago) 657 Mesozoic Era (251-65.5 Million Years Ago) 657 Cenozoic Enl (65.5 Million Years Ago to the Present) 658 OVERVIEW

CONCEPT 32.1

Detailed Contents

xxxix

CONCEPT 32.3 Animals can be characterized by Ubody plansH 658 Symmetry 659 Tissues 659 Body Cavities 659 Protostome and Deuterostome Development 660 CONCEPT 32.4 New views of animal phylogeny are emerging from molecular data 661 Points of Agreement 662 Progress in Resolving Bilaterian Relationships 662 Future Directions in Animal Systematics 664

33 Invertebrates

666

OIiERVIEW Life Without a Backbone 666 CONCEPT 31.1 Sponges are basal animals that lack true tissues 670 CONCEPT 33.2 Cnidarians are an ancient phylum of eumetazoans 671 Hydrozoans 672 Scyphozoans 672 Cubozoans 672 Anthozoans 673 CONCEPT 33.3 lophotrochozoans, a clade identified by molecular data, have the widest range of animal body forms 674 Flatworms 674 Rolifers 676 Lophophorates: Ectoprocts and Brachiopods 677 Molluscs 677 Annelids 680 CONCEPT 33.4 Ecdysozoans are the most species-rich animal group 683 Nematodes 683 Arthropods 684 CONCEPT 33.5 Echinoderms and chordates are deuterostomes 693 Echinoderms 693 Chordates 695

34 Vertebrates

698

OIiERVIEW Half a Billion Years of Backbones 698 CONCEPT 34.1 Chordates have a notochord and a dorsal, hollow nerve cord 698 Derived Characters of Chordates 699 Lancelets 700 Tunicates 701 Early Chordate Evolution 701 CONCEPT 34.2 Craniates are chordates that have a head 702 Derived Characters of Craniates 702 The Origin of Craniates 703 Hagfishes 703 CONCEPT 34.3 Vertebrates are craniates that have a backbone 704 Derived Characters of Vertebrates 704Lampreys 704 Fossils of Early VeTtebrates 704 Origins of Bone and Teeth 705 CONCEPT 34.4 Gnathostomes are vert('brates that hav(' jaws 705 Derived Characters of Gnathostomes 705 Fossil Gnathostomes 706

xl

Detailed Contents

Chondrichthyans (Sharks, Rays, and Their Relatives) 706 Ray-Finned Fishes and Lobe-Fins 708 CONCEPT 34.S Tetrapods are gnathostomes that have limbs 710 Derived ChaTacters ofTetrapods 710 The Origin of Tetrapods 710 Amphibians 711 CONCEPT 34.6 Amniot('s ar(' t('trapods that hav(' a tNr('strially adapt('d ('gg 713 Derived Characters of Amniotes 713 Early Amniotes 715 Reptiles 715 CONCEPT 34.7 Mammals are amniotes that have hair and produce milk 720 Derived Characters of Mammals 720 Early Evolution of Mammals 721 Monotremes 722 Marsupials 722 Eutherians (Placental Mammals) 723 CONCEPT 34.8 Humans are mammals that have a large brain and bipedal locomotion 728 Derived Characters of Humans 728 The Earliest Hominins 728 Australopiths 729 Bipedalism 730 Tool Use 730 Early Homo 731 Neanderthals 731 Homo Sapiens 732 I!mI:IEIlnterJiieW with Patricia Zambryski

Plant Form and Function 736 35 Plant Structure, Growth, and Development 738 OIiERVIEW Plastic Plants? 738 CONCEPT 35.1 The plant body has a hierarchy of organs, tissues, and cells 738 The Three Basic Plant Organs: Roots, Stems, and Leaves 739 Dermal, Vascular, and Ground TIssues 742 Common Types of Plant Cells 743 CONCEPT 35.2 M('rist('ms g('l'l('rat(' cdls for new organs 746 CONCEPT 35.3 Primary growth length('ns roots and shoots 747 Primary Growth of Roots 747 Primary Growth of Shoots 749 CONCEPT 35.4 Secondary growth adds girth to stems and roots in woody plants 751 The Vascular Cambium and Secondary Vascular TIssue 751 The Cork Cambium and the Production of Periderm 754 CONCEPT 35.5 Growth, morphogenesis, and differentiation produce the plant body 755 Molecular Biology: Revolutionizing the Study of Plants 755 Growth: Cell Division and Cell Expansion 755 Morphogenesis and Pattern Formation 757 Gene Expression and Control of Cellular Differentiation 758

Soil is a living, finit(' r('sourc(' 785 Soil Texture 786 Topsoil Composition 786 Soil Conservation and Sustainable Agriculture 787 CONCEPT 37.2 Plants require essential elements to complete their life cycle 789 Macronutrients and Micronutrients 790 Symptoms of Mineral Deficiency 790 Improving Plant Nutrition by Genetic Modification: Some Examples 792 CONCEPT 37.3 Plant nutrition often involves relationships with oth('r organisms 792 Soil Bacteria and Plant Nutrition 793 Fungi and Plant Nutrition 795 Epiphytes, Parasitic Plants, and Carnivorous Plants 797 CONCEPT 37.1

Location and a Cell's Developmental Fate 759 Shifts in Development: Phase Changes 759 Genetic Control of Flowering 760

38 Angiosperm Reproduction and Biotechnology 801 Flowers of Deceit 801 Flowers, double fertilization, and fruits are unique features of the angiosperm life cycle 801 Flower Structure and Function 802 Double Fertilization 806 Seed Development, Form, and Function 807 Fruit Form and Function 809 CONCEPT 38.2 Flowering plants reproduce sexually, asexually, or both 812 Mechanisms of Asexual Reproduction 812 Advantages and Disadvantages of Asexual Versus Sexual Reproduction 812 Mechanisms That Prevent Self-Fertilization 813 Vegetative Propagation and Agriculture 814 CONCEPT 31.3 Humans modify crops by breeding and genetic engineering 815 Plant Breeding 815 Plant Biotechnology and Genetic Engineering 816 The Debate over Plant Biotechnology 817 OVERVIEW

36 Resource Acquisition and Transport in Vascular Plants

764

Underground Plants 764 CONCEPT 36.1 land plants acquire resources both above and below ground 764 Shoot Architecture and Light Capture 765 Root Architecture and Acquisition of Water and Minerals 766 CONCEPT 36.1 Transport occurs by short-distance diffusion or active transport and by long-distance bulk flow 767 Diffusion and Active Transport of Solutes 767 Diffusion of Water (Osmosis) 768 Three Major Pathways of Transport 771 Bulk Flow in Long-Distance Transport 771 CONCEPT 36.3 Water and minerals are transported from roots to shoots 772 Absorption of Water and Minerals by Root Cells 772 Transport of Water and Minerals into the Xylem 772 Bulk Flow Driven by Negative Pressure in the Xylem 773 Xylem Sap Ascent by Bulk Flow: A Review 776 CONCEPT 36.4 Stomata help regulate the rate of transpiration 776 Stomata: Major Pathways for Water Loss 776 Mechanisms of Stomatal Opening and Closing m Stimuli for Stomatal Opening and Closing 777 Effects of Transpiration on Wilting and Leaf Temperature 778 Adaptations That Reduce Evaporative Water Loss 778 CONCEPT 36.S Sugars are transported from leaves and other sources to sites of use or storage 779 Movement from Sugar Sources to Sugar Sinks 779 Bulk Flow by Positive Pressure: The Mechanism of Translocation in Angiosperms 780 CONCEPT 36.6 Th(' symplast is highly dynamic 781 Plasmodesmata: Continuously Changing Structures 781 Electrical Signaling in the Phloem 782 Phloem: An Information Superhighway 782 OVERVIEW

37 Soil and Plant Nutrition llself"

785

"The Nation that Destroys Its Soil Destroys 785

OVERVIEW

CONCEPT 31.1

39 Plant Responses to Internal and External Signals 821 Stimuli and a Stationary Life 821 Signal transduction pathways link signal reception to response 821 Reception 822 Transduction 822 Response 823 CONCEPT 39.2 Plant hormones help coordinate growth, development, and responses to stimuli 824 The Discovery of Plant Hormones 825 A Survey of Plant Hormones 827 Systems Biology and Hormone Interactions 834 CONCEPT 3'.3 Responses to light are critical for plant success 835 Blue-Light Photoreceptors 836 Phytochromes as Photoreceptors 836 Biological Clocks and Circadian Rhythms 838 The Effect of Light on the Biological Clock 838 Photoperiodism and Responses to Seasons 839 CONCEPT 39.4 Plants r('spond to a wide variety of stimuli other than light 841 OVERVIEW

CONCEPT 39.1

Detailed Contents

xli

Gravity 841 Mechanical Stimuli 842 Environmental Stresses 843 CONCEn l U Plants respond to allacks by herbivores and pathogens 845 Defenses Against Herbivores 845 Defenses Against Pathogens 846

UNIT SEVEN

Interview with Mruashi Yanagisawa

Animal Form and Function 850 40 Basic Principles of Animal Form and Function 852 Di\'erse Forms, Common Cltallenges 852 Animal form and function are correlated at allle\'els of organization 852 Physical Constraints on Animal Size and Shape 853 Exchange with the Environment 853 Hiernrchical Organization of Body Plans 855 TIssue Structure and Function 855 Coordination and Control 859 CONCEn 40.J Feedback control loops maintain the internal environment in many animals 860 Regulating and Conforming 860 Homeostasis 861 CONCE" 40.1 Homeostatic processes for thermoregulation involve form, function, and behavior 862 Endothermy and Ectolhermy 862 Variation in Body Temperature 863 Balancing Heal Loss and Gain 863 Acclimatization in Thermoregulation 867 Physiological Thermostats and Fever 868 CONCEn 40.4 Energy requirements are related to animal size, activity, and environment 868 Energy Allocation and Use 869 Quantifying Energy Use 869 Minimum Metabolic Rate and Thermoregulation 869 Influences on Metabolic Rate 870 Energy Budgets 871 Torpor and Energy Conservation 871 OVERVIEW

CONCEn 40.1

41 Animal Nutrition 875 The Need to Feed 875 An animal's diet must supply chemical energy, organic molecules, and essential nutrients 875 Essential Nutrients 876 Dietary Deficiencies 879 Assessing Nutritional Needs 879 CONCE'T 4U The main stages of food processing are ingestion, digestion, absorption, and elimination 880 Digestive Compartments 882 CONCEn 41.1 Organs specialized for sequential stages of food processing form the mammalian digesli\'C system 884 The Oral Cavity, Pharynx, and Esophagus 884 Digestion in the Stomach 885 Digestion in the Small Intestine 887 Absorption in the Small Intestine 888 Absorption in the Large Intestine 890 OVERVIEW

CONCEn ... 1

xlii

DetlIiled Contents

CONCEPT 41,4 Evolutionary adaptations of vertebrate digestive systems correlate with diet 891 Some Dental Adaptations 891 Stomach and Intestinal Adaptations 891 Mutualistic Adaptations 892 CONCIPT 41.5 Homeostatic mechanisms contribute to an animal's energy balance 893 Energy Sources and Stores 893 Overnourishment and Obesity 894 Obesity and Evolution 895

42 Circulation and Gas Exchange 898 Trading Places 898 Circulatory systems link excltange surfaces with cells throughout the body 898 Gastrovascular Cavities 899 Open and Closed Circulatory Systems 899 Organization of Vertebrate Circulatory Systems 900 CON CO, U.J Coordinated cycles of heart contraction drive double circulation in mammals 903 Mammalian Circulation 903 The to.lammalian Heart: A Closer Look 904 ~. Iaintaining the Heart's Rhythmic Beat 905 CONCEPT U.l Patterns of blood pressure and flow reflect the structure and arrangement of blood vessels 906 Blood Vessel Structure and Function 906 Blood Flow Velocity 906 Blood Pressure 907 Capillary Function 909 Fluid Return by the Lymphatic System 910 CONCE'T 4J,4 8100d components function in exchange, transport, and defense 911 Blood Composition and Function 911 Cardiovascular Disease 914 CONCE~T 4J.S Gas exchange occurs across specialized respiratory surfaces 915 Partial Pressure Gradients in Gas Exchange 915 Respiratory Media 916 Respiratory Surfaces 916

OVEIIVIEW

CONCEPT 4J,1

Gills in Aquatic Animals 917 Tracheal Systems in Insects 918 lungs 918 CONCEPT 42.6 Breathing ventilates the lungs 920 How an Amphibian Breathes 920 Howa Mammal Breathes 920 Howa BiTd BTeathes 921 Control of Breathing in Humans 921 CONCEPT 42.7 Adaptations for gas elCchange include pigments that bind and transport gases 923 Coordination of Circulation and Gas Exchange 923 Respiratory Pigments 923 Elite Animal Athletes 925

43 The Immune System

930

OVERVIEW Reconnaissance, Recognition, and Response 930 CONCEPT 43.1 In innate immunity, recognition and response rely on shared traits of pathogens 931 Innate Immunity of Invertebrates 931 Innate Immunity of Vertebrates 933 Innate Immune System Evasion by Pathogens 936 CONCEPT 43.2 In acquired immunity, lymphocyte receptors provide pathogen-specific recognition 936 Acquired Immunity: An Overview 936 Antigen Recognition by lymphocytes 936 lymphocyte Development 939 CONCEPT 43.3 Acquired immunity defends against infection of body cells and fluids 942 Helper T Cells: A Response to Nearly All Antigens 943 Cytotoxic T Cells: A Response to Infected Cells 943 B Cells: A Response to Extracellular Pathogens 944 Active and Passive Immunization 947 Immune Rejection 947 CONCEPT 43.4 Disruptions in immune system function can elicit or elCacerbate disease 948 Exaggerated, Self-Directed, and Diminished Immune Responses 948 Acquired Immune System Evasion by Pathogens 950 Cancer and Immunity 951

44 Osmoregulation and Excretion

954

OVERVIEW A Balancing Act 954 CONCEPT 44.1 Osmoregulation balances the uptake and loss of water and solutes 954 Osmosis and Osmolarity 954 Osmotic Challenges 955 EneTgetics of Osmoregulation 957 Transport Epithelia in Osmoregulation 958 CONCEPT 44.2 An animal's nitrogenous wastes reflect its phylogeny and habitat 959 Forms of Nitrogenous Waste 959 The Influence of Evolution and Environment on Nitrogenous Wastes 960 CONCEPT 44.3 Diverse excretory systems are variations on a tubular theme 960 ExcretoTy Processes %1 Survey of Excretory Systems 961 Structure ofthe Mammalian Excretory System 963 CONCEPT 44.4 The nephron is organized for stepwise processing of blood filtrate 964 From Blood Filtrate to Urine: A Closer Look %5 Solute Gradients and Water Conservation 966

Adaptations of the Vertebrate Kidney to Diverse Environments 968 CONCEPT 44.S Hormonal circuits link kidney function, water balance, and blood pressure 969 Antidiuretic Hormone 969 The Renin-Angiotensin-Aldosterone System 971 Homeostatic Regulation of the Kidney 972

45 Hormones and the Endocrine System

975

OVERVIEW The Body's long-Distance Regulators 975 CONCEPT 45.1 Hormones and other signaling molecules bind to target receptors, triggering specific response pathways 975 Types of Secreted Signaling Molecules 976 Chemical Classes of Hormones 977 Hormone Receptor location: Scientific Inquiry 977 Cellular Response Pathways 978 Multiple Effects of Hormones 979 Signaling by local Regulators 980 CONCEPT 45.2 Negative feedback and antagonistic hormone pairs are common features of the endocrine system 981 Simple Hormone Pathways 981 Insulin and Glucagon: Control of Blood Glucose 982 CONCEPT 4S.3 The endocrine and nervous systems act individually and together in regulating animal physiology 984 Coordination of Endocrine and Nervous Systems in Invertebrates 984 Coordination of Endocrine and Nervous Systems in Vertebrates 984 Posterior Pituitary Hormones 986 Anterior Pituitary Hormones 988 CONCEPT 4S.4 Endocrine glands respond to diverse stimuli in regulating metabolism, homeostasis, development, and behavior 990 Thyroid Hormone: Control of Metabolism and Development 990 Parathyroid Hormone and Vitamin D: Control of Blood Calcium 991 Adrenal Hormones: Response to Stress 991 Gonadal Sex Hormones 993 Melatonin and Biorhythms 994

46 Animal Reproduction

997

OVERVIEW Pairing Up for Sexual Reproduction 997 CONCEPT 4&.1 Both asexual and sexual reproduction occur in the animal kingdom 997 Mechanisms of Asexual Reproduction 997 Sexual Reproduction: An Evolutionary Enigma 998 Reproductive Cycles and Patterns 999 CONCEPT 46.3 Fertilization depends on mechanisms that bring together sperm and eggs of the same species 1000 Ensuring the Survival of Offspring 1001 Gamete Production and Delivery 1001 CONCEPT 46.3 Reproductive organs produce and transport gametes 1003 Female Reproductive Anatomy 1003 Male Reproductive Anatomy 1005 Human Sexual Response 1006 Detailed Contents

xliii

CONCE~' .5.• The timing ilnd pallern of meiosis in mammals differ for males and females 1007 CONCE~' n.s The interplay of tropic and sex hormones regulates mammalian reproduction 1007 Hormonal Control of the J\-1ale Reproductive System 1010 The Reproductive Cycles of Females 1010 CONCEH n.5 In placental mammals, an embryo de,"elops fully within the mother's uterus 1012 Conception, Embryonic Development, and Birth 1013 Maternal Immune Tolerance of the Embryo and Fetus 1016 Contraception and Abortion 1016 Modern Reproductive Technologies 1018

47 Animal Development 1021 OVUVIEW A Body-Building Plan 1021 CONCEH .'.1 After fertilization, embryonic development proceeds through cleavage, gastrulation, and organogenesis 1022 Fertilization 1022 Cleavage 1025 Gastrulation 1027 Organogenesis 1030 Developmental Adaptations of Amniotes 1033 Mammalian Development 1033 CONCEH.'-2 Morphogenesis in animals invol\'es specific changes in cell shape, position, and adhesion 1035 The Cytoskeleton, Cell Motility, and Convergent Extension 1035 Role of Cell Adhesion J\lolecules and the Extracellular Matrix 1036 CONCEH .,.] The developmental fate of cells depends on their history and on inductive signals 1038 Fale ~'lapping 1038 Establishing Cellular Asymmetries 1040 Cell Fate Determination and Pattern Formation by Inductive Signals 1041

48 Neurons, Synapses, and Signaling 1047 OVERVIEW Lines of Communication 1047 CONCEH .8.1 Neuron organization and structure reflect function in information transfer 1047 Introduction to Information Processing 1048 Neuron Structure and Function 1048 CONCE~' ".2 Ion pumps and ion channels maintain the resting potential of a neuron 1050 Formation of the Resting Potential 1050 Modeling of the Resting Potential 1051 CONCEH .8.] Action potentials are the signals conducted by axons 1052 Production of Action Potentials t052 Generation of Action Potentials: A. Closer Look 1053 Conduction of Action Potentials t055 CONCO' .8.• Neurons communicate with other cells at synapses 1056 Generation of Postsynaptic Potentials 1058 Summation of Postsynaptic Potentials 1058 Modulated Synaptic Transmission 1059 Neurotransmitters t059

xliv

Detailed Contents

49 Nervous Systems 1064 OVUVIEW Command and Control Cenler 1064 CONCEH.'-1 Nervous systems consist of circuits of neurons and supporting cells 1064 Organization of the Vertebrate Nervous System 1065 The Peripheral Nervous System 1068 CONCO' .'.2 The \'ertebrale brain is regionally specialized 1070 The Brainstem 1070 The Cerebellum 1072 The Diencephalon IOn The Cerebrum 1073 Evolution of Cognition in Vertebrates 1074 CONCEH .,.] The cerebral cortex controls voluntary movement and cognitive functions 1075 Information Processing in the Cerebral Cortex 1075 Language and Speech 1076 Lateralization of Cortical Function 1077 Emotions 1077 Consciousness 1078 CONCEPT .,.• Changes in synaptic connections underlie memory and learning 1078 Neural Plasticity 1079 Memory and Learning 1079 Long-Term Potentiation 1080 CONef" .'.s Nen'oos syslem disorders can be explained in molecular terms 1080 Schizophrenia IOSI Depression IOSI Drug Addiction and the Brain Reward System 1082 Alzheimer's Disease 1082 Parkinson's Disease t083 Stem Cell-Based Therapy 1083

50 Sensory and Motor Mechanisms 1087 OVERVIEW Sensing and Acting 1087 CONCE~T sa.1 Sensory receptors Iransduce stimulus energy and transmit signals 10 the central nervous system 1087 Sensory Pathways 1087 Types of Sensory Receptors 1089 CONaP'TSCU The mechanoreceplors responsible for hearing and equilibrium deted moving fluid or settling particles 1091 Sensing of GraVity and Sound in Invertebrates 1092 Hearing and Equilibrium in Mammals 1092 Hearing and Equilibrium in Other Vertebrates 1096 CONCEPr so.] The senses of taste and smell rely on similar sets of st"osory receptors 1096 Tasle in Mammals 1097 Smell in Humans 1098 CONCf~' so.• Similar mechanisms underlie vision throughout the animal kingdom 1099 Vision in Invertebrates 1099 The Vertebrate Visual System ttOO CONCEPT sa.S The physical interaction of protein filaments is required for muscle function 1105 Vertebrate Skeletal Muscle 1105 Other Types of Muscle I11I

CONcur 50.5 Skeletal systems transform muscle conlraction inlo locomotion 1112 Types of Skeletal Systems 1112 Types of Locomotion 1115 Energy Costs of Locomotion 1116

51 Animal Behavior

1120

OVEnlEW Shall We Dance? 1120 CONUH 51.1 Discrete sensory inputs Gin slimulate both simple and compler behaviors 1120 Fixed Action (latterns 1121 Oriented Movement 1122 Behavioral Rhythms 1122 Animal Signals and Communication 1123 CONU'l 51.1 Learning establishes specific links between erperience and bc!havior 1125 Habituation 1125 Imprinting 1126 Spatial Learning 1126 Associative learning 1127 Cognition and Problem Solving 1128 Development of Learned Behaviors 1128 CONcur 51.) Both genelic makeup and environment contribute to the de\'elopment of behaviors 1129 Experience and Behavior 1129 Regulatory Genes and Behavior 1130 Genetically Based Behavioral Variation in Natural Populations 1131 Influence of Single-Locus Variation 1132 CONCEH su Seleclion for individual survival and reproductive success can explain most behaviors 1133 Foraging Behavior 1133 Mating Behavior and Mate Choice 1134 CONU'l 51.5 Inclusive fitness can account for the evolution of altruistic social behavior 1138 Altruism 1138 Inclusive Fitness 1139 Social Learning 114(l Evolution and Human Culture 1142

UNI1 EIGHT

CONU'l n.! Aquatic bionles are diverse and dynamic systems that cover most of Earth 1159 Stratification of Aquatic Biomes 1161 CONcur su The structure and dislribution of terrestrial biomes are conlroll€'d by dimat€' and disturbanc€' 1166 Climate and Terrestrial Biomes 1166 General Features of Terrestrial Biomes and the Role of Disturbance 1167

53 Population Ecology

1174

OVERVIEW Counting Sheep 1174 CONU" Sl.1 Dynamic biological processes influenc€' population density, dispersion, and demographics 1174 Density and Dispersion 1174 Demographics lin CONCE" SJ.2 Ufe history traits are products of natural selection 1179 Evolution and Life History Diversity 1179 "Trade-offs" and Ufe Histories llBO CONU" Sl.J Tht' €'xporn'nlial model describes population growth in an idealized, unlimited environment 1181 PerCapitaRateoflncrease 1181 Exponential Growth 1182 CONCOT su The logistic model describes how a population grows more slowly as it rn'ars its carrying capacity 1183 The logistic Growth Model 1183 The logistic Model and Real Populations 1184 The Logistic Model and Ufe Histories 1185 CONCl" u.s Many factors that regulate population growth are density dependent 1186 Population Change and Population Density 1186 Density-Dependent Population Regulation 1187 Population Dynamics 1188 CONCEH SJ.I The human population is no longer growing erponentially but is still increasing rapidly 1190 The Global Human Population 1190 Global Carrying Capacity 1193

Interview with Diana H. \Vall

Ecology 1146 52 An Introduction to Ecology and the Biosphere 1148 OVUVllW The Scope of Ecology 1148 CONCI" SZ.l Ecology integrates all areas of biological research and informs enviroomenlal decision making 1148 Linking Ecology and Evolutionary Biology IISO Ecology and Environmental Issues 1150 CONUH Sl.l Interactions between organisms and the environment limit Ihe distribution of species 1151 Dispersal and Distribution 1152 Behavior and Habitat Selection 1153 Biotk Factors 1153 Abiotic Factors 1154 Oimate 1155

Detailed COnlt'llU

xlv

54 Community Ecology OVERVIEW

1198

A Sense of Community

1198

Community interactions are classified by whether they help, harm, or have no effect on the species involved 1198 CONCEPl54,'

Competition 1199 Predation 1201 Herbivory 1202 Symbiosis 1202 CONCEPT 54.2

Dominant and keystone species exert strong

controls on community structure 1204 Species Diversity 1204 Trophic Structure 1205 Species with a Large Impact 1207

Bottom-Up and Top-Down Controls CONCEPT 54.3

1209

Characterizing Disturbance 1211 Ecological Succession 1212 Human Disturbance 1214

Biog('ographic factors aff('ct community biodiversity 1214

CONCEPT 54.4

1215

Island Equilibrium Model 1216 Community ecology is useful for understanding pathogen life cydes and controlling human disease 1217 Pathogens and Community Structure 1218 Community Ecology and Zoonotic Diseases 1218

CONCEPT 54,5

1222

Observing Ecosystems 1222 CONCEPT 55.1 Physical laws govern energy flow and chemical cycling in ecosystems 1223 Conservation of Energy 1223 Conservation of Mass 1223 Energy, Mass, and Trophic Levels 1223 CONCEPT 55.1 Energy and other limiting factors control primary production in ecosystems 1224 Ecosystem Energy Budgets 1225 Primary Production in Aquatic Ecosystems 1226 Primary Production in Terrestrial Ecosystems 1227 CONCEPT 55.3 Energy transfer between trophic levels is typically only 10% efficient 1228 Production Efficiency 1228 The Green World Hypothesis 1230 CONCEPT 55.4 Biological and geochemical processes cyde nutrients between organic and inorganic parts of an ecosystem 1231 Biogeochemical Cycles 1231 Decomposition and Nutrient Cycling Rates 1234 Case Study: Nutrient Cycling in the Hubbard Brook Experimental Forest 1234 Ol/ERI/IEW

xlvi

Detailed Contents

Striking Gold 1245 Human activities threaten Earth's biodiversity 1246 Three Levels of Biodiversity 1246 Biodiversity and Human WelfJre 1247 Three Threats to Biodiversity 1248 CONCEPT 5602 Population conservation focuses on population size, genetic dive~ity, and critical habitat 1250 Small-Population Approach 1251 Declining-Population Approach 1253 Weighing Conflicting Demands 1255 CONCEPT 56.3 Landscape and regional conservation aim to sustain entire biotas 1255 Landscape Structure and Biodiversity 1255 Establishing Protected Areas 1257 CONCEPT 56.4 Restoration ecology attempts to restore degraded ecosystems to a more natural state 1260 Bioremediation 1260 Biological Augmentation 1261 Exploring Restoration 1261 CONCEPT 56.5 Sustainable development seeks to improve the human condition while conseIVing biodiversity 1264 Sustainable Biosphere Initiative 1264 Case Study: Sustainable Development in Costa Rica 1264 The Future of the Biosphere 1265 Ol/ERI/IEW

composition 1211

55 Ecosystems

56 Conservation Biology and Restoration Ecology 1245 CONCEPT 56.1

Disturbance influences species diversity and

Latitudinal Gradients Area Effects 1215

CONCEPT 55.5 Human activities now dominate most chemical cycles on Earth 1236 Nutrient Enrichment 1236 Acid Precipitation 1237 Toxins in the Environment 1238 Greenhouse Gases and Global Warming 1239 Depletion of Atmospheric Ozone 1241

APPENDIX A Answers A-l APPENDIX

B

Periodic Table of the Elements

B-1

APPENDIX C The Metric System C-l APPENDIX 0 A Comparison of the light Microscope and the Electron Microscope 0-1 APPENDIX E Classification of Life E-l CREDITS

CR-l

GLOSSARY

INDEX 1-1

G-l

Introductio Themes in the Study of Life KEY

CONCEPTS

1.1

Themes connect the concepts of biology

1.2

The Core Theme: Evolution accounts for the

1.3

unity and diversity of life Scientists use two main forms of inquiry in their study of nature

r;;::~~':About the World of Life

he flower featured on the cover of this book and in Figure 1.1 is from a magnolia, a tree ofancient lineage that is native to Asian and American forests. The magnolia blossom is a sign of the plant's status as a living organism, for flowers contain organs of sexual reproduction, and reproduction is a key property oCHfe, as you will learn later. Like all organisms, the magnolia tree in Figure 1.2 is living in close association with other organisms, though it is a lone specimen far from its ancestral forest. For example, it depends on beetles to carry pollen from one flower to another, and the beetles, in turn, eat from its flowers. The flowers are adapted to the beetles in several ways: Their bowl shape allows easy access, and their multiple reproductive organs and tough petals (see Figure 1.1) help ensure that some survive the voracious beetles. Such adaptations are the result of evolution, the process of change that has transformed life on Earth from its earliest beginnings to the diversity oforganisms living today. As discussed later in this chapter, evolution is the fundamental organizing principle of biology and the main theme of this book. Although biologists know a great deal about magnolias and other plants, many mysteries remain. For instance, what exactly led to the origin of flowering plants? Posing questions about the living world and seeking science-based answersscientific inquiry-are the central activities ofbiology, the sci-

T

... Figure 1.1 What properties of life are demonstrated by this flower?

entific study of life. Biologists' questions can be ambitious. They may ask how a single tiny cen becomes a tree or a dog, how the human mind works, or how the different forms of life in a forest interact. Can you think ofsome questions about living organisms that interest you? When you do, you are already starting to think like a biologist. More than anything else, biology is a quest, an ongoing inquiry about the nature of life. Perhaps some of your questions relate to health or to societal or environmental issues. Biology is woven into the fabric of our culture more than ever before and can help answer many questions that affect our lives. Research breakthroughs in genetics and cell biology are transforming medicine and agriculture. Neuroscience and evolutionary biology are reshaping psychology and sociology. New models in ecology are helping societies evaluate environmental issues, such as global warming. There has never been a more important time to em· bark on a study of life.

... Figure 1.2 A magnolia tree in early spring.

... Order. This close-up of a sunflower illl,lstrates the highly Qrdered strl,lctl.lre that characterizes life.

.... Regulation. The regulation of blood flow through the blood vessels of this jackrabbit's ears helps maintain a constant body temperature by adjusting heat exchange with the surrounding air

.... Energy processing. This hummingbird obtains fuel in the form of nectar from flowers_ The hummingbird will use chemical energy stored in its food to power flight and other work .

.... Reproduction. Organisms (living things) reproduce their own kind . Here an emperor penguin protects Its baby_

• ••

1.3 life. II'S a gasoline-powered lawn mower alive? Which of these properties does it have) Which properties does it lack) .... Figure

Some properties of

But what is life? Even a small child realizes that a dog or a plant is alive, while a rock is not. Yet the phenomenon we call life defies a simple, one-sentence definition. We recognize life by what living things do. Figure 1.3 highlights some of the properties and processes we associate with life. While limited to a handful of images, Figure 1.3 reminds us that the living world is wondrously varied. How do biologists make sense of this diversity and complexity? This opening 2

CIlAPTE~ ONE

Introduction: Themes in the Study ofUfe

chapter sets up a framework for answering this question. The first part of the chapter provides a panoramic view of the biological "landscape;' organized around some unifying themes. We then focus on bioJogy'soverarching theme, evolution, with an introduction to the reasoning that led Charles Darwin to his explanatory theory. Finally, we look at scientific inquiryhow scientists raise and attempt to answer questions about the natural world.

r;~:::;c~~~ect the concepts of biology

Biology is a subject of enormous scope, and anyone who follows the news knows that biological knowledge is expanding at an ever-increasing rate. Simply memorizing the factual details ofthis huge subject is nota reasonable option. How, then, can you, as a student, go beyond the facts to develop a coherent view of life? One approach is to fit the many things you learn into a set of themes that pervade all ofbiology-ways of thinking about life that will still apply decades from now. Focusing on a few big ideas will help you organize and make sense of all the information you'll encounter as you study biology. To help you, we have selected seven unifying themes to serve as touchstones as you proceed through this book.

Evolution, the Overarching Theme of Biology Evolution is biology's core theme-the one idea that makes sense of everything we know about living organisms. Life has been evolving on Earth for billions of years, resulting in a vast diversity of past and present organisms. But along with the diversity we find many shared features. For example, while the sea horse, jackrabbit, hummingbird, crocodile, and penguins in Figure 1.3 look very different, their skeletons are basically similar. The scientific explanation for this unity and diversity-and for the suitability of organisms to their environments-is evolution: the idea that the organisms living on Earth today are the modified descendants of common ancestors. In other words, we can explain traits shared by two organisms with the idea that they have descended from a common ancestor, and we can account for differences with the idea that heritable changes have occurred along the way. Many kinds of evidence support the occurrence of evolution and the theory that describes how it takes place. We'll return to evolution later in the chapter, after surveying some other themes and painting a fuller picture of the scope of biology.

Theme: New properties emerge at each level in the biological hierarchy The study of life extends from the microscopic scale of the molecules and cells that make up organisms to the global scale ofthe entire living planet. We can divide this enormous range into different levels of biological organization. Imagine zooming in from space to take a closer and closer look at life on Earth. It is spring, and our destination is a forest in Ontario, Canada, where we will eventually explore a maple leaf right down to the molecular level. Figure 1.4 (on the next two pages) narrates this journey into life, with the circled numbers leading you through the levels of biological organization illustrated by the photographs.

Emergent Properties Ifwe now zoom back out from the molecular level in Figure 1.4, we can see that novel properties emerge at each step, properties that are not present at the preceding level. These emergent properties are due to the arrangement and interactions of parts as complexity increases. For example, if you make a testtube mixture of chlorophyll and all the other kinds of molecules found in a chloroplast, photosynthesis will not occur. Photosynthesis can take place only when the molecules are arranged in a specific way in an intact chloroplast. To take another example. if a serious head injury disrupts the intricate architecture ofa human brain, the mind may cease to function properly even though all of the brain parts are still present. Our thoughts and memories are emergent properties of a complex network of nerve cells. At a much higher level ofbiological organization-at the ecosystem level-the recycling of chemical elements essential to life, such as carbon, depends on a network ofdiverse organisms interacting with each other and with the soil, water, and air. Emergent properties are not unique to life. We can see the importance of arrangement in the distinction between a box of bicycle parts and a working bicycle. And while graphite and diamonds are both pure carbon, they have very different properties because their carbon atoms are arranged differently. But compared to such nonliving examples, the unrivaled complexity ofbiological systems makes the emergent properties of life especially challenging to study.

The Power and Limitations of Reductionism Because the properties of life emerge from complex organization, scientists seeking to understand biological systems confront a dilemma. On the one hand, we cannot fully explain a higher level of order by breaking it down into its parts. A dissected animal no longer functions; a cell reduced to its chemical ingredients is no longer a cell. Disrupting a living system interferes with its functioning. On the other hand, something as complex as an organism or a cell cannot be analyzed without taking it apart. Reductionism-the reduction of complex systems to simpler components that are more manageable to study-is a powerful strategy in biology. For example, by studying the molecular structure of DNA that had been extracted from cells, James Watson and Francis Crick inferred, in 1953, how this molecule could serve as the chemical basis of inheritance. The central role of DNA in cells and organisms became better understood, however, when scientists were able to study the interactions of DNA with other molecules. Biologists must balance the reductionist strategy with the larger-scale, holistic objective of understanding emergent properties-how the parts of cells, organisms, and higher levels of order, such as ecosystems, work together. At the cutting edge of research today is the approach called systems biology. CHAPTE~ ONE

Introduction: Themes in the Study of Life

3

• FiguN 1,.

Exploring Levels of Biological Organization ... 1 The Biosphere As soon as we are near enough to Earth to make out its continents and oceans, we begin to see signs oflife-in the green mosaic of the planet's forests, for example. This is our first view of the biosphere, which consists of all the environments on Earth that are inhabited by life. The biosphere includes most regions ofland, most bodies of water, and the atmosphere to an altitude of several kilometers.

... 2 Ecosystems As we approadl Earth's surfare fof an imaginary landing in Ontario. we can be~ to make out a forest with an abunc1arxr of deciduous treI'S (treI'S that lose their

leaves in one season and grow new ones in another). Such a deciduous forest is an exam~ of an ealS)"Stem Grasslands, deserts. and. the crean's roral red5 are other types of erosrstems. An ecosystem consists of aU the IMng thing in a particular area, along with aU the nonliving romponents ofthe environment with whidllife interacts, such as soil, water, atmospheric gases, and \ighL All of Earth's eros)'stems combined make up the biosphere.

... 3 Communities The entire array of organisms inhabiting a particular ecosystem is called a biological community. The community in our forest ecosystem includes many kinds of trees and other plants, a diversity of animals, various mushrooms and other fungi, and enormous numbers of diverse microorganisms, which are living forms, such as bacteria, that are too small to see without a microscope. Each of these forms of life is called a

species.

... 4 Populations A population consists of all the individuals of a species living within the bounds ofa specified area. For example, our Ontario forest includes a population of sugar maple trees and a population of white-tailed deer. We can now refine our definition ofa community as the set of populations that inhabit a particular area.

4

(HAHUIONf


... 5 Organisms Individual living thing are called organisms. Each of the maple trees and other plants in the forest is an organism, and so is each forest animal, such as a frog. squirrel. deer, and. beede. 1be soil teems with microorganisms such as bacteria.

• 8 Cells .. 6

Organs and Organ Systems

The structural hierarchy oflife continues to unfold as we explore the architecture ofthe more complex organisms. Amaple leaf is an example ofan organ, a body part consisting of two or more tissues (which we11 see upon our next scale change). An organ carries out a particular function in the body. Stems and roots are the other major organs of plants. Examples of human organs are the brain, heart, and kidney. The organs of humans, other complex animals, and plants are organized into organ systems, each a team oforgans that cooperate in a specific function. For example, the human digestive system includes such organs as the tongue, stomach, and intestines.

The cell is life's fundamental unit of structure and function. Some organisms, such as amoebas and most bacteria, are single cells. Other organisms, including plants and animals, are multicellular. Instead of a single cell performing all the functions ofhfe, a multicellular organism has a division of labor among specialized cells. A human body consists of trillions of microscopic cells of many different kinds, such as muscle cells and nerve cells, which are organized into the various specialized tissues. For example, muscle tissue consists of bundles of muscle cells. In the photo below, we see a more highly magnified view of some of the cells in a leaf tissue. Each of the cells is only about 25 micrometers (11m) I-----------l across. It would take morethan 7000f 10 /1m these cells to reach across a penny. As

~

s~l~~~a~~~~

'vv

that each contains numerous green structures called chloroplasts, which are responsible for photosynthesis.

"'v'"

... 9

Organelles

Cbloroplasts are examples of organelles, the various functional components that make up cells. In this image, a very power· ful tool called an electron microscope brings a single chloroplast into sharp focus.

... 7 Tissues Our next scale changeto see a leaf's tissuesrequires a microscope. The leaf shown here has been cut on an angle. The honeycombed tissue in the interior of the leaf (left portion of photo) is the main location of photosynthesis, the process that converts light energy to the chemical energy of sugar and other food. We are viewing the sliced leaf from a perspective that also enables us to see the jigsaw puzzle-like tissue called epidermis, the "skin" on the surface of the leaf (right part of photo). The pores through the epidermis allow the gas carbon dioxide, a raw material for sugar production, to reach the photosynthetic tissue inside the leaf. At this scale, we can also see that each tissue has a cellular structure. In fact, each kind of tissue is a group of similar cells.

• 10 Molecules 50/lm

Our last scale change vaults us into a chloroplast for a view ofHfe at the molecular level. Amolecule isa chemical structure consisting oftwo or more small chemical units called atoms, which are represented as balls in this computer graphiC ofa chlorophyll molecule. Chlorophyll is the pigment molecule that makes a maple leaf green. One of the most important molecules on Earth, chlorophyll absorbs sunlight during the first step of photosynthesis. Within each chloroplast. millions of chlorophylls and other molecules are organized into the equipment that converts light energy to the chemical energy offood.

CHAPTE~ ONE


5

Systems Biology A system is simply a combination ofcomponents that function together. A biologist can srudy a system at any level of organization. A single leaf cell can be considered a system, as can a frog, an ant colony, or a desert ecosytem_ To understand how such systems work, it is not enough to have a "parts list,n even a complete one. Realizing this, many researchers are now complementing the reductionist approach with new strategies for studying whole systems. This changing perspective is analogous to moving from ground level on a street corner to a helicopter high above a city, from which you can see how variables such as time of day, construction projects, accidents, and traffic-signal malfunctions affect traffic throughout the city. The goal of systems biology is to construct models for the dynamic behavior of whole biological systems. Successful models enable biologists to predict how a change in one or more variables will affect other components and the whole system. Thus, the systems approach enables us to pose new kinds of questions. How might a drug that lowers blood pressure affect the functions of organs throughout the human body? How might increasing a crop's water supply affect processes in the plants, such as the storage of molecules essential for human nutrition? How might a gradual increase in atmospheric carbon dioxide alter ecosystems and the entire biosphere? The ultimate aim of systems biology is to answer big questions like the last one. Systems biology is relevant to the study of life at all levels. During the early years of the 20th century, biologists studying animal physiology (functioning) began integrating data on how multiple organs coordinate processes such as the regulation of sugar concentration in the blood. And in the 1960s, scientists investigating ecosystems pioneered a more mathematically sophisticated systems approach with elaborate models diagramming the network of interactions between organisms and nonliving components of ecosystems such as salt marshes. Such models have already been useful for predicting the responses of these systems to changing variables. More recently, systems biology has taken hold at the cellular and molecular levels, as we'll describe later when we discuss DNA.

affected by the interactions between them. The tree also interacts with other organisms, such as soil microorganisms associated with its roots and animals that eat its leaves and fruit.

Ecosystem Dynamics The operation ofany ecosystem involves two major processes. One process is the cycling of nutrients. For example, minerals acquired by a tree will eventually be returned to the soil by organisms that decompose leaf litter, dead roots, and other organic debris. The second major process in an ecosystem is the one-way flow of energy from sunlight to producers to consumers. Producers are plants and other photosynthetic organisms, which use light energy to make sugar. Consumers are organisms, such as animals, that feed on producers and other consumers. The diagram in Figure 1.5 outlines the h,'o processes acting in an African ecosystem.

Energy Conversion Moving, growing, reproducing, and the other activities of life are work, and work requires energy_ The exchange of energy bety,.-een an organism and its surroundings often involves the transformation of one form ofenergy to another. For example, the leaves ofa plant absorb light energy and convert it to chemical energy stored in sugar molecules. \Vhen an animal's muscle cells use sugar as fuel to power movements, they convert chemical energy to kinetic energy, the energy of motion. And

Ecosystem

Cycling

of

Heal

chemical

nutrients

Theme: Organisms interact with their environments, exchanging matter and energy Turn back again to Figure 1.4, this time focusing on the forest. In this or any other ecosystem, each organism interacts continuously with its environment, which includes both nonliving factors and other organisms. A tree, for example, absorbs water and minerals from the soil, through its roots. At the same time, its leaves take in carbon dioxide from the air and use sunlight absorbed by chlorophyll to drive photosynthesis, converting water and carbon dioxide to sugar and oxygen. The tree releases oxygen to the air, and its roots help form soil by breaking up rocks. Both organism and environment are 6

(IlAPTE~ ONE


Heat

... Figure 1.5 Nutrient cycling and energy flow in an ecosystem.

(a) A bird's wings have an aerodynamically efficient shape

(b) Wing bones have a honeycombed internal structure that is strong but lightweight Infoldings of membrane Mitochondrion

0.5 i1m

(c) The flight muscles are controlled by neurons (nerve cells). which transmit signals. With long extenSions, neurons are espeCially well structured for communication within the body. ... Figure 1.6 Form fits function in a gull's wing, A bird's build and the structures of its components make flight possible. How does form fit function in a human hand?

(d) The flight muscles obtain energy in a usable form from organelles called mitochondria. A mitochondrion has an inner membrane with many infoldings. Molecules embedded in the inner membrane carry out many of the steps in energy produdion, and the Illfoldings pack a large amount of this membrane into a small container.

II

in all these energy conversions, some ofthe energy is converted to thermal energy, which dissipates to the surroundings as heat. In contrast to chemical nutrients, which recycle within an ecosystem, energy flows through an ecosystem, usually entering as light and exiting as heat (see Figure 1.5).

Theme: Cells are an organism's basic units of structure and function

Theme: Structure and function are correlated at all levels of biological organization

In life's structural hierarchy, the cell has a special place as the lowest level of organization that can perform all activities required for life. Moreover, the activities of organisms are all based on the activities ofcells. For instance, the division ofcells to form new cells is the basis for all reproduction and for the growth and repair of multicellular organisms (Figure 1.7). To

Another theme evident in Figure 1.4 is the idea that form fits function, which you'll recognize from everyday life, For example, a screwdriver is suited to tighten or loosen screws, a hammer to pound nails. How a device works is correlated with its structure. AppJied to biology, this theme is a guide to the anatomy ofJife at all its structural levels. An example from Figure 1.4 is seen in the leaf: Its thin, flat shape maximizes the amount of sunlight that can be captured by its chloroplasts. Analyzing a biological structure gives us dues about what it does and how it works. Conversely, knowing the function of something provides insight into its construction. An example from the animal kingdom, the wing of a bird, provides additional instances ofthe structure-function theme (Figure 1.6), In exploring life on its different structural levels, we discover functional beauty at every turn.

... Figure 1.7 A lung cell from a newt divides into two smaller cells that will grow and divide again.

C~APTE~ ONE


7

cite another example, the movement of your eyes as you read this line is based on activities of muscle and nerve cells. Even a global process such as the recycling ofcarbon is the cumulative product ofcellular activities, including the photosynthesis that occurs in the chloroplasts ofleafcells. Understanding how cells work is a major focus of biological research. All cells share certain characteristics. For example, every cell is enclosed by a membrane that regulates the passage of materials between the cell and its surroundings. And every cell uses DNA as its genetic information. However, we can distinguish between two main forms ofcells: prokaryotic cells and eukaryotic cells. The cells of two groups of microorganisms called bacteria and archaea are prokaryotic. All other forms of life, including plants and animals, are composed of eukaryotic cells. A eukaryotic cell is subdivided by internal membranes into various membrane-enclosed organelles, such as the ones you see in Figure 1.8 and the chloroplast you saw in Figure 1.4. In most eukaryotic cells, the largest organelle is the nucleus, which contains the cell's DNA. The other organelles are located in the cytoplasm, the entire region between the nucleus and outer membrane of the cell. As Figure 1.8 also shows, prokaryotic cells are much simpler and generally smaller than eukaryotic cells. In a prokaryotic cell, the DNA is not separated from the rest of the cell by enclosure in a membrane-bounded nucleus. Prokaryotic cells also lack the other kinds of membrane-enclosed organelles that characterize eukaryotic cells. But whether an organism has prokaryotic or eukaryotic cells, its structure and function depend on cells.

Prokaryotic cell Eukaryotk cell

DNA (no nucleus) ~\'lIIk'

Membrane Cytoplasm~~"

Theme: The continuity of life is based on heritable information in the form of DNA Inside the dividing cell in Figure 1.7 (on the previous page), you can see structures called chromosomes, which are stained with a blue-glowing dye. The chromosomes have almost all of the cell's genetic material, its DNA (short for deoxyribonucleic acid). DNA is the substance of genes, the units of inheritance that transmit information from parents to offspring. Your blood group (A, B, AB, or 0), for example, is the result of certain genes that you inherited from your parents.

DNA Structure and Function Each chromosome has one very long DNA molecule, with hundreds or thousands of genes arranged along its length. The DNA of chromosomes replicates as a cell prepares to divide, and each ofthe two cellular offspring inherits a complete set of genes. Each of us began life as a single cell stocked with DNA inherited from our parents. Replication of that DNA with each round of cell division transmitted copies of it to our trillions of cells. In each cell, the genes along the length of the DNA molecules encode the information for building the cell's other molecules. In this way, DNA controls the development and maintenance ofthe entire organism and, indirectly, everything it does (Figure 1.9). The DNA serves as a central database. The molecular structure of DNA accounts for its ability to store information. Each DNA molecule is made up of two long chains arranged in a double helix. Each chain link is one of four kinds of chemical building blocks called nucleotides (Figure 1.10). The way DNA encodes information is analogous to the waywe arrange the letters ofthe alphabet into precise sequences with specific meanings. The word rat, for example, evokes a rodent; the words tar and art, which contain the same letters, mean very different things. Libraries are filled with books containing information encoded in varying sequences of only 26 letters. We can think of nucleotides as the alphabet of inheritance. Specific sequential arrangements of these four chemical letters encode the precise information in genes, which are typically hundreds or thousands of nucleotides long. One gene in a bacterial cell may be translated as "Build a certain component of the cell membrane.~ A particular human gene may mean "Make growth hormone. More generally, genes like those just mentioned program the cell's production oflarge molecules called proteins. Other human proteins include a muscle cell's contraction proteins and the defensive proteins called antibodies. A class of proteins crucial to all cells are enzymes, which catalyze (speed up) specific chemical reactions. Thus, DNA provides the blueprints, and proteins serve as the tools that actually build and maintain the cell and carry out its activities. The DNA of genes controls protein production indirectly, using a related kind ofmolecule called RNA as an intermediary. H

Organelles Nucleus (contains DNA)

... Figure 1.8 Contrasting eukaryotic and prokaryotic cells in size and complexity.

8

CIlAPTE~ ONE


Sperm cell

Nuclei contammg DNA

.. • ."; •1:',; '.N. '. J•• h

• •"y. '7. •

Fertilized egg with DNA from both parents

Embyro's cells with copies of inherited DNA

Egg cell Offspring with traits inherited from both parents

... Figure 1.9 Inherited DNA directs development of an organism.

Nucleus DNA

Cell

Nucleotide

The sequence of nucleotides along a gene is transcribed into RNA, which is then translated into a specific protein with a unique shape and function. In the translation process, all forms of life employ essentially the same genetic code. A particular sequence of nucleotides says the same thing to one organism as it does to another. Differences between organisms reflect differences between their nucleotide sequences. Not all RNA in the cell is translated into protein. We have known for decades that some types of RNA molecules are actually components of the cellular machinery that manufactures proteins. Recently, scientists have discovered whole new classes of RNA that play other roles in the cell, such as regulating the functioning of protein-coding genes. The entire "library" of genetic instructions that an organism inherits is called its genome. A typical human cell has two similar sets of chromosomes, and each set has DNA totaling about 3 billion nucleotides. If the one-letter symbols for these nucleotides were written in letters the size of those you are now reading, the genetic text would fill about 600 books the size of this one. \Vithin this genomic library of nucleotide sequences are genes for about 75,000 kinds of proteins and an as yet unknown number of RNA molecules.

Systems Biology at the Leyels of Cells and Molecules (a) DNA double helix. This mcxlel shows each atom in a segment of DNA. Made up of two long chains of bUilding blocks called nucleotides. a DNA molecule takes the three-dimensional form of a double helix.

(b) Single strand of DNA. These geometric shapes and letters are simple symbols for the nucleotides in a small section of one chain of a DNA molecule Genetic information is encoded in specific sequences of the four types of nucleotides. (Their names are abbreviated here as A. T, C, and G.)

... Figure 1.10 DNA: The genetic material.

The entire sequence of nucleotides in the human genome is now known, along with the genome sequences of many other organisms, including bacteria, archaea, fungi, plants, and animals. These accomplishments have been made possible by the development of new methods and DNA-sequencing machines, such as those shown in Figure 1.11, on the next page. The sequencing of the human genome is a scientific and te ecosystem> community > population> organism> organ system> organ> tissue> cell> organelle> molecule> atom. \Vith each step "upward" from atoms, new properties emerge as a result of interactions among components at the lower levels. In an approach called reductionism, complex systems are broken down to simpler components that are more manageable to study. In systems biology, scientists make models ofcomplex biological systems. .. Theme: Organisms interact with their environments, exchanging matter and energy An organism's environment includes other organisms as well as nonliving factors. Whereas chemical nutrients recycle within an ecosystem, energy flows through an ecosystem. All organisms must perform work, which requires energy. Energy flows from sunlight to producers to consumers.

Acti\'ity Acti\ity Acti\ity Acti\ity Acti\ity Acth'ily

The Levels of Life Card Game Energy Flow and Chemical Cycling Form Fits Function' Cells Comparing Prokaryotic and Eukaryotic Cdls Heritable Information: DNA Regulation: Negative and Positive F~dback

-.'1·...'-1.2

The Core Theme: Evolution accounts (or the unity and diversity o( life (pp. 12-18)

.. Organizing the Diversity of Life Biologists classify species according to a system of broader and broader groups. Domain Bacteria and domain Archaea consist of prokaryotes. Domain Eukarya, the eukaryotes, includes various groups of protists and the kingdoms Plantae, Fungi, and Animalia. As diverse as life is, there is also evidence of remarkable unity, which is revealed in the similarities between different kinds of organisms. .. Charles Darwin and the Theory of Natural Selection Darwin proposed natural selection as the mechanism for evolutionary adaptation of populations to their environments. Population of organisms

.. Theme: Structure and function are correlated at all levels of biological organization The form of a biological structure suits its function and vice versa.

Hereditary variations

Overproduction of offspring and competition Environmental factors

.. Theme: Cells are an organism's basic

Differences in reproductive success of individuals

units of structure and function The cell is the lowest level oforganization that can perform all activities required for life. Cells are either prokaryotic or eukaryotic. Eukaryotic cells contain membrane-enclosed organelles, including a DNA-containing nucleus, Prokaryotic cells lack such organelles.

.. Theme: The continuity of life is based on heritable information in the form of DNA Genetic information is encoded in the nucleotide sequences of DNA. It is DNA that transmits heritable information from parents to offspring. DNA sequences program a cell's protein production by being transcribed into RNA and then translated into speci(ic proteins. RNA that is not translated into protein serves other important functions.

.. The Tree of Life Each species is one twig of a branching tree of life extending back in time through ancestral species more and more remote. All oflife is connected through its long evolutionary history.

-M4if.Acti'ity Oas,ifieation Schemes In"estigation How Do Environmental Changes Affect a Population? Biology Lab. On-line EvolutionLab

CHAPTER ONE


25

_',liI4

"-1.3

Scientists use two main forms of inquiry in their study of nature (pp. 18-24) .. Discovery Science In discovery science, scientists observe and describe some aspect of the world and use inductive reasoning to draw general conclusions. .. Hypothesis-Based Science Based on observations, scientists propose hypotheses that lead to predictions and then test the hypotheses by seeing if the predictions come true. Deductive reasoning is used in testing hypotheses: If a hypothesis is correct, and we test it, then we can expect a particular outcome. Hypotheses must be testable and falsifiable. .. A Case Study in Scientific Inquiry: Investigating Mimicry in Snake Populalions Experiments must be designed to demonstrate the effect of one variable by testing control groups and experimental groups that differ in only that one variable. .. Limitalions of Science Science cannot address the possibility of supernatural phenomena because hypotheses must be testable and falsifiable, and observations and experimental results must be repeatable. .. Theories in Science A scientific theory is broad in scope, generates new hypotheses, and is supported by a large body of evidence. .. Model Building in Science Models of ideas, structures, and processes help us understand scientific phenomena and make predictions. .. The Culture of Science Science is a social activity characterized by both cooperation and competition. .. Science, Technology, and Society Technology is a method or device that applies scientific knowledge for some specific purpose. Graphlt! An Introduction to Graphing

In"estlgatlon How Does Acid Precipitation Affect Trees? ACllvity Science. Technology. and Society: DDT

TESTING YOUR KNOWLEDGE

SELF·QUIZ I. All the organisms on your campus make up a. an ecosystem. b. a community. c. a population. d. an experimental group. e. a taxonomic domain. 2. \Vhich of the following is a correct sequence of levels in life's hierarchy, proceeding downward from an individual animal? a. brain, organ system, nerve cell, nervous tissue b. organ system, nervous tissue, brain c. organism, organ system, tissue, cell, organ d. nervous system, brain, nervous tissue, nerve cell e. organ system, tissue, molecule, cell 3. \Vhich of the following is not an observation or inference on which Darwin's theory of natural selection is based? a. Poorly adapted individuals never produce offspring.

26

CHAPTE~ ONE


b. There is heritable variation among individuals. c. Because of overproduction of offspring, there is competition for limited resources. d. Individuals whose inherited characteristics best fit them to the environment will generally produce more offspring. e. A population can become adapted to its environment over time. 4. Systems biology is mainly an attempt to a. understand the integmtion of all levels of biological organization from molecules to the biosphere. b. simplify complex problems by reducing the system into smaller, less complex units. c. construct models of the behavior of entire biological systems. d. build high-throughput machines for the rapid acquisition of biological data. e. speed up the technological application of scientific knowledge. 5. 170tists and bacteria are grouped into different domains because a. protists eat bacteria. b. bacteria are not made of cells. c. protists have a membrane-bounded nucleus, which bacterial cells lack. d. bacteria decompose protists. e. protists are photosynthetic. 6. \Vhich of the following best demonstrates the unity among all organisms? a. matching DNA nucleotide sequences b. descent with modification c. the structure and function of DNA d. natural selection e. emergent properties 7. Which of the following is an example of qualitative data? a. The temperature decreased from 20'C to 15'C. b. The plant's height is 25 centimeters (cm). c. The fish swam in a zig-zag motion. d. The six pairs of robins hatched an average of three chicks. e. The contents of the stomach are mixed every 20 seconds. 8. \Vhich of the following best describes the logic of hypothesisbased science? a. If I generate a testable hypothesis, tests and observations will support it. b. If my prediction is correct, it will lead to a testable hypothesis. c. Ifmy observations are accurate, they will support my hypothesis. d. If my hypothesis is correct. I can expect certain test results. e. If my experiments are set up right, they will lead to a testable hypothesis. 9. A controlled experiment is one that a. proceeds slowly enough that a scientist can make careful records of the results. b. may include experimental groups and control groups tested in parallel.

c. is repeated many times to make sure the results are accurate. d. keeps all environmental variables constant. e. is supervised by an experienced scientist. 10. Which of the following statements best distinguishes hypotheses from theories in science? a. Theories are hypotheses that have been proved. b. Hypotheses are guesses; theories are correct answers. c. Hypotheses usually are relatively narrow in scope; theories have broad explanatory power. d. Hypotheses and theories are essentially the same thing. e. Theories are proved true in all cases; hypotheses are usually falsified by tests. II. I.M-WIII \Xfith rough sketches, draw a biological hierarchy similar to the one in Figure 1.4 but using a coral reef as the

ecosystem, a fish as the organism, its stomach as the organ, and DNA as the molecule. Include all levels in the hierarchy.

For Self-Qui:; tlllswt"rs, Sa Apprndix A.

-MH" Visit the Study Area at www.masteringbio.com for a Practice Test.

EVOLUTION CONNECTION 12. A typical prokaryotic cell has about 3,000 genes in its DNA, while a human cell has about 20,5(X} genes. About 1,000 of these genes are present in both types of cells. Based on your understanding ofevolution, explain how such different organisms could have this same subset ofgenes. What sorts of functions might these shared genes have?

SCIENTIFIC INQUIRY 13. Based on the results ofthe snake mimicry case study, suggest another hypothesis researchers might use to extend the investigation.

SCIENCE, TECHNOLOGY, AND SOCIETY 14. The fruits of wild spedes oftomato are tiny compared to the giant beefsteak tomatoes available today. This difference in fruit size is almost entirely due to the larger number of cells in the domesticated fruits. Plant molecular biologists have recently discovered genes that are responsible for controlling cell division in tomatoes. Why would such a discovery be important to producers of other kinds offruits and vegetables? To the study ofhwnan development and disease? To OUT basic understanding ofbiology?

CHAPTE~ ONE


27

AN INTERVIEW WITH

Deborah M. Gordon What does an ant sense as it goes about its daily chores? Mainly chemicalsbecause these are the cues ants use to navigate their environment. The interactions of ants with each other and their surroundings are the research focus of Deborah M. Gordon, a professor of biological sciences at Stanford University. While at Stanford, Or. Gordon has won several awards for excellence in teaching, as well as recognition for her research in the Ariz.ona desert and the tropics of South America. And through appearances on radio, TV nature shows, and her book Ants at Work: How an Insect Society Is Organired (Free Press, 1999), Or. Gordon has shared her fascina· tion with ant society with people around the world.

How did you get interested in biology? In my first year in college, thinking of a career in medicine as a possibility, [ took introductory chemistry and biology. But those courses just gave me a lot of information that [ couldn't really put together. 1 ended up majoring in French. But [was also very interested in math and in music theory, because I like looking at patterns and understanding how they change over time. Then, in my senior year, [took a course in comparative anatomy, which completely changed my view of biology. That course showed me that evolution is a process that changes patterns in interesting ways. After graduation, curious about the human body and health, I came to Stanford to rake the medical school course in human anatomy. I stayed to complete a master's degree in biology. Then, although t still wasn't sure what Iwanted to do with 1Tl}'1ife, J entered a Ph.D. program at Duke. It was there that I began research on ant behavior-and 11o'.'ed iL

28

Students of biology have to study chemistry as well. How is chemistry relevant to ant behaviorf Anls don't see very well; they operate mostly by chemical mmmunication. If}tIU ...uri:: on ants, }'OU have to think about dlemistry because chernica.Is are critically important in the ant's wood. For ecample, the ants I study in Arizorg. use Ionglasting chemical cues to identify themsetves and to mar\:: their not Mea. Antsalso use manyshorttenn chemical cues called pheromones, which thq'secrete in ct'Itain situations. The best 1mo...1l are aIann pheromones. which are what make ants ron around in circles when they're disturbed. Some ants searte a pheromone from the tip of the abdomen that marks where they walk and creates a trail that Olher ants can follow. Ants have 12 or 14 different glands that secrete different substances. We really don't knov,. what they're all for, or how many chemical combinations an ant can respond to. In addition to chemicals used in communication, some ants produce antibi· otics or chemical defenses against predators. Other ants use chemicals to kill certain plants [see Chapter 2, pp. 30-31]. Why do you study anlsf \Vhat interests me about ants is that ants live in societies IoIithout any centr.ll control. Yet individual ants are \!Cry limited in what they can do; each can take in only local information. Noant can figure out v.flat needs to be done for the good ofthe colony. The big question for me is: Ho.... can an ant colony function ...flco nobody's in charge and each ant can only perceive ...flat·s right around it? What about the queens! Please tell us more about how ants live. There are 10,000 to 12,000 species of ants. They all live in coloniC$, each with one or a few reproductive femalC$, called queens. The queens lay eggs, using sperm stored from a mating that preceded her eslablishment of the colony. The rest of the colony-all the ants }.. usee ....alking around-are her daughten., sterile female ...uri::ers. These wori::endo aU the ..... rIc, and they do it ....ithout all)' direction from the qu~ MalC$,

born from unfertilized eggs. art' produced only once a year, just in time to join virgin queens in a mating flight. Soon after mating. they die. What exactly do worker ants dol The ants I study in Arizona, called harvester ants, perform four lcinds of tasks. Some worlcen forage for food. Some patrol; mat is, they go out earty in the morning and decide ....here the for.lgers should go that da}'. Others do nest-

maintenance ..... rIc, building chambers underground and then carrying out the excess sand. And still olhen. worie on the refuse pile, or midden, ...flich they marie ....ith the colony's specific odor. Different groups ofants perform each of the four tasks. Tell us about your research in Arizona. At my research site in Arizona, ....here I've been ....orking for more than 2Oyears, I study a population of about 300 colonies of harvester ants. Each year my students and I map the locations of the colonies that make up this population. We identify all the colonies that were there the year before, figure out which ones have died, and map the new ones. In this way I can follow the same colonies rear after year. I get 10 know them quile well. I have found that colonies last 151020 years. In addition to observing the ant colonies, we do simple experiments where we change the ants' environment in some way and observe how the ants respond. Foraample, in the last few rears we've been studying how a colony regulates the numherofants that go out to forage. We've leamed that each ant uses its recent history of interxtions with other ants lO decide what to do next An ant uses odors to identify the task of the ants It meets. Each ant is roated ....ith a layer of grease, made of chemicals called hydrocarbons.. Each laSk group-the foragers, the patrollers. the not maintenance ...wkers, and the midden workers-has a unique mixture of h)-drocarbons. ...flidl the ants secrete and spread on each other b)' grooming. \'I:'e\"e found mat.as an antspends time outside, the proportions of different hydro.. carbons on its boc:I}< changes.

What causes this change? The heat of the sun. We learned this from an experiment in which we took ants that had been working inside the nest and exposed them to different conditions. After exposure to high tem()fratures and low humidity for long enough times, these ants came to smel11ike forage~. So it's nollhal foragers secrete something different as they do their task bUI that doing the task changes them. Just as a carpenter gets calluses from holding tools, an ant comes to smell different from the work it does. The ants ofa colony all secrete the same mixture ofhydrocarbons, but each ant's chemical profile changes depending on what it does. What tells an ant what to dol For example, what tells an ant to foragel We've learned thai ants use their recent eX()frience of quick anlennal contacts with each other to decide what to do. The antennae are their organs of chemical perception. Anyone who has watched ants has seen them meet and touch antennae, and when they do that, they smell each other, detecting the chemicals on each other's booy. But a single interaction is not an instruction; a forager meeting another ant is not saying, "Go forage~ It's the patU!rn of encounters that conveys the message. How did you figure that out? Working with Michael Greene, who's now at the University of Colorado at Denver, we've been able to extract the hydrocaroons from the ants' bodies and put them on little glass beads, and we've found that the ants respond to a bead coated V1ith ant hydrocarbons as ifit were an ant. So by dropping these coated beads into the nest, we can figure out how the ants react to encounters with an ant ofa particular task group.

Recently we've been working on how foragen use the rate at which other foragers come in with food to decide whether 10 go out again. This rate gives feedback aoout how much food is out there. A forager looking for food won't come back until it finds something; ifit has to stay out for 45 minutes, it "'ill. But when there's an abundance offood near the nest, the foragers return quickly. The returning ants provide positive feedback: The faster ants come back, the more ants go out. We've found that harvester ants respond surprisingly qUickly to changes in the frequency ofencounters with other ants. This rapid response is probably driven by the ants' short memories-only about 10 seconds. So the answer to the question of what controls a colony is the aggregate of "decisions" made in the simpll' interactions bl'twel'n individual ants. Are there analogies in other areas of biology~ A system without central control, built from simple, interacting components, is called a "complex syl.tem; and scientists in many areas of biology are interested in such systems. One obvious analog to an ant colony is a brain. Your brain is composed of neurons (nerve cells), bUI no single neuron knows how to think about, for example, the subject ofants-although your brain as a whole can think about ants. The brain operates without central control, in the sense that there isn't a master neuron in there that says, "OK, )"ou guys, you do ants. Yet somehow all of the simple interactions among the neurons add up to the brain's very complex functioning. Another analogy is the growth ofan embryo: The cells of an embryo all have the same DNA, but as the embryo grows, its cells take on differenl forms and functions. Nobody says, "OK, you p

become liver, you become bone~ Instead, as a result of molecular interactions among cells, the embryo develops tissues of different types. In your book, the colony is spoken of as if it were an organism. Does evolution operate on the level of the colony~ Yes, because the whole colony cooperates to make more queens and males that go out and start new colonies. Acolony's behavior can dctennine how many offspring colonies it makes. In the long term, I'd like to understand how natura.l selection is acting on ant behavior (if it is). Why does it mat· ter to the colony thai it behaves in a certain way? Now for a practical question: How can we deal with ant invasions in our homes? It depends on where you live. In Northern California, the invading ants are usually Argentine ants, whose activity is clearly connected to the weather. The ants come into everybody's houses at the same time-when it rains or is very hot and dryand theygo out at the same time. The most important thing to remember is that putting out pesticide, especially when you don't have ants, sends pesticide into the groundwater but doesn't have much effect on the numbers ofants. I don't like having ants in my kitchen-I always take it personally-but [know that when I do, everybody else does, too. And covering or washing away a trail works only briefly-about 20 minutes for Argentine ants, as Ifound out in an experiment. Blocking offthe places where ants are coming in is the best approach. Ant-bait devices, from which foraging ants are supposed 10 carry poison to their nest, can work for ants that have one queen in a central nest. Such ants include carpenter ants, which enter houses in many parts ofthe United States. These ants nest in decaying wood, though contrary to their reputation, they don't eat wood. Ant baits don't work at all for the Argentine ants because these ants have many queens and many nests and you are unlikely to reach all the queens wilh the poison. What advice do you have for undergraduates interested in a research career? Students should try to experience several kinds of research, involving different kinds of activities. The best way to find out if you like doing research-whether it's working in the field or in the lab-is to try it.

Learn about an experiment by Deborah Gordon and her graduate student Megan Frederichon in Inquiry Figure 22 on page 31 Read and analyze the original paper in Inquiry in Action: Interpreting Scientific Papers.

Lefllo right: Deborah Gordon, Megan Frederickson, Lisa Urry, and Jane Reece

29

TheChemi Context of .... Figure 2.1 Who tends this garden? KEY

2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4

CONCEPTS

Matter consists of chemical elements in pure form and in combinations called compounds An element's properties depend on the structure of its atoms The formation and function of molecules depend on chemical bonding between atoms Chemical reactions make and break chemical bonds

Connection he Amazon rain forest in South America is a showcase for the diversity aCEfe on Earth. Colorful birds, insects, and other animals live among a myriad of trees, shrubs, vines, and wildflowers, and an excursion along a waterway or a forest path typically reveals a lush variety of plant life. Visitors

T

traveling near the Amazon's headwaters in Peru are therefore surprised to come across tracts of forest like that seen in the foreground of the photo in figure 2.1. This patch is almost completely dominated by a single plant species-a willowy flowering tree called Duroia hirsuta. Travelers may wonder if the garden is planted and maintained by local people, but the indigenous people are as mystified as the visitors. They call these stands of Duroia trees "devil's gardens;' from a legend attributing them to an evil forest spirit. Seeking ascientific explanation, a research team working un· der Deborah Gordon, who is interviewed on pages 28-29, ren cently solved the "devil's garden mystery. figure 2.2 describes their main experiment. The researchers showed that the "farm· ers" who create and maintain these gardens are actually ants that live in the hollow stems ofthe Duroia trees. The ants do not plant the Duroia trees, but they prevent other plant species

30

from growing in the garden by injecting intruders with a poisonous chemical. In this way, the ants create space for the growth of the Duroia trees that serve as their home. With the ability to maintain and expand its habitat, a single colony of devil's garden ants can live for hundreds of years. The chemical the ants use to weed their garden turns out to be formic acid. This substance is produced by many species of ants and in fact got its name from the Latin word for ant, formica. In many cases, the formic acid probably serves as a disinfectant that protects the ants against microbial parasites. The devil's garden ant is the first ant species found to use formic acid as a herbicide. This use of a chemical is an important addition to the list of functions mediated by chemicals in the insect world. Scientists already know that chemicals play an important role in insect communication, attraction of mates, and defense against predators. Research on devil's gardens is only one example of the relevance of chemistry to the study of life. Unlike a list of college courses, nature is not neatly packaged into the indio vidual natural sciences-biology, chemistry, physics, and so forth. Biologists specialize in the study of life, but organisms and their environments are natural systems to which the concepts of chemistry and physics apply. Biology is a multidisciplinary science. This unit of chapters introduces basic concepts of chemistry that will apply throughout our study ofHfe. We will make many connections to the themes introduced in Chapter l. One of these themes is the organization oflife into a hierarchy of structural levels, with additional properties emerging at each successive level. In this unit, we will see how emergent properties are apparent at the lowest levels of biological organization-such as the orderingof atoms into molecules and the interactions ofthose molecules within cells. Somewhere in the transition from molecules to cells, we will cross the blurry boundary between nonlife and life. This chapter focuses on the chemical components that make up all matter.

•

F1~2.2

r:"~~~:;~O~~~sts of chemical

In ui

What creates "devil's gardens" in the rain forest? EXPERIMENT

Working under Deborah Gordon and with Michael Greene. graduate student Megan Frederickson sought the cause of "devil's gardens." stands of a single species of tree,

Duroia hirsuta. One hypothesis was that ants living in these trees, Myrme/achista 5chumanni, produce a poisonous chemical that kills trees of other species; another was that the Duroia trees themselves kill competing trees. perhaps by means of a chemical. To test these hypotheses, Frederickson did field experiments in Peru. Two saplings of a local nonhost tree species. Cedrela odOrJtil, wefe plant~ inside each of ten d~il's gardens. At the base of one, a sticky insect barrier was applied; the other was unprotected. Two more Cedrela saplings, With and without barriers, were planted about 50 meters outside each garden.

++ i,!;+b"'j" Insect

O",j, tree

C",,,I, "pli"

~

~

O"iI, garden

InSide. ... unprotected

InSide,

y ~ f"~~d y

Y'

Outside, protected

Y'

~

Outside, unprotected

The researchers observed ant activity on the Cedrela leaves and measured areas of dead leaf tissue after one day. They also chemically analyzed contents of the ants' poison glands. RESULTS

The ants made injections from the tips of their abdomens into leaves of unprotected saplings in their gardens (see photo). Within one day, these leaves developed dead areas (see graph). The protected saplings were uninjured, as were the saplings planted outside the gardens, Formic acid was the only chemical detected in the poison glands of the ants,

elements in pure form and in combinations called compounds

Organisms are composed of matter, which is anything that takes up space and has mass.· Matter exists in many diverse forms. Rocks, metals, oils, gases, and humans are just a few examples of what seems an endless assortment of matter.

Elements and Compounds Matter is made up ofelements. An clement is a substance that cannot be broken down to other substances by chemical reactions. Today, chemists recognize 92 elements occurring in nature; gold, copper, carbon, and oxygen are examples. Each element has a symbol, usually the first letter or two of its name. Some symbols are derived from Latin or German; for instance, the symbol for sodium is Na, from the Latin word natrium. A compound is a substance consisting of two or more different elements combined in a fixed ratio. Table salt, for example, is sodium chloride (NaG), a compound composed of the elements sodium (Na) and chlorine (el) in a 1:1 ratio. Pure sodium is a metal, and pure chlorine is a poisonous gas. When chemically combined, however, sodium and chlorine form an edible compound. Water (H 20), another compound, consists of the elements hydrogen (H) and oxygen (0) in a 2:1 ratio. These are simple examples of organized matter having emergent properties: A compound has characteristics different from those of its elements (Figure 2.3).

0-'----'--'-----------Inside, Inside, Outside, Outside, unprotected protected unprotected protected Cedre/a saplings. inside and outside devil's gardens Ants of the species Myrmelachista schumanni kill nonhost trees by injecting the leaves with formic acid, thus creating hospitable habitats (devil's gardens) for the ant colony, CONCLUSION

SOURCE M, f frederICkson, M. J Greene, and D M. Gordon, "Devil's ga,dens" bedevilled by anlS, Nature 437495-496 (2005). InqUiry Action Read and analyze the original paper in Inquiry in Action' Inrerpreting Scientific Papers.

MIJI:f.iilM

What would be the results if the unprotected saplings' inability to grow in the devil'> gardens was caused by a chemical released by the Durola trees rather than by the ants?

Sodium

Chlorine

Sodium chloride

... Figure 2.3 The emergent properties of a compound. The metal sodium combines with the poisonous gas chlorine, forming the edible compound sodium chloride, or table salt.

• Sometimes we substitute the term weight for mass, although the two are not identkal. Mass is the amount of matter in an obj

Electrode

~Ii ~1.

'~

t

...,......Condenser

Cooled water containing organic molecules

\ ~ ,.,

./........

"

-

Hp

-

.--.:'-., Cold water

~ II

';0'"

/amPle for

che~lCal analYSIS

/

4) As material cycled

'O"AC,CoC,CdC,",C"c,C,CooC,C,3d-

through the apparatus, Miller periodically collected samples for analysis.

the atmosphere, raining water and any dissolved molecules down into the sea flask.

RESULTS

Miller identified a variety of organic molecules that are common in organisms. These included simple compounds such as formaldehyde (CHlO) and hydrogen cyanide (HCN) and more complex molecules such as amino acids and long chains of carbon and hydrogen known as hydrocarbons. OrganIC molecules, a first step in the origin of life. may have been syntheSized abiotically on the early Earth (We will explore this hypothesis in more detail in Chapter 25.)

CONCLUSION

SOURCE

S. Milll'l", A produaion of amino ilCids undl'l" possible pnmltive Earth conditIons. Science 11752&-529 (1953),

_'WU". If Miller had increased the concentration of NH] in his experiment, how might the relative amounts of the products HCN and CH 20 have differed?

CHAPTE~ fOU ~

Carbon and the Molecular Diversity of Life

59

~':i~:~·a:~s can form diverse

(figure 4.3b). In molecules with more carbons, every grouping of a carbon bonded to four other atoms has a tetrahedral shape. But when two carbon atoms are joined by a double bond, all bonds around those carbons are in the same plane. For example, ethene (~H4) isa flat molecule; its atoms all lie in the same plane (figure 4.3c). We find it convenient to write all structural formulas as though the molecules represented were flat, but keep in mind that molecules are three-dimensional and that the shape ofa molecule often determines its function. The electron configuration ofcarbon gives it covalent compatibility with many different elements. figure 4.4 shows the valences of carbon and its most frequent partners-oxygen, hydrogen, and nitrogen. These are the four major atomic components oforganic molecules. These valences are the basis for the rules ofcovalent bonding in organic chemistry-the building code for the architecture of organic molecules. Let's consider how the rules of covalent bonding apply to carbon atoms with partners other than hydrogen. We'll look at two examples, the simple molecules carbon dioxide and urea. In the carbon dioxide molecule (C0 2 ), a single carbon atom is joined to two atoms of oxygen by double covalent bonds. The structural formula for CO2 is shown here:

molecules by bonding to four other atoms

The key to an atom's chemical characteristics is its electron configuration. This configuration determines the kinds and number of bonds an 3tom will form with other atoms.

The Formation of Bonds with Carbon Carbon has 6 electrons, with 2 in the first electron shell and 4 in the second shell. Having 4 valence electrons in a shell that

holds 8, carbon would have to donate or accept 4 ele'O double-bonded carbons, each of which has an H and an X attached to it (Figure 4.1b). The arrangement with both Xs on the same side of the double bond is called a cis isomer, and the arrangement with the Xs on opposite sides is called a trans isomer. The subtle difference in shape between geometric isomers can dramatically affect the biological activities oforganic molecules. For example, the biochemistry of vision involves a light-induced 62

UNIT ONE

TheChemistryofLife

llsomer

o isomer

(c) Enantiomers differ in spatial arrangement around an asymmetric carbon. resulting in molecules that are mirror images. like left and right hands. The two isomers are designated the Land 0 isomers from the Latin for left and right (kvo and dextral, Enantiomers cannot be superimposed on each other, ... Figure 4.7 Three types of isomers. Compounds with the same molecular formula but different structures, isomers are a source of diversity in organic molecules, '·Jir.W"1 There are three structural isomers of CSHI2 ; draw the one not shown in (a).

change of rhodopsin, a chemical compound in the eye, from the cis isomer to the trans isomer (see Chapter SO). Enantiomcrs are isomers that are mirror images of each other. In the ball·and-stick models shown in Figure 4.7(, the middle carbon is called an asymmetric carbon because it is attached to four different atoms or groups of atoms. The four groups can be arranged in space around the asymmetric carbon in two different ways that are mirror images. Enantiomers are, in away, left-handed and right-handed versions ofthe molecule. Just as your right hand won't fit into a left-handed glove, the working molecules in acell can distinguish the two versions by shape. Usually, one isomer is biologically active, and the other is inactive. The concept ofenantiomers is important in the pharmaceutical industry because the two enantiomers ofadrug may not be equally

Drug

Ibuprofen

Condition

Effective Enantiomer

Ineffective Enantiomer

5-lbuprofen

R-Ibuprofen

Estradiol CH

,H Testosterone CH,

OH

Pain; inflammation HO

o Albuterol

Asthma R-Albuterol

5-Albuterol

.. Figure 4.8 The pharmacological importance of enantiomers. Ibuprofen and albuterol are examples of drugs whose enantiomers have different effects (5 and R are letters used in one system to distinguish two enantiomers.) Ibuprofen reduces inflammation and pain. It is commonly sold as a mixture of the two enantiomers, The 5enantiomer is 100 times more effective than the other, Albuterol is used to relax bronchial muscles, improving airflow in asthma patients. Only R·albuterol is synthesized and sold as a drug; the 5 form counteracts the active R form,

effective (Figure 4.8). In some cases, one ofthe isomers may even produce harmful effects. This was the case with thalidomide, adrug prescribed for thousands ofpregnant women in the late 1950sand early 1960s. The drug ""'as a mixture of two enantiomers. One enantiomer reduced morning sickness, the desired effect, but the other caused severe birth defects. (Unfortunately, even ifthe "good~ thalidomide enantiomer is used in purified form, some of it soon converts to the "bad~ enantiomer in the patient's body.) TIle differing effects ofenantiomers in the body demonstrate that organisms are sensitive to even the most subtle variations in molecular architecture. Once again, we see that molecules have emergent properties that depend on the specific arrangement oftheir atoms. CONCEPT

CHECK

4.2

I. Draw a structural formula for C:2H.t. 2. \\fhich molecules in Figure 4.5 are isomers? For each pair, identify the type of isomer. 3. How are gasoline and fat chemically similar? UI • 4. Can propane (C 3Hs) form isomers?

-W:r

For suggested answers, see Appendix A.

rZ'~::~I·n~';'~er of chemical

groups are key to the functioning of biological molecules

The distinctive properties of an organic molecule depend not only on the arrangement of its carbon skeleton but also on the molecular components attached to that skeleton. \X'e can think of hydrocarbons, the simplest organic molecules, as the

.. Figure 4.9 Acomparison of chemical groups of female (estradiol) and male (testosterone) sex hormones. The two molecules differ only in the chemical groups attached to a common carbon skeleton of four fused rings, shown here in abbreviated form . These subtle variations In molecular architecture (shaded in blue) influence the development of the anatomical and physiologICal differences between female and male vertebrates. underlying framework for more complex organic molecules. A number of chemical groups can replace one or more of the hydrogens bonded to the carbon skeleton of the hydrocarbon. (Some groups include atoms of the carbon skeleton, as we will see.) These groups may participate in chemical reactions or may contribute to function indirectly by their effects on molecular shape. The number and arrangement of the groups help give each molecule its unique properties.

The Chemical Groups Most Important in the Processes of life Consider the differences between testosterone and estradiol (a type of estrogen). These compounds are male and female sex hormones, respectively, in humans and other vertebrates (Figure 4.9). Both are steroids, organic molecules with acommon carbon skeleton in the form of four fused rings. These sex hormones differ only in the chemical groups attached to the rings. The different actions of these m'o molecules on many targets throughout the body help produce the contrasting features ofmales and females. Thus, even our sexuality has its biological basis in variations of molecular architecture. In the example of sex hormones, different chemical groups contribute to function by affecting the molecule's shape. In other cases, the chemical groups affect molecular function by being directly involved in chemical reactions; these important chemical groups are known as functional groups. Each functional group participates in chemical reactions in a characteristic way, from one organic molecule to another. The seven chemical groups most important in biological processes are the hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxyl, amino, sulfhydryl, phosphate, and methyl groups. The first six groups can act as functional groups; they are also hydrophilic and thus increase the solubility of organic compounds in water. The methyl group is not reactive, but instead often acts as a recognizable tag on biological molecules. Before reading further, study Figure 4.10 on the next two pages to familiarize yourself with these biologically important chemical groups. CHAPTE~ fOU ~


63

.. f9n4.10

Exploring Some Biologically Important Chemical Groups CHEMICAL GROUP

Hydroxyl

._.I

STRUCTURE

0H

(may be wnnen HO-) In a hydroxyl group (-oH), a hydrogen atom is bonded to an oxygen atom, which in turn is bonded to the carbon skeleton of the organic molecule. (Do not confuse this functional group with the hydroxide ion, OH .)

NAME OF COMPOUNO

Alcohols (their specific names usually end in-of)

Carboxyl

Carbonyl

• --

• --

l

-(

\

The carbonyl group (XO) consins of a carbon atom joined to an oxygen atom by a double bond.

•

....1

When an oxygen atom is doublebonded to a carbon atom that is also bonded to an -oH group, the entire assembly of atoms is called a carboxyl group (-COOH).

carboxylic acids, or organic acids Ketones if the carbonyl group is within a carbon skeleton Aldehydes if the carbonyl group is at the end of the carbon skeleton

EXAMPLE

H

H

I I I I

H-(-(-OH H

H

Ethanol, the alcohol present in alcoholic beverages

°

H I # H-C-C I C.......H

°

H I # H-C-C

H H....... \ H

I

H

Acetone, the simplest ketone H

H

'oH

Acetic acid, which gives vinegar its sour taste

0

I I # H-C-C-C

I I

H H

\

H

Prooanal. an aldetwde

FUNCTIONAL PROPERTIES

•

Is polar as a result of the electrons spending more time near the electronegative oxygen atom.

• Can form hydrogen bonds with water molecules, helping dissolve organic compounds such as sugars (see Figure 5.3).

• • A ketone and an aldehyde may be structural isomers with different properties, as is the case for acetone and propanal. • These two groups are also found in sugars, giving rise to two major groups of sugars: aldoses (containing an aldehyde) and ketoses (containing a ketone).

H

I

UNIT ON!

TheChemistryorUre

l 'oH

H-C-C

I

H

AcetIC acid •

64

Has acidic properties (is a source of hydrogen ions) because the covalent bond between oxygen and hydrogen is so polar; for example,

H

I I

°

#

~H-C-C

H

\

0-

Acetate IOfl

Found in cells in the ionized form with a charge of 1- and called a carboxylate ion (here, specifically, the acetate ion).

Sulfhydryl

Amino

-N

I

-SH

H

'"

I

(may be written HS -)

The amino group (-NH 2 ) consists of a nitrogen atom bonded to two hydrogen atoms and to the carbon skeleton,

The sulfhydryl group consists of a sulfur atom bonded to an atom of hydrogen; resembles a hydroxyl group in shape.

Amines

Thiols

o

H

~

~

He!

• •• .•

'"

I

H

Methylated compounds

OHOHH

0

I I I

NH,

I

II

H - ( - ( -C -O-P-O-

\

I I I

H

H ........

H H

H

I

-+N-H

I

H

(ionized)

• Ionized, with a charge of 1+, under cellular conditions.

Cysteine is an important sulfur-containing amino acid.

• Two sulfhydryl groups can react, forming a covalent bond. This Hcross-linkingH helps stabilize protein structure (see Figure 5,21), • Cross-linking of cysteines in hair proteins maintains the curliness or straightness of hair. Straight hair can be HpermanentlyH curled by shaping it around curlers, then breaking and re-forming the crosslinking bonds.

0-

/(H 3

c C o-p ........ N/ 'H I

H 5-Methyl cytidine

In addition to taking part in many important chemical reactions in cells, glycerol phosphate provides the backbone for phospholipids, the most prevalent molecules in cell membranes.

5-Methyl cytidine is a component of DNA that has been modified by addition of the methyl group.

• Contributes negative charge to the molecule of which it is a part (2- when at the end of a molecule, as above; 1when located internally in a chain of phosphates). •

-pC,

7 i

I

Glycerol phosphate

• Acts as a base; can pick up an W from the surrounding solution (water, in living organisms).

(nonionizedl

I

0-

Organic phosphates

I

Because it also has a carboxyl group, glycine is both an amine and a carboxylic acid; compounds with both groups are called amino acids.

;"

I

-(-H

A methyl group consists of a carbon bonded to three hydrogen atoms. The methyl group may be attached to a carbon or to a different atom.

Glycine

-N

H

~ -o-p-o-

In a phosphate group, a phosphorus atom is bonded to four oxygen atoms; one oxygen is bonded to the carbon skeleton; two oxygens carry negative charges. The phosphate group (-OPO l '-, abbreviated P) is an ionized form of a phosphoric acid group (-OPOlH.; note the two hydrogens).

H

I

(-(-N

Methyl

Phosphate

Has the potential to react with water, releasing energy.

•

Addition of a methyl group to DNA, or to molecules bound to DNA, affects expression of genes.

•

Arrangement of methyl groups in male and female sex hormones affects their shape and function (see Figure 4.9).

n Given the information in this figure and what you know about . . the electronegativity of oxygen, predict which of the following molecules would be the stronger acid. Explain your answer. a,

H

I

H

I

0

Ii

b.

H-(-(-( I I 'OH H

H

CHAPTE~ fOU ~

H 0

I

II

a

I;

H-(-(-( I 'OH H


65

AlP: An Important Source of Energy for Cellular Processes

CONCEPT

organic phosphate, adenosine triphosphate, or ATP, is worth mentioning because its function in the cell is so important. ATP consists ofan organic molecule called adenosine attached to a string of three phosphate groups: 0

II

0

II

II

-O-P-O-P-O-P-O

I

I

0-

Adenosine

I

0-

\'(fhere three phosphates are present in series, as in ATP, one phosphate may be split off as a result of a reaction with water. This inorganic phosphate ion, HOP0 32 -, is often abbreviated ®i in this book. Having lost one phosphate, ATP becomes adenosine diphosphate, or ADP. Although ATP is sometimes said to "staTen energy, it is more accurate to think of it as ~stor ing" the potential to react with water. This reaction releases energy that can be used by the cell. You will learn about this in more detail in Chapter 8. Reacts

~Adenosinel ATP

..

structure of such a molecule? 2. What chemical change occurs when ATr reacts with water and releases energy? 3. MQ@\llfM Suppose you had an organic molecule such as glycine (see Figure 4.10, amino group example), and you chemically removed the-NH 2 group and replaced it with -COOH. Draw the structural formula for this molecule and speculate about its chemical properties. For suggested answers. see Appendix A.

0-

with H20

ill; + @-®-iAdenosinel

Inorganic phosphate

+ Energy

ADP

lhe Chemical Elements of life: A Review Living matter, as you have learned, consists mainly of carbon, oxygen, hydrogen, and nitrogen, with smaller amounts of sulfur and phosphorus. These elements all form strong covalent bonds, an essential characteristic in the architecture of complex organic molecules. Of all these elements, carbon is the virtuoso of the covalent bond. The versatility of carbon makes possible the great diversity of organic molecules, each with particular properties that emerge from the unique arrangement of its carbon skeleton and the chemical groups appended to that skeleton. At the foundation of all biological diversity lies this variation at the molecular level.

C a terl J .. •• -.m.It. • Go to the Study Area at www.masteringbio.comforBioFlix 3-D Animations, MP3 Tutors, VideQs, Practice Tests, an eBook, and more.

SUMMARY OF KEY CONCEPTS

_i.lli'i'_ 4.1 Organic chemistry is the study of carbon compounds (pp. 58-59) ... OrganiC compounds were once thought to arise only within liVing organisms, but this idea (Vitalism) was disproved when chemists were able to synthesize organic compounds in the laboratory.

-,.'I"i'- 4.2 Carbon atoms can form diverse molecules by bonding to four other atoms (pp. 60-63) ... The Formation of Bonds with Carbon Carbon. with a valence of 4. can bond to various other atoms, including 0, H, 66

UNIT ONE

4.)

1. What does the term amino acid signify about the

The "Phosphate n column in Figure 4.10 shows a simple example of an organic phosphate molecule. A more complicated

o

CHECK

TheChemistryofLife

•

and N. Carbon can also bond to other carbon atoms, forming the carbon skeletons of organic compounds. ... Molecular Diversity Arising from Carbon Skeleton Variation The carbon skeletons of organic molecules vary in length and shape and have bonding sites for atoms of other elements. Hydrocarbons consist only of carbon and hydrogen. Isomers are compounds with the same molecular formula but different structures and properties. Three types of isomers are structural isomers, geometric isomers, and enantiomers.

-t,j4o!,.• ,\eIMtr DiversityofCarbon-Based Molecules Acti-.ity lromers In''e~tigat;on What Factors ~termine the Effectiveness of Drugs?

-, 'i"I'_ 4.3 Asmall number of chemical groups are key to the functioning of biological molecules (pp. 63-66) ... The Chemical Groups Most Important in lhe Processes of life Chemical groups attached to the carbon skeletons of organic molecules participate in chemical reactions (functional groups) or contribute to function by affecting molecular shape.

... ATP: An Important Source of Energy for Cellular Processes Reacts with H20

®-®-®-[Adenoslnel ---~I + ®-®--[Adenosine I + Energy

ATP

Inorganic phosphate

ADP

_M41f·· Acti'ity Functional GroullS

... The Chemical Elements of life: A Review Living matter is made mostly of carbon, oxygen, hydrogen, and nitrogen, with some sulfur and phosphorus. Biological diversity has its molecular basis in carbon's ability to form a huge number of molecules with particular shapes and chemical properties.

6. \X'hich action could produce a carbonyl group? a. the replacement of the -OH of a carboxyl group with hydrogen b. the addition of a thiol to a hydroxyl c. the addition of a hydroxyl to a phosphate d. the replacement of the nitrogen of an amine with oxygen e. the addition of a sulfhydryl to a carboxyl 7. \Vhich chemical group is most likely to be responsible for an organic molecule behaving as a base? a. hydroxyl d. amino b. carbonyl e. phosphate c. carboxyl For Self· Quiz answers, see Appendix A.

-MH',. ViSit the Study Area at www.masteringbio.(om lor a Practice Test


EVOLUTION CONNECTION

SELF·QUIZ I. Organic chemistry is currently defined as

a. b. c. d. e.

the study of compounds made only by living cells. the study of carbon compounds. the study of vital forces. the study of natural (as opposed to synthetic) compounds. the study of hydrocarbons.

8. •• I;t-W"I Some scientists believe that life elsewhere in the universe might be based on the element silicon, rather than on carbon, as on Earth. Look at the electron distribution diagram for silicon in Figure 2.9 and draw the Lewis dot structure for silicon. What properties does silicon share with carbon that would make silicon-based life more likely than, say, neon-based life or aluminum-based life?

2. \Vhich ofthe following hydrocarbons has a double bond in its

carbon skeleton? a. C3 Hg b. C2 H6 C. CH 4

SCIENTIFIC INQUIRY 9. In 1918, an epidemic of sleeping sickness caused an unusual

3. Choose the term that correctly describes the relationship between these two sugar molecules: H

I

H, -v0 C I H-C-OH I H-C-OH I

H-C-OH

I

C=O

I

H-C-OH

I

H a. structural isomers b. geometric isomers

H c. enantiomers d. isotopes

rigid paralysis in some survivors, similar to symptoms of advanced Parkinson's disease. Years later, L-dopa (below, left), a chemical used to treat Parkinson's disease, was given to some of these patients, as dramatized in the movie Awakenings. L-dopa was remarkably effective at eliminating the paralysis, at least temporarily. However, its enantiomer, o-dopa (right), was subsequently shown to have no effect at all, as is the L-dopa o-dopa case for Parkinson's disease. Suggest a hypothesis to explain why, for both diseases, one enantiomer is effective and the other is not.

4. Identify the asymmetric carbon in this molecule:

o

SCIENCE, TECHNOLOGY, AND SOCIETY

OHH H H

~.lbl,ldl.

'C-C-C-C-C-H

HI

U U

5. Which functional group is not present in this molecule?

HO, -v0

C H I I

H-C-C-OH

I

I

N H

H/ 'H a. carboxyl

b. sulfhydryl

c. hydroxyl

d. amino

10. Thalidomide achieved notoriety 50 years ago because of a wave of birth defects among children born to women who took thalidomide during pregnancy as a treatment for morning sickness. However, in 1998 the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) approved this drug for the treatment of certain conditions associated with Hansen's disease (leprosy). In clinical trials. thalidomide also shows promise for use in treating patients suffering from AIDS. tuberculosis, and some types of cancer. Do you think approval of this drug is appropriate? If so. under what conditions? \Vhat criteria do you think the FDA should use in weighing a drug's benefits against its dangers? (HAPTE~ fOU ~


67

The Structu e and Functio 0 Large Biologlca Molecules KEY

CONCEPTS

5.1

Macromolecules are polymers, built from

5.2

Carbohydrates serve as fuel and building material lipids are a diverse group of hydrophobic molecules Proteins have many structures, resulting in a wide range of functions

monomers

5.3 5.4 5.5

Nucleic acids store and transmit hereditary

information

iven the rich complexity of life on Earth, we might expect organisms to have an enormous diversity of molecules. Remarkably, however, the critically important large molecules ofall living things-from bacteria to elephantsfall into just four main classes: carbohydrates, lipids, proteins, and nucleic acids. On the mole.

Phospholipids

CH1-ikHl)l

1!

'tl

blood flow and reduce the resilience ofthe vessels. Recent studies have shown that the process of hydrogenating vegetable oils produces not only saturated fats but also unsaturated fats with trans double bonds. These trans fats may contribute more than sarurated fats to atherosclerosis (see Chapter42) and other problems. Because trans fats are especially common in baked goods and processed foods, the USDA requires trans fatcontent information on nutritional labels. Fat has come to have such a negative connotation in our culture that you might wonder what useful purpose fats serve. The major function of fats is energy storage. The hydrocarbon chains of fats are similar to gasoline molecules and just as rich in energy. Agram offat stores more than twice as much energy as a gram ofa polysaccharide, such as starch. Because plants are relatively immobile, they can function with bulky energy storage in the form of starch. (Vegetable oils are generally obtained from seeds, where more compact storage is an asset to the plant.) Animals, however, must carry their energy stores with them, so there is an advantage to having a more compact reservoir of fuel-fat. Humans and other mammals stocK their longterm food reserves in adipose cells (see Figure 4.6a), which swell and shrink as fat is deposited and withdrawn from storage.ln addition to storing energy, adipose tissue also cushions such vital organs as the kidneys, and a layer of fat beneath the skin insulates the body. This subcutaneous layer is especially thick in whales, seals, and most other marine mammals, protecting them from cold ocean water.

(H -

I

1

Phosphate •

._._._•••__ ••_._

CH-(H

I

1

0

0

1

I..···•······•······•··

_.

Glycerol

•__ .__ .

(=0 (=0

Fatty acids Hydrophilic head II-t7'Hydrophobic tails (a) Structural formula

76

UNIT ONE

TheChemistryofLife

(b) Space-filling

model

(c) Phospholipid symbol

Hydrophilic head

WATER

HO Hydrophobic tail

WATER

... Figure 5.14 Bilayer structure formed by self.assembly of phospholipids in an aqueous environment. The phospholipid bilayer shown here is the main fabric of biological membranes. Note that the hydrophilIC heads of the phospholipids are in contad with water In this structure. whereas the hydrophobic tails are in contact with each other and remote from water.

for cells because they make up cell membranes. Their structure provides a classic example of how form fits function at the molecular level. As shown in Figure 5.13, a phospholipid is similar to a fat molecule but has only two fatty acids attached to glycerol rather than three. The third hydroxyl group of glycerol is joined to a phosphate group, which has a negative electrical charge. Additional small molecules, which are usually charged or polar, can be linked to the phosphate group to form a variety of phospholipids. The rn'o ends of phospholipids show different behavior toward water. The hydrocarbon tails are hydrophobic and are excluded from water. However, the phosphate group and its attachments form a hydrophilic head that has an affinity for water. \Vhen phospholipids are added to water, they selfassemble into double-layered aggregates-bilayers-that shield their hydrophobic portions from water (Figure 5.14). At the surface ofa cell, phospholipids are arranged in a similar bilayer. The hydrophilic heads of the molecules are on the outside of the bilayer, in contact with the aqueous solutions inside and outside of the cell. The hydrophobic tails point toward the interior of the bilayer, away from the water. The phospholipid bilayer forms a boundary bern'een the cell and its external environment; in fact, cells could not exist without phospholipids.

Steroids Many hormones, as well as cholesterol, are steroids, which are lipids characterized by a carbon skeleton consisting offour fused rings (Figure 5.15). Different steroids vary in the chemical groups attached to this ensemble of rings. Cholesterol is a common component of animal cell membranes and is also the precursor from which other steroids are synthesized. In

... Figure 5.15 Cholesterol, a steroid. Cholesterol is the molecule from which other steroids. including the sex hormones. are synthesized. Steroids ~ary in the chemical groups altached to their four interconnected rings (shown in gold).

vertebrates, cholesterol is synthesized in the liver. Many hormones, including vertebrate sex hormones, are steroids produced from cholesterol (see Figure 4.9). Thus, cholesterol is a crucial molecule in animals, although a high level of it in the blood may contribute to atherosclerosis. Both saturated fats and trans fats exert their negative impact on health by affecting cholesterol levels. CONCEPT

CHECK

5.3

I. Compare the structure of a fat (triglyceride) with that of a phospholipid. 2. Why are human sex hormones considered lipids? 3. _',mUIA Suppose a membrane surrounded an oil droplet, as it does in the cells of plant seeds. Describe and explain the form it might take. For suggested answers, see Appendix A.

r;;::~; ~~~ many structures, resulting in a wide range of functions

Nearly every dynamic function of a living being depends on proteins. In fact, the importance of proteins is underscored by their name, which comes from the Greek word proteios, meaning "first place:' Proteins account for more than 50% of the dry mass ofmost cells, and they are instrumental in almost everything organisms do. Some proteins speed up chemical reactions, while others play a role in structural support,

C~APTE~ fiVE

The Structure and Function of Large Biological Molecules

77

An Overview of Protein Functions Type of Protein

Function

Examples

Enzymatic proteins

Selective acceleration of chemical reactions

Digestive enzymes catalyze the hydrolysis of the polymers in food.

Structural proteins

Support

Insects and spiders use silk fibers to make their cocoons and webs, respectively. Collagen and elastin provide a fibrous framework in animal connective tissues. Keratin is the protein of hair, horns, feathers, and other skin appendages.

Storage proteins

Storage of amino acids

Ovalbumin is the protein of egg white, used as an amino acid source for the developing embryo. Casein, the protein of milk, is the major source of amino acids for baby mammals. Plants have storage proteins in their seeds.

Transport proteins

Transport of other substances

Hemoglobin, the iron-containing protein of vertebrate blood, transports oxygen from the lungs to other parts of the body. Other proteins transport molecules across cell membranes.

Hormonal proteins

Coordination of an organism's activities

Insulin, a hormone secreted by the pancreas, helps regulate the concentration of sugar in the blood of vertebrates.

Receptor proteins

Response of cell to chemical stimuli

Receptors built into the membrane of a nerve cell detect chemical signals released by other nerve cells.

Contractile and motor proteins

Movement

Actin and myosin are responsible for the contmction of muscles. Other proteins are responsible for the undulations of the organelles called cilia and flagella.

Defensive proteins

Protection against disease Antibodies combat bacteria and viruses.

storage, transport, cellular communication, movement, and defense against foreign substances (Table 5.1). Life would not be possible without enzymes, most of which are proteins. Enzymatic proteins regulate metabolism by acting as catalysts, chemical agents that selectivelyspeed up chemical reactions without being consumed by the reaction (Figure 5.16).

o

8 Substrate binds to enzyme.

Active site is available for a molecule of substrate, the reactant on which the enzyme acts.

s:

(Q;:;? ~sucrose)

Because an enzyme can perform its function over and over again, these molecules can be thought of as workhorses that keep cells running by carrying out the processes oflife. A human has tens of thousands of different proteins, each with a specific structure and function; proteins, in fact, are the most structurally sophisticated molecules known. Consistent with their diverse functions, they vary extensively in structure, each type of protein having a unique three-dimensional shape.

Polypeptides Diverse as proteins are, they are all polymers constructed from the same set of 20 amino acids. Polymers of amino adds are called polypeptides. A protein consists of one or more polypeptides, each folded and coiled into a spedfic three-dimensional structure. Amino Acid Monomers

o Products are released.

f) Substrate is converted to products.

.... Figure 5.16 The catalytic cycle of an enzyme. The enzyme sucrase accelerates hydrolysis of sucrose into glucose and fructose, Acting as a catalyst, the sucrase protein is not consumed during the cycle. but remains available for further catalysis. 78

UNIT ONE

TheChemistryofLife

All amino acids share a common structure. Amino acids are organic molecules possessing both Cl carbon carboxyl and amino groups (see R~ Chapter 4). The illustration at the H\N ~_(yP right shows the general formula for HI I 'OH an amino acid. At the center of the H amino acid is an asymmetric carbon Amino Carboryl atom called the alpha (a) carbon. Its group group four different partners are an amino group, a carboxyl group, a hydrogen atom, and a variable group symbolized by R. The R group, also called the side chain, differs with each amino acid. Figure 5.17 shows the 20 amino acids that cells use to build their thousands of proteins. Here the amino and carboxyl

CH)

CH 3 CH 3

I

'J

(H] CH] H

I

;0

H W-C-C

)

CH 3

I

H

I I

H W-C-C

)

' 0-

H

Glycine (Glyor G)

,/

0

H W-C-C

I

3

H

Alanine (Ala or A)

' 0-

3

H

Valine (Valor V)

H2

T

a

CH 2

H

)

I

H

0

I

' 0-

3

H

Methionine (Met or M)

)

/CH, ,

H2C

I / H W-(-( ) I ' 0-

~ /CH]

0

tH,

H

w-t-c' I '

)

CH

Proline (Pro or P)

/

I

' 0-

H W-C-C

)

0-

H

I

Serine (Ser or S)

H

'a-

I

H

Threonine (Thr or n

NH2 0

Cysteine

H

)

W-~-C;

H

' 0-

H

3

Tyrosine (Tyr or Y)

(Cys or C)

CH,

I 0

I

I I

'C/

CH 2

H W-C-C I " 3

N,,~,O

¢

a

CH 2

"-0-

H

Tryptophan (Trp or W)

I

0

0

I

'

H

SH

CH 2

I I " HW-C-C

OH

Polar

' 0-

Isoleucine (lie or l)

0

CH 2

Phenylalanine (Phe or F)

OH

I

H

NH

w-~-c"

H

' 0-

H W-C-C"

p

9 CH 2

w-~-c;

; ' 0-

Leucine (Leu or L)

CH)

I I

I I

a

H3C-i H

0

H W-C-C

Nonpolar

S

I

CH 2

;0

\H

; "-0-

CH,

\H

CH 2

0

H

0-

(H 2

0

H

0-

w-i-c" w-t-c' I " ] I " H

Asparagine (Asn or N)

Glutamine (Gin or 0)

Bask

~H2

Addic

°

0-

Electrically charged

0-

CH,

I CH 2

H

)

I

H

' 0-

Aspartic acid (Asp or D) ... Figure 5.17 The 20 amino acids of proteins. The amino acids are grouped here according to the properties of their side chains (R groups), highlighted in white. The amino

0

I

I I CH, I

CH 2

,

H

I

0

w-i-c'; ) I '

H W-C-C I "

)

NH

IH,

(H 2

0

W-~-C';

CH, CH,

I I

'C/

I )

C-NH 2+

I I

'C/

0

NH •

H

0-

H

Glutamic acid (Glu or E)

Lysine (Lys or K)

acids are shown in their prevailing ionic forms at pH 7.2. the pH within a cell. The three-letter and more commonly used one-letter abbreviations for the amino acids are in

CHAPTE~

fiVE

0-

p'

H ,

NH

CH 2 0 I ;H N+-C-C

)

I

H

' 0-

Arginine (Arg or R)

CH 2 H

)

0

w-c-c I " I

H

' 0-

Histidine (His or H)

parentheses. All the amino acids used in proteins are the same enantiomer, called the l form, as shown here (see Figure 4.7).


79

groups are all depicted in ionized form, the way they usually exist at the pH in a cell. TIle R group may be as simple as a hydrogen atom, as in the amino acid glycine (the one amino acid lacking an asymmetric carbon, since two of its a carbon's partners are hydrogen atoms), or it may be a carbon skeleton with various functional groups attached, as in glutamine. (Organisms do have other amino acids, some of which are occasionally found in proteins. Because these are relatively rare, they are not shown in Figure 5.17.) The physical and chemical properties of the side chain determine the unique characteristics of a particular amino acid, thus affecting its functional role in a polypeptide. In Figure 5.17, the amino acids are grouped according to the properties of their side chains. One group consists of amino acids with nonpolar side chains, which are hydrophobic. Another group consists of amino acids with polar side chains, which are hydrophilic. Acidic amino acids are those with side chains that are generally negative in charge owing to the presence of a carboxyl group, which is usually dissociated (ionized) at cellular pH. Basic amino acids have amino groups in their side chains that are generally positive in charge. (Notice that all amino acids have carboxyl groups and amino groups; the terms acidic and basic in this context refer only to groups on the side chains.) Because they are charged, acidic and basic side chains are also hydrophilic.

Amino Acid Polymers Now that we have examined amino acids, let's see how they are linked to form polymers (Figure 5.18). When two amino acids are positioned so that the carboxyl group of one is adjacent to the amino group of the other, they can become joined by a dehydration reaction, with the removal of a water molecule. The resulting covalent bond is called a peptide bond. Repeated over and over, this process yields a polypeptide, a polymer of many amino acids linked by peptide bonds. At one end of the polypeptide chain is a free amino group; at the opposite end is a free carboxyl group. Thus, the chain has an amino end (N-terminus) and a carboxyl end (C-terminus). The repeating sequence of atoms highlighted in purple in Figure 5.18b is called the polypeptide backbone. Extending from this backbone are different kinds ofappendages, the side chains of the amino acids. Polypeptides range in length from a few monomers to a thousand or more. Each specific polypeptide has a unique linear sequence of amino acids. The immense variety of polypeptides in nature illustrates an important concept introduced earlier-that cells can make many different polymers by linking a limited set of monomers into diverse sequences.

Protein Structure and Function The specific activities of proteins result from their intricate three-dimensional architecture, the simplest level of which is 80

UNIT ONE

TheChemistryofLife

OH peptlde¢

OHI bOl"d CHz

H-LL

III HQ

'" I

SHI

CHz

CH2

III HQ

I H

LL~~.-L)-C-OH

•

(.)

I Q

OH OHI ¢"I Peptide SHI ) bond H-LL-LL1LL-OH}eaCkbone

S;d"h,,",

t

(b)

CH2

CH2

CHl

I!

I!

I!

Amino end (N-terminus)

t

Carboxyl end (C-terminus)

.... Figure 5.18 Making a polypeptide chain. (a) Peptide bonds formed by dehydration reactions link the carboxylgfOup of one amino acid to the amino group of the next. (b) The peptide bonds are formed one at a time. starting with the amino acid at the amino end (N·termInUS). The polypeptide has a repetitive backbone (purple) to which the amino acid side chains are attached. ••Ijl.W"1 In (a), circle and label the carboxyl and amino groups that

will form the peptide bond shown in (b).

the sequence of their amino acids. The pioneer in determining the amino acid sequence of proteins was Frederick Sanger, who, with his colleagues at Cambridge University in England, worked on the hormone insulin in the late 1940s and early 1950s. He used agents that break polypeptides at specific places, followed by chemical methods to determine the amino acid sequence in these small fragments. Sanger and his co-workers were able, after years of effort, to reconstruct the complete amino acid sequence of insulin. Since then, most of the steps involved in sequencing a polypeptide have been automated. Once we have learned the amino acid sequence of a polypeptide, what can it tell us about the three-dimensional structure (commonly referred to simply as the "structure~) of the protein and its function? The term polypeptide is not synonymous with the term protein. Even for a protein consisting of a single polypeptide, the relationship is somewhat analogous to that behveen a long strand of yarn and a sweater of particular size and shape that can be knit from the yarn. A functional protein is not just a polypeptide chain, but one or more polypeptides precisely twisted, folded, and coiled into a molecule of unique shape (Figure 5.19). And it

(a) A ribbon model shows how the single polypeptide chain folds and coils to form the fundional protein. (The yellow lines represent crosslinking bonds between cysteines that stabilize the protein's shape,)

(b) A space-filling model shows more clearly the globular shape seen in many proteins, as well as the specific three-dimensional structure unique to lysozyme.

... Figure 5.19 Structure of a protein. the enzyme lysozyme. Present in our sweat, tears, and sali~a. lysozyme is an enzyme that helps pre~ent infedion by binding to and destroying specific molecules on the surface of many kinds of bacteria, The groo~e is the part of the protein that recognizes and binds to the target molecules on bacterial walls,

is the amino acid sequence of each polypeptide that determines what three-dimensional structure the protein will have. \VIlen a cell synthesizes a polypeptide, the chain generally folds spontaneously, assuming the functional structure for that protein. This folding is driven and reinforced by the formation ofa variety of bonds between parts ofthe chain, which in turn depends on the sequence of amino acids. Many proteins are roughly spherical (globular proteins), while others are shaped like long fibers (fibrous proteins). Even within these broad categories, countless variations exist. A protein's specific structure determines how it works. In almost every case, the function of a protein depends on its ability to recognize and bind to some other molecule. In an especially striking example ofthe marriage ofform and function, Figure 5.20 shows the exact match of shape between an antibody (a protein in the body) and the particular foreign substance on a flu virus that the antibody binds to and marks for destruction. A second example is an enzyme, which must recognize and bind closely to its substrate, the substance the enzymeworkson (see Figure 5.16). Also, you learned in Chapter 2 that natural signaling molecules called endorphins bind to specific receptor proteins on the surface of brain cells in humans, producing euphoria and relieving pain. Morphine, heroin, and other opiate drugs are able to mimic endorphins because they all share a similar shape with endorphins and can thus fit into and bind to endorphin receptors in the brain. This fit is very specific, something like a lock and key (see Figure 2.18). Thus, the function ofa protein-for instance, the ability ofa receptor protein to bind to a particular pain-relieving signaling moleculeis an emergent property resulting from exquisite molecular order.

Four Leyels of Protein Structure \Vith the goal ofunderstanding the function ofa protein, learningabout its structure is often productive. In spite oftheir great diversity, all proteins share three superimposed levels of structure, known as primary, secondary, and tertiary structure. A fourth level. quaternary structure, arises when a protein consists of two or more polypeptide chains. Figure 5.21, on the following two pages, describes these four levels of protein structure. Be sure to study this figure thoroughly before going on to the next section. Antibody protein

Protein from flu virus

... Figure 5.20 An antibody binding to a protein from a flu virus. A technique called X-ray crystallography was used to generate a computer model of an antibody protein (blue and orange, left) bound to a flu virus protein (green and yellow, right), Computer software was then used to back the imag~ away from each other, revealing the exad complementarity of shape between the two protein surfaces.

C~APTE~ fiVE


81

• FII'ft 5.21

••

• Levels of Protein Structure Primary Structure

Secondary Structure ~

pleated sheet

II

helix

------ ------ ------The primary structure of a protein is its unique sequence of amino adds, As an example, let's consider transthyretin, a globular protein found in the blood that transports vitamin A and one of the thyroid hormones throughout the body. Each ofthe four identical polypeptide chains that together make up tr,msthyretin is composed of 127 amino adds. Shown here is one ofthese chains unraveled for a closer look at its primary structure. Each of the 127 positions along the chain is occupied by one of the 20 amino acids, indicated here by its three-letter abbreviation. The primary structure is like the order of letters in avery long word If left to chance, there would be 20 127 different ways of making a polypeptide chain 127 amino acids long, However, the precise primary structure of a protein is determined not by the random linking ofamino acids, but by inherited genetic infonnation.

Most proteins have segments of their polypeptide chains repeatedly coiled or folded in patterns that contribute to the protein's overall shape. These coils and folds, collectively referred to as secondary structure, are the result of hydrogen bonds between the repeating constituents of the polypeptide backbone (not the amino acid side chains). Both the oxygen and the nitrogen atoms of the backbone are electronegative, with partial negative charges (see Figure 2.16). The weakly positive hydrogen atom attached to the nitrogen atom has an affinity for the oxygen atom of a nearby peptide bond. Individually, these hydrogen bonds are we3k, but because they are repeated many times over a relatively long region of the polypeptide chain, they can support a particular shape for that part ofthe protein. One such secondary structure is the a helix, a delicate coil held together by hydrogen bonding between every fourth amino acid, shown above. Although transthyretin has only one a helix region (see tertiary structure), other globular proteins have multiple stretches of a helix separated by nonhelical regions. Some fibrous proteins, such as a-keratin, the structural protein ofhair, have the a helix formation over most of their length. The other main type ofsecond3ry structure is the II pleated sheet. As shown above, in this structure two or more regions ofthe polypeptide chain lying side by side are connected by hydrogen bonds between parts ofthe two parallel polypeptide backbones. Pleated sheets make up the core of many globular proteins, as is the case for transthyretin, and dominate some fibrous proteins, including the silk protein ofaspider's web. The teamwork ofso many hydrogen bonds makes each spider silk fiber stronger than a steel strand of the same weight

Abdominal glands of the ~ spider secrete silk fibers made of a structural protein containing ~ pleated sheets. ! The radiating strands, made ~ of dry silk fibers, maintain the shape of the web. /0

C

'Om Carboxyl end

82

UNIT ONE

TheChemistryofLife

The spiral strands (capture strands) are elastic, stretching in response to wind, rain, and the touch of insects.

~

Tertiary Structure

Quaternary Structure

----- ---- ----

--- ---

-------

Superimposed on the patterns of secondary structure is a protein's tertiary structure, shown above for the transthyretin polypeptide.

While secondary structure involves interactions between backbone constituents, tertiary structure is the overall shape of a polypeptide resulting from interactions between the siclechains (R groups) ofthe various amino acids. One type of interaction that contributes to ter-

tiary structure is-somewhat misleadingly-called a hydrophobic interaction. As a polypeptide folds into its functional shape, amino

acids with hydrophobic (nonpolar) side chains usually end up in clusters at the core of the protein, out ofcontact with water. Thus, what we call a hydrophobic interaction is actually caused by the action of water molecules, which exclude nonpolar substances as they form hydrogen bonds with each other and with hydrophilic parts of the protein. Once nonpolar amino acid side chains are close together, van der Waals interactions help hold them together. Meanwhile. hy. drogen bonds between polar side chains and ionic bonds between positively and negatively charged side chains also help stabilize terti· ary structure. These are all weak interactions, but their cumulative effect helps give the protein a unique shape. The shape of a protein may be reinforced further by covalent bonds caned disulfide bridges. Disulfide bridges form where two cysteine monomers, amino acids with sulfhydryl groups (-SH) on their side chains (see Figure 4.10), are brought close together by the folding of the protein. The sulfur Hydrophobic of one cysteine interactions and bonds to the sulfur van der Waals of the second, and interactions the disulfide bridge (-5-5-) rivets parts of the protein Hydrogen together (see yellow HO-( bond lines in figure 5.19a). I All of these different CH, kinds of bonds can occur in one protein, as shown here in a small part of a hypothetical protein.

Some proteins consist of two or more polypeptide chains aggregated into one functional macromolecule. Quaternary structure is the overall protein structure that results from the aggregation of these polypeptide subunits. For example, shown above is the complete, globular transthyretin protein. made up of its four polypep· tides. Another example is collagen, shown below left, which is a fibrous protein that has helical subunits intertwined into a larger triple helix, giving the long fibers great strength. This suits collagen fibers to their function as the girders of connective tissue in skin, bone, tendons, ligaments, and other body parts (collagen accounts for 40% of the protein in a human body). Hemoglobin, the oxygenbinding protein of red blood cells shown below right, is another example of a globular protein with quaternary structure. It consists of four polypeptide subunits, two of one kind ("a chains") and two of another kind ("13 chains"). Both a and 13 subunits consist primarily of a-helical secondary structure. Each subunit has a nonpolypep· tide component, called heme. with an iron atom that binds oxygen.

Polypeptide chain

or

CHAPfE~

fiVE

« Chains Hemoglobin Collagen


83

Sickle-Cell Disease: A Change in Primary Structure

What Determines Protein Structure?

Even a slight change in primary structure can affect a protein's shape and ability to function. For instance, sickle-cell disease, an inherited blood disorder, is caused by the substitution of one amino acid (valine) for the normal one (glutamic acid) at a particular position in the primary structure of hemoglobin, the protein that carries oxygen in red blood cells. Normal red blood cells are disk~shaped, but in sick[e~cell disease, the ab~ normal hemoglobin molecules tend to crystallize, deforming some of the cells into a sickle shape (Figure 5.22). The life of someone with the disease is punctuated by "sickle·cell crises;' which occur when the angular cells clog tiny blood vessels, impeding blood flow. The toll taken on such patients is a dramatic example of how a simple change in protein structure can have devastating effects on protein function.

You've learned that a unique shape endows each protein with a specific function. But what are the key factors determining protein structure? You already know most of the answer: A polypeptide chain of a given amino acid sequence can spontaneously arrange itself into a three-dimensional shape determined and maintained by the interactions responsible for secondary and tertiary structure. This folding normally occurs as the protein is being synthesized within the cell. However, protein structure also depends on the physical and chemical conditions of the protein's environment. If the pH, salt can· centration, temperature, or other aspects of its environment are altered, the protein may unravel and lose its native shape, a change called denaturation (figure 5.23). Because it is misshapen, the denatured protein is biologically inactive.

.... Normal hemoglobin

Primary structure

1234567

Secondary and tertiary structures

II subunit

Sickle-cell hemoglobin Primary structure Secondary and tertiary structures

~ 1234567

Exposed-:;:-,f--Il-.~ hydrophobic region

13 subunit

,~

,, ,, ,, ,, ,,

Quaternary structure

SicklNel1 hemoglobin

Molecules do not associate with one another; each carries orygen.

Function

Molecules interact with one another and crystallize into a fiber; capacity to carry oxygen is greatly reduced

Normal cells are full of mdividual hemoglobin molecules. each carrymg oxygen .

Red blood cell shape

Fibers of abnormal hemoglobin deform cell into sickle shape.

Quaternary structure

Normal hemoglobin (top view)

Function

Red blood cell shape

... Figure 5.22 Asingle amino acid substitution in a protein causes sickle-cell disease. To show fiber formation clearly, the orientation of the hemoglobin molecule here is different from that in Figure 5.21. 84

UNIT ONE

TheChemistryofLife

,,

,

Protein Folding in the Cell

Normal protein

~

Biochemists now know the amino acid sequences of more than 1.2 million proteins and the three-dimensional shapes of about 8,500. One would think that by correlating the primary structures of many proteins with their three-dimensional structures, it would be relatively easy to discover the rules of protein folding. Unfortunately, the protein-folding process is not that simple. Most proteins probably go through several intermediate structures on their way to a stable shape, and looking at the mature structure does not reveal the stages offolding required to achieve that form. However, biochemists have developed methods for tracking a protein through such stages. Researchers have also discovered chaperonins (also called chaperone proteins), protein molecules that assist in the proper folding ofother proteins (Figure 5.24). Olaperonins do not specify the final structure of a polypeptide. Instead, they keep the new polypeptide segregated from "bad influences" in the cytoplasmic environment while it folds spontaneously. The chaperonin shown in Figure 5.24, from the bacterium E. coli, is a giant multiprotein complex shaped like a hollow cylinder. The cavity provides a shelter for folding polypeptides. Misfolding of polypeptides is a serious problem in cells. Many diseases, such as Alzheimer's and Parkinson's, are associated with an accumulation of misfolded proteins. Recently, researchers have begun to shed light on molecular systems in the cell that interact with chaperonins and check whether proper folding has occurred. Such systems either refold the misfolded proteins correctly or mark them for destruction. Even when scientists have a correctly folded protein in hand, determining its exact three-dimensional structure is not simple, for a single protein molecule has thousands of atoms. The first 3-D structures were worked out in 1959, for hemoglobin and a related protein. The method that made these feats possible was X-ray crystallography, which has since been used to determine the 3-D structures of many other proteins. In a recent example, Roger Kornberg and his colleagues at Stanford University used this method in order to elucidate the structure of RNA polymerase, an enzyme that playsa crucial role in the expression

Denatured protein

... Figure 5.23 Denaturation and renaturation of a protein.

High temperatures or various chemical treatments will denature a protein. causing it to lose its shape and hence its ability to function. If the denatured protein remains dissolved. it can often renature when the chemical and physical aspects of its environment are restored to normal.

Most proteins become denatured if they are transferred from an aqueous environment to an organic solvent, such as ether or chloroform; the polypeptide chain refolds so that its hydrophobic regions face outward toward the solvent. Other denaturation agents include chemicals that disrupt the hydrogen bonds, ionic bonds, and disulfide bridges that maintain a protein's shape. Denaturation can also result from excessive heat, which agitates the polypeptide chain enough to overpower the weak interactions that stabilize the structure. The white of an egg becomes opaque during cooking because the denatured proteins are insoluble and solidify. This also explains why excessively high fevers can be fatal: Proteins in the blood can denature at very high body temperatures. \Vhen a protein in a test-tube solution has been denatured by heat or chemicals, it can sometimes return to its functional shape when the denaturing agent is removed. We can condude that the information for building specific shape is intrinsic to the protein's primary structure. The sequence of amino acids determines the protein's shape-where an a helix can form, where f3 pleated sheets can occur, where disulfide bridges are located, where ionic bonds can form, and so on. In the crowded environment inside a cell, there are also specific proteins that aid in the folding of other proteins.

correctlY~

Polypeptide

.. Figure 5.24 A chaperonin in action. The computer graphic «eft} shows a

large chaperonin protein complex, It has an interior space that provides a shelter for the proper folding of nevAy made polypeptides. The complex consists of two proteins: One protein is a hollOl'l cylinder; the other is a cap that can fit on either end.

folded protein

,."

•

Hollow cylinder

Chaperonin (fully assembled)

Steps of Chaperonin Action: An unfolded polypeptide enlers the cylinder from one end

o

C~APTE~

fiVE

6

The cap attaches. causing the cylinder to change shape in such a way that it creates a hydrophilic environment for the folding of the polypeptide

o off, The cap comes and the properly folded protein is released.


85

of genes (Figure 5.25). Another method now in use is nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR) spectroscopy, which does not require protein crystaJlization. A still newer approach uses bioinformatics (see Chapter 1) to predict the 3- Dstructures of polypeptides from their amino acid sequences. In 2005, researchers in Austria used comput·

" F9!:! 5.25

In ui

What can the 3·0 shape of the enzyme RNA polymerase II tell us about its function? EXPERIMENT In 2006. Roger Kornberg was awarded the Nobel Prize in Chemistry for using X-ray crystallography to determine the 3-D shape of RNA polymerase II, which binds to the DNA double helix and synthesizes RNA. After crystallizing a complex of all three components. Kornberg and his colleagues aimed an X-ray beam through the crystal. The atoms of the crystal diffracted (bent) the X-rays Into an orderly array that a digital detector recorded as a pattern of spots called an X-ray diffraction pattern. Diffracted

ers to analyze the sequences and structures of 129 common plant protein allergens. They were able to classify all of these allergens into 20 families of proteins out of 3,849 families and 65% into just 4 families. This result suggests that the shared structures in these protein families may playa role in generating allergic reactions. These structures may provide targets for new allergy medications. X-ray crystallography, NMR spectroscopy, and bioinfor· matics are complementary approaches to understanding protein structure. Together they have also given us valuable hints about protein function. CONCEPT

CHECK

5.4

1. Why does a denatured protein no longer function normally? 2. What parts of a polypeptide chain participate in the bonds that hold together secondary structure? What parts participate in tertiary structure? 3. -MUllii If a genetic mutation changes primary structure, how might it destroy the protein's function? For suggested answers, see Appendix A.

X-ray source

Xi'" X-ray beam

I

Crystal

Digital detector

X-ray diffraction pattern

RESULTS Using data from X-ray diffraction patterns, as well as the amino acid sequence determined by chemical methods, Kornberg and colleagues built a 3-D model of the complex with the help of computer software, RNA

polymerase II

~::~:~;a~i:s store and transmit hereditary information

Ifthe primary structure ofpolypeptides determines a protein's shape, what determines primary structure? The amino acid sequence of a polypeptide is programmed by a unit of inheritance known as a gene. Genes consist of DNA, a polymer belonging to the class of compounds known as nucleic acids.

The Roles of Nucleic Acids RNA.---

CONCLUSION By analyzing their model, the researchers developed a hypothesis about the functions of different regions of RNA polymerase II. For example. the region above the DNA may act as a clamp that holds the nucleic acids in place. (Youillearn more about this enzyme in Chapter 17,j SOURCE

A. L. Gn 3' directions from each other, an arrangement referred to as antiparallel, somewhat like a divided highway. The sugar-phosphate backbones are on the outside of the helix, and the nitrogenous bases are paired in the interior of the helix. The two polynucleotides, or strands, as they are called, are held together by hydrogen bonds between the paired bases and by van der Waals interactions between the stacked bases. Most DNA molecules are very long, with thousands or even millions ofbase pairs connecting the two chains, One long DNA double helix includes many genes, each one a particular segment of the molecule. Only certain bases in the double helix are compatible with each other, Adenine (A) always pairs with thymine (T), and guanine (G) always pairs with cytosine (C), If we were to read the sequence of bases along one strand as we traveled the length of the double helix, we would know the sequence of bases along the other strand. Ifa stretch of one strand has the base sequence 5'-AGGTCCG-3', then the base-pairing rules tell us that the same stretch of the other strand must have the sequence 3'-TCCAGGC-5'. The two strands of the double helix are complementary, each the predictable counterpart of the other, It is this feature of DNA that makes possible the precise copying of genes that is responsible for inheritance (see Figure 5.28). In preparation for cell division, each of the two strands of a DNA molecule serves as a template to order nucleotides into a new complementary strand, The result is two identical copies of the original double-stranded DNA molecule, which are then distributed to the two daughter cells. Thus, the structure of DNA accounts for its function in transmitting genetic information whenever a cell reproduces.

DNA and Proteins as Tape Measures of Evolution

Mole£--Radial----~ spoke Microtubules

Plasma membrane Basal body

0.5

Protein cross~ linkmg outer doublets (b) A cross section through a motile Cilium shows the "9 + 2" arrangement of microtubules (TEM), The outer microtubule doublets and the two central microtubules are held together by flexible cross·linking proteins (blue in art), including the radial spokes, The doublets also have attached motor proteins called dyneins (red in art). In the drawing, the plasma membrane has been peeled away to reveal a longitudinal view of two of the doublets,

v.m

(a) A longitudinal section of a motile cilium shows microtubules running the length of the structure (TEM).

I

0.1 jlm

(c) Basal body: The nine outer doublets of a cilium or flagellum extend into the basal body, where each doublet joins another microtubule to form a ring of nme triplets. Each triplet is connected to the next triplet and to the center by nontubulin protems (the blue lines in diagram). The two central micro· tubules are not shown because they terminate above the basal body (TEM), Cross section of basal body

I

-'lI

.. Figure 6.24 Ultrastructure of a eukaryotic flagellum or motile cilium.

CHAPTER SIX

A Tour of the Cell

115

flagellum is anchored in the cell by a basal body, which is structurally very similar to a centriole. In fact, in many animals (including humans), the basal body of the fertilizing sperm's flagellum enters the egg and becomes a centriole. In flagella and motile cilia, flexible cross-linking proteins, evenly spaced along the length of the cilium or flagellum, connect the outer doublets to each other and to the two central microtubules. Each outer doublet also has pairs of protruding proteins spaced along its length and reaching toward the neighboring doublet; these are large motor proteins caned dyneins, each composed ofseveral polypeptides. Dyneins are responsible for the bending movements of the organelle. A dynein mo1cule performs a complex cycle of movements caused by changes in the shape of the protein, with ATP providing the energy for these changes (Figure 6.25). The mechanics of dynein·based bending involve a process that resembles walking. A typical dynein protein has two "feet~ that uwalk~ along the microtubule of the adjacent doublet, one foot maintaining contact while the other releases and reattaches one step further along the microhlbule. \Vlthout any restraints on the movement of the microtubule doublets, one doublet would continue to uwalk~ along and slide past the surface ofthe other, elongating the cilium or flagenum rather than bending it (see Figure 6.25a). For lateral movement of a cilium or flagellum, the dynein "walking" must have something to pull against, as when the muscles in your leg pull against your bones to move your knee. In cilia and flagella, the microtubule doublets seem to be held in place by the cross·linking proteins just inside the outer doublets and by the radial spokes and other structural elements. Thus, neighboring doublets cannot slide past each other very far. Instead, the forces exerted by dynein "walking~ cause the doublets to curve, bending the cilium or flagellum (see Figure 6.2sb and c).

Microfilaments (Actin Filaments) Microfilaments are solid rods about 7 nm in diameter. They are also called actin filaments because they are built from molecules of actin, a globular protein. A microfilament is a twisted double chain ofactin subunits (see Table 6. I). Besides occurring as linear filaments, microfilaments can form structural networks, due to the presence of proteins that bind along the side of an actin filament and allow a new filament to extend as a branch. Microfilaments seem to be present in all eukaryotic cells. In contrast to the compression-resisting role of microtubules, the structural role of microfilaments in the cytoskeleton is to bear tension (pulling forces). A three-dimensional network formed by microfllaments just inside the plasma membrane (cortical microfilaments) helps support the cen's shape. This network gives the outer cytoplasmic layer of a cell, called the cortex, the semisolid consistency of a gel, in contrast with the more fluid (sol) state of the interior cytoplasm.

116

UNIT TWO

The Cell

Microtubule doublets

-.

t#$

~

-

~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~

)..oH-f-Dyneln protein ~J... -r (a) Effect of unrestrained dynein movement. If a cilium or f1ilgellum hild no cross-linking proteins, the two feet of eilch dynein illong one doublet (powered by ATP) would illterniltely grip ilnd releilse the ildJilcent doublet. ThiS 'willklng" motion would push the adjacent doublet up, Insteild of bending, the doublets would slide past each other,

Cross-linking proteins inside outer doublets

-

Anchorilge in cell

(b) EffeER--->Golgi d. ER-'Golgi-'vesicles that fuse with plasma membrane e. ER-'Iysosomes--->vesicles that fuse with plasma membrane 4. \xrhich structure is common to plant and animal cells? a. chloroplast d. mitochondrion b. wall made of cellulose e. centriole c. central vacuole 5. \xrhich of the following is present in a prokaryotic cell? a. mitochondrion d. chloroplast b. ribosome e. ER c. nuclear envelope 6. \xrhich cell would be best for studying lysosomes? a. muscle cell d. leaf cell of a plant b. nerve cell e. bacterial cell c. phagocytic white blood cell 7. \Vhich structure-function pair is mismatchetP. a. nucleolus; production of ribosomal subunits b. lysosome: intracellular digestion c. ribosome; protein synthesis d. Golgi; protein trafficking e. microtubule; muscle contraction 8. Cyanide binds with at least one molecule involved in producing ATP. If a cell is exposed to cyanide, most of the cyanide would be found within the a. mitochondria. d. lysosomes. b. ribosomes. e. endoplasmic reticulum. c. peroxisomes. 9.••l;t-WIII From memory, draw two celis, showing the structures below and any connections between them. nucleus, rough ER, smooth ER, mitochondrion, centrosome, chloroplast, vacuole, lysosome, microtubule, cell wall, EeM, microfilament, Golgi apparatus, intermediate filament, plasma membrane, peroxisome, ribosome, nucleolus, nuclear pore, vesicle, flagellum, microvilli, plasmodesma For&lf-Quiz Answers, s"" Appendix A.

-$14.]('. Visit the Study Area at www.masteringbio.com for a Practice Test.

EVOLUTION CONNECTION 10. \xrhich aspects of cell structure best reveal evolutionary unity? \xrhat are some examples of specialized modifications?

SCIENTIFIC INQUIRY 11. Imagine protein X, destined to go to the plasma membrane. Assume that the mRNA carrying the genetic message for protein X has already been translated by ribosomes in a cell culture. If you fractionate the cell (see Figure 6.5), in which fraction would you find protein X? Explain by describing its transit.

Membrane Structure an Function KEY

7,1 7.2 7.3 7.4

CONCEPTS

Cellular membranes are fluid mosaics of lipids and proteins Membrane structure results in selective permeability Passive transport is diffusion of a substance across a membrane with no energy investment Active transport uses energy to move solutes

against their gradients 7.5

Bulk transport across the plasma membrane occurs by exocytosis and endocytosis

r·ljjin••'. life at the Edge

T

he plasma membrane is the edge of life, the boundary that separates the living cell from its surroundings. A

remarkable film only about 8 om thick-it would take over 8,000 to equal the thickness of this page-the plasma membrane controls traffic into and out of the cell it surrounds. Like all biological membranes, the plasma membrane exhibits selective permeability; that is, it allows some substances to cross it more easily than others. One ofthe earliest episodes in the evolution of life may have been the formation of a membrane that enclosed a solution different from the surrounding solution while still permitting the uptake of nutrients and elimination of waste products. The ability of the cell to discriminate in its chemical exchanges with its environment is fundamental to life, and it is the plasma membrane and its component molecules that make this selectivity possible. In this chapter, you will learn how cellular membranes control the passage of substances. The image in Figure 7.1 shows the elegant structure ofa eukaryotic plasma membrane protein that plays a crucial role in nerve cell signaling. This protein restores the ability of the nerve cell to fire again by providing a

... Figure 7.1 How do cell membrane proteins help regulate chemical traffic?

channel for a stream of potassium ions (K+) to exit the cell at a precise moment after nerve stimulation. (The green ball in the center represents one K+moving through the channel.) In this case, the plasma membrane and its proteins not only act as an outer boundary but also enable the cell to carry out its func· tions. The same applies to the many varieties of internal membranes that partition the eukaryoticceH: The molecular makeup of each membrane allows compartmentalized specialization in cells. To understand how membranes work, we'll begin byexamining their architecture.

r~:'I~~:~~;~branes are fluid

mosaics of lipids and proteins

Lipids and proteins are the staple ingredients of membranes, although carbohydrates are also important. The most abundant lipids in most membranes are phospholipids. The ability of phospholipids to form membranes is inherent in their molecular structure. A phospholipid is an amphipathic molecule, meaning it has both a hydrophilic region and a hydrophobic region (see Figure 5.13). Other types of membrane lipids are also amphipathic. Furthermore, most of the proteins within membranes have both hydrophobic and hydrophilic regions. How are phospholipids and proteins arranged in the membranes of cells? You encountered the currently accepted model for the arrangement of these molecules in Chapter 6 (see Figure 6.7). In this fluid mosaic model, the membrane is a fluid structure with a ~mosaic" ofvarious proteins embedded in or attached to a double layer (bilayer) of phospholipids. Scientists propose models as hypotheses, ,,',oays oforganizing and explaining existing information. Well discuss the fluid mosaic model in detail, starting with the story of how it was developed. 125

Membrane Models: Scientific Inquiry Scientists began building molecular models of the membrane decades before membranes were first seen with the electron microscope in the 1950s. In 1915, membranes isolated from red blood cells were chemically analyzed and found to be composed of lipids and proteins. Ten years later, two Dutch scientists, E. Gorter and F. Grendel, reasoned that cell membranes must be phospholipid bilayers. Such a double layer of molecules could exist as a stable bouodary between two aqueous compartments because the molecular arrangement shelters the hydrophobic tails of the phospholipids from water while exposing the hydrophilic heads to water (Figure 7.2). Building on the idea that a phospholipid bilayer was the main fabric of a membrane, the next question was where the proteins were located. Although the heads of phospholipids are hydrophilic, the surface ofa membrane consisting of a pure phospholipid bilayer adheres less strongly to water than does the surface of a biological membrane. Given these data, Hugh Davson and James Danielli suggested in 1935 that this difference could be accounted for if the membrane were coated on both sides with hydrophilic proteins. They proposed a sandwich model: a phospholipid bilayer between two layers of proteins. When researchers first used electron microscopes to study cells in the 19505, the pictures seemed to support the DavsonDanielli model.. By the 19605, the Davson-Danielli sandwich had become ....'idely accepted as the structure not only of the plasma membrane but also ofall the cell's internal membranes. By the end ofthat decade, however, many cell biologists recognized two problems with the model. The first problem 'was the generalization that aU membranes of the cell are identical. \Vhereas the plasma membrane is 7-8 nm thick and has a three-layered structure in electron micrographs, the inner membrane of the mitochondrion is only 6 nm thick and looks like a row of beads. Mitochondrial membranes also have a higher percentage ofproteins and different kinds of phospholipids and other lipids. In short, 1i membranes with different functions differ in chemical composition and structure. A second, more serious problem with the sand....'ich model was the protein placement. Unlike proteins dissolved in the cytosol, membrane proteins are not ''6)' soluble in ...."J.ter, because they are amphilXlthic. that is,

they have hydrophobic regions as well as hydrophilic regions. If such proteins were layered on the surface ofthe membrane, their hydrophobic parts would be in aqueous surroundings. In 1972, S.,. Singer and G. Nicolson proposed that membrane proteins are dispersed, individually inserted into the phospholipid bilayer with their hydrophilic regions protruding (Figure 7.3). This molecular arrangement would maximize contact of hydrophilic regions of proteins and phospholipids with water in the cytosol and extracellular fluid, while providing their hydrophobic parts with a nonaqueous environment. In this fluid mosaic model, the membrane is a mosaic of protein molecules bobbing in a fluid bilayer of phospholipids. A method of preparing cells for electron microscopy called freeze-fracture has demonstrated visually that proteins are indeed embedded in the phospholipid bilayer of the membrane. Freeze-fracture splits a membrane along the middle of the phospholipid bilayer, somewhat like pulling apart a chunky peanut butter sandwich. When the membrane layers are viewed in the electron microscope, the interior of the bilayer appears cobblestoned, with protein particles interspersed in a smooth matrix, as in the fluid mosaic model (Figure 7.4). Some proteins travel with one layer or the other, like the peanut chunks in the sandwich. Because models are hypotheses, replacing one model of membrane structure with another does not imply that the original model .....as .....orthless. The acceptance or rejection of a model depends on how well it fits observations and explains experimental results. A good model also makes predictions that shape future research. Models inspire experiments, and few models survive these tests without modification. New findings may make a model obsolete; even then, it may not be totally scrapped, but revised to incorporate the new observations. The fluid mosaic model is continuaJly being refined. For example, recent research suggests that membranes may be ~more mosaic than fluid:' Often, multiple proteins semipermanently associate in specialized patches, where they carry out common functions. Also, the membrane may be much more packed with proteins than imagined in the classic fluid mosaic model. Let's now take a closer look at membrane structure.

WATER Phospholipid bilayer

WATER

• Figure 7.2 Phospholipid bilayer (cross section). 126

UNIT TWO

The Cell

HydrophobIC regions of protein

• Figure 7.3 The fluid mosaic model for membranes.

•

FI~7.4

•

Freeze-Fracture APPLICATION ers.

re~ealing

A cell membrane can be split Into its two laythe ultrastructure of the membrane's interior.

TECHNIQUE A cell is frozen and fractured with a knife. The fracture plane often follows the hydrophobic interior of a mem-

brane, splitting the phospholipid bilayer into two separated layers. The membrane proteins go wholly With one of the layers (a) Movement of phospholipids. Lipids move laterally in a membrane. but flip-flopping across the membrane is quite rare,

Fluid

Plasma membrane RESULTS These SEMs show membrane proteins (the "bumps") in the two layers, demonstrating that proteins are embedded in the phospholipid bilayer,

Viscous

Cytoplasmic layer Unsaturated hydrocarbon tails with kinks

",

'

Inside of extracellular layer

Saturated hydrocarbon tails

(bl Membrane fluidity. Unsaturated hydrocarbon tails of phospholipids have kinks that keep the molecules from packing together. enhanCing membrane fluidity,

Inside of cytoplasmic layer

Cholesterol

The Fluidity of Membranes Membranes are not static sheets of molecules locked rigidly in place. A membrane is held together primarily by hydrophobic interactions, which are much weaker than covalent bonds (see Figure 5.21). Mostofthe lipids and some ofthe proteins can shift about laterally-that is, in the plane ofthe membrane, like partygoers elbo\\ingtheirwaythrough acrowded room (Figure 7.Sa). It is quite rare, however, for a molecule to flip-flop transversely across the membrane, switching from one phospholipid layer to the other; to do so, the hydrophilic part of the molecule must cross the hydrophobic core of the membrane. The lateral movement ofphospholipids within the membrane is rapid. Adjacent phospholipids switch positions about 107 times per second, which means that a phospholipid can travel about 2 11m-the length ofmany bacterial cells-in 1second. Proteinsare much larger than lipids and move more slowly, but some membrane proteins do drift, as shown in aclassic experiment by David Frye and Michael Edidin (Figure 7.6, on the next page). And some membrane proteins seem to move in a highly directed manner, perhaps driven along cytoskeletal fibers by motor proteins connected to the membrane proteins' cytoplasmic regions. However, many other membrane proteins seem to be held virtually immobile by their attachment to the cytoskeleton.

(cl Cholesterol within the animal cell membrane. Cholesterol reduces membrane fluidity at moderate temperatures by reducing phospholipid movement. but at low temperatures it hinders solidification by disrupting the regular packing of phospholipids, ... Figure 7.5 The fluidity of membranes.

A membrane remains fluid as temperature decreases until finally the phospholipids settle into a closely packed arrangement and the membrane solidifies, much as bacon grease forms lard when it cools. The temperature at which a membrane solidifies depends on the types of lipids it is made of. The membrane remains fluid to a lower temperature if it is rich in phospholipids with unsaturated hydrocarbon tails (see Figures 5.12 and 5.13). Because of kinks in the tails where double bonds are located, unsaturated hydrocarbon tails cannot pack together as closely as saturated hydrocarbon tails, and this makes the membrane more fluid (Figure 7.5b). The steroid cholesterol, which is wedged between phospholipid molecules in the plasma membranes of animal cells, has different effects on membrane fluidity at different temperatures (Figure 7.5e). At relatively higher temperatures-at 37C, the CIl ... PTH SEVEN


127

·

In ui

Do membrane proteins move? EXPERIMENT

David Frye and MIChael Edidin, at Johns Hopkins

University, labeled the plasma membrane proteins of a moose (ell and a human cell with two different markers and fused the cells. Using a microscope, they observed the markers on the hybrid cell. RESULTS

Mixed proteins after 1 hour

Human cell

Hybrid cell

CONCLUSION The mixing of the mouse and human membrane proteins indicates that at least some membrane proteins move sideways within the plane of the plasma membrane.

body temperature of humans, for example-cholesterol makes the membrane less fluid by restraining phospholipid movement. However, because cholesterol also hinders the close packing of phospholipids, it lowers the temperature required for the mem~ brane to solidify. Thus, cholesterol can be thought of as a "tern· perature buffer~ for the membrane, resisting changes in membrane fluidity that can be caused by changes in temperature. Membranes must be fluid to work properly; they are usually about as fluid as salad oil. \Vhen a membrane solidifies, its permeability changes, and enzymatic proteins in the membrane may become inactive-for example, if their activity requires them to be able to move laterally in the membrane. The lipid composition of cell membranes can change as an adjustment to changing temperature. For instance, in many plants that tolerate extreme cold, such as winter wheat, the percentage of un~ saturated phospholipids increases in autumn, an adaptation that keeps the membranes from solidifying during winter.

SOURCE

l. D, FI)'l! and M Edidin, The rapid i:'ltem1il:lng of ~II surfoce antlgl'flS after fCJm'l<jlion of rJlOIJSl"-huJTl<jl1 t>elerokaryonl, j. Cell SO. 7:319 (1970).

_mrU1iM If, alter many hours. the protein distribution still looked like that in the third image above. would you be able to conclude that proteins don't move within the membrane? What other explanation could there be?

... Figure 7.7 The detailed structure of an animal cell's plasma membrane, in a cutaway view. 128

UNIT TWO

The Cell

Membrane Proteins and Their Functions Now we come to the mosaic aspect of the fluid mosaic model. A membrane is a collage ofdifferent proteins embedded in the fluid matrix of the lipid bilayer (Figure 7.7). More than 50 kinds of proteins have been found so far in the plasma mem-

brane of red blood cells, for example. Phospholipids form the main fabric ofthe membrane, but proteins determine most of the membrane's functions. Different types ofcells contain differentsets of membrane proteins, and the various membranes within a cell each have a unique collection of proteins. Notice in Figure 7.7 that there are m'o major populations of membrane proteins: integral proteins and peripheral proteins. Integral proteins penetrate the hydrophobic core ofthe lipid bilayer. Many are transmembrane proteins, which span the membratle; other integral proteins extend only partway into the hydrophobic core. The hydrophobic regions of an integral protein consist of one or more stretches of nonpolar amino acids (see Figure 5.17), usually coiled into a helices (Figure 7.8). The hydrophilic parts ofthe molecule are exposed to the aqueous solutions on either side ofthe membrane. Some proteins also have a hydrophilic channel through their center that allows passage of hydrophilic substances (see Figure 7.1). Peripheral proteins are not embedded in the lipid bilayer at aU; they are appendages loosely bound to the surface of the membrane, often to exposed parts of integral proteins (see Figure 7.7). On the cytoplasmic side of the plasma membrane, some membrane proteins are held in place by attachment to the cytoskeleton. And on the extracellular side, certain membrane proteins are attached to fibers of the extracellular matrix (see Figure 6.30; integri/lS are one type of integral protein). These attachments combine to give animal cells a stronger framework than the plasma membrane alone could provide. Figure 7.9 gives an overview of six major functions performed by proteins ofthe plasma membrane. A single cell may

(a) Transport. Lefr: A protein that spans the membrane may provide a hydrophilic channel across the membrane that is selective for a particular solute, Right: Other transport proteins shuttle a substance from one side to the other by changing shape Some of these proteins hydrolyze ATP as an energy source to actively pump substances across the membrane,

(b) Enzymatic activity. A protein built into the membrane may be an enzyme with its active site exposed to substances in the adjacent solution, In some cases, several enzymes in a membrane are organized as a team that carries out sequential steps of a metabolic pathway.

(c) Signal transduction. A membrane protein (receptor) may have a binding site with a specific shape that fits the shape of a chemical messenger, such as a hormone. The external messenger (signaling molecule) may cause a shape change in the protein that relays the message to the inside of the cell, usually by binding to a cytoplasmic protein, (See Figure 11.6,)

,

'.

,

u

•

u

.6

,

~

Enzymes

I

Signal transduction (d) Cell-cell recognition. Some glycoproteins serve as identification tags that are specifically recognized by membrane proteins of other cells.

EXTRACELLULAR SIDE (e) Intercellular joining. Membrane proteins of adjacent cells may hook together in various kinds of junctions, such as gap junctions or tight junctions (see Figure 6.32),

C-terminus / - / (l

HeliX

CYTOPLASMIC SIDE

.. Figure 7.8 The structure of a transmembrane protein. This protein, bacteriorhodopsin (a bacterial transport protein), has a distind onentation In the membrane, with the N·terminus outside the cell and the C-terminus inside, This ribbon model highlights the 0:helical secondary structure of the hydrophobic parts, which lie mostly within the hydrophobic core of the membrane. The protein includes seven transmembrane helices (outlined with cylinders for emphasis), The non helical hydrophilic segments are in contad with the aqueous solutions on the extracellular and cytoplasmIC sides of the membrane

(f) Attachment to the cytoskeleton and extracellular matrix (ECM). Microfilaments or other elements of the cytoskeleton may be noncovalently bound to membrane proteins, a function that helps maintain cell shape and stabilizes the location of certain membrane proteins, Proteins that can bind to ECM molecules can coordinate extracellular and intracellular changes (see Figure 630)

~~:1~WATER

UtjldiiiW

(b) Diffusion of two solutes. Solutions of two different dyes are separated by a membrane that is permeable to both. Each dye diffuses down its own concentration gradient. There will be a net diffusion of the purple dye toward the left, e~en though the total solute concentration was initially greater on the left side .. Figure 7.11 The diffusion of solutes across a membrane. Each of the large arrows under the diagrams shows the net diffusion of the dye molecules af that color.

132

UNIT TWO

The Cell

Membrane (cross section)

I

0

-0

J..: -~o

0 0

L-lnilm~lil.i"~ii!it!jliijii!A..~..J .,.. •

--

=

c:::::::>

I

o

o

lIt

)'0

-I

Imld'i@I.~

~

,0

=

~o -

0

I

I~tjlnji@

1-0

0

0

=

1

0

0

0

..Lo T

0

0

lIt

+mn.li!illl~

• i.1 -UiSen:MtM'I~fflenll:m .---.-----•......-

+mn.iillill~

Effects of Osmosis on Water Balance To see how two solutions with different solute concentrations interact, picture a V-shaped glass tube with a selectively permeable membrane separating two sugar solutions (Figure 7.12). Pores in this synthetic membrane are too small for sugar mole-

cules to pass through but large enough faT water molecules. How does this affect the water concentration? It seems logical that the solution with the higher concentration of solute would have the [ower concentration ofwater and that water would diffuse into it from the other side for that reason. However, for a dilute solution like most biological fluids, solutes do not affect the water concentration significantly. Instead, tight clustering of water molecules around the hydrophilic solute molecules makes some of the water unavailable to cross the membrane. It is the difference in free water concentration that is important. In the end, the effect is the same: Water diffuses across the membrane from the region of lower solute concentration to that ofhigher solute concentration until the solute concentrations on both sides of the membrane are equaL The diffusion ofwater across a selectively permeable membrane is called osmosis. The movement of water across cell membranes and the balance of water bety,'een the cell and its environment are crucial to organisms. Let's now apply to living cells what we have learned about osmosis in artificial systems.

Water Balance of Cells Without Walls

Lower Higher concentralIOn concentration of solute (sugar) of sugar

•

Same concentration of sugar

•• • • • ••

•••

••

• • • •• ••

•• Selectively permeable membrane

~

*..

Water molecules can pass through ,., ---+pores, but sugar " ~,.,.I molecules cannot ~

,..t-J)

c Water molecules cluster around sugar molecules

-'1 ;.'JI ., Fewer solute molecules, more free water molecules

~-+

;

_-'1

-

I....

,~

inl

_b I

.

*'+

More solute molecules. fewer free ~ water molecules

Water moves from an area of higher to lower free water concentration (lower to higher solute concentration) ... Figure 7.12 Osmosis. Two sugar solutions of different concentrations are separated by a membrane. v,t,ich the solvent {water} can pass through but the solute (sugar) cannot. Water molecules mOYe randomly and may cross in either direction, but OI'erall, water diffuses from the solution with less concentrated solute to that with more concentrated solute. This tranSfXXI of water, or osmosis, equalizes the sugar concentrations on both sides. -W:U'lfM If an orange dye capable of passing through the membrane was added to the left side of the rube above. how would it be distributed at the end of the process) (See Figure 7.11) Would the

When considering the behavior ofa cell in a solution, both solute concentration and membrane permeability must be considered. Both factors are taken into account in the concept of tonicity, the ability of a solution to cause a cell to gain or lose water. The solution levels in the rube on the right be affected? tonicity of a solution depends in part on its concentration of solutes that cannot cross the membrane (nonpenetrating solutes), relative to that Hypotonic solution Isotonic solution Hypertoni< solution (a) Animal cell. An inside the cell. If there is a higher concenanimal cell fares best tration of nonpenetrating solutes in the in an isotonic environ· surrounding solution, water will tend to ment unless it has special adaptations leave the cell, and vice versa. that offset the osmotic If a cell without a wall, such as an anuptake or loss of water. imal cell, is immersed in an environment that is isotonic to the cell Usa means Lysed Normal Shriveled "same~), there will be no net movement of water across the plasma membrane. (b) Plant cell. Plant cells \Vater flows across the membrane, but are turgid (firm) and If generally healthiest in at the same rate in both directions. In an a hypotonic environ· isotonic environment, the volume of an ment. where the animal cell is stable (Figure 7.13a). uptake of water is eventually balanced Now let's transfer the cell to a soluby the wall pushing Turgid (normal) Flaccid Plasmolyzed tion that is hypertonic to the cell (hyper back on the cell. means "more,~ in this case referring to ... Figure 7.13 The water balat'Ke of Jiving cells. How living cells react to changes in the nonpenetrating solutes). The cell will solute concentration of their environment depends on whether or not they have cell walls. (a) Animal lose water to its environment, shrivel, cells. such as this red blood cell, do not have cell walls. (b) Plant cells do. (ArrCNVS indicate net water movement after the cells were first placed in these solutions.) and probably die. This is one wayan

",0

",0

(Il-"PTH SEVEN


133

increase in the salinity (saltiness) of a lake can kill animals there; if the lake water becomes hypertonic to the animals' cells, the cells might shrivel and die. However, taking up too much water can be just as hazardous to an animal cell as losing water.lfwe place the cell in a solution that is hypotonic to the cell (/typo means "Iess~), water will enter the cell faster than it leaves, and the cell will swell and lyse (burst) like an overfiDed water balloon. A cell without rigid walls can tolerate neither excessive uptake nor excessive loss of water. This problem ofwater balance is automatically solved if such a cell lives in isotonic surroundings. Seawater is isotonic to many marine invertebrates. The cells of most terrestrial (land-dwelling) animals are bathed in an extracellular fluid that is isotonic to the cells. Animals and other organisms without rigid cell walls living in hypertonic or hypotonic environments must have special adaptations for osmoregulation, the control of water balance. For example, the protist Paramecium lives in pond water, which is hypotonic to the cell. Paramecium has a plasma membrane that is much less permeable to water than the membranes of most other cells, but this only slows the uptake of water, which continually enters the ceD. The Paramecium cell doesn't burst because it is also equipped with a contractile vacuole, an organel.le that functions as a bilge pump to force water out ofthe cell as fast as it enters by osmosis (Figure 7.14). We ....ill examine other evolutionary adaptations for osmoregulation in Chapter 44.

(a) A contractile vacuole fills WIth fluid that enters from a sy.;tem of edna's radiating throughout the cytoplasm. Contractlllg vacuole

(b)

When full, the vacoole and ednals contract, expelling flUid from the cell.

... Figure 7.14 The contractile vacuole of Paramecium: an evolutionary adaptation for osmoregulation. The contractile vacuole of this freshwater protist offsets osmosis by pumping water out of the cell (LM). 134

UNIT TWO

Theedl

Water Balance of Cells with Walls The cells ofplants, prokaryotes, fungi, and some protists ha\'e walls (see Figure 6.28). \Vhen such a cell is immersed in a hypotonic solution-bathed in rain.....ater, for example-the wall helps maintain the cell's water balance. Consider a plant cell. Like an animal cell, the plant cell swells as water enters by osmosis (Figure 7.13b). However, the relatively inelastic wall will expand only so much before it exerts a back pressure on the cell that opposes further water uptake. At this point, the cell is turgid (very firm), which is the healthy state for most plant cells. Plants that are not woody, such as most houseplants, depend for mechanical support on cells kept turgid by a surrounding hypotonic solution. If a plant's cells and their surroundings are isotonic, there is no net tendency for water to enter, and the cells become flaccid (limp). However, a wall is ofno advantage ifthe cell is immersed in a hypertonic environment In this case, a plant cell, like an animal cell, will lose water to its surroundings and shrink. As the plant cell shrivels, its plasma membrane pulls away from the wall. This phenomenon, called plasmolysis, causes the plant to wilt and can lead to plant death. The walled cel.ls of bacteria and fungi also plasmolyze in hypertonic environments.

Facilitated Diffusion: Passive Transport Aided by Proteins Let's look more closely at how water and certain hydrophilic solutes cross a membrane. As mentioned earlier, many polar molecules and ions impeded by the lipid bilayer of the membrane diffuse passively with the help oftransport proteins that span the membrane. This phenomenon is called facilitated diffusion. Cell biologists are still trying to learn exactly how various transport proteins facilitate diffusion. Most transport proteins are very specific: They transport some substances but not others. As described earlier, the two types of transport proteins are channel proteins and carrier proteins. Channel. proteins simply provide corridors that allow a specific molecule or ion to cross the membrane (Figure 7.1 Sa). The hydrophilic passageways provided by these proteins can allow water molecules or small ions to flow very quickly from one side ofthe membrane to the other. Although water molecules are small enough to cross through the phospholipid bilayer, the rate of water movement by this route is relatively slow becau.seofthe polarity of the water molecules. Aquaporins, the water channel. proteins, facilitate the massive amounts ofdiffusion that occur in plant cells and in animal cells such as red blood cells (see Figure 7.13). Kidney cells also have a high number ofaquaporins, allowing them to reclaim water from urine before it is excreted. It has been estimated that a person would have to drink 50 gallons ofwater a day and excrete the same volume ifthe kidneys did not perform this function.

EXTRACELLULAR FLUID

o o

Channel protem

CONCEPT

o o o

0 i f Solute

CYTOPLASM

CHECK

7.3

I. How do you think a cell performing cellular respiration rids itself of the resulting CO 2? 2. In the supermarket, produce is often sprayed with water. Explain why this makes vegetables look crisp. 3. *mpUI. If a Paramecium swims from a hypotonic environment to an isotonic one, will its contractile vacuole become more active or less? Why? For suggested answers. see AppendiK A.

(a) A channel protein (purple) has a channel through which water molecules or a specific solute can pass,

r:;:::':a~~:ort

uses energy to move solutes against their gradients

Carrier protein

(b) A carrier protein alternates between two shapes, across the membrane during the shape change.

mo~ing

a solute

... Figure 7.15 Two types of transport proteins that carry out facilitated diffusion. In both cases. the protein can transport the solute in either direction, but the net concentration gradient of the solute.

mo~ement

is down the

Another group of channel proteins are ion channels, many of which function as gated channels, which open or dose in response to a stimulus. The stimulus may be electrical or chemical; ifchemical, the stimulus isa substance other than the one to be transported. For example, stimulation of a nerve ceU by certain neurotransmitter molecules opens gated channels that allow sodium ions into the cell. Later, an electrical stimulus activates the ion channel protein shown in Figure 7.1, and potassium ions rush out of the ceU. Carrier proteins, such as the glucose transporter mentioned earlier, seem to undergo a subtle change in shape that somehow translocates the solute-binding site across the membrane (Figure 7.15b). These changes in shape may be triggered by the binding and release of the transported molecule. In certain inherited diseases, specific transport systems are either defective or missing altogether. An example is cystinuria, a human disease characterized by the absence ofa carrier protein that transports cysteine and some other amino acids across the membranes of kidney cells. Kidney cells normaUy reabsorb these amino acids from the urine and return them to the blood, but an individual afflicted with cystinuria develops painful stones from amino acids that accumulate and crystallize in the kidneys.

Despite the help of transport proteins, facilitated diffusion is considered passive transport because the solute is moving down its concentration gradient. Facilitated diffusion speeds transport of a solute by providing efficient passage through the membrane, but it does not alter the direction of transport. Some transport proteins, however, can move solutes against their concentration gradients, across the plasma membrane from the side where they are less concentrated (whether inside or outside) to the side where they are more concentrated.

The Need for Energy in Active Transport To pump a solute across a membrane against its gradient requires work; the cell must expend energy. Therefore, this type of membrane traffic is called active transport. The transport proteins that move solutes against a concentration gradient are an carrier proteins, rather than channel proteins. This makes sense because when channel proteins are open, they merely allow solutes to flow down their concentration gradient, rather than picking them up and transporting them against their gradient. Active transport enables a cell to maintain internal concentrations of small solutes that differ from concentrations in its environment. For example, compared with its surroundings, an animal cen has a much higher concentration of potassium ions and a much lower concentration of sodium ions. The plasma membrane helps maintain these steep gradients by pumping sodium out of the cell and potassium into the cell. As in other types ofcellular work, ATP supplies the energy for most active transport One way ATP can po",,~r active transport is by transferring its terminal phosphate group directly to the transport protein. This can induce the protein to change its shape in a manner that translocates a solute bound to the protein across the membrane. One transport system that works this way is the sodium-potassium pump, which exchanges sodiwn (Na+) for

CIl ... PTH SEVEN


135

EXTRACELLULAR

fLUID

CYTOPl.ASM

Na'

Passive transport. Substances diffuse spontaneously down their concentration gradients, crossing a membrane with no expenditure of energy by the cell. The rate of diffusion can be greatly increased by transport proteins in the membrane.

INa')high IK'jlow

,----~'~----,

[Na'jlow [K') high

o

,De

o

Cytoplasmic Na+ binds to the sodium-potassium pump. The affinity for Na+ is high when the protein has this shape.

Active transport. Some transport proteins act as pumps, moving substances across a membrane against their concentration (or eledrochemical) gradients. Energy for this work is usually supplied by ATP

Na+ binding stimulates phosphorylation {addition of a phosphate group} of the protein by ATP.

t

I v

o

Phosphorylation causes the protein to change its shape, decreasing its affinity for Na+, which is expelled to the outside.

" K+ is released; affinity for Na+ IS high again. and the cycle repeats,

t

I

-(!)

B The new shape has a high a11inity for K+, which binds on the extracellular side and triggl'rs release of the phosphate group.

... Figure 7.16 The sodium,potassium pump: a specific case of active transport. This transport system pumps ions against steep concentration gradients: Sodium ion concentration (represented as INa + J) is high outside the cell and low inside. while potassium ion concentration ([K+D is low outside the cell and high inside, The pump oscillates between two shapes In a pumping cycle that translocates three sodium ions out of the cell for every two potassium ions pumped into the cell, The two shapes have different affinities for the two types of ions. ATP powers the shape change by phosphorylating the transport protein (that is, by transferring a phosphate group to thl' protein). potassium (K+) across the plasma membrane of animal celJs (Figure 7,16). The distinction bety.·een passive transport and active transport is reviewed in Figure 7,17. 136

UNIT TWO

The Cell

Fadlitated diffusion. Many hydrophilic substances diffuse through membranes with the assistance of transport proteins. either channel or carrier proteins,

•

•

... Figure 7.17 Review: passive and active transport.

How Ion Pumps Maintain Membrane Potential

... " Loss of the phosphate restores the protein's original shape, which has a lower affinity for K+.

Diffusion. Hydrophobic molecules and (at a slow rate) very small uncharged polar molecules can diffuse through the lipid bilayer.

All cells have voltages across their plasma membranes. Voltage is electrical potential energy-a separation ofopposite charges. The cytoplasm is negative in charge relative to the extracellular fluid because of an unequal distribution of anions and cations on opposite sides ofthe membrane. The voltage across a membrane, called a membrane potential, ranges from about - 50 to - 200 millivolts (mV). (The minus sign indicates that the inside of the cell is negative relative to the outside.) The membrane potential acts like a battery, an energy source that affects the traffic of all charged substances across the membrane. Because the inside of the cell is negative compared with the outside, the membrane potential favors the passive transport of cations into the cell and anions out of the cell. Thus, lwo forces drive the diffusion of ions across a membrane: a chemical force (the ion's concentration gradient) and an electrical force (the effect ofthe membrane potential on the ion's movement). This combination of forces acting on an ion is called the electrochemical gradient. In the case of ions, then, we must refine our concept of passivetransport: An ion diffuses not simply down itsconcentralion gradient but, more exactly, down its electrochemical gradient. For example, the concentration of sodium ions (Na+) inside a resting nerve cell is much lower than outside it. \Vhen the cell is

stimulated, gated channels open that facilitate Na+ diffusion. Sodium ions then "fall" down their electrochemical gradient, driven by the concentration gradient of Na+ and by the attraction of these cations to the negative side of the membrane. In this example, both electrical and chemical contributions to the electrochemical gradient act in the same direction across the membrane, but this is not always so. In cases where electrical forces due to the membrane potential oppose the simple diffusion of an ion down its concentration gradient, active transport may be necessary. In Chapter 48, you11learn about the importance of electrochemical gradients and membrane potentials in the transmission of nerve impulses. Some membrane proteins that actively transport ions contribute to the membrane potential. An example is the sodiumpotassium pump. Notice in Figure 7.16 that the pump does not translocate Na+ and K+ one for one, but pumps three sodium ions out of the cell for every two potassium ions it pumps into the cell. \Vith each "crank~ of the pump, there is a net transfer of one positive charge from the cytoplasm to the extracellular fluid, a process that stores energy as voltage. A transport protein that generates voltage across a membrane is called an electrogenic pump. The sodium-potassium pump seems to be the major electrogenic pump ofanimal cells. The main electrogenic pump of plants, fungi, and bacteria is a proton pump, which actively transports hydrogen ions (protons) out of the cell. The pumping ofH+ transfers positive charge from the cytoplasm to the extracellular solution (Figure 7.18). By generating voltage across membranes, electrogenic pumps store energy that can be tapped for cellular work. One important use of proton gradients in the cell is for ATP synthesis during cellular respiration, as you will see in Chapter 9. Another is a type of membrane traffic called cotransport.

transport protein as an avenue to diffuse down the electrochemical gradient maintained by the proton pump. Plants use sucrose-H+ cotransport to load sucrose produced by photosynthesis into cells in the veins ofleaves. The vascular tissue of the plantcan then distribute the sugar to nonphotosynthetic organs, such as roots. \'

139

Cater. Review -&I4,jf.- Go to the Study Area at www.masteringbio.comforBioFlilc 3-D Animatiol'lS, MP3 Tulors, Videos, Practice Tests, an eBook, and more.


.i.IIIiI'_ 7.1

Cellular membranes are fluid mosaics of lipids and proteins (pp. 125-130) .. Membrane Models: Scientific fnquiryThe DavsonDallielli sandwich model of the membrane has been replaced

by the fluid mosaic model, in which amphipathic proteins are embedded in the phospholipid bilayer.

.. The Fluidity of Membranes Phospholipids and, to a lesser extent, proteins move laterally within the membrane. The unsaturated hydrocarbon tails of some phospholipids keep

membranes fluid at lower temperatures. while cholesterol acts as a temperature buffer, resisting changes in fluidity caused by temperature changes. ... Membrane Proteins and Their Funclions Integral proteins are embedded in the lipid bilayer; peripheral proteins are attached to the surfaces. The functions of membrane proteins include transport, enzymatic activity, signal transduction, cell-cell recognition, intercellular joining, and attachment to the cytoskeleton and extracellular matrix. ... The Role of Membrane Carbohydrates in Cell-Cell Recognition Short chains of sugars are linked to proteins and lipids on the exterior side of the plasma membrane, where they interact with surface molecules of other cells. ... Synthesis and Sidedness of Membranes Membrane proteins and lipids are synthesized in the ER and modified in the ER and Golgi apparatus. The inside and outside faces of the membrane differ in molecular composition.

-$liRAeti\ity Membrane Structure

.i.lilii'_ 7.2 Membrane structure results in selective permeability (p. 131) ... A cell must exchange molecules and ions with its surroundings, a process controlled by the plasma membrane. ... The Permeability of the Lipid Bilayer Hydrophobic substances are soluble in lipid and pass through membranes rapidly. ... Transport Proteins To cross the membrane, polar molecules and ions generally require specific transport proteins.

-$liRActivity Selective l'erme.bilityof Membrane.

-$liR-

•

- . lili"_ 7.4 Active transport uses energy to move solutes against their gradients (pp. 135-138) AcIM'tran'ijlOrt: ... The Need for Energy in Active Transport Specific membrane proteins use energy, usually in the form of ATP, to do the work of active transport. ... How Ion Pumps Maintain Membrane Potential Ions can have both a concentration (chemical) gradient and an electrical gradient (voltage). These forces combine in the electrochemical gradient, which determines the net direction of ionic diffusion. Electrogenic pumps, such as sodium-potassium pumps and proton pumps, are transport proteins that contribute to electrochemical gradients. ... Cotransport: Coupled Transport by a Membrane Protein One solute's "downhill" diffusion drives the other's "uphill" transport.

-M'' ·-

Aeti\ity Aetiyc Transport

_i.lilii'_ 7.3 Passive transport is diffusion of a substance across a membrane with no energy investment (pp. 132-135)

Ai lilil'_ 7.5 Bulk transport across the plasma membrane occurs by exocytosis and endocytosis (pp. 138-139)

... Diffusion is the spontaneous movement of a substance down its concentration gradient.

... Exocytosis In exocytosis, transport vesicles migrate to the plasma membrane, fuse with it, and release their contents.

140

UNIT TWO

The Cell

... Endocytosis In endocytosis, molecules enter cells within vesicles that pinch inward from the plasma membrane. The three types of endocytosis are phagocytosis, pinocytosis. and receptor-mediated endocytosis. ActMty Exocytosis and Endocytosis

TESTING YOUR KNOWLEDGE SElF·QUIZ I. In a. b. c.

what way do the membranes of a eukaryotic cell vary? Phospholipids are found only in certain membranes. Certain proteins are unique to each membrane. Only certain membranes of the cell are selectively permeable. d. Only certain membranes are constructed from amphipathic molecules. e. Some membranes have hydrophobic surfaces exposed to the cytoplasm. while others have hydrophilic surfaces facing the cytoplasm.

2. According to the fluid mosaic model of membrane structure, proteins ofthe membrane are mostly a. spread in a continuous layer over the inner and outer surfaces of the membrane. b. confined to the hydrophobic core of the membrane. c. embedded in a lipid bilayer. d. randomly oriented in the membrane, with no fixed insideoutside polarity. e. free to depart from the fluid membrane and dissolve in the surrounding solution. 3. Which of the following factors would tend to increase membrane fluidity? a. a greater proportion of unsaturated phospholipids b. a greater proportion of saturated phospholipids c. a lower temperature d. a relatively high protein content in the membrane e. a greater proportion of relatively large glycolipids compared with lipids having smaller molecular masses 4. \Vhich of the following processes includes all others? a. osmosis b. diffusion of a solute across a membrane c. facilitated diffusion d. passive transport e. transport of an ion down its electrochemical gradient 5. Based on Figure 7.1 9, which of these experimental treatments would increase the rate of sucrose transport into the cell? a. decreasing extracellular sucrose concentration b. decreasing extracellular pH c. decreasing cytoplasmic pH d. adding an inhibitor that blocks the regeneration of ATP e. adding a substance that makes the membrane more permeable to hydrogen ions

6. • It'Mi_ An artificial cell consisting of an aqueous solution enclosed in a selectively permeable membrane is immersed in a beaker containing a different solution. The membrane is permeable to water and to the simple sugars glucose and fructose but impermeable to the disaccharide sucrose. a. Draw solid arrows to indicate the net movement of - f- EnVIronment solutes into "Cew-f-001 M sue 001 M fnJCtose b. Is the solution outside the cell isotonic, hypotonic, or hypertonic? c. Draw a dashed arrow to show the net osmotic movement of water, if any. d. Will the artificial cell become more flaccid, more turgid, or stay the same? e. Eventually, will the two solutions have the same or different solute concentrations?

...--......

For Self-Quiz ..nswer$, see Appendix A.

-614 If·_ Visit the Study Alea .11 www.masteringbio.com for a Practice Test.

EVOLUTION CONNECTION 7. Paramecium and other protists that live in hypotonic environ-

ments have cell membranes that slow osmotic water uptake, while those living in isotonic environments have more perme· able cell membranes. What water regulation adaptations might have evolved in protists in hypertonic habitats such as Great Salt Lake? In habitats with changing salt concentration?

SCIENTIFIC INQUIRY 8. An experiment is designed to study the mechanism of sucrose uptake by plant cells. Cells are immersed in a sucrose solution, and the pH of the solution is monitored. Samples of the cells are taken at intervals, and their sucrose concentration is measured. Their sucrose uptake correlates with a rise in the solution's pH. This rise is proportional to the starting concentration of sucrose in the solution. A metabolic poison that blocks the ability of cells to regenerate ATP is found to inhibit the pH changes in the solution. Propose a hypothesis accounting for these results. Suggest an experiment to test it.

SCIENCE, TECHNOLOGY, AND SOCIETY 9. Extensive irrigation in arid regions causes salts to accumulate in the soi1. (\Vhen water evaporates, salts are left behind to concentrate in the soiL) Based on what you learned about water balance in plant cells, why might increased soil salinity (saltiness) be harmful to crops? Suggest ways to minimize damage. \Xfhat costs are attached to your solutions?

CIl"PTE~ SEVEN


141

An Introductio Metabolis ... Figure 8.1 What causes the bioluminescence in these KEY

8.1

CONCEPTS

An organism's metabolism transforms matter

and energy, subject to the Jaws of thermodynamics 8.2

8.3 8.4

8.5

The free-energy change of a reaction tells us whether or not the reaction occurs

spontaneously AlP powers cellular work by coupling exergonic reactions to endergonic reactions Enzymes speed up metabolic reactions by lowering energy barriers Regulation of enzyme activity helps control metabolism

r·di;n'i~'.

The Energy of Life he living cell is a chemical factory in miniature, where thousands of reactions occur within a microscopic space. Sugars can be converted to amino adds that are linked together into proteins when needed, and proteins are dismantled into amino acids that can be converted to sugars when food is digested. Small molecules are assembled into polymers, which may be hydrolyzed later as the needs of the cell change. In multicellular organisms, many cells export chemical products that are used in other parts of the organism. The process known as cellular respiration drives the cellular economy by extracting the energy stored in sugars and other fuels. Cells apply this energy to perform various types of work, such as the transport of solutes across the plasma membrane, which we discussed in Chapter 7. In a more exotic example, cells of the fungus in Figure 8.1 convert the energy stored in certain organic molecules to light. a process called bioluminescence. (The glow may attract insects that benefit the fungus by dispersing its

T

142

fungi?

spores.) Bioluminescence and all other metabolic activities carried out by a cell are precisely coordinated and controlled. In its complexity, its efficiency, its integration, and its responsiveness to subtle changes, the cell is peerless as a chemical factory. The concepts of metabolism that you learn in this chapter will help you understand how matter and energy flow during life's processes and how that flow is regulated.

rZ~i1;;;:n~~s metabolism

transforms matter and energy, subject to the laws of thermodynamics

The totality of an organism's chemical reactions is called metabolism (from the Greek metabole, change). Metabolism is an emergent property of life that arises from interactions between molecules within the orderly environment ofthe cell.

Organization of the Chemistry of Life into Metabolic Pathways We can picture a cell's metabolism as an elaborate rood map of the thousands of chemical reactions that occur in a cell, arranged as intersecting metabolic pathways. A metabolic pathway begins with a specific molecule, which is then altered in a series of defined steps, resulting in a certain product. Each step of the pathway is catalyzed by a specific enzyme:

Analogous to the red, yellow, and green stoplights that control the flow of automobile traffic, mechanisms that regulate enzymes balance metabolic supply and demand, averting deficits or surpluses of important cellular molecules. Metabolism as a whole manages the material and energy resources of the cell. Some metabolic pathways release energy by breaking down complex molecules to simpler compounds. These degradative processes are called catabolic pathways, or breakdown pathways. A major pathway of catabolism is cellular respiration, in which the sugar glucose and other organic fuels are broken down in the presence ofoxygen to carbon dioxide and water. (Pathways can have more than one starting molecule and/or product.) Energy that was stored in the organic molecules becomes available to do the work of the cell, such as ciliary beating or membrane transport. Anabolic pathways, in contrast, consume energy to build complicated molecules from simpler ones; they are sometimes called biosynthetic pathways. An example of anabolism is the synthesis of a protein from amino acids. Catabolic and anabolic pathways are the ~doWllhiun and ~uphill" avenues ofthe metabolic map. Energy released from the downhill reactions of catabolic pathways can be stored and then used to drive the uphill reactions of anabolic pathways. In this chapter, we will focus on mechanisms common to metabolic pathways. Because energy is fundamental to all metabolic processes, a basic knowledge of energy is necessary to understand how the living cell works. Although we will use some nonliving examples to study energy, the concepts demonstrated by these examples also apply to bioenergetics, the study of how energy flows through living organisms.

that matter possesses because of its location or structure. Water behind a dam, for instance, possesses energy because of its altitude above sea leveL Molecules possess energy because of the arrangement of their atoms. Chemical energy is a term used by biologists to refer to the potential energy available for release in a chemical reaction. Recall that catabolic pathways release energy by breaking down complex molecules. Biologists say that these complex molecules, such as glucose, are high in chemical energy. During a catabolic reaction, atoms are rearranged and energy is released, resulting in lower-energy breakdown products. This transformation also occurs, for example, in the engine of a car when the hydrocarbons of gasoline react explosively with oxygen, releasing the energy that pushes the pistons and producing exhaust. Although less explosive, a similar reaction of food molecules with oxygen provides chemical energy in biological systems, producing carbon dioxide and water as waste products. It is the structures and biochemical pathways of cells that enable them to release chemical energy from food molecules, powering life processes. How is energy converted from one form to another? Consider the divers in Figure 8.2. The young man climbing the steps to the diving platform is releasing chemical energy from the food he ate for lunch and using some ofthat energy to perform the work A diver has more potential energy on the platform than in the water.

Diving converts potential energy to kinetic energy.

forms of Energy Energy is the capacity to cause change. In everyday life, energy is important because some forms of energy can be used to do work-that is, to move matter against opposing forces, such as gravity and friction. Put another way, energy is the ability to rearrange a collection of matter. For example, you expend energy to turn the pages of this book, and your cells expend energy in transporting certain substances across membranes. Energy exists in various forms, and the work of life depends on the ability of cells to transform energy from one form into another. Energy can be associated with the relative motion of objects; this energy is called kinetic energy. Moving objects can perform work by imparting motion to other matter: A pool player uses the motion of the cue stick to push the cue ball, which in turn moves the other balls; water gushing through a dam turns turbines; and the contraction ofleg muscles pushes bicycle pedals. Heat, or thermal energy, is kinetic energy associated with the random movement of atoms or molecules. Light is also a type of energy that can be harnessed to perform work, such as powering photosynthesis in green plants. An object not presently moving may still possess energy. Energy that is not kinetic is called potential energy; it is energy

Climbing up converts the kinetic energy of muscle movement to potential energy.

A diver has less potential energy in the water than on the platform.

... Figure 8.2 Transformations between potential and kinetic energy. ClIAPTER EIGHT

An Introduction to Metabolism

143

ofclimbing. The kinetic energy of muscle movement is thus being transformed into potential energy due to his increasing height above the water. The young man diving is converting his potential energy to kinetic energy, which is then transferred to the water as he enters it. A small amount of energy is lost as heat due to friction. Now let's go back one step and consider the original source of the organic food molecules that provided the necessary chemical energy for the diver to climb the steps. This chemical energy was itself derived from light energy by plants during photosynthesis. Organisms are energy transformers.

The Laws of Energy Transformation The study of the energy transformations that occur in a collection of matter is called thermodynamics. Scientists use the word system to denote the matter under study; they refer to the rest ofthe universe-everything outside the system-as the surroundings. An isolo.ted system, such as that approximated by liquid in a thermos bottle, is unable to exchange either energy or matter with its surroundings. In an open system, energy and matter can be transferred between the system and its surroundings. Organisms are open systems. They absorb energyfor instance, light energy or chemical energy in the form of organic molecules-and release heat and metabolic waste products, such as carbon dioxide, to the surroundings. Two laws of thermodynamics govern energy transformations in or· ganisms and all other collections of matter.

The First Law of Thermodynamics According to the first law ofthermodynamics, the energy of the universe is constant. Energy can be transferred and transformed, but it cannot be created or destroyed. TIle first law is

(a) First law of thermodynamics: Energy can be transferred or transformed but neither created nor destroyed. For eKample, the chemical (potential) energy in food will be converted to the kinetic energy of the cheetah's movement in (b).

UNIT TWO

The Cell

The Second Law of Thermodynamics If energy cannot be destroyed, why can't organisms simply recycle their energy over and over again? It turns out that during every energy transfer or transformation, some energy becomes unusable energy, unavailable to do work. In most energy transformations, more usable forms ofenergy are at least partly converted to heat, which is the energy associated with the random motion of atoms or molecules. Only a small fraction of the chemical energy from the food in Figure 8.3a is transformed into the motion of the cheetah shown in Figure 8.3b; most is lost as heat, which dissipates rapidly through the surroundings. In the process of carrying out chemical reactions that perform various kinds of work, living cells unavoidably convert other forms of energy to heat. A system can put heat to work only when there is a temperature difference that results in the heat flowing from a warmer location to a cooler one. If temperature is uniform, as it is in a living cell, then the only use for heat energy generated during a chemical reaction is to warm a body of matter, such as the organism. (This can make a room crowded with people uncomfortably warm, as each person is carrying out a multitude of chemical reactions!)

(b) Second law of thermodynamics: Every energy transfer or transformation increases the disorder (entropy) of the universe. For example, disorder is added to the cheetah's surroundings in the form of heat and the small molecules that are the by-products of metabolism.

... Figure 8.3 The two laws of thermodynamics.

144

also known as the principle ofconservation ofenergy. The electric company does not make energy, but merely converts it to a form that is convenient for us to use. By converting sunlight to chemical energy, a plant acts as an energy transformer, not an energy producer. The cheetah in Figure 8.3a will convert the chemical en· ergy of the organic molecules in its food to kinetic and other forms of energy as it carries out biological processes. What happens to this energy after it has performed work? The second law helps to answer this question.

A logical consequence of the loss of usable energy during energy transfer or transformation is that each such event makes the universe more disordered. Scientists use a quantity called entropy as a measure of disorder, or randomness. The more randomly arranged a collection of matter is, the greater its entropy. We can now state the second law of thermodynamics as follows: Every energy transfer or transfonnation increases the entropy of the universe. Although order can increase locally, there is an unstoppable trend toward randomization of the universe as a whole. In many cases, increased entropy is evident in the physical disintegration of a system's organized structure. For example, you can observe increasing entropy in the gradual decay of an unmaintained building. Much of the increasing entropy of the universe is less apparent, however, because it appears as increasing amounts of heat and less ordered forms of matter. As the cheetah in Figure 8.3b converts chemical energy to kinetic energy, it is also increasing the disorder of its surroundings by producing heat and the small molecules, such as the CO 2 it exhales, that are the breakdown products of food. The concept of entropy helps us understand why certain processes occur. It turns out that for a process to occur on its own, without outside help (an input ofenergy), it must increase the entropy of the universe. Let's first agree to use the word spontaneous for a process that can occur without an input of energy. Note that as we're using it here, the word spontaneous does not imply that such a process would occur quickly. Some spontaneous processes may be virtually instantaneous, such as an explosion, while others may be much slower, such as the rusting of an old car over time. A process that cannot occur on its own is said to be nonspontaneousi it will happen only if energy isadded to the system. We know from experience that certain events occur spontaneously and others do not For instance, we know that water flows downhill spontaneously, but moves uphill only with an input of energy, such as when a machine pumps the water against gravity. In fact, another way to state the second law is: For a process to occur spontaneously, it must increase the entropy ofthe universe.

Biological Order and Disorder Living systems increase the entropy of their surroundings, as predicted by thermodynamic law. It is true that cells create or· dered structures from less organized starting materials. For example, amino acids are ordered into the specific sequences of polypeptide chains. At the organismal level, Figure 8,4 shows the extremely symmetrical anatomy ofa plant's root, formed by biological processes from simpler starting materials. However, an organism also takes in organized forms ofmatter and energy from the surroundings and replaces them with less ordered forms. For example, an animal obtains starch, proteins, and other complex molecules from the food it eats. As catabolic pathways break these molecules down, the animal releases car-

... Figure 8.4 Order as a characteristic of life. Order is evident in the detailed anatomy of this root tissue from a buttercup plant (LM. cross section), As open systems. organisms can increase their order as long as the order of their surroundings decreases,

bon dioxide and water-small molecules that possess less chemical energy than the food did. The depletion of chemical energy is accounted for by heat generated during metabolism. On a larger scale, energy flows into an ecosystem in the form of light and exits in the form of heat (see Figure 1.5). During the early history ofHfe, complex organisms evolved from simpler ancestors. For example, we can trace the ancestry of the plant kingdom from much simpler organisms called green algae to more complex flowering plants. However, this increase in organization over time in no way violates the second law. The entropy of a particular system, such as an organism, may actually decrease as long as the total entropy of the universe-the system plus its surroundings-increases. Thus, organisms are islands of low entropy in an increasingly random universe. The evolution of biological order is perfectly consistent with the laws of thermodynamics. CONCEPT

CHECK

8.1

1. How does the second law of thermodynamics help explain the diffusion of a substance across a membrane? 2. Describe the forms of energy found in an apple as it grows on a tree, then falls and is digested by someone who eats it 3. _',ImUIA If you place a teaspoon of sugar in the bottom of a glass of water. it will dissolve completely over time. Left longer, eventually the water will disappear and the sugar crystals will reappear. Explain these observations in terms of entropy. For suggested answers. see AppendiX A

ClIAPTER EIGHT

An Introduction to Metabolism

145

r;~:~~:;.=~~gy change

of a reaction tells us whether or not the reaction occurs spontaneously

The laws of thermodynamics that we've just discussed apply to the universe as a whole. As biologists, we want to under· stand the chemical reactions ofhfe-for example, which reactions occur spontaneously and which ones require some input of energy from outside. But how can we know this without assessing the energy and entropy changes in the entire universe for each separate reaction?

Free-Energy Change, tJ.G Recall that the universe is really equivalent to "the system" plus "the surroundings." In 1878, J. Willard Gibbs, a professor at Yale, defined a very useful function called the Gibbs free en· ergy of a system (without considering its surroundings), sym· bolized by the letter G. We'll refer to the Gibbs free energy simply as free energy. Free energy is the portion of a system's energy that can perform work when temperature and pressure are uniform throughout the system, as in a living cell. Let's consider how we determine the free-energy change that occurs when a system changes-for example, during a chemical reaction. The change in free energy, liG, can be calculated for a chemical reaction with the following formula:

This formula uses only properties of the system (the reaction) itself: liH symbolizes the change in the system's enthalpy (in biological systems, equivalent to total energy); LlS is the change in the system's entropy; and T is the absolute temperature in Kelvin (K) units (K = ·C + 273; see Appendix C). Once we know the value of LlG for a process, we can use it to predict whether the process will be spontaneous (that is, whether itwill occur without an input ofenergy from outside). More than a century of experiments has shown that only processes with a negative LlG are spontaneous. For a process to occur spontaneously, therefore, the system must either give up enthalpy (H must decrease), give up order (TS must increase), or both: When the changes inH and TS are tallied, LlG must have a negative value (LlG < 0) for a process to be spontaneous. This means that every spontaneous process decreases the system's free energy. Processes that have a positive or zero LlG are never spontaneous. This information is immensely interesting to biologists, for it gives us the power to predict which kinds ofchange can hap· pen without help. Such spontaneous changes can be har· 1%

UNIT TWO

The Cell

nessed to perform work. This principle is very important in the study of metabolism, where a major goal is to determine which reactions can supply energy for cellular work.

Free Energy, Stability, and Equilibrium As we saw in the previous section, when a process occurs spontaneously in a system, we can be sure that LlG is negative. Another way to think of LlG is to realize that it represents the difference between the free energy of the final state and the free energy of the initial state: LlG = Gtin •1sl.te - Giniti.1 sl.te Thus, LlG can be negative only when the process involves a loss of free energy during the change from initial state to final state. Because it has less free energy, the system in its final state is less likely to change and is therefore more stable than it was previously. We can think of free energy as a measure of a system's instability-its tendency to change to a more stable state. Unstable systems (higher G) tend to change in such a way that they become more stable (lower G). For example, a diver on top of a platform is less stable (more likely to fan) than when floating in the water, a drop of concentrated dye is less stable (more likely to disperse) than when the dye is spread randomly through the liquid, and a sugar molecule is less stable (more likely to break down) than the simpler molecules into which it can be split (Figure 8.5). Unless something prevents it, each of these systems will move toward greater stability: The diver falls, the solution becomes uniformly colored, and the sugar molecule is broken down. Another term that describes a state of maximum stability is equilibrium, which you learned about in Chapter 2 in connection with chemical reactions. There is an important relationship between free energy and equilibrium, including chemical equilibrium. Recall that most chemical reactions are reversible and proceed to a point at which the forward and backward reactions occur at the same rate. The reaction is then said to be at chemical equilibrium, and there is no further net change in the relative concentration of products and reactants. As a reaction proceeds toward equilibrium, the free energy ofthe mixture ofreactants and products decreases. Free energy increases when a reaction is somehow pushed away from equilibrium, perhaps by removing some of the products (and thus changing their concentration relative to that of the reactants). For a system at equilibrium, G is at its lowest possible value in that system. We can think of the equilibrium state as a freeenergy valley. Any change from the equilibrium position will have a positive LlG and will not be spontaneous. For this reason, systems never spontaneously move away from equilibrium. Because a system at equilibrium cannot spontaneously change, it can do no work. A process is spontaneous and can perform work only when it is moving toward equilibrium.

"" "" " "

• More lree energy (higher G) • Less stable • Greater work capacity

I

" " (I

In a spontaneous change • The free energy of the system decreases (aG < 0) • The system becomes more stable • The released free energy can be harnessed to do work

!

• Less lree energy (lower G) • More stable • Less work capacity

!

"" (a) Gravitational motion. Objects mo~e spontaneously from a higher altitude to a lower one.

(b) Diffusion. Molecules in a drop of dye diffuse until they are randomly dispersed.

(c) Chemical reaction. In a cell. a sugar molecule is broken down into simpler molecules.

.. Figure 8.5 The relationship of free energy to stability, work capacity, and spontaneous change. Unstable systems (top diagrams) are rich In lree energy. G. They ha~e a tendency to change spontaneously to a more stable state (bottom), and it is possible to harness this "downhill" change to perform work.

------------------------ll---· Free Energy and Metabolism We can now apply the free-energy concept more specifically to the chemistry oflife's processes.

Amount of energy released (aG
Life Is Work iving cells require transfusions of energy from outside sources to perform their many tasks-for example, assem· bUng polymers, pumping substances across membranes, moving, and reproducing. The giant panda in Figure 9.1 obtains energy for its cells by eating plants; some animals feed on other organisms that eat plants. The energy stored in the organic molecules offood ultimately comes from the sun. Energy flows into an ecosystem as sunlight and leaves as heat (Figure 9.2). In contrast, the chemical elements essential to life are recycled Photosynthesis generates oxygen and organic molecules used by the mitochondria of eukaryotes (including plants and algae) as fuel for cellular respiration. Respiration breaks this fuel down, generating ATP. The waste products of this type of respiration, carbon dioxide and water, are the raw materials for photosynthesis. In this chapter, we consider how cells harvest the chemica.l energy stored in organic mokcWes and use it to generate ATP, the molecule thatdri\'esmostceUularwork.Afterpresentingsomebasicsabout respiration. we will focus on the three key path....'ays ofrespiration: glycolysis. the dtric acid cycle, and oxidati\-e phosphorylation.

L

162

.. Figure 9.2 Energy flow and chemical ~c1ing in ecosystems. Energy flows into an ecosystem as sunlight and ultimately leaves as heat, while the ehermeal elements essential to life are recyded.

r~:i::::~C9~:thways

yield energy by oxidizing organic fuels

As you learned in Chapter 8, metabolic pathways that release stored energy by breaking down complex molecules are called catabolic pathways. Electron transfer playsa major role in these pathways. In this section, we consider these processes, which are central to ceUular respiration.

Catabolic Pathways and Production of AlP Organic compounds possess potential energy as a result of their arrangement of atoms. Compounds that can participate

in exergonic reactions can act as fuels. With the help of enzymes, a cell systematically degrades complex organic molecules that are rich in potential energy to simpler waste products that have less energy. Some of the energy taken out of chemical storage can be used to do work; the rest is dissipated as heat. One catabolic process, fermentation, is a partial degrada-

tion ofsugars that occurs without the use of oxygen. However, the most prevalent and efficient catabolic pathway is aerobic respiration, in which oxygen is consumed as a reactant along with the organic fuel (aerobic is from the Greek aer, air, and bios, life). The cells of most eukaryotic and many prokaryotic organisms can carry out aerobic respiration. Some prokaryotes use substances other than oxygen as reactants in a similar process that harvests chemical energy without using any oxygen at all; this process is called anaerobic respiration (the prefix an- means Uwithoun. Te NADH ---> electron transport chain ---> proton-motive force ---> ATP. We can do some bookkeeping to calculate the ATP profit when cellular respiration oxidizes a molecule of glucose to six molecules ofcarbon dioxide. The three main departments of this metabolic enterprise are glycolysis, the citric acid cycle, and the electron transport chain, which drives oxidative phosphorylation. Figure 9.17 gives a detailed accounting of the ATP yield per glucose molecule oxidized. The tally adds the 4 ATP produced directly by substrate-level phosphorylation during glycolysis and the citric acid cycle to the many more molecules of ATP generated by oxidative phosphorylation. Each NADH that transfers a pair of electrons from glucose to the electron transport chain contributes enough to the proton-motive force to generate a maximum of about 3 ATP. Why are the numbers in Figure 9.17 inexact? There are three reasons we cannot state an exact number ofATP molecules generated by the breakdown of one molecule ofglucose. First, phosphorylation and the redox reactions are not directly coupled to

Electron shuttles \,~.-J',,","';;;;" span membrane 2 NAOH

CYTOSOL

2 NADH

2 NADH

Glycolysis 2 Glucose

¢

MITOCHONDRION

Pyruvate

+ 2 AlP by substrate-level phosphorylation

Oxidative phosphorylation: electron transport "d chemiosmosis

2

1==:;::=~AcetYI CoA

+ 2 AlP by substrate·level phosphorylation

... Figure 9.17 ATP yield per molecule of glucose at each stage of cellular respiration.

176

UNlllWO

The Cell

+ about 32 or 34 AlP by oxidative phosphorylation. depending on which shuttle transports electrons from NADH in cytosol

each other, so the ratio of number ofNADH molecules to number of ATP molecules is not a whole number. We know that 1 NADH results in 10 H+ being transported out across the inner mitochondrial membrane, and we also know that somewhere betv.'een 3 and 4 H+ must reenter the mitochondrial matrix via ATP synthase to generate 1ATP. Therefore, asingle molecule of NADH generates enough proton-motive force for synthesis of 2.5 to 3.3 ATPi generally, we round offand say that 1NADH can generate about 3 ATP. The citric acid cycle also supplies electrons to the electron transport chain via FADH20 but since it enters later in the chain, each molecule of this electron carrier is responsible for transport ofonly enough H+ for the synthesis of 1.5 to 2ATP. These numbers also take into account the slightenergetic cost of moving the ATP formed in the mitochondrion out into the rest of the cytoplasm where it will be used. Second, the ATP yield varies slightly depending on the type ofshuttle used to transport electrons from the cytosol into the mitochondrion. The mitochondrial inner membrane is impermeable to NADH, so NADH in the cytosol is segregated from the machinery of oxidative phosphorylation. The two electrons of NADH captured in glycolysis must be conveyed into the mitochondrion by one of several electron shuttle systems. Depending on the type of shuttle in a particular cell type, the electrons are passed either to NAD+ or to FAD in the mitochondrial matrix (see Figure 9.17). If the electrons are passed to FAD, as in brain cells, only about 2 ATP can result from each cytosolic NADH. If the electrons are passed to mitochondrial NAD+, as in liver cells and heart cells, the yield is about 3 ATP. Athird variable that reduces the yield of ATP is the use ofthe proton-motive force generated by the redox reactions of respiration to drive other kinds of work. For example, the protonmotive force powers the mitochondrion's uptake of pyruvate from the cytosol. However, if all the proton-motive force generated by the electron transport chain were used to drive ATP synthesis, one glucose molecule could generate a maximum of 34 ATP produced by oxidative phosphorylation plus 4 ATP (net) from substrate-level phosphorylation to give a total yield of about 38 ATP (or only about 36 ATP if the less efficient shuttle were functioning). We can now make a rough estimate of the efficiency of respiration-that is, the percentage ofchemical energy possessed by glucose that has been transferred to ATP. Recall that the complete oxidation of a mole of glucose releases 686 kcal of energy under standard conditions (.6.G = -686 kcal/mol). Phosphorylation of ADP to form ATP stores at least 7.3 kcal per mole of ATP. Therefore, the efficiency of respiration is 7.3 kcal per mole of ATP times 38 moles of ATP per mole of glucose divided by 686 kcal per mole ofglucose, which equals 0.4. Thus, about 40% of the potential chemical energy in glucose has been transferred to ATPi the actual percentage is probably higher because.1.G is lower under cellular conditions. The rest of the stored energy is lost as heat. We humans use some of this heat to maintain our relatively high body temperature

(3TC), and we dissipate the rest through sweating and other cooling mechanisms. Cellular respiration is remarkably effi· cient in its energy conversion. By comparison, the most effi· cient automobile converts only about 25% ofthe energy stored in gasoline to energy that moves the car. CONCEPT

CHECK

9.4

1. What effect would an absence of O2 have on the process shown in Figure 9.16? 2. -','Ilf."IM In the absence of 0 20 as in question I, what do you think would happen if you decreased the pH of the intermembrane space of the mitochondrion? Explain your answer. For suggested answers, see AppendiK A.

r;:;::~7a~~~ and anaerobic

respiration enable cells to produce AlP without the use of oxygen

Because most of the ATP generated by cellular respiration is due to the work of oxidative phosphorylation, our estimate of ATP yield from aerobic respiration is contingent on an adequate supply ofoxygen to the cell. Without the electronegative oxygen to pull electrons down the transport chain, oxidative phosphorylation ceases. However, there are two general mechanisms by which certain cells can oxidize organic fuel and generate ATP without the use of oxygen: anaerobic respiration and fermentation. The distinction between these two is based on whether an electron transport chain is present. (The electron transport chain is also called the respiratory chain because of its role in cellular respiration.) We have already mentioned anaerobic respiration, which takes place in certain prokaryotic organisms that live in environments without oxygen. These organisms have an electron transport chain but do not use oxygen as a final electron acceptor at the end of the chain. Oxygen performs this function very well because it is extremely electronegative, but other, less electronegative substances can also serve as final electron acceptors. Some "sulfate-reducing~ marine bacteria, for instance, use the sulfate ion (50/-) at the end of their respiratory chain. Operation of the chain builds up a protonmotive force used to produce ATP, but H2S (hydrogen sulfide) is produced as a by-product rather than water. Fermentation is a way of harvesting chemical energy without using either oxygen or any electron transport chain-in other words, without cellular respiration. How can food be oxidized without cellular respiration? Remember, oxidation simply refers CHAPTER NINE

Cellular Respiration: Harvesting Chemical Energy

177

to the loss ofelectrons to an electron acceptor, so it does not need to involve oxygen. Glycolysis oxidizes glucose to two molecules of pyruvate. The oxidizing agent ofglycolysis is NAD+, and neither oxygen nor any electron transfer chain is involved. Overall, glycolysis is exergonic, and some ofthe energy made available is used to produce 2 ATP (net) by substrate-level phosphorylation. If oxygen is present, then additional ATP is made by oxidative phosphorylation when NADH passes electrons removed from glucose to the electron transport chain. But glycolysis generates 2 ATP whether oxygen is present or not-that is, whether conditions are aerobic or anaerobic. As an alternative to respiratory oxidation of organic nutrients, fermentation is an expansion of glycolysis that allows continuous generation of ATP by the substrate-level phosphorylation of glycolysis. For this to occur, there must be a sufficient supply of NAD+ to accept electrons during the oxidation step of glycolysis. Without some mechanism to recycle NAD+ from NADH, glycolysis would soon deplete the cell's pool of NAD+ by reducing it all to NADH and would shut itself down for lack of an oxidizing agent. Under aerobic conditions, NAD+ is recycled from NADH by the transfer of electrons to the electron transport chain. An anaerobic alternative is to transfer electrons from NADH to pyruvate, the end product of glycolysis.

'ADP,'(b,

$

~ ( =0

GI col sis

Glucose

I

CH, 2. Pyruvate

f'-'.

H

I

(=0 I CH,

2. Acetaldehyde

12Eth.no' 1

(a) Alcohol fermentation

'ADP' '(b,

$

GI col sis

Glucose

0-

I

(=0

I

Types of Fermentation

0-

Fermentation consists of glycolysis plus reactions that regenerate NAD+ by transferring electrons from NADH to pyruvate or derivatives of pyruvate. The NAD+ can then be reused to oxidize sugar by glycolysis, which nets two molecules of ATP by substrate-level phosphorylation. There are many types of fermentation, differing in the end products formed from pyruvate. Two common types are alcohol fermentation and lactic acid fermentation. In alcohol fermentation (Figure 9.18a), pyruvate is converted to ethanol (ethyl alcohol) in two steps. The first step releases carbon dioxide from the pyruvate, which is converted to the two-carbon compound acetaldehyde. In the second step, acetaldehyde is reduced by NADH to ethanol. This regenerates the supplyofNAD+ needed for the continuation of glycolysis. Many bacteria carry out alcohol fermentation under anaerobic conditions. Yeast (a fungus) also carries out alcohol fermentation. For thousands of years, humans have used yeast in brewing, winemaking, and baking. The CO 2 bubbles generated by baker's yeast during alcohol fermentation allow bread to rise. During lactic acid fermentation (Figure 9.18b), pyruvate is reduced directly by NADH to form lactate as an end product, with no release of CO 2 , (Lactate is the ionized form of lactic acid.) Lactic acid fermentation by certain fungi and bacteria is used in the dairy industry to make cheese and yogurt.

(= 0

178

UNlllWO

The Cell

I

H-I-oH

I

I'NAD·I

~

I'NADH

2"W

~~O 2. Pyruvate

.'--"-~"------)

CH,

I' La Redox Reactions: Oxidation and Reduction The cell

taps the energy stored in food molecules through redox reactions. in which one substance partially or totally shifts electrons to another. The substance receiving electrons is reduced; the substance losing electrons is oxidized. During cellular respiration, glucose (C 6 H 120 6 ) is oxidized to CO 2 , and O 2 is reduced to H20. Electrons lose potential energy during their transfer from organic compounds to oxygen. Electrons from organic compounds are usually passed first to NAO+, reducing it to NADH. NADH passes the electrons to an electron transport chain, which conducts them to O 2 in energy-releasing steps. The energy is used to make ATP. ... lhe Stages of Cellular Respiration: A Prcvicw Glycolysis and the citric acid cycle supply electrons (via NADH or FAOH 2) to the electron transport chain, which drives oxidative phosphorylation. Oxidative phosphorylation generates AlP.

_&!4.if.•

For suggested answers. see Appendix A.

. i iil"J'_ 9.2 Glycolysis harvests chemical energy by oxidizing glucose to pyruvate (pp. 167-169) Inputs

ACllvity Build a Chemical Cycling System ACllvity Overview of Cellular Respiration

182

UNIT TWO

Output~

5

H H HO

OH

H

H

OH

H OH

Glyoolysi~

I

Glueo~e

The Cell

:> ,

0-

I I (-0 I (=0

•

'$ 21NADHI

(H, Pyruvate

MP3 Tutor Cellular Respiration ParI I-Glycolysis Activity Glycolysis

. i iil"J'_ 9.3 The citric acid tycle completes the energy-yielding oxidation of organic molecules (pp. 170-172) ... In eukaryotic cells, the import of pyruvate into the mitochondrion and its conversion to acetyl CoA links glycolysis to the citric acid cycle. (In prokaryotic cells, the citric acid cycle occurs in the cytosol.) Input~

2

Aeetyl CoA

•

OXilloaeetate

BioFlix 3-D Animation Cdlular Respiration

9.6

1. Compare the structure of a fat (see Figure 5.11) with that of a carbohydrate (see Figure 5.3). What features of their structures make fat a much better fuel? 2. Under what circumstances might your body synthe· size fat molecules? 3. •~J:t."IDI What will happen in a muscle cell that has used up its supply of oxygen and ATP? (See Figures 9.19 and 9.21.)


·'·"""-9.1

CHECI(

-M4oI',·

Acti,ity The Citric Add Cycle

Outputs

_i· lili, , _ 9.4

.. The Evolutionary Significance of Glycolysis Glycolysis occurs in nearly all organisms and probably evolved in ancient prokaryotes before there was O 2 in the atmosphere.

During oxidative phosphorylation, chemiosmosis couples electron transport to ATP synthesis (pp, 172-177) ~

-$IN',·

Acth'lly Fcrmentation

NADH and FADH 2 donate electrons to the electron transport chain, which powers ATr synthesis via oxidative phosphorylation.

- i ll14 .,-9.6

.. The Pathway of Electron Transport In the electron transport chain, electrons from NADH and FADH 2 lose energy in several energy-releasing steps. At the end ofthe chain, electrons are passed to 02> reducing it to H20. .. Chemiosmosis: The EnergyCoupling Mechanism At certain steps along the electron transport chain, electron transfer causes protein complexes in eukaryotes to move H+ from the mitochondrial matrix to the intermembrane space, storing energy as a proton-motive force (H+ gradient). As H+ diffuses back into the matrix through ATP synthase. its passage drives the phosphorylation of ADP. Prokaryotes generate an H+ gradient across their plasma membrane and use this gradient to synthesize ATP in the cell.

INTERMEMBRANf SPACE

, ,

Glycolysis and the citric acid cycle connect to many other metabolic pathways (pp. 180-182) .. The Versatility of Catabolism Catabolic pathways funnel electrons from many kinds of organic molecules into cellular respiration. .. Biosynthesis (Anabolic Pathways) Cells can use small molecules from food directly or use them to build other substances through glycolysis or the citric acid cycle.

I

"' "

.. Regulation of Cellular Respiration via Feedback Mechanisms Cellular respiration is controlled by allosteric enzymes at key points in glycolysis and the citric acid cycle.

ATP -1- Iynthase


ADP +

®,

SELF-QUIZ

,re

MITO-

L \Xfhat is the reducing agent in the following reaction? Pyru\"Jte + NADH

CHONDRIAL

MATRIX

.. An Accounting of ATP Production by Cellular Respiration About 4()% of the energy stored in a glucose molecule is transferred to ATP during cellular respiration, producing a maximum of ahout 38 ATP.

-51401"·

"IF] Tutor Cdlular Respiration Part 2-Citrk Add Cyde and Electron Transport ActMty Elcctron Transport RiologyLab~ On.Line Mitochondrial.lIb In\"eStigation How Is thc Rate of Cellular Respiration Measured'

-i· II14 .,-9.5 Fermentation and anaerobic respiration enable cells to produce ATP without the use of oxygen (pp, 177-179) .. Types of Fermentation Glycolysis nets 2 ATP by substratelevel phosphorylation, whether oxygen is present or not. Under anaerobic conditions, either anaerobic respiration or fermentation can take place. In anaerobic respiration, an electron transport chain is present with a final electron acceptor other than oxygen. In fermentation, the electrons from NADH are passed to pyru\"Jte or a derivative of pyruvate, regenerating the NAD + required to oxidize more glucose. Two common types of fermentation are alcohol fermentation and lactic acid fermentation. ~ Fermentation and Aerobic Respiration Compared Both

use glycolysis to oxidize glucose but differ in their final electron acceptor. Respiration yields more ATP.

a. oxygen b. NAOH c. NAO+

+ H+

• Lactate

+ NAD+

d. lactate e. pyru\"Jte

2. The immediate energy source that drives ATP synthesis by ATP synthase during oxidative phosphorylation is the a. oxidation of glucose and other organic compounds. b. flow of electrons down the electron transport chain. c. affinity of oxygen for electrons. d. H+ concentration across the membrane holding ATP synthase. e. transfer of phosphate to AOP. 3. Which metaholic pathway is common to hoth fermentation and cellular respiration of a glucose molecule? a. the citric acid cycle b. the electron transport chain c. glycolysis d. synthesis of acetyl CoA from pyruvate e. reduction of pyruvate to lactate 4. In mitochondria, exergonic redox reactions a. are the source of energy driving prokaryotic ATP synthesis. b. are directly coupled to substrate-level phosphorylation. c. provide the energy that establishes the proton gradient. d. reduce carbon atoms to carbon dioxide. e. are coupled via phosphorylated intermediates to endergonic processes.

(IlP,PTH NINE

Cellular Respiration: Harvesting Chemical Energy

183

5. The final electron acceptor of the electron transport chain that functions in aerobic oxidative phosphorylation is a. oxygen. b. water. c. NAD1-. d. pyruvate. e. ADP.

10. •• l/Will The graph here shows the pH difference across the inner mitochondrial membrane over time in an actively respiring cell. At the time indicated by the vertical arrow, a metabolic poison is added that specifically and completely inhibits all function of mitochondrial ATP synthase. Draw what you would expect to see for the rest of the graphed line.

t

6. When electrons flow along the electron transport chains of mitochondria, which of the following changes occurs? a. The pH of the matrix increases. b. ATP synthase pumps protons by active transport. c. The electrons gain free energy. d. The cytochromes phosphorylate ADP to form ATP. e. NAD +- is oxidized. 7. Cells do not catabolize carbon dioxide because a. its double bonds are too stable to be broken. b. CO 2 has fewer bonding electrons than other organic compounds. c. CO 2 is already completely reduced. d. CO 2 is already completely oxidized. e. the molecule has too few atoms. 8. Which of the following is a true distinction between fermentation and cellular respiration? a. Only respiration oxidizes glucose. b. NADH is oxidized by the electron transport chain in respiration only. c. Fermentation, but not respiration, is an example of a catabolic pathway. d. Substrate-level phosphorylation is unique to fermentation. e. NAD+ functions as an oxidizing agent only in respiration. 9. Most CO2 from catabolism is released during a. glycolysis. b. the citric acid cycle. c. lactate fermentation. d. electron transport. e. oxidative phosphorylation.

Time_

For Self-Quiz amwers, see Appendix A.

-$14·".- Visit the Study Area at www.masteringbio.com for a Practice Test.

EVOLUTION CONNECTION II. ATP synthases are found in the prokaryotic plasma membrane and in mitochondria and chloroplasts. What does this suggest about the evolutionary relationship of these eukaryotic organelles to prokaryotes? How might the amino acid sequences of the ATP synthases from the different sources support or refute your hypothesis?

SCIENTIFIC INQUIRY 12. In the 194{)s, some physicians prescribed low doses of a drug called dinitrophenol (DNP) to help patients lose weight. This unsafe method was abandoned after a few patients died. DNP uncouples the chemiosmotic machinery by making the lipid bilayer of the inner mitochondrial membrane leaky to H+. Explain how this causes weight loss.

SCIENCE, TECHNOLOGY, AND SOCIETY 13. Nearly all human societies use fermentation to produce alcoholic drinks such as beer and wine. The practice dates back to the earliest days of agriculture. How do you suppose this use of fermentation was first discovered? Why did wine prove to be a more useful beverage, especially to a preindustrial culture, than the grape juice from which it was made? 8iolollicallnquiry: A Workl>ook of InYestigath'c Case. Explore fermenta'

t;on further in the case "Bean 8rew.-

184

UNlr

TWO

The Cell

Photosyn h KEY

CONCEPTS

... Figure 10.1 How can sunlight, seen here as a spectrum of colors in a rainbow, power the synthesis of organic substances"?

10.1 Photosynthesis converts light energy to the

chemical energy of food 10.2 The light reactions convert solar energy to the chemical energy of AlP and NADPH 10.3 The Calvin cycle uses AlP and NADPH to convert CO 2 to sugar 10.4 Alternative mechanisms of carbon fixation have evolved in hot, arid climates

r~:;;;;:ss That Feeds the Biosphere

ife on Earth is solar powered. The chloroplasts of plants capture light energy that has traveled 150 million kilometers from the sun and convert it to chemical energy stored in sugar and other organic molecules. This conversion process is called photosynthesis. Let's begin by placing photosynthesis in its ecological context. Photosynthesis nourishes almost the entire living world directly or indirectly. An organism acquires the organic compounds it uses for energy and carbon skeletons by one of two major modes: autotrophic nutrition or heterotrophic nutrition. Autotrophs are "self-feedersn (auto means "self," and trap/lOs means "feed"); they sustain themselves without eating anything derived from other living beings. Autotrophs produce their organic molecules from CO 2 and other inorganic raw materials obtained from the environment. They are the ultimate sources oforganic compounds for all nonautotrophic organisms, and for this reason, biologists refer to autotrophs as the producers of the biosphere.

L

Almost all plants are autotrophs; the only nutrients they require are water and minerals from the soil and carbon dioxide from the air. Specifically, plants are pholoautotrophs, organisms that use light as a source of energy to synthesize organic substances (Figure 10.1). Photosynthesis also occurs in algae, certain other protists, and some prokaryotes (Figure 10.2, on the next page). In this chapter, we will touch on these other groups in passing, but our emphasis will be on plants. Variations in autotrophic nutrition that occur in prokaryotes and algae will be detailed in Chapters 27 and 28. Hctcrotrophs obtain their organic material by the second major mode of nutrition. Unable to make their own food, they live on compounds produced by other organisms (hetero means "other"). Heterotrophs are the biosphere's consumers. The most obvious form of this "other-feeding" occurs when an animal eats plants or other animals. But heterotrophic nutrition may be more subtle. Some heterotrophs consume the remains of dead organisms by decomposing and feeding on organic litter such as carcasses, feces, and fallen leaves; they are known as decomposers. Most fungi and many types of prokaryotes get their nourishment this way. Almost all heterotrophs, including humans, are completely dependent, either directly or indirectly, on photoautotrophs for food-and also for oxygen, a by-product of photosynthesis. In this chapter, you will learn how photosynthesis works. After a discussion of the general principles of photosynthesis, we will consider the two stages of photosynthesis: the light reactions, in which solar energy is captured and transformed into chemical energy; and the Calvin cycle, in which the chemical energy is used to make organic molecules of food. Finally, we will consider a few aspects of photosynthesis from an evolutionary perspective.

185

.. Figure 10.2 Photoalltotrophs. These organi>ms use light energy to drive the synthesis of organic molecules from carbon dioxide and (in most cases) water. They feed not only themselves, but the entire living wOOd. Ca) On land, plants are the predominant producers of food. In aquatic environments. photosynthetic organl>ms indude (b) multicellular algae, such as this kelp; (c) some unicellular protists, such as Euglena; (d) the prokaryotes called cyanobacteria; and (e) other photosynthetic prokaryotes, such as these purple sulfur bacteria. which produce sulfur (spherical globules) (c, d. e: lMsl·

(a) Plants

(b) Multicellular alga

(d) Cyanobacteria

r;~::;;n~~;~ converts light

Chapter 6. In fact, the original chloroplast is believed to have been a photosynthetic prokaryote that lived inside a eukaryotic cell. (You'll learn more about this hypothesis in Chapter 25.) Chloroplasts are present in a variety of photosynthesizing organisms (see Figure 10.2), but here we will focus on plants.

energy to the chemical energy of food

The remarkable ability of an organism to harness light energy and use it to drive the synthesis oforganic compounds emerges from structural organization in the cell: Photosynthetic enzymes and other mole which is now so concentrated in the atmosphere that a certain amount of photorespiration is inevitable. We now know that, at least in some cases, photorespiration plays a protective role in plants. Plants that are impaired in their ability to carry out photorespiration (due to defective genes) are more susceptible to damage induced by excess light. Researchers consider this clear evidence that photorespiration acts to neutralize the otherwise damaging products ofthe light reac~ tions, which build up when a low CO 2 concentration limits the progress ofthe Calvin cycle. Whether there are other benefits of photorespiration is still unknown. In many types of plantsincluding a significant number of crop plants-photorespiration drains away as much as 50% of the carbon fixed by the Calvin cycle. As heterotrophs that depend on carbon fixation in chloroplasts for our food, we naturally view photorespiration as wasteful. Indeed, ifphotorespiration could be reduced in certain plant species without otherwise affecting photosynthetic productivity, crop yields and food supplies might increase. In some plant species, alternate modes of carbon fixation have evolved that minimize photorespiration and optimize the Calvin cycle-even in hot, arid climates. The two most im~ portant of these photosynthetic adaptations are C4 photosynthesis and CAM.

(4

Plants

The C4 plants are so named because they preface the Calvin cycle with an alternate mode of carbon fixation that forms a four-carbon compound as its first product. Several thousand species in at least 19 plant families use the C4 pathway. Among the C4 plants important to agriculture are sugarcane and corn, members of the grass family. A unique leaf anatomy is correlated with the mechanism of C4 photosynthesis (Figure 10.19; compare with Figure 10.3). In C4 plants, there are two distinct types of photosynthetic cells: bundle~sheath cells and mesophyll cells. Bundle-sheath cells are arranged into tightly packed sheaths around the veins of the leaf. Bern'een the bundle sheath and the leaf surface are the more loosely arranged mesophyll cells. The Calvin cycle is confined to the chloroplasts of the bundle-sheath cells. However, the cycle is preceded by incorporation of CO 2 into organic compounds in the mesophyll cells (see the numbered steps in Figure 10.19). 0 The first step is carried out by an enzyme present only in mesophyll cells called PEP carboxylase. This enzyme adds CO2 to phosphoenolpyruvate (PEP), forming the four-carbon product oxaloacetate. PEP carboxylase

Mesophyll cell PEP carboxylase

Mesophyll Cell\

Photosynthetic cells of (4 plant Bundle{ sheath leaf cell

~'~~':."'~"i.-:'.

The C4 pathway

~'

.

Oln mesophyll cells. the enzyme PEP carboxylase adds carbon dioxide to PEP.

Vein -{' (vascular tissue)

(lJIrfi1J:;""

ecompound Afour-carbon

c. leaf anatomy

conveys the atoms of the CO 2 into a bundle-sheath cell via plasmodesmata.

Stoma

ocells,In CObundle-sheath is 2

released and enters the Calvin cycle.

... Figure 10.19 4 leaf anatomy and the 4 pathway. The structure and biochemical functions of the lea~es of C4 plants are an e~olutionary adaptation to hot, dry climates. This adaptation maintains a COl concentration in the bundle sheath that fa~ors photosynthesis o~er photorespiration

has a much higher affinity for CO 2 than does rubisco and no affinity for O 2, Therefore, PEP carboxylase can fix carbon efficiently when rubisco cannot-that is, when it is hot and dry and stomata are partially closed, causing CO 2 concentration in the leaf to fall and O 2 concentration to rise. f.) After the Colplant fixes carbon from COb the mesophyll cells export their four-carbon products (malate in the example shown in figure 10.19) to bundle-sheath cells through plasmodesmata Within the bundle-sheath cells, the (see Figure 6.31). four-carbon compounds release CO 2, which is reassimilated into organic material by rubisco and the Calvin cycle. The same reaction regenerates pyruvate, which is transported to mesophyll cells. There, ATP is used to convert pyruvate to PEP, allowing the reaction cycle to continue; this ATP can be thought of as the "price" of concentrating CO 2 in the bundlesheath cells. To generate this extra ATP, bundle-sheath cells carry out cyclic electron flow, the process described earlier in this chapter (see Figure 10.15). In fact, these cells contain PS I but no PS II, so cyclic electron flow is their only photosynthetic mode of generating ATP. In effect, the mesophyll cells ofa C4 plant pump CO 2 into the bundle sheath, keeping the CO2 concentration in the bundlesheath cells high enough for rubisco to bind carbon dioxide rather than oxygen. The cyclic series of reactions involving PEP carboxylase and the regeneration of PEP can be thought of as a COrconcentrating pump that is powered by ATP. In

e

this way, C 4 photosynthesis minimizes photorespiration and enhances sugar production. This adaptation is especially advantageous in hot regions with intense sunlight, where stomata partially close during the day, and it is in such environments that C4 plants evolved and thrive today.

CAM Plants A second photosynthetic adaptation to arid conditions has evolved in many succulent (water-storing) plants, numerous cacti, pineapples, and representatives of several other plant families. These plants open their stomata during the night and close them during the day, just the reverse of how other plants behave. Closing stomata during the day helps desert plants conserve water, but it also prevents CO 2 from entering the leaves. During the night, when their stomata are open, these plants take up CO2 and incorporate it into a variety of organic acids. This mode of carbon fixation is called crassulacean acid metabolism, or CAM, after the plant family Crassulaceae, the succulents in which the process was first discovered. The mesophyll cells of CAM plants store the organic acids they make during the night in their vacuoles until morning, when the stomata close. During the day, when the light reactions can supply ATP and NADPH for the Calvin cycle, CO 2 is released from the organic acids made the night before to become incorporated into sugar in the chloroplasts.

CHAPTH TEN

Photosynthesis

201

,. Figure 10.20 C. and CAM photosynthesis compared. Both adaptations are characterized by 0 preliminary incorporation of COl into organic acids. followed by transfer of COl to the Calvin cycle. The C4 and CAM pathways are two evolutionary solutions to the problem of maintaining photosynthesis with stomata partially or completely closed on hot. dry days,

e

Sugarcane

Pineapple

CAM

C,

oce

CO,

Mesophyll cell

Bundlesheath cell

o into COl incorporated four-carbon organic acids (carbon fixation)

CO Calvin Cycle

CO

8

Sugar

CONCEPT

CHECI(

10.4

1. Explain why photorespiration lowers photosynthetic output for plants. 2. The presence of only PS I, not PS II, in the bundlesheath cells of C4 plants has an effect on O 2 concentration. What is that effect, and how might that benefit the plant? 3, How would you expect the relative abundance of C:3 versus C 4 and CAM species to change in a geographic region whose climate becomes much hotter and drier?

_lm'·',14

For suggested answers. see Appendix A,

202

UNIT TWO

The Cell

Night

D',

Organic acids release COl to Calvin cycle Sugar

(a) Spatial separation of steps. In C4 plants. carbon fixation and the Calvin cycle occur in different types of cells,

Notice in Figure 10.20 that the CAM pathway is similar to the Ct pathway in that carbon dioxide is first incorporated into organic intermediates before it enters the Calvin cycle. The difference is that in C4 plants, the initial steps ofcarbon fixation are separated structurally from the Calvin cycle, whereas in CAM plants, the two steps occur at separate times but within the same cell. (Keep in mind that CAM, C"" and C3 plants all eventually use the Calvin cycle to make sugar from carbon dioxide.)

oco

CO,

(b) Temporal separation of steps. In CAM plants. carbon fixation and the Calvin cycle occur in the same cells at differer'lt times.

The Importance of Photosynthesis: A Review In this chapter, we have followed photosynthesis from pho· tons to food. The light reactions capture solar energy and use it to make ATP and transfer electrons from water to NADP+, forming NADPH. The Calvin cycle uses the ATP and NADPH to produce sugar from carbon dioxide. The energy that enters the chloroplasts as sunlight becomes stored as chemical energy in organic compounds. See Figure 10.21 for a review of the entire process. What are the fates of photosynthetic products? The sugar made in the chloroplasts supplies the entire plant with chemical energy and carbon skeletons for the synthesis of all the major organic molecules of plant cells. About 50% of the organic material made by photosynthesis is consumed as fuel for cellular respiration in the mitochondria of the plant cells. Sometimes there is a loss ofphotosynthetic products to photo· respiration. Technically, green cells are the only autotrophic parts of the plant. The rest of the plant depends on organic molecules exported from leaves via veins. In most plants, carbohydrate is transported out of the leaves in the form of

•

•

light

Light Reactions: Photosystem 11 E\!Ctron transport chain " Photosystem I . ~ Electron transport chain '- ~

'I

3-Phosphoglycerate

C""") Cycle

AlP NADPH

G3P

I.,../"

Starch (storage)

Chloroplast

o Light Reactions: • Are carried out by molecules in the thylakoid membranes • Convert light energy to the chemical energy of AlP and NADPH • Split H20 and release 02 to the atmosphere

Sucrose (export) Calvin Cycle Reactions: • Take place in the stroma • Use ATP and NADPH to convert CO 2 to the sugar G3P • Return ADp, inorganic phosphate, and NADP" to the light reactions

... Figure 10.21 A review of photosynthesis. ThiS diagram outlines the main reactants and products of the light reactions and the Calvin cycle as they occur in the chloroplasts of plant cells. The entire ordered operation depends on the structural integrity of the chloroplast and its membranes. Enzymes in the chloroplast and cytosol convert glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate (G3P), the direct product of the Calvin cycle, to many other organic compounds.

sucrose, a disaccharide. After arriving at nonphotosynthetic cells, the sucrose provides raw material for cellular respiration and a multitude of anabolic pathways that synthesize proteins, lipids, and other products. A considerable amount of sugar in the form ofglucose is linked together to make the polysaccharide cellulose, especially in plant cells that are still growing and maturing. Cellulose, the main ingredient of cell walls, is the most abundant organic molecule in the plantand probably on the surface of the planet. Most plants manage to make more organic material each day than they need to use as respiratory fuel and precursors for biosynthesis. They stockpile the extra sugar by synthesizing starch, storing some in the chloroplasts themselves and some in storage cells of roots, tubers, seeds, and fruits. In accounting for the consumption of the food mol-

ecules produced by photosynthesis, let's not forget that most plants lose leaves, roots, stems, fruits, and sometimes their entire bodies to heterotrophs, including humans. On a global scale, photosynthesis is the process responsi· ble for the presence of oxygen in our atmosphere. Furthermore, in terms of food production, the collective productivity ofthe minuscule chloroplasts is prodigious: Photosynthesis makes an estimated 160 billion metric tons of carbohydrate per year (a metric ton is 1,000 kg, about 1.1 tons). That's organic matter equivalent in mass to a stack of about 60 trillion copies of this textbook-I7 stacks of books reaching from Earth to the sun! No other chemical process on the planet can match the output of photosynthesis. And no process is more important than photosynthesis to the welfare of life on Earth. CHAPTH TEN

Photosynthesis

203

a -MH'·.

.. ter;lf 1'1

Go to the Study Area at www.masteringbio,com for BioFlix

3-D Animations, MP3 Tutors, Videos, Practice Tests, an eBook, and more.

eVlew

.. Linear Electron Flow The flow of electrons during the light reactions produces NADPH, ATP, and oxygen:


_ •.lllill-10.1

• .:•

Photosynthesis converts light energy to the chemical energy of food (pp. 18&-189) .. Chloroplasts: The Sites of Photosynthesis in Plants In au-

"""PH

r......

totrophic eukaryotes, photosynthesis occurs in chloroplasts, organelles containing th}~akoids. Stacks of thylakoids form grana.

Photo,ystem I

.. Tracking Atoms Through Photosynthesis: Scie1ltific [11quiry Photosynthesis is summarized as 6CG.! + 12 H~O + Light energy ) 4HI10S + 6 O:! + 6 HzO Chloroplasts split water into hydrogen and oxygen, incorporating the electrons of hydrogen into sugar molecules. Photosynthesis is a redox process: H1 0 is oxidized, C01 is reduced.

.. The Two Stages of Photosynthesis: A Preview The light reactions in the thylakoid membranes split water, releasing O2, producing ATp, and forming NADPH. The Calvin cycle in the stroma forms sugar from CO:z, using ATP for energy and NADPH for reducing power. RioFlix J.I) Animation Photosynthesis MPJ Tutor Photosynthesis Activity The Site, ofPhotosynthe,is Activity Overview of Photosynthesis

.','1'''''-10.2 The light reactions convert solar energy to the chemical energy of AlP and NADPH (pp_ 190-198)

.. Cyclic Electron Flow Cyclic electron flow employs only photosystem I, producing ATP but no NADPH or O 2, .. A Comparison of Chemiosmosis in Chloroplasts and Mitochondria In both organelles, redox reactions of electron transport chains generate an H+ gradient across a membrane. ATP synthase uses this proton-motive force to make ATP. Acchity Light Energy and Pigments In'·estigation How Does PapcrChromatography Separate Plant Pigments? Activity The Light Reactions

."'i'ill-10.3 The Calvin cycle uses AlP and NADPH to convert CO 2 to sugar (pp. 198-199) .. The Calvin cycle occurs in the stroma, using electrons from NADPH and energy from ATP. One molecule ofG3P exits the cycle per three C01 molecules fixed and is converted to glucose and other organic molecules.

.. The Nature of Sunlight Ught is a form of electromagnetic energy. The colors we see as visible light include those wavelengths that drive photosynthesis. Carbon fixation

.. Photosynthetic Pigments: The Light Receptors A pigment absorbs visible light of specific wavelengths. Chlorophyll a is the main photosynthetic pigment in plants. Other accessory pigments absorb different wavelengths oflight and pass the energy on to chlorophyll a. .. Excitation of Chlorophyll by light A pigment goes from a ground state to an excited state when a photon boosts one of its electrons to a higher-energy orbital. This excited state is unstable. Electrons from isolated pigments tend to fall back to the ground state, giving off heat and/or light. .. A Photosystem: A Reaction-Center Complex Associated with Light-Harvesting Complexes A photosystem is com· posed of a reaction-center complex surrounded by light. harvesting complexes that funnel the energy of photons to the reaction·center complex. When a special pair of reaction-center chlorophyll a molecules absorbs energy, one of its electrons is boosted to a higher energy level and tmnsferred to the primary electron acceptor. Photosystem II contains P680 chlorophyll a molecules in the reaction·center complex; photosystem I contains P700 molecules.

204

UNIT TWO

The Cell

CaMn Cycle Re-generation 01 COl il(ceptor

5dC ReductIOn

1 G3P(KI

Activity The Calvin Cycle lnnsligation How Is the Rate of Photosynthesis Measured? Biology Labs On' Line LealLlb

- , . 1114

1'-10.4

6. \X'hich of the following statements is a correct distinction between autotrophs and heterotrophs? a. Only heterotrophs require chemical compounds from the environment. b. Cellular respiration is unique to heterotrophs. c. Only heterotrophs have mitochondria. d. Autotrophs, but not heterotrophs, can nourish themselves beginning with CO 2 and other nutrients that are inorganic. e. Only heterotrophs require oxygen. 7. Which of the following does not occur during the Calvin cycle? a. carbon fixation b. oxidation ofNADPH c. release of oxygen d. regeneration of the CO 2 acceptor e. consumption of ATP

-51401"·

Acthity Photo'ynthe,is in Dry Oimates

... The Importance of Photosynthesis: A Review Organic compounds produced by photosynthesis provide the energy and building material for ecosystems. TESTING YOUR KNOWLEDGE

SELF-QUIZ 1. The light reactions of photosynthesis supply the Calvin cycle with a. light energy. d. ATP and NADPH. b. CO 2 and ATP. e. sugar and O2, c. H20 and NADPH. 2. Which of the following sequences correctly represents the flow ofelectrons during photosynthesis? a. NADPH ---> O2 -. CO 2 b. H20 ---> NADPH ---> Calvin cycle Co NADPH ---> chlorophyll---> Calvin cycle d. H20 ---> photosystem I ---> photosystem 11 e. NADPH ---> electron transport chain ---> O2 3. In mechanism, photophosphorylation is most similar to a. substrate-level phosphorylation in glycolysis. b. oxidative phosphorylation in cellular respiration. c. the Calvin cycle. d. carbon fixation. e. reductionofNADP+. 4. How is photosynthesis similar in C4 plants and CAM plants? a. In both cases, only photosystem J is used. b. Both types of plants make sugar without the Calvin cycle. c. In both cases, rubisco is not used to fix carbon initially. d. Both types of plants make most of their sugar in the dark. e. In both cases. thylakoids are not involved in photosynthesis. 5. Which process is most directly driven by light energy? a. creation of a pH gradient by pumping protons across the thylakoid membrane b. carbon fixation in the stroma Co reduction of NADP- molecules d. removal of electrons from chlorophyll molecules e. ATP synthesis

For Self· Quiz answers, see Appendix A.

-51401',. Visit the Study Area at www.masteringbio.com lor a Practice Test

EVOLUTION CONNECTION 8. Photorespiration can decrease soybeans' photosynthetic output by about 50%. Would you expect this figure to be higher or lower in wild relatives of soybeans? Why?

SCIENTIFIC INQUIRY 9. •• I&W"I The following diagram represents an experiment with isolated chloroplasts. The chloroplasts were first made acidic by soaking them in a solution at pH 4. After the thylakoid space reached pH 4, the chloroplasts were transferred to a basic solution at pH 8. The chloroplasts then made ATP in the dark.

(@g)-----:::::'T-,..;,..-@>-----:::::~ pH?

pH4

pH4

@>

pH 8

Draw an enlargement of part of the thytakoid membrane in the beaker with the solution at pH 8. Draw ATP synthase. Label the areas of high H+ concentration and low HT concentration. Show the direction protons flow through the enzyme, and show the reaction where ATP is synthesized. Would ATP end up in the thylakoid or outside of it? Explain why the chloroplasts in the experiment were able to make ATP in the dark.

SCIENCE, TECHNOLOGY, AND SOCIETY 10. Scientific evidence indiCltes that the CO 2 added to the air by the burning ofwood and fossil fuels is contributing to "glohal warming;' a rise in global temperature. Tropical min forests are estimated to be responsible for more than 20% ofglobal photosynthesis, yet their consumption of large anmunts of C~ is thought to make little or no net contribution to reduction ofglohal warming. \X!hy might this be? (Hint: \X!hat happens to the food produced bya rain forest tree when it is eaten by animals or the tree dies?)

CHAPTH TEN

Photosynthesis

205

Cell Comm KEY

•

atia

CONCEPTS

11.1 External signals are converted to responses within the cell 11.2 Reception: A signaling molecule hinds to a receptor protein, causing it to change shape 11.3 Transduction: Cascades of molecular interactions relay signals from receptors to target molecules in the cell 11.4 Response: Cell signaling leads to regulation of transcription or cytoplasmic activities 11.5 Apoptosis (programmed cell death) integrates

multiple cell-signaling pathways

hiker slips and falls down a steep ravine, injuring her leg in the fall. Tragedy is averted when she is able to pull out a cell phone and call for help. Cell phones, the Internet, e-mail, instant messaging-no one would deny the importance of communication in our lives. The role of communication in life at the cellular level is equally critical. Cell-to-cell communication is absolutely essential for multicellular organisms such as humans and oak trees. The trillions of cells in a multicellular organism must communicate with each other to coordinate their activities in a way that enables the organism to develop from a fertilized egg, then survive and reproduce in turn. Communication between cells is also important for many unicellular organisms. Networks of communication between cells can be even more complicated than the World Wide Web. In studying how cells signal to each other and how they interpret the signals they receive, biologists have discovered some universal mechanisms ofcellular regulation, additional evidence for the evolutionary relatedness ofall life. The same small set of cell-signaling mechanisms shows up again and again in many

A

206

.... Figure 11.1 How do the effects of Viagra (multicolored) result from its inhibition of a signaling-pathway enzyme (purple)? lines of biological research-from embryonic development to hormone action to cancer. In one example, a common cell-tocell signaling pathway leads to dilation ofblood vessels. Once the signal subsides, the response is shut down by the enzyme shown in purple in Figure 11.1. Also shown isa multicolored molecule that blocks the action ofthis enzyme and keeps blood vessels dilated. Enzyme-inhibiting compounds like this one are often prescribed for treatment of medical conditions. The action of the multicolored compound, known as Viagra, will be discussed later in the chapter. The signals received by cells, whether originating from other cells or from changes in the physical environment, take various forms, including light and touch. However, cells most often communicate with each other by chemical signals. In this chapter, we focus on the main mechanisms by which cells receive, process, and respond to chemical signals sent from other cells. At the end, we will take a look at apoptosis, a type of programmed cell death that integrates input from multiple signaling pathways.

r;:~:tr~'a7 s~:~~ls are converted to responses within the cell

What does a "talking" cell say to a ~listeningn cell, and how does the latter cell respond to the message? Let's approach these questions by first looking at communication among microorganisms, for modern microbes are a window on the role of cell signaling in the evolution oflife on Earth.

Evolution of Cell Signaling One topic of cell "conversation" is sex-at least for the yeast Saccharomycescerevisiae, which people have used for millennia to make bread, wine, and beer. Researchers have learned

that cells of this yeast identify their mates by chemical signaling. There are two sexes, or mating types, called a and 0: (Figure 11.2). Cells of mating type a secrete a signaling moleculecalled a factor, which can bind to specific receptor proteins on nearby 0: cells. At the same time, 0: cells secrete a factor, which binds to receptors on a cells. \Vithout actually entering the cells, the two mating factors cause the cells to grow toward each other and also bring about other cellular changes. The result is the fusion, or mating, of two cells of opposite type. The new a/o: cell contains all the genes of both original cells, a combination of genetic resources that provides advantages to the cell's descendants, which arise by subsequent cell divisions. How is the mating signal at the yeast cell surface changed, or transduced, into a form that brings about the cellular response of mating? The process by which a signal on a cell's surface is converted to a specific cellular response is a series of steps called a signal transduction pathway. Many such pathways have been extensively studied in both yeast and animal cells. Amazingly, the molecular details of signal transduction in yeast and mammals are strikingly similar, even though the last common ancestor of these two groups of organisms lived over a billion years ago. These similarities-

F

o Exchange of

mating factors. Each cell type secretes a mating factor that binds to receptors on the other cell type.

8

Yeast cell. mating type a

a:" •

and others more recently uncovered between signaling systems in bacteria and plants-suggest that early versions of the cell-signaling mechanisms used today evolved well before the first multicellular creatures appeared on Earth. Scientists think that signaling mechanisms first evolved in ancient prokaryotes and single-celled eukaryotes and then were adopted for new uses by their multicellular descendants. Meanwhile, cell signaling has remained important in the microbial world. Cells of many bacterial species secrete small molecules that can be detected by other bacterial cells. The concentration of such signaling molecules allows bacteria to sense the local density of bacterial cells, a phenomenon called quorum sensing. Furthermore, signaling among members of a bacterial population can lead to coordination oftheir activities. In response to the signal, bacterial cells are able to come together and form bioji/ms, aggregations ofbacteria that often form recogni7.able structures containing regions of specialized function. Figure 11.3 shows an aggregation response characteristic ofone type ofbacterium.

factor

Yeast cell. mating type 0:

Mating. Binding of the factors to receptors induces changes in the cells that lead to their fusion.

() New ala cell. The nucleus of the fused cell includes all the genes from the a and a cells. ... Figure 11.2 Communication between mating yeast cells. saccharomyces cerevisiae cells use chemICal signaling to Identify cells of opposite mating type and initiate the mating process, The two mating types and their corresponding chemical signaling molecules. or mating factors. are called a and n,

o Aggregation in process

JJ o Spore-forming structure (fruiting body) Fruiting bodies

... Figure 11.3 Communication among bacteria. Soil-d'welling bacteria called myxobactena ("slime bacteria") use chemical Signals to share information about nutrient a~ailability, When food is scarce, starving cells secrete a molecule that reaches neighboring cells and stimulates them to aggregate. The cells form a structure, called a fruiting body, that produces thick-walled spores capable of surviving until the environment impro~es. The bacteria shown here are Myxococcus xanrhus (steps 1-3, SEMs; lower photo. lM) C~APTE~ ELEVE~

Cell Communication

207

local and long-Distance Signaling

and plants have cell junctions that, where present, directly connect the cytoplasms of adjacent cells (Figure 11.4a). In these cases, signaling substances dissolved in the cytosol can pass freely bem'een adjacent cells. Moreover, animal cells may communicate via direct contact between membrane~bound cell~surface mol· ecules, which occurs during a process called cell-cell recognition (Figure 11.4b). This sort of signaling is important in such processes as embryonic development and the immune response. In many other cases, messenger molecules are secreted by the signaling cell. Some of these travel only short distances; such local regulators influence cells in the vicinity. One class of local regulators in animals,growlhfactors, consists of compounds that stimulate nearby target cells to grow and divide. Numerous cells can simultaneously receive and respond to the molecules of growth factor produced by a single cell in their vicinity. This type of local signaling in animals is called paracrine signaling (Figure 11.5a). Another, more specialized type of local signaling called synaptic signaling occurs in the animal nervous system (Figure 11.5b). An electrical signal along a nerve cell triggers the secretion of a chemical signal carried by neurotransmitter molecules. These diffuse across the synapse, the narrow space bem'een the nerve cell and its target cell (often another nerve cell). The neurotransmitter stimulates the target cell. Local signaling in plants is not as well understood. Because of their cell walls, plants use mechanisms somewhat different from those operating locally in animals. Both animals and plants use chemicals called hormones for long-distance signaling. In hormonal signaling in animals, also known as endocrine signaling, specialized cells release

Like yeast cells, cells in a multicellular organism usually communicate via chemical messengers targeted for cells that mayor may

not be immediately adjacent. As we saw in Chapters 6and 7, cells may communicate by direct contact (Figure 11.4), Both animals Plasma membranes

-+ ,

+j-'

Plasmodesmata

Gap junctions between animal cells

between plant cells

(a) Cell junctions. Both animals and plants have cell Junctions thaI allow molecules to pass readily between adjacent cells without crossing plasma membranes.

(b) Cell-cell recognition. Two cells in an animal may communicate by interaction between molecules protruding from their surfaces.

.... Figure 11.4 Communication by direct contact between cells.

Local signaling

Long-distance signaling

~===-------=-=-,~---------, Target cell

I

Secreting _ cell

~

.::: :;;;.' '.' •.•••• .:.~

1"',:.-0; V; •• ~ .~~.

Secretory vesicle

. :•

ijElectrical sign,' along nerve cell triggers release of neurotransmitter

\ •• I. ~.

t...!...... Neurotransmitter

'-'~~

..'...'... "if· .•• '. ~y •

~~lat;r

Local diffuses through extracellular flUid

Target cell is stimulated

local and long-distance signaling. only specific target cells recognize and respond to a given signaling molecule.

The Cell

tt~~ .;g ' ••

..

. ..

/

.&. Figure 11.5 Local and long-distance cell communication in animals. In both

UNIT TWO

\

diffuses across synapse

(a) Paracrine signaling. A secreting cell acts on (b) Synaptk signaling. A nerve cell releases nearby target cells by discharging molecules neurotransmitter molecules into a of a local regulator (a growth factor. for synapse. stimulating the target cell example) into the eKlraceliular fluid.

208

Endocrine cell

Target - ceil

. . ". , .''-'-'-'' ... (e) Hormonal signaling. Specialized endocrine

cells secrete hormones into body fluids. often the blood. Hormones may reach virtually all body cells.

hormone molecules, which travel via the circulatory system to target cells in other parts of the body (Figure 11.5c). Plant hormones (often called plant growth regulators) sometimes travel in vessels but more often reach their targets by moving through cells or by diffusing through the air as a gas (see Chapter 39). Hormones vary widely in molecular size and type, as do local regulators. For instance, the plant hormone ethylene, a gas that promotes fruit ripening and helps regulate growth, is a hydrocarbon of only six atoms (C:2H 4 ), small enough to pass through cell walls. In contrast, the mammalian hormone insulin, which regulates sugar levels in the blood, is a protein with thousands of atoms. The transmission of a signal through the nervous system can also be considered an example of long-distance signaling. An electrical signal travels the length ofa nerve cell and is then converted back to a chemical signal when a signaling mole -o-~-o-~-o-~-o-c8 I I I 0-0-0-

2

0

Phosphodiesterase

Adenylylcyclase "' ..

t

..

o l):> -O-~-O-IH~' I

0q a

Pyrophosphate OH OH

®-®,

OH OH AMP

.. Figure 11.10 Cyclic AMP. The second messenger cyclic AMP (cAMP) is made from AlP by adenylyl cyclase, an enzyme embedded in the plasma membrane. Cyclic AMP is inactivated by phosphodiesterase, an enzyme that converts it to AMP .'Wil i• What would happen if a molecule rhar inactivared phosphodiesterase were introduced inro the celP

Cyclic AMP Once Earl Sutherland had established that epinephrine somehow causes glycogen breakdown without passing through the plasma membrane, the search began for what he later named the second messenger that transmits the signal from the plasma

~

First messenger (Signaling mole{Ule such as epinephrine)

~

membrane to the metabolic machinery in the cytoplasm. Sutherland found that the binding of epinephrine to the plasma membrane of a liver cell elevates the cytosolic concen~ tration of a compound called cyclic adenosine monophos~ phate, abbreviated cyclic AMP or cAMP (Figure 11.10). An enzyme embedded in the plasma membrane, adenylyl cyclase, converts ATP to cAMP in response to an extracellu· lar signal-in this case, epinephrine. But epinephrine doesn't stimulate adenylyl cyclase directly. When epinephrine outside the cell binds to a specific receptor protein, the protein activates adenylyl cyclase, which in turn can catalyze the synthesis of many molecules of cAMP. In this way, the normal cellular concentration of cAMP can be boosted 2o-fold in a matter of seconds. The cAMP broadcasts the signal to the cytoplasm. It does not persist for long in the absence of the hormone because another enzyme, called phosphodiesterase, converts cAMP to AMP. Another surge of epinephrine is needed to boost the cytosolic concentration of cAMP again. Subsequent research has revealed that epinephrine is only one of many hormones and other signaling molecules that trigger the formation of cAMP. It has also brought to light the other components of cAMP pathways, including G proteins, G protein-coupled receptors, and protein kinases (Figure 11.11). The immediate effect of cAMP is usually the activation of a serine/threonine kinase called protein kinase A. The activated kinase then phosphorylates various other proteins, depending on the cell type. (The complete pathway for epinephrine's stimulation of glycogen breakdown is shown later, in Figure 11.15.)

216

UNIT TWO

The Cell

G protein-coupled receptor

Adenylyl cyclase

G protem

Cellular responses

... Figure 11.11 cAMP as a second messenger in a G-protein-signaling pathway. The first messenger activates a G protein·coupled receptor. which activates a specific G protein, In turn, the G protein activates adenylyl cyclase. which catalyzes the conversion of ATP to cAMP, The cAMP then acts as a second messenger and activates another protein, usually protein kinase A. leading to cellular responses,

Further regulation of cell metabolism is provided by other G-protein systems that inhibit adenylyl cyclase. In these systems, a different signaling molecule activates a different receptor, which activates an inhibitory G protein. Now that we know about the role of cAMP in G-proteinsignaling pathways, we can explain in molecular detail how certain microbes cause disease. Consider cholera, a disease

that is frequently epidemic in places where the water supply is contaminated with human feces. People acquire the cholera bacterium, Vibrio cholerae, by drinking contaminated water. The bacteria colonize the lining ofthe small intestine and produce a toxin. The cholera toxin is an enzyme that chemically modifies a G protein involved in regulating salt and water secretion. Because the modified G protein is unable to hydrolyze GTP to GDP, it remains stuck in its active form, continuously stimulating adenylyl cyclase to make cAMP. TIle resulting high concentration of cAMP causes the intestinal cells to secrete large amounts of salts, with water following by osmosis, into the intestines. An infected person quickly develops profuse diarrhea and if left untreated can soon die from the loss of water and salts. Our understanding of signaling pathways involving cyclic AMP or related messengers has allowed us to develop treatments for certain conditions in humans. In one pathway cye/ic GAfP, or cGMP, acts as a signaling molecule whose effects include relaxation ofsmooth muscle cells in artery walls. A compound that inhibits the hydrolysis of cGMP to GMP, thus prolonging the signal, was originally prescribed for chest pains because it increased blood flow to the heart muscle. Under the trade name Viagra (see Figure ILl), this compound is now widely used as a treatment for erectile dysfunction in human males. Because Viagra leads to dilation of blood vessels, it also allows increased blood flow to the penis, optimizing physiological conditions for penile erections. The similarities between external reproductive structures in males and females (see Chapter 46) have motivated medical researchers to initiate clinical studies exploring whether Viagra might also be used to treat sexual dysfunction in females; these studies are currently under way.

the blood and extracellular fluid of an animal often exceeds that in the cytosol by more than 10,000 times. Calcium ions are actively transported out of the cell and are actively imported from the cytosol into the endoplasmic reticulum (and, under some conditions, into mitochondria and chloroplasts) by various protein pumps (see Figure 11.12). As a result, the calcium concentration in the ER is usually much higher than that in the cytosol. Because the cytosolic calcium level is low, a small change in absolute numbers of ions represents a relatively large percentage change in calcium concentration. In response to a signal relayed by a signal transduction pathway, the cytosolic calcium level may rise, usually by a mechanism that releases Ca2+ from the cell's ER. The pathways leading to calcium release involve still other second messengers, inositol trisphosphate (IP3) and diacylglycerol (DAG). These two messengers are produced by cleavage of a certain kind of phospholipid in the plasma membrane.

EXTRACELLULAR FlUID

Plasma /membrane

~_ ",1"'-"Ca 2+ ~

pump

Mitochondrion"

Nucleus

CYTOSOl

Calcium Ions and Inositol Trisphosphate (lP:J Many signaling molecules in animals, including neurotransmitters, growth factors, and some hormones, induce responses in their target cells via signal transduction pathways that increase the cytosolic concentration of calcium ions (CaH ). Calcium is even more widely used than cAMP as a second messenger. Increasing the cytosolic concentration of Ca 2 + causes many responses in animal cells, including muscle cell contraction, secretion of certain substances, and cell division. In plant cells, a wide range of hormonal and environH mental stimuli can cause brief increases in cytosolic Ca concentration, triggering various signaling pathways, such as the pathway for greening in response to light (see Figure 39.4). H Cells use Ca as a second messenger in both G-protein and receptor tyrosine kinase pathways. Although cells always contain some Ca H , this ion can function as a second messenger because its concentration in the cytosol is normally much lower than the concentration outside the cell {Figure 11.12}. In fact, the level ofCaH in

Ca 2+ pump

::tt,-

C,'. ~T"\.pump

'- Endoplasmic reticulum (ER)

K,y •

High lCa 2+1 Low [Cal+l

... Figure 11.12 The maintenance of calcium ion concentrations in an animal cell. The Cal+ concentration in the cytosol is usually much lower (light blue) than that in the extracellular fluid and ER (darker blue). Protein pumps 10 the plasma membrane and the ER membrane. driven by AT~ move Ca H from the cytosol into the extracellular fluid and into the lumen of the ER. Mitochondrial pumps. driven by chemiosmosis (see Chapter 9), move Cal+ into mitochondria when the calcium level in the cytosol rises significantly.

C~APTE~ ELEVE~

Cell Communication

217

eplasma Phospholipase C cleaves a membrane phospholipid

OA signaling molecule binds to a receptor, leading to activation of phospholipase C

called PlP 2 into DAG and IP 3,

ODAG functions as a second messenger in other pathways,

EXTRASignaling molecule (first messenger)

CELLULAR FLUID

-"""......

G protein-coupled receptor

/

Phospholipase C

G protein-coupled receptor ---> G protein -. adenylyl cyclase -. cAMP. Identify the second messenger. a. cAMP b. G protein c. GTP d. adenylyl cyclase e. G protein-coupled receptor 8. Apoptosis involves all but the following: a. fragmentation ofthe DNA b. cell-signaling pathways c. activation of cellular enzymes d. lysis of the cell e. digestion of cellular contents by scavenger cells

9.

"P.'i.i'" Draw the following apoptotic pathway, which openltes in human immune cells. A death signal is received when a molecule called Fas binds its cell-surfdce receptor. The binding of many Fas molecules to receptors causes receptor clustering. The intracellular regions ofthe receptors, when together, bind adapter proteins. These in turn bind to inactive forms of caspase-8, which become activated and activate caspase-3, in turn. Once activated, caspase-3 initiates apoptosis.

For SeIf·Qlliz answers, see Appendix A.

-51401"- Visit the Study Area at www.milsteringbio.com for a Practice Test.

EVOLUTION CONNECTION 10. \Xfhat evolutionary mechanisms might account for the origin and persistence of cell-to-cell signaling systems in unicellular prokaryotes?

SCIENTIFIC INQUIRY II. Epinephrine initiates a signal tmnsduction pathway that involves production of cyclic AMP (cAM(l) and leads to the breakdown of glycogen to glucose, a major energy source for cells. But glycogen breakdown is actually only part of a "fightor-flight response" that epinephrine brings about; the overall effect on the body includes increased heart rate and alertness, as well as a burst ofenergy. Given that caffeine blocks the activity ofcAMP phosphodiesterase, propose a mechanism by which caffeine ingestion leads to heightened alertness and sleeplessness. Biological Inquiry: A Workbook of In,'rstigati..., Casrs Explore cell signaling processes in the hedgehog signaling pathway with the CaSe ·Shh: Silencing the Hedgehog Pathway,·

SCIENCE, TECHNOLOGY, AND SOCIETY 12. The aging process is thought to be initiated at the cellular level. Among the changes that can occur after a certain number of cell divisions is the loss of a cell's ability to respond to growth factors and other chemical signals. Much research into aging is aimed at understanding such losses, with the ultimate goal of significantly extending the human life span. Not everyone, however, agrees that this is a desirable goaL Iflife expectancy were greatly increased, what might be the social and ecological consequences? How might we cope with them?

C~APTE~ ELEVE~

Cell Communication

227

The Cel C cl KEY

J. Figure 12.1 How do a cell's chromosomes change during cell division?

CONCEPTS

12.1 Cell division results in genetically identical daughter cells 12.2 The mitotic phase alternates with interphase in the cell cycle 12.3 The eukaryotic cell cycle is regulated by a molecular control system

T

he ability of organisms to reproduce their own kind is

the one characteristic that best distinguishes living things from nonliving matter. This unique capacity to procreate, like all biological functions, has a cellular basis. Rudolf Yirchow, a German physician, put it this way in 1855: ~Where

a cell exists, there must have been a preexisting cell,

justas the animal arises only from an animal and the plant only from a plant.~ He summarized this concept with the Latin axiom "Omnis cellula e cellula,~ meaning ~Every cell from a

I

100 Jim

(a) Reproduction. An amoeba, a single-celled eukaryote, is dividing into two cells, Each new cell will be an individual organism (LM). J.

I 200 llm I

I

(b) Growth and development. This micrograph shows a sand dollar embryo shortly after the fenilized egg divided, forming two cells (LM).

Figure 12.2 The functions of cell division.

228

cell.n The continuity of life is based on the reproduction of cells, or ceO division. The series of fluorescence micrographs in Figure 12.1 follows an animal cell's chromosomes, from lower left to lower right, as one cell divides into two. Cell division plays several important roles in the life ofan or~ ganism. When a unicellular organism, such as an amoeba, divides and forms duplicate offspring, the division of one cell reproduces an entire organism (Figure 12.2a). Cell division on a larger scale can produce progeny from some multicellular or· ganisms (such as plants that grow from cuttings). Cell division also enables sexually reproducing organisms to develop from a single cell-the fertilized egg, or zygote (Figure 12.2b). And after an organism is fully grown, cell division continues to function in renewal and repair, replacing cells that die from normal wear and tear or accidents. For example, dividing cells in your bone marrow continuously make new blood cells (Figure 12.2c). The cell division process is an integral part of the cell cycle, the life of a cell from the time it is first formed from a dividing parent cell until its own division into m'o cells. Passing identical genetic material to cellular offspring is a crucial function of cell

(c) Tissue renewal. These dividing bone

marrow cells (arrow) will give rise to new blood cells (LM),

division. In this chapter, you will learn how cell division distributes identical genetic material to daughter cells.- After studying the cellular mechanics ofcell division in eukaryotes and bacteria, you will learn about the molecular control system that regulates progress through the eukaryotic cell cycle and what happens when the control system malfunctions. Because cell cycle regulation, or a lack thereof, plays a major role in cancer development, this aspect of cell biology is an active area of research.

r~::I~':~v7s~~' ~sults in genetically identical daughter cells

The reproduction of an ensemble as complex as a cell cannot occur by a mere pinching in half; a cell is not like a soap bubble that simply enlarges and splits in two. Most cell division involves the distribution ofidentical genetic material-DNA-to tv.'o daughter cells. (The special type of cell division that produces sperm and eggs results in daughter cells that are not genetically identical.) What is most remarkable about cell division is the fldelitywith which the DNA is passed along from one generation ofcells to the next. A dividing cell duplicates its DNA, allocates the two copies to opposite ends of the cell, and only then splits into daughter cells.

Cellular Organization of the Genetic Material A cell's endowment of DNA, its genetic information, is called its genome. Although a prokaryotic genome is often a single long DNA molecule, eukaryotic genomes usually consist of a number of DNA molecules. The overall length of DNA in a eukaryotic cell is enormous. A typical human cell, for example, has about 2 m of DNA-a length about 250,000 times greater than the cell's diameter. Yet before the cell can divide to form genetically identical daughter cells, all of this DNA must be copied and then the two copies separated so that each daughter cell ends up with a complete genome. The replication and distribution of so much DNA is manageable because the DNA molecules are packaged into chromosomes, so named because they take up certain dyes used in microscopy (from the Greek chroma, color, and soma, body) (Figure 12.3). Every eukaryotic species has a characteristic number of chromosomes in each cell nucleus. For example, the nuclei ofhuman somatic cells (all body cells except the reproductive cells) each contain 46 chromosomes made up of two sets of 23, one set inherited from each parent. Reproductive cells, or gametes-sperm and eggs-have half as many chromosomes as somatic cells, or one set of23 chromo-

• Although the termsdallghtercelis alld sister chromatids {a term you will ell· COUllter later in the chapter) arc traditional and will be used throughout this book. the structures they rerer to have no gender.

A Figure 12.3 Eukaryotic chromosomes. Chromosomes (stained purple) are ~isible within the nucleus of this cell from an African blood lily, The thinner red threads in the surrounding cytoplasm are the cytoskeleton, The cell is preparing to di~ide (LM),

somes in humans. The number of chromosomes in somatic cells varies widely among species: 18 in cabbage plants, 56 in elephants, 90 in hedgehogs, and 148 in one species of alga. Eukaryotic chromosomes are made of chromatin, a complex of DNA and associated protein molecules. Each single chromosome contains one very long, linear DNA molecule that carries several hundred to a few thousand genes, the units that specify an organism's inherited traits. The associated proteins maintain the structure ofthe chromosome and help control the activity of the genes.

Distribution of Chromosomes During Eukaryotic Cell Division \Vhen a cell is not dividing, and even as it duplicates its DNA in preparation for cell division, each chromosome is in the form ofa long, thin chromatin fiber. After DNA duplication, however, the chromosomes condense: Each chromatin fiber becomes densely coiled and folded, making the chromosomes much shorter and so thick that we can see them with a light microscope. Each duplicated chromosome has 1\.....0 sister chromatids. The two chromatids, each containing an identical DNA molecule, are initially attached all along their lengths by adhesive protein complexes called cohesinsi this attachment is known as sisterchromatid cohesion. In its condensed form, the duplicated chromosome has a narrow "wais( at the centromere, a specialized region where the two chromatids are most closely attached. The part ofa chromatid on either side ofthe centromere is referred to as an arm of the chromatid. Later in the cell division process, the two sister chromatids ofeach duplicated chromosome separate and move into two new nuclei, one forming at each end ofthe cell. Once the sister chromatids separate, they are considered individual chromosomes. Thus, each new nucleus receives a collection of chromosomes identical to that of CHAPTER TWELVE

The Cell Cyde

229

Chromosomes

... Figure 12A Chromosome

DNA molecules

o Aeukaryotic cell has multiple chromoChromosome arm

somes. one of which is represented here. Before duplication, each chromosome has a Single DNA molecule.

Chromosome duplication (including DNA synthesis)

Centromere

;"" chromatids

h~ .

o chromosome Once replicated. a consists

II

of two sister chromatids connected along their entire lengths by sister chromatid cohesion. Each chromatid contains a copy of the DNA molecule.

Separation of sister chromatids

Sister chromatids Centromeres

II

the parent cell (Figure 12.4). Mitosis, the division of the nu~ cleus, is usually followed immediately by cytokinesis, the divi~ sion of the cytoplasm. \'(fhere there was one cell, there are now two, each the genetic equivalent ofthe parent cell. What happens to the chromosome number as we follow the human life cycle through the generations? You inherited 46 chromosomes, one set of 23 from each parent. They were combined in the nucleus of a single cell when a sperm from your father united with an egg from your mother, forming a fertilized egg, or zygote. Mitosis and cytokinesis produced the 200 trillion somatic cells that now make up your body, and the same processes continue to generate new cells to replace dead and damaged ones. In contrast, you produce gametes-eggs or sperm-by a variation ofcen division called meiosis, which yields nonidentical daughter cells that have only one set of chromosomes, thus half as many chromosomes as the parent cell. Meiosis occurs only in your gonads (ovaries or testes). In each generation of humans, meiosis reduces the chromosome number from 46 (two sets of chromosomes) to 23 (one set). Fertilization fuses two gametes together and returns the cllfomosome number to 46, and mitosis conserves that number in every somatic cell nucleus ofthe new individual. In Chapter 13, we will examine the role of meiosis in reproduction and inheritance in more detail. In the remainder of this chapter, we focus on mitosis and the rest of the cell cycle in eukaryotes. 230

UNIT TWO

The Cell

o separate Mechanical processes the sister

d~lication and

distribution during cell division. A

eukaryotic cell preparing to divide duplicates each of its chromosomes. Next to each chromosome dril'Mng is a simplified double helix representing each DNA molecule. (In an actual chromosome. each DNA molecule would be bghtly folded and coiled. complexed with proteins,) The micrograph shcMts a highly coodensed duplicated human chromosome (SEM), The sister chromatids of each duplicated chromosome are distributed to two daughter cells during cell division. (Chromosomes normally exist in the highly coodensed state shown here ooty during the process of cell division; the chromosomes in the top and bonom cells are shown in condensed foon fOf iIIustratioo purposes ooly.) Circle one chromatid in the D chromosome in the micrograph, How many arms does the chromosome have?

chromatids into two chromosomes and distribute them to two daughter cells.

CONCEPT

CHECK

12.1

1. Starting with a fertilized egg (zygote), a series of five cell divisions would produce an early embryo with how many cells? 2. How many chromatids are in a duplicated chromosome? 3. M"'J:f.jIIA A chicken has 78 chromosomes in its somatic cells. How many chromosomes did the chicken inherit from each parent? How many chromosomes are in each of the chicken's gametes? How many chromosomes will be in each somatic cell of the chicken's offspring?


r;~:i;7:t~~~~ase alternates

with interphase in the cell cycle

In 1882, a German anatomist named Walther Flemming de· veloped dyes that allowed him to observe, for the first time, the behavior of chromosomes during mitosis and cytokinesis. (In fact, Flemming coined the terms mitosis and chromatin.) During the period between one cell division and the next, it

appeared to Flemming that the cell was simply growing larger. But we now know that many critical events occur during this stage in the life of a cell.

Phases of the Cell Cycle

The Mitotic Spindle: A Closer Look

Mitosis is just one part of the cell cycle (Figure 12.5). In fact, the mitotic (M) phase, which includes both mitosis and cytokinesis, is usually the shortest part of the cell cycle. Mitotic cell division alternates with a much longer stage called interphase, which often accounts for about 90% of the cycle. It is during interphase that the cell grows and copies its chromosomes in preparation for cell division. Interphase can be divided into sub· phases: the G I phase ("first gap~), the S phase (~synthesis~),and the G2 phase (~se .

,.....c: :;) .::~=-.::::"?;"-~Fragments of ~

-

nuclear envelope

(d) Most eukaryotes. In most other eukaryotes, including plants and allimals, the spindle forms outside the nucleus, and the nuclear envelope breaks down during mitosis. Microtubules separate the chromosomes, and the nuclear envelope then re·forms. ... Figure 12.12 A hypothetical sequence for the evohrtion of mitosis. Some unicellular eukaryotes existing today have mechanisms of cell division that appear to be intermediate between the binary fission of bacteria (a) and mitosis as it occurs in most other eukaryotes (d). bcept for (a). these schematIC diagrams do not show cell walls. CHAPTER TWELVE

The Cell Cycle

237

CONCEPT

CHECI(

12.2

1. How many chromosomes are shown in the diagram

2. 3. 4.

5.

6.

in Figure l2.7? How many chromatids are shown? Compare cytokinesis in animal cells and plant cells, What is a function of nonkinetochore microtubules? Identify three similarities between bacterial chromosomes and eukaryotic chromosomes, considering both structure and behavior during cell division. Compare the roles of tubulin and actin during eukaryotic cell division with the roles of tubulin-like and actin-like proteins during bacterial binary fission. -'MUI 4 During which stages of the cell cycle does a chromosome consist of two identical chromatids?

• Do molecular signals in the cytoplasm regulate the cell cycle? EXPERIMENT Researchers at the University of Colorado wondered whether a cell's progression through the cell cycle is controlled by cytoplasmic molecules. To investigate this, they induced cultured mammalian cells at different phases of the cell cycle to fuse. Two such experiments are shown here.

For suggested answers. see Appendix A

@

®

s

G,

r;~:':;:~~;~ cell cycle is regulated by a molecular control system

Evidence for Cytoplasmic Signals What controls the cell cycle? As Paul Nurse mentions in the interview opening this unit, one reasonable hypothesis might be that each event in the ceil cycle merely leads to the next, as in a simple metabolic pathway. According to this hypothesis, the replication of chromosomes in the S phase, for example, might cause cell growth during the G2 phase, which might in turn lead inevitably to the onset of mitosis. However, this hypothesis, which proposes a pathway that is not subject to ei· ther internal or external regulation, turns out to be incorrehlma, and Y. Watanabe, The conserved konetochore proteon shugoshin protects centromeric coheSIon during meIOsis. N~lure 427510-517 aOO4)

N'mu". Draw a graph showing what you expect happened to

the chromatids of the unlabeled chromosome in both strains of cells,

CHAPTER THIRTEEN

Meiosis and Sexual Life Cycles

257

arms at the end of metaphase I. They found a protein they named shugoshin (Japanese for "guardian spirit") that protects cohesins from cleavage at the centromere during meiosis I. Shugoshin is similar to a fruit fly protein identified lOyears ear~ lier by Terry Orr-Weaver, this unit's interviewee. Meiosis I is called the reductional division because it halves the number of chromosome sets per cell-a reduc· tion from two sets (the diploid state) to one set (the haploid state). During the second meiotic division, meiosis II (sometimes called the equational division), the sister chromatids separate, producing haploid daughter cells. The mechanism for separating sister chromatids is virtually identical in meiosis II and mitosis. The molecular basis of chromosome behavior during meiosis continues to be a focus of intense research interest. CONCEPT

CHECI(

13.3

I. How are the chromosomes in a cell at metaphase of mitosis similar to and different from the chromosomes in a cell at metaphase of meiosis II? 2. Given that the synaptonemal complex disappears by the end of prophase, how would the two homologs be associated if crossing over did not occur? What effect might this ultimately have on gamete formation?

-'M"'I.

For suggested answers, see Appendi~ A.

~:~':t~;v~~i~~on produced

in sexual life cycles contributes to evolution

How do we account for the genetic variation illustrated in Figure 13.1? As you will learn in more detail in later chapters, mutations are the original source of genetic diversity. These changes in an organism's DNA create the different versions of genes known as alleles. Once these differ~ ences arise, reshuffling of the alleles during sexual reproduction produces the variation that results in each member of a species having its own unique combination of traits.

.... Figure 13.11 The independent assortment of homologous chromosomes in meiosis. 258

UNIT THREE

Genetics

Origins of Genetic Variation Among Offspring In species that reproduce sexually, the behavior of chromosomes during meiosis and fertilization is responsible for most of the variation that arises each generation. Let's examine three mechanisms that contribute to the genetic variation arising from sexual reproduction: independent assortment of chromosomes, crossing over, and random fertilization.

Independent Assortment of Chromosomes One aspect ofsexual reproduction that generates genetic variation is the random orientation of homologous pairs of chromosomes at metaphase of meiosis L At metaphase I, the homologous pairs, each consisting of one maternal and one paternal chromosome, are situated on the metaphase plate. (Note that the terms maternal and paternal refer, respectively, to the mother and father of the individual whose cells are un· dergoing meiosis.) Each pair may orient with either its mater· nal or paternal homolog closer to a given pole-its orientation is as random as the flip of a coin. Thus, there is a 50% chance that a particular daughter cell of meiosis I will get the maternal chromosome of a certain homologous pair and a 50% chance that it will get the paternal chromosome. Because each homologous pair of chromosomes is positioned independently ofthe other pairs at metaphase I, the first meiotic division results in each pair sorting its maternal and paternal homologs into daughter cells independently of every other pair. This is called independent assortment. Each daugh· ter cell represents one outcome of all possible combina· tions of maternal and paternal chromosomes. As shown in Figure 13.11, the number of combinations possible for daughter cells formed by meiosis of a diploid cell with two homologous pairs of chromosomes is four (two possible arrangements for the first pair times two possible arrangements for the second pair). Note that only two of the four

Possibility 2

Possibility 1

Two equally probable arrangements of chromosomes at metaphase I

Metaphase II

Daughter cells Combination 3

Combination 4

combinations of daughter cells shown in the figure would result from meiosis of a single diploid cell, because a single parent cell would have one or the other possible chromosomal arrangement at metaphase I, but not both. However, the population of daughter cells resulting from meiosis of a large number of diploid cells contains aU four types in approximatelyequal numbers. In the case of n = 3, eight combinations of chromosomes are possible for daughter cells. More generally, the number of possible combinan tions when chromosomes sort independently during meiosis is 2 , where n is the haploid number of the organism. In the case of humans (n = 23), the number of possible combinations of maternal and paternal chromosomes in the resulting gametes is 223 , or about 8.4 million. Each gamete that you produce in your lifetime contains one of roughly 8.4 million possible combinations of chromosomes.

Crossing Over As a consequence of the independent assortment of chromosomes during meiosis, each of us produces a collection of gametes differing greatly in their combinations of the chromosomes we inherited from our two parents. Figure 13.11 suggests that each individual chromosome in a gamete is exclusively maternal or paternal in origin. In fact, this is not the case, because crossing over produces recombinant chromosomes, individual chromosomes that carry genes (DNA) derived from two different parents (Figure 13.12). In meiosis in humans, an average of one to three crossover events occur per chromosome pair, depending on the size of the chromosomes and the position oftheir centromeres. Crossing over begins very early in prophase I, as homologous chromosomes pair loosely along their lengths. Each gene on one homolog is aligned precisely with the corresponding gene on the other homolog. In a single crossover event, specific proteins orchestrate an exchange of corresponding segments of two nonsister chromatids-one maternal and one paternal chromatid ofa homologous pair. In this way, crossing over produces chromosomes with new combinations of maternal and paternal alleles (see Figure 13. I2). In humans and most other organisms studied so far, crossing over also plays an essential role in the lining up ofhomologous chromosomes during metaphase I. As seen in Figure 13.8, a chiasma forms as the result of a crossover occurring while sister chromatid cohesion is present along the arms. Chiasmata hold homologs together as the spindle forms for the first meiotic division. During anaphase I, the release of cohesion along sister chromatid arms allows homologs to separate. During anaphase II, the release ofsister chromatid cohesion at the centromeres allows the sister chromatids to separate. At metaphase II, chromosomes that contain one or more recombinantchromatids can be oriented in two alternative, nonequivalent ways with respect to other chromosomes, because their sister chromatids are no longer identical. The different possible arrangements of nonidentical sister chromatids dur-

ing meiosis II further increases the number of genetic types of daughter cells that can result from meiosis. You will learn more about crossing over in Chapter 15. The important point for now is that crossing over, by combining DNA inherited from two parents into asinglechromosome, is an important source of genetic variation in sexual life cycles.

Random Fertilization The random nature of fertilization adds to the genetic vari· ation arising from meiosis. In humans, each male and fe23 male gamete represents one of about 8.4 million (2 ) possible chromosome combinations due to independent assortment. The fusion of a male gamete with a female gamete during fertilization will produce a zygote with any of about 70 trillion (2 23 x 223 ) diploid combinations. If we factor in the variation brought about by crossing over, the number of possibilities is truly astronomical. It may sound trite, but you really are unique.

Nonsist~r chromatids h~ld tog~ther

Prophas~ I of m~iosis

during synapsis

--''-'';:0-/

Pair of homologs

o Inand crossingtoversynapsis prophas~

occur; then homologs mov~ apart slightly.

Chiasma. site of crossing

f.) Chiasmata and atlachm~nts between sister chromatids hold homologs together; they move to the metaphase I plate,

over

Centromere

o Breakdown of holding sister chroma·

prot~ins

IEM

Anaphase [

tid arms together allows homologs with recombinant chromatids to separate,

Anaphase II

Daughter cells Recombinant chromosomes

... Figure 13.12 The results of crossing over during meiosis. CHAPTE~ THIRTEEN

Meiosis and Sexual Life Cycles

259

The Evolutionary Significance of Genetic Variation Within Populations Now that you've learned how new combinations of genes arise among offspring in a sexually reproducing population, let's see how the genetic variation in a population relates to evolution. Darwin recognized that a population evolves through the differential reproductive success of its variant members. On average, those individuals best suited to the local environment leave the most offspring, thus transmitting their genes. This natural selection re· suits in the accumulation of those genetic variations favored by the environment. As the environment changes, the population may survive if, in each generation, at least some of its members can cope effectively with the new conditions. Different combinations of alleles may work better than those that previously prevailed. Mutations are the original source of different alleles, which are then mixed and matched during meiosis. In this chapter, we have seen how sexual reproduction greatly increases the genetic variation present in a population. In fact, the ability of sexual reproduction to generate genetic variation is one of the most commonly proposed explanations for the persistence of sexual reproduction.

-W ]f.- Go to the Study Area at www.masteringbio.(om for BioFlix 3-D Animations. MP3

Tuto~.

Videos, Pr3ctke Tests. an eBook, and

mor~_


.i.III1I'_ 13.1 Offspring acquire genes from parents by inheriting chromosomes (pp. 248-249) .. Inheritance of Genes Each gene in an organism's DNA exists at a specific locus on a certain chromosome. We inherit one set of chromosomes from our mother and one set from our father. .. Comparison of Asexual and Sexual Reproduction In asexual reproduction, a single parent produces genetically identical offspring by mitosis. Sexual reproduction combines sets of genes from two different parents. forming genetically diverse offspring. Acti\ity Asexual and Sexual Life Cycles

.i.IIIII'-13.2 Fertilization and meiosis alternate in sexual life cycles (pp.250-253) .. Sets of Chromosomes in Human Cells Normal human somatic cells are diploid. They have 46 chromosomes made up 260

UNIT THREE

Genetics

Although Darwin realized that heritable variation is what makes evolution possible, he could not explain why offspring resemble-but are not identical to-their parents. Ironically, Gregor Mendel, a contemporary ofDarwin, published a theory of inheritance that helps explain genetic variation, but his discoveries had no impact on biologists until 1900, more than 15 years after Darwin (1809-1882) and Mendel (l822-1884) had died. In the next chapter, you will learn how Mendel discovered the basic rules governing the inheritance of specific traits.

CONCEPT

CHECK

13.4

1. What is the original source of all the different aneles of a gene? 2. The diploid number for fruit flies is 8, while that for grasshoppers is 46. If no crossing over took place, would the genetic variation among offspring from a given pair of parents be greater in fruit flies or grasshoppers? Explain. 3. -Q@i1 IM Under what circumstances would crossing over during meiosis not contribute to genetic variation among daughter cells? For $ugg~sted

an$w~rs,

see Appendix A.

of two sets of23-one set from each parent. In human diploid cells, there are 22 homologous pairs of autosomes, each with a maternal and a paternal homolog. The 23rd pair, the sex chromosomes, determines whether the person is female (XX) or male (XY). .. Behavior of Chromosome Sets in the Human Life Cycle At sexual maturity, ovaries and testes (the gonads) produce haploid gametes by meiosis, each gamete containing a Single set of 23 chromosomes (n == 23). During fertilization, an egg and sperm unite, forming a diploid (2n = 46) singlecelled zygote, which develops into a multicellular organism by mitosis. .. The Variety of Sexual life Cycles Sexual life cycles differ in the timing of meiosis relative to fertilization and in the point(s) of the cycle at which a multicellular organism is produced by mitosis.

.ill"I'-13.3 Meiosis reduces the number of chromosome sets from diploid 10 haploid (pp. 253-258) .. The Stages of Meiosis The two cell divisions of meiosis produce four haploid daughter cells. The number of chromosome sets is reduced from two (diploid) to one (haploid) during meiosis I, the reductional division. .. A Comparison of Mitosis and Meiosis Meiosis is distinguished from mitosis by three events of meiosis I, as shown on the next page:

Prophase [: EilCh homologous pa,r undergoes sYT1~psis ~nd crossmg over l>elween nClnSJster chrom~1lds

Metaphase I: Chromosomes line up ~s homologous pairs o (W) x

1/, (Rr) = '/..

~x~x~

=~6

~x~x~

=~6

~x~x~

=~6

~x~x~

=~6

Chance of at least rwo recessive traits

=

6/'6

or'h

With practice, you'll be able to solve genetics problems faster by using the rules of probability than by filling in Punnett squares. We cannot predict with certainty the exact numbers ofprogeny ofdifferent genotypes resulting from a genetic cross. But the rules ofprobability give us the chance ofvarious outcomes. Usually, the larger the sample size, the closer the results will conform to our predictions. The reason Mendel counted so many offspring from his crosses is that he understood this statistical feature of inheritance and had a keen sense ofthe rules ofchance. CONCEPT

CHECK

alleles, one completely dominant and the other completely recessive" But these conditions are not met by all heritable characters, and the relationship between genotype and phenotype is rarely so simple. Mendel himself realized that he could not explain the more complicated patterns he observed in crosses involving other pea characters or other plant species. This does not diminish the utility of Mendelian genetics (also called Mendelism), however, because the basic principles of segregation and independent assortment apply even to more complex patterns of inheritance. In this section, we will extend Mendelian genetics to hereditary patterns that were not reported by Mendel.

Extending Mendelian Genetics for a Single Gene The inheritance ofcharacters determined by a single gene deviates from simple Mendelian patterns when alleles are not completely dominant or recessive, when a particular gene has more than two alleles, or when a single gene produces multiple phenotypes. We will describe examples of each of these situations in this section.

14.2

I. For any gene with a dominant allele C and recessive allele c, what proportions of the offspring from a CC x Cc cross are expected to be homozygous dominant, homozygous recessive, and heterozygous? 2, An organism with the genotype BbDD is mated to one with the genotype BBDd. Assuming independent assortment of these two genes, write the genotypes of all possible offspring from this cross and use the rules of probability to calculate the chance of each genotype occurring. 3. Three characters (flower color, seed color, and pod shape) are considered in a cross between two pea plants (Pp Yyfi x pp Yyii). \Vhat fraction ofoffspring would be predicted to be homozygous recessive for at least two of the three characters?

_MU'I.


r~~"~":~;:n::~~tterns

are often more complex than predicted by simple Mendelian genetics

In the 20th century, geneticists extended Mendelian principles not only to diverse organisms, but also to patterns of inheritance more complex than those described by Mendel. Forthework that led to his lYlO laws of inheritance, Mendel chose pea plant characters that turn out to have a relatively simple genetic basis: Each character is determined byone gene, for which there are only two

Degrees of Dominance Alleles can show different degrees of dominance and recessiveness in relation to each other. In Mendel's classic pea crosses, the F} offspring always looked like one ofthe two parental varieties because one allele in a pair showed complete dominance over the other. In such situations, the phenotypes ofthe heterozygote and the dominant homozygote are indistinguishable. For some genes, however, neither allele is completely dominant, and the F1 hybrids have a phenotype somewhere benveen those of the two parental varieties. This phenomenon, called incomplete dominance, is seen when red snapdragons are crossed with white snapdragons: All the FI hybrids have pink flowers, as shown in Figure 14.100n the next page. This third phenotype results from flowers ofthe heterozygotes having less red pigment than the red homozygotes (unlike the situation in Mendel's pea plants, where the Pp heterozygotes make enough pigment for the flowers to be a purple color indistinguishable from that of PP plants). At first glance, incomplete dominance of either allele seems to provide evidence for the blending hypothesis of inheritance, which would predict that the red or white trait could never be retrieved from the pink hybrids. In fact, interbreeding F] hybrids produces F2 offspring with a phenotypic ratio of one red to two pink to one white. (Because heterozygotes have a separate phenotype, the genotypic and phenotypic ratios for the F2 generation are the same, 1:2:1.) The segregation of the red-flower and white-flower alleles in the

• There is one exception, Geneticists ha\'e found that Mendel's pod·shape character is actually determined by two genes.

(H"'PH~ fOURTEEN

Mendel and the Gene Idea

271

dominance. Rather, both M and N phenotypes are exhibited by heterozygotes, since both molecules are present.

The Relationship Between Dominance and Phenotype

Sperm

'Il@'he

.. Figure 14.10 Incomplete dominance in snapdragon color. When red snapdragons are crossed with white ones, the F, hybrids have pink flowers Segregation of alleles into gametes of the F, plants results in an Fz generation with a 1:2: 1 ratio for both genotype and phenotype, The letter C with a superscript indicates an allele for flower color: CR for red and CW for white. Suppose a classmate argues thaI this figure supports the blending hypothesis for inheritance. What might your classmate say, and how would you respond)

D

gametes produced by the pink-flowered plants confirms that the alleles for flower color are heritable factors that maintain their identity in the hybrids; that is, inheritance is particulate. Another variation on dominance relationships between alleles is called codominance; in this variation, the two alleles both affect the phenotype in separate, distinguishable ways. For example, the human MN blood group is determined by codominant alleles for two specific molecules located on the surface of red blood cells, the M and N molecules. A single gene locus, at which m'o allelic variations are possible, determines the phenotype of this blood group. Individuals homozygous for the M allele (MM) have red blood cells with only M molecules; individuals homozygous for the N allele (NN) have red blood cells with only N molecules. But both M and N molecules are present on the red blood cells of individuals heterozygous for the M and N alleles (MN). Note that the MN phenotype is not intermediate between the M and N phenotypes, which distinguishes codominance from incomplete 272

UNIT THREE

Genetics

We've now seen that the relative effects ofm'o alleles range from complete dominance of one allele, through incomplete dominance ofeither allele, to codominance ofboth alleles. It is important to understand that an allele is not termed dominant because it somehow subdues a recessive allele. Recall that alleles are simply variations in a gene's nucleotide sequence. \VIlen a dominant allele coexists with a recessive allele in a heterozygote, they do not actually interact at all. It is in the pathway from genotype to phenotype that dominance and recessiveness come into play. To illustrate the relationship between dominance and phenotype, we can use one of the characters Mendel studied-round versus wrinkled pea seed shape. The dominant allele (round) codes for an enzyme that helps convert an unbranched form of starch to a branched form in the seed. The recessive allele (wrinkled) codes for a defective form ofthis enzyme, leading to an accumulation of unbranched starch, which causes excess water to enter the seed by osmosis. Later, when the seed dries, it wrinkles. If a dominant allele is present, no excess water enters the seed and it does not wrinkle when it dries. One dominant allele results in enough of the enzyme to synthesize adequate amounts of branched starch, which means dominant homozygotes and heterozygotes have the same phenotype: round seeds. A closer look at the relationship between dominance and phenotype reveals an intriguing fact: For any character, the ob~ served dominant/recessive relationship of alleles depends on the level at which we examine phenotype. Tay-Sachs disease, an inherited disorder in humans, provides an example. The brain cells ofa child with Tay-Sachs disease cannot metabolize certain lipids because a crucial enzyme does not work properly. As these lipids accumulate in brain cells, the child begins to suffer seizures, blindness, and degeneration of motor and mental performance and dies within a few years. Only children who inherit two copies of the Tay-Sacl1S allele (homozygotes) have the disease. Thus, at the organismal level, the Tay-Sachs allele qualifies as recessive. However, the activity level of the lipid-metabolizing enzyme in heterozygotes is intermediate bem'een that in individuals homozygous for the normal allele and that in individuals with Tay-Sachs disease. The intermediate phenotype observed at the biocltemicallevel is characteristic of incomplete dominance of either allele. Fortunately, the heterozygote condition does not lead to disease symptoms, apparently because half the normal enzyme activity is sufficient to prevent lipid accumulation in the brain. Extendingouranalysis to yet another level, we find that heterozygous individuals produce equal nwnbers of normal and dysfunctional enzyme molecules. Thus, at the molecular level, the normal allele and the Tay-Sachs allele are codominant. As you can see, whether alleles appear to be completely dominant, incompletely dominant, or codominant depends on the level at which the phenotype is analyzed.

Frequency of Dominant Alleles Although you might assume that the dominant allele for a particular character would be more common in a population than the recessive allele for that character, this is not ne5' direction. c. produces Okazaki fragments. d. depends on the action of DNA polymerase. e. does not require a template strand.

Activity DNA Packing

7. The spontaneous loss of amino groups from adenine results in

TESTING YOUR KNOWLEDGE SELF-QUIZ L In his work with pneumonia-causing bacteria and mice, Griffith found that a. the protein coat from pathogenic cells was able to transform nonpathogenic cells. b. heat-killed pathogenic cells caused pneumonia. c. some substance from pathogenic cells was transferred to nonpathogenic cells, making them pathogenic. d. the polysaccharide coat of bacteria caused pneumonia. e. bacteriophages injected DNA into bacteria.

2. E. coli cells grown on 15N medium are transferred to

I"N

medium and allowed to grow for two more generations (two rounds of DNA replication). DNA extmcted from these cells is centrifuged. What density distribution of DNA would you expect in this experiment? a. one high-density and one low-density band b. one intermediate-density band c. one high-density and one intermediate-density band d. one low-density and one intermediate-density band e. one low-density band 3. A biochemist isolates and purifies molecules needed for DNA replication. When she adds some DNA, replication occurs, but

hypoxanthine, an uncommon base, opposite thymine in DNA. \'(fhat combination of molecules could repair such damage? a. nuclease, DNA polymerase, DNA ligase b. telomerase, primase, DNA polymerase c. telomerase, helicase, single-strand binding protein d. DNA ligase, replication fork proteins, adenylyl cyclase e. nuclease, telomerase, primase

8. In a nucleosome, the DNA is wrapped around a. polymerase molecules. b. ribosomes. c. histones.

d. a thymine dimer. e. satellite DNA.

For Self-Qui: answers, see Appendix A.

-t,j4ol,.• Visit the Study Area at www.masteringbio.comfora Practice Test.

EVOLUTION CONNECTION 9. Some bacteria may be able to respond to environmental stress by increasing the rate at which mutations occur during cell division. How might this be accomplished? Might there be an evolutionary advantage of this ability? Explain.

SCIENTIFIC INQUIRY

each DNA molecule consists of a normal strand paired with numerous segments of DNA a few hundred nucleotides long. What has she probably left out of the mixture? a. DNA polymerase d. Okazaki fragments b. DNA ligase e. primase c. nucleotides 4. What is the basis for the difference in how the leading and lagging strands of DNA molecules are synthesized? a. The origins of replication occur only at the 5' end. b. Helicases and single-strand binding proteins work at the 5' end. c. DNA polymerase can join new nucleotides only to the 3' end of a grOWing strand. d. DNA ligase works only in the 3'---05' direction. e. Polymerase can work on only one strand at a time. 5. In analyzing the number of different bases in a DNA sample, which result would be consistent with the base-pairing rules? a.A=G d.A=C b.A+G=C+T e. G=T c.A+T=G+T

324

UNIT THREE

Genetics

10. •• Uji,iAII Model building can be an important part of the scientific process. The illustration above is a computergenerated model of a DNA replication complex. The parental and newly synthesized DNA strands are color-coded differently, as are each of the following three proteins: DNA pol III, the sliding clamp, and single-strand binding protein. Use what you've learned in this chapter to clarify this model by labeling each DNA strand and each protein and showing the overall direction of DNA replication.

FromG n to Prot KEY

CONCEPTS

17.1 Genes specify proteins via transcription and translation 17.2 Transcription is the DNA·directed synthesis of RNA: a closer look 17.3 Eukaryotic cells modify RNA after transcription 17.4 Translation is the RNA-directed synthesis of a polypeptide: a closer look

17.5 Point mutations can affect protein structure and function 17.6 While gene expression differs among the domains of life, the concept of a gene is universal

r;;::;·~~::·of Genetic Information

I

n 2006, a young albino deer seen frolicking with several

brown deer in the mountains of eastern Germany

elicited a public outcry (Figure 17.1). A local hunting organization said the albino deer suffered from a "genetic disorder~ and should be shot. Some people felt the deer should merely be prevented from mating with other deer in order to safeguard the gene pool of the population. Others favored relocating the albino deer to a nature reserve because they worried that it might be more noticeable to predators if left in the wild. A German rock star even held a benefit concert to raise funds for the relocation. What led to the striking phenotype of this deer, the cause of this lively debate? You learned in Chapter 14 that inherited traits are determined by genes and that the trait of albinism is caused by a recessive allele ofa pigmentation gene. The information content of genes is in the form of specific sequences of nucleotides along strands of DNA, the genetic material. But how does this information determine an organism's traits? Put another way, what does a gene actually say? And how is its

... Figure 17.1 How does a single faulty gene result in the dramatic appearance of an albino deer?

message translated by cells into a specific trait, such as brown hair, type A blood, or, in the case of an albino deer, a total lack of pigment? The albino deer has a faulty version of a key protein, an enzyme required for pigment synthesis, and this protein is faulty because the gene that codes for it contains incorrect information. This example illustrates the main point ofthis chapter: The DNA inherited by an organism leads to specific traits by dictating the synthesis of proteins and of RNA molecules involved in protein synthesis. In other words, proteins are the link between genotype and phenotype. Gene expression is the process by which DNA directs the synthesis of proteins (or, in some cases, just RNAs). The expression of genes that code for proteins includes two stages: transcription and translation. This chapter describes the flow of information from gene to protein in detail and explains how genetic mutations affect organisms through their proteins. Gene expression involves similar processes in all three domains of life. Understanding these processes will allow us to revisit the concept of the gene in more detail at the end of the chapter.

r~:~:s'::~f: proteins via

transcription and translation

Before going into the details of how genes direct protein synthesis, let's step back and examine how the fundamental relationship between genes and proteins was discovered.

Evidence from the Study of Metabolic Defects In 1909, British physician Archibald Garrod was the first to suggest that genes dictate phenotypes through enzymes that

325

catalyze specific chemical reactions in the cell. Garrod postulated that the symptoms of an inherited disease reflect a person's inability to make a particular enzyme. He referred to such diseases as "inborn errors of metabolism." Garrod gave as one example the hereditary condition called alkaptonuria, in which the urine is black because it contains the chemical alkapton, which darkens upon exposure to air. Garrod reasoned that most people have an enzyme that metabolizes alkapton, whereas people with alkaptonuria have inherited an inability to make that enzyme. Garrod may have been the first person to recognize that Mendel's principles of heredity apply to humans as well as peas. Garrod's realization was ahead of its time, but research conducted several decades later supported his hypothesis that a gene dictates the production ofa specific enzyme. Biochemists accumulated much evidence that cells synthesize and degrade most organic molecules via metabolic pathways, in which each chemical reaction in a sequence is catalyzed by a specific enzyme (see p. 142). Such metabolic pathways lead, for instance, to the synthesis of the pigments that give fruit flies (Drosophila) their eye color (see Figure 15.3). In the 193Os, George Beadle and Boris Ephrussi speculated that in Drosophila, each of the various mutations affecting eye color blocks pigment synthesis at a specific step by preventing production of the enzyme that catalyzes that step. However, neither the chemical reactions nor the enzymes that catalyze them were known at the time.

growing on complete medium and distributed them to a number of different vials. Each vial contained minimal medium plus a single additional nutrient. The particular supplement that allowed growth indicated the metabolic defect. For example, if the only supplemented vial that supported growth of the mutant was the one fortified with the amino acid arginine, the researchers could conclude that the mutant was defective in the biochemical pathway that wild-type cells use to synthesize arginine. Beadle and Tatum went on to pin down each mutant's defect more specifically. Figure 17.2 shows how they used additional tests to distinguish among three classes of argininerequiring mutants. Mutants in each class required a different set of compounds along the arginine-synthesizing pathway, which has three steps. Based on their results, the researchers reasoned that each class must be blocked at a different step in this pathway because mutants in that class lacked the enzyme that catalyzes the blocked step. Because each mutant was defective in a single gene, Beadle and Tatum's results provided strong support for the one gene-one enzyme hypothesis, as they dubbed it, which states that the function ofa gene is to dictate the production ofa specific enzyme. Further support for this hypothesis came from experiments that identified the specific enzymes lacking in the mutants. Beadle and Tatum shared a Nobel Prize in 1958 for "their discovery that genes act by regulating definite chemical events" (in the words of the Nobel committee).

Nutritional Mutants in Neurospora: Scientific Inquiry

The Products of Gene Expression: A Developing Story

A breakthrough in demonstrating the relationship between genes and enzymes came a few years later, when Beadle and Edward Tatum began working with a bread mold, Neurospora crassa. Using a treatment shown in the 1920s to cause genetic changes, they bombarded Neurospora with X-rays and then looked among the survivors for mutants that differed in their nutritional needs from the wild-type mold. \Vild-type Neurospora has modest food requirements. It can survive in the laboratory on a moist support medium called agar, mixed only with inorganic salts, glucose, and the vitamin biotin. From this minimal medium, the mold cells use their metabolic pathways to produce all the other molecules they need. Beadle and Tatum identified mutants that could not survive on minimal medium, apparently because they were unable to synthesize certain essential molecules from the minimal ingredients. To ensure survival of these nutritional mutants, Beadle and Tatum allowed them to grow on a completegrowth medium, which consisted of minimal medium supplemented with all 20 amino acids and a few other nutrients. The complete growth medium could support any mutant that couldn't synthesize one of the supplements. To characterize the metabolic defect in each nutritional mutant, Beadle and Tatum took samples from the mutant

As researchers learned more about proteins, they made revisions to the one gene-one enzyme hypothesis. First of all, not all proteins are enzymes. Keratin, the structural protein of animal hair, and the hormone insulin are two examples of nonenzyme proteins. Because proteins that are not enzymes are nevertheless gene products, molecular biologists began to think in terms of one gene-one protein. However, many proteins are constructed from two or more different polypeptide chains, and each polypeptide is specified by its own gene. For example, hemoglobin, the oxygen-transporting protein of vertebrate red blood cells, is built from two kinds ofpolypeptides, and thus tv.·o genes code for this protein (see Figure 5.21). Beadle and Tatum's idea was therefore restated as the one gene-one polypeptide hypothesis. Even this description is not entirely accurate, though. First, many eukaryotic genes can code for a set ofclosely related polypeptides in a process called alternative splicing, which you will learn about later in this chapter. Second, quite a few genes code for RNA molecules that have important functions in cells even though they are never translated into protein. For now, we will focus on genes that do code for polypeptides. (Note that it is common to refer to these gene products as proteins, rather than more precisely as polypeptides-a practice you will encounter in this book.)

326

UNIT THREE

Genetics

• FI~11.2

In ui

Do individual genes specify the enzymes that function in a biochemical pathway? EXPERIMENT Working with the mold Neurospora craS5il, George Beadle and Edward Tatum, then at Stanford University, isolated mutants that required arginine in their growth medium. The researchers showed that these mutants fell into three classes, each defective in a different gene. From other considerations, they suspected that the metabolic pathway of arginine biosynthesis involved a precursor nutrient and the intermediate molecules ornithine and citrulline, Their most famous experiment, shown here, tested both their one gene-one enzyme hypothesIs and their postulated arginine-synthesizing pathway. In this experiment, they grew their three classes of mutants under the four different conditions shown in the Results section below. They included minimal medium (MM) as a control because they knew that wild-type cells could grow on MM but mutant cells could not. (See test tubes on the right.)

---1'1

Growth: Wild-type cells growing and dividing

No growth: Mutant cells cannot grow and divide

Minimal medium

Classes of Neurospora crassa RESULTS The Wild-type strain was capable of growth under all experimental Minimal conditions, requiring only the minimal medium medium. The three classes of mutants each (MM) had a specific set of growth requirements, (control) For example, class II mutants could not grow when ornithine alone was added but MM' could grow when either citrulline or < ornithine 0 arginine was added, ~

"u< 0

MM, citrulline MM, arginine (control)

Wild type

Class I mutants

Class II mutants

Class III mutants

~ ~ ~ ~

~ ~ ~ ~

~ ~ ~ ~

~ ~ ~ ~

Wild type

Class J mutants (mutation in gene A)

Class II mutants (mutation in gene B)

Class III mutants (mutation in gene C)

Precursor

Precursor

Precursor

Precursor

Can grow with or without any supplements CONCLUSION

From the growth requirements of the mutants, Beadle and Tatum deduced that each class of mutant was unable to carry out one step in the pathway for synthesizing arginine, presumably because it lacked the necessary enzyme, Because each of their mutants was mutated in a single gene, they concluded that each mutated gene must normally dictate the production of one enzyme, Their results supported the one gene-one enzyme hypothesiS and also confirmed the arginine pathway, (Notice in the Results that a mutant can grow only if supplied with a compound made after the defective step, because this bypasses the defect.)

SOURCE

GW

Be~dle ~nd

Gene A -

Gene B -

Gene C_

Can grow only on Can grow on ornithine, citrulline, citrulline or or arginine arginine

'-'

Absolutely require arginine to grow

'-'

'-'

Ornithine

Ornithine

Ornithine

Ornithine

E1>:yme B

'-"

E1xy..... B

Citrulline

Citrulline

'X'

Citrulline

'-'

Enzym. C

Eo...,...,. C

Arginine

Arginine

Arginine

'X'

Citrulline

'X'

Arginine

E L hlum. Genellc control of bi<xhemic~1 react,OI1s in Nel.lr~~,

ProceedingS of rhe N~rl(j(l~1 Academyof Xl/'!fICeS 27:499-506 (1941)

-I/@il i•

Suppose the experiment had shown that class I mutants could grow only in MM supplemented by ornithine or arginine and that class II mutants could grow in MM supplemented by citrulline, ornithine, or arginine. What conclusions would Beadle and Tatum have drawn from those results regarding the biochemical pathway and the defect in class [and class II mutants?

(~APTE~ SEVENTEEN

From Gene to Protein

327

Basic Principles ofTranscription and Translatoon Genes provide the instructions for making specific proteins.

But a gene does not build a protein directly. The bridge between DNA and protein synthesis is the nucleic add RNA. You learned in Chapter 5 that RNA is chemically similar to DNA, except that it contains ribose instead of deoxyribose as its sugar and has the nitrogenous base uracil rather than

thymine (see Figure 5.27). Thus, each nucleotide along a DNA strand has A. G. C, or T as its base. and each nucleotide along an RNA strand has A, G, C. or U as its base. An RNA molecule llSuaUy consists of a single strand. It is customary to describe the flow of information from gene to protein in linguistic terms because both nucleic acids

and proteins are polymers with specific sequences of monomers that convey information, much as specific se-

quences of letters communicate information in a language like English. In DNA or RNA, the monomers are the four types of nucleotides, which differ in their nitrogenous bases. Genes are typically hundreds or thousands of nucleotides long, each gene having a specific sequence of bases. Each polypeptide of a protein also has monomers arranged in a particular linear order (the protein's primary structure), but its monomers are amino adds. Thus, nucleic adds and proteins contain information written in two different chemical languages. Getting from DNA to protein requires two major stages: transcription and translation. Transcription is the synthesis of RNA under the direction of DNA. Both nucleic acids use the same language, and the information is simply transcribed, or copied, from one molecule to the other. Just as a DNA strand provides a template for the synthesis of a new complementary strand during DNA replication, it also can serve as a template for assembling a complementary sequence of RNA nucleotides. For a protein-coding gene, the resulting RNA molecule is a faithful transcript of the gene's protein-building instructions, in the same way that your college transcript is an accurate record of your grades, and like a transcript, it can be sent out in multiple copies. This type of RNA molecule is called messenger RNA (mRNA) because it carries a genetic message from the DNA to the protein-synthesizing machinery of the cell. (Transcription is the general term for the synthesis of any kind of RNA on a DNA template. Later in this chapter, you will learn about some other types of RNA produced by transcription.) Translation is the synthesis ofa polypeptide, which occurs under the direction of mRNA. During this stage, there is a change in language: The cell must translate the base sequence of an mRNA molecule into the amino acid sequence of a polypeptide. The sites of translation are ribosomes, complex particles that facilitate the orderly linking of amino acids into polypeptide chains.

328

UNIT TUII

Genetics

Transcription and translation occur in all organisms. Recall from Chapter I that there are three domains of life: Bacteria, Archaea, and Eukarya. Organisms in the first two domains are grouped as prokaryotes because their cells lack a membranebounded nucleus-a defining feature ofeukaryotic cells. Most studies of transcription and translation have been done on bacteria and eukaryotes, which are therefore our main focus in this chapter. Although our understanding of these processes in archaea lags behind, in the last section we will discuss a few aspects of archaeal gene expression. The basic mechanics of transcription and translation are similar for bacteria and eukaryotes, but there is an important difference in the flow ofgenetic information within the cells. Because bacteria do not have nuclei, their DNA is not segregated from ribosomes and the other protein-synthesizing equipment (Figure 17.3a). As you will see later, this lack of segregation allows translation of an mRNA to begin while its transcription is still in progress. In a eukaryotic cell, by contrast, the nuclear envelope separates transcription from translation in space and time (Figure 11.3b). Transcription occurs in the nucleus, and mRNA is transported to the cytoplasm, where translation occurs. But before they can leave the nucleus, eukaryotic RNA transcripts from protein-coding genes are modified in various ways to produce the final, functional mRNA. The transcription of a protein-coding eukaryotic gene results in pre-mRNA, and further processing yields the finished mRNA. The initial RNA transcript from any gene, including those coding for RNA that is not translated into protein, is more generally called a primary transcript. Let's summarize: Genes program protein synthesis via genetic messages in the form of messenger RNA. Put another way, cells are governed by a molecular chain ofcommand with a directional flow ofgenetic information: DNA ---+ RNA ---+ protein. This concept was dubbed the central dogma by Francis Crick in 1956. How has the concept held up over time? In the 19705, scientists were surprised to discover that some RNA molecules can act as templates for DNA, a process you1l read about in Chapter 19. However, this rare exception does not invalidate the idea that, in general, genetic information flows from DNA to RNA to protein. In the next section, we discuss how the instructions for assembling amino acids intoa specific order are encoded in nucleic acids.

The Genetic Code When biologists began to suspect that the instructions for protein synthesis were encoded in DNA, they recognized a problem: There arc only four nucleotide bases to specify 20 amino acids. Thus, the genetic code cannot be a language like Chinese, where each written symbol corresponds to a word. How many bases, then, correspond to an amino acid?

r

, ' ".'/ , ' ".'/ , ' ".'/ ,' /r/".'/

j

I

iRANSCRI'iJON

DNA

~

.

!

mRNA

~s:me

I TRANSLATION I ~.;,,~ Polypeptide

(al Bacterial cell. In a badenal cell, whICh lacks a nucleus, mRNA produced by transcription is

immediately translated without additional processing.

// / / // // //

I TRANSCRIPTION I

I

DNA

in each position, this would give us 16 (that is, 4 2) possible arrangements-still not enough to code for all 20 amino acids. Triplets of nucleotide bases are the smallest units of uniform length that can code for all the amino acids. If each arrangement of three consecutive bases specifies an amino acid, there can be 64 (that is, 43) possible code words-more than enough to specify all the amino acids. Experiments have verified that the flow of information from gene to protein is based on a triplet code: TIle genetic instructions for a polypeptide chain are written in the DNA as a series of nonoverlapping, three-nucleotide words. For example, the base triplet AGT at a particular position along a DNA strand results in the placement of the amino acid serine at the corresponding position of the polypeptide being produced. During transcription, the gene determines the sequence of bases along the length of an mRNA molecule (Figure 17.4). For each gene, only one ofthe two DNA strands is transcribed. This strand is called the template strand because it provides the pattern, or template, for the sequence of nucleotides in an RNA transcript. A given DNA strand is the template strand for some genes along a DNA molecule, while for other genes the complementary strand functions as the template. Note that

~ Pre-mRNA RNA PROCESSING

I

I

I

~~ mRNA

DNA~

Gene 2

mo'"," ~Gene 1

I TRANSLATION I

:\7\

Ribosome

~,~

DNA template 3' strand~

S'

S'

3'

J

(b) Eukaryotic cell. The nucleus provides a separate compartment for transcription. The original RNA transcript, called pre-mRNA. is processed in various ways before leaving the nucleus as mRNA.

.. Figure 17.3 Overview: the roles of traMCl'iption and translation in the flow of genetic information. In a cell. inherned information flows from DNA to RNA to protein. The two main stages of information flow are transcription and translation. A miniature version of part (a) or (b) accompanies several figures later in tile cilapter as an orientation diagram to ilelp you see wilere a particular figure fits into tile overall scileme

Codons: Triplets of Bases If each nucleotide base were translated into an amino acid, only 4 of the 20 amino acids could be specified. Would a language of two-letter code words suffice? The two-base sequence AG, for example, could specify one amino acid, and GT could specify another. Since there are four possible bases

3'

mRNA Codon TRANSLATION

j

j

j

j

Protein Amino acid

... Figure 17.4 The triplet code. For each gene, one DNA strand functions as a template for transcription. The base-pairing rules for DNA synthesis also guide transcription, but uracil (U) takes the place of thymine (T) in RNA. During translation, the mRNA is read as a sequence of base triplets. called codons. Each codon specifies an amino acid to be added to the growing polypeptide chain. The mRNA is read in the 5' > 3' direction.

C~APTE~ SEVENTEEN


329

for a particular gene, the same strand is used as the template every time it is transcribed. An mRNA molecule is complementary rather than identi~ cal to its DNA template because RNA bases are assembled on the template according to base~pairing rules. The pairs are similar to those that form during DNA replication, except that U, the RNA substitute for T, pairs with A and the mRNA nucleotides contain ribose instead of deoxyribose. Like a new strand of DNA, the RNA molecule is synthesized in an antiparallel direction to the template strand of DNA. (To review what is meant by ~antiparallel" and the 5' and 3' ends of a nucleic acid chain, see Figure 16.7.) For example, the base triplet ACC along the DNA (written as 3'-ACC-5') provides a template for 5'-UGG-3' in the mRNA molecule. The mRNA base triplets are called codons, and they are customarily written in the 5' -~ 3' direction. In our example, UGG is the codon for the amino acid tryptophan (abbreviated Trp). The term codon is also used for the DNA base triplets along the nontemplate strand. These codons are complementary to the template strand and thus identical in sequence to the mRNA except that they have T instead of U. (For this reason, the nontemplate DNA strand is sometimes called the ~coding strand.~) During translation, the sequence ofcodons along an mRNA molecule is decoded, or translated, into a sequence of amino acids making up a polypeptide chain. The codons are read by the translation machinery in the 5' ---+ 3' direction along the mRNA. Each codon specifies which one of the 20 amino acids will be incorporated at the corresponding position along a polypeptide. Because codons are base triplets, the number of nucleotides making up a genetic message must be three times the number of amino acids in the protein product. For example, it takes 300 nucleotides along an mRNA strand to code for the amino acids in a polypeptide that is 100 amino acids long.

Cracking the Code Molecular biologists cracked the code of life in the early 1960s when a series of elegant experiments disclosed the amino acid translations of each of the RNA codons. The first codon was deciphered in 1961 by Marshall Nirenberg, ofthe National In~ stitutes of Health, and his colleagues. Nirenberg synthesized an artificial mRNA by linking identical RNA nucleotides containing uracil as their base. No matter where this message started or stopped, it could contain only one codon in repetition: VVV. Nirenberg added this ~poly-V~ to a test-tube mixture containing amino acids, ribosomes, and the other components required for protein synthesis. His artificial system translated the poly-V into a polypeptide containing many units of the amino acid phenylalanine (Phe), strung together as a long polyphenylalanine chain. Thus, Nirenberg determined that the mRNA codon UUV specifies the amino acid phenylalanine. Soon, the amino acids specified by the codons AAA, GGG, and CCC were also determined. 330

UNIT THREE

Genetics

Second mRNA base

UUU J Ph' UUC

UAU J UA( Tyr

UGU J C" UGC

UUA J l," UUG

UAA Stop UGA Stop UAG Stop UGG T,p

C

C

0

0

~

0 u

'0 ~

c

• •••

10 ~

< z

=E •

•

(AU J His CAC

~

CGU] CGC CGA Arg

-

ceG

CAA] Glo CAG

CGG

•

ACU ] Ace

AAU J ,",0 AAC

AGUJ S" AGC

CCU ] cec ceA

ACA

Pm

Th'

ACG

AM] Ly, MG

AGA] A 3') in the groups of three shown in the figure:.llii.G..!1!.!!.! GQ.C!.KA. Although a genetic message is written with no spaces between the codons, the cell's protein-synthesizing machinery reads the message as a series of nonoverlapping three-letter words. The message is not read as a series of overlapping words-llG.G.UUU, and so on-which would convey a very different message.

have produced many exciting developments in the area of biotechnology (see Chapter 20). Exceptions to the universality of the genetic code include translation systems in which a few codons differ from the standard ones. Slight variations in the genetic code exist in certain unicellular eukaryotes and in the organelle genes of some species. There are also exceptions in which stop codons can be translated into one of two amino acids not found in most organisms. Although one of these amino acids (pyrrolysine) has been detected thus far only in archaea, the other (selenocysteine) is a component ofsome bacterial proteins and even some human enzymes. Despitetheseexceptions, the evolutionarysignificance of the code's near universality is dear. A language shared by all living things must have been operating very early in the history oflife-early enough to be present in the common ancestor of all present·day organisms. A shared genetic vocabulary is a reminder of the kinship that bonds all life on Earth.

Evolution of the Genetic Code The genetic code is nearly universal, shared by organisms from the simplest bacteria to the most complex plants and animals. The RNA codon CCG, for instance, is translated as the amino acid proline in all organisms whose genetic code has been examined. In laboratory experiments, genes can be transcribed and translated after being transplanted from one species to another, sometimes with quite striking results, as shown in Figure 17.6! Bacteria can be programmed by the insertion of human genes to synthesize certain human proteins for medical use, such as insulin. Such applications

CONCEPT

CHECK

17.1

1. What polypeptide product would you expect from a poly-G mRNA that is 30 nudeotides long? 2.••p.W"1 The template strand of a gene contains the sequence 3'-TTCAGTCGT-5'. Draw the nontemplate sequence and the mRNA sequence, indicating 5' and 3' ends of each. Compare the two sequences. Imagine that the nontemplate sequence 3. in question 2 was transcribed instead of the template sequence. Draw the mRNA sequence and translate it using Figure 17.5. (Be sure to pay attention to the 5' and 3' ends.) Predict how well the protein synthesized from the nontemplate strand would function, if at alL

_','!l0'1,.


r;~:~sjc'r~p~~~~s the

DNA-directed synthesis of RNA: a closer look

(a) Tobacco plant expressing a firefly gene. The yellow glow is produced by a chemical readion catalyzed by the protein produd of the firefly gene.

(b) Pig expressing a jellyfish gene. Researchers injected the gene for a fluorescent protem into fertilized pig eggs One of the eggs developed into this fluorescent pig.

... Figure 17.6 Expression of genes from different species. Because di~erse forms of life share a common genetic code. one species can be programmed to produce proteins characteristic of a second species by introducing DNA from the second species into the first.

Now that we have considered the linguistic logic and evolutionary significance of the genetic code, we are ready to reexamine transcription, the first stage of gene expression, in more detail.

Molecular Components ofTranscription Messenger RNA, the carrier of information from DNA to the cell's protein-synthesizing machinery, is transcribed from the template strand of a gene. An enzyme called an RNA polymerase pries the two strands of DNA apart and joins the RNA nucleotides as they base-pair along the DNA (~APH~ SEVENTEEN


331

template (Figure 17.7). Like the DNA polymerases that function in DNA replication, RNA polymerases can assemble a polynucleotide only in its 5' -. 3' direction. Unlike DNA polymerases, however, RNA polymerases are able to start a chain from scratch; they don't need a primer. Spedfic sequences of nucleotides along the DNA mark where transcription of a gene begins and ends. The DNA se· quence where RNA polymerase attaches and initiates tran· scription is known as the promoter; in bacteria, the sequence that signals the end of transcription is called the terminator. (The termination mechanism is different in eukaryotes; we'll describe it later.) Molecular biologists refer to the direction of transcription as ~downstream" and the other direction as "up_ stream." These terms are also used to describe the positions of nucleotide sequences within the DNA or RNA. Thus, the pro-

Promoter

Transcription unit

=(:=~~::::::;;;::===:=_ ~ Start point RNA polymerase

DNA

3' 5'

obindsInitiation. After RNA polymerase to the promoter, the DNA strands unwind. and the polymerase initiates RNA synthesIs at the start point on the template strand.

5' 3'

Synthesis of an RNA Transcript The three stages of transcription, as shown in Figure 17.7 and described next, are initiation, elongation, and termination of the RNA chain. Study Figure 17.7 to familiarize yourself with the stages and the terms used to describe them.

,----'---5' 3'

moter sequence in DNA is said to be upstream from the terminator. The stretch of DNA that is transcribed into an RNA molecule is called a transcription unit. Bacteria have a single type of RNA polymerase that synthesizes not only mRNA but also other types of RNA that function in protein synthesis, such as ribosomal RNA. In con· trast, eukaryotes have at least three types of RNA polymerase in their nuclei. The one used for mRNA synthesis is called RNA polymerase II. The other RNA polymerases transcribe RNA molecules that are not translated into protein. In the discussion of transcription that follows, we start with the features of mRNA synthesis common to both bacteria and eukaryotes and then describe some key differences.

RNA Polymerase Binding and Initiation of Transcription The promoter of a gene includes within it the transcription start point (the nucleotide where RNA synthesis actually begins) and typically extends several dozen nucleotide pairs

Elongation

~,,~=:\~~==::;:i==~~l: j _ ....\

Unwound

.------...

RNA Template strand transcript of DNA

RNA

DNA

polymerase

f) Elongation. The polymerase moves downstream. unwinding the DNA and elongating the RNA transcript 5' -; 3'. In the wake of transcription, the DNA strands re-form a double helix. Rewound D~

5' 3'

3'

5'

~~~=3'

5'

5'

RNA

transcript

f) Termination. Eventually. the RNA transcript is released. and the polymerase detaches from the DNA.

5' 3'

Nontemplate strand of DNA

= ~===~_3'5' S ' _....~ ~ ~

Completed RNA transcript

332

UNIT THREE Genetics

3'

5'

•

Direction of transcription ("downstream")

Template strand of DNA

.. Figure 17.7 The stages of transcription: initiation, elongation. and termination. This general depiction of transcription applies to both bacteria and eukaryotes. but the details of termination differ. as described in the te)(!. Also. in a bacterium. the RNA transcript is immediately usable as mRNA; in a eukaryote. the RNA transcript must first undergo processing.

upstream from the start point. In addition to serving as a binding site for RNA polymerase and determining where transcription starts, the promoter determines which of the two strands of the DNA helix is used as the template. Certain sections of a promoter are especially important for binding RNA polymerase. In bacteria, the RNA polymerase itselfspecifically recognizes and binds to the promoter. In eukaryotes, a collection of proteins called transcription factors mediate the binding of RNA polymerase and the initiation of transcription. Recall from Chapter 16 that the DNA ofa eukaryotic chromosome is complexed with histones and other proteins in the form of chromatin. The roles of these proteins in making the DNA accessible to transcription factors will be discussed in Chapter 18. Only after certain transcription factors are attached to the promoter does RNA polymerase II bind to it. The whole complex of transcription factors and RNA polymerase II bound to the promoter is called a transcription initiation complex. Figure 17.8 shows the role of transcription factors and a crucial promoter DNA sequence called a TATA box in forming the initiation complex at a eukaryotic promoter. The interaction between eukaryotic RNA polymerase II and transcription factors is an example of the importance of protein-protein interactions in controlling eukaryotic transcription. Once the polymerase is firmly attached to the promoter DNA, the two DNA strands unwind there, and the enzyme starts transcribing the template strand.

o commonly A eukaryotk promoter includes a TATA box. a nucleotide sequence containing TATA. about 25 nucleotides upstream from

~~~r:t;;

[

_

lAANS""O:«~

"" '-------'::.:.-"'promoter

~:~~~~m~;;~~' ~! TATA box

Termination of Transcription TIle mechanism of termination differs between bacteria and eukaryotes. In bacteria, transcription proceeds through a terminator sequence in the DNA. The transcribed terminator

"

~5'

Start point

Template DNA strand

e Several transcription

Transcription

~

factors, one recognizing the TATA box. must bind to the DNA before RNA polymerase II can do so

;~~ ==="

5'

o factors Additional transcription (purple) bind to

the DNA along with RNA polymerase II. forming the tranSCription initiation complex. The DNA double helix then unwinds. and RNA synthesis begins at the start point on the template strand

Elongation of the RNA Strand As RNA polymerase moves along the DNA, it continues to untwist the double helix, exposing about 10 to 20 DNA bases at a time for pairing with RNA nudeotides (see Figure 17.7). The enzyme adds nudeotides to the 3' end of the growing RNA molecule as it continues along the double helix. In the wake of this advancing wave of RNA synthesis, the new RNA molecule peels away from its DNA template and the DNA double helix re·forms. Transcription progresses at a rate of about 40 nudeotides per second in eukaryotes. A single gene can be transcribed simultaneously by several molecules of RNA polymerase following each other like trucks in a convoy. A growing strand of RNA trails off from each polymerase, with the length of each new strand reflecting how far along the template the enzyme has traveled from the start point (see the mRNA molecules in Figure 17.24). The congregation of many polymerase molecules simultaneously transcribing a single gene increases the amount of mRNA transcribed from it, which helps the cell make the encoded protein in large amounts.

the transcriptional start point. (By convention, nucleotide sequences are given as they occur on the nontemplate strand.)

RNA polymerase II

~

="

5'_ 3'===-

5'

RNA transcript Transcription initiation complex

... Figure 17.8 The initiation of transcription at a eukaryotic promoter. In eukaryotic cells. proteins called transcription factors mediate the initiation of transcription by RNA polymerase II. Explain how the interaction of RNA polymerase with the promoter would differ jf the figure showed transcription initiation for bacteria.

D

(an RNA sequence) functions as the termination signal, causing the polymerase to detach from the DNA and release the transcript, which is available for immediate use as mRNA. In eukaryotes, RNA polymerase II transcribes a sequence on the DNA called the polyadenylation signal sequence, which codes for a polyadenylation signal (AAUAAA) in the pre-mRNA. Then, at a point about 10 to 35 nucleotides downstream from (~APTE~ SEVENTEEN


333

the AAVAAA signal, proteins associated with the growing RNA transcript cut it free from the polymerase, releasing the pre-mRNA. However, the polymerase continues transcribing DNA for hundreds of nucleotides past the site where the premRNA was released. Recent research on yeast cells suggests that the RNA produced by this continued transcription is di· gested byan enzyme that moves along the RNA. The data sup· port the idea that when the enzyme reaches the polymerase, transcription is terminated and the polymerase falls off the DNA. Meanwhile, the pre-mRNA undergoes processing, the topic of the next section. CONCEPT

rior sections of the RNA molecule are cut out and the remaining parts spliced together. These modifications produce an mRNA molecule ready for translation.

Alteration of mRNA Ends Each end ofa pre-mRNA molecule is modified in a particular way (figure 17.9). The 5' end is synthesized first; it receives a S' cap, a modified form of a guanine (G) nucleotide added onto the 5' end after transcription of the first 20 to 40 nucleotides. The 3' end of the pre-mRNA molecule is also modified before the mRNA exits the nucleus. Recall that the premRNA is released soon after the polyadenylation signal, AAUAAA, is transcribed. At the 3' end, an enzyme adds 50 to 250 more adenine (A) nucleotides, forming a poly-A tail. The 5' cap and poly-A tail share several important functions. First, they seem to facilitate the export of the mature mRNA from the nucleus. Second, they help protect the mRNA from degradation by hydrolytic enzymes. And third, they help ribosomes attach to the 5' end of the mRNA once the mRNA reaches the cytoplasm. Figure 17.9 shows a diagram of a eukaryotic mRNA molecule with cap and taiL The figure also shows the untranslated regions (UTRs) at the 5' and 3' ends of the mRNA (referred to as the 5' UTR and 3' UTR). The UTRs are parts ofthe mRNA that will not be translated into protein, but they have other functions, such as ribosome binding.

17.2

CHECI(

1. Compare DNA polymerase and RNA polymerase in

terms of how they function, the requirement for a template and primer, the direction of synthesis, and the type of nucleotides used. 2, What is a promoter, and is it located at the upstream or downstream end of a transcription unit? 3. What makes RNA polymerase start transcribing a gene at the right place on the DNA in a bacterial cell? In a eukaryotic cell? 4. -'MUI 4 Suppose X-rays caused a sequence change in the TATA box of a particular gene's promoter. How would that affect transcription of the gene? (See Figure 17.8.)

Split Genes and RNA Splicing

For suggested answers, see Appendi~ A.

Aremarkable stage of RNA processing in the eukaryotic nucleus is the removal of large portions of the RNA molecule that is initially synthesized-a cut-and-paste job called RNA splicing, similar to editing a video (Figure 17.10). The average length of a transcription unit along a human DNA molecule is about 27,000 base pairs, so the primary RNA transcript is also that long. However, it takes only 1,200 nucleotides in RNA to code for the average-sized protein of 400 amino acids. (Remember, each amino acid is encoded by a triplet of nucleotides.) This means that most eukaryotic genes and their RNA transcripts have long noncoding stretches of nucleotides, regions that are not

r;:~:;;:i~~~~IS modify RNA after transcription

Enzymes in the eukaryotic nucleus modifypre-mRNA in spe· cHic ways before the genetic messages are dispatched to the cytoplasm. During this RNA processing, both ends ofthe primary transcript are altered. Also, in most cases, certain inte-

Amodified guanine nucleotide added to the 5' end

50 to 250 adenine nucleotides added to the 3' end Protein-coding segment

•

G ~

5'Cap

.... Figure 17.9 RNA processing: addition of the 5' cap and poly.A tail. Enzymes modify the two ends 0/ a eukaryotic pre-mRNA molecule, The modi/ied ends may promote the 334

UNIT THREE

Genetics

5'UTR

expon of mRNA from the nucleus. and they help protect the mRNA from degradation, When the mRNA reaches the cytoplasm, the modified ends, in conjunction with certain cytoplasmic proteins,

•

3'UTR facilitate ribosome attachment. The 5' cap and poly·A tail are nol translated inlo protein. nor are the regions called the 5' untranslated region (5' UTR) and 3' untranslaled region (3' UTR).

Intron

Exon

Exon

3'

"Po~I,--A'-=~~" '

Pre-mRNA

30

104

31

105

+

146

Iintrons cut out and exons spliced together

, Poly-A tail

mRNA 1

5' UTR ... Figure 17.10 RNA processing: RNA splicing. The RNA molecule shown here codes for l3-globin, one of the polypeptides of hemoglobin, The numbers under the RNA refer to codons; 13-globin is 146 amino acids long, The

l3-globin gene and its pre-mRNA tranSCript have three exons, corresponding to sequences that will leave the nucleus as mRNA. (The 5' UTR and 3' UTR are parts of exons because they are included in the mRNA; however, they do not code for

translated. Even more surprising is that most ofthese noncoding sequences are interspersed between coding segments of the gene and thus between coding segments ofthe pre-mRNA. In other words, the sequence of DNA nucleotides that codes for a eukaryotic polypeptide is usually not continuous; it is split into segments. The noncoding segments ofnucleic acid that lie between coding regions are called intervening sequences, or introns. The other regions are called exom, because they are eventually expressed, usually by being translated into amino acid sequences. (Exceptions include the VTRs of the exons at the ends of the RNA, which make up part ofthe mRNA but are not translated into protein. Because of these exceptions, you may find it helpful to think of exons as sequences of RNA that exit the nucleus.) The terms intron and exon are used for both RNA sequences and the DNA sequences that encode them. In making a primary transcript from agene, RNA polymerase II transcribes both introns and exons from the DNA, but the mRNA molecule that enters the cytoplasm is an abridged version. The introns are cut out from the molecule and the exons joined together, forming an mRNA molecule with a continuous coding sequence. This is the process of RNA splicing. How is pre-mRNA splicing carried out? Researchers have learned that the signal for RNA splicing is a short nucleotide sequence at each end of an intron. Particles called small nudear ribonucleoproteins, abbreviated snRNPs (pronounced ~snurps"), recognize these splice sites. As the name implies, snRNPs are located in the cell nucleus and are composed of RNA and protein molecules. The RNA in a snRNP particle is called a small nuclear RNA (snRNA); each molecule is about 150 nucleotides long. Several different snRNPs join with additional proteins to form an even larger assembly called a spliceosome, which is almost as big as a ribosome. The spliceosome interacts with certain sites along an intron, releasing the intron and joining together the two exons that flanked the intron (Figure 17.11). There is strong evidence that snRNAs catalyze these processes, as well as participating in spliceosome assembly and splice site recognition.

protein.) During RNA processing, the introns are cut out and the exons spliced together. In many genes, the introns are much larger relative to the exons than they are in the l3-globin gene. (The pre-mRNA is not drawn to scale.)

RNA transcript (pre-mRNA) """'..-

5',,"'

bon 1

Intron

_

Exon 2

o Protein ;eRNA

(

~l=!IJ ~ snRNPs

\ Spliceosome

SpllCeDsome components

Jl~

Cut-out Intron

mRNA

0

5'1 Exon 1

Exon 2

... Figure 17.11 The roles of snRNPs and spliceosomes in pre·mRNA splicing. The diagram shows only a portion of the premRNA transcript; additional introns and exons lie downstream from the ones pictured here, 0 Small nuclear ribonucleoproteins (snRNPs) and other proteins form a molecular complex called a spliceosome on a pre-mRNA molecule containing exons and introns. 6 Within the spliceosome, snRNA base-pairs with nucleotides at speCific sites along the intron. The spliceosome cuts the pre-mRNA, releasing the intron, and at the same time splices the exons together. The spliceosome then comes apart, releasing mRNA, which now contains onlyexons,

0

C~APTE~ SEVENTEEN


335

Ribozymes The idea of a catalytic role for snRNA arose from the discovery of ribozymes, RNA molecules that function as enzymes. In some organisms, RNA splicing can occur without proteins or even additional RNA molecules: The intron RNA functions as a ribozyme and catalyzes its own excision! For example, in the ciliate protist Tetrahymena, self.splicing occurs in the pro~ duction of ribosomal RNA (rRNA), a component of the or~ ganism's ribosomes. The pre-rRNA actually removes its own introns. The discovery of ribozymes rendered obsolete the idea that all biological catalysts are proteins. Three properties of RNA enable some RNA molecules to function as enzymes. First, because RNA is single-stranded, a region ofan RNA molecule may base-pair with a complementary region elsewhere in the same molecule, which gives the molecule a particular three-dimensional structure. A specific structure is essential to the catalytic function of ribozymes, just as it is for enzymatic proteins. Second, like certain amino acids in an enzymatic protein, some of the bases in RNA contain functional groups that may participate in catalysis. Third, the ability of RNA to hydrogen~bond with other nucleic acid molecules (either RNA or DNA) adds spe 3' se<juence of nucleotides in the DNA template strand for an mRNA coding for the polypeptide sequence Phe-Pro-Lys.

350

UNIT THREE

Genetics

Plays catalytic (ribozyme) roles and strUdural roles in ribosomes Primary transcript Small nuclear RNA (snRNA) For Self-Qui: answers, see Appendix A.

_t,j4o!'.M Visit the Study Area at www.masteringbio.comfora Practice Test.

EVOLUTION CONNECTION 9. The genetic code (see Figure 17.5) is rich with evolutionary implications. For instance, notice that the 20 amino acids are not randomly scattered; most amino acids are coded for by a similar set ofcodons. What evolutionary explanations can be given for this pattern? (Hint: There is one explanation relating to historical ancestry, and some less obvious ones of a "form-fitsfunction" type.)

SCIENTIFIC INQUIRY 10. Knowing that the genetic code is almost universal. a scientist uses molecular biological methods to insert the human l3-globin gene (shown in Figure 17.10) into bacterial cells. hoping the cells will express it and synthesize functionall3-globin protein. Instead, the protein produced is nonfunctional and is found to contain many fewer amino acids than does l3-globin made by a eukaryotic cell. Explain why. Blologlcallnqulry: A W·orkbook oflm·estlgath·e Cases Explore translation and u~ of sequen,e data in testing hypothe~s with the ,a~ "The Doctors Dilemma,"

Regu . . . . · ofGen Express on KEY

CONCEPTS

18.1 Bacteria often respond to environmental change by regulating transcription 18.2 Eukaryotic gene expression can be regulated at any stage 18.3 Noncoding RNAs play multiple roles in controlling gene expression 18.4 A program of differential gene expression leads to the different cell types in a multicellular organism 18.5 Cancer results from genetic changes that affect cell cycle control

n oboe squawks loudly, several violins squeak shrilly, and a tuba adds its rumble to the noisy chaos. Then the

A

conductor's baton rises, pauses, and begins a series of

elaborate movements, directing spedfic instruments to join in and others to raise or lower their volume at exact moments. Properly balanced and timed, discordant sounds are thus transformed into a beautiful symphony that enraptures the audience. In a similar way, cells intricately and predsely regulate their gene expression. Both prokaryotes and eukaryotes must alter their patterns ofgene expression in response to changes in environmental conditions. Multicellular eukaryotes must also develop and maintain multiple cell types. Each cell type contains the same genome but expresses a different subset of genes, a significant challenge in gene regulation. An adult fruit fly, for example, develops from a single fertilized egg, passing through a wormlike stage called a larva. At every stage, gene expression is carefully regulated, ensuring that the right genes are expressed only at the correct time and place. In

... Figure 18.1 What regulates the precise pattern of expression of different genes?

the larva, the adult wing forms in a disk-shaped pocket ofseveral thousand cells, shown in Figure 18.1. The tissue in this image has been treated to reveal the mRNA for three genes-labeled red, blue, and green-using tenddtzod>t"" /

1 Transport l~opla$m

1

,

I"'?~""- l"r .I

Tall /

I

,,.,,,,,,,,,,,,,,

'\

I

Intron

~

__1

Histone tails

CYTOPLASM mRNA in cytoplasm

Translation -==---

~Ji~~~--J

~ Polypeptide

! !

Amino acids available for chemical modification

Protein processing, such

as cleavage and chemical modification

(a) Histone tails protrude outward from a nucleosome. This is an end view of a nucleosome. The amino aCids In the N·terminal tails are accessible for chemical modification,

~ Active protein .......

~~

Transport to cellular

destination ,-------==.::.:..:e..-------,

~

Cellular function (such as enzymatic activity, structural

support, elc.)

.. Figure 18.6 Stages in gene expression that can be regulated in eukaryotic cells. In this diagram. the colored boxes indicate the processes most often regulated; each color indicates the type of molecule that is affected (blue = DNA, orange = RNA, purple = protein). The nuclear envelope separating transcription from translation in eukaryotic cells offers an opportunity for posttranscriptional control in the form of RNA processing that is absent in prokaryotes. In addition, eukaryotes have a greater variety of control mechanisms operating before transcription and after translation. The eKpression of any given gene, however, does not necessarily involve every stage shown; for eKample, not every polypeptide is cleaved,

Unacetylated histones

Acetylated histones

(b) Acetylation of histone tails promotes loose chromatin structure that permits transcription. A region of chromatin in which nucleosomes are unacetylated forms a compact structure (left) in which the DNA is not transcribed, When nucleosomes are highly acetylated (right), the chromatin becomes less compact, and the DNA is accessible for transcription, ... Figure 18.7 A simple model of histone tails and the effect of histone acetylation. In addition to acetylation, histones can undergo several other types of modifications that also help determine the chromatin configuration in a region,

CHIloPTER EIGHTEEN

Regulation of Gene Expression

357

histone tails are accessible to various modifying enzymes, which catalyze the addition or removal of specific chemical groups. In histone acetylation, acetyl groups (-COCH 3) are attached to Iysines in histone tails; deacetylation is the removal of acetyl groups. When the lysines are acetylated, their positive charges are neutralized and the histone tails no longer bind to neighboring nucleosomes (Figure 18.7b). Recall that such binding promotes the folding of chromatin into a more compact structure; when this binding does not occur, cluomatin has a looser structure. As a result, transcription proteins have easier access to genes in an acetylated region. Researchers have shown that some enzymes that acetylate or deacetylate histones are closely associated with or even components of the transcription factors that bind to promoters (see Figure 17.8). These observations suggest that histone acetylation enzymes may promote the initiation oftranscrip· tion not only by remodeling chromatin structure, but also by binding to and thus "recruiting~ components ofthe transcription machinery. Several other chemical groups can be reversibly attached to amino acids in histone tails-for example, methyl groups and phosphate groups. The addition of methyl groups (-CH 3 ) to histone tails (methylation) can promote condensation of the chromatin. The addition of a phosphate group to an amino acid (phosphorylation) next to a methylated amino acid can have the opposite effect. The recent discovery that these and many other modifications to histone tails can affect chromatin structure and gene expression has led to the histone code hypothesis. This hypothesis proposes that specific combinations of modifications, rather than the overall level ofhistone acetylation, help determine the chromatin configuration, which in turn influences transcription.

DNA Methylation While some enzymes methylate the tails of histone proteins, a different set of enzymes can methylate certain bases in the DNA itself. In fact, the DNA of most plants, animals, and fungi has methylated bases, usually cytosine. Inactive DNA, such as that of inactivated mammalian X chromosomes (see Figure 15.8), is generally more methylated than DNA that is actively transcribed, although there are exceptions. Comparison of the same genes in different tissues shows that the genes are usually more heavily methylated in cells in which they are not expressed. Removal of the extra methyl groups can turn on some of these genes. Moreover, researchers have discovered proteins that bind to methylated DNA and recruit histone deacetylation enzymes. Thus, a dual mechanism, involving both DNA methylation and histone deacetylation, can repress transcription. At least in some species, DNA methylation seems to be essential for the long-term inactivation ofgenes that occurs during normal cell differentiation in the embryo. For instance, 358

UNIT THREE

Genetics

experiments have shown that deficient DNA methylation due to lack of a methylating enzyme leads to abnormal embryonic development in organisms as different as mice and Arabidopsis (a plant). Once methylated, genes usually stay that way through successive cell divisions in a given individual. At DNA sites where one strand is already methylated, methylation enzymes correctly methylate the daughter strand after each round of DNA replication. Methylation patterns are thus passed on, and cells forming specialized tissues keep a chemical record of what occurred during embryonic development. A methylation pattern maintained in this way also accounts for genomic imprinting in mammals, where methylation permanently regulates expression ofeither the maternal or paternal allele ofparticular genes at the start ofdevelopment (see Chapter 15).

Epigenetic Inheritance The chromatin modifications that we have just discussed do not entail a change in the DNA sequence, yet they may be passed along to future generations of cells. Inheritance of traits transmitted by me"JI A

~

I

,,,",._ I

I

.... do:j,.".","

... Figure 18.11 Alternative RNA splicing of the troponin , gene. The primary transcript of this gene can be splICed in more than one way, generating different mRNA molecules. Notice that one mRNA molecule has ended up with exon 3 (green) and the other with exon 4 (purple). These two mRNAs are translated into different but related muscle proteins.

Primary RNA

transcript

~NASPliCl~

mRNA 1 1 2 3 5 .

(a-globin and p-globin) in developing red blood cells are unusually stable, and these long-lived mRNAs are translated repeatedly in these cells. Research on yeast species suggests that a common pathway of mRNA breakdown begins with the enzymatic shortening of the poly-A tail (see Figure 18.8). This helps trigger the action ofenzymes that remove the 5' cap (the two ends of the mRNA may be briefly held together by the proteins involved). Removal of the cap, a critical step, is also regulated by particular nucleotide sequences within the mRNA. Once the cap is removed, nuclease enzymes rapidly chew up the mRNA. Nucleotide sequences that affect how long an mRNA remains intact are often found in the untranslated region (UTR) at the 3' end of the molecule (see Figure 18.8). In one experiment, researchers transferred such a sequence from the shortlived mRNA for a growth factor to the 3' end of a normally stable globin mRNA. The globin mRNA was quickly degraded. During the past few years, other mechanisms that degrade or block expression of mRNA molecules have come to light. These mechanisms involve an important group of newly discovered RNA molecules that regulate gene expression at severallevels, and we will discuss them later in this chapter.

Initiation ofTranslation Translation presents another opportunity for regulating gene expression; such regulation occurs most commonly at the initiation stage (see Figure 17.17). The initiation of translation of some mRNAs can be blocked by regulatory proteins that bind to specific sequences or structures within the untranslated region at the 5' end (5' UTR) of the mRNA, preventing the attachment of ribosomes. (Recall from Chapter 17 that both the 5' cap and the poly-A tail ofan mRNA molecule are important for ribosome binding.) A different mechanism for blocking translation is seen in a variety of mRNAs present in the eggs of many organisms: Initially, these stored mRNAs lack poly-A tails of sufficient length to allow translation initiation. At the

1

1

2 r41

5 •

appropriate time during embryonic development, however, a cytoplasmic enzyme adds more adenine (A) nucleotides, prompting translation to begin. Alternatively, translation of all the mRNAs in a cell may be regulated simultaneously. In a eukaryotic cell, such "global" control usually involves the activation or inactivation ofone or more of the protein factors required to initiate translation. This mechanism plays a role in starting translation of mRNAs that are stored in eggs. Just after fertilization, translation is triggered by the sudden activation of translation initiation factors. The response is a burst of synthesis of the proteins en· coded by the stored mRNAs. Some plants and algae store mRNAs during periods of darkness; light then triggers the reactivation of the translational apparatus.

Protein Processing and Degradation The final opportunities for controlling gene expression occur after translation. Often, eukaryotic polypeptides must be processed to yield functional protein molecules. For instance, cleavage of the initial insulin polypeptide (pro-insulin) forms the active hormone. In addition, many proteins undergo chemical modifications that make them functional. Regulatory proteins are commonly activated or inactivated by the reversible addition of phosphate groups, and proteins destined for the surface ofanimal cells acquire sugars. Cell-surface proteins and many others must also be transported to target destinations in the cell in order to function. Regulation might occur at any of the steps involved in modifying or transporting a protein. Finally, the length oftime each protein functions in the cell is strictly regulated by means of selective degradation. Many proteins, such as the cyclins involved in regulating the cell cycle, must be relatively short-lived if the cell is to function appropriately (see Figure 12.17). To mark a particular protein for destruction, the cell commonly attaches molecules of a small protein called ubiquitin to the protein. Giant protein complexes called proteasomes then recognize the ubiquitin-tagged

CHAPTER EIGHTEEN


363

o

Multiple ubiquitin molecules are attached to a protein by enzymes in the cytosol.

"

o

Enzymatic components of the The ubiquitin-tagged protein proteasome cut the protein into is recognized by a proteasome, small peptides, which can be which unfolds the protein and further degraded by other sequesters it within a central cavity. enzymes in the cytosol.

6

Proteasome and ubiquitin to be recycled

Ubiquitin

~~.

Proteasome

--L

\... ~

Protein to be degraded

Ubiquitmated protein Protein entering a proteasome

... Figure 18.12 Degradation of a protein

by a proteasome. Aproteasome, an enormous protein complex shaped like atrash can. chops up unneeded proteins In the cell In most cases. the

proteins attacked by a proteasome have been tagged with short chains of ubiqultin. a small protein. Steps 1and 3require AlP Eukaryotic proteasomes are as massive as ribosomal subunits

proteins and degrade them (figure 18.12).111e importance of proteasomes is underscored by the finding that mutations making specific cell cycle proteins impervious to proteasome degradation can lead to cancer. CONCEPT

CHECK

18.2

1. In general, what is the effeity Control of Transcription Aethity Post·Transcriptional Control Mechanisms MtMt,. Review: Control of Gene [(pression Investigation How Do You Design a Gene hpression System?

_"'1""-18.4 A program of differential gene expression leads to the different cell types in a multicellular organism

... The Multistep Model of Cancer Development Normal cells are converted to cancer cells by the accumulation of mutations affecting proto-oncogenes and tumor-suppressor genes, ... Inherited Predisposition and Other Factors Contributing to Cancer Individuals who inherit a mutant oncogene or tumor-suppressor allele have an increased risk of developing cancer. Certain viruses promote cancer by integration of viral DNA into a cell's genome.

-61401"-

Aethity Cause. of Cancer

(pp. 366-373) ... A Genetic Program for Embryonic Development Embryonic cells undergo differentiation, becoming specialized in structure and function. Morphogenesis encompasses the processes that give shape to the organism and its various parts. Cells differ in structure and function not because they contain different genes but because they express different portions of a common genome. ... Cytoplasmic Determinants and Inductive Signals Cytoplasmic determinants in the unfertilized egg regulate the expression of genes in the zygote that affect the developmental fate of embryonic cells. In the process called induction, signaling molecules from embryonic cells cause transcriptional changes in nearby target cells. ... Sequential Regulation of Gene Expression During Cenular Differentiation Differentiation is heralded by the appearance of tissue-specific proteins, which enable differentiated cells to carry out their specialized roles. ... Pattern Formation: Setting Up the Body Plan In animals, pattern formation, the development of a spatial organization of tissues and organs, begins in the early embryo. Positional information. the molecular cues that control pattern formation, tell a cell its location relative to the body's axes and to other cells. In Drosophila, gnldients of morphogens encoded by maternal effect genes determine the body axes. For example, the gradient of Bicoid protein determines the anteriorposterior axis.

-61401"-

Actl>'ity Signal Transduction Pathways Acti>ity Role of bicoidGene in Drosoploilll Development Investigation How Do lJicoid Mutations Alter Development?

-',11""-18.5 Cancer results from genetic changes that affect cell cycle control (pp. 373-377) ... Types of Genes Associated with Cancer The products of proto-oncogenes and tumor-suppressor genes control cell division. A DNA change that makes a proto-oncogene excessively active converts it to an oncogene, which may promote excessive cell division and cancer. A tumor-suppressor gene encodes a protein that inhibits abnormal cell division. A mutation in such a gene that reduces the activity of its protein product may also lead to excessive cell division and possibly to cancer. ... Interference with Normal Cell-Signaling Pathways Many proto-oncogenes and tumor-suppressor genes encode components of growth-stimulating and growth-inhibiting signaling pathways, respectively. A hyperactive version of a protein in a stimulatory pathway, such as Ras (a G protein), functions as an oncogene protein. A defective version of a protein in an inhibitory pathway. such as p53 (a transcription activator). fails to function as a tumor suppressor.


SELF-QUIZ 1. If a particular operon encodes enzymes for making an essential amino acid and is regulated like the up operon, then a. the amino acid inactivates the repressor. b. the enzymes produced are called inducible enzymes. c. the repressor is active in the absence of the amino acid. d. the amino acid acts as a corepressor. e. the amino acid turns on transcription of the operon. 2. Muscle cells differ from nerve cells mainly because they a. express different genes. b, contain different genes. c. use different genetic codes. d, have unique ribosomes. e. have different chromosomes, 3. What would occur if the repressor of an inducible operon were mutated so it could not bind the operator? a. irreversible binding of the repressor to the promoter b. reduced transcription of the operon's genes c. buildup of a substrate for the pathway controlled by the operon d. continuous transcription of the operon's genes e. overproduction of catabolite activator protein (CAP)

4. The functioning of enhancers is an example of a. transcriptional control of gene expression. b. a post-transcriptional mechanism for editing mRNA . c. the stimulation of translation by initiation factors. d, post-translational control that activates certain proteins, e. a eukaryotic equivalent of prokaryotic promoter functioning. 5. Absence ofbicQid mRNA from a Drosophila egg leads to the absence of anterior larval body parts and mirror-image duplication of posterior parts. This is evidence that the product of the bicoid gene a. is transcribed in the early embryo. b, normally leads to formation of tail structures, c. normally leads to formation of head structures. d, is a protein present in all head structures. e. leads to programmed cell death.

CHIIPTER EIGHTEEN


379

6. \Xfhich of the following statements about the DNA in one of your brain cells is true? a. Most of the DNA codes for protein. b. The majority of genes are likely to be transcribed. c. Each gene lies immediately adjacent to an enhancer. d. Many genes are grouped into operon-like clusters, e, It is the same as the DNA in one of your heart cells,

7. Cell differentiation always involves a. the production oftissue-specific proteins, such as muscle actin. b. the movement of cells. c. the transcription of the myoD gene. d. the selective loss of certain genes from the genome. e. the cell's sensitivity to environmental cues, such as light or heat. 8. \Xfhich of the following is an example of post-transcriptional control ofgene expression? a. the addition of methyl groups to cytosine bases of DNA b, the binding of transcription factors to a promoter c, the removal of introns and splicing together of exons d, gene amplification contributing to cancer e, the folding of DNA to form heterochromatin 9. \VJthin a cell, the amount of protein made using a given mRNA molecule depends partly on a. the degree of DNA methylation. b. the rate at which the mRNA is degraded. c. the presence of certain transcription factors. d. the number ofintrons present in the mRNA. e. the types of ribosomes present in the cytoplasm. 10, Proto-oncogenes can change into oncogenes that cause cancer. \Xfhich of the following best explains the presence of these potential time bombs in eukaryotic cells? a. Proto-oncogenes first arose from viral infections. b. Proto-oncogenes normally help regulate cell division. c. Proto-oncogenes are genetic "junk." d. Proto-oncogenes are mutant versions of normal genes, e. Cells produce proto-oncogenes as they age. II,

I·UoW"l The diagram below shows five genes (with their enhancers) from the genome of a certain species. Imagine that orange, blue, green, black, red, and purple activator proteins exist that can bind to the appropriately color-coded control elements in the enhancers of these genes. Promoter

Gene 1

Gene 3 II

Gene 5

380

UNIT THREE

Genetics

a. Draw an X above enhancer elements (of all the genes) that would have activators bound in a cell in which only gene 5 is transcribed. Which colored activators would be present? b. Draw a dot above all enhancer elements that would have activators bound in a cell in which the green, blue, and orange activators are present. \Vhich genets) would be transcribed? c. Imagine that genes I, 2, and 4 code for nerve-specific proteins, and genes 3 and 5 are skin specific. \Vhich activators would have to be present in each cell type to ensure transcription of the appropriate genes? For Self-Qui: answers, see Al,pendix A.

-MH'·M Visit the Study Area at www.masteringbio.comfora Practice Test.

EVOLUTION CONNECTION 12, DNA sequences can act as "tape measures of evolution" (see Chapter 5), Scientists analyzing the human genome sequence were surprised to find that some of the regions of the human genome that are most highly conserved (similar to comparable regions in other species) don't code for proteins. Propose a possible explanation for this observation.

SCIENTIFIC INQUIRY 13, Prostate cells usually require testosterone and other andro· gens to survive. But some prostate cancer cells thrive despite treatments that eliminate androgens. One hypothesis is that estrogen, often considered a female hormone, may be actio vating genes normally controlled by an androgen in these cancer cells. Describe one or more experiments to test this hypothesis. (See Figure 11.8 to review the action of these steroid hormones.) 8iologicalinquiry: A Workl>ook oflnveJltigative Cases Explo.... gene ....gul.tion by the hedgehog pathway with the ease 'Shh: Silencing the Hedgehog Pathw.y·

SCIENCE, TECHNOLOGY, AND SOCIETY 14, Trace amounts of dioxin were present in Agent Orange, a de· foliant sprayed on vegetation during the Vietnam War. Animal tests suggest that dioxin can cause birth defects, cancer, liver and thymus damage, and immune system suppression, some· times leading to death. But the animal tests are equivocal; a hamster is not affected by a dose that can kill a guinea pig. Dioxin acts somewhat like a steroid hormone, entering a cell and binding to a receptor protein that then attaches to the cell's DNA. How might this mechanism help explain the vari· ety of dioxin's effects on different body systems and in different animals? How might you determine whether a type of illness is related to dioxin exposure? How might you deter· mine whether a particular individual became ill as a result of exposure to dioxin? Which would be more difficult to demonstrate? Why?

Viruses

KEY

CONCEPTS

19.1 Avirus consists of a nucleic acid surrounded by a protein coat 19.2 Viruses reproduce only in host cells 19.3 Viruses, viroids, and prions are formidable pathogens in animals and plants

he photo in Figure 19.1 shows a remarkable event: the attack of a bacterial cell by numerous structures that resemble miniature lollipops. These structures, a type of virus called T4 bacteriophage, are seen infecting the bacterium Escherichia coli in this colorized SEM. By injecting its DNA into the cell, the virus sets in motion a genetic takeover of the bacterium, recruiting cellular machinery to mass-produce many new viruses. Recall that bacteria and other prokaryotes are cells much smaller and more simply organized than those of eukaryotes, such as plants and animals. Viruses are smaller and simpler still. Lacking the structures and metabolic machinery found in cells, most viruses are little more than genes packaged in protein coats. Are viruses living or nonliving? Early on, they were considered biological chemicals; in fact, the Latin root for the word virus means "poison:' Because viruses are capable of causing a wide variety of diseases and can be spread between organisms, researchers in the late 1800s saw a parallel with bacteria and proposed that viruses were the simplest of living forms. However, viruses cannot reproduce or carry oul metabolic activities outside of a host cell. Most biologists studying viruses today would probably agree that they are not alive but exist in a shady area betv.'een life-forms and chemicals. The simple phrase used recently by two researchers describes them aptly enough: Viruses lead ~a kind of borrowed life."

T

... Figure 19.1 Are the tiny viruses infecting this E. coli cell alive?

To a large extent, molecular biology was born in the laboratories of biologists studying viruses that infect bacteria. Experiments with viruses provided important evidence that genes are made ofnucleic acids, and they were critical in work· ing out the molecular mechanisms of the fundamental processes of DNA replication, transcription, and translation. Beyond their value as experimental systems, viruses have unique genetic mechanisms that are interesting in their own right and that also help us understand how viruses cause disease. In addition, the study of viruses has led to the development of techniques that enable scientists to manipulate genes and transfer them from one organism to another. These techniques play an important role in basic research, biotechnology, and medical applications. For instance, viruses are used as agents of gene transfer in gene therapy (see Chapter 20). In this chapter, we will explore the biology of viruses. We will begin with the structure of these simplest of all genetic systems and then describe their reproductive cycles. Next, we will discuss the role of viruses as disease-causing agents, or pathogens, and conclude by considering some even simpler infectious agents, viroids and prions.

rZI~"i::::::i~s of a nucleic acid surrounded by a protein coat

Scientists were able to detect viruses indirectly long before they were actually able to see them. The story of how viruses were discovered begins near the end of the 19th century.

The Discovery of Viruses: Scientific tnquiry Tobacco mosaic disease stunts the growth of tobacco plants and gives their leaves a mottled, or mosaic, coloration. In 1883, AdolfMayer, a German scientist, discovered that he could 381

transmit the disease from plant to plant by rubbing sap extracted from diseased leaves onto healthy plants. After an unsuccessful search for an infectious microbe in the sap, Mayer suggested that the disease was caused by unusually small bacteria that were invisible under a microscope. This hypothesis was tested a decade later by Dimitri lvanowsky, a Russian biologist who passed sap from infected tobacco leaves through a filter designed to remove bacteria. After filtration, the sap still produced mosaic disease. But Ivanowsky clung to the hypothesis that bacteria caused tobacco mosaic disease. Perhaps, he reasoned, the bacteria were small enough to pass through the filter or made a toxin that could do so. The second possibility was ruled out when the Dutch botanist Martinus Beijerinck carried out a classic series of experiments that showed that the infectious agent in the filtered sap could reproduce (Figure 19.2). In fact, the pathogen reproduced only within the host it infected. in further experiments, Beijerinck showed that unlike bacteria used in the lab at that time, the mysterious agent of mosaic disease could not be cultivated on nutrient media in test tubes or petri dishes. Beijerinck imagined a reproducing particle much smaller and simpler than a bacterium, and he is generally credited with being the first scientist to voice the concept of a virus. His suspicions were confirmed in 1935 when the American scientist Wendell Stanley crystallized the infectious particle, now known as tobacco mosaic virus (TMV). Subsequently, TMV and many other viruses were actually seen with the help of the electron microscope.

• FI

19.2

What causes tobacco mosaic disease? EXPERIMENT In the late 18005. Martmus 8eijerinck. of the Technical School in Delft, the Netherlands. investigated the properties of the agent that causes tobacco mosaic disease (then called spot disease). RESULTS

When the filtered sap was rubbed on healthy plants. they became infected. Their sap. when extraded and filtered, could then ad as the source of infection for another group of plants. Each successive group of plants developed the disease to the same extent as earlier groups,

G Extracted sap from tobacco plant with tobacco mosaic disease

\

6

Passed sap through a porcelam filter known to trap bacteria

e Rubbed filtered sap on healthy tobacco plants

)

Siruciure of Viruses The tiniest viruses are only 20 nm in diameter-smaller than a ribosome. Millions could easily fit on a pinhead. Even the largest known virus, which has a diameter of several hundred nanometers, is barely visible in the light microscope. Stanley's discovery that some viruses could be crystallized was exciting and puzzling news. Not even the simplest of cells can aggregate into regular crystals. But ifviruses are not cells, then what are they? Examining the structure of viruses more closely reveals that they are infectious particles consisting of nucleic acid enclosed in a protein coat and, in some cases, a membranous envelope.

Viral Cenomes

UNIT THREE

The infectious agent was apparently not a bacterium because it could pass through a bacterium-trapping filter. The pathogen must have been reproducing in the plants because Its ability to cause disease was undiluted after several transfers from plant to plant. CONCLUSiON

SOURCE M J ~JerirKk, Concerning a contagium vivum fluidum as CilUse of the spol disease of toiMcco leaves, VerhiJndelingen der Koninl:)ie akademie WetrenxlliJppen te Amsterdam 653-21 (1898) Translation pubtished in English ilS Phytopathological CIi!SSicl Number 7 (1942), American PhytopathologICal >ociety Press, 51. PilUl, MN.

_lm,nIM

We usually think of genes as being made of double-stranded DNA-the conventional double helix-but many viruses defy this convention. Their genomes may consist of doublestranded DNA, single-stranded DNA, double-stranded RNA, or single-stranded RNA, depending on the kind of virus. A virus is called a DNA virus or an RNA virus, according to the kind of nucleic acid that makes up its genome. In either case, the genome is usually organized as a single linear or circular molecule of nucleic acid, although the genomes of some 382

o Healthy plants became infected

Genetics

If Beijerinck had observed that the infection of each group was weaker than that of the previous group and that ultimately the sap could no longer cause disease, what might he have concluded?

viruses consist of multiple molecules of nucleic acid, The smallest viruses known have only four genes in their genome, while the largest have several hundred to a thousand. For comparison, bacterial genomes contain about 200 to a few thousand genes.

Capsids and Envelopes

animals (Figure 19.3c). These viral envelopes, which are derived from the membranes of the host cell, contain host cell phospholipids and membrane proteins. They also contain proteins and glycoproteins of viral origin. (Glycoproteins are proteins with carbohydrates covalently attached.) Some viruses carry a few viral enzyme molecules within their capsids. Many of the most complex capsids are found among the viruses that infect bacteria, called bacteriophages, or simply phages. The first phages studied included seven that infect E. coli. These seven phages were named type 1 (Tl), type 2 (T2), and so forth, in the order of their discovery. The three T-even phages (T2, T4, and T6) turned out to be very similar in structure. Their capsids have elongated icosahedral heads enclosing their DNA. Attached to the head is a protein tail piece with fibers by which the phages attach to a bacterium (Figure 19.3d). In the next section, we'll examine how these few viral parts function together with cellular components to produce large numbers of viral progeny.

The protein shell enclosing the viral genome is called a capsid. Depending on the type of virus, the capsid may be rod-shaped, polyhedral, or more complex in shape (like T4). Capsids are built from a large number ofprotein subunits called capsomeres, but the number of different kinds of proteins in a capsid is usually small. Tobacco mosaic virus has a rigid, rod-shaped capsid made from over a thousand molecules ofa single type ofprotein arranged in a helix; rod~shaped viruses are commonly called helical viruses for this reason (Figure 19.3a). Adenoviruses, which infect the respiratory tracts of animals, have 252 identical protein molecules arranged in a polyhedral capsid with 20 triangular facets-an icosahedron; thus, these and other similarly shaped viruses are referred to as icosahedral viruses (Figure 19.3b). Some viruses have accessory structures that help them infect their hosts. For instance, a membranous envelope surrounds the capsids ofinfluenza viruses and many other viruses found in

RNA

Membranous envelope

RNA DNA

Capsomere of capsid

Glycoprotein 18 x 250 nm

70-90 nm (diameter)

~

20 nm

(a) Tobacco mosaic virus has a helICal capsid with the overall shape of a rigid rod.

80-200 nm (diameter)

50 nm

(b) Adenoviruses have an icosahedral capsid with a glycoprotein spike at each vertex.

... Figure 19.3 Viral structure. Viruses are made up of nucleic acid (DNA or RNA) enclosed in a protein coat (the capsid) and sometimes further wrapped in a membranous envelope.

80x225nm

f-----
A. NVVV>A) NU(lEUS ~rovirus J ~

(JProviral genes are transcribed into RNA molecules,

Chromosomal DNA

"I+--~---------r-.j which serve as

RNA genome . / I~ for the ~ next viral fVVVVV\ generation J mRNA ,

IV\IVVV\A.

"-0:·.... .... ' , ..... ~

,,>~'tU".....

:" ::\"w'

'"

~

New HIV leaving a cell

....

/;,-t;,---

...:-

~

,

S

L'·

lE)New viruses bud off from the host cell.

Figure 19,8 traces the HIV reproductive cycle, which is typical of a retrovirus. After HIV enters a host cell, its reverse transcriptase molecules are released into the cytoplasm, where they catalyze synthesis ofviral DNA. The newly made viral DNA then enters the cell's nucleus and integrates into the DNA of a

G)Capsids are assembled around viral genomes and reverse transcriptase molecules.

genomes for the next viral "'Q"g generation and ~ as mRNAs for " t r a n s l a t i o n into viral protein,

..'"""

~ "tI \1.,.

,l>~1.

.The viral proteins include capsid proteins and reverse transcriptase (made in the cytosol) and envelope glycoproteins (made in the ER),

9Vesicles transport the glycoproteins to the cell's plasma membrane,

chromosome. The integrated viral DNA, called a provirus, never leaves the host's genome, remaining a permanent resident of the cell. (Recall that a prophage, in contrast, leaves the host's genome at the start ofa lytic cycle.) The host's RNA polymerase transcribes the proviral DNA into RNA molecules, which can CIlAPTE~ NINHHN

Viruses

389

function both as mRNA for the synthesis of viral proteins and as genomes for the new viruses that will be assembled and released from the ceiL In Chapter43, we describe how HIV causes the de~ terioration of the immune system that occurs in AIDS.

Evolution of Viruses We began this chapter by asking whether or not viruses are alive. Viruses do not really fit our definition of living organisms. An isolated virus is biologically inert, unable to replicate its genes or regenerate its own supply of ATP. Yet it has a genetic program written in the universal language oflife. Do we think ofviruses as nature's most complex associations of molecules or as the simplest forms of life? Either way, we must bend our usual definitions. Although viruses cannot reproduce or carry out metabolic activities independently, their use of the genetic code makes it hard to deny their evolutionary connection to the living world. How did viruses originate? Viruses have been found that in~ fect every fonn of life-not just bacteria, animals, and plants, but also archaea, fungi, and algae and other protists. Because they depend on cells for their own propagation, it seems likely that viruses are not the descendants of precellular forms of life but evolved after the first cells appeared, possibly multiple times. Most molecular biologists favor the hypothesis that viruses originated from naked bits ofcellular nucleic acids that moved from one cell to another, perhaps via injured cell surfaces. The evolution of genes coding for capsid proteins may have facilitated the infection of uninjured cells. Candidates for the original sources ofviral genomes include plasmids and transposons. Plasmids are small, circular DNA molecules found in bacteria and in the uni~ cellular eukaryotes called yeasts. Plasmids exist apart from the cell's genome, can replicate independently of the genome, and are occasionally transferred between cells. Transposonsare DNA segments that can move from one location to another within a cell's genome. Thus, plasmids, transposons, and viruses all share an important feature: TIley are mobilegenetic elements. We will discuss plasmids in more detail in Chapters 20 and 27 and transposons in Chapter 21. Consistent with this vision of pieces of DNA shuttling from cell to cell is the observation that a viral genome can have more in common with the genome of its host than with the genomes of viruses that infect other hosts. Indeed, some viral genes are essentially identical to genes ofthe host. On the other hand, re~ cent sequencing of many viral genomes has shown that the ge~ netic sequences of some viruses are quite similar to those of seemingly distantly related viruses; for example, some animal viruses share similar sequences with plant viruses. This genetic similarity may reflect the persistence of groups of viral genes that were favored by natural selection during the early evolution ofviruses and the eukaryotic cells that served as their hosts. The debate about the origin ofviruses has been reinvigorated recently by reports of mimivirus, the largest virus yet discovered. Mimivirus is a double-stranded DNA virus with an icosa390

UNIT THREE

Genetics

hedral capsid that is 400 nm in diameter. (The beginning of its name is short for mimicking microbe because the virus is the size ofa small bacterium.) Its genome contains 1.2 million bases (about lOOtimes as many as the influenza virus genome) and an estimated 1,000 genes. Perhaps the most surprising aspect of mimivirus, however, is that some ofthe genes appear to code for products previously thought to be hallmarks of cellular genomes. These products include proteins involved in translation, DNA repair, protein folding, and polysaccharide synthesis. The researchers who described mimivirus propose that it most likely evolved before the first cells and then developed an exploitative relationship with them. Other scientists disagree, maintaining that the virus evolved more recently than cells and has simply been efficient at scavenging genes from its hosts. The question of whether some viruses deserve their own early branch on the tree of life may not be answered for some time. The ongoing evolutionary relationship between viruses and the genomes oftheir host cells is an association that makes viruses very useful experimental systems in molecular biology. Knowledge about viruses also has many practical applications, since viruses have a tremendous impact on all organisms through their ability to cause disease. CONCEPT

CHECK

19.2

1. Compare the effect on the host cell of a lytic (virulent) phage and a lysogenic (temperate) phage. 2. How do some viruses reproduce without possessing or ever synthesizing DNA? 3. Why is HIV called a retrovirus? 4. •~J:t."IDI If you were a researcher trying to combat HIV infection, what molecular processes could you attempt to block? (See Figure 19.8.) For suggested answers. see Appendix A.

r~;;~'s::~v~~;:s, and prions are

formidable pathogens in animals and plants

Diseases caused by viral infections afflict humans, agricultural crops, and livestock worldwide. Other smaller, less complex entities known as viroids and prions also cause disease in plants and animals, respectively.

Viral Diseases in Animals A viral infection can produce symptoms by a number of different routes. Viruses may damage or kill cells by causing the release of hydrolytic enzymes from lysosomes. Some viruses cause infected cells to produce toxins that lead to disease

symptoms, and some have molecular components that are toxic, such as envelope proteins. How much damage a virus causes depends partly on the ability of the infected tissue to regenerate by cell division. People usually recover completely from colds because the epithelium of the respiratory tract, which the viruses infect, can efficiently repair itself. In contrast, damage inflicted by poliovirus to mature nerve cells is permanent, because these cells do not divide and usually cannot be replaced. Many of the temporary symptoms associated with viral infections, such as fever and aches, actually result from the body's own efforts at defending itself against infection rather than from cell death caused by the virus. The immune system is a complex and critical part of the body's natural defenses (see Chapter 43). It is also the basis for the major medical tool for preventing viral infectionsvaccines. A vaccine is a harmless variant or derivative of a pathogen that stimulates the immune system to mount defenses against the harmful pathogen. Smallpox, a viral disease that was at one time a devastating scourge in many parts of the world, was eradicated by a vaccination program carried out by the World Health Organization. The very narrow host range of the smallpox virus-it infects only humans-was a critical factor in the success of this program. Similar worldwide vaccination campaigns are currently under way to eradicate polio and measles. Effective vaccines are also available against rubella, mumps, hepatitis B, and a number of other viral diseases. Although vaccines can prevent certain viral illnesses, medical technology can do little, at present, to cure most viral infections once they occur. The antibiotics that help us recover from bacterial infections are powerless against viruses. Antibiotics kill bacteria by inhibiting enzymes specific to bacteria but have no effect on eukaryotic or virally encoded enzymes. However, the few enzymes that are encoded by viruses have provided targets for other drugs. Most antiviral drugs resemble nucleosides and as a result interfere with viral nucleic acid synthesis. One such drug is acyclovir, which impedes herpesvirus reproduction by inhibiting the viral polymerase that synthesizes viral DNA. Similarly, azidothymidine (AZT) curbs HIV reproduction by interfering with the synthesis of DNA by reverse transcriptase. In the past two decades, much effort has gone into developing drugs against HI\!: Currently, multidrug treatments, sometimes called "cocktaiJs,~ have been found to be most effective. Such treatments commonly include a combination of m'o nucleoside mimics and a protease inhibitor, which interferes with an enzyme required for assembly of the viruses.

Emerging Viruses Viruses that appear suddenly or are new to medical scientists are often referred to as emerging viruses. HIV, the AIDS virus, is a classic example: This virus appeared in San Francisco in

the early 1980s, seemingly out of nowhere, although later studies uncovered a case in the Belgian Congo that occurred as early as 1959. The deadly Ebola virus, recognized initially in 1976 in central Africa, is one of several emerging viruses that cause hemorrhagicfever, an often fatal syndrome (set ofsymptoms) characterized by fever, vomiting, massive bleeding, and circulatory system collapse. A number of other dangerous emerging viruses cause encephalitis, inflammation of the brain. One example is the West Nile virus, which appeared in North America for the first time in 1999 and has spread to all 48 contiguous states in the United States. Severe acute respiratory syndrome (SARS) first appeared in southern China in November 2002. A global outbreak that occurred during the follOWing eight months infected about 8,000 people and killed more than 700. Researchers quickly identified the infectious agent as a coronavirus, a virus with a single· stranded RNA genome (class IV) that had not previously been known to cause disease in humans. Public health workers responded rapidly, isolating patients and quarantining those who had come in contact with them. Because of low infectivity and other characteristics of the SARS virus, this rapid response succeeded in quelling the outbreak before it could infect a much larger population. How do such viruses burst on the human scene, giving rise to harmful diseases that were previously rare or even unknown? Three processes contribute to the emergence of viral diseases. The first, and perhaps most important, is the mutation of existing viruses. RNA viruses tend to have an unusually high rate of mutation because errors in replicating their RNA genomes are not corrected by proofreading. Some mutations change existing viruses into new genetic varieties (strains) that can cause disease, even in individuals who are immune to the ancestral virus. For instance, general outbreaks of flu, or flu epidemics, are caused by new strains of influenza virus genetically different enough from earlier strains that people have little immunity to them. A second process that can lead to the emergence of viral diseases is the dissemination of a viral disease from a small, isolated human population. For instance, AIDS went unnamed and virtually unnoticed for decades before it began to spread around the world. In this case, technological and social factors, including affordable international travel, blood transfusions, sexual promiscuity, and the abuse of intravenous drugs, allowed a previously rare human disease to become a global scourge. A third source of new viral diseases in humans is the spread of existing viruses from other animals. Scientists estimate that about three-quarters of new human diseases originate in this way. Animals that harbor and can transmit a particular virus but are generally unaffected by it are said to act as a natural reservoir for that virus. For example, a species of bat has been identified as the likely natural reservoir of the SARS virus. Bats are sold as food in China, and their dried feces are even sold

CHAPTER NINETEEN

Viruses

391

for medicinal uses; either of these practices could provide a route for transmission of the virus to humans. Flu epidemics provide an instructive example of the effects of viruses moving between species. There are three types of influenza virus: types Band C, which infect only humans and have never caused an epidemic, and type A, which infects a wide range of animals, including birds, pigs, horses, and humans. Influenza A strains have caused three major flu epidemics among humans in the last l00years. The worst was the uSpanish flu~ pandemic (a global epidemic) of 1918-1919, which killed about 40 million people, including many World War I soldiers (Figure 19.9a). Evidence points to birds as the source of the 1918 flu pandemic. A likely scenario for that pandemic and others is that they began when the virus mutated as it passed from one host species to another. When an animal is infected with more than one strain offlu virus, the different strains can undergo genetic recombination if the RNA molecules making up their genomes mix and match during viral assembly. Coupled with mutation, these changes can lead to the emergence of a viral strain that is capable of infecting human cells. Having never

(a) The 1918 flu pandemic. Many of those infeded were treated in large makeshift hospitals. such as this one.

.... .. •

~

• 0.5 pm

(bl Influenza A H5N1 virus. Virus particles are seen budding from an infeded cell in this colorized TEM.

e(l Vaccinating ducks. Veterinarians administer ~accinalions in a region of China reporting cases of avian flu. caused by strain H5Nl

.. Figure 19.9 Influenza in humans and other animals.

392

UNIT THREE

Genetics

been exposed to that particular strain before, humans will lack immunity, and the recombinant virus has the potential to be highly pathogenic. If such a flu virus recombines with viruses that circulate widely among humans, it may acquire the ability to spread easily from person to person, dramatically increasing the potential for a major human outbreak. Different strains of influenza A are given standardized names; for example, the strain that caused the 1918 flu is called HINL The name identifies which forms of two viral surface proteins are present: hemagglutinin (H) and neuraminidase (N). There are 16 different types of hemagglutinin, a protein that helps the flu virus attach to host cells, and 9 types of neuraminidase, an enzyme that helps release new virus particles from infected cells. Water birds have been found that carry viruses with all possible combinations of Hand N. In 1997, at least 18 people in Hong Kong were infected with an HSNI virus (Figure 19.9b); six of these people subsequently died. The same strain, previously seen only in wild birds, had killed several thousand chickens earlier that year, presumably passed along from wild birds or other species. A mass culling of all of Hong Kong's 1.5 million domestic birds appeared to stop that outbreak. Beginning in 2002, however, new cases ofH5N 1 human infection began to crop up around southeast Asia. By 2007, the disease caused by this virus, now called ~avian flu,u had killed about 160 people. Perhaps even more alarming is the overall mortality rate, which is greater than 50%. More than 100 million birds have either died from the disease or been killed to prevent the spread of infection; efforts are under way to vaccinate birds of several species (Figure 19.9c). The geographical and host ranges of avian flu virus continue to expand. It has shown up in wild or domestic birds in Africa and Europe, as well as in pigs, tigers, and domestic cats and dogs. The expanding host range provides increasing opportunities for different strains of virus to reassart their genetic material and for new strains to emerge. If the HSNI avian flu virus evolves so that it can spread easily from person to person, it could bring about a major human outbreak. Human-to-human transmission is strongly suspected in several cases where the disease has clustered in families, but so far the disease has not spread beyond small groups to cause an epidemic. For those studying emerging viruses and their ability to give rise to a human pandemic, avian flu provides a sobering lesson in progress. As we have seen, emerging viruses are generally not new; rather, they are existing viruses that mutate, disseminate more widely in the current host species, or spread to new host species. Changes in host behavior or environmental changes can increase theviraI traffic responsible for emerging diseases. For example, new roads through remote areas can allow viruses to spread between previously isolated human populations. Also, the destruction of forests to expand cropland can bring humans into contact with other animals that may host viruses capable of infecting humans.

Viral Diseases in Plants More than 2,000 types of viral diseases of plants are known, and together they account for an estimated annual10ss 0£$15 billion worldwide due to their destruction of agricultural and horticultural crops. Common signs of viral infection include bleached or brown spots on leaves and fruits, stunted growth, and damaged flowers or roots, all tending to diminish the yield and quality of crops (Figure 19.10). Plant viruses have the same basic struchtre and mode of reproduction as animal viruses. Most plant viruses discovered thus far, including tobacco mosaic virus (TMV), have an RNA genome. Many have a helical capsid, like TMV (see Figure 19.3a);

others have an icosahedral capsid. Viral diseases of plants spread by two major routes. In the first route, called horiwntaltransmission, a plant is infe
hons (regions of genes coding for protein or giving rise to rRNA or tRNA) (1.5%)

For suggested answers, see Appendix A,

Repetitive DNA that includes transposable elements and related sequences ~ ~

r:'~~~~:e~I~;~ukaryotes have

much noncoding DNA and many multigene families

We have spent most of this chapter, and indeed this unit, focusing on genes that code for proteins. Yet the coding regions of these genes and the genes for RNA products such as rRNA, tRNA, and microRNA (miRNA) make up only a small portion of the genomes of most multicellular eukaryotes. The bulk of most eukaryotic genomes consists of DNA sequences that neither code for proteins nor are transcribed to produce known RNAsi this noncoding DNA was often described in the past as ~junk DNA." However, much evidence is accumulating that this DNA plays important roles in the cell, an idea supported by its persistence in diverse genomes over many hundreds of generations. For example, comparison of the genomes of humans, rats, and mice has revealed the presence of almost 500 regions of noncoding DNA that are identical in sequence in all three species. This is a higher level of sequence conservation than is seen for protein-coding regions in these species, strongly suggesting that the noncoding regions have important functions. In this section, we examine how genes and noncoding DNA sequences are organized within genomes of multicellular eukaryotes, using the human genome as our main example. Genome organiza434

UNiT THREE

Genetics

(44%)

. •• / , /

sequences (17%)

•

I

(24%)

":*'-------1

"", ,1\,

/",

L1

Introns and regulatory sequences

-

"

Alu elements

, , I

I

\

\

Unique noncoding DNA (15%)

Repetitive DNA unrelated to transposable ,elements

,:(15%) \,

{10%)

Simple sequence DNA (3%)

large-segment duplications (5-6%)

.... Figure 21.7 Types of DNA sequences in the human genome. The gene sequences that code for proteins or are transcribed into rRNA or tRNA molecules make up only about 1.5% of the human genome (dark purple in the pie chartL while introns and regulatory sequences associated with genes (light purple) make up about a quarter, The vast majority of the human genome does not code for proteins or give rise to known RNAs, and much of it is repetitive DNA (dark and light green). Because repetitive DNA is the most difficult to sequence and analyze. classification of some portions is tentative. and the percentages given here may shift slightly as genome analysis proceeds, The genes that are transcribed into miRNAs, which were recently discovered, are found among unique noncoding DNA sequences and within inlrons; thus, they are included in two segments of this chart.

Transposable Elements and Related Sequences Both prokaryotes and eukaryotes have stretches of DNA that can move from one location to another within the genome.

These stretches are known as transposable genetic elements, or simply transposable elements. During the process called transposition, a transposable element moves from onc site in a cell's DNA to a different target site by a type of recombination process. Transposable elements are sometimes called "jumping genes,n but the phrase is misleading because they never completely detach from the cell's DNA. (The original and new DNA sites are brought together by DNA bending.)

The first evidence for wandering DNA segments came from American geneticist Barbara McClintock's breeding experiments with Indian corn (maize) in the 1940s and 1950s

(figure 21.8). As she tracked corn plants through multiple generations, McClintock identified changes in the color of corn kernels that made sense only if she postulated the existence of genetic elements capable of moving from other locations in the genome into the genes for kernel color, disrupting the genes so that the kernel color was changed. McClintock's discovery was met with great skepticism and virtually discounted at the time. Her careful work and insightful ideas were finally validated many years later when transposable elements were found in bacteria and microbial geneticists learned more about the molecular basis of transposition.

paste" mechanism, which removes the element from the original site, or by a Ucopy-and-paste" mechanism, which leaves a copy behind (figure 21.9a). Most transposable elements in eukaryotic genomes are of the second type, rctrotransposons, which move by means of an RNA intermediate that is a transcript ofthe retrotransposon DNA. Retrotransposons always leave a copy at the original site during transposition, since they are initially transcribed into an RNA intermediate (Figure 21.9b). To insert at another site, the RNA intermediate is first converted back to DNA by reverse transcriptase, an enzyme encoded in the retrotransposon itself. Thus, reverse transcriptase can be present in cells not infected with retroviruses. (In fact, retroviruses, which were discussed in Chapter 19, may have evolved from retrotransposons.) A cellular enzyme catalyzes insertion of the reverse-transcribed DNA at a new site.

Transposon DNA of genome

Transposon! is copied

New copy of transposon

Insertion

Mobile transposon

Movement ofTransposons and Retrotransposons

(a) Transposon movement (-copy-and-paste- mechanism)

Eukaryotic transposable elements are of m'o types. The first type are transposons, which move within a genome by means ofa DNA intermediate. Transposons can move bya Ucut_and_

Retrotransposon

New copy of retrotransposon

Insertion Reverse transcriptase

(b) Retrotransposon movement

... Figure 21.8 The effect of transposable elements on corn kernel color. Barbara McClintock first proposed the idea of mobile genetic elements alter observing variegations in corn kernel color, Although her idea was met with skepticism when she proposed it In the 1940s. it was later fully validated. She received the Nobel Prize in 1983. at the age of 81. for her pioneering research

... Figure 21.9 Movement of eukaryotic transposable elements. (a) Movement of transposons by either the cut-and-paste mechanism or the copy-and-paste mechanism (shown here) involves a double-stranded DNA intermediate that is inserted into the genome, (b) Movement of retrotransposons begins with formation of a singlestranded RNA intermediate The remaining steps are essentially identical to part of the retrovirus reprodudive cycle (see Figure 19,8), In the movement of transposons by the copy-and'paste mechanism and in the movement of retrotransposons. the DNA sequence remains in the original site as well as appearing in a new site. How would part (a) differ if it showed (he cut-and-paste mechanism)

D

C~APTE~ TWENTY·ON E

Genomes and Their Evolution

435

Sequences Related to Transposable Elements Multiple copies of transposable elements and sequences related to them are scattered throughout eukaryotic genomes. A single unit is usually hundreds to thousands of base pairs long, and the dispersed ucopies~ are similar but usually not identical to each other. Some of these are transposable elements that can move; the enzymes required for this movement may be encoded by any transposable element, including the one that is moving. Others are related sequences that have lost the ability to move altogether. Transposable elements and related sequences make up 25-50% of most mammalian genomes (see Figure 21.7) and even higher percentages in amphibians and many plants. In humans and other primates, a large portion of transposable element-related DNA consists of a family of similar sequences called Alu elements. These sequences alone account for approximately 10% of the human genome. Alu elements are about 300 nucleotides long, much shorter than most functional transposable elements, and they do not code for any protein. However, many Alu elements are transcribed into RNA; its cellular function, if any, is currently unknown. An even larger percentage (17%) of the human genome is made up of a type of retrotransposon called LINE- J, or LJ. These sequences are much longer than Alu elements-about 6,500 base pairs-and have a low rate of transposition. \Vhat might account for this low rate? Recent research has uncovered the presence of sequences within Ll that block progress of RNA polymerase, which is necessary for transposition. An accompanying genomic analysis found Ll sequences within the introns of nearly 80% of the human genes that were analyzed, suggesting that Ll may help regulate gene expression. Other researchers have proposed that Ll retrotransposons may have differential effects on gene expression in developing neurons, contributing to the great diversity of neuronal cell types (see Chapter 48). Although many transposable elements encode proteins, these proteins do not carry out normal cellular functions. Therefore, transposable elements are often included in the unoncoding~ DNA category, along with other repetitive sequences.

Other Repetitive DNA, Including Simple Sequence DNA Repetitive DNA that is not related to transposable elements probably arises due to mistakes during DNA replication or recombination. Such DNA accounts for about 15% of the human genome (see Figure 21.7). About a third of this (5-6% of the human genome) consists of duplications of long stretches of DNA, with each unit ranging from 10,000 to 300,000 base pairs. The large segments seem to have been copied from one chromosomal location to another site on the same or a different chromosome. 436

UNIT THREE

Genetics

In contrast to scattered copies of long sequences, simple sequence DNA contains many copies of tandemly repeated short sequences, as in the following example (showing one DNA strand only): ... GTTACGTTACGTTACGTTACGTTACGTTAC ...

In this case, the repeated unit (GTTAC) consists of five nucleotides. Repeated units may contain as many as 500 nucleotides, but often contain fewer than 15 nucleotides, as seen for this example. When the unit contains 2 to 5 nucleotides, the series of repeats is called a short tandem repeat, or STR; we discussed the use ofSTR analysis in preparing genetic profiles in Chapter 20. The number of copies of the repeated unit can vary from site to site within a given genome. There could be as many as several hundred thousand repetitions of the GTTAC unit at one site, but only half that number at another. The repeat number can also vary from person to person, producing the variation represented in the genetic profiles that result from STR analysis. Altogether, simple sequence DNA makes up 3% of the human genome. The nucleotide composition of simple sequence DNA is often different enough from the rest of the cell's DNA to have an intrinsically different density. Ifgenomic DNA is cut into pieces and centrifuged at high speed, segments of different density migrate to different positions in the centrifuge tube. Repetitive DNA isolated in this way was originally called satellite DNA because it appeared as a "satellite~ band in the centrifuge tube, separate from the rest of the DNA. Now the term is often used interchangeably with simple sequence DNA. Much of a genome's simple sequence DNA is located at chromosomal telomeres and centromeres, suggesting that this DNA plays a structural role for chromosomes. The DNA at centromeres is essential for the separation of chromatids in cell division (see Chapter 12). Centromeric DNA, along with simple sequence DNA located elsewhere, may also help organize the chromatin within the interphase nucleus. The simple sequence DNA located at telomeres, at the tips of chromosomes, prevents genes from being lost as the DNA shortens with each round of replication (see Chapter 16). Telomeric DNA also binds proteins that protect the ends of a chromosome from degradation and from joining to other chromosomes.

Genes and Multigene Families We finish our discussion of the various types of DNA sequences in eukaryotic genomes with a closer look at genes. Recall that DNA sequences that code for proteins or give rise to tRNA or rRNA compose a mere 1.5% ofthe human genome (see Figure 21.7). If we include introns and regulatory sequences associated with genes, the total amount of generelated DNA-coding and noncoding-constitutes about 25%

of the human genome. Put another way, only about 6% (1.5% out of25%) of the length of the average gene is represented in the final gene product. Like the genes ofbacteria, many eukaryotic genes are present as unique sequences, with only one copy per haploid set ofchromosomes. But in the human genome and the genomes of many other animals and plants, such solitary genes make up less than halfofthe total transcribed DNA. The rest occurs in multigene families, collections of two or more identical or very similar genes. In multigene families that consist of identical DNA sequences, those sequences are usually clustered tandemly and, with the notable exception of the genes for histone proteins, have RNAs as their final products. An example is the family of identical DNA sequences that are the genes for the three largest rRNA molecules (Figure 21.10a). These rRNA mole~ cules are transcribed from a single transcription unit that is repeated tandemly hundreds to thousands of times in one or several clusters in the genome of a multicellular eukaryote.

The many copies of this rRNA transcription unit help cells to quickly make the millions of ribosomes needed for active protein synthesis. The primary transcript is cleaved to yield the three rRNA molecules. These are then combined with proteins and one other kind of rRNA (55 rRNA) to form ribosomal subunits. The classic examples of multigene families of nonidentical genes are tv.'o related families of genes that encode globins, a group of proteins that include the a and ~ polypeptide subunits of hemoglobin. One family, located on chromosome 16 in humans, encodes various forms ofa-globin; the other, on chromosome 11, encodes forms of ~-globin (Figure 21.10b). The different forms of each globin subunit are expressed at different times in development, allowing hemoglobin to function effectively in the changing environment of the developing animal. In humans, for example, the embryonic and fetal forms of hemoglobin have a higher affinity for oxygen than the adult forms, ensuring the efficient transfer ofoxygen from mother to fetus. Also found in the globin gene family clusters are several pseudogenes.

~-Globin

Heme

Hemoglobin a-Globin

\

~-Globin gene

DNA

185 ,RNA_

5.85 •

-

•

Chromosome 16

285

•

••• • I

"','" 11'"

5.85

285

Embryo

Fetus and adult

•, •

Embryo

family

Chromosome 11

•••

•• , p

Fetus

Adult

185 (3) Part of the ribosomal RNA gene family. Three of the hundreds

of copies of rRNA transcription units in a salamander genome are shown at the top (TEM). Each "feather" corresponds to a single transcription unit being transcribed by about 100 molecules of RNA polymerase (the dark dots along the DNA). moving left to right. The growing RNA transcripts extend out from the DNA. In the diagram below the TEM, one transcription unit is shown. It includes the genes for three types of rRNA (blue), adjacent to regions that are transcribed but later removed (yellow). A single transcript is made and then processed to yield one molecule of each of the three rRNA'>, which are crucial components of the ribosome. A fourth rRNA (55 rRNA) is also found in the ribosome, but the gene encoding it is not part of this transcription unit.

(b) The human a-globin and ji-globin gene families. Hemoglobin is composed of two a-globin and two ~-globin polypeptide subunits. The genes (dark blue) encoding a- and ~-globins are found in two families, organized as shown here. The noncoding DNA separating the functional genes within each family cluster includes pseudogenes (green). nonfunctional verSions of the fundional genes. Genes and pseudogenes are named with Greek letters.

... Figure 21.10 Gene families. in (a), how could you determine the direction of transwption if it wasn't indicated by the red arrow?

D

C~APTE~ TWENTY-ON E


437

The arrangement of the genes in gene families has given biologists insight into the evolution of genomes. We will consider some of the processes that have shaped the genomes of different spe

Most are 1()..4,OOO Mb, but a lew are mLICh larger

5, OQO--.4.O, 000

lower than in prokaryote> (VIIithin eukaryotes, lewer denSity is correlated with larger genomes)

Unl(ellular eukaryotes. present, but prevalent only ,n

some spe<Jes

g'~

Multicellular eukaryote, present In most genes

Other non coding

Very tittle

'" Mi.1114"-

Eukarya

Can be large MIlounts: generally more repetlt,ve noncod.ng DNA ,n multicellular eukaryotes

21.4

Multicellular eukaryotes have much noncoding DNA and many multigene families (pp. 434-438) .. Only 1.5% of the human genome codes for proteins or gives rise to rRNAs or tRNAs; the rest is noncoding DNA, including repetitive DNA. .. Transposable Elements and Related Sequenccs The most abundant type of repetitive DNA in multicellular eukaryotes consists of transposable elements and related sequences. Two types of transposable elements occur in eukaryotes: transposons, which move via a DNA intermediate, and retrotrans· posons, which are more prevalent and move via an RNA intermediate. Each element may be hundreds or thousands of base pairs long, and similar but usually not identical copies are dispersed throughout the genome. .. Othcr Repetitive DNA, Including Simple Sequence DNA Short noncoding sequences that are tandemly repeated thousands of times (simple sequence DNA, which includes STRs) are especially prominent in centromeres and telomeres, where they probably play structural roles in the chromosome, .. Genes and Multigene Families Though many eukaryotic genes are present in one copy per haploid chromosome set, others (most, in some species) are members of a family of related genes. The transcription unit corresponding to the three largest rRNAs is tandemly repeated hundreds to thousands of times at one or several chromosomal sites, enabling the cell to quickly make the rRNA for millions of ribosomes. The multiple, slightly different genes in the two globin gene families encode polypeptides used at different developmental stages of an animal.

448

UNIT THREE

Genetics

21.5

Duplication, rearrangementl and mutation of DNA contribute to genome evolution (pp, 438-442) .. Duplication of Entire Chromosome Sets Accidents in cell division can lead to extra copies of all or part of a genome. which may then diverge if one set accumulates sequence changes. .. Altcrations of Chromosomc Structurc The chromosomal organization of genomes can be compared among species, providing information about evolutionary relationships. \Vithin a given species, rearrangements of chromosomes are thought to contribute to the emergence of new species. .. Duplication and Divergence of Gene-Sized Regions of DNA The genes encoding the various globin proteins evolved from one common ancestral globin gene, which du· plicated and diverged into ce-globin and f3-globin ancestral genes, Subsequent duplication and random mutation gave rise to the present globin genes, all of which code for oxygenbinding proteins. The copies of some duplicated genes have diverged so much that the functions of their encoded proteins are now substantially different. .. Rearrangements of Parts of Genes: bon Duplication and bon Shuffling Rearrangement of exons within and between genes during evolution has led to genes containing multiple copies of similar exons and/or several different exons derived from other genes, .. How Transposable Elements Contribute to Genome Evolution Movement of transposable elements or recombination between copies of the same element occasionally generates new sequence combinations that are beneficial to the organism. Such mechanisms can alter the functions of genes or their patterns of expression and regulation. Biology Lab. On·Une HcmoglobinLab

-4 'iI 4I'-21.6 Comparing genome sequences provides clues to evolution and development (pp. 442-447) .. Comparing Genomes Comparative studies of genomes from widely divergent and closely related species provides valuable information about ancient and more recent evolutionary history, respectively. Human and chimpanzee sequences show about 4% difference, mostly due to insertions, deletions, and duplications in one lineage. Along with nu· cleotide variations in specific genes (such as FOXP2, a gene affecting speech), these differences may account for the distinct characteristics of the two species, Single nucleotide polymorphisms among individuals in a species can also yield information about the history of that species. .. Comparing Dcvclopmental Proccsses Homeotic genes and some other genes associated with animal development contain a homeobox region, whose sequence is identical or similar in diverse species. Related sequences are present in the genes of plants and yeasts. Other developmental genes also are highly conserved among animal species, but they may play different roles in the development of different species. During embryonic development in both plants and animals, a cascade of transcription regulators turns genes on or off in a carefully regulated sequence. However, the genes that direct analogous developmental processes differ considerably in sequence in plants and animals as a result of their remote ancestry,

TESTING YOUR KNOWLEDGE SELF-QUIZ I. Bioinformatics includes all of the following except a. using computer programs to align DNA sequences. b. analyzing protein interactions in a species. c. using molecular biology to combine DNA from two different sources in a test tube. d. development of computer-based tools for genome analysis. e. use of mathematical tools to make sense of biological systems. 2. Which of the following has the largest genome and the fewest genes per million base pairs? a. Haemophilus influenzae (bacterium) b. Saccharom}'Ces cerevisiae (yeast) c. Arabidopsis thaliana (plant) d. Drosophila melanogaster (fruit fly) e. Homo sapiens (human) 3. One of the characteristics of retrotransposons is that a. they code for an enzyme that synthesizes DNA using an RNA template. b. they are found only in animal cells. c. they generally move by a cut-and-paste mechanism. d. they contribute a significant portion of the genetic variability seen within a population of gametes. e. their amplification is dependent on a retrovirus. 4. Multigene families are a. groups of enhancers that control transcription. b. usually clustered at the telomeres. c. equivalent to the operons of prokaryotes. d. sets of genes that are coordinately controlled. e. sets of identical or similar genes that have evolved by gene duplication. 5. Two eukaryotic proteins have one domain in common but are otherwise very different. \Vhich of the following processes is most likely to have contributed to this similarity? a. gene duplication b. RNA splicing c. exon shuffling

d. histone modification e. random point mutations

6. Homeotic genes a. encode trJnscription factors that control the expression of genes responsible for specific anatomical structures. b. are found only in Drosophila and other arthropods. c. are the only genes that contain the homeobox domain. d. encode proteins that form anatomical structures in the fly. e. are responsible for patterning during plant development. 7. ••@Wiil At the top of the next column are the amino acid sequences (using the single-letter code; see Figure 5.17) of four short segments of the FOXP2 protein from six spedes: chimpanzee, orangutan, gorilla, rhesus macaque, mouse, and

human. These segments contain all of the amino acid differences behl-'een the FOXP2 proteins of these species.

ATETI.. PK5S0.. T55TT

NARRO

2. ATE TI. .. PKSS E... TSSTT. .. NAR RO 3. ATETI .. PKSSO... TSSTT, .NARRO 4. ATETI .. PKSSO.. TSSNT .SARRO

5 ATETI.. PK5S0 .. T5STT

NARRO

6. VTETI.. PKSSO .. TSSTT, .NARRO Use a highlighter to color any amino acid that varies among the species. (Color that amino acid in all sequences.) Then answer the following questions. a. The chimpanzee, gorilla, and rhesus macaque (C, G, R) sequences are identical. Which lines correspond to those sequences? b. The human sequence differs from that of the C, G, R species at two amino acids. \Vhich line corresponds to the human sequence? Underline the two differences. c. The orangutan sequence differs from the C, G, R sequence at one amino acid (having valine instead of alanine) and from the human sequence at three amino acids. Which line corresponds to the orangutan sequence? d. How many amino acid differences are there between the mouse and the C, G, R species? Circle the amino acid{s) that differ(s) in the mouse. How many amino acid differences are there between the mouse and the human? Draw a square around the amino acid{s) that differ{s) in the mouse. e. Primates and rodents diverged between 60 and 100 million years ago, and chimpanzees and humans diverged about 6 million years ago. Knowing that, what can you conclude by comparing the amino acid differences between the mouse and the C, G, R species with the differences between the human and the C, G, R species? For Self-Qui~ anJwtrs, Jee Appmdix A.

-51401". Visit the Study Area at www.masteringbio.comfora Practice Test. EVOLUTION CONNECTION 8. Genes important in the embryonic development of animals, such as homeobox-containing genes, have been relatively well conserved during evolution; that is, they are more similar among different species than are many other genes. Why is this?

SCIENTIFIC INQUIRY 9. The scientists mapping the SNPs in the human genome noticed that groups of SNPs tended to be inherited together, in blocks known as haplotypes, ranging in length from S,OlXl to 200,0lXl base pairs. There are as few as four or five commonly occurring combinations ofSNPs per haplotype. Propose an explanation for this observation, integrating what you've learned throughout this chapter and this unit.

C~APTE~ TWENTY·ON E


449

AN INTERVIEW WITH

Scott V. Edwards Birds-and the birds of Australia in partkular-might seem a surprising focus for a scientist who grew up in New York City, but they are the main subjects of Scott Edwards's research on evolution. A graduate of Harvard College, with a Ph.D. from the University of California, Berkeley, and postdoctoral work at the University of Florida, Dr, Edwards was at the University of Washington until he returned to Harvard in 2003 as Professor of Organismk and Evolutionary Biology. Jane Reece and Michael Cain interviewed Dr, Edwards at Harvard's Museum of Comparative Zoology, where he is Curator of Ornithology and the head of an active research group. How big is the bird collection herel Since the Museum ofComparative Zoology was founded in 1859, its collection of bird specimens has grown to 350,000 specimens, the largest university collection in the world, Each specimen is tagged with data about the location where it was obtained, the date, often the bird's sex and weight, and other pertinent information. The collection provides a remarkable record of how bird species have changed over the years, as environments have changed. Using the oldest specimens here, we can now compare the sizes, shapes, and genes of birds from populations separated by more than a century What's exciting now is that all the information is Oi'ing digitized, so that we can easilr look at large amounts ofdata from multiple museums. Were you interested in birds as a child? When I was about six years old, we moved from an urban neighborhood to Riverdale, in the northwest corner of the Bronx. There were actually trees there, and we were close to the Hudson River. A few years later, a neighbor took me bird watching-and the rest is history. I'll never forget how impressed I was with my first Northern Aicker; it was just remarkable to 450

me that this bizarrely colored woodpecker lived right in my backyard. Later, as an undergraduate biology major, I really needed a break after taking organic chemistry, and! was able to take a year off. I volunteered at the Smithsonian for several months and then at national parks in Hawaii and California. [t was that first exposure to fieldwork that showed me what biologists do. And when [ came back to college, I was much more focused and motivated. [ think it should be mandatory for biology majors to work in the field or in a lab for a few months, because that's how you find out what science is all about. How did you get interested in evolution? ! was impressed with the precision that molecular tools seemed to bring to the study of evolution.! realize now that things are not as precise as! thought, but the DNA code is still a remarkable yardstick for comparing different species on the same scale.l actually didn't like biochemistry or molecular biology until I could connect them with evolution. But coming back from my year off, I worked in a lab that helped me make the connection. The world is very diverse biologicallr-there are millions of species-and the fact that these species can be compared at the DNA level was a revelation to me. What led you to study Australian birdsl After entering grad school, I volunteered for a research project on birds of paradise in New Guinea; these are Aamooyant songbirds that live in the rain forest. [was hunting around for a project of my own. Several ornithologists directed me to a group of songbirds called babblers, which mostly live in Australia, These birds are fascinating: They live in family groups, using large, domed nests with a hole on the side. Eight or nine ofthem will clamber into one of these nests. [t was very interesting to see the organization oftheir family groups in the wild and also to study the birds on the DNA level. Were they aU related to each other, or not? How different were different families in a single locality? So Iended up doing my dissertation on babblers, comparing individuals within a family,

families within a region, and populations in different parts of the continent. As a postdoc in Florida, you studied the evolution of genes involved in disease resistance in birds. What were Ihese genes? They're called MHC genes, for Major Histocompatibility Complex. These genes are important components ofthe immune systems ofall vertebrates. [n humans, they are the genes you try to match when looking for a compatible donor for an organ transplant. The MHC genes encode proteins that bind to fragments of pathogens and other foreign cdls that have been phagocytized. The MHC proteins then move to the cell swface and present the fragments tothe rest ofthe immune system, sa}~ng, "Hey, [found something foreign." The MHC is fascinating from an evolutionary standpoint, because pathogens and parasites seem to be major drivers ofevolutionary change. Theyre constantly pla~~ng cat and mouse with the host. In the pathogens, more efficient wplanled population population

o.LJL...L--o-

Source Tram.planted population population

CONCLUSION Endler concluded that the change in predator resulted in different variations (brighter color patterns) being favored in the transplanted population. Over a relatively short time, an observable evolutionary change occurred in this population. SOURCE J A. Endler. Naturill >election on color patterns In Poecilia felKuJara, fllOlurion 34:76-91 (1980).

_IIIl:f.ill.

What would happen if. after 22 months, guppies from the transplanted population were returned to the source pooP

guppy populations in Trinidad, the male guppies' color patterns are so variable that no two males look alike. These highly variable colors are controlled by a number of genes that, in the wild, are only expressed in adult males. Female guppies are attracted to males with bright colors, choosing them as mates more often than they choose males with drab coloring. But the bright colors that attract females might also make the males more conspicuous to predators. Thus, if a guppy population contained both brightly colored and drab males, we might predict that predators would tend to eat more of the brightly colored fish. Endler wondered how the trade-off between attracting mates and attracting predators affects coloration in male guppies. In the field, he observed that the color patterns of male guppies appeared to correspond to the intensity of predation. In pools that had few predator species, male guppies tended to be brightly colored, whereas in pools that had many predators, males were less brightly colored. Based on these observations, Endler hypothesized that intense predation caused natural selection in male guppies, favoring the traitofdrab coloration. He tested this hypothesis by transferring brightly colored guppies to a pool with many predators. As he predicted, over time the transplanted guppy population became less brightly colored. One guppy predator, the killifish, preys on juvenile guppies that have not yet displayed their adult coloration. Endler predicted that ifguppies with drab colors were transferred to a pool with only killifish, eventually the descendants of these guppies would be more brightly colored (because females prefer males with bright colors). Figure 22.13, on the facing page, describes this experiment. Indeed, in their new environment, the guppy population rapidly came to feature brighter colors, demonstrating that selection can cause rapid evolution in wild populations.

The Evolution of Drug-Resistant HIV An example of ongoing natural selection that affects our own lives dramatically is the evolution of drug-resistant pathogens (disease-causing organisms and viruses). This is a particular problem with bacteria and viruses that reproduce rapidly, because individuals that are resistant to a particular drug can increase in number very quickly. Consider the example of HIV (human immunodeficiency virus), the virus that causes AIDS (see Chapters 19 and 43). Researchers have developed numerous drugs to combat this pathogen, but using these medications selects for viruses resistant to the drugs. A few drug-resistant viruses may be present by chance at the beginning of treatment. Those that survive the early doses reproduce, passing on the alleles that enable them to resist the drug. In this way, the frequency of resistant viruses increases rapidly in the population. Figure 22.14 illustrates the evolution of HIV resistance to the drug 3TC. Scientists designed 3TC to interfere with reverse transcriptase. HIV uses this enzyme to make a DNA version of

100 u

~

Patient No.2

M

£ c

75

.,~

•

~

r

50 Patient No.3

'0 C

,•

25

~

0 0

2

4

6 Weeks

8

10

12

... Figure 22.14 Evolution of drug resistance in HIV. Rare resistant viruses multiplied quICkly when each of these patients was treated with the anti-HIV drug 3T(. Within just a few weeks. 3TCresistant organisms made up 100% of the virus population in each case.

its RNA genome, which is then inserted into the DNA of the human host cell (see Figure 19.8). Because the 3TC molecule is similar in shape to the cytosine-bearing (Cbearing) nucleotide of DNA, HIV's reverse transcriptase picks up a 3TC molecule instead ofa C-bearing nucleotide and inserts the 3TC into a growing DNA chain. This error terminates further elongation of the DNA and thus blocks reproduction ofHIV. The 3TC-resistant varieties of HIV have versions of reverse transcriptase that are able to discriminate between the drug and the normal C-bearing nucleotide. These viruses have no advantage in the absence of3TC; in fact, they replicate more slowly than viruses that carry the typical version of reverse transcriptase. But once 3TC is added to their environment, it becomes a powerful selecting force, favoring the survival of resistant viruses (see Figure 22.14). Both the guppy example and the HIV example highlight m'o key points about natural selection. First, natural selection is a process of editing rather than a creative mechanism. A drug does not create resistant pathogens; it selectsfor resistant individuals that were already present in the population. Second, natural selection depends on time and place. It favors those characteristics in a genetically variable population that provide advantage in the current, local environment. What is beneficial in one situation may be useless or even harmful in another. In the guppy example, individuals that have drab colors are at an advantage in pools with fierce predators but at a disadvantage in pools without them.

The Fossil Record A second type of evidence for evolution comes from fossils. The fossil record shows that past organisms differed from present-day organisms and that many species have become

CHAPlE~ TWENTY·TWO

Descent with Modification: A Darwinian View of Life

461

....'IIlIIIIMl..l11!~pelvisand hind limb (c) Dorudon (fully aquatitl

Latham Shale dig site, San Bernardino County, California ... Figure 22.15 Fossil evidence of evolution in a group of trilobites. These fossils are just a few in a series discovered in the latham Shale bed, which was deposited between 513 and 512 million years ago The sequence shows change over time in the location and angle of the spines of the head shield (the area marked by red dots).

extinct. Fossils also show the evolutionary changes that have occurred over time in various groups oforganisms (Figure 22.15). Over longer time scales, fossils document the origins of major new groups of organisms. An example is the fossil record of early cetaceans, the mammalian order that includes whales, dolphins, and porpoises. The earliest cetaceans lived 50-60 million years ago. The fossil record indicates that prior to that time, most mammals were terrestrial. Although scientists had long realized that whales and other cetaceans must have originated from land mammals, few fossils had been found that revealed how cetacean limb structure had changed over time, leading eventually to the loss of hind limbs and the development of flippers. In the past few decades, however, a series of remarkable fossils have been discovered in Pakistan, Egypt, and North America that document the transition from life on land to life in the sea. Each organism shown in Figure 22.16 differs from present-day mammals, including present-day whales, and is now extinct. Collectively, these and other early fossils document the formation of new species and the origin of a major new group of mammals, the cetaceans. 462

UNIT FOUR


(d) 8a/aena

(recent whale ancestor) ... Figure 22.16 The transition to life in the sea. The hypothesis that whales and other cetaceans evolved from terrestrial organisms predicts that cetacean ancestors were four-legged, Indeed. paleontologists have unearthed fossils of elctinct cetaceans that had hind limbs. including the four species whose skeletons are depicted here (not drawn to scale), Additional fossils show that Pakicetus and Rodhocerus had a type of ankle bone that is otherwise unique to a group of land mammals that includes pigs. hippos. cows, camels. and deer. This similarity strongly suggests that cetaceans are most closely related to this group of land mammals.

In addition to providing evidence of how life on Earth has changed over time-the pattern of evolution-the fossil record also can be used to test evolutionary hypotheses arising from other kinds of evidence. For example, based on anatomical data, scientists think that early land vertebrates evolved from a group of fishes and that early amphibians evolved from descendants ofearly land vertebrates. Ifthese relationships are correct, we would predict that the earliest fossils of fishes should be older than the earliest fossils of land vertebrates. Similarly, we would predict that the earliest fossil land vertebrates should be older than the earliest fossil amphibians. These predictions can be tested using radioactive dating techniques (see Chapter 25) to determine the age of fossils. To date, all of these predictions have been upheld, which suggests that our understanding of the evolutionary relationships on which the predictions were based is correct.

Homology A third type of evidence for evolution comes from analyzing similarities among different organisms. As we've discussed,

Pharyngeal pouches

evolution is a process of descent with modification: Characteristics present in an ancestral organism are altered (by natural selection) in its descendants over time as they face different environmental conditions. As a result, related species can have

Post-anal tail

characteristics with an underlying similarity even though they may have very different functions. Such similarity resulting from common ancestry is known as homology. Chick embryo (lM)

Anatomical and Molecular Homologies

The view ofevolution as a remodeling process leads to the prediction that closely related species should share similar features-and they do. Ofcourse, closely related species share the features used to determine their relationship, but they also share many other features. Some of these shared features make little sense except in the context of evolution. For example, the forelimbs of all mammals, including humans, cats, whales, and bats, show the same arrangement of bones from the shoulder to the tips of the digits, even though these appendages have very different functions: lifting, walking, swimming, and flying (Figure 22.17), Such striking anatomical resemblances would be highly unlikely if these structures had arisen anew in each species. Rather, the underlying skeletons ofthe arms, forelegs, flippers, and wings ofdifferent mammals are homologous structures that represent variations on a structural theme that was present in their common ancestor. Comparing early stages of development in different animal species reveals additional anatomical homologies not visible in adult organisms. For example, at some point in their devel-

Human embryo

... Figure 22.18 Anatomical similarities in vertebrate embryos. At some stage in their embryonic de~elopment, all ~ertebrates have a tail located posterior to the anus (referred to as a post·anal taill. as well as pharyngeal (throat) pouches. Descent from a common ancestor can explain such similarities.

opment, all vertebrate embryos have a tail located posterior to (behind) the anus, as well as structures called pharyngeal (throat) pouches (Figure 22.18). These homologous throat pouches ultimately develop into structures with very different functions, such as gills in fishes and parts ofthe ears and throat in humans and other mammals. Some of the most intriguing homologies concern "leftover" structures ofmarginal, ifany, importance to the organism. These vestigial structures are remnantsoffeatures that served important functions in the organism's ancestors. For instance, the skeletons of some snakes retain vestiges of the pelvis and leg bones of walking ancestors. Another example is the decreased size and loss offunction in cetaceans' hind limbs as these organisms faced the challenges of life in water (see Figure 22.16). We would not expect to see these vestigial structures if snakes and whales had origins separate from other vertebrate animals. Biologists also observe similarities among organisms at the molecular level. All forms oflife use the same genetic language of DNA and RNA, and the genetic code is essentially universal (see Chapter 17). Thus, it is likely that all species Ulna---+-' descended from common ancestors that used this code. But Carpals _""'''''.... molecular homologies go beMetacarpals yond a shared code. For examPhalanges ple, organisms as dissimilar as humans and bacteria share genes inherited from a very Human Col Whale B" distant common ancestor. Like ... Figure 22.17 Mammalian forelimbs: homologous structures. E~en though they ha~e become the forelimbs of humans and adapted for different functions, the forelimbs of all mammals are constructed from the same basic skeletal whales, these genes have often elements: one large bone (purple), attached to two smaller bones (orange and tan), attached to several small bones (gold). attached to several metacarpals (green). attached to approximately five digits. or phalanges (blue). acquired different functions. CHAPlE~ TWENTY·TWO

Descent with Modification: A Darwinian View of Life

463

Some homologous characteristics, such as the genetic code, are shared by all species because they date to the deep ancestral past. In contrast, homologous characteristics that evolved more recently are shared only within smaller groups oforgan· isms. Consider an example in the tetrapods (from the Greek tetra, four, and pod, foot), the vertebrate group that consists of amphibians, mammals, and reptiles (including birds-see Figure 22.19). An tetrapods possess the same basic limb bone structure illustrated in Figure 22.17, but the ancestors of tetrapods do not. Thus, homologous characteristics form a nested pattern: All life shares the deepest layer, and each successive smaller group adds their own homologies to those they share with larger groups. This nested pattern is exactly what we would expe

0.9

", ~

0.5

~

0.1

g

l

-"

"

... Figure 24.13 A narrow hybrid zone for B. variegata and B. bombina in Europe. The graph shows the pattern of allele frequency changes across the width of the zone near Krakow, Poland.

498

UNIT FOUR


.-.""---'"

O.O11-_~_~_~_~_':;"'---~=~ 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 Distance from hybrid zone center (km)

hybrid zone, represented by the thick red line on the map, extends for 4,000 km but is less than 10 km wide in most places. Across a given "slice" ofthe hybrid zone, the frequency ofalleles specific to yellow-bellied toads typically decreases from close to 100% at the edge where only yellow-bellied toads are found, to 50% in the central portion of the zone, to 0% at the edge where only fire-bellied toads are found. \Vhat causes such a pattern of allele frequencies across a hybrid zone? We can infer that there is an obstacle to gene flow-otherwise alleles from one parent species would also be found in the gene pool of the other parent species. Are geographic barriers reducing gene flow? Not in this case, since the toads move freely throughout the zone. A more important factor is that hybrid toads have increased rates of embryonic mortality and a variety of morphological abnormalities, including ribs that are fused to the spine and malformed tadpole mouthparts. Because the hybrids have poor survival and reproduction, they produce few viable offspring with members of the parent species. As a result, hybrids rarely serve as a stepping-stone from which alleles are passed from one species to the other. Other hybrid zones have more complicated spatial patterns. Consider the hybrid zone between the ground crickets Aflonemobius fasciatus and Allollemobius socius, both found in the Appalachian Mountains in the eastern United States. The environment has a powerful impact on the fitness of the parent species. A.fasciatus is more successful than A. socius in colder portions ofthe zone, and the reverse is true in warm 10-

OA barrier OFour populations of a species are connected

\

to gene flow is established.

GThis population begins to diverge from the other three populations.

cations. Thus A.fasciatus predominates in cooler sites (high elevation or north-facing locations), and A. socius predominates in warmer sites (low elevation or south-facing locations). The topography of this region is complex, with many hills and valleys, so there are many areas where patches of the ty.·o spe
~

II BB

00

Triticum monococcum

Wild

Wild

Triticum

I tauschii

(2n", 14)

(2n", 14)

(2n", 14)

AA

e. 56.

d.28.

6. According to the punctuated equilibria model, a. natural selection is unimportant as a mechanism of evolution. b. given enough time, most existing species will branch gradually into new species. c. most new species accumulate their unique features relatively rapidly as they come into existence, then change little for the rest of their dumtion as a species. d. most evolution occurs in sympatric populations. e. speciation is usually due to a single mutation. For &IFQlliz answers, see Appendix A.

-N·if.• Visit the Study Area at www.masteringbio.comfora Practice Test.

EVOLUTION CONNECTION 7. \xrhat is the biological basis for assigning all human populations to a single species? Can you think of a scenario by which a second human species could originate in the future?

506

SCIENTIFIC INQUIRY

UNIT FOUR


AABB DD

T aestivum (bread wheat) (2n '" 42)

SCIENCE, TECHNOLOGY, ANO SOCIETY 9. In the Unite
The

ofl KEY

CONCEPTS

25.1 Conditions on early Earth made the origin of life possible 25.2 The fossil record documents the history of life 25.3 Key events in life's history include the origins of single-celled and multicelled organisms and the colonization of land 25.4 The rise and fall of dominant groups reneet continental drift, mass extinctions, and adaptive radiations 25.5 Major changes in body form can result from changes in the sequences and regulation of developmental genes 25.6 Evolution is not goal oriented

r'DJiD'.M

Lost Worlds

isitors to Antarctica today encounter one of Earth's harshest, most barren environments. In this land of extreme cold where there is almost no liquid water, life is sparse and small-the largest fully terrestrial animal is a fly 5 mm long. But even as early antarctic explorers struggled to survive, some of them made an astonishing discovery: fossil evidence that life once thrived where it now barely exists. Fossils reveal that 500 million years ago, the ocean waters surrounding Antarctica were warm and teeming with tropical invertebrates. Later, the continent was covered in forests for hundreds of millions of years. At various times, a wide range of animals stalked through these forests, including 3-metertall predatory "terror birds" and giant dinosaurs such as the voracious Cryolophosaurus (Figure 25.1), a 7-meter-long relative of Tyrannosaurus rex. Fossils discovered in other parts ofthe world tell a similar, ifnot quite as surprising, story: Past organisms were very different from

V

... Figure 25.1 What does fossil evidence say about where these dinosaurs lived? those now alive. The sweeping changes in life on Earth revealed by fossils illustrate macroevolution, the pattern of evolution over large time scales. Specific examples of macroevolutionary change include the origin of key biochemical processes such as photosynthesis, the emergence ofthe first terrestrial ... CryolophosaUfUS skull vertebrates, and the long-term impact of a mass extinction on the diversityoflife. Taken together, such changes provide a grand view of the evolutionary history of life on Earth. We'll examine that history in this chapter, beginning with hypotheses regarding the origin of life. The origin of life is the most speculative topic of the entire unit, for no fossil evidence of that seminal episode exists. We will then turn to the fossil record and what it tells us about major events in the history of life, paying particular attention to factors that have helped to shape the rise and fall of different groups of organisms over time.

r~:~~~;i:n~5~~ early Earth made the origin of life possible

The earliest evidence ofHfe on Earth comes from fossils of microorganisms that are about 3.5 billion years old. But when and how did the first living cells appear? Observations and experiments in chemistry, geology, and physics have led scientists to propose one scenario that we'll examine here. They hypothesize that chemical and physical processes on early Earth, aided by the emerging force of 507

natural selection, could have produced very simple cells through a sequence of four main stages: I. The abiotic (nonliving) synthesis of small organic molecules, such as amino acids and nucleotides 2, The joining of these sman molecules into macromolecules, including proteins and nucleic acids 3. The packaging of these molecules into "protobionts;' droplets with membranes that maintained an internal chemistry different from that of their surroundings 4. The origin of self~replicating molecules that eventually made inheritance possible

Though speculative, this scenario leads to predictions that can be tested in the laboratory. In this section, we will examine some of the evidence for each stage.

Synthesis of Organic Compounds on Early Earth There is scientific evidence that Earth and the other planets of the solar system formed about 4.6 billion years ago, condensing from a vast cloud of dust and rocks that surrounded the young sun. For the first few hundred million years, life probably could not have originated or survived on Earth because the planet was still being bombarded by huge chunks of rock and ice left over from the formation of the solar system. TIle collisions generated enough heat to vaporize the available water and prevent seas from forming. This phase likely ended about 3.9 billion years ago. As the bombardment of early Earth slowed, conditions on the planet were extremely different from those of today. The first atmosphere was probably thick with water vapor, along with various compounds released by volcanic eruptions, including nitrogen and its oxides, carbon dioxide, methane, ammonia, hydrogen, and hydrogen sulfide. As Earth cooled, the water vapor condensed into oceans, and much of the hydrogen quickly escaped into space. In the 1920s, Russian chemist A. I. Oparin and British scientist J. B. S. Haldane independently hypothesized that Earth's early atmosphere was a reducing (electron-adding) environment, in which organic compounds could have formed from simple molecules. The energy for this organic synthesis could have come from lightning and intense UV radiation. Haldane suggested that the early oceans were a solution oforganic molecules, a "primitive soup" from which life arose. In 1953, Stanley Miller and Harold Urey, of the University of Chicago, tested theOparin-Haldane hypothesis by creating laboratory conditions comparable to those that scientists at the time thought existed on early Earth (see Figure 4.2). Their apparatus yielded a variety of amino acids found in organisms today, along with other organic compounds. Many laboratories have since repeated the experiment using different recipes for the atmosphere. Some of these variations also produced organic compounds. 508

UNIT FOUR


However, it is unclear whether the atmosphere of young Earth contained enough methane and ammonia to be reducing. Growing evidence suggests that the early atmosphere was made up primarily of nitrogen and carbon dioxide and was neither re~ ducing nor oxidizing (electron removing). Some recent MiUerUrey-type experiments using such atmospheres have produced organic molecules. In any case, it is likely that small "pockets~ of the early atmosphere-perhaps near volcanic openings-were reducing. Perhaps instead of forming in the atmosphere, the first organic compounds formed near submerged volcanoes and deep-sea vents, where hot water and minerals gush into the ocean from Earth's interior (Figure 25.2). These regions are also rich in inorganic sulfur and iron compounds, which are important in ATP synthesis by present~day organisms. Miller~Urey-type experiments demonstrate that the abiotic synthesis of organic molecules is possible. Support for this idea also comes from analyses of the chemical composition of meteorites. Among the meteorites that land on Earth are carbonaceous chondrites, rocks that are 1-2% carbon compounds by mass. Fragments of a fallen 4.5-bi11ion-year-old chondrite found in Australia in 1969 contain more than 80 amino acids, some in large amounts. Remarkably, the proportions of these amino acids are similar to those produced in the Miller-Urey experiment. The chondrite amino acids cannot

.... Figure 25.2 A window to early life? An instrument on the research submarine Alvin samples the water around a hydrothermal vent in the Sea of Cortes, More than 1,5 km below the surface, the vent releases hydrogen sulfide and iron sulfide, which react and produce pyrite (fool's gold) and hydrogen gas. Prokaryotes that live near the vent use the hydrogen as an energy source Such environments are among the most extreme in which life exists today, and some researchers favor the hypothesis that life may have begun in similar regions of early Earth.

be contaminants from Earth because they consist of an equal mix ofD and L isomers (see Chapter 4). Organisms make and use only Lisomers, with a few rare exceptions.

Abiotic Synthesis of Macromolecules The presence of small organic molecules, such as amino acids, is not sufficient for the emergence ofHfe as we know it. Every cell has a vast assortment of macromolecules, including enzymes and other proteins and the nucleic acids that are essential for self-replication. Could such macromolecules have formed on early Earth? By dripping solutions of amino acids onto hot sand, clay, or rock, researchers have been able to produce amino acid polymers. The polymers formed spontaneously, without the help of enzymes or ribosomes. But unlike proteins, these polymers are a complex mix ofHnked and cross-linked amino acids. Nevertheless, it is possible that such polymers may have acted as weak catalysts for a variety of reactions on early Earth.

Protobionts

the mixture organize into a bilayer at the surface ofthe droplet, much like the lipid bilayer of a plasma membrane. Liposomes can ~reproduce!! (Figure 25.3a), and because their bilayer is selectively permeable, liposomes undergo osmotic swelling or shrinking when placed in solutions of different solute concentrations. Some of these liposomes can perform simple metabolic reactions, another important step toward the origin of life (Figure 25,3b),

Self-Replicating RNA and the Dawn of Natural Selection The first genetic material was most likely RNA, not DNA. Thomas Cech, of the University of Colorado, and Sidney Altman, of Yale University, found that RNA, which plays a central role in protein synthesis, can also carry out a number of enzyme-like catalytic functions. Cech called these RNA catalysts ribozymcs. Some ribozymes can make complementary copies ofshort pieces of RNA, provided that they are supplied with nucleotide building blocks, Natural selection on the molecular level has produced ribozymes capable of self-replication in the laboratory, How does this occur? Unlike double-stranded DNA, which takes the form of a uniform helix, single-stranded RNA molecules assume a variety ofspecific three-dimensional shapes mandated by their nucleotide sequences. In a particular environment, RNA molecules with certain base sequences are more stable and replicate faster and with fewer errors than other se· quences. The RNA molecule whose sequence is best suited to the surrounding environment and has the greatest ability to replicate itself will leave the most descendant molecules. Its descendants will notbe a single RNA ~spedes" but instead will be a family ofsequences that differ slightly because of copying

Two key properties of life are accurate replication and metabolism. Neither property can exist without the other. DNA molecules carry genetic information, including the instructions needed to replicate themselves accurately. But the replication of DNA requires elaborate enzymatic machinery, along with a copious supply of nucleotide building blocks that must be provided by the cell's metabolism (see Chapter 16). While Miller-Urey-type experiments have yielded some of the nitrogenous bases of DNA and RNA, they have not produced anything like nucleotides. If building blocks of nucleic acids were not part of the early organic soup, self-replicating molecules and a metabolism-like source of the building blocks must have appeared together. How did that happen? 20 11m I The necessary conditions may have been met by protobionts, collections of abiotically produced molecules surrounded by a membrane-like structure. Protobionts may exhibit some properties of life, including simple reproduction and metabolism, as well as the maintenanceofan internal chemical environment different from that of their surroundings. Laboratory experiments demonstrate that protobionts could have formed (a) Simple reproduction. This lipospontaneously from abiotically prosome is "giving birth' to smaller duced organic compounds. For example, liposomes (LM). certain small membrane-bounded droplets called liposomes can form when lipids or other organic molecules are added ... Figure 25.3 Laboratory versions to water. The hydrophobic molecules in of liposome protobionts.

Glucose-phosphate

Phosphate

Maltose (b) Simple metabolism. If enzymes-in this case, phosphatase and amylase-are included in the solution from which the droplets self-assemble, some liposomes can carry out simple metabolic readions and export the products

CHAPTER TWENTY·fIVE

The History of Life on Earth

509

errors. Occasionally, a copying error will result in a molecule that folds into a shape that is e\'en more stable or more adept at self-replication than the ancestral sequence. Similar selection events may have occurred on early Earth. Thus, the molecular biology of today may have been preceded by an ~RNA world,~ in which small RNA molecules that carried genetic in· formation ....'ere able to replicate and to store information about the protobionts that carried them. A protobiont with self-replicating, catalytic RNA would differ from its many neighbors that did not carry RNA or that carried RNA without such capabilities. If that protobiont could grow, split, and pass its RNA molecules to its daughters, the daughters would have some of the properties of their parent. Although the first such protobionts must have carried only limited amounts of genetic information, specifying only a few properties, their inherited characteristics could have been acted on by natural selection. The most successful of the early protobionts would have increased in number because they could exploit their resources effec, tively and pass their abilities on to subsequent generations. The emergence of such protobionts may seem unlikely, but remember that there could have been trillions of protobionts in bodies of water on early Earth. Even those with only a limited capacity for inheritance would have had a huge advantage over the rest. Once RNA sequences that carried genetic information appeared in protobionts, many further changes would have been possible. For example, RNA could have provided the template on which DNA nucleotides were assembled. Double-stranded DNA is a much more stable repository for genetic information than the more fragile single·stranded RNA. DNA also can be replicated more accurately. Accurate replication was a necessity as genomes grew larger through gene duplication and other processes and as more proper· ties of the protobionts became coded in genetic information. After DNA appeared, perhaps RNA molecules began to take on their present-day roles as intermediates in the translation of genetic programs, and the RNA world gave way to a ~DNA world.~ The stage was now set for a blossoming of diverse life-forms-a change we see documented in the fossil record. CONCEPT

CHECk

25.1

I, \Vhat hypothesis did Miller and Urey test in their famous experiment? 2. How would the appearance of protobionts ha\'e represented a key step in the origin of life? 3. • i,il(fillii If scientists built a protobiont with selfreplicating RNA and metabolism under conditions similar to those on early Earth, would this prove that life began as in the experiment? Explain. For suggested answers, see Appendix A.

510

UNiT fOUR


Starting with the earliest traces of life, the fossil record opens a window into the world of long ago and provides glimpses of the evolution onife over billions ofyears. In this section, well explore what the fossil record reveals about the major changes in the history of life-what those changes have been and how they may have occurred.

The Fossil Record Recall from Chapter 22 that sedimentary rocks are the richest source of fossils. As a result, the fossil record is based primarily on the sequence in which fossils have accumulated in sedimentary rock layers called strata (see Figure 22.3). Useful information is also provided by other types of fossils, such as insects preserved in amber (fossilized tree sap) and mammals frozen in ice. The fossil record shows that there have been great changes in the kinds of organisms that dominated life on Earth at different points in time (Figure 25.4). Many past organisms were unlike today's organisms, and many organisms that once were common are now extinct. As well see later, fossils also document how new groups of organisms arose from previously existing ones. As substantial and significant as the fossil record is, keep in mind that it is an incomplete chronicle ofe\'olutionarychange. Many of Earth's organisms probably did not die in the right place at the right time to be preserved as fossils. Of those fossils that were formed, many were destroyed by later geologic processes, and only a fraction of the others have been discovered. As a result, the known fossil record is biased in favor of species that existed for a long time, were abundant and widespread in certain kinds of environments, and had hard shel1s, skeletons, or other parts that facilitated their fossilization. Even with its limitations, ho.....ever, the fossil record is a remarkably detailed account of biological change over the vast scale of geologic time. Furthermore, as shown by the recently unearthed fossils of whale ancestors with hind limbs (see Figure 22.16), gaps in the fossil record continue to be filled by new discoveries.

How Rocks and Fossils Are Dated Fossils are valuable data for reconstructing the history ofJife, but only if we can determine .....here they fit in that unfolding story. \Vhile the order of fossils in rock strata tells us the sequence in which the fossils were laid down-their relative ages-it does not tell us their actual (absolute) ages. Examining the relative positions of fossils in strata is like peeling off layers of wallpaper in an old house. You can determine the

... Figure 25.4 Documenting the history of life. These fossils illustrate representative organisms from different points in time.

Present

... Rhomaleosaurus vietor, a plesiosaur. These large marine reptiles were important predators from 200 million to 65.5 million years ago.

... Dimetrodon, the largest known carnivore of its day, was more closely related to mammals than to reptiles. The spectacular "sail" on its back probably functioned in temperature regulation

... Coccosteus cuspidalUs. a placoderm fish that had a bony shield covering its head and front end.

... Casts of ammoOlles, a group of molluscs that lived from 400 million to 65 million years ago and ranged in size from a fewcmto2m.

'" ... Hallucigenia, a ::;; member of a morphologically ~ diverse group of animals found in the Burgess Shale fossil bed in the Canadian Rockies. .... Did:insonia costara, a member of the Ediacaran biota. an extinct group of soft-bodied organisms.

... Some prokaryotes bind thin films of sediments together, producing layered rocks called stromatolites, such as these in Shark Bay. Australia.

g ... A unicellular \D

& 8__

... A section through a fossilized stromatolite.

eukaryote. the alga Tappania, from northern Australia.



511

sequence in which the layers were applied, but not the year each layer was added. How can we determine the absolute age of a fossil? (Note that "absolute" dating does not mean errorless dating, but only that an age is given in years rather than relative terms such as before and after.) One of the most common techniques is radiometric dating, which is based on the decay of radioactive isotopes (see Chapter 2). A radioactive "parent" isotope decays to a "daughter" isotope at a constant rate. The rate of decay is expressed by the half-life, the time required for 50% of the parent isotope to decay (Figure 25.5). Each variety of radioactive isotope has a characteristic half-life, which is not affected by temperature, pressure, or other such environmental variables. For example, carbon-14 decays relatively quickly; it has a half-life of 5,730 years. Uranium-238 decays slowly; its half-life is 4.5 billion years. Fossils contain isotopes of elements that accumulated in the organisms when they were alive. For example, the carbon in a living organism includes the most common carbon isotope, carbon-12, as well as a radioactive isotope, carbon-l4. \'(fhen the organism dies, it stops accumulating carbon, and the amount of carbon-12 in its tissues does not change over time. However, the carbon-14 that it contains at the time of death slowly decays and becomes another element, nitrogen14. Thus, by measuring the ratio of carbon-14 to carbon-12 in a fossil, we can determine the fossil's age. This method works for fossils up to about 75,000 years old; fossils older than that contain too little carbon-14 to be detected with current techniques. Radioactive isotopes with longer half-lives are used to date older fossils. Determining the age of old fossils in sedimentary rocks can be challenging. One reason is that organisms do not use ra-

00000 .

ACOJmulating "daughter" isotope

-~ c c ~'c

E

_~. o • c •

ge>t; ~

£2

s:

Remaining "parent"'

"-L__':"~t:o~p':-=i __~-=:::":'::::::~'~/'~'=" 2 3 Time (half-lives)

4

.. Figure 25.5 Radiometric dating. In this diagram, each division of the clock face represents a half-life. ••I;t-WIII Relabel the x-axis (time) of this graph to illustrate the radioactive decay of uranium·238 (half·life = 4.5 billion years).

512

UNIT FOUR


dioisotopes that have long half-lives, such as uranium-238, to build their bones or shells. Moreover, the sedimentary rocks themselves tend to be composed of sediments of differing ages. Hence, we usually cannot date old fossils directly. However, geologists can apply an indirect method to infer the absolute age of fossils that are sandwiched between two layers of volcanic rocks. For example, researchers might measure the amount in each rock layer of the radioactive isotope potassium-40, which has a half-life of 1.3 billion years. If the two surrounding rock layers were determined to be 525 million and 535 million years old, the fossils likely represent organisms that lived about 530 million years ago. The magnetism of rocks can also provide dating information. During the formation of volcanic and sedimentary rocks, iron particles in the rock align themselves with Earth's magnetic field. When the rock hardens, the particles' orientation is frozen in time. Measurements of the magnetism of various rock layers indicate that Earth's north and south magnetic poles have reversed repeatedly in the past. Because these magnetic reversals affect the entire planet at once, reversals in one location can be matched with corresponding patterns elsewhere. This approach allows rocks to be dated when other methods are not available. It also can be used to corroborate ages estimated in other ways. Now that we've seen how fossils can be dated, let's turn to an example of what we can learn from them.

The Origin of New Groups of Organisms Some fossils provide a detailed look at the origin of new groups of organisms. Such fossils are central to our understanding of evolution; they illustrate how new features of organisms arise and how long it takes for such changes to occur. We'll examine one such case here, the origin of mammals. Along with amphibians and reptiles, mammals belong to the group of animals called tetrapods (from the Greek tetra, four, and pod, foot), named for having four limbs. Mammals have a number of unique anatomical features that fossilize readily, allowing scientists to trace their origin. Forexample, the lower jaw is composed of one bone (the dentary) in mammals but several bones in other tetrapods. In addition, the lower and upper jaws hinge betv.'een a different set ofbones in mammals than in other tetrapods. As well explore in Chapter 34, mammals also have a unique set of three bones that transmit sound in the middle ear (the hammer, anvil, and stirrup), whereas other tetrapods have only one such bone (the stirrup). Finally, the teeth of mammals are differentiated into incisors (for tearing), canines (for piercing), and the multi-pointed premolars and molars (for grinding). In contrast, the teeth of other tetrapods lISuaily consist of a row of undifferentiated, single-pointed teeth. As detailed in Figure 25.6, the fossil record shows that the unique features of mammalian jaws and teeth evolved as a series ofgradual modifications. As you study Figure 25.6, bear in

~

Figure 25.6

••

• The Origin of Mammals

Over the course of 120 million years, mammals originated gradually from a group of tetrapods called synapsids. Shown here are a few of the many fossil organisms whose morphological features represent intermediate steps between living mammals and their synapsid ancestors. The evolutionary context of the origin of mammals is shown in the tree diagram at right.

"...

, . . - - - - - - - - - - Reptiles ~~J (including dinosaurs and birds) EARLY TETRAPODS

Dimetrodon

'i

m

'!.

••~ e v e r ylate cynodonts

K.y

.,

•

Articular

Oi~

•

Quadrate

"~ ,

~

0

._~

Temporal fenestra

Temporal fenestra

Temporal fenestra

Dentary •

III

Squamosal

., 0

III

Mammals

Synapsids had multiple bones in the lower jaw and single-pointed teeth. The jaw hinge was formed by the articular and quadrate bones. Synapsids also had an opening called the temporal fenestra behind the eye socket. Powerful cheek muscles for dosing the jaws probably passed through the temporal fenestra. Over time, this opening enlarged and moved in front of the hinge between the lower and upper jaws, thereby increasing the power and precision with which the jaws could be closed (much as moving a doorknob away from the hinge makes a door easier to close).

Later, a group of synapsids called therapsids appeared. Therapsids had large dentary bones, long faces, and the first signs of specialized teeth, large canines.

In early cynodont therapsids. the dentary was the largest bone in the lower jaw, the temporal fenestra was large and positioned forward of the jaw hinge, and teeth with several cusps first appeared (not visible in the diagram). As in earlier synapsids, the jaw had an articular-quadrate hinge.

Later cynodonts had teeth with complex cusp patterns and their lower and upper jaws hinged in two locations: They retained the original articular-quadrate hinge and formed a new, second hinge between the dentary and squamosal bones.

Very late cynodont (195 mya) In the common ancestor of this very late cynodont and mammals, the original articular-quadrate hinge was lost, leaving the dentarysquamosal hinge as the only hinge between the lower and upper jaws (as in1iving mammals). The articular and quadrate bones migrated into the ear region (not shown), where they functioned in transmitting sound. In the mammal lineage, these two bones later evolved into the familiar hammer and anvil (see Figure 34.31). CHAPTER TWENTY·fIVE


513

mind that it includes just a few examples of the fossil skulls that document the origin of mammals. If all the known fossils in the sequence were arranged by shape and placed side by side, their features would blend smoothly from one group to the next, reflecting how the features of a new group, the mammals, gradually arose in a previously existing group, the cynodonts. CONCEPT

CHECI(

,

Cenooie

Humans Colonization ofland---',-- ... Origin of solar system and Earth

25.2

1. Your measurements indicate that a fossilized skull you

unearthed has a carbon-14/carbon-12 ratio about){6 that of the skulls of present-day animals. What is the approximate age of the fossilized skull? 2. Describe an example from the fossil record that shows how life has changed over time. 3. _IW.oI,. Suppose researchers discover a fossil of an organism that lived 300 million years ago, but had mammalian teeth and a mammalian jaw hinge. What inferences might you draw from this fossil about the origin of mammals and the evolution of novel skeletal structures? Explain.

MUlticellular! eukaryotes

For suggested answers. see Appendix A Prokaryotes

Single-<elled eukaryotes

r~;;t::e:t~~~~ifels

history include the origins of singlecelled and multicelled organisms and the colonization of land

The study of fossils has helped geologists to establish a geologic record ofEarth's history, which is divided into three eons (Table 25.1, on the facing page). The first two eons-the Archaean and the Proterozoic-together lasted approximately 4 billion years. The Phanerozoic eon, roughly the last half billion years, encompasses most of the time that animals have existed on Earth. It is divided into three eras: the Paleozoic, Mesozoic, and Cenozoic. Each era represents a distinct age in the history of Earth and its life. For example, the Mesozoic era is sometimes called the ~age of reptiles~ because of its abundance of reptilian fossils, including those of dinosaurs. The boundaries between the eras correspond to major ex· tinction events seen in the fossil record, when many forms of life disappeared and were replaced by forms that evolved from the survivors. As we've seen, the fossil record provides a sweepingoverview of the history of life over geologic time. Here we will focus on a few major events in that history, returning to study the details in Unit Five. figure 25.7 uses the analogy ofa clock to place these events in the context ofthe geologic record. Thisclock will reap514

UNIT FOUR


Atmospheric oxygen ... figure 25.7 Clock analogy for some key events in Earth's history. The clock ticks down from the origin of Earth 46 billion years ago to the present.

pear at various points in this section as a quick visual reminder of when the events we are discussing took place.

The First Single-Celled Organisms The earliest evidence of life, dating from 3.5 billion years ago, comes from fossilized stromatolites (see Figure 25.4). Stromatolites are layered rocks that form when certain prokaryotes bind thin films of sediment together. Present-day stromatolites are found in a few warm, shallow, salty bays. If microbial communities complex enough to form stromatolites existed 3.5 billion years ago, it is a reasonable hypothesis that singlecelled organisms originated much earlier, perhaps as early as 3.9 billion years ago. Early prokaryotes were Earth's sole inhabitants from at least 3.5 billion years ago to about 2.1 billion years ago. As we will see, these prokaryotes transformed life on our planet.

Table 25.1

Relative Duration of Eons

The Geologic Record

,..

Ag. Period

Epoch

Some Important Events in the History of Life

(Millions of Years Ago)

Holocene

Historical time 0,01 lee ages; humans appear

Pleistocent

Phanerozoic

Neogene

1.8

Pliocene

5.3

Origin of genus Homo Continutd radiation of mammals and angiosperms; apelike ancestors of humans appear

Miocent 23

Cenozoic

Origim of many primate groups, including apes

Oligocene 33.9 Paleogent

Angiosperm dominance increases; continued radiation of most present-day mammalian orders

Eocene

'\ _I -¥

55.8 Major radiation of mammals, birds, and pollinating insects

Paleocene 65.5 Proterozoic

become extinct at end of period 145.5

Mesozoic

4' ..

Flowering plants (angiospffms) appear and diversify; many groups oforganisms, including most dinosaurs,

Cretaceous

Gymnosperms continue as dominant plants; dinosaurs abundant and diverse

Jurassic 199.6

Triassic 251

Cone-btaring plants (gymnosperms) dominate landscape; dinosaurs evolve and radiate; origin of mammals

\..

jI

Radiation of reptiles; origin of most present-day groups of insects; extinction of many marine and terrestrial organisms at end of period

Permian 299

Exknsiw forests of vascular plants form; first seed plants appear; origin of reptiles; amphibians dominant

Carboniferous 359.1 Paleozoic

Diversification of bony fishes; first tetrapods and insects appear

Dt\'onian 416

Silurian

Di\'ersification ofearly vascular plants 443.7 Marine algae abundant; coloni,ation of land by diverse fungi, plants, and animals

Ordovician 488.3 Archaean

Sudden increa.se in diversity of many ~ ~ animal phyla (Cambrian txplosion) ~ / •

Cambrian 542

lJil'erse algae and soft-bodied r1l"\ invertebrate animals appear ~I::Y

Ediacaran 635 2,100

Oldest fossils of eukaryotic cells appear

t::\ VJ

2,500

2,700

Concentration of atmospheric oxygen begins to increase

3,500

Oldest fossils of cells (prokaryotes) appear

3,800

Oldest known rocks on Earth's surface

Approx,4,6OO

Origin of Earth



515

Photosynthesis and the Oxygen Revolution Most atmospheric oxygen gas (OJ is ofbiological origin, produced during the water-splitting step of photosyn· thesis. When oxygenic photosynthesis first evolved, the free 0:2 it produced probably dissolved in the surrounding "''ater until it reached a high enough concentration to react with dissolved iron. This would have caused the iron to precipitate as iron oxide, which accumulated as sediments. These sediments were compressed into banded iron formations, red layers ofrock containing iron oxide that are a source of iron ore today (Figure 25.8). Once all of the dissolved iron had precipitated, additional 0:2 dissolved in the water until the seas and lakes became saturated with 02- After this occurred, the O 2 finally began to·gas out" of the water and enter the atmosphere. This change left its mark in the rusting of iron-rich terrestrial rocks, a process that began about 2.7 billion years ago. This chronology implies that bacteria similar to today's cyanobacteria (oxygen·releasing. photosynthetic bacteria) originated wel.l before 2.7 billion years ago. The amount of atmospheric 0:2 increased gradually from about 2.7 to 2.2 billion years ago, but then shot up relatively rapidly to more than 1001) of its present level nus ·oxygen revolution· had an enormous impact on life. In certain ofits chemical forms, oxygen attacks chemical bonds and can inhibit enzymes and damage cells. As a result the rising concentration of atmospheriC 0:2 probably doomed many prokaryotic groups. Some species survived in habitats that remained anaerobic, where we find their descendants living today (see Chapter 27). Among other survi'1lrs, diverse adaptations to the changing atmosphere evolved, including cellular respiration, which uses O2 in the process of harvesting the energy stored in organic molecules.

... Figure 25.8 Banded iron formations: evidence of oxygenic photosynthesis. The reddish streaks In thiS sedimentary rock are bands of Iron ollde.

516

UNIT fOUlt


As mentioned previously, the early, gradual rise in atmospheric O 2 levels was probably brought about by ancient cyanobacteria. A few hundred million years later, the rise in O2 accelerated. \Vhat caused this acceleration? One hypothesis is that this rise followed the evolution of eukaryotic cells containing chloroplasts, as we will discuss in the next section.

The First fukaryotes The oldest widely accepted fossils of eukaryotic organisms are about 2.1 billion years old. Recall thal eukaryotic cells have more complex organization than prokaryotic cells: Eukaryotic cells have a nuclear en~ velope, mitochondria, endoplasmic reticulum, and other internal structures that prokaryoles lack. Also, unlike prokaryotic cells, eukaryotic cells have a cytoskeleton, a feature that enables eukaryotic cells to change their shape and thereby surround and engulf other cells. How did these eukaryotic features evolve from prokaryotic cells? A range of evidence supports a model called endosymbiosis, which posits that mitochondria and plaslids (a general term for chloroplasts and related organelles) were formerly small prokaryotes that began living within larger cells. The term elldosymbiollt refers to a cell that lives within another cell, called the host cell. The prokaryotic ancestors of mitochondria and plastids probably gained entry to the host cell as undigested prey or internal parasites. Though such a process may seem unlikely, scientists have directly observed cases in which endosymbionts that began as prey or parasites came to have a mutually beneficial rela· tionship with the host in as little as five years. By whatever means the relationships began, ....'C can hypothesize howthe symbiosis could have become muruallybeneficial. A heterotrophic host could use nutrients released from photosynthetic endosymbionts. And in a work! that was becoming increasingly aerobic, a host that was itsdfan anaerobe would ha,'C benefited from endosymbionts that turned the oxygen to advantage. Over time, the host and endosymbionts would have become a single organism, its parts inseparable. Although all eukaryotes have mitochondria or remnants of these organelles, they do not all have plastids. Thus, the model of serial cndosymbiosis supposes that mitochondria evolved before plastids through a sequence ofendosymbioticevents (FIgUre 25.9). Agreat deal of evidence supports the endosymbiotic origin of mitochondria and plastids. The inner membranes of both organelles have enzymes and transport systems that are homologous to those found in the plasma membranes of living prokaryotes. Mitochondria and plastids replicate by a splitting process that is similar to that of certain prokaryotes. In addition, each of these organelles contains a single, circular DNA

/Cytoplasm

molecule that, like the chromosomes of bacteria, is not associated with histones or large amounts of other proteins. As might be expected of organelles descended from free-living organisms, mitochondria and plastids also have the cellular machinery (including ribosomes) needed to transcribe and translate their DNA into proteins. Finally, in terms ofsize, nucleotide sequence, and sensitivity to certain antibiotics, the ribosomes of mitochondria and plastids are more similar to prokaryotic ribosomes than they are to the cytoplasmic ribosomes of eukaryotic cells.

/ .....-DNA Plasma ___ membrane ___ Ancestral

prokaryote

"'"

Infolding of ~~.fft'C" plasma membrane

The Origin of Multicellularity

Engulfing

of aerobic heterotrophic prokaryote Cell with nudeus and endomem-

brane system

An orchestra can playa greater variety of musical compositions than a violin soloist can; the increased complexity of the orchestra makes more variations possible. Likewise, the appearance of structurally complex eukaryotic cells sparked the evolution ofgreater morphological diversity than was possible for the simpler prokaryotic cells. After the first eukaryotes appeared, a great range of unicellular forms evolved, giving rise to the diversity of single-celled eukaryotes that continue to flourish today. Another wave of diversification also occurred: Some single-celled eukaryotes gave rise to multicellular forms, whose descendants include a variety of algae, plants, fungi, and animals.

The Earliest Multicellular Eukaryotes

Engulfing of photosynthetic prokaryote by

some cells

Plastid

Ancestral photosynthetic

eukaryote

... Figure 25.9 A model of the origin of eukaryotes through serial endosymbiosis. The proposed ancestors of mitochondria were aerobic, heterotrophic prokaryotes (meaning they used oxygen to metabolize organIC molecules obtained from other organisms). The proposed ancestors of plastid, were photosynthetIC prokaryotes. Note that the arrows represent change over evolutionary time.

Based on comparisons of DNA sequences, researchers have suggested that the common ancestor of multicellular eukaryotes lived 1.5 billion years ago. This result is in rough agreement with the fossil record; the oldest known fossils of multicellular eukaryotes are of relatively small algae that lived about 1.2 billion years ago. Larger and more diverse multicellular eukaryotes do not appear in the fossil record until about 565 million years ago (see Figure 25.4). These fossils, referred to as the Ediacaran biota, were of soft-bodied organisms-some over 1 m long-that lived from 565 to 535 million years ago. \Vhy were multicellular eukaryotes limited in size and diversity until the late Proterozoic? Geologic evidence indicates that a series ofsevere ice ages occurred from 750 to 580 million years ago. At various times during this period, glaciers covered all of the planet's landmasses, and the seas were largely iced over. The usnowball Earth" hypothesis suggests that most life would have been confined to areas near deep-sea vents and hot springs or to equatorial regions of the ocean that lacked ice cover. The fossil record of the first major diversification ofmulticellular eukaryotes (beginning about 565 million years ago) corresponds roughly to the time when snowball Earth thawed. As that diversification came to a close about 30 million years



517

later, the stage was set for another, even more spectacular burst of evolutionary change.

The Cambrian Explosion Many phyla of living animals appear suddenly in fossils formed early in the Amm

E

Linking Classification and Phylogeny Systematists depict evolutionary relationships as branching phylogenetic trees. Some systematists propose that classification be based entirely on evolutionary relationships. NOd"

"

Sister taxa

Taxon D Taxon E POlytom{

I

Paraphyleti< group

Taxon (

,L"

Most comm ancestor

G

Taxon A Taxon B}

-

F

r •

Taxon F

E

G

G

Polyphyletic group

... Phylogenetic Trees with Proportional Branch Lengths Branch lengths can be drawn proportional to the amount of evolutionary change or time. ... Maximum Parsimony and Maximum Likelihood Among phylogenies, the most parsimonious tree is the one that requires the fewest evolutionary changes. The most likely tree is the one based on the most likely pattern of changes. .. Phylogenetic Trees as Hypotheses Well-supported phylogenetic hypotheses are consistent with a wide range of data.

-$IH',-

Innsligation How Is Phylogeny Determined by Coml'aring Proteins?

... What We Can and Cannot learn from Phylogenetic Trees Unless branch lengths are proportional to time or genetic change, a phylogenetic tree indicates only patterns of descent.

_i lilll._ 26.4

... Applying Phylogenies Much information can be learned about a species from its evolutionary history; hence, phylogenies are useful in a wide range of applications.

its genome (pp. 548-549)

-N·if.Activity Oassilkation Schemes

_i,lliii'- 26.2 Phylogenies are inferred from morphological and molecular data (pp. 540-542) ... Morphological and Molecular Homologies Organisms that share very similar morphologies or DNA sequences are likely to be more closely related than organisms with very different structures and genetic sequences. ... Sorting Homology from Analogy Homology (similarity due to shared ancestry) must be sorted from analogy (similarity due to convergent evolution). ... Evaluating Molecular Homologies Computer programs are used to align comparable nucleic acid sequences and to distinguish molecular homologies from coincidental matches between taxa that diverged long ago. 554

UNIT fiVE


An organism's evolutionary history is documented in .. Gene Duplications and Gene Families Orthologous genes are homologous genes found in different species because ofspeciation. Paralogous genes arise through duplication within a genome and can diverge within a clade, often adding new functions. .. Genome Evolution Distantly related species often have orthologous genes. The small variation in gene number in organisms of V"arying complexity suggests that genes are versatile and may have multiple functions .

- i Illi'._ 26.5 Molecular clocks help track evolutionary time

(pp.549-551) .. Molecular Clocks The base sequences ofsome regions of DNA change at a rate consistent enough to allow dating of episodes in past evolution. Other genes change in a less predictable way. ... Applying a Molecular Clock: The Origin of HIV A molecular clock analysis suggests that the most common strain of HIV jumped from primates to humans in the 1930s.

-i·lilii'- 26.6 New information continues to revise our understanding of the tree of life (pp. 551-553) .. From Two Kingdoms to Three Domains Past classification systems have given W
Streptomyces. the source of many antibiotics (colorized SEM)

I~ Hundreds of mycoplasmas covering a human fibroblast cell (colorized SEM)

CHAPTER TWENTY·S EVEN

Bacteria and Archaea

569

the beneficial species used to make Swiss cheese and yogurt. Every major mode of nutrition and metabolism is represented among bacteria, and even a small taxonomic group of bacteria may contain species exhibiting many different nutritional modes. As we11 see, the diverse nutritional and metabolic capabilities of bacteria-and archaea-are behind the great im· pact of these tiny organisms on Earth and its life.

1.0

c; .§. 08 . c

" •

a.

i;'
cases of0 157:H7 infection per year, often from contaminated beefor produce. In 2001, scientists sequenced the genome of 0157:H7 and compared it with the genome of a harmless strain of E. coli called K-12. They discovered that 1,387 out of the 5,416 genes in 0157:H7 have no counterpart in K-12. Many of these 1,387 genes are found in chromosomal regions that include DNA sequences related to bacteriophage DNA. This result suggests that at least some ofthe 1,387 genes were incorporated into the genome of0157:H7 through bacteriophagemediated horizontal gene transfer (see Figure 27.11). Someofthe genes found only in 0l57:H7 are associated with virulence, including genes that code for adhesive fimbriae that enable 0157:H7 to attach itselfto the intestinal wall and extract nutrients. Pathogenic bacteria pose a potential threat as weapons of bioterrorism. For example, endospores of Bacillus anthracis sent through the mail caused 18 people-5 of whom died-to develop inhalation anthrax (see also Chapter 26). Such scenarios have stimulated intense research on pathogenic prokaryotic species in the hope ofdeveloping new vaccines and antibiotics.

and yogurt. In recent years, our greater understanding of prokaryotes has led to an explosion of new applications in biotechnology; two examples are the use of E. coli in gene cloning and of Agrobacterium lumefaciens in producing transgenic plants such as Golden Rice (see Chapter 20). Prokaryotes are the principal agents in biorcmcdiation, the use oforganisms to remove pollutants from soil, air, or water. For example, anaerobic bacteria and archaea decompose the organic matter in sewage, converting it to material that can be used as landfill or fertilizer after chemical sterilization. Other bioremediation applications include cleaning up oil spills (Figure 27.22a) and precipitating radioactive material (such as uranium) out of groundwater. Bacteria may soon figure prominently in a major industry: plastics. Globally, each yearabout350 billion pounds ofplastic are produced from petroleum and used to make toys, storage con· tainers, soft drink bottles, and many other items. These products degrade slowly, creating environmental problems. Bacteria can now be used to make natural plastics (Figure 27.22b). For example, some bacteria synthesize a type of polyester known as PHA (polyhydroxyalkanoate), which theyuse to store chemical energy. When these bacteria are fed sugars derived from corn, the PHA tlley produce can be extracted, formed into pellets, and used to make durable, biodegradable plastics. Through genetic engineering, humans can now modify bacteria to produce vitamins, antibiotics, hormones, and other products (see Chapter 20). Researchers are seeking to reduce fossil fuel use by engineering bacteria that can produce ethanol from various forms of biomass, including agricultural waste, switchgrass, fast-growing woody plants such as willows, and corn (Figure 27.22e). One radical idea for modifying bacteria

Prokaryotes in Research and Technology

fertilizers on an oil-soaked area stimulates grCM'lh of native baderia that metabolize the oil, speeding the natural breakdown process up to fivefold. (b) These bacteria synthesize and store the polyester PHA. The PHA can be extracted and used to make biodegradable plastic products. (c) Current research seeh to develop baderia that produce ethanol {E-85} fuel efficiently from renewable plant products.

On a positive note, we reap many benefits from the metabolic capabilities of both bacteria and archaea. For example, hu· mans have long used bacteria to convert milk into cheese 572

UNIT fiVE


.... Figure 27.22 Some applications of prokaryotes. (a) Spraying

comes from Craig Venter, head of The Institute for Genomic Research (TIGR). Venter and his colleagues are attempting to build ~synthetic chromosomes~ for bacteria-in effect, producing new species from scratch. They hope to ~design" bacteria that can perform specific tasks, such as producing large amounts of hydrogen to reduce dependence on fossil fuels. Some scientists, however, question whether this approach may have unanticipated harmful effects. The usefulness of prokaryotes largely derives from their diverse forms of nutrition and metabolism. All this metabolic versatility evolved prior to the appearance of the structural novelties that heralded the evolution of eukaryotic organisms, to which we devote the remainder of this unit.

-31401 - Go to the Study Area at www.masteringbio.com for BioFlix 3-D Animations, MP3 Tutors, Videos, Practice Tests, an eBook, and more, " SUMMARY OF KEY CONCEPTS

_i·i'ii.'_ 27.1 Structural and functional adaptations contrihute to prokaryotic success (pp. 556-561)

f;mb""'~ hairlike

appendage~ that help celi~

_

adhere to other celli or to a ~ubstrate

Cell wall: found in nearly all prokaryote~; ~tructure differs in gram·po- Characteristics of Angiosperms Flowers generally consist

of four whorls of modified leaves: sepals, petals, stamens (which produce pollen), and carpels (which produce ovules). Ovaries ripen into fruits, which often carry seeds by wind, water, or animals to new locations. II>- Angiosperm Evolution An adaptive radiation of angio·

Pollen

Pollen grains make water unnecessary for fertilization

Seeds

Seeds: survive better than unprotected spores. can be transported long distances

634

UNIT fiVE

,o"gem~o,

{

Food supply

Embryo


sperms occurred during the Cretaceous period. Fossils, phylogenetic analyses, and developmental studies offer inSights into the origin of flowers. II>- Angiosperm Diversity Several groups of basal angiosperms

have been identified. Other major clades of angiosperms include monocots, magnoliids, and eudicots. II>- Evolutionary Links Between Angiosperms and Animals

Pollination and other interactions between angiosperms and

animals may have led to increased species diversity in both of these groups.

MMN',_ Actl\'lty Angiospenn Life Cycle

Investigation How Are

Tr~s

Identined by Their l.ea"es'

6.••lit.W"1 Use the letters a-d to label where on the phylogenetic tree each of the following derived characters appeared. a. flowers b. embryos c. seeds d. vascular tissue

.',I'ii"-30.4 Human welfare depends greatly on seed plants (pp. 632-634) .... Products from Seed Plants Humans depend on seed plants for food, wood, and many medicines.

Charophyte green algae

-

Mosses Ferns

.... Threats to Plant Diversity Destruction of habitat threatens the extinction of many plant species and the animal species they support.

Gymnosperms Angiosperms

TESTING YOUR KNOWLEOGE SELF-QUIZ I. \Vhere in an angiosperm would you find a megasporangium? a. in the style of a flower b. inside the tip of a pollen tube c. enclosed in the stigma of a flower d. within an ovule contained within an ovary of a flower e. packed into pollen sacs within the anthers found on a stamen 2. A fruit is most commonly a. a mature ovary. b. a thickened style. c. an enlarged ovule. d. a modified root. e. a mature female gametophyte. 3. \Vith respect to angiosperms, which of the following is incorrectly paired with its chromosome count? a.egg-n b. megaspore-2n c. microspore-n d. zygote-2n e. sperm-n 4. Which of the following is not a characteristic that distinguishes gymnosperms and angiosperms from other plants? a. alternation of generations b. ovules c. integuments d. pollen e. dependent gametophytes 5. Gymnosperms and angiosperms have the following in common except a. seeds. b. pollen. c. vascular tissue. d. ovaries. e. ovules.

For Self-Quiz answers, see Appendix A.

MM4,jf._ Visit the Study Area at www.masteringbio.com for a Practice Test.

EVOLUTION CONNECTION 7. The history oflife has been punctuated by several mass extinctions. For example, the impact of a meteorite may have wiped out most of the dinosaurs and many forms of marine life at the end ofthe Cretaceous period (see Chapter 25). Fossils indicate that plants were less severely affected by this and other mass extinctions. What adaptations may have enabled plants to withstand these disasters better than animals?

SCIENTIFIC INQUIRY 8. ••I;f.W"1 As will be described in detail in Chapter 38, the female gametophyte of angiosperms typically has seven cells, one of which, the central cell, is diploid. After double fertilization, the central cell develops into endosperm, which is triploid. Because all monocots, magnoliids, and eudicots have female gametophytes with seven cells and triploid endosperm, scientists assumed that this was the ancestral state for angiosperms. Consider, however, the following recent discoveries: .... Our understanding of angiosperm phylogeny has changed to that shown in Figure 30.l2b. .... Amborella has eight-celled female gametophytes and triploid endosperm. .... Water lilies and star anise have four-celled female gametophytes and diploid endosperm. (a) Draw a phylogeny of the angiosperms (see Figure 30.12b), incorporating the data given above about the number of cells in female gametophytes and the ploidy of the endosperm. Assume that all of the star anise relatives have four-celled female gametophytes and diploid endosperm. (b) What does your labeled phylogeny suggest about the evolution of the female gametophyte and endosperm in angiosperms?

CHAPTER THIRTY

Plant Diversity 1[: The Evolution of Seed Plants

635

Fungi

KEY

CONCEPTS

31.1 Fungi are heterotrophs that feed by absorption 31.2 Fungi produce spores through sexual or asexual life cycles 31.3 The ancestor of fungi was an aquatic, single-

celled, flagellated protist 31.4 Fungi have radiated into a diverse set of lineages

31.5 Fungi play key roles in nutrient cycling, ecological interactions, and human welfare

H

iking through the Malheur National Forest in eastern

Oregon, you might notice a few clusters of honey mushrooms (Armillaria ostoyae) scattered here and there beneath the towering trees (Figure 31.1). Though the trees appear to dwarfthe mushrooms, as strange as it sounds, the reverse is actually true. All these mushrooms are just the aboveground portion of a single enormous fungus. Its sub-

terranean network of filaments spreads through 965 hectares of the forest-more than the area of 1,800 football fields. Based on its current growth rate, scientists estimate that this fungus, which weighs hundreds of tons, has been growing for more than 1,900 years. The inconspicuous honey mushrooms on the forest floor are a fitting symbol of the neglected grandeur of the kingdom Fungi. Most ofus are barely aware of these eukaryotes beyond the occasional brush with athlete's foot or spoiled food. Yet fungi are a huge and important component of the biosphere. Their diversity is staggering: While about 100,000 species have been described, it is estimated that there are actually as many as 1.5 million species of fungi. Some fungi are exclusively singlecelled, but most have complex multicellular bodies, which in many cases include the structures we know as mushrooms. This diversity has enabled fungi to colonize just about every 636

.... Figure 31.1 Can you spot the largest organism in this forest'?

imaginable terrestrial habitat; airborne spores have even been found 160 km above ground. Fungi are not only diverse and widespread, but they are also essential for the well-being of most terrestrial ecosystems. They break down organic material and recycle nutrients, al· lowing other organisms to assimilate essential chemical elements. Humans benefit from fungi's services to agriculture and forestry as well as their essential role in making products ranging from bread to antibiotics. But it is also true that some fungi cause diseases in plants and animals. In this chapter, we will investigate the structure and evolutionary history offungi, survey the members ofkingdom Fungi, and discuss their ecological and commercial significance.

r;:~;~:;e ~~:rotrophS that

feed

by absorption

Despite their vast diversity, fungi share some key traits, most importantly the way they derive nutrition. In addition, many fungi grow by forming multicellular filaments, a body structure that plays an important role in how they obtain food.

Nutrition and Ecology Like animals, fungi are heterotrophs-they cannot make their own foodas plants and algae can. But tmIikeanimals, fungi do not ingest (eat) their food. Instead, a nmgus absorbs nutrients from the envirorunent outside of its body. Manyfungi accomplish this task by secreting powerful hydrolytic enzymes into their surrotmdings. These enzymes break down complex molecules to smaller organic compounds that the fungi can absorb into their bodies and use. Other fungi use enzymes to penetrate the walls ofplant cells, enabling the fungi to absorb nutrients from the plant cell. Collectively, the different enzymes found in various fungal species can digest compounds from a wide range of sources,

making feeding more efficient. Just 1cm3 of rich soil may contain as much as 1 km of hyphae with a total surface area of 300 cm 2 in contact with the soil. A fungal mycelium grows rapidly, as proteins and other materials synthesized by the fungus are channeled through cytoplasmic streaming to the tips of the extending hyphae. The fungus concentrates its energy and resources on adding hyphal length and thus overall absorptive surface area, rather than on increasing hyphal girth. Fungi are not motile in the typical sense of the word-they cannot run, swim, or fly in search offood or mates. However, as they grow, fungi can move into new places, swiftly extending the tips of their hyphae into previously unoccupied territory. In most fungi, the hyphae are divided into cells by crosswalls, or septa (singular, septum) (Figure 31.3a). Septa generally have pores large enough to allow ribosomes, mitochondria, and even nuclei to flow from cell to cell. Some fungi lack septa (Figure 31.3b). Known as cocnocytic fungi, these organisms

living or dead. As a result, fungi take on many roles in ecological communities, with different species living as decomposers, parasites, or mutualists. Decomposer fungi break down and absorb nutrients from nonliving organic material, such as fallen logs, animal corpses, and the wastes of living organisms. Parasitic fungi absorb nutrients from the cells of living hosts. Some parasitic fungi are pathogenic. including species that infect human lungs and other species that are responsible for about 8096 ofplant diseases. Murualistic fungi also absorb nutrients from a host organism, but they reciprocate with actions that benefit the host. For example, murualistic fungi that live inside certain termite species use their enzymes to break down wood, as do mutualistic protists in other termite species (see Figure 28.26). The versatile enzymes that enable fungi to digest a wide range of food sources are not the only reason for their ecological success. Another important factor is how their body structure increases the efficiency of nutrient absorption.

Body Structure The most common fungal body structures are multicellular filaments and single cells (yeasts). Many species can grow as both filaments and yeasts, but even more grow only as filaments; relatively few species grow only as yeasts. Yeasts often inhabit moist environments, including plant sap and animal tissues, where there is a ready supply of soluble nutrients, such as sugars and amino acids. Well discuss yeasts and their particular importance to humans later; here, we'll focus on the morphology of multicellular fungi.

Reproductive structure. The mushroom produces tiny cells called spores. Hyphae. The mushroom and its subterranean mycelium are a continuous network of hyphae.

Fungal Morphology The morphology of multicellular fungi enhances their ability to grow into and absorb nutrients from their surroundings (Figure 31.2). The bodies of these fungi typically form a network oftiny ftlaments, which are called hyphae (singular, hypha). Hyphae consist of tubular cell walls surrounding the plasma membrane and cytoplasm ofthe cells. Unlike plant cell walls, which contain cellulose, fungal cell walls are strengthened by chitin. This strong but flexible nitrogen-containing polysaccharide is also fOlUld in the external skeletons ofinsects and other arthropods. Fungal hyphae form an interwoven mass called a mycelium (plural, m)'celin) that infiltrates the material on which the fungus feeds. Amycelium'sstructure maximizes its surface area-to-volume ratio,

Mycelium ... Figure 31.2 Structure of a multicellular fungus. The top photograph shows the sexual structures. In this case called mushrooms. of the penny bun fungus (Boletus edulisl. The bottom photograph shows a mycelium growing on fallen conifer needles. The inset LM shows hyphae, the mushrooms in the lOp photograph appear to be different individuals, could their D Although DNA be identical? Explain,

.. Figure 31.3 Two forms of hyphae.

Cell wall

Cell wall

I

• (al Septate hypha

(b)

Coenocytk hypha

CHAPTE~ lHI~lY·ONE

Fungi

637

consist of a continuous cytoplasmic mass having hundreds or thousands of nuclei. The coenocytic condition results from the repeated division of nuclei without cytokinesis. This description may remind you of the plasmodial slime molds you read about in Chapter 28, which also consist of cytoplasmic masses con· taining many nuclei. This similarity is one reason that slime molds were once classified as fungi; molecular data have since shown that slime molds and fungi belong to distinct clades.

Specialized Hyphae in Mycorrhizal Fungi Some fungi have specialized hyphae that allow them to feed on living animals (Figure 31.4a). Other fungal species have specialized hyphae called haustoria, which the fungi use to extract nutrients from-or exchange nutrients with-their hosts (Figure 31.4b). Mutually beneficial relationships between such fungi and plant roots are called mycorrhizac (the term means "fungus roots~).

Mycorrhizal fungi (fungi that form mycorrhizae) can improve delivery of phosphate ions and other minerals to plants because the vast mycelial networks of the fungi are more efficient than the plants' roots at acquiring these minerals from the soil. In exchange, the plants supply the fungi with organic nutrients such as carbohydrates. There are several types of mycorrhizal fungi. Ectomycorrhizal fungi (from the Greek ektos, out) form sheaths of hyphae over the surface of a root and also grow into the extracellular spaces of the root cortex (see Figure 37.12a). Arbuscular mycorrhizal fungi (from the Latin arbor, tree) extend their branching hyphae through the root cell wall and into tubes formed by invagination (pushing inward) of the root cell membrane (see Figure 37.12b). Mycorrhizae are enormously important in natural ecosystems and agriculture. Almost all vascular plants have mycorrhizae and rely on their fungal partners for essential nutrients. Many studies have demonstrated the significance of mycorrhizal" by comparing the growth of plants with and without them (see Figure 37.13). Foresters commonly inoculate pine seedlings with mycorrhizal fungi to promote growth. In the absence of human intervention, mycorrhizal fungi colonize soils by spore dispersal, a key component of how fungi reproduce and spread to new areas, as we discuss next. CONCEPT

..-

"'w_, ~ -...:-""Jl"'~~

-:-

~

--

. ...

(a) Hyphae adapted for trapping and killing prey. In Arthroborrys. a soil fungus, portions of the hyphae are modified as hoops that can constrict around a nematode (roundworm) in less than a second. The fungus then penetrates its prey with hyphae and digests the prey's inner tissues (SEM),

Plant cell plasma membrane

(b) Haustoria. Some mutualistic and parasitic fungi grow specialized hyphae called haustoria that can extract nutrients from living plant cells, Haustoria remain separated from a plant cell"s cytoplasm by the plasma membrane of the plant cell (orange).

... Figure 31.4 Specialized hyphae. 638

UNIT fiVE

31.1

1. Compare and contrast the nutritional mode of a fungus with your own nutritional mode. 2. -Ql:f.i1 IA Suppose a certain fungus is a mutualist that lives within its insect host, yet its ancestors were parasites that grew in and on the insect's body. \Vbat derived traits might you find in this mutualistic fungus? For suggested answers, see Appendix A.

r;:~:r;7o~~~ spores through sexual or asexual life cycles

Fungal hypha

Haustorium

CHECK


Most fungi propagate themselves by producing vast numbers of spores, either sexually or asexually. For example, puffballs, the reproductive structures of certain fungal species, may re· lease trillions of spores in cloud-like bursts (see Figure 31.18). Spores can be carried long distances by wind or water. If they land in a moist place where there is food, they germinate, producing new mycelia. To appreciate how effective spores are at dispersing, leave a slice of melon exposed to the air. Even without a visible source of spores nearby, within a week or so, you will likely observe fuzzy mycelia growing from the microscopic spores constantly falling onto the melon. Figure 31.5 generalizes the many different life cycles that can produce fungal spores. In this section, we will survey general

[

K,y

=oJ

Haploid (n) •

Heterokaryotic (unfused nuclei from different parents)

•

Diploid (2n)

HeterokaryotIC stage

Spore-producing structures

Zygote SEXUAL

Spor~

ASEXUAL REPRODUCTION

Mycelium

REPRODUCTION

1 GERMINATION I

- ...r

r-----~---;;

r----.---

-

S;Ii'''~

bilaterians, not members of the phylum Platyhelminthes. Acoela's basal position suggests that the bilaterians

Calcarea

ancestor that resembled living acoel flatworms-that is, from an ancestor that had a simple nervous system, a saclike gut, and no excretory system. As seen in Figure 32.11, the molecu-

~

Ctenophora

r;:3

m

.•
Flatworms

Turbellarians

Flatworms (phylum Platyhelminthes) live in marine, freshwater, and damp terrestrial habitats. In addition to free· living forms, flarn'orms include many parasitic species, such as flukes and tapeworms. Flatworms are so named because they have thin bodies that are flattened dorsoventrally (between the dorsal and ventral surfaces); platyhelminth means "flat worm." (Note that worm is not a formal taxonomic name but a general term for animals with long, thin bodies.) The smallest flatworms are nearly microscopic free-living species, while some tapeworms are more than 20 m long. Although flatworms undergo triploblastic development, they are acoelomates (animals that lack a body cavity). Their flat shape places all their cells close to water in the surrounding environmentor in their gut. Because ofthis proximity to water, gas

Turbellarians are nearly all free-living and mostly marine (Figure 33.9). The best-known freshwater turbellarians are members ofthe genus Dugesia, commonly called planarians. Abundant in unpolluted ponds and streams, planarians prey on smaller animals or feed on dead animals. They move by using cilia on their ventral surface, gliding along a film of mucus they secrete. Some other turbellarians also use their muscles to swim through water with an undulating motion. A planarian's head is equipped with a pair of light·sensitive eyespots and lateral flaps that function mainly to detect specific chemicals. The planarian nervous system is more complex and centralized than the nerve nets of cnidarians (Figure 33.10). Experiments have shown that planarians can learn to modify their responses to stimuli.

674

UNIT fiVE


... Figure 33.10 Anatomy of a planarian. a turbellarian. Pharynx. The mouth is at the tip of a muscular pharynK. Digestive juices are spilled onto prey, and the pharym sucks small pieces of food into the gastrovascular cavity, where digestion continues.

Digestion is completed within the cells lining the gastrovascular cavity, which has many fine subbranches that provide an e>rt.ensive surface area. Undigested wastes are egested

through the mouth.

Gastrovascular caVity

... Figure 33.9 A marine flatworm (class Turbellarial. ';;"';Io,-Eyespots

Some planarians can reproduce asexually through fission. The parent constricts roughly in the middle of its body, separating into a head end and a tail end; each end then regenerates the missing parts. Sexual reproduction also occurs. Planarians are hermaphrodites, and copulating mates typically crossfertilize each other.

Ventral nerve cords. From the ganglia, a pair of ventral nerve cords runs the length of the body.

o Mature flukes live in the blood vessels of the human intestine A female fluke fits into a groove running

Monogeneans and Trematodes Monogeneansand trematodes live as parasites in or on other animals. Many have suckers thatattach to the internal organs or outer surfaces of the host animal. A tough covering helps protect the parasites within their hosts. Reproductive organs occupy nearly the entire interior ofthese worms. As agroup, trematodes parasitize awide range ofhosts, and most species have complex life cycles with alternating sexual and asexual stages. Manytrematodes require an intermediate host in which larvae develop before infecting the final host (usuallya vertebrate), where the adult worms live. For example, trematodes that parasitize humans spend part of their lives in snail hosts (Figure 33.11). Around the world, some 200 million people are infected with blood. flukes (Schistosoma) and suffer from schistosomiasis, a disease whose symptoms include pain, anemia, and dysentery. Living within different hosts puts demands on trematodes that free-living animals don't face. Ablood. fluke, for instance, must evade the immune systems of both snails and humans. By mimicking the surface proteins of its hosts, the blood fluke creates a partial immunological camou-

Ganglia. At the anterior end of the worm, near the main sources of sensory input, is a pair of ganglia, dense clusters of nerve cells.

the length of the larger male's body, as shown in the lM at right.

o These larvae penetrate ~ the skin and blood vessels of humans working in fields irrigated with water contaminated with infected human feces,

AI"

>----< 1 mm

e Blood flukes reproduce sexually in the human host. The fertilized eggs exit the host in feces.

o Ifpond the feces reach a or other source of water, the eggs develop into ciliated larvae. These larvae infect snails, the intermediate hosts,

o within AseKual reproduction a snail results

In

another type of motile larva, which escapes from the snail host.

... Figure 33.11 The life cycle of a blood fluke (Schistosoma manson;), a trematode. Snails eat algae, whose growth is stimulated by nutrients found in fertilizer. How would the contamination of irrigation water with fertilizer likely affect the occurrence of schistosomiasis? Explain,

_I,J:t.iI!.

CHAPTER THIRTY·THREE

Invertebrates

675

flage for itself. It also releases molecules that manipulate the hosts' immune systems into tolerating the parasite's existence. These defenses are so effective that individual blood flukes can survive in humans for more than 40 years. Most monogeneans, however, are external parasites of fish. The monogenean life cycle is relatively simple; a ciliated, freeswimming larva initiates the infection of a host fish. Although monogeneans have been traditionally aligned with the trematodes, some structural and chemical evidence suggests they are more closely related to tapeworms.

Tapeworms Tapeworms (class Cestoda) are also parasitic (figure 33.12). The adults live mostly inside vertebrates, including humans. In many tapeworms, the anterior end, or scolex, is armed with suckers and often hooks that the worm uses to attach itself to the intestinal lining of its host. Tapeworms lack a mouth and gas· trovascular cavity; they absorb nutrients released by digestion in the host's intestine. Absorption occurs across the tapeworm's body surface. Posterior to the scolex is a long ribbon of units called proglottids, which are little more than sacs of sex organs. After sexual reproduction, proglottids loaded with thousands of fertilized eggs are released from the posterior end of a tapeworm and leave the host's body in feces. In one type of life cycle, infected feces contaminate the food or water of intermediate hosts, such as pigs or cattle, and the tapeworm eggs develop into larvae

that encyst in muscles of these animals. A human acquires the larvae by eating undercooked meat contaminated with cysts, and the worms develop into mature adults within the human. Large tapeworms can block the intestines and rob enough nutrients from the human host to cause nutritional deficiencies. Doctors use an oraUy administered drug, niclosamide, to kill the adult worms.

Roti!ers Rotifers (phylum Rotifera) are tiny animals that inhabit freshwater, marine, and damp soil habitats. Ranging in size from about SO Ilm to 2 mm, rotifers are smaller than many protists but nevertheless are multicellular and have specialized organ systems (Figure 33,13). in contrast to cnidarians and flatworms, which have a gastrovascular cavity, rotifers have an alimentary canal, a digestive tube with a separate mouth and anus. Internal organs lie within the pseudocoelom, a body cavitythat is not completely lined by mesoderm (see Figure 32.8b). Fluid in the pseudocoelom serves as a hydrostatic skeleton (see Chapter SO). Movement of a rotifer's body distributes the fluid throughout the body, circulating nutrients. The word rotifer, derived from Latin, means "wheel-bearer," a reference to the crown of cilia that draws a vortex of water into the mouth. Posterior to the mouth, a region of the digestive tract called the pharynx bears jaws called trophi that grind up food, mostly microorganisms suspended in the water. Rotifers exhibit some unusual fonns of reproduction. Some species consist only of females that produce more females from wU'ertilized eggs, a type ofreproduction caUed parthenogenesis. Other species produce two types of eggs that develop by parthenogenesis. One type forms females while the other type (produced when conditions deteriorate) develops into simplified males that cannot even feed themselves. These males survive only long enough to fertilize eggs, which form resistant

'I---'7Proglottids with reproductive strUdures

Scolex

.... figure 33.12 Anatomy of a tapeworm. The inset shows a close-up of the scolex (colorized SEM),

676

UNIT fiVE


.... Figure 33.13 A rotifer. These pseudocoelomates, smaller than many protists, are generally more anatomically complex than flatworms (lM).

zygotes that can survive when a pond dries up. When conditions are favorable, the zygotes break dormancy and develop into a new female generation that reproduces by parthenogenesis until conditions become unfavorable again. It is puzzling that so many rotifer species survive without males. The vast majority of animals and plants reproduce sexually at least some of the time, and sexual reproduction has certain advantages over asexual reproduction. For example, species that reproduce asexually tend to accumulate harmful mutations in their genomes faster than sexually reproducing species. As a result, asexual species should experience higher rates of extinction and lower rates of speciation. Seeking to understand this unusual group, Nobel Prizewinning biologist Matthew Meselson, of Harvard Vniversity, has been studying a class of asexual rotifers named Bdel1oidea. Some 360 species ofbdel1oid rotifers are known, and all ofthem reproduce by parthenogenesis without any males. Paleontologists have discovered bdel10id rotifers preserved in 35-mil1ionyear-old amber, and the morphology of these fossils resembles only the female form, with no evidence of males. By comparing the DNA ofbdelloids with that of their closest sexually reproducing rotifer relatives, Meselson and his colleagues concluded that bdel10ids have likely been asexual for much longer than 35 million years. Howthese animals manage to flout the general rule against long-lived asexuality remains a puzzle.

Lophophorates: Ectoprocts and Brachiopods Bilaterians in the phyla Ectoprocta and Brachiopoda are among those known as lophophorates. These animals have a /ophophore, a crown of ciliated tentacles that surround the mouth (see Figure 32. 13a). As the cilia draw water toward the mouth, these tentacles trap suspended food particles. Other similarities, such as a V-shaped alimentary canal and the absence of a distinct head, reflect these organisms' sessile existence. In contrast to flatworms, which lack a body cavity, and rotifers, which have a pseudocoelom, lophophorates have a true coelom that is completely lined by mesoderm (see Figure 32.8a). Ectoprocts (from the Greek ectv, outside, and procta, anus) are colonial animals that superficially resemble clumps of moss. (In fact, their common name, bryozoans, means ~moss animals.~) In most species, the colony is encased in a hard exoskeleton (external skeleton) studded with pores through which the lophophores extend (Figure 33.14a). Most ectoproct species live in the sea, where they are among the most widespread and numerous sessile animals. Several species are important reef builders. Ectoprocts also live in lakes and rivers. Colonies of the freshwater ectoproct Pectinate/ILl magnifica grow on submerged sticks or rocks and can grow into a gelatinous, ball-shaped mass more than 10 em across. Brachiopods, or lamp shells, superficially resemble clams and other hinge-shelled molluscs, but the two halves ofthe bra-

(a) Ectoprocts, such as this sea mat (b) Brachiopods have a hinged (Membranipora membranacea), shell. The two parts of the are coloniallophophorates. shell are dorsal and ventral. ... Figure 33.14 Lophophorates.

chiopod shell are dorsal and ventral rather than lateral, as in clams (Figure 33.14b). All brachiopods are marine. Most live attached to the seafloor by a stalk, opening their shell slightly to allow water to flow through the lophophore. The living brachiopods are remnants of a much richer past that included 30,000 species in the Paleozoic and Mesozoic eras. Some living brachiopods, such as those in the genus Lingula, are nearly identical to fossils of species that lived 400 million years ago.

Molluscs Snails and slugs, oysters and clams, and octopuses and squids are all molluscs (phylum Mollusca). Most molluscs are marine, though some inhabit fresh water, and some snails and slugs live on land. Molluscs are soft-bodied animals (from the Latin mol/uscus, soft), but most secrete a hard protective shell made ofcalcium carbonate. Slugs, squids, and octopuses have a reduced internal shell or have lost their shell completely during their evolution. Despite their apparent differences, all molluscs have a similar body plan (Figure 33.15, on the next page). Molluscs are coelomates, and their bodies have three main parts: a muscular foot, usually used for movement; a visceral mass containing most of the internal organs; and a mantle, a fold of tissue that drapes over the visceral mass and secretes a shell (ifone is present). In many molluscs, the mantle extends beyond the visceral mass, producing a water-filled chamber, the mantle cavity, which houses the gills, anus, and excretory pores. Many molluscs feed by using a straplike rasping organ called a radula to scrape up food. Most molluscs have separate sexes, and their gonads (ovaries or testes) are located in the visceral mass. Many snails, however, are hermaphrodites. The life cycle of many marine molluscs includes aciliated larval stage, the trochophore (see Figure 32.13b),


Invertebrates

677

Heart. Most molluscs have an open circulatory system. The dorsally located heart pumps circulatory fluid called hemolymph through arteries into sinuses (body spaces). The organs of the mollusc are thus continually bathed in hemolymph.

Nephridium. Excretory organs called nephridia remove metabolic wastes from the hemolymph.

Visteral mass. Coelom

The long digestive tract is coiled in the visceral mass.

Intestine Gonads

Mantle cavity

(..."....~~!r:H

Anus The nervous system consists of a nerve ring aroundfrom the esophagus, which nerve cords extend.

Gill

I~-==i:::::.,.-_":::!~!!~=E~~~;:'\ Mouth Foot

Nerve cords

Esophagus

Radula. The mouth region in many mollusc species contains a rasp-like feeding organ called a radula. This belt of backwardcurved teeth repeatedly thrusts outward and then retracts into the mouth, scraping and scooping like a backhoe.

... Figure 33.15 The basic body plan of a mollusc.

T."J:U Major Classes of Phylum Mollusca Class and Examples

Main Characteristics

Polyplacophora (chitons; see Figure 33.16)

Marine; shell with eight plates; foot used for locomotion; radula; no head

Gastropoda (snails, slugs; see Figures 33.17 and 33.18)

Marine, freshwater, or terrestrial; head present; a symmetrical body, usually with a coiled shell; shell reduced or absent; foot for locomotion; radula

Bivalvia (dams, mussels, scallops, oysters; see Figures 33.19 and 33.20)

Marine and freshwater; flattened shell with two valves; head reduced; paired gills; no radula; most are suspension feeders; mantle forms siphons

Cephalopoda (squids, octopuses, cuttlefishes, chambered nautiluses; see Figure 33.21)

Marine; head surrounded by grasping tentddes, usually with suckers; shell external, internal, or absent; mouth with or without radula; locomotion by jet propulsion using siphon formed from foot

which is also characteristic of marine annelids (segmented worms) and some other 10photrochozoans. The basic body plan of molluscs has evolved in various ways in the phylum's eight classes. We'll examine four ofthose classes here (Table 33.3): Polyplacophora (chitons), Gastropoda (snails and slugs), Bivalvia (clams, oysters, and other bivalves), and Cephalopoda (squids, octopuses, cuttlefishes, and cham~ bered nautiluses).

678

UNIT

fiVE


.... Figure 33.16 A chiton. Note the eight-plate shell charaderistic of molluscs in the class Polyplacophora.

Chitons Chitons have an oval-shaped body and a shell divided into eight dorsal plates (Figure 33.16). The chiton's body itself, however, is unsegmented. You can find these marine animals clinging to rocks along the shore during low tide. If you try to dislodge a chiton by hand, you will be surprised at how well its foot, acting as a suction cup, grips the rock. A chiton can also use its foot to creep slowly over the rock surface. Chitons use their radula to scrape algae off the rock surface.

Gastropods About three-quarters of all living species of molluscs are gastropods (Figure 33.17). Most gastropods are marine, but there are also many freshwater species. Some gastropods have adapted to life on land, including garden snails and slugs.

A distinctive characteristic of class Gastropoda is a developmental process known as torsion. As a gastropod embryo develops, its visceral mass rotates up to 180', causing the animal's anus and mantle cavity to wind up above its head (Figure 33.18). After torsion, some organs that were bilateral may be reduced in size, while others may be lost on one side of the body. Torsion should not be confused with the formation of a coiled shell, which is an independent developmental process. Most gastropods have a single, spiraled shell into which the animal can retreat when threatened. The shell is often conical but is somewhat flattened in abalones and limpets. Many gastropods have a distinct head with eyes at the tips of tentacles. Gastropods move literally at a snail's pace by a rippling motion of their foot or by means of cilia, often leaving a trail of slime in their wake. Most gastropods use their radula to graze on algae or plants. Several groups, however, are predators, and their radula has become modified for boring holes in the shells ofother molluscs or for tearing apart prey. In the cone snails, the teeth ofthe radula act as poison darts that are used to subdue prey. Terrestrial snails lack the gills typical of most aquatic gastropods. Instead, the lining of their mantle cavity functions as a lung, exchanging respiratory gases with the air.

Bivalves The moUuscs of class Bivalvia include many species of clams, oysters, mussels, and scallops. Bivalves have a shell divided into two halves (Figure 33.19). The halves are hinged at the middorsal line, and powerful adductor muscles draw them tightly together to protect the animal's soft body. Bivalves have no distinct head, and the radula has been lost. Some bivalves have eyes and sensory tentacles along the outer edge oftheir mantle. The mantle cavity of a bivalve contains gills that are used for gas exchange as well as feeding in most species (Figure 33.20). Most bivalves are suspension feeders. They trap fine food particles in mucus that coats their gills, and cilia then convey those particles to the mouth. Water enters the mantle cavity through an incurrent siphon, passes over the gills, and then exits the mantle cavity through an excurrent siphon.

... Figure 33.19 A bivalve. This scallop has many eyes (dark blue spots) peering out from each half of its hirlged shell. (a) A land snail

Hinge area

Coelom

,~;;ti::~G~",~ ~

Heart

Adductor muscle ArluS

... Figure 33.17 Gastropods.

(b) A sea slug. Nudibranchs. or sea slugs, lost their shell during their evolution.

11~~~~r1~~ .~ Stomach

Excurrent iphon

Intestine

Mouth

Foot

... Figure 33.18 The results of torsion in a gastropod. Because of torsion (twisting of the visceral mass) durirlg embryonic development. the digestive tract is coiled and the anus is near the anterior end of the animal.

~;~:~=:t::;~

Mantle cavity

Gonad

Gill

Water flow Incurrent siphon

... Figure 33.20 Anatomy of a clam. Food particles suspended in water that enters through the incurrent siphon are collected by the gills and passed via cilia to the mouth.


Invertebrates

679

Most bivalves lead sedentary lives, a characteristic suited to suspension feeding. Sessile mussels secrete strong threads that tether them to rocks, docks, boats, and the shells of other ani~ mals. However, clams can pull themselves into the sand or mud, using their muscular foot for an anchor, and scallops can skitter along the seafloor by flapping their shells, rather like the mechanical false teeth sold in novelty shops.

Cephalopods Cephalopods are active predators (Figure 32.21). They use their tentacles to grasp prey, which they then bite with beaklike jaws and immobilize with a poison found in their saliva. The foot of a cephalopod has become modified into a muscular excurrent siphon and part of the tentacles. Squids dart about by drawing water into their mantle cavity and then firing a jet of water through the excurrent siphon; they steer by pointing the siphon in different directions. Octopuses use a similar mechanism to escape predators. A mantle covers the visceral mass of cephalopods, but the shell is reduced and internal (in squids and cuttlefishes) or missing altogether (in many octopuses). One small group of shelled cephalopods, the chambered nautiluses, survives today. Cephalopods are the only molluscs with a closed circulatory system. They also have well-developed sense organs and .. Octopuses are considered among the most Intelligent invertebrates.

• Squids are speedy carnivores with beak-like Jaws and well·developed eyes.

a complex brain. The ability to learn and behave in a complex manner is probably more critical to fast-moving predators than to sedentary animals such as clams. The ancestors of octopuses and squids were probably shelled molluscs that took up a predatory lifestyle; the shell was lost in later evolution. Shelled cephalopods called ammonites, some of them as large as truck tires, were the dominant invertebrate predators of the seas for hundreds of millions of years until their disappearance during the mass extinction at the end of the Cretaceous period, 65.5 million years ago (see Chapter 25). Most species ofsquid are less than 75 cm long, but some are considerably larger. The giant squid (Architeulhis dux) was for a long time the largest squid known, with a mantle up to 2.25 m long and a total length of 18 m. In 2003, however, a specimen of the rare species Mesvnychoteuthis hami/toni was caught near Antarctica; its mantle was 2.5 m long. Some biologists think that this specimen was a juvenile and estimate that adults of its species could be ty,'ice as large! Unlike A. dux, which has large suckers and small teeth on its tentacles, M. hamilton! has two rows ofsharp hooks at the ends ofits tentacles that can deliver deadly lacerations. It is likely that A. dux and M. hamilton! spend most of their time in the deep ocean, where they may feed on large fishes. Remains of both giant squid species have been found in the stomachs of sperm whales, which are probably their only natural predator. In 2005, scientists reported the first observations of A. dux in the wild, photographed while attacking baited hooks at a depth of 900 m. M. hamiltvni has yet to be observed in nature. Overall, these marine giants remain among the great mysteries of invertebrate life.

Annelids Annelida means "little rings; referring to the annelid body's re~ semblance to a series of fused rings. Annelids are segmented

Table lJ.4 Classes of Phylum Annelida

.. Chambered nautiluses are the only living cephalopods with an external shell ... Figure 33.21 Cephalopods.

680

UNIT fiVE


Class and Examples

Main Characteristics

Oligochaeta (freshwater, marine, and terrestrial segmented worms; see Figure 33.22)

Reduced head; no parapodia, but chaetae present

Polychaeta (mostly marine segmented worms; see Figure 33.23)

Many have a well-developed head; each segment usually has parapodia with many chaetae; free-living

Hirudinea (leeches; see Figure 33.24)

Body usually flattened, with reduced coelom and segmentation; chaetae usually absent; suckers at anterior and posterior ends; parasites, predators, and SCAvengers

worms that live in the sea, in most freshwater habitats, and in damp soil. Annelids are coelomates, and they range in length from less than 1 mm to more than 3 m, the length ofa giant Australian earthworm. The phylum Annelida can be divided into three classes (Table 33,4, on the facing page): Oligochaeta (the earthworms and their relatives), Polychaeta (the polychaetes), and Hirudinea (the leeches),

Each segment is surrounded by longitudinal muscle, which in turn is surrounded by circular muscle. Earthworms coordinate the contraction of these two sets of muscles to move (see Figure 50.33). These muscles work against the noncompressible coelomic fluid, which acts as a hydrostatic skeleton.

Epidermis

Oligochaetes Oligochaetes (from the Greek oligos, few, and cllaite, long hair) are named for their relatively sparse chaetae, or bristles made of chitin. TIlis class of segmented worms includes tlle earthworms and a variety of aquatic species. Figure 33.22 provides a guided tour ofthe anatomy of an earthwonn, which is representative of annelids. Earthworms eat their way through the soil, extracting

Coelom. The coelom of the earthworm is partitioned by septa.

Septum (partition between segments)

Many of the internal structures are repeated within each segment of the earthworm.

Metanephridium. Each segment of the worm contains a pair of excretory tubes, called meta nephridia, with ciliated funnel-shaped openings called nephrostomes. The meta nephridia remove wastes from the blood and coelomic fluid through exterior pores.

longitudinal muscle Dorsal--f!'lII Chaetae. Each segment vessel has four pairs of chaetae, bristles that I-~===::: provide traction for burrowing.

Fused nerve cords Nephrostome

Venlral vessel

Tiny blood vessels are abundant in the earthworm's --ii---Iskin, which functions as its respiratory organ. The blood contains oxygencarrying hemoglobin.

Clitellum Metanephridium Intestine Giant Australian earthworm

Cerebral ganglia. The earthworm nervous system features a brainlike pair of cerebral ganglia above and in front of the pharynx. A ring of nerves around the pharynx connects to a subpharyngeal ganglion, from which a fused pair of nerve cords runs posteriorly.

L---"""""":~~~ Mouth

The circulatory system, a network of vessels, is closed. The dorsal and ventral vessels are linked by segmental pairs of vessels. The dorsal vessel and five pairs of vessels that circle the esophagus are muscular and pump blood through the circulatory system.

Ventral nerve cords with segmental ganglia. The nerve cords penetrate the septa and run the length of the anima!, as do the digestive tract and longitudinal blood vessels.

... Figure 33.22 Anatomy of an earthworm, an oligochaete. CHAPTER THIRTY·THREE

Invertebrates

681

nutrients as the soil passes through the alimentary canal Undigested material, mixed with mucus secreted into the canal, is eliminated as fecal castings through the anus. Farmers value earthworms because the animals till and aerate the earth, and their castings improve the texture of the soil. (Charles Darwin estimated that a single acre of British farmland contains about SO,coo earth....,orms, producing 18 tons ofcastings per year.) Earthworms are hermaphrodites, but they cross-fertilize. Two earthworms mate by aligning themselves in opposite direclions in such a way that they exchange sperm (see figure 46.1), and then they separate. The received sperm are stored temporarily while an organ called the c1itellum secretes a cocoon of mucus. The cocoon slides along the worm, picking up the eggs and then the stored sperm. The cocoon then slips off the worm's head and remains in the soil while the embryos develop. Some earthworms can also reproduce asexually by fragmentation followed by regeneration. Polychaeles Each segment of a polychaete has a pair of paddle-like or ridge-like structures called parapodia rnear feet") that function in locomotion (Figure 33.23). Each parapodium has numerous chaetae, so polychaetes usually have many more chaetae per segment than do oligochaetes. In many polychaetes, the parapodia are richly supplied with blood vessels and also function as gills. Polychaetes make up a large and diverse class, most of whose members are marine. A few species drift and swim among the plankton, many crawl on or burrow in the seafloor, and many others live in tubes. Some tube-d.....ellers, such as the fan worms, build their tubes by mixing mucus with bits ofsand and broken shells. Others, such as Christmas tree worms (see Figure 33.1 l, construct tubes using only their own secretions. Leeches The majority of leeches inhabit fresh water, but there are also marine species as well as terrestrial leeches found in moist vegetation. Leeches range in length from about 1 to 30 cm.

.. Figure 33.24 A leech. A nurse applied thIS medJonalleech (Hirudo l'nf'didnaJisl to a patient's SCH"e thumb 10 drain blood from a hematoma (an abnormal accumulation of blood around an II'Iternal inJury).

Many are predators that feed on other invertebrates, but some are parasites that suck blood by attaching temporarily to other animals, including humans (Figure 33.24). Some parasitic species use bladelike jaws to slit the skin oftheir host, whereas others secrete enzymes that digest a hole through the skin. The host is usually oblivious to this attack because the leech secretes an anesthetic. After making the incision, the leech secretes another chemical, hirudin, which keeps the blood ofthe host from coagulating near the incision. The parasite then sucks as much blood as it can hold, often more than ten times its own weight. After this gorging, a leech can last for months without another meal. Until this century, leeches were frequently used for bloodletting. Today they are used to drain blood that accumulates in tissues following certain injuries or surgeries. Researchers have also investigated the potential use of hirudin to dissolve unwanted blood dots that form during surgery or as a result of heart disease. Several recombinant forms of hirudin have been developed, two ofwhich were recently approved fordinical use. As a group, Lophotrocholoa encompasses a remarkable range ofbody plans, as illustrated by members ofsuch phyla as Rotifera, Ectoprocta, Mollusca, and Annelida. Next we'll explore the diversity of Ecdysoloa, a dominant presence on Earth in terms of sheer number of speCies. CONCEPT CHECI(

n.)

I. Explain how tapeworms can survive without a

.. Figure 33.23 A polychaete. HesioIyra berg; lives on the seafloor around deep-sea hydrothermal vents.

coelom, a mouth, a digestive system, or an excretory system. 2. How does the modification of the molluscan foot in gastropods and cephalopods relate to their respecti\'e lifestyles? 3. Annelid anatomy can be described as -a tube within a tube:" Explain. 4. _lili','Ii* Relatively few free-living lophotrcchozoans live on land, above the surface of the soil. Focusing on gravity, hypothesize why this is so. for suggested answers. see Appendix A.

682

UNIT

fiVE


r::;;:::o~~'~re the most species-rich animal group

r;;==;

Although defined primarily by molecular evidence, the dade Lopholnxhowa Ecdysozoa includes animals Ecdysozoa that shed a tough external coat Deuterostorma (cuticle) as they grow; in fact, the group derives its name from this process, which is called molting, or ecdysis. Ecdysozoa consists of about eight animal phyla and contains mOTe known species than all other protist, fungus, plant, and animal groups combined. Here we'll focus Calcarea and Silicea Cmdana

on the two largest e in the former Soviet Republic of Georgia. Homo erectus eventually migrated as far as the Indonesian archipelago. Comparisons of H erectus fossils with humans and studies ofhuman DNA indicate that H ereclus became extinct sometime after 200,000 years ago.

Neanderthals

.. Figure 34.42 Fossil and artist's reconstruction of Homo ergaster. This 1.7·million-year·old fossil from Kenya belongs to a young male Homo ergaster. This individual was tall, slender. and fully bipedal, and he had a relatively large brain.

In 1856, miners discovered some mysterious human fossils in a cave in the Neander Valley in Germany. The 4O,OOO-year-old fossils belonged to a thick-boned hominin with a prominent brow. The hominin was named Homo neanderthalensis and is commonly called a Neanderthal. Neanderthals were living in Europe and the Near East by 2oo,CXX> years ago, but never spread outside that region. They had a brain as large as that of present-day humans, buried their dead, and made hunting tools from stone and wood. But despite their adaptations and culture, Neanderthals apparently became extinct about 28,000 years ago. At one time, many paleoanthropologists considered Neanderthals to be a stage in the evolution of Homo erectus into Homo sapiens. Now most have abandoned this view. One reason for this change concerns evidence from the analysis of CHAPTER THIRTY·fOUR

Vertebrates

731

mitochondrial DNA (figure 34.43). The results suggest that Neanderthals may have contributed little to the gene pool of H. sapiens. However, preliminary results from a 2006 study that compared Neanderthal and human nuclear DNA appear to be consistent with limited gene flow between the m'o species. In addition, some researchers have argued that evidence of gene

~Inui Did Neanderthals give rise to European humans? EXPERIMENT

People have long been fascinated by Neanderthals and their relationship to Homo sapiens. Several fossils discovered in Europe have been interpreted by some researchers as showing a mixture of Neanderthal and human features. leading to the suggestion that European humans bred with or descended from Neanderthals. Igor Ovchinnikov and William Goodw'in, then at the University of Glasgow. and their team used genetic methods to assess the relationship between Neanderthals and H. sapiens. The team extracted mitochondrial DNA (mtDNA) from a Neanderthal fossil (Neanderthal 1) and compared its sequence to an mtDNA sequence that other researchers had obtained three years earlier from a different Neanderthal fossil (Neanderthal 2). Mitochondrial DNA sequences were also obtained for a number of living humans from Europe. Africa. and Asia The researchers then used Neanderthal and H. sapiens mtDNA sequences to construct a phylogenetic tree for Neanderthals and humans; data from chimpanzees were used to root the tree. This approoch permitted the researchers to test the following hypothesis: Hypothesis; Neanderthals gave rise to European humans. Expected phylogeny:

RESULTS

~

Chimpanzees Neanderthals living Europeans Other living humans

The two Neanderthal mtDNA sequences differed at 3.5% of the bases. whereas on average. the Neanderthal and H. sapiens mtDNA differed at 24% of the bases. The phylogenetic analysis yielded the following tree: Chimpanzees Neanderthal 1 Neanderthal 2 European and other living humans

CONCLUSION The Neanderthals form one clade. and living humans form another. separate clade. Thus, it IS not likely that Neanderthals gave rise to European humans. More generally. the results suggest that Neanderthals contributed little to the H. sapiens gene pool. SOURCE I. v. Qvcn'nrI,kov et ~I. Molecul~r ~n~lysis of Ne~nderth~1 DNA from the northern Cau
Chordates Acth'ity Primate Diversity

734

UNIT fiVE

~.

~ ~

"

,1•

Concept 34.7

..


tfIS

~

Aquatic gnathostomes; have bony skeleton and maneuverable fins supported by rays Ancient lineage of aquatic lobe·fins still surviving in Indian Ocean Freshwater lobe-fins ....~th both lungs and gills; sister group of tetrapods Have four limbs descended from modified fins; most have moist skin that functions in gas exchange; many live both in water (as larvae) and on land (as adults) One of two groups of living amniotes; have amniotic eggs and rib-cage ventilation, which are key adaptations for life on land

Evolved from synapsid ancestors; include egg-laying monotremes (echidnas. platypus); pouched marsupials (such as kangaroos, opossums); and eutherians (placental mammals such as rodents, primates)

_',Iili"_ 34.8 Humans are mammals that have a large brain and bipedal locomotion (pp. 728-733) ... Derived Characters of Humans Humans are bipedal and have a larger brain and reduced jaw compared to other apes. ... The Earliest Hominins Hominins-humans and species that are more closely related to humans than to chimpanzeesoriginated in Africa at least 6-7 million years ago. Early hominins had a small brain but probably walked upright. ... Australopiths Australopiths lived 4-2 million years ago. Some species walked upright and had human-like hands and teeth. ... Bipedalism Hominins began to walk long distances on two legs about 1.9 million years ago. ... Tool Use The oldest evidence of tool use-cut marks on ani· mal bones-is 2.5 million years old.

... Early Homo Homo ergaster\l'3.S the first fuUy bipedal, large-brained hominin. Homo erectus WdS the first hominin to leave Africa. ... Neanderthals Neanderthals lived in Europe and the Near East about 200,000-28,000 years ago.

... Homo Sapiens Homo sapiens appeared in Africa by about 195,000 years ago. Its spread to other continents about 115,000 years ago may have been preceded by genetic changes that enabled language and other aspects of cognition. Research into the origins and contemporaries of Homo sapiens is a lively area.

b. c. d. e.

descent from a common amniotic ancestor. a dorsal, hollow nerve cord. an archosaur common ancestor. an amniotic egg.

5. Unlike eutherians, both monotremes and marsupials a. lack nipples. b. have some embryonic development outside the mother's uterus. c. lay eggs. d. are found in Australia and Africa. e. include only insectivores and herbivores. 6. Which clade does not include humans? a. synapsids d. craniates b. lobe-fins e. osteichthyans c. diapsids 7. As hominins diverged from other primates, which of the following appeared first? a. reduced jawbones d. the making of stone tools b. language e. an enlarged brain c. bipedal locomotion For Self-Quiz tIIlSwers, see Appendix A.

-tlN',-

Visit the 5tudy Arca at www.masteringbio.com for a Practice Test.

-tlN"-

EVOLUTION CONNECTION

Acti'ity Human Evolution

TESTING YOUR KNOWLEDGE SelF-QUIZ I. Vertebrates and tunicates share a. jaws adapted for feeding. b. a high degree of cephalization. c. the formation of structures from the neural crest. d. an endoskeleton that includes a skull. e. a notochord and a dorsal, hollow nerve cord. 2. Some animals that lived 530 million years ago resembled lancelets but had a brain and a skull. These animals may represent a. the first chordates. b. a "missing link" between urochordates and cephalochordates. c. early craniates. d. marsupials. e. nontetrapod gnathostomes. 3. Which of the follOWing could be considered the most recent common ancestor ofliving tetrapods? a. a sturdy-finned. shallow-water lobe-fin whose appendages had skeletal supports similar to those ofterrestrial vertebrates b. an armored, jawed placoderm with two pairs of appendages c. an early ray-finned fish that developed bony skeletal supports in its paired fins d. a salamander that had legs supported by a bony skeleton but moved with the side-to-side bending typical of fishes e. an early terrestrial caecilian whose legless condition had evolved secondarily 4. Mammals and living birds share all of the following characteristics except a. endothermy.

8. Identify one characteristic that qualifies humans for membership in each of the following clades: eukaryotes, animals, deuterostomes, chordates, vertebrates, gnathostomes, amniotes, mammals, primates.

SCIENTIFIC INQUIRY 9. ',I;f.W"1 As a consequence of size alone, organisms that are large tend to have larger bmins than organisms that are small. However, some organisms have bmins that are considembly larger than expected for an animal oftheir size. There are high costs associated with the development and maintenance of brains that are large relative to body size. (\1) The fossil record documents trends in which brains that are large relative to body size evolved in certain lineages. including hominins. In such lineages, what can you infer about the relative magnitude of the costs and benefits of large brains?

(b) Hypothesize how natural selection might favor the evolution of large brains despite the high maintenance costs ofsuch brains. (c) Data for 14 bird species are listed below. Graph the data, placing deviation from expected brain size on the x-axis and mortality rate on the y-axis. What can you conclude about the relationship bet,,"een brain size and mortality? De'iatlon from hp«ted BralnSiu' Mortality Rate

-2.4 -2,12.0 -1.8 -1.0 0,0 0.3 0.7 1.2 1.32.02.33.03.2 0.9 0.7 0.5 0.9 0.4 0,7 0.8 0.4 0,8 0.3 0.6 0,6 0,3 0.6

·~,galiv. ,... Iu"" indiall< brain si,,,,, .moll" th.n txp«:ttd: psiti'.. ",I""" indiclt' brain ,i,,, Iargrrth.n exp«:trd Sourout it, and it was a fascinating system of genetic transfer from a prokaryote to a eukaryote. 50 I got involved with tumors after all-but tu· mors in plants rather than animals! It had already been discovered that there was a piece of DNA that Agrobacterium transferred into the plant it infected, but we didn't know the exact composition of that DNA, the nature of its !>orders with surrounding DNA, or how the transfer happened. Meanwhile, back at UC5F, ~ople were just starting to do DNA cloning using phage lambda. When Ire· turned there, my project was to clone the piece of Agrobaclerium DNA that was inserted into the plant genome-the T DNA-and find out what the ends of the T DNA were. I would spend summers in Ghent learning the biology of Agrobacterillm and then return to UCSF to work on cloning the T DNA. finally, after one summer, I decided to stay, and [ spent the next five years at Ghent University. That's where a really big thing hap~ned. I had figured oot what the T-DNA ends were, and in Ghent I discovered that any DNA inserted between these ends (by recombinant DNA technolGg)') would be transferred to plant cells and staIK), integrated into their genomes. It ....as the birth ofgenetic engineering in plants. [See figure 20.25 to revit'Vo· how T DNA is used.)

For lhe genelic engill('t"ring of plants, how

does lhe Agrobacterium system compare with a "gene gun"? People genera1ty prefer to use the Agrobactnium 5)'Stem bea.use aU the DNA carried bet.....e en the ends of the T element is precisely integrated into the plant cell's DNA. Agrobacterium DNA transfer is more precise and signifiCllndy more efficient than shooting foreign DNA into plant cells using a gene gun, ....ilich fires tiny pellets coateki and colleagues in Inquiry Figure 36,22 on page 782. Jane Reece (left) and Pat Zambryski

737

.... Figure 35.1 Why does this plant have two types of leaves? KEY

CONCEPTS

35.1 The plant body has a hierarchy of organs, tissues, and cells 35.2 Meristems generate cells for new organs 35.3 Primary growth lengthens roots and shoots 35.4 Secondary growth adds girth to stems and roots in woody plants 35.5 Growth, morphogenesis, and differentiation produce the plant body

lthough the graceful fanwort (Cabomba caroliniana)

A

(Figure 35.1) is an attractive addition to many aquari·

urns, its most striking feature is its extreme develop· mental plasticity-its ability to alter its form in response to local environmental conditions. The underwater leaves are feathery, an adaptation that protects them from damage by lessening their resistance to moving water. In contrast, the surface leaves are pads that aid in flotation. Both leaftypes have genetically identical cells, but dissimilar environments result in the turning on or off of different genes during leaf development. Such extreme developmental plasticity is much more common in plants than in animals and may help compensate for plants' inability to escape adverse conditions by moving. In addition to structural responses by an individual plant to a specific environment, entire species have by natural selection accumulated adaptations in morphology, or external form, that vary little among plants within the species. For example. most cactus species, regardless of local environment, have leaves that are so highly reduced-to spines-that the stems are the primary photosynthetic organs. This adaptation in leaf morphology enhances the survival and reproductive success of cacti because with reduced leaf surface areas, these desert plants lose less water. 738

Both genetic and environmental factors influence form in plants and animals, but the effect of environment is greater in plants. Consequently. plants typically vary much more within a species than do animals. All lions, for example. have four legs and are roughly the same size at maturity. In contrast, ginkgo trees vary greatly in the numbers, sizes, and positions of their roots, branches, and leaves. Lacking mobility, plants must be adapted to their environment in other ways. Thus, plant form is central to understanding how plants compete in nature. This chapter focuses on how the body of a plant is formed, setting the stage for the rest of this unit on plant biology. Chapters 29 and 30 described the evolution and characteristics of nonvascular plants, seedless vascular plants, gymnosperms, and angiosperms (flowering plants). Here, in Unit Six, we'll focus primarily on vascular plants-especially angiosperms. because they account for about 90% of plant species and are of great importance to humans. As the world's population increases. the need for plants to supply food, fuel. fiber, medicine. lumber, and paper has never been greater, heightening the importance of understanding how plants grow and develop.

r;~:i:I:~t~~d~ has a hierarchy of organs, tissues, and cells

Plants, like most animals, have organs composed of different tissues, which in turn are composed of cells of different types. A tissue is a group ofcells with a common function. structure. or both. An organ consists of several types of tissues that together carry out particular functions. In looking at the hierarchy of plant organs, tissues, and cells, we begin with organs because they are the most familiar and easily observed plant structures. As you learn about the hierarchy of plant structure, keep in mind how natural selection has produced plant forms, at all levels of organization, that fit plant function.

The Three Basic Plant Organs: Roots, Stems, and Leaves The basic morphology of most vascular plants reflects their evolutionary history as terrestrial organisms that inhabit and draw resources from two very different environments-below ground and above ground. They must absorb water and minerals from below the ground surface and C~ and light from above the ground surface. The ability to acquire these resources arose from the eo.-olution of three basic organs-roots, stems, and leaves. These organs form a root system and a shoot system. the latter consisting of stems and leaves (Figure 35.2). With few exceptions, angiosperms and other vaseuIar plants rely rompletel:y on both systems for survival. Roots are typically nonphotosynthetic and stan-e unless photosylldrates. the sugars and other carbohydrates produced during photosynthesis, are imported from the shoot system. Conversely, the shoot system depends on the water and minerals that roots absorb from the soil Vegetative growth-production of nonreproductive leaves. stems, and roots-is only one stage in a plant's life. Manyplants also undergo reproductive growth. In angiosperms, reproduc· tive shoots bear flowers, which are composed oflea\'eS that are highly modified for sexual reproduction. Later in this chapter,

Reproduct....e shoot (flower) Apical budl-----,---..Ij

Apical---'t

b,'

Vegelati~e ----'llt.

Shoot system

shoot

{Blade·-=i~~~~~

Leaf petiol~

Axillary

b,'

we'll discuss the transition from vegetative shoot formation to reproductive shoot formation. In describing plant organs, we'll draw examples mainly from the two major groups of angiosperms: monocots and eudicots (see Figure 30.13).

Roots A root is a multicellular organ that anchors a vascular plant in the soil, absorbs minerals and water, and often stores carbohydrates. Most eudicots and gymnosperms have a taproot system, consisting of one main vertical root, the taproot, that develops from an embryonic root. The taproot gives rise to lateral roots, also called branch roots (see Figure 35.2). in many angiosperms, the taproot stores sugars and starches that the plant will consume during flowering and fruit production. For this reason, root crops such as carrots, turnips, and beets are harvested before they flower. Taproot systems generally penetrate deeply and are therefore well adapted to deep soils where the groundwater is not close to the surface. In seedless vascular plants and in most monocots, such as grasses, the embryonic root dies and does not give rise to a main root. Instead, many small roots grow from the stem. Such rootsare said to beadvelltitiOUS (from the Latin advelltiCUS, extraneous), a term describing a plant organ that grows in an unusual location, such as roots arising from stems or lea\'eS. Each small root forms its own lateral roots. The result is a fibrous root system-a mat of generally thin roots spreading oul below the soil surface, with no root functioning as the main one (see Figure 30.13). Fibrous root systems usually do not penetrate deeply and are therefore best adapted to shallow soils or regions where rainfall is light and does not moisten the soil much below the surface layer. Most grasses have shallow roots, con· centrated in the upper few centimeters of the soil. Because these shallow roots hold the topsoil in place, grass makes excellent ground cover for preventing erosion. Although the entire root system helps anchor a plant, in most plants the absorption of water and minerals occurs primarily near the tips of roots, where vast numbers of tiny root hairs increase the surface area of the rool enormously (Figure 35.3).

",m--::::;;;;o;;;;;OOiiiiiiiiii

.,c,:,~"~,~;".w;:,h:":h~G:L~A~8~R:A:-2:;:':':'P:'~'="='=d".I

cells r

_

among cells derived from different lineages. Such exceptions indicate that meristematic cells are not dedicated early to forming specific tissues and organs. Instead, the cell'sjinal position in an emerging organ determines what kind of cell it will become.

Shifts in Development: Phase Changes Here an

epidermal cell borders two

cortical cells. GLABRA-2 is not expressed, and the cell T

E

will develop a root hair.

~

~L_,,':'.L~""""~'--'L__--' The root cap cells external to the epidermal layer will be sloughed

off before root hairs emerge. .&.

Figure 35.31 Control of root hair differentiation by a

homeotic gene (lM). _'MniM What would the fOOfS look like ifGLABRA-2 were

Multicellular organisms generally pass through developmental phases. In humans, these are infancy, childhood, adolescence, and adulthood, with puberty as the dividing line between the nonreproductive and reproductive phases. Plants also pass through phases, developing from a juvenile phase to an adult vegetative phase to an adult reproductive phase. In animals, these developmental changes take place throughout the entire organism, such as when a larva devel· ops into an adult animaL In contrast, plant developmental phases occur within a single region, the shoot apical meristem. The morphological changes that arise from these transitions in shoot apical meristem activity are called phase changes. During the transition from a juvenile phase to an adult phase, the most obvious morphological changes typically occur in leaf size and shape (Figure 35.32). Juvenile

rendered dysfunctional by a mutation?

Location and a Cell's Developmental Fate In the process ofshaping an organ, patterns ofcell division and cell expansion affect the differentiation ofcells by placing them in specific locations relative to other cells. Thus, positional information underlies all the processes of development: growth, morphogenesis, and differentiation. One way to study the relationshipsamong these processes is clonal analysis, in which the cell lineages derived from each cell in an apical meristem are mapped during organ development. Researchers use mutations to distinguish a specific meristematic cell from the neighboring cells in the shoot tip. All cells derived from the mutant cell by cell division will thereby be "marked:' For example, a single cell in the meristem may have a mutation that prevents chlorophyll synthesis. This cell and all of its descendants will be "albino," and they will appear as a linear file of"albino" cells running down the long axis ofthe otherwise green shoot. How early is a cell's developmental fate determined by its position in an embryonic structure? To some extent, the developmental fates of cells in the shoot tip are predictable very early. For example, clonal analysis has shown that almost all the cells derived from the outermost meristematic cells become part of the dermal tissue. However, we cannot pinpoint which meristematic cells will give rise to specific tissues and organs. Apparently random changes in rates and planes ofcell division can reorganize the meristem. For example, the outermost cells usually divide perpendicularly to the surface of the shoot tip, adding cells to the surface layer. Occasionally, however, one of the outermost cells divides parallel to the surface of the shoot tip, placing one daughter cell beneath the surface,

Leaves produced by adult phase of apical meristem

leaves produced by ju....enile phase of apical meristem

... Figure 35.32 Phase change in the shoot system of Acacia koa. This nati....e of Hawaii has compound ju.. . enile leaves, consisting of many small leaflets, and simple mature "leaves" (technically. highly modified petioles). This dual foliage reflects a phase change in the de.. . elopment of the apical meristem of each shoot. Once a node forms, the developmental phase-ju....enile or adult-is fiKed: that is, compound lea.. . es do not mature into simple lea.. . es.

CIlAPTE ~ TIlIRTY·fl .... E

Plant Structure, Growth, and Development

759

nodes and internodes retain their juvenile status even after the shoot continues to elongate and the shoot apical meristem has changed to the adult phase. Therefore, any new leaves that develop on branches that emerge from axillary buds at juvenile nodes will also be juvenile, even though the apical meristem of the stem's main axis may have been pro· ducing mature nodes for years. Phase changes are examples of developmental plasticity. The transition from juvenile to adult leaves is only one type of phase change. The transition in the fanwort (see Figure 35.1) from feathery underwater leaves to fan-shaped floating leaves is another example. Next well examine a common but nevertheless remarkable phase change-the transition of a vegetative shoot apical meristem into a floral meristem.

Genetic Control of Flowering

(see Figure 18.18), a mutation in a plant organ identity gene can cause abnormal floral development, such as petals growing in place of stamens, as shown in Figure 35.33. By studying mutants with abnormal flowers, researchers have identified and cloned three classes of floral organ identity genes, and their studies are beginning to reveal how these genes function. The ABC model of flower formation, diagrammed in Figure 35.34a, identifies how these three classes of genes direct the formation of the four types of flo· ral organs. According to the ABC model, each class of organ identity genes is switched on in two specific whorls ofthe floral meristem. Normally, A genes are switched on in the two outer whorls (sepals and petals); B genes are switched on in the two middle whorls (petals and stamens); and C genes are switched on in the two inner whorls (stamens and carpels). Sepals arise from those parts ofthe floral meristems in which only A genes are active; petals arise where A and B genes are active; stamens where Band C genes are active; and carpels where only C genes are active. The ABC model can account for the phenotypes of mutants lacking A, B, or C gene activ· ity, with one addition: Where gene A activity is present, it in· hibits C, and vice versa. If either A or C is missing, the other takes its place. Figure 35.34b shows the floral patterns of mutants lacking each of the three classes of organ identity

Flower formation involves a phase change from vegetative growth to reproductive growth. This transition is triggered by a combination of environmental cues, such as day length, and in· ternal signals, such as hormones. (You wiJIlearn more about the roles of these signals in flowering in Chapter 39.) Unlike vegeta· tive growth, which is indeterminate, floral growth is determinate: The production of a flower by a shoot apical meristem stops the primary growth ofthat shoot. The transition from vegetative growth to flowering is associated with the switching on of floral meristem identity genes. The protein products of these genes are transcription factors that regulate the genes required forthe conversion ofthe indeterminate vegetative meristems to determinate floral meristems. When a shoot apical meristem is induced to flower, the relative position of each primordium determines its development into a specific type of floral organ-a sepal, petal, stamen, or carpel (see Figure 30.7 to review basic flower structure). Viewed from above, the floral organs develop in four concentric circles, or whorls: (a) Normal Arabidopsis flower. Arabidopsis Sepals form the fourth (outermost) whorl; normally has four whorls of flower parts: sepals petals form the third; stamens form the second; (Se). petals {Pel. stamens (St). and carpels (Ca). and carpels form the first (innermost) whorl. Plant biologists have identified several organ identity genes that regulate the development of this characteristic floral pattern. Organ identity genes, also called plant homeotic genes, code for transcription factors. Positional information (b) Abnormal Arabidopsis flower. Researchers have identified several mutations of organ identity determines which organ identity genes are exgenes that cause abnormal flowers to develop. pressed in a particular floral organ primordium. This flower has an extra set of petals in place of The result is the development of an emerging stamens and an internal flower where normal plants have carpels. floral primordium into a specific floral organ. And just as a mutation in a fruit fly homeotic ... Figure 35.33 Organ identity genes and pattern formation in flower development. gene can cause legs to grow in place of antennae 760

UNIT SIX


... Figure 35.34 The ABC hypothesis for the functioning of organ identity genes in flower development.

Petals Stamens

(a) A schematic diagram of the ABC

•

.. 8 gene activity

B+C gene activity -:...c::~",Jr,

hypothesis. Studies of plant mutations reveal that three classes of organ identity genes are responsible lor the spatial pattern oilloral parts. These genes, designated A. B, and C. regulate expression of other genes responsible lor development of sepals, petals, stamens, and carpels. Sepals develop from the meristematic region where only A genes are active. Petals develop where both A and B genes are expressed. Stamens arise where Band Cgenes are active. Carpels arise where only Cgenes are expressed.

Carpel

A gene

adivity

,........:'~Sepal

Adive genes:

BB BB AACCCCAA

BB BB CCCCCCCC

Whorls:

IIIIII:I

ITIIIIIIJ

AACCCCAA

AA AA ABBAABBA

IIJJIII

Carpel Stamen

Wild type

Petal

Mutant lacking A

Mutant lacking B

Mutant lacking C

(b) Side view of flowers with organ identity mutations. The phenotype of mutants lacking a lunctional A. B, or Corgan identity gene can be explained by combining the model in part (a) with the flJle that if A or Cactivity is missing, the other activity occurs through all four whorls.

genes and depicts how the model accounts for the floral phenotypes. By constructing such hypotheses and designing experiments to test them, researchers are tracing the genetic basis of plant development. In dissecting the plant to examine its parts, as we have done in this chapter, we must remember that the whole plant functions as an integrated organism. In the following chapters, you'll learn more about how materials are transported within vascular plants (Chapter 36), how plants obtain nutrients (Chapter 37), how plants reproduce (Chapter 38, focusing on flowering plants), and how plant functions are coordinated (Chapter 39). Remembering that structure fits function and that plant anatomy and physiology reflect evolutionary adaptations to the challenges of living on land will enhance your understanding of plants.

CONCEPT

CHECK

35.5

1. What attributes of the weed Arabidopsis thaliana make it such a useful research organism? 2. How can two cells in a plant have vastly different structures even though they have the same genome? 3. Explain how the/ass mutation in Arabidopsis results in a stubby plant rather than a normal elongated one. In some species, such as the magnolia 4, on the cover of this book, sepals look like petals, and both are collectively called "tepals:' Suggest an extension to the ABC model that could hypothetically account for the origin of tepaIs.

_','!lfUI.


CIlAPTE ~ TIlIRTY·fIVE

Plant Structure, Growth, and Development

761

-£.Ii ]f.- Go to the Study Area at www.masteringbio.com for 6ioFlix 3-D Animations, MP3 Tutors, Videos. Practice Tests, an eBook. and more.

· i l l l i . ) - 35.3

Primary growth lengthens roots and shoots (pp.747-751)


.i.IIIiI'_ 35.1

The plant body has a hierarchy of organs, tissues, and cells (pp. 738-745) .. The Three Basic Plant Organs: Roots, Stems, and Leaves Roots anchor the plant, absorb and conduct water and minerals, and store food. Shoots consist of stems, leaves, and (in angio· sperms) flowers. l.eaves are attached to the nodes of the stem and are the primary organs of photosynthesis. Axillary buds, located in axils of leaves and stems, give rise to shoot branches. Plant organs may be modified for specialized functions. .. Dermal, Vascular, and Ground Tissues Dermal tissue (epidermis and periderm), vascular tissue (xylem and phloem), and ground tissue are continuous throughout the plant, although in the various plant organs the three tissues differ in arrangement and in some specialized functions. Vascular tissues integrate the parts of the plant. Water and minerals move up from roots through the xylem. Sugar is exported from leaves or storage organs through the phloem. .. Common Types of Plant Cells Parenchyma cells, relatively unspecialized cells that retain the ability to divide. perform most of the plant's metabolic functions of synthesis and storage. Collenchyma cells, which have unevenly thickened walls. support young. growing parts of the plant. Sclerenchyma cells-fibers and sc1ereids-have thick, lignified walls that help support mature, nongrowing parts of the plant. Tracheids and vessel elements. the water-conducting cells of xylem. have thick walls and are dead at functional maturity. Sieve-tube elements are the sugar-transporting cells of phloem in angiosperms. Though alive at functional maturity, sieve-tube elements depend on neighboring companion cells.

.. Primary Growth of Roots The root apical meristem is located near the tip of the root. where it generates cells for the growing root axis and the root cap. .. Primary Growth of Shoots The apical meristem of a shoot is located in the apical bud. where it gives rise to a repetition of internodes and leaf-bearing nodes. ,\echity Root. Stem. and Lear~ctions In''e~tigalion What Are Functions of Monocot

· i l i l i " - 35.4

Secondary growth adds girth to stems and roots in woody plants (pp. 751-754) .. The Vascular Cambium and Secondary Vascular Tissue The vascular cambium develops from parenchyma cells into a meristematic cylinder that produces secondary xylem and secondary phloem. Older layers of secondary xylem (heartwood) become inactive, while younger layers (sapwood) still conduct water. Only the youngest secondary phloem is active in conducting sugars. .. The Cork Cambium and the Production of Periderm The cork cambium gives rise to the secondary plant body's protective covering, or periderm, which consists of the cork cam· bium plus the layers of cork cells it produces. Bark consists of all the tissues external to the vascular cambium: secondary phloem and periderm. ,\echity Primary and Se It'1' can be positive or negative relative to atmospheric pressure. For example, the water in the nonliving xylem cells (tracheidsand vessel elements) ofa plant is often under a negative pressure potential (tension) ofless than - 2 MPa. Conversely, much like the air in a balloon, the water in living cells is usually under positive pressure. Specifically, the cell contents press the plasma membrane against the cell wall, and the cell wall, in turn, presses against the protoplast, producing what is called turgor pressure.

Measuring Water Potential Now let's put the water potential equation to use. We'll apply it to an artificial model and then to a living plant celL A V-shaped tube can be used to demonstrate water movement across a selectively permeable membrane (figure 36.8). As you consider this model, keep in mind the key point: Water

How Solutes and Pressure Affect Water Potential Both pressure and solute concentration can affect water potential, as expressed in the water potential equation: It' = IVs + It'P

movesfrom regions ofhigher water potential to regions of/ower water potential. The two arms of the V·tube are separated by

where It' is the water potential, It's is the solute potential (osmotic potential), and It'p is the pressure potential. The solute potential ('Vs) of a solution is proportional to its molarity. Solute potential is also called osmotic potential because solutes affect the direction of osmosis. Solutes are dissolved chemicals, which in plants are typically mineral ions and sugars. By definition, the 'Vs of pure water is O. But what happens when solutes are added? The solutes bind water molecules, reducing the number of free water molecules and lowering the capacity of the water to move and do work. TIlUS, adding solutes always (.)

(b)

j Positive

0.1 M solution

t

N'9'~'"

pressure

(to,,'ool •

00

.:8°""

. " : 88

: 8

"

l¥p = 0 l¥s = -0,23 l¥ - -0,23 MPa

(d)

•

•,

l¥p =0 l¥s =0 l¥ -OMPa

«I

fl""

~j• • Pure water

a membrane (shown as a vertical dashed line) that is permeable to water but not to solutes. If the right arm of the tube contains a 0.1 M solution (lVs = -0.23 MPa) and the left arm contains pure water (It's = 0), and there is no physical pressure (that is, IVr = 0), the water potential 'V is equal to'Vs. Thus, the 'V of the right arm is -0.23 MPa, whereas the It' of the left arm (pure water) is 0 MPa. Because water moves from regions of higher water potential to regions of lower water potential, the net water movement will be from the left arm of the tube to

l¥p =0 l¥s =0 l¥ 0 MPa

... Figure 36.8 Water potential and water movement: an artificial model. In this U-shaped apparatus. a membrane separates pure water (left arm) from a 0.1 M solution (right arm) containing a solute that cannot pass freely across the membrane. The values for 1jI, l¥5' and l¥p in the left and

8

l¥p = 0.23 l¥s = -0,23 l¥ = OMPa

l¥p = 0 Ij's = 0 l¥ =OMPa

l¥p = 0,30 l¥s = -0.23 l¥ = 007 MPa

right arms of the U-tube are given for initial conditions, before any net movement of water. (a) If no pressure is applied. "I's determines net movement of water. (b) Positive pressure (increased IjIp) on the right raises l¥ on the right. here making Ij' the same in both arms. so eventually there is

CHIloPTER THIRTY·SIX

-030 l¥s = 0 IjI = 0,30 MPa IjIp =

IjIp IjIs

IjI

= 0 = -0,23 0,23 MPa

no net water movement. (e) Further Increasing positive pressure on the right causes net water movement to the left (d) Negative pressure reduces l¥p. In this case, negative pressure on the left decreases l¥ on the left. causing net water movement to the left.

Resource Acquisition and Transport in Vascular Plants

769

the right arm, as shown in Figure 36.8a. But applying a positive physical pressure of +0.23 MPa to the solution in the right arm raises its water potential from a negative value to 0 MPa (IV = -0.23 + 0.23). As shown in Figure 36.8b, there is now no net flow of water between this pressurized solution and the com· partment of pure water. If we increase IVp to +0.30 MPa in the right arm, as in Figure 36.&, then the solution has a water potentialof +0.07 MPa (IV = -0.23 + 0.30), and this solution will actually lose water to a compartment containing pure water. Whereas applying positive pressure increases IV, applying negative pressure (tension) reduces IV, as shown in Figure 36.8d. In this case, a negative pressure potential of -0.30 MPa reduces the IV of the water compartment enough so that water is drawn from the solution on the right side. Now let's consider how water potential affects absorption and loss of water by a living plant celL First, imagine a cell that is flaccid (limp) as a result of losing water. The cell has a IVI' of oMPa. Suppose this flaccid cell is bathed in a solution ofhigher solute concentration (more negative solute potential) than the cell itself(Figure 36.9a). Sincetheextemal solution has the lower (more negative) water potential, water diffuses out of the cell. The cell's protoplast undergoes plasmolysis-that is, it shrinks and pulls away from the cell wall. Ifwe place the same flaccid cell in pure water (", = 0 MPa) (Figure 36.9b), the cell, because it contains solutes, has a lower water potential than the water, and water enters the cell by osmosis. The contents of the cell begin to swell and press the plasma membrane against the cell walL The partially elastic wall, exerting turgor pressure, pushes back against the pressurized protoplast \Vhen this pressure is enough to offset the tendency for water to enter because ofthe solutes in the cell, then IVI' and IVs are equal, and IV = O. This matches the

water potential ofthe extracellular environment: in this example, oMPa. Adynamic equilibrium has been reached, and there is no further net movement ofwater. In contrast to a flaccid cell, a walled cell with a greater solute concentration than its surroundings is turgid, or very firm. \Vhen turgid cells in a nonwoody tissue push against each other, the tissue is stiffened. The effects of turgor loss are seen during wilting, when leaves and stems droop as a result of cells losing water (Figure 36.10).

.... Figure 36.10 A wilted Impatiens plant regains its turgor when watered.

Initial flaccid cell: 0.4 M sucrose solution: '¥p'" 0 'is'" -0,9

V

-0.9 MPa

Plasmolyzed cell at osmotIC equilibrium with its surroundings

•

'¥p'" 0 '¥s'" -0.9 '" '" -0.9 MPa

'¥p'" 0 '¥s'" -0.7 If '" -0.7 MPa

.'-'~. ~

f

(a) Initial conditions: cellular '¥ > environmental \II. The cell loses water and plasmolyzes, Alter plasmolysis is complete. the water potentials of the cell and its surroundings are the same.

UNIT SIX


'¥p'" 0 'Vs'" 0

'" ",OMPa

I

.... ..

Turgid cell at osmotic eqUilibrium with its surroundings 'Vp'" 0.7 '¥s'" -0.7 If '" OMPa

(b) Initial conditions: cellular 'i < environmental \II. There is a net uptake of water by osmosis, causing the cell to become turgid. When thiS tendency lor water to enter is offset by the back pressure of the elastic wall. water potentials are equal for the cell and its surroundings, (The volume chang!' of the cell is exaggerated in this diagram,)

.... Figure 36.9 Water relations in plant cells. In these experiments, identical cells, initially flaccid, are placed in two environments, (Protoplasts oillaccid cells are in contact with their walls but lack turgor pressure.) Blue arrows indicate initial net water movement. 770

Pure water:

Aquaporins: Facilitating Diffusion of Water A difference in water potential determines the direction ofwater movement across membranes, but how do water molecules actually cross the membranes? Water molecules are small enough to diffuse across the phospholipid bilayer, even though the middle zone is hydrophobic (see Figure 7.2), but their movement is too rapid to be explained by unaided diffusion. Indeed, transport proteins called aquaporins facilitate the diffusion (see Chapter 7). These selective channels, which have been found most commonly in plants, affect the rate at which water diffuses down its water potential gradient. Evidence is accumulating that the rate of water movement through these proteins is regulated by phosphorylation of the aquaporin proteins, which can be induced by increases in cytoplasmic calcium ions or decreases in cytoplasmic pH. Recent evidence suggests that aquaporins may also facilitate absorption of CO 2 by plant cells.

Three Major Pathways ofTransport

route, water and solutes move out of one cell, across the cell wall, and into the neighboring cell, which may pass them to the next cell in the same way. The transmembrane route requires repeated crossings of plasma membranes as water and solutes exit one cell and enter the next. Substances may use more than one route. Scientists are debating which route, if any, is responsible for the most transport.

Bulk Flow in Long-Distance Transport Diffusion and active transport are fairly efficient for shortdistance transport within a cell and between cells. However, these processes are much too slow to function in long-distance transport within a plant. Although diffusion from one end of a cell to the other takes just seconds, diffusion from the roots to the top ofa giant redwood would take decades or longer. Instead, long-distance transport occurs through bulk flow, the movement of a fluid driven by pressure. \Vi.thin tracheids and vessel elements ofthe xylem and within the sieve-rube elements (also called sieve-rube members) ofthe phloem, water and dissolved solutes move together in the same direction by bulk flow. The strucrures of these conducting cells ofthe xylem and phloem help to make bulk flow possible. Ifyou have ever dealt with a partially clogged drain, you know that the volume offlow depends on the pipe's diameter. Gogs reduce the effective diameter of the drainpipe. Such experiences help us

Transport within plants is also regulated by the compartmental strucrure of plant cells (Figure 36.11a). Outside the protoplast is a cell wall (see Figures 6.9 and 6.28), consisting of a mesh of polysaccharides through which mineral ions diffuse readily. Because every plant cell is separated from its neighboring cells by cell walls, ions can diffuse across a tissue (or be carried passively by water flow) entirely through the apoplast (Figure 36.11b), Transport proteins in Transport proteins in Cell wall the continuum formed by cell walls, exthe plasma membrane _ the vacuolar Cytosol tracellular spaces, and the dead interiors _j----!----jmembrane regulate regulate traffic of L_-..t=t'-; molecules between r Vacuole......... traffic of molecules oftracheids and vessels. However, it is the the cytosol and the ........ between the cytosol plasma membrane that directly controls cell wall. and the vacuole. ~ the traffic ofmolecules into and out ofthe protoplast Just as the cell walls form a PlasmOdesma Vacuolar membrane continuum, so does the cytosol of cells, Plasma membrane collectively referred to as the symplast (a) Cell compartments. The cell wall. cytosol. and vacuole are the three main (see Figure 36. lib). The cytoplasmic compartments of most mature plant cells. channels called plasmodesmata connect the cytoplasm of neighboring cells. The compartmental structure ofplant Apoplast cells provides three routes for shortSymplast Transmembrane route ~_. ._ _"";;;;;;;;'_. . • distance transport within a plant tissue Apoplast or organ: the apoplastic, symplastic, and The sympl.ast is the ~ ~ ..,.._••• _~ contlIluum of ---,.----".transmembrane routes (see Figure 36.1 Ib). Symplast cytosol connected __~ ~_ _• The apoplast is In the apoplastic route, water and solutes the continuum by plasmodesmata. / move along the continuwn ofcell walls and of cell walls and e.tracellu!ar extracellular spaces. In the symplastic spaces. Symplastic route/ route, water and solutes move along the Apoplastic route continuum ofcytosol within a plant tissue. (b) Transport routes between cells. At the tissue level. there are three pathways: This route requires only one crossing ofa the transmembrane, symplastic, and apoplastic routes, Substances can transfer plasma membrane. After entering one cell, from one pathway to another, substances can move from cell to cell via .. Figure 36.11 Cell compartments and routes for short-distance transport. plasmodesmata. In the transmembrane

I

'.y

•

--==~'::>:=======,,=~~~

CHAPTER THIRTY·SI.


771

understand how the structures of plant cells specialized for bulk flow fit their function. As you learned in Chapter 35, mature tracheids and vessel elements are dead cells and therefore have no cytoplasm, and the cytoplasm of sieve-tube elements is almost devoid of internal organelles (see Figure 35.10). Like unplugging a kitchen drain, loss of cytoplasm in a plant's uplumbing~ allows for efficient bulk flow through the xylem and phloem. Bulk flow is also enhanced by the perforation plates at the ends ofvessel elements and the porous sieve plates connecting sieve-rube elements. Diffusion, active transport, and bulk flow act in concert to transport resources throughout the whole plant. For example, bulk flow due to a pressure difference is the mechanism of long-distance transport of sugars in the phloem, but active transport of sugar at the cellular level maintains this pressure difference. In the next three sections, we'll examine in more detail the transport of water and minerals from roots to shoots, the control ofevaporation, and the transport ofsugars. CONCEPT

CHECI(

36.2

1. If a plant cell immersed in distilled water has a

"'S of

-0.7 MPa and a '" of 0 MPa, what is the cell's "'p? If you put it in an open beaker of solution that has a '" of -0.4 MPa, what would be its "'p at equilibrium? 2. How would an aquaporin deficiency affect a plant cell's ability to adjust to new osmotic conditions? 3. How would the long-distance transport of water be affected if vessel elements and tracheids were alive at marurity? Explain. 4, _ImPUI,. \Vhat would happen if you put plant protoplasts in pure water? Explain. For suggested answers. see Appendix A.

Picture yourselfstruggling to carry a very large container ofwater up several flights of stairs. Then consider the fact that water within a plant is transported effortlessly against the force of gravity. Up to 800 L (BOO kg or 1,760 lb) of water reach the top of an average-sized tree every day. But trees and other plants have no pumping mechanism. So how is this feat accomplished? To answer this question, we'll follow each step in the journey of water and minerals from the tips of roots to the tips of shoots.

Absorption of Water and Minerals by Root Cells Although all living plant cells absorb nutrients across their plasma membranes, the cells near the tips of roots are partic772

UNIT SIX


ularly important because most of the water and mineral absorption occurs there. In this region, the epidermal cells are permeable to water, and many are differentiated into root hairs, modified cells that account for much of the absorption of water by roots (see Figure 35.3). The root hairs absorb the soil solution, which consists of water molecules and dissolved mineral ions that are not bound tightly to soil particles. The soil solution flows into the hydrophilic walls of epidermal cells and passes freely along the cell walls and the extracellular spaces into the root cortex. This flow enhances the exposure of the cells of the cortex to the soil solution, providing a much greater membrane surface area for absorption than the surface area of the epidermis alone. Although the soil solution usually has a low mineral concentration, active transport enables roots to accumulate essential minerals, such as K+, to concentrations hundreds of times higher than in the soil.

Transport of Water and Minerals into the Xylem Water and minerals that pass from the soO into tlle root cortex cannot be transported to the rest oftlle plant untl1 they enter tlle xylem ofthe stele, or vascular cylinder. The endodennis, the innermost layer of cells in the root cortex, surrounds the stele and functions as a last checkpoint for the selective passage of minerals from the cortex into the vascular tissue (Figure 36.12). Minerals already in the symplast when they reach the endodermis continue through the plasmodesmata of endodermal cells and pass into the stele. These minerals were already screened by the plasma membrane they had to cross to enter the symplast in the epidermis or cortex. Those minerals that reach the endodermis via the apoplast encounter a dead end that blocks their passage into the stele. This barrier, located in the transverse and radial walls ofeach endodermal cell, is tlle Casparian strip, a belt made of suberin, a waxy material impervious to water and dissolved minerals (see Figure 36.12). Thus, water and minerals cannot cross the endodermis and enter the vascular tissue via the apoplast. The Casparian strip forces water and minerals that are passively moving through the apoplast to cross the plasma membrane ofan endodermal cell and enter the stele via the symplast The endodermis, with its Casparian strip, ensures that no minerals can reach the vascular tissue of the root without crossing a selectively permeable plasma membrane. The endodermis also prevents solutes that have accumulated in the xylem from leaking back into the soil solution. The structure of the endodermis and its strategic location fit its function as an apoplastic barrier between the cortex and the stele. The endodermis helps roots to transport certain minerals preferentially from the soil into the xylem. The last segment in the soil-to-xylem pathway is the passage of water and minerals into the tracheids and vessel elements of the xylem. These water-conducting cells lack protoplasts when mature and therefore are part of the apoplast. Endodermal cells, as well as living cells within the stele, discharge minerals

... Figure 36.12 Transport of water and minerals from root hairs to the xylem. n How does the (asparian strip force water and minerals to . . pass through the plasma membranes ofendodermal cells)

Casparian strip

Pathway through symplast

o ofApoplastic route. Uptake soil solution by the Casparian strip

hydrophilic walls of root hairs pro~ldes access to the apoplast Water and minerals can then diffuse into the corteK along this matriK of walls.

o and water that cross the

~Q~

Symplastit route. Minerals

plasma membranes of root

hairs can enter the symplast.

o

Vessels (Kylem)

Orransmembrane route. As soil solution moves along the

apoplast. some water and minerals afe transported into the protoplasts of cells allhe epidermis and cortex and then move Inward via the symplast

v

o The endodermis: controlled entry to the stele. Within the transverse and radial walls of each endodermal cell is the Casparian strip, a belt of waxy material (purple band) that blocks the passage of water and dissolved minerals. Only minerals already in the symplast or entering that pathway by crOSSing the plasma membrane of an endodermal cell can detour around the Casparian strip and pass into the stele. the ~ascular cylinder.

from their protoplasts into their own cell walls. Both diffusion and active transport are involved in this transfer ofsolutes from symplast to apoplast, and the water and minerals are now free to enter the tracheids and vessels, where they are transported to the shoot system by bulk flow.

Bulk Flow Driven by Negative Pressure in the Xylem Water and minerals from the soil enter the plant through the epidermis of roots, cross the root cortex, and pass into the stele. From there the xylem sap, the water and dissolved minerals in the xylem, gets transported long distances by bulk flow to the veins that branch throughout each leaf. As noted earlier, bulk flow is much faster than diffusion or active transport. Peak velocities in the transport of xylem sap can range from 15 to 45 m/hr for trees with wide vessels. Leaves depend on this efficient delivery system for their supply of water. Plants lose an astonishing amount ofwater by transpiration, the loss ofwater vapor from leaves and other aerial parts ofthe plant. Consider the example of maize {commonly called corn in the

Cortex

o Transport in the Kylem. Endodermal cells and also cells within the stele discharge water and li~ing

minerals into their walls (apoplastl. The Kylem vessels then transport the water and minerals upward into the shoot system.

United States). Asingle planttranspires60 L(60 kg) ofwater during a growing season. A maize crop growing at a typical density of 6O,0Xl plants per hectare transpires almost 4 million Lofwater per hectare every growing season (about 4OO,CXXl gallons of water per acre per growing season). Urness the transpired water is replaced by water transported up from the roots, the leaves will wilt, and the plants will eventually die. The flow ofxylem sap also brings mineral nutrients to the shoot system. Xylem sap rises to heights of more than 100 m in the tallest trees. Is the sap mainly pushed upward from the roots, or is it mainly pulled upward by the leaves? Let's evaluate the relative contributions of these two mechanisms.

Pushing Xylem Sap: Root Pressure At night, when there is almost no transpiration, root cells continue pumping mineral ions into the xylem of the stele. Meanwhile, the endodermis helps prevent the ions from leaking out. The resulting accumulation of minerals lowers the water potential within the stele. Water flows in from the root cortex, generating root pressure, a push ofxylem sap. The root pressure

CHIloPTER THIRTY·SIX


773

Pulling Xylem Sap: The Transpiration-CohesionTension Mechanism Material can be moved upward by positive pressure from below or negative pressure from above. Here we'll focus on how water is pulled by negative pressure potential in the xylem. As we investigate this mechanism of transport, we'll see that transpiration provides the pull and that the cohesion of water due to hydrogen bonding transmits the pull along the entire length of the xylem to the roots.

.... Figure 36.13 Guttation. Root pressure IS forcing excess water from this strawberry leal. sometimes causes more water to enter the leaves than is transpired, resulting in guttation, the exudation of water droplets that can be seen in the morning on the tips or edges ofsome plant leaves (Figure 36.13). Guttation fluid should not be confused with dew, which is condensed atmospheric moisture. In most plants, root pressure is a minor mechanism driving the ascent of xylem sap, at most pushing water only a few meters. The positive pressures produced are simply too weak to overcome the gravitational force of the water column in the xylem, particularly in tall plants. Many plants do not generate any root pressure. Even in plants that display guttation, root pressure cannot keep pace with transpiration after sunrise. For the most part, xylem sap is not pushed from below by root pressure but pulled by the leaves themselves.

otheWater from the xylem is pulled into surrounding cells and air spaces to

7

replace the water that was lost. Cuticle Upper epidermis--

Xyl,m

Mlcrofibrils in cell wall of mesophyli cell

Mesophyll

lower epidermis--':.r-~o' Cuticle

Transpirational Pull Stomata on a leaf's surface lead to a maze of internal air spaces that expose the mesophyll cells to the CO 2 they need for photosynthesis. The air in these spaces is saturated with water vapor because it is in contact with the moist walls of the cells. On most days, the air outside the leaf is drier; that is, it has a lower water potential than the air inside the leaf. Therefore, water vapor in the air spaces of a leaf diffuses down its water potential gradient and exits the leaf via the stomata. It is this loss of water vapor from the leaf by diffusion and evaporation that we call transpiration. But how does loss of water vapor from the leaf translate into a pulling force for upward movement of water through a plant? The negative pressure potential that causes water to move up through the xylem develops at the surface ofmesophyil cell walls in the leaf (Figure 36.14). The cell wall acts like a very fine capillary network. Water adheres to the cellulose microfibrils and other hydrophilic components of the cell wall. As water evaporates from the water film that covers the cell walls of mesophylJ cells, the air-water interface retreats farther into the cell wall. Because ofthe high surface tension ofwater, the curvature ofthe

OThe increased surface tension shown in stepf) pulls water from surrounding cells and air spaces.

€) The evaporation of the water film causes the air-water interface to retreat farther into the cell wall ~:J::;;Uld enhance water uptake by a plant cell? a. decreased 1j/ of the surrounding solution b. an increase in pressure exerted by the aU wall

c. the loss of solutes from the cell d. an increase in 'fI of the cytoplasm e. positive pressure on the surrounding solution 3. A plant cell with a

"S of - 0.65 MPa maintains a constant

volume when bathed in a solution that has a 1jIs of -0.30 MPa

d. photol)'sis, the water-splitting step of photosynthesis, cannot occur when there is a water deficiency. e. accumulation of CO 2 in the leaf inhibits enzymes. 8. Stomata open when guard cells a. sense an increase in C~ in the air spaces of the leaf. b. open because of a decrease in turgor pressure. c. become more turgid because of an addition of K1-, followed by the osmotic entry of water. d. dose aquaporins, preventing uptake of water. e. accumulate water b)' active transport. 9. l\'1ovement of phloem sap from a source to a sink a. occurs through the apoplast of sieve-tube elements. b. may tnlnslocate sugars from the breakdown of stored starch in a root up to developing shoots. c. depends on tension, or negative pressure potential. d. depends on pumping water into siew tubes at the source. e. results mainly from diffusion. 10. Which of these is not transported via the symplast? a. sugars d. proteins b. mRNA e. viruses c. DNA II. •• !.tWIlI

and is in an open container. The cell has a a.lf'pof+O.65MPa. d. ljI"pof+O.30MPa. b. If' of -0.65 MPa. e. Ip' of 0 MPa. c. If'p of +0.35 MPa. 4. \X'hich structure or compartment is not part ofthe apoplast? a. the lumen of a xylem vessel b. the lumen of a sieve tube c. the cell wall of a mesophrll cell d. an extracellular air space e. the cell wall of a root hair

5. Which of the following is an adaptation that enhances the uptake of water and minerals by roots? a. mycorrhizae b. cavitation c. active uptake by vessels d. rhythmic contractions by cortical cells e. pumping through plasmodesmata 6. Which of the following is not part of the transpirationcohesion-tension mechanism for the ascent of xylem sap? a. loss of water from the mesophyll cells, which initiates a pull of water molecules from neighboring cells b. transfer of transpirational pull from one water molecule to the next, due to cohesion by h)'drogen bonds c. hydrophilic walls of tracheids and vessels that help maintain the column of water against gravity d. active pumping of water into the xylem of roots e. lowering oflp' in the surface film of mesophyll cells due to transpiration

7. Photosynthesis ceases when leaves wilt, mainly because a. the chlorophyll of wilting leaves breaks down. b. flaccid mesophyll cells are incap:,,~..' type bind epithelia to underlying tissues and hold organs in place.

cartilage has an abundance of collagenous fibers embedded in a rubbery matrix made of a protein~arbohydrate compleK called chondroitin sulfate. Cells called chondrocytes secrete the collagen and chondroitin sulfate that make cartilage a strong yet flexible support material. Many vertebrate embryos have cartilaginous skeletons, but most of the cartilage is replaced by bone as the embryo matures. Cartilage is retained in some locations, such as the disks that act as cushions between vertebrae.

•• •

~~. Ioo§.

Chondrocytes ~

Chondroitin sulfate fibrous connective tissue is dense with collagenous fibers. The fibers form parallei bundles, which ~ maKimize nonelastic strength. Fibrous conneaive tissue is found in tendons, which attach muscl5 to bones, and in ligaments, wtlich connect bones at joints.

sI "

Central canal The skeleton of most vertebrates is made of bone, a mineralized conneaive tissue. Bone-forming cells called • osteoblasts deposit a matrix of collagen. calcium, magneo ,.... sium, and phosphate ions combine into a R .. ~ hard mineral within the matrix. The combination of hard mineral and flexible collagen makes bone harder than cartilage without being brittle. The microscopic structure of hard mammalian bone consists of repeating units called osteons. Each osteon has concentric layers of the mineralized matrix, which are deposited around a central canal containing blood vessels and nerves.

§.I

Blood, which functions differently from other connective tissues, has a liquid eKtraceliular matrix called plasma. Consisting of water, salts, and dissolved proteins, plasma contains erythrocytes (red blood cells), leukocytes (white blood cells), and cell fragments called platelets. Red cells carry oxygen; white cells function in defense; and platelets aid in blood clotting. Continued on next page ClilloPlER fORTY

Basic Principles of Animal Form and Function

857

they form a tightly woven fabric that joins connective tissue to adjacent tissues. If you pinch a fold of skin on the back of your hand, the collagenous and reticular fibers prevent the tissue from being pulled far from the bone; the elastic fibers then restore the skin to its original shape when you release your grip. The connective tissue that holds many tissues and organs together and in place contains scattered cells of varying function. Of these cells, rn'o types predominate: fibroblasts and macrophages. Fibroblasts secrete the protein ingredients of the extracellular fibers. Macrophages are cells that roam the maze of fibers, engulfing both foreign particles and the debris of dead cells by phagocytosis (see Chapter 6).

Muscle Tissue The tissue responsible for nearly all types of body movement is muscle tissue. All muscle cells consist of filaments containing the proteins actin and myosin, which together enable mus-

l'

c1es to contract. Muscle is the most abundant tissue in many animals, and muscle activity accounts for much of the energyconsuming cellular work in an active animal. Figure 40.5 shows the three types of muscle tissue in the vertebrate body: skeletal, cardiac, and smooth muscle.

Nervous Tissue The function of nervous tissue is to sense stimuli and transmit signals in the form of nerve impulses from one part ofthe animal to another. Nervous tissue contains neurons, or nerve cells, which have extensions called axons that are uniquely specialized to transmit nerve impulses (see Figure 40.5). It also indudes different forms ofglial cells, or g1ia, which help nourish, insulate, and replenish neurons. In many animals, a concentration of nervous tissue forms a brain, an information-processing center. As we will discuss next, neurons have a critical role in managing many of the animal's physiological functions.

Figure 40.5 (continued)

Exploring Structure and Function in Animal Tissues Muscle Tissue Attached to bones by tendons, skeletal muscle is responsible for voluntary movements. Skeletal muscle consists of bundles of long cells called muscle fibers. The arrangement of contractile units, or sarcomeres, along the length of the fibers gives the cells a striped (striated) appearance under the microscope. For this reason, skeletal muscle is also called striated muscle. Adult mammals have a fixed number of muscle cells; building muscle does not in· crease the number of cells but rather enlarges those already present.

Muscle fiber

l"",_""_';;':'::::;.iiii:;~~;~"'~-

Sarcomere

I 100 11m I

cardiac muscle forms the contractile wall of the heart. It is striated like skeletal muscle and has contractile properties similar to those of skeletal muscle. Unlike skeletal muscle, ~ ..~~~:-~!:---lhowever,cardiac Il£ muscle carries out an unconscious task: contraction of the heart. cardiac muscle fibers branch and interconnect via intercalated disks, which Nucleus Intercalated relay signals from cell disk to cell and help synchronize the heartbeat.

"'-;r"''''-or

Smooth muscle, so named because it lacks striations, is found in the walls of the digestive tract, urinary bladder, arteries, and other internal organs. The cells are spindle-shaped. Controlled by different kinds of nerves than those controlling skeletal muscles, smooth muscles are responsible for involuntary body activities, such as churning of the stomach or constriction of arteries.

858

UNIT SEVEN


Nucleus

Muscle fibers

Coordination and Control An animal's tissues, organs, and organ systems must act in conjunction with one another. For example, during long dives the

harbor seal in Figure 40.2 slows its heart rate, collapses its lungs, and lowers its body temperature while propelling itself forward wilh its hind nippers. Coordinating activity across an animal's body in this way requires communication. \Vhat signals are used? How do the signals move within the body? There are two sets of answers to these questions, reflecting the two major systems for control. and. coordination: the endocrine system and the nervoussystem (Figure 4O.6).ln theendocrinesystern, signaling molecules released into the bloodstream by endocrine cells reach all locations in the body. In the nervous systern, neurons lransmit information between specific locations. The signaling molecules broadcast throughout the body by the endocrine system are called hormones. Different hormones cause distinct effects. and only cells that have receptors

for a particular hormone respond (Figure 4O.6a). Depending on which cells have receptors for lhat hormone, the hormone may have an effect in just a single location or in sites throughout the body. Cells, in turn, can express more than one receptor type. Thus, cells in the ovaries and testes are regulated not omy by sex hormones but also by metabolic hormones. Such hormones include insulin, which controls the level of glucose in the blood by binding to and regulating virtuaUy every cell outside of the brain. Hormones are relatively slow acting. It takes many seconds for insulin and other hormones to be released into the bloodstream and be carried throughout the body. Hormone effects are often long·lasting, however, because hormones remain in the bloodstream and target tissue for seconds, minutes, or even hOUTS.

-"',,'"

51''1r--,---,---,

Hormone/

Signal travels along axon to

SIgnal travels everywhere via the bloodstream.

Nerve cells (neurons) are the basic units of the nervous system. A neUfon consists of a cell body and two Of more elrtensions called dendrites and axons. Dendrites transmit signals from their tips toward the rest of the neuron. Axons, which are often bundled together into nerves, transmit signals toward another neuron or toward an effector, a structure such as a muscle cell that carries out a body response. The supporting glial cells help neurons function property.

40).tm I

• ••••

as~rli(

location.

. .• •

•

Axons

o o

(a) Signaling by hormones

•(ConIOColl W)

(51'' '

~

(b) Signaling by neurons

... Figu~ 40.6 Signaling in the endocrine and nervous systems. Endocrine cells secrete specific hormonf'S-Sl9naling moletules (shown as red dotsHnto the bloodstream. Only cells expressing the corre5POf\ding receptor receIVe and respond to the SIgnal Nerve cells (neurons) generate SIgnals that travel along axons. Only cells that form a speoallzed JUfKbOn wrth the axon of an actIVated neuron receIVe and respond 10 the SIgnal. >----l 15).tffi CHAHU fOUV

Basic Principles of Animal Form and Function

859

In the nervous system, asignal is not broadcast throughout the entire body. Instead, each signal, called a nerve impulse, travels to a target cell along a dedicated communication line, cOllSisting mainly of the neuron extensions called axons (Figure 4O.6b). Four types ofcells receive nerve impulses: other neurollS, muscle cells, endocrine cells, and exocrine cells. Unlike the endocrine system, the nervous system conveys information by the pathway the signal takes. For example, a person can distinguish different musical notes because each notes frequency activates different neurons connecting the ear to the brain. Signaling in the nervous system usually im'ol\'es more than one type of signal. Nerve impulses tra\'el within axons, sometimes over long distances, as changes in voltage. But in many cases, passing signals from one neuron to another involves very short-range chemical signals. Overall, transmission is extremely fast; nerve impulses take only a fraction ofa second to reach the target and last only a fraction of a second. Because the two major communication systems ofthe body differ in signal type, transmission, speed, and duration, they are adapted to different functions. The endocrine system is well suited for coordinating gradual changes that affect the entire body, such as growth and development, reproduction, metabolic processes, and digestion. The nervous system is well suited for directing immediate and rapid responses to the environment, especially in controlling fast locomotion and behavior. Both systems contribute to maintaining a stable internal environment, our next topic of discussion. CONCEPT

CHECK

Managing the state of the internal environment is a major challenge for the animal body. Faced with environmental fluctuations, animals manage their internal environment by either regulating or conforming.

Regulating and Conforming An animal is said to be a regulator for a particular environmental variable if it uses internal control mechanisms to regulate internal change in the face of external fluctuation. For example, the river otter in Figure 40.7 is a regulator for temperature, keeping its body at a temperature that is largely independent of that of the water in which it swims. An animal is said to be a conformer for a particular environmental variable if it allo....'S its internal condition to conform to external changes in the variable. For instance, the largemouth bass in Figure 40.7 conforms to the temperature ofthe lake in which it li\'eS. As the water warms or cools, so do the cells of the bass. Some animals conform to more constant environments. For example, many marine itwertebrates, such as spider crabs of the genus Lihinia, let their internal solute concentration conform to the relatively stable solute concentration (salinity) of their ocean environment. Regulating and conforming represent extremes on a continuum. An animal may regulate some internal conditions while allowing others to conform to the environment. For example, even though the bass conforms to the temperature of the surrounding water, the solute concentration in its blood

40.1

I. \Vhat properties are shared by all types of epithelia? 2. Under what temperature conditions would it benefit a jackrabbit to flatten its ears against its body? Explain. 3, _'W fUi • Suppose you are standing at the edge of a cliff and you suddenly slip-you barely manage to keep your balance to keep from falling. As your heart races, you feel a burst of energy, due in part to a surge of blood into dilated (widened) vessels in your muscles and an upward spike in the level of glucose in your blood. Why might you expect that this ufight_or_flight n response requires both the nervous system and the endocrine system?

40

• • • •River otter (temperature regulator)

•

30

Largemouth bass (temperature conformer) 10


r:::;::;k~~~~olloops

maintain the internal environment in many animals

Lmagine that your body temperature soared every time you took a hot shower or drank a freshly brewed cup of coffee. 860

UNtT Sfl/(N


o-I0---~1O:----:,rO---3TO:---'''''=- Ambtent (enVlroomental) temperature (0C)

... Figure 40.7 The relationship between body and environmental temperatures in an aquatic temperature regulator and an aquatic temperature conformer. The mer oner regulates ItS body temperature. k:eeptng 1\ stable da055 a wide range of efMronmeotli temperatures. The largemouth bass, meanwhile, ailow5l1S IIlternal environment to conform to the water temperature

and interstitial fluid differs from the solute concentration of the fresh water in which it lives. This difference occurs because the fish's anatomy and physiology enable it to regulate internal changes in solute concentration. (You will learn more about the mechanisms of this regulation in Chapter 44.)

Homeostasis The steady body temperature of a river otter and the stable concentration of solutes in a freshwater bass are examples of homeostasis, which means Usteady state," or internal balance. In achieving homeostasis, animals maintain a relatively constant internal environment even when the external environment changes significantly. Like many animals, humans exhibit homeostasis for a range of physical and chemical properties. For example, the human body maintains a fairly constant body temperature of about 37'C (98.6'F) and a pH of the blood and interstitial fluid within 0.1 pH unit of 7.4. The body also regulates the solute concentration of glucose in the bloodstream so that it does not fluctuate for long from about 90 mg of glucose per 100 mL of blood.

I

Feedback Loops in Homeostasis Like the regulatory circuit shown in Figure 40.8, homeostasis in animals relies largely on negative feedback, a response that reduces, or "damps," the stimulus. For example, when you exercise vigorously, you produce heat, which increases body temperature. Your nervous system detects this increase and

Mineral

,, ,,"

~

Sulfur (5)

Proteins from many sources

Component of certain amino acids

Symptoms of protein deficiency

"0

•• E

Potassium (K)

Meats, dairy products, many fruits and vegetables. grains

Add-base balance, water balance. nerve function

Muscular weakness, paralysis. nausea. heart fuilure

8

Chlorine (Cl)

Table salt

Acid-base balance, fomlation of gastric juice, nerve function, osmotic balance

Muscle cramps, reduced appetite

Sodium (Na)

Table salt

Acid-base balance, water balance, nerve function

Muscle cramps, reduced appetite

Magnesium (Mg)

\'Vhole grains, green leafy vegetables

Cofactor; ATP bioenergetics

Nervous system disturbances

Iron (Fe)

Meats, eggs, legumes, whole grains, green leafy vegetables

Component of hemoglobin and of electron carriers in energy metabolism; enzyme cofactor

Iron-deficiency anemia, weakness, impaired immunity

Fluorine (F)

Drinking wdter, tea, seafood

Maintenance oftooth (and probably bone) structure

Higher fre<juency oftooth decay

Zinc (Zn)

Meats, seafood, grains

Component of certain digestive enzymes and other proteins

Growth fdilure, skin abnormalities, reproductive failure, impaired immunity

Copper (Cu)

Seafood, nuts, legumes, organ meats

Enzyme cofactor in iron metabolism, melanin synthesis, electron transport

Anemia, cardiovascular abnormalities

Manganese (Mn)

Nuts, grains, vegetables, fruits, tea

Enzyme cofactor

Abnormal bone and cartilage

Iodine (I)

Seafood, dairy products, iodized salt

Component of thyroid hormones

Goiter (enlarged thyroid)

Cobalt (Co)

Meats and dairy products

Component of vitamin BI2

None, except as 8 12 deficiency

Selenium (Se)

Seafood. meats, whole grains

Enzyme cofactor; antioxidant functioning in close association with vitamin E

Muscle pain. possibly heart muscle deterioration

Chromium (Cr)

Brewer's yeast. liver. seafood, meats, some vegetables

Involved in glucose and energy metabolism

Impaired glucose metabolism

Molybdenum (Mo)

Legumes. grains. some vegetables

Enzyme cofactor

Disorder in excretion of nitrogen-containing compounds

0

~

,

N

0

£

, "

~ ~

'All

878

oflh~se min~rals ar~

UNlr

SEVEN

also harmful when

oonsum~d


in ~~ce&S.

Ingesting large amounts of some minerals can upset homeostatic balance and cause toxic side effects. For example, liver damage due to iron overload affects as much as 10% ofthe population in some regions of Africa where the water supply is especially iron-rich. Many individuals in these regions have a genetic alteration in mineral metabolism that increases the toxic effects ofiron overload. In a different example, excess salt (sodium chloride) is not toxic but can contribute to high blood pressure. This is a particular problem in the United States, where the typical person consumes enough salt to provide about 20 times the required amount of sodium. Packaged (prepared) foods often contain large amounts of sodium chloride, even if they do not taste very salty.

Dietary Deficiencies Diets that fail to meet basic needs can lead to either undernourishment or malnourishment. Undernourishment is the result of a diet that consistently supplies less chemical energy than the body requires. In contrast, malnourishment is the long-term absence from the diet of one or more essential nutrients. Both have negative impacts on health and survival.

Undernourishment When an animal is undernourished, a series of events unfold: The body uses up stored fat and carbohydrates; the body begins breaking down its own proteins for fuel; muscles begin to decrease in size; and the brain may become protein-deficient. If energy intake remains less than energy expenditures, the animal will eventually die. Even if a seriously undernourished animal survives, some of the damage may be irreversible. Because adequate amounts ofjusta single staple such as rice or corn can provide sufficient calories, human undernourishment is most common when drought, war, or another crisis severely disrupts the food supply. In sub-Saharan Africa, where the AIDS epidemic has crippled both rural and urban communities, approximately 200 million children and adults cannot obtain enough food. Sometimes undernourishment occurs within well-fed populations as a result of eating disorders. For example, anorexia nervosa leads individuals, usually female, to starve themselves compulsively.

Malnourishment The potential effects of malnourishment include deformities, disease, and even death. For example, cattle, deer, and other herbivores may develop fragile bones if they graze on plants growing in soil that lacks phosphorus. Some grazing animals obtain the missing nutrients by consuming concentrated sources of salt or other minerals (Figure 41.4). Among carnivores, recent experiments reveal that spiders can adjust for dietary deficiencies by switching to prey that restores nutritional balance.

... Figure 41.4 Obtaining essential nutrients by eating antlers. A caribou, an arctic herbivore, chews on discarded antlers from another animal. Because antlers contain calcium phosphate, this behavior is common among herbivores living where soils and plants are deficient in phosphorus. Animals require phosphorus to make ATP. nucleic aCids, phospholipids. and components of bones

Like other animals, humans sometimes suffer from malnourishment. Among populations subsisting on simple rice diets, individuals are often afflicted with vitamin A deficiency, which can cause blindness or death. To overcome this problem, scientists have engineered a strain of rice to synthesize beta-carotene, the orange-colored source of vitamin A that is abundant in carrots. The potential benefit of this uGolden Rice~ is enormous because, at present, 1 to 2 million young children worldwide die every year from vitamin A deficiency.

Assessing Nutritional Needs Determining the ideal diet for the human population is an important but difficult problem for scientists. As objects of study, people present many challenges. Unlike laboratory animals, humans are genetically diverse. They also live in settings far more varied than the stable and uniform environment that scientists use to facilitate comparisons in laboratory experiments. Ethical concerns present an additional barrier. For example, it is not acceptable to investigate the nutritional needs ofchildren in a way that might harm a child's growth or development. The methods used to study human nutrition have changed dramatically over time. To avoid harming others, several of the researchers who discovered vitamins a century ago used themselves as subject animals. Today, an important approach is the study ofgenetic defects that disrupt food uptake, storage, or use. For example, a genetic disorder called hemochromatosis causes iron buildup in the absence of any abnormal iron consumption or exposure. Fortunately, this common disorder is remarkably easy to treat: Drawing blood regularly removes enough iron from the body to restore homeostasis. By studying the defective genes that can cause the disease, scientists have learned a great deal about the regulation ofiron absorption. CHAPTE~ FO~TY·ONE

Animal Nutrition

879

Many insights into human nutrition have come from epidemiology, the study of human health and disease at the population level. By tracking the causes and distribution of a disease among many individuals, epidemiologists can identify potential nutritional strategies for preventing and controlling diseases and disorders. For example, researchers discovered that dietary intake of the vitamin folic acid substantially re· duces the frequency of neural tube defects, which are a serious and sometimes fatal type of birth defect Neural tube defects occur when tissue fails to enclose the developing brain and spinal cord. In the 19705, studies revealed that these defects were more frequent in children born to women of low socioeconomic status. Richard Smithells, of the University of Leeds, thought that malnutrition among these women might be responsible. As described in Figure 41.5, he found that vitamin supplementation greatly reduced the risk of neural tube defects. In other studies, he obtained evidence that

~Inui Can diet influence the frequency of birth defects?

folic acid (~) was the specific vitamin responsible, a finding confirmed by other researchers. Based on this evidence, the FDA in 1998 began to require that folic acid be added to en~ riched grain products used to make bread, cereals, and other foods. Follow-up studies have documented the effectiveness of this program in reducing the frequency of neural tube defects. Thus, at a time when microsurgery and sophisticated diagnos· tic imaging dominate the headlines, simple dietary changes such as folic acid supplements or consumption of Golden Rice may be among the greatest contributors to human health. CONCEPT

41.1

1. All 20 amino acids are needed to make animal proteins. Why aren't they all essential to animal diets? 2. Explain why vitamins are required in much smaller amounts than carbohydrates. 3. •~J:t.\I!" If a zoo animal shows signs of malnutrition, how might a researcher determine which nutrient is lacking? For suggested

EXPERIMENT RIChard Smlthell~. of the University of Leed~, ex· amined the effect of vitamin ~upplementation on the ri~k of neural tube defects. Women who had had one or more IxIbies with such a defect were put into two study groups. The experimental group conslsted of those who were planning a pregnancy and began taking a multivitamin at least four weeks before attempting concep· tion. The control group. who were not given vitamin~, included women who dedined them and women who were already pregnant. The numbers of neural tube defects resulting from the pregnancies were recorded for each group.

CHECK

answer~.

see Appendix A.

r;~:4~:: ~~~~s of food

processing are ingestion, digestion, absorption, and elimination

RESULTS

Group

Number of infants/fetuses studied

Infants/fetuses with a neural tube defect

Vitamin supplements (experimental group)

141

1 (0.7%)

No vitamin supplements (control group)

204

12 (5.9%)

CONCLUSION Thi~ ~tudy provided evidence that vitamin ~upplementation protect~ again~t neural tube defects, at least in pregnancies after the first. Follow-up trials demonstrated that folic acid alone provided an equivalent protective effect. SOURCE

RW, Sm'thells €I ~I. PoSSIble prevent'on of neu,i!I tulle

defeacchandes (IUUOse, lactose)

Salivary amylase

I

t

5mailer polysaccharides, mallose Stomach

Lumen of small intestine

I

Proteins

pol~accharides

--

~

II

Small polypeptides DNA. RNA

Polypeptides

I Pancreatic amylases

Pancreatic trypsin and chymotrypsin (These protein· digesting enzymes, or prote~ses, deilVe bonds~dJeentlo (ert~ln ammo acids)

t Maitose and other d isaccharides

Bile salts Nucleotldes

S~aller

I

-

Pancreatic carboxypeptidase

Fat globules (F~lS. or lngly· cendes. aggregate as fat gloooies that are insoluble In w~ter.)

~lypePtides

Epithelium of small intestine (brush border)

I

Fat droplets (A COdling of bile Sill1s incre•

•0

••>

••> •v •• 0

>•

.. Figure 42.11 The interrelationship of cross-sectional area of blood vessels. blood flow velocity, and blood pressure. Owing to an increase in total cross-sectional area. blood flow velocity deueases markedly in the arterioles and is lowest in the capillaries, Blood pressure, the main force driving blood from the heart to the capillaries, is highest in the aorta and other arteries.

Blood pressure fluctuates over two different time scales. The first is the oscillation in arterial blood pressure during each cardiac cycle (see bottom graph in Figure 42.11). Blood pressure also fluctuates on a longer time scale in response to signals that change the state of smooth muscles in arteriole walls. For example, physical or emotional stress can trigger nervous and hormonal responses that cause smooth muscles in arteriole walls to contract, a process called vasoconstriction. When that happens, the arterioles narrow, thereby increasing blood pressure upstream in the arteries. When the smooth muscles relax, the arterioles undergo vasodilation, an increase in diameter that causes blood pressure in the arteries to fall. Vasoconstriction and vasodilation are often coupled to changes in cardiac output that also affect blood pressure. This CHAPTER FORTY·TWO

Circulation and Gas Exchange

907

coordination of regulatory mechanisms maintains adequate blood flow as the body's demands on the circulatory system change. During heavy exercise, for example, the arterioles in working muscles dilate, causing a greater flow of oxygen-rich blood to the muscles. By itself, this increased flowto the muscles ... FI

42.12

•

How do endothelial cells control vasoconstriction? EXPERIMENT

In 1988, Masashi Yanagisawa set out to identify the endothelial factor that triggers vasoconstriction mmammals. He isolated endothelial cells from blood vessels and grew them in liquid medium. Then he collected the liquid, which contained substances secreted by the cells, Next, he bathed a small piece of an artery in the liquid, The artery tissue contracted, indicating that the cells grown in culture had secreted a factor that causes vasoconstriction Using biochemical procedures, Yanaglsawa separated the substances in the fluid on the basis of size, charge, and other properties, He then tested each substance for its ability to cause arterial contraction, After several separation steps and many tests, he purified the vasoconstriction factor, RESULTS

The vasoconstriction factor, which Yanagisawa named endothelin, is a peptide that contains 21 amino acids, Two disulfide bridges between cysteines stabilize the peptide structure, Endothelin

GICVaTr

c

is e

I

I

lie

Tr

(00-

Using the amino acid sequence of the peptide as a guide, Yanagisawa identified the endothelin gene. The polypeptide encoded by the gene is much longer than endothelm, containing 203 amino aCids The amino aCids in endothelm extend from position S3 ((ys) to position 73 (Trp) in the longer polypeptide: (ys

Trp Parent polypeptide

Endothelin

203

Yanaglsawa also showed that treating endothelial cells with other substances already known to promote vasoconstriction, such as the hormone epinephrine, led to increased production of endothelin mRNA, Endothelial cells produce and translate endo· thelin mRNA in response to signals, such as hormones. that circulate in the blood, The resulting polypeptide is cleaved to form active endothelin, the substance that triggers vasoconstriction, Yanagisawa and colleagues subsequently demonstrated that endothelial cells also make the enzyme that catalyzes this cleavage. CONCLUSION

SOURCE pept,de prodllCed

M. Yanag'\aWa el al .• A novel potent oaSOCOllSlrJCtor

by oas-----;

(b) Partly clogged artery

250 11m

heart stops beating, the victim may nevertheless survive if a heartbeat is restored by cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) or some other emergency procedure within a few minutes of the attack. A stroke is the death of nervous tissue in the brain due to a lack of 02' Strokes usually result from rupture or blockage ofarteries in the head. The effects of a stroke and the individual's chance of survival depend on the extent and location of the damaged brain tissue. Heart attacks and strokes frequently result from a thrombus that dogs an artery. A key step in thrombus formation is the rupture of plaques by an inflammatory response, analogous to the body's response to a cut infected by bacteria (see Figure 43.8). A fragment released by plaque rupture is swept along in the bloodstream, sometimes lodging in an artery. The thrombus may originate in a coronary artery or an artery in the brain, or it may develop elsewhere in the circulatory system and reach the heart or brain via the bloodstream.

CONCEPT

CHECK

42.4

I. Explain why a physician might order a white cell count for a patient with symptoms of an infection. 2. Clots in arteries can cause heart attacks and strokes. Why, then, does it make sense to treat hemophiliacs by introducing clotting factors into their blood? 3. • ,,'!:tUla Nitroglycerin (the key ingredient in dynamite) is sometimes prescribed for heart disease patients. Within the body, the nitroglycerin is converted to nitric oxide. Why would you expect nitroglycerin to relieve chest pain in these patients? For suggested answers, see Appendix A.

r~::j::~~~~50ccurs across

specialized respiratory surfaces

Treatment and Diagnosis of Cardiovascular Disease One major contributor to atherosclerosis is cholesterol. Cholesterol travels in the blood plasma mainly in the form of particles consisting of thousands of cholesterol molecules and other lipids bound to a protein. One type of particlelow-density lipoprotein (tOt), often called "bad cholesteroris associated with the deposition of cholesterol in arterial plaques. Another type-high-dcnsity lipoprotein (HOL), or "good cholesterol"-appears to reduce the deposition ofcholesterol. Exercise de~iiJ\;:\r Peyer'S patches

(small intestine)

1Jt~~f-'r'2:ir Appendix

Ii~~~=----1 ,iIlb'o_lymphatic vessels

lymph

cod,

€)Within lymph nodes, microbes and foreign particles present in the circulating lymph encounter macrophages and other cells that carry out defensive actions.

Masses of defensive cells

... Figure 43.7 The huma" lymphatic system. The lymphatic system consists of lymphatic vessels, through which lymph travels. and various structures that trap "foreign" molecules and particles, These structures include the adenoids, tonsils. lymph nodes, spleen, Peyer's patches, and appendix. Steps 1-4 trace the flow of lymph,

whereas microbes in interstitial fluid flow into lymph and are trapped in lymph nodes. In either location, they encounter resident macrophages. Figure 43.7 provides an overview of the lymphatic system and its role in the body's defenses. Two other types of phagocytes-eosinophils and dendritic cells-play more limited roles in innate defense. Eosinophils have low phagocytic activity but are important in defending against multicellular invaders, such as parasitic worms. Rather than engulfing such parasites, eosinophils position themselves against the parasite's body and then discharge de· structive enzymes that damage the invader. Dendritic cells populate tissues that are in contact with the environment. They mainly stimulate development of acquired immunity against microbes they encounter, a function we will explore later in this chapter.

Antimicrobial Peptides and Proteins Pathogen recognition in mammals triggers the production and release ofa variety of peptides and proteins that attack microbes or impede their reproduction. Some of these defense molecules function like the antimicrobial peptides of insects, 934

UNIT SEVEN


damaging broad groups of pathogens by disrupting membrane integrity. Others, including the interferons and complement proteins, are unique to vertebrate immune systems. Interferons are proteins that provide innate defense against viral infections. Virus-infected body cells secrete interferons, inducing nearby uninfected cells to produce substances that inhibit viral reproduction. In this way, interferons limit the cell-to-cell spread ofviruses in the body, helping control viral infections such as colds and influenza. Some white blood cells secrete a different type of interferon that helps activate macrophages, enhancing their phagocytic ability. Pharmaceutical companies now mass-produce interferons by recombinant DNA technology for treating certain viral infections, such as hepatitis C. The complement system consists of roughly 30 proteins in blood plasma that function together to fight infections. These proteins circulate in an inactive state and are activated by substances on the surface of many microbes. Activation results in a cascade of biochemical reactions leading to lysis (bursting) of invading cells. The complement system also functions in inflammation, our next topic, as well as in the acquired defenses discussed later in the chapter.

Inflammatory Responses The pain and swelling that alert you to a splinter under your skin are the result of a local inflammatory response, the changes brought about by signaling molecules released upon injury or infection. One important inflammatory signaling molecule is histamine, which is stored in mast cells, connective tissue cells that store chemicals in granules for secretion. Figure 43.8 summarizes the progression of events in local inflammation, starting with infection from a splinter. Histamine released by mast cells at sites of tissue damage triggers nearby blood vessels to dilate and become more permeable. Activated macrophages and other cells discharge additional signaling molecules that further promote blood flow to the injured site. The resulting increase in local blood supply causes the redness and heat typical of inflammation (from the Latin inflammare, to set on fire). Capillaries engorged with blood leak fluid into neighboring tissues, causing swelling. During inflammation, cycles of signaling and response transform the infection site. Enhanced blood flow to the injury site helps deliver antimicrobial proteins. Activated complement proteins promote further release of histamine and help attract phagocytes. Nearby endothelial cells secrete signaling molecules that attract neutrophils and macrophages. Taking advantage of increased vessel permeability to enter injured tissues, these cells carry out additional phagocytosis and inactivation of microbes. The result is an accumulation of pus, a fluid rich in white blood cells, dead microbes, and cell debris. A minor injury causes local inflammation, but severe tissue damage or infection may lead to a response that is systemic (throughout the body)-such as an increased production of

white blood cells. Cells in injured or infected tissue often secrete molecules that stimulate the release of additional neu· trophils from the bone marrow. In a severe infection, such as meningitis or appendicitis, the number of white blood cells in the blood may increase several-fold within a few hours. Another systemic inflammatory response is fever. Some toxins produced by pathogens, as well as substances called pyrogens released by activated macrophages, can reset the body's thermostat to a higher temperature (see Chapter 40). The benefits of the resulting fever are still a subject of debate. One hypothesis is that an elevated body temperahtre may enhance phagocytosis and, by speeding up chemical reactions, accelerate tissue repair. Certain bacterial infections can induce an overwhelming systemic inflammatory response, leading to a life-threatening condition called septic shock. Characterized by very high fever, low blood flow, and low blood pressure, septic shock occurs most often in the very old and the very young. It is fatal in more than one-third of cases.

Natural Killer Cells Natural killer (NK) cells help recognize and eliminate certain diseased cells in vertebrates. \'1ith the exception of red blood cells, all cells in the body normally have on their surface a protein called a class I MHC molecule (we will say much more about this molecule shortly). Following viral infection or conversion to a cancerous state, cells sometimes stop expressing this protein. The NK cells that patrol the body attach to such stricken cells and release chemicals that lead to cell death, inhibiting further spread of the virus or cancer.

Pathogen

~~~.~ ..

'.:"';'=11

. : : "1"

~

. ~~:::.~
The Immune System

953

u

___ti

an

J. Figure 44.1 How does an albatross drink saltwater KEY

CONCEPTS

44.1 Osmoregulation balances the uptake and loss of water and solutes 44.2 An animal's nitrogenous wastes reflect its phylogeny and habitat 44.3 Diverse excretory systems are variations on a tubular theme 44.4 The nephron is organized for stepwise processing of blood filtrate 44.5 Hormonal circuits link kidney function, water balance, and blood pressure

W

ith a wingspan that can reach 3.5 m, the largest of any living bird, a wandering albatross (Diomedea exulans) soaring over the ocean is hard not to no-

without ill effect?

body water. Despite a quite different environment, albatrosses and other marine animals also face the potential problem of dehydration. Success in such circumstances depends critically on conserving water and, for marine birds and bony fishes, eliminating excess salts. In contrast, freshwater animals live in an environment that threatens to flood and dilute their body fluids. These organisms survive by limiting water uptake, conserving solutes, and absorbing salts from their surroundings. In safeguarding their internal fluid environment, animals must also deal with a hazardous metabolite produced by the dismantling of proteins and nucleic acids. Breakdown of nitrogenous (nitrogeIHontaining) molecules releases ammonia, a very toxic compound. Several different mechanisms have evolved for excretion, the process that rids the body of nitrogenous metabolites and otller waste products. Because systems for excretion and osmoregulation are structurally and functionally linked in many animals, we will consider both of these processes in this chapter.

tice (Figure 44.1). Yet the albatross commands attention for

more than just its size. This massive bird remains at sea day and night throughout the year, returning to land only to reproduce. A human with only seawater to drink would die ofdehydration, but under the same conditions the albatross thrives. In surviving without fresh water, the albatross relies on osmoregulation, the general process by which animals control solute concentrations and balance water gain and loss. In the fluid environment of cells, tissues, and organs, osmoregulation is essential. For physiological systems to function properly, the relative concentrations of water and solutes must be kept within fairly narrow limits. In addition, ions such as sodium and calcium must be maintained at concentrations that permit normal activity of muscles, neurons, and other body cells. Osmoregulation is thus a process of homeostasis. A number of strategies for water and solute control have evolved, reflecting the varied and often severe osmoregulatory challenges presented by an animal's surroundings. Desert animals live in an environment that can quickly deplete their 954

~:::;:g:r:i~n

balances the uptake and loss of water and solutes

Just as thermoregulation depends on balancing heat loss and gain (see Chapter 40), regulating the chemical composition of body fluids depends on balancing the uptake and loss of water and solutes. This process of osmoregulation is based largely on controlled movement ofsolutes bety,..een internal fluids and the external environment. Because water follows solutes by osmosis, the net effect is to regulate both solute and water content.

Osmosis and Osmolarity All animals-regardless of phylogeny, habitat, or type ofwaste produced-face the same need for osmoregulation. Over time,

selectively permeable membrane

~

---Water

Hyperosmotic side:

Hypoosmotic: side:

Higher solute concentration lower free H20 concentration

lower solute concentratIOn Higher free H20 concentration

.. Figure 44.2 Solute concentration and osmosis. water uptake and loss must balance. If water uptake is exces· sive, animal cells swell and burst; if water loss is substantial, they shrivel and die (see Figure 7.13). Water enters and leaves cells by osmosis. Recall from Otapter 7 that osmosis. a special case ofdiffusion, is the movement of water across a selectively permeable membrane. It occurs whenever WiO solutions separated by the membrane differ in osmotic pressure. or osmolarity (total solute concentration expressed as molarity, or moles of solute per liter of solution). The unit of measurement for osmolarity used in this chapter is milliOsmoles per liter (mOsm/L); 1 mOsm/L is equivalent to a total solute concentration of 10- 3 M. The osmolarity of human blood is about 300 mOsm/L, while seawater has an osmolarity ofabout l,ool mOsm/L. Iftwo solutions separated by a selectively permeable membrane have the same osmolarity, they are said to be isoosmotic. Under these conditions. water molecules continually cross the membrane. but they do so at equal rates in both directions. In other words, there is no net movement ofwater by osmosis between isoosmotic solutions. When two solutions differ in osmolarity, the one with the greater concentration of solutes is said to be hyperosmotic, and the more dilute solution is said to be hypoosmotic (Figure 44.2). Water nows by osmosis from a hypoosmotic solution to a hyperosmotic one.-

Osmotic Challenges An animal can maintain water balance in !'n'0 ways. One is to be an osmoconformcr. which is isoosmotic with its surroundings. The second is to be an osmoregulator, which controls its internal osmolarity independent of that of its environment.

.. Figure 44.3 Sockeye salmon (Oncorltyndlus ner"'). euryhaline osmoregulators.

All osmoconformers are marine animals. Because an osmoconformer's internal osmolarity is the same as that of its environment, there is no tendency to gain or lose water. Many osmoconformers live in water that has a stable composition and hence have a constant internal osmolarity. Osmoregulation enables animals to Ih'e in environments that are uninhabitable for osmoconformers. such as freshwater and terrestrial habitats. It also allows many marine animals to maintain an internal osmolarity different from that of seawater. To survive in a hypoosmotic environment, an osmoregulator must discharge excess water. In a hyperosmotic environment, an osmoregulator must instead take in water to offset osmotic loss. Most animals, whether osmoconformers or osmoregulators, cannot tolerate substantial changes in external osmolarity and are said to be stenohaline (from the Greekstellos, narrow, and haliJs, salt). In contrast, euryhaline animals (from the Greek eurys. broad), which include certain osmoconformers and osmoregulators, can survive large fluctuations in external osmolarity. Many barnacles and mussels covered and uncovered by ocean tides are euryhaline osmoconformers; familiar examples of euryhaline osmoregulators are the striped bass and the various species of salmon (Figure 44.3). Next we'll examine some adaptations for osmoregulation that have evolved in marine, freshwater, and terrestrial animals.

Marine Animals Most marine invertebrates are osmoconformers. Their osmolarity (the sum of the concentrations of all dissolved substances) is the same as that of sea....'ater. They therefore face no substantial challenges in water balance. Howe\'er, because they differ considerably from seawater in the concentrations of specific solutes, they must actively transport these solutes to maintain homeostasis. Many marine vertebrates and some marine invertebrates are osmoregulators. For most of these animals, the ocean is a strongly dehydrating environment. For example, marine bony C""'UK 'OllTY·fOUlI

Osmoregulation and Excretion

955

Uptake of water and some ions in food

Uptake

Osmotic water

of salt ions by gills

gain through gills and other parts of body surface

[,., ] Water

•

Salt

FRESH WATER

\

Extretion of large amounts of water in dilute urine from kidneys

(a) Osmoregulation in a saltwater fish

(b) Osmoregulation in a freshwater fish

... Figure 44.4 Osmoregulation in marine and freshwater bony fishes: a comparison. fishes, such as the cod in Figure 44,4a, constantly lose water by osmosis. Such fishes balance the water loss by drinking large amounts of seawater. They then make use of both their

gills and kidneys to rid themselves of salts. In the gills, specialized chloride cells actively transport chloride ions (en out, and sodium ions (Na +) follow passively. In the kidneys, excess calcium, magnesium, and sulfate ions are excreted with the loss of only small amounts of water. A distinct osmoregulatory strategy evolved in marine sharks and most other chondrichthyans (cartilaginous ani~ mals; see Chapter 34). Like bony fishes, sharks have an inter· nal salt concentration much less than that of seawater, so salt tends to diffuse into their bodies from the water, especially across their gills. Unlike bony fishes, however, marine sharks are not hypoosmotic to seawater. The explanation is that shark tissue contains high concentrations of urea, a nitrogenous waste product of protein and nucleic acid metabolism (see Figure 44.9). Their body fluids also contain trimethylamine oxide (TMAO), an organic molecule that protects proteins from damage by urea. Together, the salts, urea, TMAO, and other compounds maintained in the body fluids of sharks result in an osmolarity very close to that of seawater. For this reason, sharks are often considered osmoconformers. How~ ever, because the solute concentration in their body fluids is actually somewhat greater than 1,000 mOsm/L, water slowly enters the shark's body by osmosis and in food (sharks do not drink). This small influx of water is disposed of in urine produced by the shark's kidneys. The urine also removes some of the salt that diffuses into the shark's body; the rest is lost in feces or is excreted by an organ caned the rectal gland.

Freshwater Animals The osmoregulatory problems of freshwater animals are the opposite of those of marine animals. The body fluids of fresh· 956

UNIT SEVEN


water animals must be hyperosmotic because animal cells cannot tolerate salt concentrations as low as those of lake or river water. Having internal fluids with an osmolarity higher than that oftheir surroundings, freshwater animals face the problem ofgaining water by osmosis and losing salts by diffusion. Many freshwater animals, including fishes, solve the problem of water balance by drinking almost no water and excreting large amounts ofvery dilute urine. At the same time, salts lost by diffusion and in the urine are replenished by eating. Freshwater fishes, such as the perch in Figure 44.4b, also replenish salts by uptake across the gills. Chloride cells in the gills of the fish actively transport CI- into the body, and Na + follows. Salmon and other euryhaline fishes that migrate between seawater and fresh water undergo dramatic changes in osmoregulatory status. \Vhile living in the ocean, salmon carry out osmoregulation like other marine fishes by drinking seawater and excreting excess salt from their gills. When they migrate to fresh water, salmon cease drinking and begin to produce large amounts of dilute urine. At the same time, their gills start taking up salt from the dilute environment-just like fishes that spend their entire lives in fresh water.

Animals That Live in Temporary Waters Extreme dehydration, or desiccation, is fatal for most animals. However, a few aquatic invertebrates that live in temporary ponds and in films of water around soil particles can lose almost all their body water and survive. These animals enter a dormant state when their habitats dry up, an adaptation called anhydrobiosis ("life without water"). Among the most striking examples are the tardigrades, or water bears (Figure 44.5). Less than 1 mm long, these tiny invertebrates are found in marine, freshwater, and moist terrestrial environments. In their active, hydrated state, they contain about 85% water byweight, but they can dehydrate to less than 2% water and survive in an

100llm

I

lOOllm

Water balance in a kangaroo rat (2 mUday) _-"!l~ Ingested in food (O.2)

I

Derived from metabolism (1 ,8)

(b) Dehydrated tardigrade

Water loss (ml)

Land Animals The threat of dehydration is a major regulatory problem for terrestrial plants and animals. Humans, for example, die if they lose as little as 12% oftheir body water (desert camels can withstand approximately twice that level of dehydration). Adaptations that reduce water loss are key to survival on land. Much as a waxy cuticle contributes to the success ofland plants, the body coverings of most terrestrial animals help prevent dehydration. Examples are the waxy layers of insect exoskeletons, the shells of land snails, and the layers of dead, keratinized skin cells covering most terrestrial vertebrates, including humans. Many terrestrial animals, especially desert-dwellers, are nocturnal, which reduces evaporative water loss because of the lower temperature and higher relative humidity of night air. Despite these and other adaptations, most terrestrial animals lose water through many routes: in urine and feces, across their skin, and from moist surfaces in gas exchange organs. Land animals maintain water balance by drinking and eating moist foods and by producing water metabolically through cellular respiration. A number of desert animals, including many insect-eating birds and other reptiles, are well

Derived from metabolism (250)

Feces (0,09)

... Figure 44.5 Anhydrobi05is. Tardigrades (water bears) inhabit temporary ponds and droplets of water in soil and on moist plants (SEMs).

inactive state, dryas dust, for a decade or more. Just add water, and within hours the rehydrated tardigrades are moving about and feeding. Anhydrobiosis requires adaptations that keep cell membranes intact. Researchers are just beginning to learn how tardigrades survive drying out, but studies of anhydrobiotic roundworms (phylum Nematoda) show that desiccated individuals contain large amounts of sugars. In particular, a disaccharide called trehalose seems to protect the cells by replacing the water that is normally associated with proteins and membrane lipids. Many insects that survive freezing in the winter also use trehalose as a membrane protectant, as do some plants resistant to desiccation.

Ingested in food (750) Ingested in liquid (1.500)

Water gain (ml)

(a) Hydrated tardigrade

Water balance in a human (2.500 mUday)

Feces (100) Urine (1.500)

Urine (0.45)

Evaporation (146)

Evaporation (900)

... Figure 44.6 Water balance in two terrestrial mammals. Kangaroo rats. which live in the American Southwest, eat mostly dry se€ds and do not drink water, A kangaroo rat gains water mainly from cellular metabolism and loses water mainly by evaporation during gas exchange, In contrast. a human gains water in food and drink and loses the largest fraction of it in urine.

enough adapted for minimizing water loss that they can survive without drinking. A noteworthy example is the kangaroo rat: It loses so little water that 90% is replaced by water generated metabolically (Figure 44.6); the remaining 10% comes from the small amount of water in its diet of seeds.

Energetics of Osmoregulation When an animal maintains an osmolarity difference bern'een its body and the external environment, there is an energy cost. Because diffusion tends to equalize concentrations in a system, osmoregulators must expend energy to maintain the osmotic gradients that cause water to move in or out. They do so by using active transport to manipulate solute concentrations in their body fluids. The energy cost of osmoregulation depends on how different an animal's osmolarity is from its surroundings, how easily water and solutes can move across the animal's surface, and how much work is required to pump solutes across the membrane. Osmoregulation accounts for 5% or more ofthe resting metabolic rate of many freshwater and marine bony fishes. For brine shrimp, small crustaceans that live in Utah's Great Salt Lake and other extremely salty lakes, the gradient bern'een internal and external osmolarity is very large, and the cost ofosmoregulation is correspondingly high-as much as 30% ofthe resting metabolic rate.

(HAPTH fORTY·fOUR


957

The energy cost to an animal of maintaining water and salt balance is minimized by a body fluid composition adapted to the salinity of the animal's habitat. Comparing closely related species reveals that the body fluids of most freshwater animals have lower solute concentrations than the body fluids of their marine relatives. For instance, whereas marine molluscs have body fluids with a solute concentration ofapproximately 1,000 mOsm/L, some freshwater mussels maintain the solute concentration of their body fluids as low as 40 mOsm/L. The reduced osmotic difference between body fluids and the surrounding environment (about 1,000 mOsm/L for seawater and 0.5-15 mOsm/L for fresh water) decreases the energy the animal expends for osmoregulation.

• FI

44.1

How do seabirds eliminate excess salt from their bodies? EXPERIMENT Knut Schmidt·Nielsen and colleagues. at the Mount Desert Island Laboratory, Maine. gave captive marine birds nothing but seawater to drink. However, only a small amount of the salt the birds consumed appeared in their urine. The remainder was concentrated in a clear fluid dripping from the tip of the birds' beaks. Where did this salty fluid come from? The researchers focused their attention on the nasal glands. a pair of structures found in the heads of all birds. The nasal glands of seabirds are much larger than those of land birds, and SchmidtNielsen hypothesized that the nasal glands function in salt elimination. To test this hypothesis, the researchers inserted a thin tube through the dud leading to a nasal gland and Withdrew fluid.

Transport Epithelia in Osmoregulation The ultimate function of osmoregulation is to maintain the composition ofthe cellular contents, but most animals do this indirectly by managing the composition of an internal body fluid that bathes the cells. In insects and other animals with an open circulatory system, this fluid is the hemolymph (see Chapter 42). In vertebrates and other animals with a closed circulatory system, the cells are bathed in an interstitial fluid that contains a mixture of solutes controlled indirectly by the blood. Maintaining the composition ofsuch fluids depends on structures ranging from cells that regulate solute movement to complex organs, such as the vertebrate kidney. In most animals, osmotic regulation and metabolic waste disposal rely on one or more kinds oftransport cpithcliumone or more layers of specialized epithelial cells that regulate solute movements. Transport epithelia move specific solutes in controlled amounts in specific directions. Transport epithelia are typically arranged into complex tubular networks with extensive surface areas. Some transport epithelia face the outside environment directly, while others line channels connected to the outside by an opening on the body surface. The transport epithelium that enables the albatross to survive on seawater remained undiscovered for many years. Some scientists suggested that marine birds do not actually drink water, asserting that although the birds take water into their mouths they do not swallow. Questioning this idea, Knut Schmidt-Nielsen and colleagues carried out a simple but informative experiment (figure 44.7). As Schmidt-Nielsen demonstrated, the adaptation that enables the albatross and other marine birds to maintain internal salt balance is a specialized nasal gland. In removing excess sodium chloride from the blood, the nasal gland relies on countercurrent exchange (figure 44.8). Recall from Chapter 40 that countercurrent exchange occurs between two fluids separated by one or more membranes and flowing in opposite directions. In the albatross's nasal gland, the net result is the secretion of fluid much saltier than the ocean. Thus, even though drinking seawater brings in a lot ofsalt, the bird achieves a net gain ofwa958

UNIT SEVEN


1II..---",Ducts -=::;;4.~

Nasal salt gland

A7-'-;;,...~~---lc-- Nostril with salt secretions

RESULTS The fluid drawn from the nasal glands of the captive marine birds was a nearly pure solution of NaG The salt concentration was 5%, nearly twice as salty as seawater (and many times saltier than human tears). Control samples of fluid drawn from other glands in the head revealed no other location of high salt concentration CONClUSION Marine birds utilize their nasal glands to eliminate excess salt from the body. It is these organs that make life at sea possible for species such as gulls and albatrosses. Similar structures. called salt glands, provide the identical function in sea turtles and marine iguanas 1(, S transferred the oocytes from a 200-m0sm to a 10mOsm soIutioo. They the!1 measured swelling by light microscopy and cakulated the permeability of the oocytes to water,

o Prepare copies

Aquaporin of human aqua- A;"gen~/ porin genes: Promoter two mutants plus wild type

~

f) Synthesize RNA

Mutant 2

Mutant 1

transcripts.

8

/' ~ ~

I

Inject RNA into frog oocytes,

\

A second regulatory mechanism that helps to maintain homeostasis is the renin-angiotensin-aldosterone system (RAAS). The RAAS involves a specialized tissue called the juxtaglomerular apparatus OGA), located near the afferent arteriole that supplies blood to the glomerulus (Figure 44.21). When blood pressure or blood volume in the afferent arteriole drops (for instance, as a result of blood loss or reduced intake ofsalt), the IGA releases the enzyme renin. Renin initiates chemical reactions that cleave a plasma protein called angiotensinogen, yielding a peptide called angiotensin II. Functioning as a hormone, angiotensin II raises blood pressure by constricting arterioles, which decreases blood flow to many capillaries, including those of the kidney. Angiotensin II also stimulates the adrenal glands to release a hormone called aldosterone. This hormone acts on the nephrons' distal Liver

Wild type

I I

H,O (controll

I

JGA

releases renin

j

o Transfer to 10 mOsm

j

j

Juxtaglomerular apparatus (JGA)

solution and observe results. Aquaporin protein

RESULTS

Injected RNA Wild·type aquaporin

Permeability (p.m/s) 196

None

20

Aquaporin mutant 1

17

Aquaporin mutant 2

18

Adrenal gland

STIMULUS: low blood volume or blood pressure (for example. due to dehydration or blood loss)

Because each mutation inactivates aquaporin as a water channel, the patient's disorder can be attributed to these mutations.

CONCLUSION

SOURCE ch~nnel i1qu~porin·2

p, M T. Deen et ill,. Requirement of human renill w~!er for v~sopfessin·dependent concentr~t'on of unne, xierlce

Homeostasis: Blood pressure. volume

26492-95(1994).

_iW"'I. If you measured ADH levels in patients with ADH receptor mutations and in patients with aquaporm mutations. what would you expect to find. compared with wild-type subjects?

... Figure 44.21 Regulation of blood volume and pressure by the renin-angiotensin-aldosterone system (RAAS). (HAPTH fORTY·fOUR


971

tubules, making them reabsorb more sodium (Na +) and water and increasing blood volume and pressure. Because angiotensin II acts in several ways that increase blood pressure, drugs that block angiotensin 1I production are \\lidely used to treat hypertension (chronic high blood pressure). Many of these drugs are specific inhibitors of angiotensin con\oong enzyme (ACE), which catalyzes the second step in the production ofan angiotensin II. Asshown in Figure44.21, renin released from the JGA acts on a circulating substrate, angiotensinogen. forming angiotensin I. ACE in vascular endothelium, particularly in the lungs, then splits off t.....o amino acids from angiotensin I, forming acti\'e angiotensin II. Blocking ACE activity with drugs prevents angiotensin 1I production and thereby often lo~'ers blood pressure into the normal range.

Homeoslatic Regulation of the Kidney The renin-angiotensin-aldosterone system operates as part of a complex feedback circuit that results in homeostasis. Adrop in blood pressure and blood volume triggers renin release from the JGA.ln turn, the rise in blood pressure and ....olume resulting from the various actions ofangiotensin II and aldosterone reduces the release of renin. The functions of ADH and the RAAS may seem to be redundant, but this is not the case. Both increase water reabsorption, but they counter different osmoregulatory problems. The release ofADH is a response toan increase in blood osmolarity, as when the body is dehydrated from excessive water loss or inadequate water intake. However, a situation that causes an excessive loss of both salt and body fluids-a major wOlUld, for example, or severe diarrhea-will reduce blood volume withollt increasing osmolarity. This will not affect ADH release, but the RAAS will respond to the drop in blood volume and pressure by increasing water and Na + reabsorption. Thus, ADH and the

(;II 1.1Clx!~j'i11It!l'-. Go (0 the Sl\.Idy Area ill _.millsteringbio.(om for BioFlix .....,/

3-D Anlmallons. MP3 Tutors. Videos, Practice Tests. an eBook, and more.


••.1/""-44.1 Osmoregulation balances the uptake and loss of water and solutes (pp. 954-959) ... Osmoregulation is based largely on the controlled movement of solutes between internal Ouids and the external environment, as well as the movement of water, which follows by osmosis.

972

UNIT HI/EN


RAAS are partners in homeostasis. ADH alone would lower blood Na + concentration by stimulating water reabsorption in the kidney, but the RAAS helps maintain the osmolarity ofbody fluids at the set point by stimulating Na + reabsorption. Another hormone, atrial natriuretic peptide (ANP), opposes the RAAS. The walls of the atria of the heart release ANP in response to an increase in blood volume and pressure. A rp inhibits the release of renin from the JGA, inhibits NaCI reabsorption by the collecting ducts, and reduces aldosterone release from the adrenal glands. These actions lower blood volume and pressure. Thus, ADH, the RAAS, and ANP provide an elaborate system of checks and balances that regulate the kidney's ability to control the osmolarity, salt concentration, volume, and pressure of blood. The precise regulatory role of A?\TP is an area of active research. In all animals, certain of the intricate physiological machines we call organs work continuously in maintaining solute and water balance and excreting nitrogenous wastes. The details that we have reviewed in this chapter only rnntat the great complexity of the neuraJ and hormonal mechanisms involved in regulating these homeostatic processes.

CONCEPT

CHECK

44.5

I, How does akohol affect regulation ofwater balance

in the body? 2. Why could it be dangerous to drink a very large amount of water in a short period of time? 3, _i*, II Conn's syndrome is a condition caused by tumors of the adrenal cortex that secrete high amOlUlts of aldosterone in an unregulated maimer. %at would you expect to be the major symptom of this disorder?

i.

for suggested answers, see Appendix A.

... Osmosis and Osmolarity Cells require a balance be1v.'een osmotic gain and loss of water. Water uptake and loss are bal· anced by various mechanisms of osmoregulation in different environments. ... Osmotic Challenges Osmoconformers, ali ofwhich are marine animals, are isoosmotic with their surroundings and do nOI regulate their osmolarity. Among marine animals, most invertebrates are osmoconformers. ... Energetics of Osmoregulation Osmoregulators expend energy to control ....'3ter uptake and loss in a hypoosmotic or hyperosmolic environment, respectively. Sharks have an osmolarity slightly higher than seawater because they retain urea. Terreslrial animals combat desiccation through behavioral adaptations, water-conserving excretory organs, and drinking and eating food with high water content. Animals in temporary waters may be anhydrobiotic.

Animal

Inflow/Outflow

Freshwater fish. Lives in water less concentrated than body fluids; fish tends to gain water. lose salt

Does not drink water Salt in H20 in (active trans' port by gills)

~

Urine ... large volume of urine ... Urine is less concentrated than body fluids

t

Salt out Marine bony fish. Lives in water more concentrated than body fluids; fish tends to lose water. gain salt

Drinks water Salt in H20 out

~

... Small volume of urine ... Urine is slightly less concentrated than body fluids

j Salt out (active transport by gills)

Terrestrial vertebrate. Terrestrial environment; tends to lose body water to air

Drinks water Salt in (by mouth)

/

... Moderate volume of urine ... Urine is more concentrated than body fluids

... Transport Epithelia in Osmoregulation Water balance and waste disposal depend on transport epithelia, layers of specialized epithelial cells that regulate the solute movements required for waste disposal and for tempering changes in body fluids.

_i.'I'ii'_ 44.2 An animal's nitrogenous wastes reflect its phylogeny and habitat (pp. 959-960) ... Forms of Nitrogenous Waste Protein and nucleic acid metabolism generates ammonia, a toxic waste product. Most aquatic animals excrete ammonia across the body surface or gill epithelia into the surrounding water. The liver of mammals and most adult amphibians converts ammonia to the less toxic urea, which is carried to the kidneys, concentrated, and excreted with a minimal loss of water. Uric acid is a slightly soluble nitrogenous waste excreted in the paste-like urine of land snails. insects. and many reptiles. including birds. ... The Influence of Evolution and Environment on Nitrogenous Wastes The kind of nitrogenous waste excreted depends on an animal's evolutionary history and habitat. The amount of nitrogenous waste produced is coupled to the animal's energy budget and amount of dietary protein.

_ •.llli.'_ 44.3

Diverse excretory systems are variations on a tubular theme (pp. 960-964) ... Excretory Processes Most excretory systems produce urine by refining a filtrate derived from body fluids. Key functions

of most excretory systems are filtration (pressure filtering of body fluids, producing a filtrate); production of urine from the filtrate by selective reabsorption (reclaiming valuable solutes from the filtrate); and secretion (addition of toxins and other solutes from the body fluids to the filtrate). ... Survey of Excretory Systems Extracellular fluid is filtered into the protonephridia of the flame bulb system in flatworms; these tubules excrete a dilute fluid and may also function in osmoregulation. Each segment of an earthworm has a pair ofopen-ended metanephridia that collect coelomic fluid and produce dilute urine. In insects. Malpighian tubules function in osmoregulation and removal of nitrogenous w.lstes from the hemolymph. Insects produce a relatively dry waste matter, an important adaptation to terrestrial life. Kidneys, the excretory organs of vertebrates, function in both excretion and osmoregulation. ... Structure of the Mammalian Excretory System Excretory tubules (consisting of nephrons and collecting ducts) and associated blood vessels pack the kidney. Filtration occurs as blood pressure forces fluid from the blood in the glomerulus into the lumen of Bowman's capsule. Filtration of small molecules is nonselective, and the filtrate initially contains a mixture of small molecules that mirrors the concentrations of these substances in blood plasma. Fluid from several nephrons flows into a collecting duct. The ureter conveys urine from the renal pelvis to the urinary bladder. Acthily Structure of the Human hcretory System

- . liiiil_ 44.4 '»Ie nephron is organized for stepwise processing of blood filtrate (pp. 964-969) ... From Blood Filtrate to Urine: A Closer Look Nephrons control the composition of the blood by filtration, secretion, and reabsorption. Secretion and reabsorption in the proximal tubule substantially alter the volume and composition of filtrate. The descending limb of the loop of Henle is permeable to water but not to salt; water moves by osmosis into the hrperosmotic interstitial fluid. The ascending limb is permeable to salt. but not to water, with salt leaving as the filtrate ascends first by diffusion and then by active transport. The distal tubule and collecting duct play key roles in regulating the K-t and NaCl concentration of body fluids. The collecting duct carries the filtrate through the medulla to the renal pelvis and can respond to hormonal signals to reabsorb water. ... Solute Gradients and Water Conservation In a mammalian kidney, the cooperative action of the loops of Henle and the collecting ducts is largely responsible for the osmotic gradient that concentrates the urine. A countercurrent multiplier system involving the loop of Henle maintains the gradient of salt concentration in the interior of the kidney, which enables the kidney to form concentrated urine. The urine can be further concentrated by water exiting the filtrate by osmosis in the collecting duct. Urea, which diffuses out ofthe collecting duct as it traverses the inner medulla. contributes to the osmotic gradient of the kidney. ... Adaptations of the Vertebrate Kidney to Diverse Environments The form and function of nephrons in various vertebmtes are related primarily to the requirements for osmoregulation in the animal's habitat. Desert mammals. which excrete the most hyperosmotic urine, have loops of Henle that extend deep into the kidney medulla. whereas mammals living in moist or aquatic habitats have shorter loops and excrete less concentmted urine. Although birds can produce a hyperosmotic urine, the main Wolter conservation adaptation of birds is removal of nitrogen as uric acid, which can be excreted as a paste. Most other terrestrial (HAPTH fORTY·fOUR


973

reptiles excrete uric acid. Freshwater fishes and amphibians produce large volumes of very dilute urine. The kidneys of marine bony fishes have low filtration rates and excrete very little urine.

ACllvity Nephron Function

-i·lliii'- 44.5 Hormonal circuits link kidney function, water balance, and blood pressure (pp. 969-972) .. Antidiuretic Hormone ADH is released from the posterior pituitary gland when the osmolarity of blood rises above a set point. ADH increases epithelial permeability to water in the distal tubules and collecting ducts of the kidney. The permeability increase in the collecting duct results from an increase in the number of water channels in the membrane. .. The Renin-Angiotensin-Aldosterone System When blood pressure or blood volume in the afferent arteriole drops, renin released from the juxtaglomerular apparatus (JGA) initiates conversion of angiotensinogen to angiotensin II. Functioning as a hormone. angiotensin II raises blood pressure by constricting arterioles and triggering release ofthe hormone aldosterone. The rise in blood pressure and volwue in turn reduces the release of renin. .. Homeostatic Regulation of the Kidney ADH and the RAAS have overlapping but distinct functions. Atrial natriuretic peptide (ANP) opposes the action of the RAA$.

_&!4.if.• Aclivity Control ofWatcr Reabsorption In\"~.ligalion What Affects Urine Production?


SELF-QUIZ t. Unlike an earthworm's metanephridia, a mammalian nephron a. is intimately associated with a capillary network. b. forms urine by changing fluid composition inside a tubule. c. functions in both osmoregulation and excretion. d. receives filtrate from blood instead of coelomic fluid. e. has a transport epithelium. 2. Which of the following is not a normal response to increased blood osmolarity in humans? a. increased permeability of the collecting duct to water b. production of more dilute urine c. release of ADH by the pituitary gland d. increased thirst e. reduced urine production 3. The high osmolarity of the renal medulla is maintained by all of the following except a. diffusion of salt from the thin segment of the ascending limb of the loop of Henle. b. active transport of salt from the upper region of the ascending limb. c. the spatial arrangement of juxtamedullary nephrons. d. diffusion of urea from the collecting duct. e. diffusion of salt from the descending limb of the loop of Henle.

974

UNIT SEVEN


4. Natural selection should favor the highest proportion of juxtamedullary nephrons in which of the following species? a. a river otter b. a mouse species living in a tropical rain forest c. a mouse species living in a temperate broadleaf forest d. a mouse species living in a desert e. a beaver 5. Which process in the nephron is least selective? a. filtration d. secretion b. reabsorption e. salt pumping by the loop of Henle c. active transport 6. Which of the following animals generally has the lowest volume of urine production? a. a marine shark b. a salmon in freshwater c. a marine bony fish d. a freshwater bony fish e. a shark inhabiting freshwater Lake Nicaragua 7. African lungfish, which are often found in small stagnant pools of fresh water, produce urea as a nitrogenous waste. What is the advantage of this adaptation? a. Urea takes less energy to synthesize than ammonia. b. Small stagnant pools do not provide enough water to dilute the toxic ammonia. c. The highly toxic urea makes the pool uninhabitable to potential competitors. d. Urea forms an insoluble precipitate. e. Urea makes lungfish tissue hypoosmotic to the pool. 8. '.j;H~11I Using Figure 44.4 as an example, sketch the exchange of salt (Nael) and water between a shark and its marine environment. For Selj.Qlliz answers, see Appendix A.

-M,",',. Visit the Study Area at www.masteringbio.comforil Prilctice Test

EVOLUTION CONNECTION 9. Merriam's kangaroo rats (DipodQIllYs merriami) live in North American habitats ranging from moist, cool woodlands to hot deserts. Assuming that natural selection has resulted in differences in water conservation between D. merriamj populations, propose a hypothesis concerning the relative rates ofevaporative water loss by populations that live in moist versus dry environments. Using a humidity sensor to detect evaporative water loss by kangaroo rats, how could you test your hypothesis?

SCIENTIFIC INQUIRY 10. You are exploring kidney function in kangaroo rats. You measure urine volume and osmolarity, as well as the amount of chloride (CI-) and urea in the urine. If the water source provided to the animals were switched from tap water to a 2% NaCl solution, what change in urine osmolarity would rou expect? How would you determine if this change was more likely due to a change in the excretion of CI- or Ul"e',l?

Hopnn the

5ys

+bt1~C rH-tlC H-l.f+1-. ... Figure 45,1 What role do hormones play in

KEY

CONCEPTS

45.1 Hormones and other signaling molecules bind to target receptors, triggering specific response pathways 45.2 Negative feedback and antagonistic hormone pairs are common features of the endocrine system 45.3 lhe endocrine and nervous systems act individually and together in regulating animal physiology 45.4 Endocrine glands respond to diverse stimuli in regulating metabolism, homeostasis, development, and behavior

r~:;~~:;s

long-Distance

Regulators

I

n becoming an adult, a butterfly like the anise swallowtail (PapiliQ zelicaon) in Figure 45.1 is dramatically trans-

formed. The plump, crawling caterpillar that encases itself in a cocoon bears little resemblance to the delicate free-flying butterfly that emerges days later. Within the cocoon, specialized groups of cells assemble into the adult tissues and organs while most other tissues of the caterpillar break down, A caterpillar's complete change of body form, called metamorphosis, is one of many biological processes controlled by hormones, In animals, a hormone (from the Greek horman, to excite) is a molecule that is secreted into the extracellular fluid, circulates in the blood or hemolymph, and communicates regulatory messages throughout the body. In the case of the caterpillar, communication by hormones regu· lates the timing of metamorphosis and ensures that different parts of the insect's adult body develop in unison. Although the circulatory system allows a hormone to reach all cells of the body, only its target cells have the re
I

exhibit different responses if they have different signal transduction pathways and/or effector proteins [compare (a) with (b)l. Responses of target cells may also difler il they have different receptors lor the hormone [compare (b) with (c)).

Signaling by local Regulators

... Figure 45.9 Specialized role of a hormone in frog metamorphosis. The hormone thyroxine is responsible for the resorption of the tadpole's tail (a) as the frog develops into its adult lorm (b)

Recall that local regulators are secreted molecules that link neighboring cells (paracrine signaling) or that provide feedback to the secreting cell (autocrine signaling). Once secreted, local regulators act on their target cells within seconds or even milliseconds, eliciting responses more quickly than do hormones. Nevertheless, the pathways by which local regulators trigger responses are the same as those activated by hormones. Several types of chemical compounds function as local regulators. Polypeptide local regulators include cytokines, which playa role in immune responses (see Chapter 43), and most growth factors, which stimulate cell proliferation and differentiation. Many types of cells grow, divide, and develop

980

UNIT SEVEN


normally only when growth factors are present in their extracellular environment. The gas nitric oxide (NO), which consists of nitrogen double-bonded to oxygen, serves in the body as both a neurotransmitter and a local regulator. When the level of oxygen (02) in the blood falls, endothelial cells in blood vessel walls synthesize and release NO. Nitric oxide activates an enzyme that relaxes the neighboring smooth muscle cells, resulting in vasodilation, which improves blood flow to tissues. In human males, the ability of NO to promote vasodilation enables sexual function by increasing blood flow into the penis, producing an erection. Highly reactive and potentially toxic, NO usually triggers changes in a target cell within a few seconds of contact and then breaks down. The drug Viagra (sildenafil citrate), a treatment for male erectile dysfunction, sustains an erection by interfering with this breakdown of NO. Agroup oflocal regulators called prostaglandins are modified fatty acids. They are so named because they were first discovered in prostate gland secretions that contribute to semen. Prostaglandins are produced by many cell types and have varied activities. In semen that reaches the reproductive tract of a female, prostaglandins stimulate the smooth muscles of the female's uterine wall to contract, helping sperm reach an egg. At the onset of childbirth, prostaglandin-secreting cells of the placenta cause the nearby muscles of the uterus to become more excitable, helping to induce labor (see Figure 46.18). In the immune system, prostaglandins promote fever and inflammation and also intensify the sensation of pain. The anti-inflammatory and pain-relieving effects of aspirin and ibuprofen are due to the inhibition of prostaglandin synthesis by these drugs. Prostaglandins also help regulate the aggregation of platelets, one step in the formation of blood clots. Because blood clots can cause a heart attack by blocking blood flow in vessels that supply the heart (see Chapter 42), some physicians recommend that people at risk for a heart attack take aspirin on a regular basis. However, because prostaglandins also help maintain a protective lining in the stomach, long-term aspirin therapy can cause debilitating stomach irritation. CONCEPT

CHECK

45.1

I. How do the mechanisms that induce responses in target cells differ for water-soluble hormones and lipidsoluble hormones? 2. In what way does one activity described for prostaglandins resemble that of a pheromone? 3. -i,ij:f.j.14 Which explanation of the distinct effects of epinephrine in different tissues might best account for the distinct effects of hormones in different species? Explain your answer.

r~:~:~:: :~d~ack and

antagonistic hormone pairs are common features of the endocrine system

So far, we have explored the chemical nature of hormones and other signaling molecules and gained a basic understanding of their activities in cells. We turn now to considering how regulatory pathways that control hormone secretion are organized. For these and later examples taken from the human endocrine system, Figure 45.10 provides a useful point of reference for locating endocrine glands and tissues.

Simple Hormone Pathways In response to an internal or environmental stimulus, endocrine cells secrete a particular hormone. The hormone travels in the bloodstream to target cells, where it interacts with its specific receptors. Signal transduction within target cells brings about a physiological response. Finally, the response leads to a reduction in the stimulus and the pathway shuts off. Major endocrine glands: Hypothalamus----~

Organs containing Thyroid gland ~::;;:;~~~

endocrine cells;

~\_-=~'\~--

Parathyroid glands (behind thyrOid)

I

Thymus Heart Liver

Adrenal glands (atop kidneys)

Stomach

pancrea";~=:i~:#~~

Kidney

Kidney Ovaries

intestine

!->-~>::>--:J:cUi\-\--Small

(female)I--i'1R~~;';~~

Testes (male)

For suggested answers. see Appendix A.

.. Figure 45.10 Major human endocrine glands. CHAPTH fORTY·fIVE

Hormones and the Endocrine System

981

In the example shown in Figure 45.11, acidic stomach contents released into the duodenum (the first part of the small intestine) serve as the stimulus. Low pH in the small intestine stimulates certain endocrine cells of the duodenum, called S cells, to secrete the hormone secretin. Secretin enters the bloodstream and reaches target cells in the pancreas, a gland located behind the stomach (see Figure 45.10), causing them to release bicarbonate, which raises the pH in the duodenum. The pathway is self-limiting because the response to secretin (bicarbonate release) reduces the stimulus (low pH). A feedback loop ronnecting the response to the initial stimulus is characteristic ofcontrol path '3ys. For secretin and many other hormones, the response path '3y involves negathoe feedback, a loop in which the response reduces the initial stimulus. By decreasing or abolishing hormone signaling, negative-feedback regulation prevents excessive pathway activity. Negative-feedback loops are an essential part of many hormone pathways, especially those involved in maintaining homeostasis. Simple hormone pathways are widespread among ani· mals. Some homeostatic control systems rely on sets of simple hormone pathways with coordinated activities. One common arrangement is a pair of pathways, each counterbalancing the other. To see how such control systems operate, we'll consider the regulation of blood glucose levels.

Pathway

r°:.......1 StlmulU5 • •• •.'

Example lcm pH In duodenum

S cells of duodenum secrete se
CHAPIH fORTY·fIVE


993

some athletes to take them as supplements, despite prohibitions against their use in nearly all sports. Use of anabolic steroids, while effective in increasing muscle mass, can cause severe acne outbreaks and liver damage. In addition, anabolic steroids have a negative-feedback effect on testosterone production, causing significant decreases in sperm count and testicular size. Estrogens, of which the most important is estradiol, are responsible for the maintenance ofthe female reproductive system and the development offemale secondary sex characteristics. In mammals, progestins, which include progesterone, are primarily involved in preparing and maintaining tissues of the uterus required to support the growth and development ofan embryo. Androgens, estrogens, and progestins are components of hormone cascade pathways. Synthesis of these hormones is controlled by gonadotropins (FSH and LH) from the anterior pituitary gland (see Figure 45.17). FSH and LH secretion is in turn controlled by a releasing hormone from the hypothalamus, GnRH (gonadotropin-releasing hormone). We will examine the feedback relationships that regulate gonadal steroid secretion in detail in Chapter 46.

Melatonin and Biorhythms We conclude our discussion of the vertebrate endocrine system with the pineal gland, a sman mass oftissue near the center of the mammalian brain (see Figure 45.14). The pineal gland synthesizes and secretes the hormone melatonin, a modified amino acid. Depending on the species, the pineal gland contains light·sensitive cells or has nervous connections from the eyes that control its secretory activity. Melatonin regulates functions related to light and to seasons marked by changes in day length. Although melatonin affects

skin pigmentation in many vertebrates, its primary functions relate to biological rhythms associated with reproduction. Melatonin is secreted at night, and the amount released depends on the length of the night. In winter, for example, when days are short and nights are long, more melatonin is secreted. Recent evidence suggests that the main target of melatonin is a group of neurons in the hypothalamus called the suprachiasmatic nucleus (SCN), which functions as a biological clock. Melatonin seems to decrease the activity of the SCN, and this effect may be related to its role in mediating rhythms. We win consider biological rhythms further in Chapter 49, where we will analyze experiments on SCN function. In the next chapter, we will look at reproduction in both vertebrates and invertebrates. There we will see that the endocrine system is central not only to the survival of the individual, but also to the propagation of the species. CONCEPT

CHECK

45.4

I, How does the fact that two adrenal hormones act as neurotransmitters relate to the developmental origin of the adrenal gland? 2, How would a decrease in the number of corticosteroid receptors in the hypothalamus affect levels of corticosteroids in the blood? 3. N,mU"4 Suppose you receive an injection of cortisone, a glucocorticoid, in an inflamed joint. What aspects of glucocorticoid activity would you be exploiting? If a glucocorticoid pill were also effective at treating the inflammation, why would it still be preferable to introduce the drug locally? For suggested answers, see Appendix A.

C a teri~ -.1Review -N·if.• Go to the Study Area at www.masteringbio.comfor6ioFlix 3-D Animations, MP3 Tutol),

Videos. Practice Tests, an eBook. and more.


.i,ll.i,,_ 45.1 Hormones and other signaling molecules bind to target receptors, triggering specific response pathways (pp.975-981) .. Types of Secreted Signaling Molecules Hormones are secreted into extracellular fluids by endocrine cells or ductless glands and reach target cells via the bloodstream. Local regulators act on neighboring cells in paracrine signaling, and on the secreting cell itself in autocrine signaling. Neurotransmitters also act locally, but some nerve cells secrete neurohor994

UNlr SEVEN Animal Form and Function

mones that can act throughout the body. Signaling molecules called pheromones are released into the environment for communication between animals of the same species. .. Chemical Classes of Hormones Hormones can be polypeptides, amines, or steroids and can be water-soluble or lipid-soluble. .. Hormone Receptor location: Scientific Inquiry Peptide/protein hormones and most hormones derived from amino acids bind to receptors embedded in the plasma membrane. Steroid hormones and thyroid hormones enter target cells and bind to specific protein receptors in the cytosol or nucleus. .. Cellular Response Pathways Binding of water-soluble hormones to cell-surface receptors triggers intracellular signal transduction, leading to specific responses in the cytoplasm or changes in gene expression. Complexes of a lipid-soluble hormone and its receptor act in the nucleus to regulate transcription of specific genes.

.. Multiple Effects of Hormones The same hormone may have different effeds on target cells that have different receptors for the hormone or different signal transduction pathways. ... Signaling by local Regulators l.ocal regulators include cytokines and growth factors (proteins/peptides), nitric oxide (a gas), and prostaglandins (modified fatty adds),

... Coordination of Endocrine and Nervous Systems in Vertebrates The hypothalamus, on the underside of the brain, contains sets of neurosecretory cells. Some produce directacting hormones that are stored in and released from the posterior pituitary. Other hypothalamic cells produce hormones that are transported by portal blood vessels to the anterior pituitary. These hormones either promote or inhibit the release of hormones from the anterior pituitary.

Actl\'lty Overview of Cell Signaling Adi\ity Peptide Hormone Act;on Acti,ity Steroid Hormone Ad;on

_',llii"_ 45.2 Negative feedback and antagonistic hormone pairs are common features of the endocrine system (pp. 981-984) ... Simple Hormone Pathways Pathway

o

Example

Stimulus

low blood glucose

I

r.-.

Pancreas secretes

'1::'.: i Endocrine

~

••

• •

glucagon (.)

cell

Response

Glycogen

... Posterior Pituitary Hormones The two hormones released from the posterior pituitary act directly on nonendocrine tissues. Oxytocin induces uterine contractions and release of milk from mammary glands, and antidiuretic hormone (ADH) enhances water reabsorption in the kidneys. ... Anterior Pituitary Hormones Hormones from the hypothalamus act as releasing or inhibiting hormones for hormone secretion by the anterior pituitary. Most anterior pituitary hormones are tropic, acting on endocrine tissues or glands to regulate hormone secretion. Often, anterior pituitary hormones act in a C.IScadI'. In the case ofthyrotropin, or thyroid-stimulating hormone {TSH), TSH secretion is regulated by thyrotropin-releasing hormone (TRH), and TSH in tum regulates secretion of thyroid hormone. Like TSH, follicle-stimulating hormone (FSH), luteinizing hormone (LH), and adrenocorticotropic hormone {ACTH) are tropic. Prolactin and melanocyte-stimulating hormone (MSH) are nontropic anterior pituitary hormones. Prolactin stimulates milk production in mammals but has diverse effects in different vertebrates. MSH influences skin pigmentation in some vertebrates and fat metabolism in mammals. Growth hormone (GH) promotes growth directly and has diverse metabolic effects; it also stimulates the production ofgrowth f.lctors by other tissues.

• ',11""-45.4

liver

I

... Coordination of Endocrine and Nervous Systems in Invertebrates Diverse hormones regulate different aspects of homeostasis in invertebrates. In insects, molting and development are controlled by prothoracicotropic hormone (PTTH), a tropic neurohormone; ecdysone, whose release is triggered by PTTH; and juvenile hormone.

Endocrine glands respond to diverse stimuli in regulating metabolism, homeostasis, development, and brea~down,

glucose release into blood

... Insulin and Glucagon: Control of Blood Glucose Insulin (from beta cells of the pancreas) reduces blood glucose levels by promoting cellular uptake of glucose, glycogen formation in the liver, protein synthesis, and fat storage. Glucagon (from alpha cells of the pancreas) increases blood glucose levels by stimulating conversion of glycogen to glucose in the liver and breakdown of fat and protein to glucose. Diabetes mellitus, which is marked by elevated blood glucose levels, results from inadequate production of insulin (type I) or loss of responsiveness of target cells to insulin (type 2).

.',11""-45.3 The endocrine and nervous systems act individually and together in regulating animal physiology (pp. 984-990) ... The endocrine and nervous systems often function together in maintaining homeostasis, development, and reproduction.

behavior (pp. 990-994) ... Thyroid Hormone: Control of Metabolism and Development The thyroid gland produces iodine-containing hormones (T 3 and T4) that stimulate metabolism and influence development and maturation. Secretion ofT 3 and T4 is controlled by the hypothalamus and pituitary in a hormone cascade pathway. ... Parathyroid Hormone and Vitamin D: Control of Blood Calcium Parathyroid hormone (PTH), secreted by the parathyroid glands, causes bone to release Ca11 into the blood and stimulates reabsorption of CaH in the kidneys. PTH also stimulates the kidneys to activate vitamin D, which promotes intestinal uptake of Ca H from food. Calcitonin, secreted by the thyroid, has the opposite effects in bones and kidneys as PTH. Calcitonin is important for calcium homeostasis in adults of some vertebrates, but not humans. ... Adrenal Hormones: Response to Stress Neurosecretory cells in the adrenal medulla release epinephrine and norepinephrine in response to stress-activated impulses from the nervous system. These hormones mediate various fight-or-flight responses. The adrenal cortex releases three functional classes of steroid hormones. Glucocorticoids, such as cortisol, influence glucose metabolism and the immune system; mineralocorticoids, primarily aldosterone, help regulate salt and W.lter balance. The adrenal cortex also produces small amounts of sex hormones. CHAPTER fORlY·fIVE


995

~

Gonadal Sex Hormones The gonads-testes and ovariesproduce most of the body's sex hormones: androgens, estrogens, and progestins. All three types are produced in males and females but in different proportions.

~

Melatonin and Biorhythms The pineal gland, located within the brain, secretes melatonin. Release of melatonin is controlled by light/dark crcles. Its primary functions appear to be related to biological rhythms associated with reproduction.

-m·ltHu~n

EndocrineGbnds and H()I'TnOnf:t: In>titlptioa How Do ThY'"O"i~ and TSH AIJ«t Md3boIism? Actl>ity


SELF·QUIZ I. \'(Ihich of the following is not an accurate statement?

a. Hormones are chemical messengers that tniVel to target cells through the circulatory system. b. Hormones often regulate homeostasis through antagonistic functions. c. Hormones of the same chemical class usually have the same function. d. Hormones are secreted by specialized cells usually located in endocrine glands. e. Hormones are often regulated through feedback loops. 2. A distinctive feature of the mechanism of action of thyroid

hormones and steroid hormones is that a. these hormones are regulated by feedback loops. b. target cells react more rapidly to these hormones than to local regulators. c. these hormones bind with specific receptor proteins on the plasma membrane of target cells. d. these hormones bind to receptors inside cells. e. these hormones affect metabolism.

3. Growth factors are local regulators that a. are produced by the anterior pituitary. b. are modified fatty acids that stimulate bone and cartilage growth. c. are found on the surface of cancer cells and stimulate abnormal cell division. d. are proteins that bind to cell-surface receptors and stimulate growth and development of target cells. e. convey messages between nerve cells. 4. Which hormone is inrorndly paired with its action?

a. b. c. d.

oxytocin-stimulates uterine contractions during childbirth thyroxine-stimulates metabolic processes insulin-stimulates glycogen breakdown in the liver ACTH-stimulates the release of g1ucocorticoids by the adrenal cortex e. melatonin-affects biological rhythms, seasonal Il.'production

S. An example ofantagonistic hormones controlling homeostasis is a. thyroxine and parathyroid hormone in calcium balance. b. insulin and glucagon in glucose metabolism. c. progestins and estrogens in sexual differentiation. d. epinephrine and norepinephrine in fight-or-flight responses. e. oxytocin and prolactin in milk production. 996

UNIT SEVEN


6. \'(Ihich of the following is the most likely explanation for h)'JXlthyroidism in a patient whose iodine level is normal? a. a disproportionate production ofT3 to T4 b. hyposecretion ofTSH c. h)'persecretion ofTSH d. h)'persecretion of MSH e. a decrease in the thyroid secretion of calcitonin

1. The nuin target organs for tropic hormones all' a. muscles. d. kidneys. b. blood vessels. e. nerves. c. endocrine glands. 8. The relationship between the insect hormones ecdysone and PITH a. is an example of the interaction between the endocrine and nervous systems. b. illustrates homeostasis achieved by positive feedback. c. demonstrates that peptide-derived hormones have more widespread effects than steroid hormones. d. illustrates homeostasis maintained by antagonistic homlOnes. e. demonstrates competitive inhibition for the hormone receptor. 9. ••I;t Will In mammals, milk production by mammary glands is controlled by prolactin and prolactin-releasing hormone. Draw a simple sketch of this pathWll)', induding glands and tissues, hormones. routes for hormone movement, and effects. FOI' &l/-Quu IlIlP'aS, Sft Ap~,",ixA

-til).!, -

VISit the Study Are.l ilt www.masteringbio.(omfora

PractICe Test.

EVOLUTION CONNECTION 10. The intracellular receptors used by all the steroid and thyroid hormones are similar enough in structure that they are all considered members of one ·superfamil( of proteins. Propose a hypothesis for how the genes encoding these receptors may have evolved. (Hint: See Figure 21.13.) How could you test your hypothesis using DNA sequence data?

SCIENTIFIC INQUIRY J J. Ommically high levels ofglucororticoids, called OJshing's syndrome, can result in obesity, muscle weakntss, and depression. Excessive activit)' ofeither the pituitary or the adrenal gland can be the cause.. To determine which gland has abnormal activity in a particular patient. doctors use the drug da:arnetha.sone. a S)'Ilthetic glucocorticoid that bb:ks ACTH rdease. Based on the graph, which gland is affected in patient X?

• •

Normal

Patient X

Nodrug Dexamethasone

Ani

Re KEY

uction ~

CONCEPTS

46.1 Both asexual and sexual reproduction occur in the animal kingdom 46.2 Fertilization depends on mechanisms that bring together sperm and eggs of the same species 46.3 Reproductive organs produce and transport gametes 46.4 The timing and pattern of meiosis in mammals differ for males and females 46.5 The interplay of tropic and sex hormones regulates mammalian reproduction

46.6 In placental mammals, an embryo develops fully within the mother's uterus

r;:~~~~~j;;p for Sexual Reproduction

he two earthworms (genus Lumbricus) in Figure 46.1 are mating. If not disturbed, they will remain above ground and joined like this for several hours. Sperm will be transferred, and fertilized eggs will be produced. A few weeks later, sexual reproduction will be complete. New worms will hatch, but which parent will be the mother? The answer is simple yet probably unexpected: Both will. As humans, we tend to think of reproduction in terms of the mating of males and females and the fusion of sperm and eggs. Animal reproduction, however, takes many forms. In some species, individuals change their sex during their lifetime, while in others, such as earthworms, an individual is both male and female at the same time. There are animals that can fertilize their own eggs, as well as others that can reproduce without any form of sex. For certain species, such as honeybees, reproduction is limited to a few individuals within a large population.

T

... Figure 46.1 How can each of these earthworms be both male and female?

The many aspects ofanimal form and function we have studied in earlier chapters can be viewed, in the broadest context, as adaptations contributing to reproductive success. Individuals are transient. A population transcends the finite life spans of its members only by reproduction, the generation of new individuals from existing ones. In this chapter, we will compare the diverse reproductive mechanisms that have evolved in the animal kingdom. We will then examine details of mammalian reproduction, particularly that of humans. Deferring the cellular and molecular details of embryonic development until the next chapter, we will focus here on the physiology of reproduction, mostly from the perspective of the parents.

r::;~j:s:x~~·:nd sexual

reproduction occur in the animal kingdom

There are two principal modes of animal reproduction. In sexual reproduction, the fusion of haploid gametes forms a diploid cell, the zygote. The animal that develops from a zygote can in turn give rise to gametes by meiosis (see Figure 13.8). The female gamete, the egg. is a large, nonmotile cell. The male gamete, the sperm, is generally a much smaller, motile cell. Asexual reproduction is the generation of new individuals without the fusion of egg and sperm. In most asexual animals, reproduction relies entirely on mitotic cell division.

Mechanisms of Asexual Reproduction A number ofdistinct forms ofasexual reproduction are found among the invertebrates. Many invertebrates can reproduce asexually by fission, the separation of a parent organism into 997

loid adults that arise by parthenogenesis. In contrast, female honeybees, including both the sterile workers and the fertile queens, are diploid adults that develop from fertilized eggs. Among vertebrates, parthenogenesis is observed in roughly one in every thousand species. Recently discovered examples include the Komodo dragon and a species of hammerhead shark. In both cases, zookeepers were surprised to find offspring that had been parthenogenetically produced when females were kept apart from males of their species.

Sexual Reproduction: An Evolutionary Enigma

... Figure 46.2 Asexual reproduction of a sea anemone (Anthopleura elegantissima). The individual in the center of this photograph is undergoing fission, a type of asexual reproduction. Two smaller individuals will form as the parent divides approximately in half, Each offspring will be a genetic copy of the parent

The vast majority ofeukaryotic species reproduce sexually. Sex must enhance reproductive success or survival, because it would otherwise rapidly disappear. To see why, consider an animal population in which half the females reproduce sexually and half reproduce asexually (Figure 46.3). We'll assume that the number of offspring per female is a constant, two in this case. The two offspring of an asexual female would both be daughters that are each able to give birth to more reproductive daughters. In contrast, half ofa sexual female's offspring will be male. The number of offspring will remain the same at each generation, because both a male and a female are required to reproduce. Thus, the asexual condition will increase in frequency at each generation. Yet despite this "twofold cost;' sex is maintained even in animal species that can also reproduce asexually. What advantage does sex provide? The answer remains elusive. Most hypotheses focus on the unique combinations of parental genes formed during meiotic recombination and fertilization. By producing offspring ofvaried phenotypes, sexual reproduction may enhance the reproductive success of parents when environmental factors, such as pathogens, change relatively rapidly. In contrast, asexual reproduction is expected to be most advantageous in stable, favorable environments because it perpetuates successful genotypes faithfully and precisely.

two individuals of approximately equal size (Figure 46,2). Also common among invertebrates is budding, in which new individuals arise from outgrowths ofexisting ones. For example, in certain species of coral and hydra, new individuals grow out from the parent's body (see Figure 13.2). Stony corals, which can grow to be more than 1 m across, are cnidarian colonies of several thousand connected individuals. In another form of asexual reproduction, some invertebrates, including certain sponges, release specialized groups of cells that can grow into new individuals. A two-step process of asexual reproduction involves fragmentation, the breaking ofthe body into several pieUming \lNO surviving offspring per female, The asexual population rapidly outgrows the sexual one, honeybees, males (drones) are fertile hap-

0/ ~o 1\ 1\

o

0

0

0

1\ 1\ 1\ 1\

00000000

998

UNIT SEVEN


1\

1\

o

o 1\ o

There are a number of reasons why the unique gene combinations formed during sexual reproduction might be advantageous. One is that beneficial gene combinations arising through recombination might speed up adaptation. Although this idea appears straightforward, the theoretical advantage is significant only when the rate of beneficial mutations is high and population size is small. Another idea is that the shuffling ofgenes during sexual reproduction might allow a population to rid itself of sets of harmful genes more readily. Experiments to test these and other hypotheses are ongoing in many laboratories.

Reproductive Cycles and Patterns Most animals exhibit cycles in reproductive activity, often related to changing seasons. In this way, animals conserve resources, reproducing only when sufficient energy sources or stores are available and when environmental conditions favor the survival of offspring. For example, ewes (female sheep) have a reproductive cycle lasting 15-17 days. Ovulation, the release of mature eggs, occurs at the midpoint of each cycle. A ewe's cycles generally occur only during fall and early winter, and the length of any resulting pregnancy is five months. Thus, most lambs are born in the early spring, the time when their chances ofsurvival are optimal. Even in such relatively unvarying habitats as the tropics or the ocean, animals generally reproduce only at certain times of the year. Reproductive cycles are controlled by hormones, which in turn are regulated by environmental cues. Common environmental cues are changes in day length, seasonal temperature, rainfall, and lunar cycles. Animals may reproduce exclusively asexually or sexually, or they may alternate between the two modes. In aphids, rotifers, and water fleas (genus Daphnia), a female can produce eggs of m'o types. One type of egg requires fertilization to develop, but the other type does not and develops instead by parthenogenesis. In the case of Daphnia, the switch between sexual and asexual reproduction is often related to season. Asexual reproduction occurs when conditions are favorable, whereas sexual reproduction occurs during times of environmental stress. Several genera of fishes, amphibians, and reptiles reproduce exclusively by a complex form of parthenogenesis that involves the doubling of chromosomes after meiosis, producing diploid offspring. For example, about 15 species of whiptail lizards in the genus Aspidoscelis reproduce exclusively by parthenogenesis. There are no males in these species, but the lizards carry out courtship and mating behaviors typical of sexual species of the same genus. During the breeding season, one female ofeach mating pair mimics a male (Figure 46.4a). Each member of the pair alternates roles two or three times during the season (Figure 46.4b). An individual adopts female behavior prior to ovulation, when the level of the female sex hormone estradiol is high, then switches to male-like behavior after ovulation, when the level of progesterone is highest. Ovulation is more likely to occur if the individual is

mounted during the critical time of the hormone cycle; isolated liw.rds lay fewer eggs than those that go through the motions ofsex. Apparently, these parthenogenetic lizards evolved from species having two sexes and still require certain sexual stimuli for maximum reproductive success. Sexual reproduction that involves encounters between members of the opposite sex presents a problem for sessile (stationary) animals, such as barnacles; burrowing animals, such as clams; and some parasites, including tapeworms. One evolutionary solution to this problem is hermaphroditism, in which each individual has both male and female reproductive systems (the term hermapl/rodite is derived from the names Hermes and

Ca) Both lizards in this photograph are A. uniparens females. The one on top is playing the role of a male. Every two or thr~ weeks during the breeding season, individuals switch se~ roles.

~

•

">N 0"

t

I' I' •

t

•

t

Ovulation

8E_r "

,

o > ",

•

Time

,2>

,•

~

Female

m

Malelike

Female

Malelike

(b) The sexual behavior of A. uniparens is correlated with the cycle of ovulation mediated by se~ hormones, As the blood level of estradiol rises, the ovaries grow, and the lizard behaves as a female, After ovulation, the estradiol level drops abruptly, and the progesterone level nses; these hormone levels correlate with male-like behavior,

.. Figure 46.4 sexual behavior in parthenogenetic lizards. The desert-grassland whiptaillizard (Aspidoscelis uniparens) is an allfemale species. These reptiles reproduce by parthenogenesis, the development of an unfertilized egg, Nevertheless, ovulation is stimulated by mating behavior,

CHAPTE~ fOUY·SI~

Animal Reproduction

999

Aphrodite, a Greek god and goddess). Because each hermaphrodite reproduces as both a male and a female, any two individuals can mate. Each animal donates and receives sperm during mating, as the earthworms in Figure 46.1 are doing. In some species, hermaphrodites are also capable of self-fertilization. Another reproductive pattern involves sex reversal, in which an individual changes its sex during its lifetime. The bluehead wrasse (Thalassoma bifasciatum), a coral reef fish, provides a well-shldied example. These wrasses live in harems consisting of a single male and several females. When the male dies, the largest (and usually oldest) female in the harem becomes the new male. Within a week, the transformed individual is producing sperm instead of eggs. Because the male defends the harem against intruders, a larger size may be more important for males than females in ensuring successful reproduction. Certain oyster species provide an example of sex reversal from male to female. By reproducing as males and then later reversing sex, these oysters become female when their size is greatest. Since the number of gametes produced generally increases with size much more for females than for males, sex reversal in this direction maximizes gamete production. The result is enhanced reproductive success; Because oysters are sedentary animals and simply release their gametes into the surrounding water, more gametes result in more offspring. CONCEPT

CHECI(

46.1

1. Compare and contrast the outcomes of asexual and sexual reproduction. 2, Parthenogenesis is the most common form of asexual reproduction in animals that at other times reproduce sexually. What characteristic of parthenogenesis might explain this observation? 3. -'WUI 4 If a hermaphrodite self-fertilizes, will the offspring be identical to the parent? Explain.

A moist habitat is almost always required for external fertilization, both to prevent the gametes from drying out and to allow the sperm to swim to the eggs. Many aquatic invertebrates simply shed their eggs and sperm into the surroundings, and fertilization occurs without the parents making physical contact. However, timing is crucial to ensure that mature sperm and eggs encounter one another. Among some species with external fertilization, individuals clustered in the same area release their gametes into the water at the same time, a process known as spawning. In some cases, chemical signals that one individual generates in releasing gametes trigger others to release gametes. In other cases, environmental cues, such as temperature or day length, cause a whole population to release gametes at one time. For example, the paloloworm, native to coral reefs ofthe South Pacific, times its spawn to both the season and the lunar cycle. In October or November, when the moon is in its last quarter, palolo worms break in half, releasing tail segments engorged with sperm or eggs. These packets rise to the ocean surface and burst in such vast numbers that the sea surface turns milky with gametes. The sperm quickly fertilize the floating eggs, and within hours, the palolo's once-a-year reproductive frenzy is complete. \Xfhen external fertilization is not synchronous across a population, individuals may exhibit specific mating behaviors leading to the fertilization of the eggs of one female by one male (Figure 46.5). Such "courtship" behavior has two important benefits: It allows mate selection (see Chapter 23) and, by triggering the release of both sperm and eggs, increases the probability of successful fertilization. Internal fertilization is an adaptation that enables sperm to reach an egg efficiently, even when the environment is dry. It typically requires cooperative behavior that leads to copulation,

For suggested answers. see Appendix A

r;:~~~I~::i:~d~pends on

mechanisms that bring together sperm and eggs of the same species

Fertilization-the union ofsperm and egg-can be either external or internal. In species with external fertilization, the female releases eggs into the environment, where the male then fertilizes them. Other species have internal fertilization: Sperm are deposited in or near the female reproductive tract, and fertilization occurs within the tract. (We'll discuss the cellular and molecular details of fertilization in Chapter 47.) WOO

U"IT SEVE"


.... Figure 46.5 External fertilization. Many amphibians reproduce by eKternal fertilization, In most species. behavioral adaptations ensure that a male is present when the female releases eggs, Here, a female frog (on bonom) has released a mass of eggs in response to being clasped by a male. The male released sperm (not visible) at the same time, and external fertilization has already occurred in the water,

as well as sophisticated and compatible reproductive systems. Male copulatory organs deliver sperm, and the female reproductive tract often has re<eptacles for storage and delivery of sperm to mature eggs. No matter how fertilization occurs, the mating animals may make use of pheromones, chemicals released by one organism that can influence the physiology and behavior of other individuals of the same species (see Chapter 45). Pheromones are small, volatile or water-soluble molecules that disperse into the environment and, like hormones, are active in tiny amounts. Many pheromones function as mate attractants, enabling some female insects to be detected by males from as far as a mile away. (We will discuss mating behavior and pheromones further in Chapter 51.)

Ensuring the Survival of Offspring All speCnis. ... Human Sexual Response Both males and females experience the erection of certain body tissues due to vasocongestion and myotonia, culminating in orgasm.

-tiNt,. MP3 Tutor Thr Frm.lr Rrproductiyr Cycle Activity Reproductivr Sy>trm oflhr Hum.n Femalr Acti,ity Reproductive System of the Hum.n M.le Innstill"lion Wh.t Might Ob,truct thr M.le Urethra?

... Sexual Reproduction: An Evolutionary Enigma Facilitating selection for or against scts of genes may explain why sexual reproduction is widespread among animal species. ... Reproductive Cycles and Patterns Most animals reproduce exclusively sexually or asexually; but some alternate between the two. Variations on these two modes are made possible through parthenogenesis, hermaphroditism, and sex reversal. Hormones and environmental cues control reproductive cycles.

. 4 li'4j'_

46.2

Fertilization depends on mechanisms that bring together sperm and eggs of the same species (pp. 1000-1003)

•••,••".46.4 The timing and pattern of meiosis in mammals differ for males and females (p. 1007) ... Gametogenesis, or gamete production, consists of oogenesis in females and spermatogenesis in males. Sperm develop continuouslr, whereas oocyte maturation is discontinuous and eydic. Meiosis generates one large egg in oogenesis, but four sperm in spermatogenesis. Gametogenesis

... In external fertilization, sperm fertilize eggs shed into the external environment. In internal fertilization, egg and sperm unite within the female's body. In either case, fertilization requires coordinated timing, which may be mediated byenvironmental cues, pheromones, or courtship behavior, Internal fertilization requires behavioral interactions between males and females, as well as compatible copulatory organs. ... Ensuring the Survival of Offspring The production of relatively few offspring by internal fertilization is often associated with greater protection of embryos and parental care. ... Gamete Production and Delivery Reproductive s~'Stems range from undifferentiated cells in the body cavity that produce gametes to complex assemblages of male and female gonads with accessory tubes and glands that carry and protect gametes and developing embryos. Although sexual reproduction involves a partnership, it also provides an opportunity for competition between individuals and between gametes.

•

4.lilij,_

46.3

Reproductive organs produce and transport gametes (pp. 1003-1007) ... FC'male RC'productive Anatomy Externally, the human female has the labia majora, labia minora, and clitoris, which form the vulva surrounding the openings of the vagina and urethra. Internally, the vagina is connected to the uterus, which connects to two oviducts. Two ovaries (female gonads) are stocked with follicles containing oocytes. After ovulation, the remnant of the follicle forms a corpus luteum, which secretes hormones for a variable duration, depending on whether pregnancy occurs. Although separate from the reproductive system, the mammary glands evolved in association with parental care. CHAPHR FORTY_SIX

Animal Reproduction

1019

••.Iilil,_ 46.5

b. The endometrial lining is shed in menstrual cycles but reabsorbed in estrous cycles. c. Estrous cycles occur more often than menstrual cycles. d. Estrous cycles are not controlled by hormones. e. Ovulation occurs before the endometrium thickens in estrous cycles.

The interplay of tropic and sex hormones regulates mammalian reproduction (pp. 1007-1012) .. Hormonal (antral of the Male Reproductive System Androgens (chieny testosterone) from the testes cause the development of primary and secondary sex characteristics in the male. Androgen secretion and sperm production are both controlled by hypothalamic and pituitary hormones. ... The Reproductive Cycles of Females Cyclic secretion of GnRH from the hypothalamus and ofFSH and LH from the anterior pituitary orchestrate the female reproductive cycle. FSH and LH bring about changes in the ovary and uterus via estrogens. primarily estradiol, and progesterone. The developing follicle produces estradiol. and the corpus luteum secretes progesterone and estradiol. Positive and negative feedback regulate hormone levels and coordinate the cycle. Estrous cycles differ from menstrual C)'c1es in that the endometriallining is reabsorbed rather than shed and in the limitation of sexual receptivity to a heat period.

.'.Iili"_ 46.6 In placental mammals, an embryo develops fully within the mother's uterus (pp. 1012-1018) ... Conception, Embryonic Development, and Birth Afterfertilization and the completion of meiosis in the oviduct, the zygote undergoes cleavage and devclops into a blastocyst before implantation in the endometrium. Human pregnancy can be divided into three trimesters. All major organs start deveklping by 8 ...."eeks. Positive feedback involving prostaglandins and the hormones estradiol and oxytocin regulates labor. ... Maternal Immune Tolerance of the Embryo and Fetus A pregnant woman's acceptance of her "foreign" offspring likely reflects partial suppression of the maternal immune response. ... Contraception and Aborlion Contraceptive methods may prevent release of mature gametes from the gonads, fertilization, or implantation of the embryo. ... Modern Reproductive Technologies Available technologies can help detect problems before birth and assist infertile couples by hormonal methods or in vitro fertilization. TESTING YOUR KNOWLEDGE

SELF-QUIZ l. Which ofthe following characterizes parthenogenesis?

a. b. c. d. e.

An individual may change its sex during its lifetime. Specialized groups of cells grow into new individuals. An organism is first a male and then a female. An egg develops without being fertilized. Both mates have male and female reproductive organs.

2. In male mammals, excretory and reproductive systems share

a. the testes. b. the urethra. c. the seminal vesicle.

d. the vas deferens. e. the prostate.

3. Which of the following is not properly paired? a. seminiferous tubule-cervix d. labia majora-scrotum b. Sertoli cells-follicle cells e. vas deferens-oviduct c. testosterone-estradiol 4. Which of the following is a true statement?

a. All mammals have menstrual C}"c1es. 1020

UNIT

nvu

Animal Fonn and Function

5. Peaks ofLH and FSH production occur during a. the menstrual !low phase of the uterine cycle. b. the beginning of the follicular phase of the ovarian cycle. c. the period just before ovulation. d. the end of the luteal phase of the ovarian cyde. e. the secretory phase of the menstrual cycle.

6. For which of the following is the number the same in spermatogenesis and oogenesis? a. interruptions in meiotic divisions b. functional gametes produced by meiosis c. meiotic divisions required to produce each gamete d. gametes produced in a given time period e. different cell types produced by meiosis 7. During human gestation, rudiments of all organs develop

a. b. c. d. e.

in the first trimester. in the serond trimester. in the third trimester. while the embl')'O is in the oviduct. during the blastocyst stage.

8. Which statement about human reproduction is false? a. Fertilization occurs in the oviduct. b. Effective hormonal contraceptives are currently available only for females. c. An oocyte completes meiosis after a sperm penetrates it. d. The earliest stages of spermatogenesis occur dosest to the lumen of the seminiferous tubules. e. Spem1atogenesis and oogenesis require different temperatures. 9.

"UW"I In human spermatogenesis. mitosis of a stem cell gives rise to one cell that remains a stem cell and one cell that becomes a spermatogonium. (a) Draw four rounds of mitosis for a stem cell. and label the daughter cells. (b) For one spermatogonium, draw the cells it would produce from one round of mitosis followed by meiosis. Label the cells, and label mitosis and meiosis. (c) What would happen if stem cells divided like spermatogonia?

For &1f-Qllh dnSwtrl, Ut Apptnd;x A.

-SiN·it. VISit the Study Area at _.masteringbio.com for a PractICe Test.

EVOLUTION CONNECTION 10. Hermaphroditism is often found in animals that are fixed to a surface. Motile species are less often hennaphroditk. Why?

SCIENTIFIC INQUIRY II. You discO\-er a new egg-laying ....u rm species. You dissect four adults and find both oocytes and sperm in each. Cells outside the gonad amtain five chromosome pairs. Lading genetic variants. how would}'OU determine whether the ....urms can seIf·fertilize?

Ani De elo KEY

CONCEPTS

.... Figure 47.1 How did this complex embryo form from a single cell?

47.1 After fertilization, embryonic development

proceeds through cleavage, gastrulation, and organogenesis 47.2 Morphogenesis in animals involves specific changes in cell shape, position, and adhesion 47.3 The developmental fate of cells depends on their history and on inductive signals

footsteps could see that embryos took shape in a series of progressive stages, and epigenesis displaced preformation as the favored explanation among embryologists. An organism's development is orchestrated by a genetic program involving not only the genome of the zygote but also molecules placed into the egg by the mother. These molecules, which include proteins and RNAs, are called cytoplasmic determinants. As the zygote divides, differences arise between early embryonic cells due to the uneven distribution of cytoplasmic determinants and to signals from neighboring cells. These differences set the stage for distinct he 7-week-old human embryo in Figure 47.1 programs of gene expression to be carried out in each cell and its descendants. As cell division continues has already achieved an astounding number of milestones in its development. Many of its during embryonic development, the specific pattern organs are in place: Its digestive tract traverses the of gene expression in particular cells sends them down length of its body, and its heart (the red spot in the cenunique paths toward their ultimate fates in the fully formed organism. This process of cell specialization in ter) is pulsating. Its brain is forming at the upper left, and the blocks of tissue that will construct the vertebrae are structure and function is called cell differentiation. Along lined up along its back. How did this intricately detailed emwith cell division and differentiation, development involves bryo develop from a single-celled zygote no bigger than the morphogenesis, the process by which an organism takes period at the end of the previous sentence? shape and the differentiated cells occupy their appropriate The question of how a zygote becomes an animal has inlocations. trigued scientists for centuries. In the I700s, the prevailing noBy combining molecular genetics with classical approaches to embryology, developmental biologists have learned a great tion was preformation: the idea that the egg or sperm contains an embryo-a preformed, miniature infant, or ~homunculus~ deal about the transformation ofa fertilized egg into an animal that simply becomes larger during development (Figure 47.2). with multiple tissues and organs. Because animals display a wide variety of body plans, it is not surprising that embryonic The competing explanation of embryonic development was development occurs by different schemes. Studies of numerepigenesis: the idea that the form of an animal emerges graduous species, however, have revealed that animals share many ally from a relatively formless egg. Epigenesis was originally basic mechanisms of development and use a comproposed 2,000 years earlier by Aristotle, who had .... Figure 47.2 A mon genetic toolkit. snipped open a window in the shell of a chicken egg and observed the developing embryo daily during its "homunculus"' inside In Chapter 18, we described the development of the head of a human three-week incubation. As microscopy improved sperm. This engraving the fruit fly (Drosophila melanogaster). Drosophila during the 1800s, biologists follOWing in Aristotle's was made in 1694, is well suited to genetic analysis because mutants

T

1021

are easy to obtain in this species, so its genetic program is probably the best understood ofany animal. Drosophila is a good example of a model organism, a species that lends itself to the study ofa particular question, is representative ofa larger group, and is easy to grow in the lab. In this chapter, we will concentrate mainly on model organisms that have been the subject of classical embryological studies as well as more recent molecular analyses: the sea urchin, the frog, the chick, and the nematode Caenorhabditis elegans. We will also explore some aspects of human embryonic development; even though humans are not model organisms, we are, of course, intensely interested in our own species. We will begin with a description ofthe basic stages ofembryonic development common to most animals. Then we will look at the cellular and molecular mechanisms that result in generation of the body form. Finally, we will consider the process by which embryonic cells travel down differentiation pathways that enable them to play their roles in a fully functional animal.

rZ;~::j;e7t~~~~on,

embryonic development proceeds through cleavage, ga~trulation, and organogenesIs

Important processes regulating development occur during fertilization and the three stages that begin to build the body of most animals. During the first stage, called cleavage, cell division creates a hollow ball of cells, the blastula, from the zygote. The second stage, gastrulation, rearranges the blastula into a three·layered embryo, the gastrula. During the third stage, organogenesis, interactions and movements of the three layers generate rudimentary organs from which adult structures grow. In our discussion, we will focuson afew species that have been used to investigate each ofthese processes. For each stage ofdevelopment, we first consider the species about which the most is known and then compare the same process in other species. We begin by looking at the fertilization ofan egg by a sperm.

Fertilization A complex series of developmental events in the gonads of the parents produces sperm and eggs (gametes), the highly specialized cen types that unite during fertilization (see Figure 46.12). The main function offertilization is the combining of haploid sets of chromosomes from two individuals into a single diploid cell, the zygote. Contact of the sperm with the egg's surface also initiates metabolic reactions within the egg that trigger the onset of embryonic development, thus "activating" the egg. Fertilization has been studied most extensively in sea urchins. Their gametes can simply be combined in seawater in the lab· 1022

UNIT SEVEN


oratory, and subsequent events are easily observed. Although sea urchins (members of phylum Echinodermata) are not vertebrates or even chordates, they share with those two groups the characteristic of deuterostome development (see Figure 32.9). Despite differences in the details, fertilization and early development in sea urchins provide good general models for similar events in vertebrates.

The Acrosomal Reaction The eggs of sea urchins are fertilized externally after the animals release their gametes into the surrounding seawater. The jelly coat that surrounds the egg exudes soluble molecules that attract the sperm, which swim toward the egg. \'(fhen the head of a sea urchin sperm contacts the jelly coat of a sea urchin egg, molecules in the egg's coat trigger the acrosomal reaction in the sperm (Figure 47.3). This reaction begins when a specialized vesicle at the tip of the sperm, called the acrosome, discharges hydrolytic enzymes. These enzymes digest the jelly coat, enabling a sperm structure called the acrosomal process to elongate, penetrating the coat. Molecules of a protein on the tip of the acrosomal process then adhere to specific sperm receptor proteins that extend from the egg plasma membrane through the surrounding meshwork of extracellular matrix, called the vitelline layer. In sea urchins and many other animals, this "Iock-and-ke( recognition of molecules ensures that eggs will be fertilized only by sperm of the same species. Such specificity is especially important when fertilization occurs externally in water, which may be teeming with gametes of other species. Contact of the tip of the acrosomal process with the egg membrane leads to the fusion of sperm and egg plasma membranes. The sperm nucleus then enters the egg cytoplasm. Contact and fusion of the membranes causes ion channels to open in the egg's plasma membrane, allowing sodium ions to flow into the egg and change the membrane potential (see Chapter 7). This change in membrane potential, called depolarization, is a common feature of fertilization in animals. Occurring within about 1-3 seconds after asperm binds to an egg, depolarization prevents additional sperm from fusing with the egg's plasma membrane. Without this fast block to polyspermy, multiple sperm could fertilize the egg, resulting in an aberrant number of chromosomes in the zygote.

The Cortical Reaction The membrane depolarization lasts for only a minute or so, thus blocking polyspermy only in the short term. However, fusion of the egg and sperm plasma membranes also triggers a series of changes in the egg that cause a longer-lasting block. Key players in the longer-lasting block are numerous vesicles Iyingjust beneath the egg plasma membrane, in the rim of cytoplasm known as the cortex. Within seconds after a sperm binds to the egg, these vesicles, called cortical granules, fuse

e

o

Contact. The sperm contacts the egg's jelly coat, triggering exocytosis of the sperm's acrosome.

Acrosomal reaction. Hydrolytic enzymes released from the acrosome make a hole in the jelly coat. Growing actin filaments form the acrosomal process, which protrudes from the sperm head and penetrates the jelly coat. Proteins on the surface of the acrosomal process bind to receptors in the egg plasma membrane.

f) Contact and fusion of sperm and egg membranes. Fusion triggers depolarization of the membrane, which acts as a fast block to polyspermy.

o

Cortical reaction. Cortical granules in the egg fuse with the plasma membrane. The secreted contents clip off sperm-binding receptors and cause the fertilization envelope to form. This acts as a slow block to polyspermy.

Sperm plasma membrane

onucleus. Entry of sperm

Fertilization envelope

Sperm-binding ~o::::::::j~ receptors

EGG CYTOPLASM

... Figure 47.3 The acrosomal and cortical reactions during sea urchin fertilization. The events following contact of a single Spel"m and egg ensure that the nucleus of only one sperm enters the egg cytoplasm. The icon at left is asJmplified drawing of an adult sea urchin. Throughout the chapter, this and other icons of an adult frog. chicken, and human indicate the animals whose embryos are featured in certain figures.

with the egg plasma membrane, initiating the cortical reaction (see Figure 47.3, step 4). Cortical granules contain a treasure trove of molecules that are now secreted into the perivitelline space, which lies between the plasma membrane and the vitelline layer. The secreted enzymes and other macromolecules together push the vitelline layer away from the egg and harden the layer, forming a protective fertilization envelope that resists the entry of additional sperm nuclei. Another enzyme clips offand releases the external portions ofthe remaining receptor proteins, along with any attached sperm. The fertilization envelope and other changes in the egg's surface function together as a longer-term slow block to polyspermy. Experimental evidence. including the results described in Figure 47,4 on the next page, indicates that a high concentration of calcium ions (Ca2+) in the egg is essential for the cortical reaction to occur. Sperm binding activates a signal transduction pathway that causes Ca2+ to be released from the egg's endoplasmic reticulum into the cytosol (see Figure 11.12). The elevated Ca2+ levels then cause cortical granules to fuse with the plasma membrane. Although understood in greatest detail in sea urchins, the cortical reaction triggered by Ca 2 + also occurs in vertebrates such as fishes and mammals.

Activation of the Egg Another outcome of the sharp rise in ea2+ concentration in the egg's cytosol is a substantial increase in the rates ofceUular respiration and protein synthesis by the egg, known as egg actimlion. Although egg activation is normally triggered by the binding and fusion of sperm, the unfertilized eggs of many species can be artificially activated by the injection of Ca2+ or by various mildly injurious treatments, such as temperature shock. Artificial activation switches on the metabolic responses of the egg and causes it to begin developing by parthenogenesis (without fertilization by a sperm; see Glapter 46). It is even possible to artificially activate an egg that has had its own nucleus removed. This finding shows that proteins and mRNAs present in the cytoplasm of the unfertilized egg are sufficient for egg activation. About 20 minutes after it enters the egg, the sperm nucleus merges with the egg nucleus, creating the diploid nucleus of the zygote. DNA synthesis begins, and the first cell division occurs after about 90 minutes in the case of sea urchins and some frogs, marking the end of the fertilization stage. Fertilization in other species shares many features with the process in sea urchins. However, the timing of events differs CIiAPTER fORTY·SEVEN

Animal Development

1023

·

among species, as does the stage of meiosis the egg has reached by the time it is fertilized. When they are released from the female, sea urchin eggs have completed meiosis. In other spefII dfld Inrlocrion, Yale UniveMy Press, New Haven (1938).

In a similar experiment 40 years earlier. embryologist Hans Roux allowed the first cleavage to occur and then used a needle to kill just one blastomere. The embryo that developed from the remaining blastomere (plus remnants of the dead cell) was abnormal, resembling a half-embryo. Propose a hypothesis to explain why Roux's result differed from the control result in Spemann's experiment.

receiving different cytoplasmic determinants. However, even in species that have cytoplasmic determinants, the first cleavage may occur along an axis that produces two identical blastomeres, which then have equal developmental potential. This occurs in amphibians, for instance, as demonstrated in 1938 in an experiment by German zoologist Hans Spemann (Figure 47.23). Thus, the fates of embryonic cells can be affected not only by the distribution of cytoplasmic determinants but also by how this distribution relates to the zygote's characteristic pattern of cleavage. In contrast with the embryonic cells of many other animals, the cells of mammalian embryos remain totipotent until the 16-cell stage, when their location determines whether they will give rise to cells of the trophoblast or of the inner cell mass of the blastocyst, thus establishing their ultimate fates. Through the 8-cell stage, the blastomeres of a mammalian embryo all look alike, and each can form a complete embryo if isolated. Researchers have taken this as evidence that the early blastomeres of mammals probably receive equivalent amounts of cytoplasmic components from the egg. Recent work, however, suggests that the very early cells (even the first two) are not actually equivalent in a normal embryo, and their ability to form a complete embryo if isolated shows that they may be able to regulate their fate, depending on their environment. The jury is still out on this matter, which is an area ofgreat interest to researchers. Regardless of how similar or different early embryonic cells are in a particular species, the progressive restriction ofdevelopmental potential is a general feature of development in all animals. In some species, the cells of the early gastrula retain the capacity to give rise to more than one kind of cell, though they have lost their totipotency. If left alone, the dorsal ectoderm of an early amphibian gastrula will develop into a neural plate above the notochord. And if the dorsal ectoderm is experimentally replaced with ectoderm from some other location in the same gastrula, the transplanted tissue will form a neural plate. But if the same experiment is performed on a late-stage gastrula, the transplanted ectoderm will not respond to its new environment and will not form a neural plate. In general, the tissue-specific fates of cells in a late gastrula are fixed. Even when they are manipulated experimentally, these cells usually give rise to the same types of cells as in the normal embryo, indicating that their fate is already determined.

Cen Fate Determination and Pattern Formation by Inductive Signals Once embryonic cell division creates cells that differ from each other, the cells begin to influence each other's fates by induction. At the molecular level, the response to an inductive signal is usually to switch on a set of genes that make the receiving cells differentiate into a specific tissue. Here we examine two examples of induction, an essential process in the development of many tissues in most animals.

The NOrganizerN of Spemann and Mangold The importance of induction during development of amphibians was dramatically demonstrated in transplantation experiments performed by Hans Spemann and his student Hilde Mangold in the 1920s. Basedon the results oftheir most famous experiment, summarized in Figure 47.24, they concluded that

• £ltN!! .7.K

In ui

Can the dorsal lip of the blastopore induce cells in another part of the amphibian embryo to change their developmental fate? EXPERIMENT In 1924, Hans Spernann and Hilde Mangold, at the University of Freiburg-im·Breisgau in Germany. transplanted a piece of the dorsal lip from Dorsal lip of a pigmented newt blastopore gastrula to the veI1tral side of a nonpigmented newt gastrula to investigate the inductive ability of the dorsal lip, Cross sections of the gastrulae are shO'M1 here.

Pigmented gastrula (donor embryo) Nonpigmented gastrula (recipient embryo)

RESULTS The recipient embryo formed a second notochord and neural tube in the region of the transplant. and eventually most 01 a second embryo developed, Examination of the interior of the double embryo revealed that the secondary structures were formed partly, but not wholly, from recipient tissue, Primary embryo

\

-

~SeCOndary/ (induced) embryo

Primary structures: ::::S:-Neural tube Notochord Secondary structures:

,,:;:~=Notochord (pigmented cells) Neural tube (mostly nonpigmented cells) CONCLUSiON The transplanted dorsal lip was able to induce cells in a different region of the recipient to form structures different from their normal fate. In effect the transplanted dorsal lip "organized" the later development of an entire extra embryo. SOURCE H. Spemann and H. Mangold. Indl,lClIOn of embryonoc pnmordia by Implanlauon of organizers from a different species, Trans. v, Hamburger (t924) Repnnled m Inlefn.l11Ofl-----ociation

.. Figure 49.15 The human cerebral cortex. Each side of the cerebral corteK is divided into four lobes, and each lobe has specialized functions. Some of the association areas on the left side of the brain (shown here) have different fundions from those on the right side (not shown).

ar~a

Auditory aSSoCiation area

Temporal lobe

Qtcipitallobe

CHAPTER FORTY·"INE

Nervous Systems

1075

Partetallobe

T"" T~th

Gums J""

Tongue

Tongue

Pharynx Primary

Primary motor cortex

somatosensory cortex

• Figure 49.16 Body part representation in the primary motor and primary

somatosensory cortices. In these cross-sectional maps of the cortices, the cortICal surface area devoted 10 each body part is represented by the

relati~e

size of that part in the cartoons.

motor commands (Figure 49.16). For example, neurons that

process sensory information from the legs and feet are located in the region of the somatosensory cortex that lies closest to the midline. Neurons that control muscles in the legs and feet are located in the corresponding region of the motor cortex. Notice in Figure 49.16 thallhe cortical surface area devoted to each body part is not proportional to the size of the part. In-

stead, surface area correlates with the extent of neuronal control needed for muscles in a particular body part (for the motor cortex) or with the number ofsensory neurons that extend axons to that part (for the somatosensory cortex). Thus, the surface area of the motor cortex devoted to the face is much larger than that devoted to the trunk, renecting in large part how extensively facial muscles are involved in communication.

Language and Speech The mapping of higher cognitive functions to specific brain areas began in the lSOOs when physidans learned that damage to particular regions of the cortex by injuries, strokes, or tumors can produce distinctive changes in a person's behavior. The 1076

UNIT nyu

Animal Fonn and Function

French physician Pierre Broca conducted postmortem (after death) examinations of patients who had been able to understand language but unable to speak. He discovered that many of these patients had defects in a small region ofthe left frontal lobe. That region, now known as Broca's area, is located in frontofthe part ofthe primary motor cortex that controls muscles in the face. The German physician Karl Wernicke also conducted examinations and found that damage to a posterior portion of the left temporal lobe, now called Wernicke's area, abolished the ability to comprehend speech but not the ability to speak. Over a century later, studies of brain activity using (MRI and positron-emission tomography (PET; see Otapter 2) have confirmed that Broca's area is acti\'e during speech generation (Figure 49.17, lower left image) and. Wernicke's area is active when speech is heard (Figure 49.17, upper left image). Broca's area and Wemicke's area are part of a much larger network of brain regions involved in language. Reading a printed word without speaking activates the visual cortex (Figure 49.17, upper right image), whereas reading a printed word out loud activates both the visual cortex and Broca's area.

The two hemispheres normally work together harmoniously, trading information back and forth through the fibers ofthe cor· pus callosum. The importance ofthis exchange is revealed in patients whose corpus callosum has been surgically severed. As with removal ofa cerebral hemisphere, this procedure is a treatment of last resort for the most extreme forms of epilepsy. Individuals with a severed corpus callosum exhibit a Usplit-brain" effect. When they see a familiar word in their left field ofvision, they cannot read the word: The sensory information that travels from the left field of vision to the right hemisphere cannot reach the language centers in the left hemisphere. Each hemisphere in such patients functions independently ofthe other.

Emotions ... Figure 49.17 Mapping language areas in the cerebral cortex. These PET images show regions with different activity levels in one person's brain during four activities, all related to speech,

Frontal and temporal areas become active when meaning must be attached to words, such as when a person generates verbs to gowith nouns or groups related words or concepts (Figure49.17, lower right image).

Lateralization of Cortical Function

The generation and experience of emotions involve many regions of the brain. One such region, shown in Figure 49.18, contains the limbic system (from the Latin limbus, border), a group of structures surrounding the brainstem in mammals. The limbic system, which includes the amygdala, the hippocampus, and parts ofthe thalamus, is not dedicated to a single function. Instead, structures within the limbic system have diverse functions, including emotion, motivation, olfaction, behavior, and memory. Furthermore, parts of the brain outside the limbic system also participate in generating and experiencing emotion. For example, emotions that manifest themselves in behaviors such as laughing and crying involve an interaction of parts ofthe limbic system with sensory areas of the cerebrum. Structures in the forebrain also attach emotional "feelings" to basic, survival-related functions controlled by the brainstem, including aggression, feeding, and sexuality. Emotional experiences are often stored as memories that can be n~called by similar circumstances. In the case of fear, emotional memory is stored separately from the memory system that supports explicit recall of events. The focus of emotional

Although each cerebral hemisphere in humans has sensory and motor connections to the opposite side of the body, the rn'o hemispheres do not have identical functions. For example, the left side ofthe cerebrum has a dominant role with regard to language, as reflected in the location of both Broca's area and Wernicke's area in the left hemisphere. There are also subtler distinctions in the functions of the two hemispheres. For example, the left hemisphere is more adept at math and logical operations. In contrast, the right hemisphere appears to be dominant in the recognition of faces and patterns, spatial relations, and nonverbal Hypothalamus thinking. The establishment ofthese differences in hemisphere function in humans is called lateralization. At least some lateralization relates to handedness, the preference for using one hand for certain motor activities. Across human populations, roughly 90% ofindividuals are more skilled with their right hand than with their left hand. Studies using fMRI have revealed how language processing differs in relation to handedness. \Vhen subjects thought of words Olfactory without speaking out loud, brain activity bulb was localized to the left hemisphere in Amygdala 96% of right-handed subjects but in only 76% ofleft-handed subjects. ... Figure 49.18 The limbic system.

CHAPTER FORTY·"INE

Nervous Systems

1077

memory is the amygdala, which is located in the temporal lobe (see Figure 49.18). To study the function ofthe human amygdala, researchers sometimes present adult subjects with an image, followed by an unpleasantexperience, such as a mild electrical shock. After several trials, study participants experience autonomic arousal-as measured by increased heart rate or sweating-if they see the image again. People with brain damage confined to the amygdala can recall the image, because their explicit memory is intact, but do not exhibit autonomic arousal. The prefrontal cortex, a part of the frontal lobes critical for emotional experience, is also important in temperament and decision making. This combination of functions was discovered in 1848 from the remarkable medical case of Phineas Gage. Gage was working on a railroad construction site when an explosion drove a meter-long iron rod through his head. The rod, which was more than 3 cm in diameter at one end, entered his skull just below his left eye and exited through the top of his head, damaging large portions of his frontal lobe. Astonishingly, Gage recovered, but his personality changed dramatically. He became emotionally detached, impatient, and erratic in his behavior. Tumors that develop in the frontal lobe sometimes cause the same combination of symptoms that Gage experienced. Intellect and memory seem intact, but decision making is flawed and emotional responses are diminished. In the 20th century, the same problems were also observed as a consequence of frontal lobotomy, a surgical procedure that severs the connection between the prefrontal cortex and the limbic system. Once a common treatment for severe behavioral disorders, frontal lobotomy later was abandoned as a medical practice. Behavioral disorders are now typically treated with medications, as discussed later in this chapter.

Consciousness The study of human consciousness was long considered outside the province of science, more appropriate as a subject for philosophy or religion. One reason for this view is that consciousness is both broad-encompassing our awareness of ourselves and our experiences-and subjective. Over the past few decades, however, neuroscientists have begun studying consciousness using brain-imaging teo:lol;;..:U:~ ' ........... visual cortex

.. Figure 50.24 Neural pathways for vision. Each optic nerve contains about a million axons that synapse with Interneurons In the lateral geniculate nuclei. The nuclei relay sensations to the primary visual cortex, one of many brain centers that cooperate in construding our visual perceptions.

what we actually "see." Determining how these centers integrate such components of our vision as color, motion, depth, shape, and detail is the focus of much exciting research.

Evolution of Visual Perception Despite their diversity, all photoreceptors contain similar pigment molecules that absorb light. Furthermore, animals as diverse as flatworms, annelids, arthropods, and vertebrates share genes associated with the embryonic development of photoreceptors. Thus, the genetic underpinnings ofan photoreceptors likely evolved in the earliest bilateral animals. Recent research indicates that there are other photoreceptors in the vertebrate retina in addition to rods and cones. In particular, a visual pigment called melanopsin is found in retinal ganglion cells. Inactivating the melanopsin gene in

r;~:';~;i~~·i~teraction of

protein filaments is required for muscle function

Throughout our discussions of sensory mechanisms, we have seen how sensory inputs to the nervous system result in specific behaviors: the escape maneuver of a moth that detects a bat's sonar, the upside-down swimming of a crayfish with manipulated statocysts, the feeding movements of a hydra when it tastes glutathione, and the movement of planarians away from light. Underlying the diverse forms of behavior in animals are common fundamental mechanisms. Flying, swimming, eating, and crawling all require muscle activity in response to nervous system input. Muscle cell function relies on microfilaments, which are the actin components of the cytoskeleton. Recall from Chapter 6 that microfilaments, like microtubules, function in cell motility. In muscles, microfilament movement powered by chemical energy brings about contraction; muscle extension occurs only passively. To understand how microfilaments contribute to muscle contraction, we must analyze the structure of muscles and muscle fibers. We will begin by examining vertebrate skeletal muscle and then turn our attention to other types of muscle.

Vertebrate Skeletal Muscle Vertebrate skeletal muscle, which is attached to the bones and is responsible for their movement, is characterized by a

CHfJ,PTER fifTY

Sensory and Motor Mechanisms

1105

hierarchy of smaller and smaller units (Figure 50.25). Most skeletal muscles consist of a bundle of long fibers running parallel to the length of the muscle. Each fiber is a single cell with multiple nuclei, reflecting its formation by the fusion of many embryonic cells. A muscle fiber contains a bundle of smaller myofibrils arranged longitudinally. The myofibrils, in turn, are composed of thin filaments and thick filaments. Thin filaments consist of rn'o strands of actin and rn'o strands of a regulatory protein (not shown here) coiled

Muscle

around one another. Thick filaments are staggered arrays of myosin molecules. Skeletal muscle is also called striated muscle because the regular arrangement of the filaments creates a pattern of light and dark bands. Each repeating unit is a sarcomere, the basic contractile unit of the muscle. The borders of the sarcomere are lined up in adjacent myofibrils and contribute to the striations visible with a light microscope. Thin filaments are attached at the Z lines and project toward the center of the sarcomere, while thick filaments are attached at the M lines centered in the sarcomere. In a muscle fiber at rest, thick and thin filaments only partially overlap. Near the edge of the sarcomere are only thin filaments, whereas the zone in the center contains only thick filaments. This arrangement is the key to how the sarcomere, and hence the whole muscle, contracts.

The Sliding-Filament Model of Muscle Contraction Bundle 0 1 - - - muscle libers

"'~c-/Nuclei Single muscle l i b e r - - - - - - - - - - j (cell) Plasma membrane Myofibril Z line

TEM

....- -

M line

'~M

~ ~

,~

~

Thick filam (myo sin) Thin filam (aeti 0)

Zh 0 e

----Sarcomere

.... Figure 50.25 The structure of skeletal muscle. 1106

U"IT SEVE"


~

.."

·1

Zhne

We can explain much of what happens during contraction of a whole muscle by focusing on a single sarcomere (Figure 50.26). According to the sliding-filament model of muscle contraction, neither the thin filaments nor the thick filaments change in length when the sarcomere shortens; rather, the filaments slide past each other longitudinally, increasing the overlap of the thin and thick filaments. The sliding of the filaments is based on the interaction between the actin and myosin molecules that make up the thick and thin filaments. Each myosin molecule consists of a long n "tail" region and a globular "head region extending to the side. The tail adheres to the tails of other myosin molecules that form the thick filament. The head is the center of bioenergetic reactions that power muscle contractions. It can bind ATP and hydrolyze it into ADP and inorganic phosphate. As shown in Figure 50.27, hydrolysis of ATP converts myosin to a high-energy form that can bind to actin, form a cross-bridge, and pull the thin filament toward the center of the sarcomere. TIle cross-bridge is broken when a new molecule ofATP binds to the myosin head. In a repeating cycle, the free head cleaves the new ATP and attaches to a new binding site on another actin molecule farther along the thin filament. Each ofthe approximately 350 heads ofa thick filament forms and reforms about five cross-bridges per second, driving filaments past each other. A typical muscle fiber at rest contains only enough ATP for a few contractions. The energy needed for repetitive contractions is stored in two other compounds: creatine phosphate and glycogen. Creatine phosphate can transfer a phosphate group to ADP to synthesize additional ATP. The resting supply ofcreatine phosphate is sufficient to sustain contractions for about 15 seconds. Glycogen is broken down to glucose, which can be used to generate ATP by either aerobic respiration or glycolysis (and lactic acid fermentation; see Chapter 9). Using the glucose

.. Figure 50.26 The sliding-filament model of muscle contraction. The drawings on the left show that the lengths of the thick (myosin) filaments (purple) and thin (actin) filaments (orange) remain the same as a muscle fiber contracts,

Sarcomere

Z Relaxed muscle

3

Contracting muscle

• •

E ,

, -Contracted , Sarcomere

r

~

• "

,-

• •

--

Fully contracted muscle

Z

M

Ck filament

,

~"l!-.

~

Thin filaments

-

--

-

o isStarting here, the myosin head bound to ATP and is in its low-energy configuration

~2?>1:-: §Ci~~~ljThin "Binding of a new molecule of ATP releases the myosin head from actin, and a new cycle begins.

~

yV,f'.,

..

S;:;~>--r_Myosin head (lowenergy configuration)

~~~~~~~~~~~~~

::

filament

~OThe

hydrolyzes , A T P myosin to ADP head and inorganic ThICk phosphate (®) and is in its filament high-energy configuration

Thin filament moves . . . toward center of sarcomere.

Myosin binding sites

Actin

~~~;~~:M~YOSin

Myosin head (lowenergy configuration)

head (highenergy configuration)

/0 o Releasing ADP and ®' myosin returns to its low-energy configuration,

Th, my,,;c h"d b;cd, to actin, forming a cross-bridge,

sliding the thin filament.

o Visit the Study Area at www.masteringbio.com for the BioFlix 3-D Animatioo on Muscle Cootractioo.

... Figure 50.27 Myosin-actin interactions underlying muscle fiber contraction. When ATP binds, what prevents the filaments from sliding back into their original positions)

II

CHfJ,PTER

fifTY


1107

from a typical muscle fiber's glycogen store, glycolysis can support about 1 minute of sustained contraction, whereas aerobic respiration can power contractions for nearly an hour.

The Role of Calcium and Regulatory Proteins Calcium ions (ea2+) and proteins bound to actin playa critical role in muscle cell contraction and relaxation. Tropomyosin, a regulatory protein, and the troponin complex, a set ofadditional regulatory proteins, are bound to the actin strands of thin Hlaments. In a muscle fiber at rest, tropomyosin covers the myosinbinding sites along the thin filament, preventing actin and myosin from interacting (figure 50.28a). \'\'hen ea2+ accumulates in the cytosol, it binds to the troponin complex, causing the proteins bound along the actin strands to shift position and expose the myosin-binding sites on the thin filament (Figure SO.2ab). Thus, when the ea2+ concentration rises in the cytosol, the thin and thick filaments slide past each other, and the muscle fiber contracts. \'(!hen the ea2+ concentration falls, the binding sites are covered, and contraction stops. Motor neurons cause muscle contraction by triggering release of Ca2+ into the cytosol of muscle cells with which they form synapses. This regulation ofCa2+ concentration is a multistep process involving a network of membranes and compartments within the muscle cell. As you read the following description, refer to the overview and diagram in Figure 50.29. The arrival ofan action potential at the synaptic terminal of a motor neuron causes release ofthe neurotransmitter acetyl-

Ca 2+·binding

Tropomyosin

Adm

sites

Troponin complex

choline. Binding of acetylcholine to receptors on the muscle fiber leads to a depolarization, triggering an action potential. Within the muscle fiber, the action potential spreads deep into the interior, following infoldings of the plasma membrane called transverse (T) tubules. From the T tubules, the action potential spreads even farther, entering a specialized endoplasmic reticulum, the sarcoplasmic reticulum (SR). \Vithin the SR, the action potential opens Ca2+ channels, allowing Ca2+ stored in the interior of the SR to enter the cytosol. finally, Ca2+ binds to the troponin complex, triggering contraction of the muscle fiber. When motor neuron input stops, the muscle cell relaxes. During this phase, proteins in the cell reset the muscle for the next cycle of contraction. Relaxation begins as transport proteins in the SR pump Ca2+ out of the cytosol. When the Ca 2 + concentration in the cytosol is low, the regulatory proteins bound to the thin filament shift back to their starting position, once again blocking the myosin-binding sites. At the same time, the Ca2+ pumped from the cytosol accumulates in the SR, providing the stores needed to respond to the next action potential. Several diseases cause paralysis by interfering with the excitation of skeletal muscle fibers by motor neurons. In amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), also called Lou Gehrig's disease, motor neurons in the spinal cord and brainstem degenerate, and the muscle fibers with which they synapse atrophy. ALS is progressive and usually fatal within five years after symptoms appear; currently there is no cure or treatment. Myasthenia gravis is an autoimmune disease in which a person produces antibodies to the acetylcholine receptors on skeletal muscle fibers. As the number of these receptors decreases, synaptic transmission bem'een motor neurons and muscle fibers declines. Fortunately, effective treatments are available for this disease.

Neryous Control of Muscle Tension (a) Myosin·binding sites blocked

e e e e e e

~ca2+

e e Myosin-

e e

e

binding site

e e

e e

(b) Myosin-binding sites exposed .... Figure 50.28 The role of regulatory proteins and calcium in muscle fiber contraction. Each thin filament consists of two strands of actin, tropomyosin. and the troponin complex.

1108

U"IT

SEVE"


Whereas contraction of a single skeletal muscle fiber is a brief all-or-none twitch, contraction of a whole muscle, such as the biceps in your upper arm, is graded; you can voluntarily alter the extent and strength of its contraction. There are two basic mechanisms by which the nervous system produces graded contractions of whole muscles: (1) by varying the number of muscle fibers that contract and (2) byvarying the rate at which muscle fibers are stimulated. Let's consider each mechanism in turn. In avertebrate skeletal muscle, each muscle fiber is controlled by only one motor neuron, but each branched motor neuron may form synapses with many muscle fibers. There may be hundreds of motor neurons controlling a muscle, each with its own pool ofmuscle fibers scattered throughout the muscle. A motor unit consists of a single motor neuron and all the muscle fibers it controls. When a motor neuron produces an action potential,

• fIgun 5G.29

Exploring The Regulation of Skeletal Muscle Contraction The electrical, chemical, and molecular events regulating skeletal muscle contraction are shown in a cutaway view of a muscle cell and in the enlarged cross section below. Action potentials (red arrows) triggered by the motor neuron sweep across the muscle fiber and into it along the transverse (T) tubules, initiating the movements of calcium (green dots) that regulate muscle activity.

Motor

Synaptic terminal

neuron axon

T tubule

Mltochondnon

"""" ---'E"''''

membrane

1:~:::::::f:."'-~;::::;;~Ca2·released ftom

of muscle fiber

Sarcomere

sarcoplasmic reticulum

o synaptIC: Acetylcholine (ACh) released at synaphc termmal diffuses across deft and binds to receptor on muscle fiber's prot~ns

plasma membrane, triggenng an ilGIOIl potential In muscle ilber T Tubule

Plasma membrane

• e ActIOn potentJalrs propagated along

SR

plasma membrane and down T tubules.

I

o triggers Action potential Ca2~

release from sarcoplasmic reticulum (SR).

I

• •

--.::--::.-' ~t ~ . o Tropomyosin blockage of myosinbinding Sites is restored; contradlon

• •• • •

ends, and muscle fiber relaxes.

•

o

0

• • •• o

0

0

AT

CYTOSOL

0

0 0 ogg

0

0

0

0 0 • 0

o

0

0

00

g

0 0 0

0

,! •

Ca 2 '

o Cytosobc Ca is removed by adlve

o

0

0

o

• • •

o

•

0

0

0 g

0

Calcium ions bind to troponin in thin filament; myosinbinding sites exposed

•

2-

transport Into SR aftl!r action potential ends.

{) Myosm cross-bndges alternately attach to actin and detach, pulling thin filament toward Cl!nter of sarcomere; ATP pcm~ sliding of filaments

(HAHU flnY


1109

Spinal cord Motor unit 1

Motor unit 2

Tetanus_---

i c

Summation of two twitches

c

,---'--,

.g I!!

t

Motor neuron cell body

Adion potential

Motor neuron axon

t t

'-v-' Pair of action potentials

Time

•

tttttttttt Series ;f action potentials at high frequency

.... Figure 50.31 Summation of twitches. This graph compares the tenSion developed in a muscle fiber in response to a smgle action potential in a motor neuron, a pair of adion potentials, and a series of adion potentials. The dashed lines show the tension that would have developed if only the first action potential had occurred. Muscle

Muscle fibers Tendon .... Figure 50.30 Motor units in a vertebrate skeletal muscle. Each muscle fiber (cell) has a single synapse with one motor neuron, but each motor neuron typically synapses with many muscle fibers, A motor neuron and all the muscle fibers it controls constitute a motor unit

all the muscle fibers in its motor unit contract as a group (Figure 50.30). The strength of the resulting contraction de-

pendson how many muscle fibers the motor neuron controls. In most muscles, the number of muscle fibers in different motor units ranges from a few to hundreds. The nervous system can thus regulate the strength of contraction in a muscle by determining how many motor units are activated at a given instant and by selecting large or small motor units to activate. The force (tension) developed by a muscle progressively increases as more and more of the motor neurons controlling the muscle are activated, a process called recruitment of motor neurons. Depending on the number of motor neurons your brain recruits and the size of their motor units, you can lift a fork or something much heavier, like your biology textbook. Some muscles, especially those that hold up the body and maintain posture, are almost always partially contracted. In such muscles, the nervous system may alternate activation among the motor units, reducing the length of time anyone set of fibers is contracted. Prolonged contraction can result in muscle fatigue due to the depletion of ATP and dissipation of ion gradients required for normal electrical signaling. Although accumulation oflactate (see Figure 9.18) may also con1110

U"IT

SEVE"


tribute to muscle fatigue, recent research actually points to a beneficial effect of lactate on muscle function. The second mechanism by which the nervous system pro-duces graded whole-musdecontractions is by varying the rate of muscle fiber stimulation. A single action potential produces a twitch lasting about tOO msec or less. If a second action potential arrives before the muscle fiber has completely relaxed, the two twitches add together, resulting in greater tension (Figure 50.31). Further summation occurs as the rate of stimulation increases. \X'hen the rate is high enough that the muscle fiber cannot relax at all betv·:een stimuli, the twitches fuse into one smooth, sustained contraction called tetanus (not to be confused with the disease of the same name). Motor neurons usually deliver their action potentials in rapid-fire volleys, and the resulting summation oftension results in the smooth contraction typical oftetanus rather than the jerky actions of individual ty,~tches. The increase in tension during summation and tetanus occurs because muscle fibers are connected to bones via tendons and connective tissues. When a muscle fiber contracts, it stretches these elastic structures, which then transmit tension to the bones. In a single ty,'itch, the muscle fiber begins to relax before the elastic structures are fully stretched. During summation, however, the high-frequency action potentials maintain an elevated concentration of CaH in the muscle fiber's cytosol, prolonging cross-bridge cycling and causing greater stretching of the elastic structures. During tetanus, the elastic structures are fully stretched, and all of the tension generated by the muscle fiber is transmitted to the bones.

Types of Skeletal Muscle Fibers Our discussion to this point has focused on the general properties of vertebrate skeletal muscles. There are, however, several distinct types of skeletal muscle fibers, each ofwhich is adapted

to a particular set of functions. Scientists typically classify these varied fiber types either by the source of ATP used to power muscle activity or by the speed ofmuscle contraction. We'll consider each of the two classification schemes. Oxidative and Glycolytic Fibers Fibers that rely mostly on aerobic respiration are called oxidative fibers. Such fibers are specialized in ways that enable them to make use of a steady energy supply: They have many mitochondria, a rich blood supply, and a large amount of an oxygen-storing protein called myoglobin. Myoglobin, a brownish red pigment, binds oxygen more tightly than does hemoglobin, so it can effectively extract oxygen from the blood. Asecond class offibers use glycolysis as their primary source ofATP and are called glycolytic fibers. Having a larger diameter and less myoglobin than oxidative fibers, glycolytic fibers fatigue much more readily. The two fiber types are readily apparent in the muscle of poultry and fish: The light meat is composed of glycolytic fibers, and the dark meat is made up ofoxidative fibers rich in myoglobin. Fast-Twitch and Slow-Twitch Fibers Muscle fibers vary in the speed with which they contract, with fast-twitch fibers deveJoping tension two to three times faster than slow-twitch fibers. Fast fibers are used for brief, rapid, powerful contractions. Slow fibers, often found in muscles that maintain posture, can sustain long contractions. Aslow fiber has less sarcoplasmic reticulum and pumps ea2+ more slowly than a fast fiber. Because Ca2+ remains in the cytosol longer, a muscle twitch in a slow fiber lasts about five times as long as one in a fast fiber. The difference in contraction speed bet....een slow-twitch and fast-twitch fibers mainly reflects the rate at which their myosin heads hydrolyze ATr. However, there isn't a one-toone relationship between contraction speed and ATP source. Whereas all slow-twitch fibers are oxidative, fast-twitch fibers can be either glycolytic or oxidative. Most human skeletal muscles contain both fast- and slowtwitch fibers, although the muscles ofthe eye and hand are exclusively fast twitch. In a muscle that has a mixture of fast and slow fibers, the relative proportions of each are genetically determined. However, if such a muscle is used repeatedly for activities requiring high endurance, some fast glycolytic fibers can develop into fast oxidative fibers. Because fast oxidative fibers fatigue more slowly than fast glycolytic fibers, the result will be a muscle that is more resistant to fatigue. Some vertebrates have skeletal muscle fibers that twitch at rates fur faster than any human muscle. For example, both the rattlesnake's rattle and the dove's coo are produced by superfast muscles that can contract and relax every 10 msec.

Other Types of Muscle Although all muscles share the same fundamental mechanism of contraction-actin and myosin filaments sliding past each

other-there are many different types of muscle. Vertebrates, for example, have cardiac muscle and smooth muscle in addition to skeletal muscle (see Figure 40.5). Vertebrate cardiac muscle is found in only one placethe heart. Like skeletal muscle, cardiac muscle is striated. However, structural differences between skeletal and cardiac muscle fibers result in differences in their electrical and membrane properties. \Vhereas skeletal muscle fibers do not produce action potentials unless stimulated by a motor neuron, cardiac muscle cells have ion channels in their plasma membrane that cause rhythmic depolarizations, triggering action potentials without input from the nervous system. Action potentials of cardiac muscle cells last up to 20 times longer than those of the skeletal muscle fibers. Plasma membranes of adjacent cardiac muscle cells interlock at specialized regions called intercalated disks, where gap junctions (see Figure 6.32) provide direct electrical coupling between the cells. Thus, the action potential generated by specialized cells in one part of the heart spreads to all other cardiac muscle cells, causing the whole heart to contract. A long refractory period prevents summation and tetanus. Smooth muscle in vertebrates is found mainly in the walls of hollow organs, such as blood vessels and organs of the digestive tract. Smooth muscle cells lack striations because their actin and myosin filaments are not regularly arrayed along the length of the cell. Instead, the thick filaments are scattered throughout the cytoplasm, and the thin filaments are attached to structures called dense bodies, some of which are tethered to the plasma membrane. There is less myosin than in striated muscle fibers, and the myosin is not associated with specific actin strands. Some smooth muscle cells contract only when stimulated by neurons of the autonomic nervous system. Others can generate action potentials without input from neurons-they are electrically coupled to one another. Smooth muscles contract and relax more slowly than striated muscles. Although smooth muscle contraction is regulated by ea1+, the mechanism for regulation is different from that in skeletal and cardiac muscle. Smooth muscle cells have no troponin complex or T tubules, and their sarcoplasmic reticulum is not well developed. During an action potential, ea 2 + enters the cytosol mainly through the plasma membrane. Calcium ions cause contraction by binding to the protein calmodulin, which activates an enzyme that phosphorylates the myosin head, en· abling cross-bridge activity. Invertebrates have muscle cells similar to vertebrate skeletal and smooth muscle cells, and arthropod skeletal muscles are nearly identical to those of vertebrates. Howe\'er, the flight muscles of insects are capable of independent, rhythmic contraction, so the wings of some insects can actually beat faster than action potentials can arrive from the central nervous system. Another interesting evolutionary adaptation (MAHER FIfTY

SmSOf)'

and Motor Mechanisms

1111

has been discovered in the muscles that hold a clam's shell closed. The thick filaments in these muscles contain a protein called paramyosin that enables the muscles to remain con~ tracted for as long as a month with only a low rate of energy consumption.

maintain its shape. In many animals, a hard skeleton also protects soft tissues. For example, the vertebrate skull protects the brain, and the ribs of terrestrial vertebrates form a cage around the heart, lungs, and other internal organs.

Types of Skeletal Systems CONCEPT

CHECK

50.5

1. How can the nervous system cause a skeletal muscle to produce the most forceful contraction it is capable of? 2. Contrast the role of Ca2+ in the contraction of a skeletal muscle fiber and a smooth muscle cell. 3. _1MilIM Why are the muscles of an animal that has recently died likely to be stiff? For suggested answers, see Appendix A.

r;~:~~:~s~~;:s transform muscle contraction into locomotion

So far we have focused on muscles as effectors for nervous system output. To move an animal in part or in whole, muscles must work in concert with the skeleton. Unlike the softer tissues in an animal body, the skeleton provides a rigid structure to which muscles can at· tach. Because muscles exert force only during contraction, moving a body part back and forth typically requires two muscles attached to the same section of the skeleton. We can see such an arrangement of muscles in the upper portion of a human arm or grasshopper leg (Figure 50.32). Although we call such muscles an antagonistic pair, their function is actually cooperative, coordi~ nated by the nervous system. For exam~ pie, when you extend your arm, motor neurons trigger your triceps muscle to contract while the absence of neuronal input allows your biceps to relax. Skeletons function in support and protection as well as movement. Most land animals would sag from their own weight if they had no skeleton to support them. Even an animal living in water would be a formless mass without a framework to 1112

U"IT SEVEN

Although we tend to think of skeletons only as interconnected sets of bones, skeletons come in many different forms. Hardened support structures can be external (as in exoskeletons), internal (as in endoskeletons), or even absent (as in fluidbased or hydrostatic skeletons).

Hydrostatic Skeletons A hydrostatic skeleton consists of fluid held under pressure in a closed body compartment. This is the main type of skeleton in most cnidarians, flatworms, nematodes, and annelids (see Chapter 33). These animals control their form and move· ment by using muscles to change the shape offluid-filled com· partments. Among the cnidarians, for example. a hydra elongates by closing its mouth and using contractile cells in its body wall to constrict its central gastrovascular cavity.

Human

Grasshopper

Extensor muscle relaxes

Triceps relaxes

Flexor muscle contracts

Forearm flexes

Extensor muscle contracts

Forearm extends Triceps contracts

'x

Tibia extends

"Flexor muscle relaxes

... Figure 50.32 The interaction of muscles and skeletons in movement. Back-and· forth movement of a body pari is generally accomplished by antagonistic muscles. This arrangement works with either an internal skeleton, as in mammals, or an external skeleton, as in insects.


Because water cannot be compressed very much, decreasing the diameter of the cavity forces the cavity to become longer. Worms use hydrostatic skeletons in diverse ways to move through their environment. In planarians and other flatworms, the interstitial fluid is kept under pressure and functions as the main hydrostatic skeleton. Planarian movement results mainly from muscles in the body wall exerting localized forces against the hydrostatic skeleton. Nematodes (roundworms) hold fluid in their body cavity, which is a pseudocoelom (see Figure 32.8b). Contractions oflongitudinal muscles move the animal forward by undulations, or wavelike motions, of the body. In earthworms and other annelids, the coelomic fluid functions as a hydrostatic skeleton. The coelomic cavity in many annelids is divided by septa between the segments, allowing the animal to change the shape

Longitudinal muscle relaxed (extended)

Circular muscle contraded

,

Bristles

-

Circular muscle relaxed

Longitudinal muscle contraded

I

• Head end

(a) At the moment depided. body segments at the earthworm's head end and just in front of the rear end are short and thick (longitudinal muscles contracted; circular muscles relaxed) and are anchored to the ground by bristles. The other segments are thin and elongated (CIfcular muscles contracted: longitudinal muscles relaxed).

Head end

of each segment individually, using both circular and longitudinal muscles. Such annelids use their hydrostatic skeleton for peristalsis, a type of movement produced by rhythmic waves of muscle contractions passing from front to back (Figure 50.33). Hydrostatic skeletons are well suited for life in aquatic en· vironments. They may also cushion internal organs from shocks and provide support for crawling and burrowing in terrestrial animals. However, a hydrostatic skeleton cannot support terrestrial activities in which an animal's body is held off the ground, such as walking or running.

Exoskeletons An exoskeleton is a hard encasement deposited on an animal's surface. For example, most molluscs are enclosed in a calcium carbonate shell secreted by the mantle, a sheetlike extension of the body wall (see Figure 33.15). As the animal grows, it enlarges its shell by adding to the outer edge. Clams and other bivalves close their hinged shell using muscles attached to the inside of this exoskeleton. The jointed exoskeleton of arthropods is a cuticle, a nonliving coat secreted by the epidermis. Muscles are attached to knobs and plates of the cuticle that extend into the interior of the body. About 30-50% of the arthropod cuticle consists of chitin, a polysaccharide similar to cellulose (see Figure 5.10). Fibrils of chitin are embedded in a protein matrix, forming a composite material that combines strength and flexibility. Where protection is most important, the cuticle is hardened with organic compounds that cross-link the proteins of the exoskeleton. Some crustaceans, such as lobsters, harden portions of their exoskeleton even more by adding calcium salts. In contrast, there is little cross-linking of proteins or inorganic salt deposition in places where the cuticle must be thin and flexible, such as leg joints. With each growth spurt, an arthropod must shed its exoskeleton (molt) and produce a larger one.

Endoskeletons (b) The head has moved forward because circular muscles in the head segments have contraded. Segments behind the head and at the rear are now thick and anchored. thus preventing the worm from slipping backward,

Head end

(c) The head segments are thick again and anchored in their new positions, The rear segments have released their hold on the ground and have been pulled forward.

... Figure 50.33 Crawling by peristalsis. Contradion of the longitudinal muscles thickens and shortens the earthworm; contraction of the circular muscles constricts and elongates it.

An endoskeleton consists of hard supporting elements, such as bones, buried within the soft tissues of an animal. Sponges are reinforced by hard needlelike structures of inorganic material (see Figure 33.4) or by softer fibers made of protein. Echinoderms have an endoskeleton of hard plates called ossi· cles beneath their skin. The ossicles are composed of magnesium carbonate and calcium carbonate crystals and are usually bound together by protein fibers. \'(fhereas the ossicles of sea urchins are tightly bound, the ossicles of sea stars are more loosely linked, allowing a sea star to change the shape of its arms. Chordates have an endoskeleton consisting of cartilage, bone, or some combination ofthese materials (see Figure40.5). The mammalian skeleton is built from more than 200 bones,

CHfJ,PTER fifTY


1113

Head of humerus

Examples of joints

Shoulder - - { Clavicle girdle Scapula

~=:l~f.~~i

Sternum ---------;:-rJ'-~

o Ball-and-sotket joints, where the humerus contacts the shoulder girdle and where the femur contacts the

Rib ---------''it---;" 1

pelvic girdle. enable us to rotate our arms and legs and move them in several planes.

Humerus-~~~~~~~~~~~~~tu~~~~~ Vertebra Radius Ulna

-------''-111

------:,'ft

Humerus

Peivic-----rfff-,=--r girdle Carpals - - - - " .

Ulna

Phalanges - - - - - - - ' Metacarpals - - - - - -

e

Femur----------+\ Patella ----------\!U

Tibia------------l"

Hinge joints. such as between the humerus and the head of the ulna. restrict movement to a single plane.

1

\ 1\

Fibula

\\ Ulna

~~=========~~

M,w,,,," Tarsals Phalanges

-

Q Pivot joints allow us to rotate our forearm at the elbow and to move our head from side to side.

.. Figure 50.34 Bones and joints of the human skeleton. some fused together and others connected at joints by ligaments that allow freedom of movement (Figure 50.34).

Size and Scale of Skeletons In analyzing the structure and function of any animal skeleton, it is useful to consider the effects ofsize and scale as they might apply for an engineer designing a bridge or building. For example, the strength ofa building support depends on its crosssectional area, which increases with the square ofits diameter. In contrast, the strain on that support depends on the building's weight, which increases with the cube of its height or other linear dimension. In common with the structure of a bridge or building, an animal's body structure must support its size. Consequently, a large animal has very different body pro1114

U"IT SEVEN


portions than a small animal. If a mouse were scaled up to an elephant's size, its slender legs would buckle under its weight. In simply applying the building analogy, we might predict that the size of an animal's leg bones should be directly proportional to the strain imposed by its body weight. However, our prediction would be inaccurate; animal bodies are complex and nonrigid, and the building analogy only partly explains the relationship between body structure and support. An animal's leg size relative to its body size is only part of the story. It turns out that body posture-the position ofthe legs relative to the main body-is more important in supporting body weight, at least in mammals and birds. Muscles and tendons (connective tissue that joins muscle to bone), which hold the legs of large mammals relatively straight and positioned under the body, bear most of the load.

Types of Locomotion Movement is a hallmark ofanimals. Even sessile animals move their body parts: Sponges use beating flagella to generate water

currents that draw and trap small food particles, and sessile cnidarians wave tentacles that capture prey (see Chapter 33). Most animals, however, are mobile and spend a considerable portion of their time and energy actively searching for food, as well as escaping from danger and looking for mates. OUT focus here is locomotion, or active travel from place to place. Animals have diverse modes of locomotion. Most animal

phyla include species that swim. On land and in the sediments on the floor of the sea and lakes, animals crawl, walk, run, or hop. Active flight (in contrast to gliding downward from a tree

or elevated ground) has evolved in only a few animal groups: insects, reptiles (including birds), and, among the mammals, bats. A group of large flying reptiles died out millions of years ago, leaving birds and bats as the only flying vertebrates. In all its modes, locomotion requires that an animal expend energy to overcome two forces that tend to keep it stationary: friction and gravity. Exerting force requires energy-consuming cellular work.

Swimming Because most animals are reasonably buoyant in water, overcoming gravity is less ofa problem for swimming animals than for species that move on land or through the air. On the other hand, water is a much denser and more viscous medium than air, and thus drag (friction) is a major problem for aquatic animals. A sleek, fusiform (torpedo-like) shape is a common adaptation of fast swimmers (see Figure 40.2). Animals swim in diverse ways. For instance, many insects and four-legged vertebrates use their legs as oars to push against the water. Squids, scallops, and some cnidarians are jet-propelled, taking in water and squirting it out in bursts. Sharks and bony fishes swim by moving their body and tail from side to side, while whales and dolphins move by undulating their body and tail up and down.

Locomotion on Land In general, the problems of locomotion on land are the opposite of those in water. On land, a walking, running, hopping, or crawling animal must be able to support itself and move against gravity, but air poses relatively little resistance, at least at moderate speeds. When a land animal walks, runs, or hops, its leg muscles expend energy both to propel it and to keep it from falling down. With each step, the animal's leg muscles must overcome inertia by accelerating a leg from a standing start. For moving on land, powerful muscles and strong skeletal support are more important than a streamlined shape. Diverse adaptations for traveling on land have evolved in various vertebrates. For example, kangaroos have large, powerful muscles in their hind legs, suitable for locomotion by hopping

.. Figure 50.35 Energy-efficient locomotion on land. Members of the kangaroo family travel from place to place mainly by leaping on their large hind legs, Kinetic energy momentarily stored in tendons after each leap provides a boost for the neKl leap, In fact. a large kangaroo hopping at 30 kmlhr uses no more energy per minute than it does at 6 kmlhr. The large tail helps balance the kangaroo when it leaps as well as when it sits.

(Figure 50.35). As a kangaroo lands after each leap, tendons in its hind legs momentarily store energy. The farther the animal hops, the more energy the tendons store. Analogous to theenergy in a compressed spring, the energy stored in the tendons is available forthe next jump and reduces thetotal amount ofenergy the animal must expend to trave1. The legsofan insect, a dog, or a human also retain some energy during walking or running, although a considerably smaller share than do those ofa kangaroo. Maintaining balance is another prerequisite for walking, running, or hopping. A kangaroo's large tail helps balance its body during leaps and also forms a stable tripod with its hind legs when the animal sits or moves slowly. Illustrating the same principle, a walking cat, dog, or horse keeps three feeton the ground. Bipedal animals, such as humans and birds, keep part of at least one footon the ground when walking. When an animal runs, all four feet (or both feet for bipeds) may be off the ground briefly, but at running speeds it is momentum more than foot contact that keeps the body upright. Crawling poses a very different situation. Because much of its body is in contact with the ground, a crawling animal must exert considerable effort to overcome friction. You have read how earthworms crawl by peristalsis. Many snakes crawl by undulating their entire body from side to side. Assisted by large, movable scales on its underside, a snake's body pushes against the ground, propelling the animal forward. Boa constrictors and pythons creep straight forward, driven by muscles that lift belly scales off the ground, tilt the scales forward, and then push them backward against the ground.

Flying Gravity poses a major problem for a flying animal because its wings must develop enough lift to overcome gravity's downward CHP.PTER fifTY


1115

force. The key to flight is wing shape. All types of wings are airfoils-structures whose shape alters air currents in a way that helps animals or airplanes stay aloft. As forthe body to which the wings attach, a fusiform shape helps reduce drag in air as itdoes in water. Flying animals are relatively light, with body masses ranging from less than a gram for some insects to about 20 kg for the largest flying birds. Many flying animals have structural adaptations that contribute to low body mass. Birds, for example, have no urinary bladder or teeth and have relatively large bones with air-filled regions that help lessen the bird's weight (see Chapter 34).

Energy Costs of locomotion During the 1960s, three scientists at Duke University-Dick Taylor, Vance Tucker, and Knut Schmidt-Nielsen-became interested in the bioenergetics of locomotion. Physiologists typically determine an animal's rate of energy use during locomotion by measuring oxygen consumption or carbon dioxide production (see Chapter 40). To apply such a strategy to flight, Tucker trained parakeets to fly in a wind tunnel while wearing a face mask (Figure 50.36). By connecting the mask to a tube that collected the air the bird exhaled as it flew, Tucker could measure rates of gas exchange and calculate energy expenditure. in the meantime, Taylor and Schmidt-Nielsen measured energy consumption at rest and during locomotion for animals ofwidely varying body sizes. in 1971, Schmidt-Nielsen was invited to give a lecture at a scientific meeting in Germany. In preparation for his speech, he set out to compare the energy cost ofdifferent forms oflocomotion. Hedecided to express energy costas the amount offuel it takes to transport a given amount of body weight over a set distance. By converting data from many studies of animal locomotion to this common framev."ork, Schmidt-Nielsen drew important conclusions about energy expenditure and locomotion (Figure SO.37). Schmidt-Nielsen's calculations demonstrated that the energy cost of locomotion depends on the mode oflocomotion and the environment. Running animals generally expend more energy per meter traveled than equivalently sized swimming animals,

partly because running and walking require energy to overcome gravity. Swimming is the most energy-efficient mode of locomotion (assuming that an animal is specialized for swimming). And if we compare the energy consumption per minute rather than per meter, we find that flying animals use more energy than swimming or running animals with the same body mass. The studies described in Figure 50.37 also provide insight into the relationship of size to energy expenditure during locomotion. The downward slope of each line on the graph shows that a larger animal travels more efficiently than a smaller animal specialized for the same mode oftransport. For example, a 450-kg horse expends less energy per kilogram of body mass than a 4-kg cat running the same distance. Of course, the total amount ofenergy expended in locomotion is greater for the larger animal.

.,. FISt'!! 50.37

In ui

What are the energy costs of locomotion? EXPERIMENT

Knut Schmidt-Nielsen wondered whether there were general principles governing the energy costs of different types of locomotion among diverse animal speCies. To answer this question. he drew on his own studies as well as the scientific literature for measurements made when animals swam in water flumes. ran on treadmills. or flew in wind tunnels, He converted all of these data to a common set of units and graphed the results.

RESULTS Flying

E 10' ~ ,

.."

Running

~

10

" 0 u

~

~

w

0

w

10- 1

10-3

1 103 Body mass (g)

10'

This graph plots the energy cost, in calories per kilogram of body mass per meter traveled, against body weight for animals specialized for running. flying. and swimming. Note that both axes are plotted on logarithmic scales. CONClUSION For most animals of a given body mass, swimming is the most energy-efficient and running the least energyefficient mode of locomotion, In addition, a small animal typically expends more energy per kilogram of body mass than a large animal. regardless of the type of locomotion used. SOURCE

K, S Study of Imtind, ClafendOll Press,

Oxford (19S1).

N'mu". Suppose the digger wasp had returned to her origi-

nal nest site, despite the pinecones having been moved. What alternative hypotheses might you propose regarding how the wasp finds her nest and why the pinecones didn't misdirect the wasp?

animal learns to associate one ofits own behaviors with a reward or punishment and then tends to repeat or avoid that behavior. For instance, a predator may learn to avoid certain kinds of potential prey if they are associated with painful experiences CHAPH~ flfTY·ONE

Animal Behavior

1127

.. Figure 51.12 Operant conditioning. Having received a face full of quills. a young coyote has probably learned to avoid porcupines.

.. Figure 51.13 A young chimpanzee learning to crack oil palm nuts by observing an experienced elder.

(Figure 51.12). B. F. Skinner, an American pioneer in the study ofoperant conditioning, explored this typeoflearning in the laboratory by, for example, training a rat through repeated trials to obtain food by pressing a lever. Animalscannot learn to link just any stimulus with a given be-havior, however. For example, pigeons can learn to associate dan· ger with a particular sound but not with a particular color. The pigeons' inability to associate a color with danger does not reflect an inability to distinguish visual dues because pigeons can learn to associate a color with food. Rather, the development and organization of the pigeon nervous system apparently restrict the associations that can be formed. Such restrictions are not limited to birds. Rats, for example, can learn to avoid illness-inducing food on the basis ofsmells but not sights or sounds. The associations readily formed by an animal often reflect relationships likely to occur in nature. In the case ofa rat's diet, for example, a harmful food is far more likely to have a certain odor than to be associated with a particular sound. For this reason, experiments regarding associative learning need to be interpreted carefully: \'(That we define in the laboratory as a limitation in learning may be oflittle or no consequence to the animal in its natural habitat.

warded for flying into the arm that had a different color than the sample. \'(Then these bees were tested in mazes with the bars, they chose the arm that differed from the sample. Honeybees thus can apparently distinguish on the basis of~same" and ~different~ The information· processing ability of a nervous system can also be revealed in problem solving, the cognitive activity of devising a method to proceed from one state to another in the face of real or apparent obstacles. For example, if a chimpanzee is placed in a room with several boxes on the floor and a banana hung high outofreach, the chimp can Usize up" the situation and stack the boxes, enabling it to reach the food. Such problemsolving behavior is highly developed in some mammals, especially primates and dolphins. Notable examples have also been observed in some bird species, especially ravens, crows, and jays. In one study, ravens were confronted with food hanging from a branch by a string. After failing to grab the food in flight, one raven flew to the branch and alternately pulled up and stepped on the string until the food was within reach. A number ofother ravens eventually arrived at similar solutions. Nevertheless, some ravens failed to solve the problem, indicating that problem-solving success in this species, as in others, varies with individual experience and abilities. Many animals learn to solve problems by observing the behavior of other individuals. Young wild chimpanzees, for example, learn how to crack oil palm nuts with two stones by copying experienced chimpanzees (Figure 51.13).

Cognition and Problem Solving The most complex forms of learning involve cognition-the process of knowing represented by awareness, reasoning, rerol· lection, and judgmenlin addition to primates, many groups ofan· imals, including insects, appear to exhibit cognition in controlled laboratory studies. In one experiment, honeybees were shown a color and then presented with a Y-shaped maze in which one arm was the same color. Ifthe bees flew into tllat arm ofthe maze, they \\-'ere rewarded. Theywere then shown a black-and-white sample with either vertical or horizontal bars and tested in a maze that had vertical bars in one arm and horizontal bars in the other. They most often chose the arm with bars oriented in the same way as the sample. Another set ofbees trained in the color mazes were re-1128

U"IT SEVE"


Development of Learned Behaviors Most ofthe acquired behaviors we have discussed involve learning that takes place over a relatively short time. Development of some other behaviors, such as singing in some bird species, occurs in distinct stages. The first stage ofsong learning for whitecrowned sparrows takes place early in life. Ifa fledgling sparrow is prevented from hearing real sparrows or rePfficroffcmales in a litter, Source: P, W. Sherman and M. L. Morton, Demography ofBclding's ground squirrel, £cofogy65:1617-1628 (198")'

Natural selection favors traits that improve an organism's chances ofsurvival and reproductive success. In every species, there are trade-offs between survival and traits such as frequency of reproduction, number of offspring produced (number of seeds produced by plants; litter or clutch size for animals), and investment in parental care. The traits that affect an organism's schedule of reproduction and survival (from birth through reproduction to death) make up its life history. A life history entails three basic variables: when reproduction begins (the age at first reproduction or age at maturity), how often the organism reproduces, and how many offspring are produced during each reproductive episode. \'1ith the important exception of humans, which we will consider later in the chapter, organisms do not choose con· sciously when to reproduce or how many offspring to have. Rather, organisms' life history traits are evolutionary outcomes reflected in their development, physiology, and behavior.

Evolution and Life History Diversity Reproductive tables vary greatly, depending on the species. Squirrels have a litter of m'o to six young once a year for less than a decade, whereas oak trees drop thousands of acorns each year for tens or hundreds ofyears. Mussels and other invertebrates may release hundreds of thousands of eggs in a spawning cycle. Why a particular type of reproductive pattern evolves in a particular population-one of many questions at the interface of population ecology and evolutionary biology-is the subject ofHfe history studies, the topic of the next section.

CONCEPT

CHECK

The fundamental idea that evolution accounts for the diversity oflife is manifest in a broad range ofHfe histories found in nature. Pacific salmon, for example, hatch in the headwaters ofa stream and then migrate to the open ocean, where they require one to four years to mature. The salmon eventually return to the fresh· water stream to spawn, producing thousands of eggs in a single reproductive opportunity before they die. This "one-shot" pattern of big-bang reproduction, or semelparity (from the Latin semel, once, and parere, to beget), also occurs in some plants, such as the agave, or "century plan( (figure 53.7).

53.1

I. One spedes of forest bird is highly territorial, while a second lives in flocks. Predict each species' likely pattern of dispersion, and explain. 2.••!;t.W"1 Each female of a particular fish species produces millions of eggs per year. Draw and label the most likely survivorship curve for this spedes, and explain your choice. 3. _1,II:O'ly As noted in Figure 53.2, an important assumption of the mark-recapture method is that marked individuals have the same probability of being recaptured as unmarked individuals. Describe a situation where this assumption might not be valid, and explain how the estimate of population size would be affected.

For suggesled answers, see Appendix A.

... Figure 53.7 An agave (Agave americana), an

example of big-bang reproduction. The lea~es of the plant are ~isible at the base of the giant flowering stal~, which is produced only at the end of the agave's life,

CHAPTE~ f1flY·TH~EE

Population Ecology

1179

Agaves generally grow in arid climates with unpredictable rainfall and poor soils. An agave grows for years, accumulating nutrients in its tissues, until there is an unusually wet year. It then sends up a large flowering stalk, produces seeds, and dies. This life history is an adaptation to the agave's harsh desert environment. In contrast to semel parity is iteroparity (from the Latin iterare, to repeat), or repeated reproduction. Some lizards, for example, produce a few large eggs during their second year of life and then reproduce annually for several years. What factors contribute to the evolution of semelparity versus iteroparity? A current hypothesis suggests that there are two critical factors: the survival rate of the offspring and the likelihood that the adult will survive to reproduce again. Where the survival rate of offspring is low, typically in highly variable or unpredictable environments, the prediction is that big-bang reproduction (semelparity) will be favored. Adults are also less likely to survive in such environments, so producing large numbers of offspring should increase the probability that at least some of those offspring will survive. Repeated reproduction (iteroparity) may be favored in more dependable environments where adults are more likely to survive to breed again and where competition for resources may be intense. In such cases, a few relatively large, well-provisioned offspring should have a better chance ofsurviving until they are capable of reproducing. Nature abounds with life histories that are intermediate between the two extremes of semelparity and iteroparity. Oak trees and sea urchins are examples of organisms that can live a long time but repeatedly produce relatively large numbers of offspring.

"Trade·offs" and Life Histories Natural selection cannot maximize all reproductive variables simultaneously. We might imagine an organism that could produce as many offspring as a semelparous species, provision them well like an iteroparous species, and do so repeatedly, but such organisms do not exist. Time, energy, and nutrients limit the reproductive capabilities of all organisms. In the broadest sense, there is a trade·offbetween reproduction and survival. A study of red deer in Scotland showed that females that reproduced in a given summer were more likely to die during the next winter than females that did not reproduce. A study of European kestrels also demonstrated the survival cost to parents of caring for young (Figure 53.8). Selective pressures influence the trade-off between the number and size ofoffspring. Plants and animals whose young are subject to high mortality rates often produce large numbers of relatively small offspring. Plants that colonize disturbed environments, for example, usually produce many small seeds, only a few of which may reach a suitable habitat. Small size may also increase the chance of seedling establish1180

U"IT EIG~T

Ecology

• FI

53.8

How does caring for offspring affect parental survival in kestrels? EXPERIMENT Cor Dijkstra and colleagues in the Netherlands studied the effects of parental caregiving in European kestrels o~er fi~e years, The researchers transferred chicks among nests to produce reduced broods (three or four chicks). normal broods (fi~e or six), and enlarged broods (se~en or eight). They then measured the percentage of male and female parent birds that survi~ed the follOWIng winter (Both males and females pro~ide care for chicks) RESULTS

100

"-m

., ., c

80

~

c

0

2 •

'," ~

60

40

c

:~

,

20

•

0

• • E

• "

CONClUSION The lower survi~al rates of kestrels with larger broods indicate that caring for more offspring negati~ely affects survi~al of the parents, SOURCE C. OljkmJ et ai" Brood Slze manlpulationl in the kestrel (Fako tinnunculus): effects 0/1 offspring and parent suMllal, joumal of Animal Ecology 59:269-285 (1990),

_1,lIIfn!.

The males of many bird species pro~ide no parental care. If this were true for the European kestrel, how would the experimental results differ from those shown above?

ment by enabling the seeds to be carried longer distances to a broader range of habitats (Figure 53.9a). Animals that suffer high predation rates, such as quail, sardines, and mice, also tend to produce large numbers of offspring. In other organisms, extra investment on the part of the parent greatly increases the offspring's chances of survival. Walnut trees and coconut palms both provision large seeds with energy and nutrients that help the seedlings become established (Figure 53.9b). In animals, parental investment in offspring does not always end after incubation or gestation. For instance, primates generally bear only one or two offspring at a time. Parental care and an extended period oflearning in the first several years of life are very important to offspring fitness in these species.

r;~:j::;~:;t~al

model describes population growth in an idealized, unlimited environment

Cal Most weedy plants, such as this dandelion, grow Quickly and produce a large number of seeds, ensuring that at least some will grow into plants and eventually produce seeds themselves

Cb) Some plants, such as this coconut palm, produce a moderate number of very large seeds. Each seed's large endosperm provides nutrients for the embryo. an adaptation that helps ensure the success of a relatively large fradion of offspring.

... Figure 53,9 Variation in the size of seed crops in plants,

CONCEPT

CHECK

53.2

I. Consider two rivers: One is spring fed and has a constant water volume and temperature year-round; the other drains a desert landscape and floods and dries out at unpredictable intervals. Which river would you predict is more likely to support many species of iteroparous animals? Why? 2. In the fish called the peacock wrasse (Symphodus tinca), females disperse some of their eggs widely and lay other eggs in a nest. Only the latter receive parental care. Explain the trade-offs in reproduction that this behavior illustrates. Mice that cannot find enough food or 3, that experience other forms of stress will sometimes abandon their young. Explain how this behavior might have evolved in the context of reproductive trade-offs and life history.

-waUl.


Populations of all species, regardless of their life histories, have the potential to expand greatly when resources are abundant. To appreciate the potential for population in· crease, consider a bacterium that can reproduce by fission every 20 minutes under ideal laboratory conditions. There would be 2 bacteria after 20 minutes, 4 after 40 minutes, and 8 after 60 minutes. If reproduction continued at this rate, with no mortality, for only a day and a half, there would be enough bacteria to form a layer a foot deep over the entire globe. At the other life history extreme, an elephant may produce only 6 offspring in a loo-year life span. Still, Charles Darwin once estimated that the descendants of a single pair of mating elephants would number 19 million within only 750 years. Darwin's estimate may not have been precisely correct, but such analyses led him to recognize the tremendous capacity for growth in all populations. Although unlimited growth does not occur for long in nature, studying population growth in an idealized, unlimited environment reveals the capacity of species for increase and the conditions under which that capacity may be expressed.

Per Capita Rate of Increase Imagine a population consisting ofa few individuals living in an ideal, unlimited environment. Under these conditions, there are no restrictions on the abilities of individuals to harvest en· ergy, grow, and reproduce, aside from the inherent biological limitations of their life history traits. The population will increase in size with every birth and with the immigration of individuals from other populations, and it will decrease in size with every death and with the emigration of individuals out of the population. We can thus define a change in population size during a fixed time interval with the following verbal equation:

0>,""

i" (.rth Immi,m"") ( h ,mi,rum,)

population .. SIze dUring = .

time interval

Bl

s

.

g

d' urm

lime

. I mterva

+

entering . population ..

dUring time interval

-

Deat s d . UTm . g

+

leaVing . population

time..

, I mterva

dunng tune interval

For simplicity here, we will ignore the effects of immigration and emigration, although a more complex formulation would certainly include these factors. We can also use math· ematical notation to express this simplified relationship more concisely. If N represents population size and t represents time, then t1,N is the change in population size and t1,t is the time interval (appropriate to the life span or generation time of the species) over which we are evaluating population growth. (The Greek letter delta, t1" indicates change, CHAPTE~ f1flY·TH~EE

Population Ecology

1181

such as change in time.) We can now rewrite the verbal equation as

aN -=B-D

include immigration or emigration. Most ecologists prefer to use differential calculus to express population growth instantaneously, as growth rate at a particular instant in time:

at

where B is the number of births in the population during the time interval and D is the number of deaths. Next, we can convert this simple model into one in which births and deaths are expressed as the average number of births and deaths per individual (per capita) during the specified time interval. The per capita birth rate is the number of offspring produced per unit time by an average member of the popula~ tion. If, for example, there are 34 births per year in a population of 1,000 individuals, the annual per capita birth rate is 34/1,000, orO.034. Ifwe know the annual per capita birth rate (symbolized by b), we can use the formulaB = bNto calculate the expected number ofbirths per year in a population ofany size. For example, if the annual per capita birth rate is 0.034 and the population size is 500,

B=bN B = 0.034 X 500 B = 17 per year Similarly, the per capita death rale (symbolized by d) allows us to calculate the expected number of deaths per unit time in a population ofany size, using the formula D = dN. Ifd = 0.016 per year, we would expect 16 deaths per year in a population of 1,000 individuals. For natural populations or those in the labo~ ratory, the per capita birth and death rates can be calculated from estimates of population size and data in life tables and re~ productive tables (for example, Tables 53.1 and 53.2). Now we can revise the population growth equation again, this time using per capita birth and death rates rather than the numbers of births and deaths:

In this case r;nst is simply the instantaneous per capita rate of increase. Ifyou have not yet studied calculus, don't be intimidated by the form of the last equation; it is similar to the previous one, are very short and are exexcept that the time intervals pressed in the equation as dt.ln fact, as becomes shorter, the discrete rapproaches the instantaneous riml in value.

at

at

Exponential Growth Earlier we described a population whose members all have access to abundant food and are free to reproduce at their physiological capacity. Population increase under these ideal conditions is called exponential population growth, also known as geometric population growth. Under these conditions, the per capita rate of increase may assume the maximum rate for the species, denoted as r'M"" The equation for exponential population growth is

dN

dt = r"",xN The size of a population that is growing exponentially in~ creases at a constant rate, resulting eventually in a J-shaped growth curve when population size is plotted over time (Figure 53.10). Although the maximum rate of increase is constant, the population accumulates more new individuals per unit of time when it is large than when it is small; thus, the

2.000

aN =bN-dN

at

One final simplification is in order. Population ecologists are most interested in the difference between the per capita birth rate and per capita death rate. This difference is the per capita rate a/increase, or r:

r=b-d The value of r indicates whether a given population is growing (r> 0) or declining (r < 0). Zero population growth (ZPG) occurs when the per capita birth and death rates are equal (r = 0). Births and deaths still occur in such a population, of course, but they balance each other exactly. Using the per capita rate of increase, we can now rewrite the equation for change in population size as

t1.N =rN

at

Remember that this equation is for a discrete, or fixed, time interval (often one year, as in the previous example) and does not 1182

U"IT EIG~T

Ecology

~ 1.500

dN=0,5N

,~ c ,Q

"

dt 1,000

"5

£ 500

o -I---o:::;."""",~=-,---~o 5 10 15 Number of generations • Figure 53.10 Population growth predicted by the exponential model. This graph compares growth in two populations with different ~alues of I"""" Increasing the ~alue from 0.5 to 1.0 increases the rate of rise in population size o~er time, as reflected by the relative slopes of the CUtves at any gi~en population size,

r;~:~:~:t~:~~del

8,000

describes how a population grows more slowly as it nears its carrying capacity

c

6,000

0

• "5

~

-• 0

~

4,000

c

~

~

" w

2,000

0 1900

1920

1940 Year

1960

1980

.. Figure 53. l' Exponential growth in the African elephant population of Kruger National Park. 50uth Africa. curves in Figure 53.10 get progressively steeper over time. This occurs because population growth depends on N as well as r",ax' and larger populations experience more births (and deaths) than small ones growing at the same per capita rate. It is also clear from Figure 53.10 that a population with a higher maximum rate of increase (dN/dt = 1.0N) will grow faster than one with a lower rate of increase (dNldt = 0.5N). The J-shaped curve ofexponential growth is characteristic of some populations that are introduced into a new environment or whose numbers have been drastically reduced by a catastrophic event and are rebounding. For example, the population of elephants in Kruger National Park, South Africa, grew exponentially for approximately 60 years after they were first protected from hunting (figure 53.11). The increasingly large number ofelephants eventually caused enough damage to vegetation in the park that a collapse in their food supply was likely. To protect other species and the park ecosystem before that happened, park managers began limiting the elephant population by using birth control and exporting elephants to other countries. CONCEPT

CHECK

53.3

1. Explain why a constant rate of increase (r",..x) for a population produces a growth graph that is J-shaped rather than a straight line. 2. \'(fhere is exponential gro\\1h by a plant population more likely-on a newly formed volcanic island or in a mature, undisturbed rain forest? Why? 3, -','!:tU1jM In 2006, the United States had a population ofabout 300 million people. If there were 14 births and 8 deaths per 1,000 people, what was the country's net population growth that year (ignoring immigration and emigration, which are substantial)? Do you think the United States is currently experiencing exponential population growth? Explain.


The exponential growth model assumes that resources are unlimited, which is rarely the case in the real world. As population density increases, each individual has access to fewer resources. Ultimately, there is a limit to the number of individuals that can occupy a habitat. Ecologists define carrying capacity, symbolized as K, as the maximum population size that a particular environment can sustain. Carrying capacity varies over space and time with the abundance of limiting resources. Energy. shelter. refuge from predators, nutrient availability, water, and suitable nesting sites can all be limiting factors. For example, the carrying capacity for bats may be high in a habitat with abundant flying insects and roosting sites, but lower where there is abundant food but fewer suitable shelters. Crowding and resource limitation can have a profound effect on population growth rate. If individuals cannot obtain sufficient resources to reproduce, the per capita birth rate (b) will decline. If they cannot consume enough energy to maintain themselves, or if disease or parasitism increases with density, the per capita death rate (d) may increase. A decrease in b or an increase in d results in a lower per capita rate of increase (r).

The logistic Growth Model We can modify our mathematical model to incorporate changes in growth rate as the population size nears the carrying capacity. In the logistic population growth model, the per capita rate of increase approaches zero as the carrying capacity is reached. To construct the logistic model, we start with the exponential population growth model and add an expression that reduces the per capita rate of increase as N increases. If the maximum sustainable population size (carrying capacity) is K, then K - N is the number of additional individuals the environment can support, and (K - N)I K is the fraction of K that is still available for population growth. By multiplying the exponential rate of increase r",axNby (K - N)I K. we modify the change in population size as N increases:

dN

(K -N)

----::it = r",..x N - K -

\'(fhen N is small compared to K, the term (K - N)I K is large, and the per capita rate of increase, r",,,,,(K - N)IK, is close to the maximum rate of increase. But when N is large and resources are limiting, then (K - N)IKis small, and so is the per capita rate of increase. When N equals K. the population stops CHAPTE~ f1flY·TH~EE

Population Ecology

1183

_....

Logistic Growth of a Hypothetical Population

Exponential

2,000

= 1.500)

(K

Popu- Intrinsic lation Rate of Size Increase

Per Capita Rate of Increase:

K-N (K - N) K '- K

Population Growth Rate:' ,~,.N

(K-K- N)

(N)

(r~Jf)

25

1.0

0.98

0.98

100

1.0

0.93

0.93

+93

250

1.0

0.83

0.83

+208

500

1.0

0.67

0.67

+333

+25

750

1.0

0.50

0.50

+375

1,000

1.0

0.33

0.33

+333

1,500

1.0

0.00

0.00

0

'Rounded tu the

ne~rei\

whole number.

growing. Table 53.3 shows cakulations of population growth rate for a hypothetical population growing according to the logistic model, with T......., "" 1.0 per individual per year. Notice that the overall population gro....rth rate is highest, +375 individuals per year, when the population size is 750, or half the carrying capacity. At a population size of 750, the per capita rate of increase remains relati\'e1y high (one-half the maximum rate), but there are more reproducing individuals (NJ in the population than at lower population sizes. The logistic model of population growth produces a sigmoid (S-shaped) growth curve when N is plotted over time (the red line in Figure 53,12). New individuals are added to the population most rapidly at intermediate population sizes, when there is not only a breeding population of substantial size, but also lots of available space and other resources in the environment. The population growth rate slows dramatically as N approaches K. Note that we haven't said anything yet about why the population growth rate slows as N approaches K For a population's growth rate to decrease, either the birth rate b must decrease, the death rate d must increase, or both. Later in the chapter, we will consider some of the factors affecting these rates.

The logistic Model and Real Populations The growth of laboratory populations of some small animals, such as beetles and crustaceans, and of some microorganisms, such as paramecia, yeasts, and bacteria, fits an S·shaped curve fairly well under conditions of limited resources (Figure S3.13a). These populations are grown in a constant environment lacking predators and competing species that may reduce growth of the populations, conditions that rarely occur in nature. 1184

UNIT !IGHT

Ecology

~

growth dN;10N d'

1,500 +-K::-~~I~,5OO=---+---:::""'------:

~

J c

•• 1,000

logIStIC growth dN~ION(',500-N) dr 1,500

500

o.j---:..,---~---~ o 15 5 '0 Number of generations

• Figure 53.12 Population growth predicted by the logistic model. The rate of populatIOn growth slows as population size lM approaches the wrying capaCity (K) of the environment. The red line shows logistic growth In a populatIOn where rnYl( == 1.0 and K .. 1,500 individuak. for comparison, the blue line illustrates a populattOO contlnuing to grow exponentially wrth the same r",.,..

Some of the basic assumptions built into the logistic model clearly do not apply to aU populations. The logistic model assumes that populations adjust instantaneously to growth and approach carrying capacity smoothly. In reality, there is often a lag time before the negative effects of an increasing population are realized.lffood becomes limiting for a population, for instance. reproduction will decline eventually, but females may use their energy reserves to continue reproducing for a short time. This may cause the population to overshoot its carrying capacity temporarily, as shown for the water fleas in Figure S3.13b. If the population then drops below carrying capacity, there will be a delay in population growth until the increased number of offspring are actually born. Still other populations fluctuate greatly, making it difficult even to define carrying capacity. We will examine some possible reasons for such fluctuations later in the chapter. The logistic model also incorporates the idea that regardless of population density, each individual added to a population has the same negative effect on population growth rate. However, some populations show an Allee effect (named after W. C. Allee, of the University of Chicago, who first described it), in which individuals may have a more difficult time surviving or reproducing if the population size is too small. For example, a single plant may be damaged by excessive wind ifit is standing alone, but it would be protected in a clump of individuals. The logistic model is a useful starting point for thinking about how populations grow and for constructing more complex models. The model is also important in conservation

~

i

..

1,000

E180 ~

•

800

E 0 ~

600

"w

400

,E

~ 60

200

z

!

.'

c

'. ':"':.-:.,: .,

120

..

well do these populations fit the logistic growth model?

'0 90

D

z

.. Figure 53.13 How

150

"@

'0

'.' .'

a

,E

a

30 O~'-r-~-~~-~~~-~-

5

10 Time (days)

(a) A Paramecium population in the lab. The growth of Paramecium aurelia in small cultures (black dots) closely approximates logistic growth (red curve) if the researcher maintains a constant environment

o

15

20

40

60

80 100 Time (days)

120

140

160

(b) A Daphnia population in the lab. The growth of a population of water fleas (Daphnia) in a smalilaboralory culture

(black dots) does not correspond well to the logistic model (red curve), This population overshoots the carrying capacity of its anificial environment before it settles down to an

approximately stable population size.

biology for predicting how rapidly a particular population might increase in numbers after it has been reduced to a small size and for estimating sustainable harvest rates for fish and wildlife populations. Conservation biologists can use the model to estimate the critical size below which populations of certain organisms, such as the northern subspecies of the white rhinoceros (Ceralotllerium simum), may become extinct (figure 53.14). Like any good starting hypothesis, the logistic model has stimulated research that has led to a better understanding of the factors affecting population growth.

The Logistic Model and Life Histories The logistic model predicts different per capita growth rates for populations of low or high density relative to the carrying

... Figure 53.14 White rhinoceros mother and calf. The two animals pictured here are members of the southern subspecies, which has a population of more than 10.000 individuals. The northern subspecies is critically endangered. with a population of fewer than 25 individuals.

capacity of the environment. At high densities, each individual has few resources available, and the population grows slowly. At low densities, per capita resources are relatively abundant, and the population grows rapidly. Different life history features are favored under each condition. At high population density, selection favors adaptations that enable organisms to survive and reproduce with few resources. Competitive ability and efficient use of resources should be favored in populations that are at or near their carrying capacity. (Note that these are the traits we associated earlier with iteroparity.) At low population density, adaptations that promote rapid reproduction, such as the production of numerous, small offspring, should be favored. Ecologists have attempted to connect these differences in favored traits at different population densities with the logistic growth model. Selection for life history traits that are sensitive to population density is known as K-selection, or densitydependent selection. In contrast, selection for life history traits that maximize reproductive success in uncrowded environments (low densities) is called r-selection, or densityindependent selection. These names follow from the variables ofthe logistic equation. K-selection is said to operate in populations living at a density near the limit imposed by their resources (the carrying capacity, Kj, where competition among individuals is relatively strong. Mature trees growing in an old-growth forest are an example of K-selected organisms. In contrast, r-selection is said to maximize r, the per capita rate of increase, and occurs in environments in which population densities are well below carrying capacity or individuals face little competition. Such conditions are often found in disturbed habitats. Like the concepts ofsemelparity and iteroparity, the concepts of K- and r-selection represent two extremes in a range ofactual life histories. The framework of K- and r-selection, grounded in the idea of carrying capacity, has helped ecologists to propose CHAPTE~ f1flY·TH~EE

Population Ecology

1185

alternative hypotheses oflife history evolution. These alternative hypotheses, in turn, have stimulated more thorough smdy of how factors such as disturbance, stress, and the frequency ofopportunities for successful reproduction affect the evolution oflife histories. They have also forced ecologists to address the importantquestion we alluded to earlier: \Vhydoes population gro\\1:h rate decrease as population size approaches carrying capacity? Answering this question is the focus of the next section. CONCEPT

CHECK

5J.4

Population regulation is an area of ecology that has many practical applications. In agriculture, a farmer may want to reduce the abundance ofinsect pests or stop the growth ofan invasive weed that is spreading rapidly. Conservation ecologists need to know what environmental factors create favorable feeding or breeding habitats for endangered species, such as the white rhinoceros and the whooping crane. Management programs based on population-regulating factors have helped prevent the extinction of many endangered species.

Population Change and Population Density

1. Explain why a population that fits the logistic growth

model increases more rapidly at intermediate size than at relatively small or large sizes. 2. When a farmer abandons a field, it is quickly colonized by fast-growing weeds. Are these species more likely to be K-selected or ,-selected species? Explain. 3. _'MUI 4 Add rows to Table 53.3 for three cases where N > K: N = 1,600, 1,750, and 2,000. What is the population growth rate in each case? In which portion of Figure 53.13b is the Daphnia population changing in a way that corresponds to the values you calculated? For suggested answers, see Appendix A,

r:i~:;~:c~~;~hat

regulate population growth are density dependent

In this section, we will apply biology's unifying theme of feedback reguiLltion (see Chapter 1) to populations, \Vhat environmental factors keep populations from growing indefinitely? Why are some populations fairly stable in size, while others, such as the Soay sheep on Hirta Island, are not (see Figure 53.1)?

To understand why a population stops growing, it is helpful to study how the rates of birth, death, immigration, and emigration change as population density rises. If immigration and emigration offset each other, then a population grows when the birth rate exceeds the death rate and declines when the death rate exceeds the birth rate. A birth rate or death rate that does not change with population density is said to be density independent. In a classic study of population regulation, Andrew Watkinson and John Harper, of the University of Wales, found that the mortality of dune fescue grass (Vulpia membranacea) is mainly due to physical factors that kill similar proportions of a local population, regardless of its density. For example, drought stress that arises when the roots of the grass are uncovered by shifting sands is a density-independent factor. In contrast, a death rate that rises as population density rises is said to be density dependent, as is a birth rate that falls with rising density. Watkinson and Harper found that reproduction by dune fescue declines as population density increases, in part because water or nutrients become more scarce. Thus, in this grass population, the key factors regulating birth rate are density dependent, while death rate is largely regulated by densityindependent factors. Figure 53.15 models how a population may stop increasing and reach equilibrium as a result ofvarious combinations of density-dependent and density-independent regulation.

DenSity-dependent birth rate Densityindependent death rate

Equilibrium density

Equilibrium density

Population denSity (a) Both birth rate and death rate change with population density.

Population density_

(b) Birth rate changes with population density while death rate is constant.

(c) Death rate changes with population density while birth rate is constant.

.. Figure 53.15 Determining equilibrium for population density. This simple model considers

UNIT EIGHT

Ecology

Equilibrium density

Population density_

onbj birth and death rates (immlgration and emigration rates are assumed to be either zero or equaQ,

1186

Densityindependent birth rate

1l 100

~

g'

,

'w 80

] ~

j!

60

C

[

40

nucleus, ....'here most ofttK> cetrs DNA is located; and (10) for a molecule, ~ DNA double helix. Your skctchcs can be ,try rough!

CHAPTER 2 Figure Questions Figure 2.2 The most significant dif(eren~ in thl' results .....ould be that the two CtdT"l'la saplings inside each gardl'n would sh()\l,' similar amounts o( dy· ing leaf tissue becauS(' a poisonous chemical released rrom!he Duroia trees would presumably reach the saplings via the air or soil and would not be blocked by the insect barrier. The Cedrela saplings planted outside the gar· dens .....ould not show damage unless Duroia trees were nearby. Also, any ants present on the unprotected Cedrela saplings inside the gardens would probably not be observed making injections into the leaves. However, formic acid would likely still be found in the ants' glands, as for most speeies of ants. Figure 2.9 Atomic number = 12; 12 protons, 12 electrons; three electron shells; 2 electrons in the valence shell Figure 2.16

Concept Check 1.2 1. An address pinpoints a location by tracking from broader to nano....·er categories-a state, dty, zip. street, and building number. This is analogous to the groups·subordinate-to-groups structure of biological taxonomy. 2. Natural selection staTU with the naturally occurring heritable variation in a population and thl'n "edits" the population as individuals with heritable traits better suiled to theenvironmenl survive and reproduu more successfully than Olhers.

,.

r------"....

Figure 2.19 The plant is submergN in .....ater (H:z/7lpldt if.s 'ollJ0\q'..911'11.

CHAPTER 3 Figure Questions Figure 3.6 Without h)"drogen bonds, water would behave like other small molecules, and the solid phase (icc) would be denser than liquid water. The ice would sink to the bottom, and because it would no longer insulate the whole body of water, it could freeze. Freezing would take a longer time be· cause the Antarctic is an ocean (the Southern Ocean), not a pond or lake, but the average annual temperature at the South Pole is -5O'C, so ewntualJy it

CHAPTER 4 Figure Questions Figure 4.2 Because the concentration of the reactants influences the equilibrium (as discussed in Chapter 2), there might be more HCN relative to CH 20, since there would be a higher concentration of the reactant gas that contains nitrogen. Figure 4.4

Na:

.p.

·s: Answers

A-2

~

•~

.. c

Figure 5.18

Figure 4.7

peptide¢'" ..,..,

H

H-C-H

~

~

I

Oll

1

H-C-C -C-H

HH-C-H I H

,

H Figure 4.10 Molecule b, because there are not only Ihe two electronegative oxygms of the carboxyl group, but also an oxygen on the next (carbonyl) carbon. All of theS(' oxygcns hdp make the bond belween the 0 and H of the -OH group more polar, thus making the dissociation of H- more likely. ~

Concept Check 4. t

..

gases ofthe primitive aunosphereon Earth demonstrated that Iife's molecules cook! initially have been synthesized from nonliving molecules. 2. The spark provides

•~ C

1. Amino acids are essential molecules for living organisms. Their synthesis from

energy needed for the inorganic molecules in the atmosphere to reacl with roch other. (You] learn more about encrg)' and cnemicalrt:aclions in Chaptcr8.}

Concept Check 4.2 1. H H /

,

H'"

'\-I

Concept Check 4.3 1. II has both an amino group (-NH 2), which makes it an amine, and a carboxyl group (-COO H), which makes it a carboxylic acid. 2. The ATP molecule loses a phosphate, becoming ADP. 3. 0 H 0 A chemical group that can act as a base has ~ I "y been replaced wilh a group that can act as an C- C-C acid, increasing the acidic properties of Ihe I \ \ molecule. The shape of the molecule would HO H OH also change.likdychanging the molecules with which it can interact.

Self-Quiz

·~i·

~A

~A

~

&""3

..

~(DUf

Figure 5.25 The green spiral is an

7. d

Si has four valence electrom, the.same number ascarbon. Therefore, silicon would be able to form long chains, induding branches, that could act as skektons for organic molecules. It would dearly do this much better than neon (with no valence electrons} or aluminum (with three valence electrons).

Figure Questions Figure 5.4

helix.

lipids, and nucleic acids 2. Nine, with one water required to hydrolyze each connected pair of monomers 3. The amino acids in the green bean protein are released in hydrolysis reactions and incorporated into other proteins in dehydration reactions.

Concept Check 5.2

1. Both have a g1rcerol molecule attached to fatty acids. The glrcerol of a fat has Ihree fatty acids attached, whcreas the glycerol of a phospholipid is attached to two fatty acids and one phosphate group. 2. Human sex hor· mones are steroids. a type of hydrophobic compound. 3. The oil droplet membrane could consiSI of a single layer of phospholipids rather than a bilayer, because an arrangement in which the hydrophobic tails of Ihe membrane pbospholipids were in contact with the hydrocarbon regions of the oil molccules would be more stable.

Concept Check 5.4 1. Thc function of a protein is a consequence of its specific shape, which is lost when a protein becomes denatured. 2. Secondary structure involves hydrogen bonds between atoms of the polypeptide backbone. Tertiary structure involves bonding between aloms of the R groups of the amino acid subunits. 3. Primary structure, the amino acid sequence, affecls the secondary structure, which affects Ihe tertiary structure, which affects the quaternary structure (if any). In short, Ihe amino acid sk

''''''

Iu¥f"",10t

~.nO~IDtS

~" """'""

Tj""D?lln~~ ~,·d.'('.II~l:A.1£S

Ufj~

'Fa~ tltj~l

T~:"ejl~~tWI.

frolrinl:

Itfl\l~G.el~$

/b{jpcp-kde~

P~pHde bo~,"

Nu.dto;,deS

1b1'll"/.4clttlhik5

~inter 11.t.. ~

~ld~

ILcicl,

g.

OIl

j ,

OIl

Or~in4J

Ij"~l.S

,

S'

strAllO

E!.tv

S'

I

C,mpl"',"",y &tr4J1d

CHAPTER 6 Figure Questions Figure 6.7 A phospholipid is

flIir at Figure 13.9 Yes, Each of the chromosomes shown in telophase [ has one nonrecombinant chromatid and one recombinant chromatid. Therefore. eight possible sets of chromosomes can be generated for the cell on the left

and eight for the cell on the right.

"P.1.irrJ

hDm6('T

eI\r~ll1o.k1fl1tS tfcrc calif Il'\1U. u.pa. hD..p1c:id ~ All ~ arJ b1ut. ~ -tn,t+nu flIIl1t up It d<pad set.

1ht

Figure 13.10 The chromosomes aris-

ing from chromatids oflhe unlabeled chromosome would be expected to be-

have exactly like thoSlll-fDund

: 1/4.j€llDw-uril1lJed: 1JI ~ret:Jl-r~ : IN tj'W'- uri'li'.leJ 1

1

'Phtnoi'jpit:-

1 mti ()

1

Yes, this cross would also have allowed Mendel to make different predictions for the two hypotheses, thereby allowing him to distinguish the correct one. Figure 14.10 Your elassmate would probably point out that the F) generation hybrids show an intermediate phenotype between those of the homozygous parents, which supports the blending hypothesis. You could respond that crossing the F, hybrids results in the reappearance of the white phenotype, rather than identical pink offspring, which fails to support the idea of blending traits during inheritanee. Figure 14.11 Both the t'- and I B al· leles arc dominant to the i allele, which results in no attached carbohydrate. The ,'" and alleles arc codominant; both arc expressed in the phenotype of ''''I Bheterozygotes, who have type AB blood. Figure 14.13

2. According to the law of independent assortment' 25 plants (y,. of the offspring) ar1e 'tt Iet1.ST jw, 'lctM;lIe +rOods

-= h, =k '=

=-

*

It or % Answers

A- JO

Concept Che
CHAPTER 15

Figure Questions Figure 15.2 The ratio would be I yellow-round: 1green-round: I yellowwrinkled: I green-wrinkled. Figure 15.4 About Y. of the F2 offspring would have red eyes and about 'I. would have white eyes. About half of the white-eyed flies would be female and half would be male; about half of the red-eyed flies would he female. Figure 15.7 All the males would becolorblind, and all the females would be carriers. Figure 15.9 The two largest classes would still be the parental-type offspring, but now they would be gray-vestigial and black-normal bc 5' C • phosphate. Thus, thern'o dircctionsarl'distinguishable, which is what we mean when we say that the strands have diR'Ctionality. (Review Figure 165 if necessary.) Figure 16.22 The cens in the mutant would probably have the same defects in meiosis that were seen in this experiment, such as the failureofconderu;in to beconcentrated in a small region in the nucleus. Thc defect in the rn'o mutants is essentially the same: In the mutant described ill the experiment, the kinase doesn't function PTOpl-rly; ill the n,'wly diSCOVl1'ed mutant, the kinase could not phosphorylate the correct amino add because that amino add is missing.

Answers

A-12

~

•~

.. C

Concept Ch~k 16.1 1. Chargaffs rules state that in DNA, the percentages of A and T and of G and Care l'SSrokaryotic cells generally lack the internal compartmentalization of eukaryotic cells. Prokaryotic genomes have much less DNA than eukaryotic genomes, and most of this DNA is contained in a single ring-shaped chromosome located in the nucleoid rather than within a true membrane-bounded nucleus. In addition, many prokaryotes also have plasm ids, small ring-shaped DNA molecules containing a few genes. 3. Bl'Causc prokaryotic populations evolve rapidly in response to their environment, it is likely that bacteria from endospores that formed 4tl years ago would already be adapted to the polluted conditions. Hence, at least initially, these bacteria would probably grow better than bacteria from endospores that formed ISO years ago, when the lake was not polluted.

Answers

A-22

Concept Cheur nubitional modes: phcroautdrophic, phoInhcU'rotrophic (Wlique 10 prokaryotes), chemoautotrophic (unique to prokaryotes), and chemohcterotrophic. 2. Otemoheteroouphy; the bacterium must rely on chemiell SOUlU'S of energy, since it is not exposed to light, and it must be a heteroouph if it requires an organic SOlllU' of carbon rather than COz (or anothcr inotpnic SOlllU', like bicarbonate). 3. If hu· mans could fix nitrogen, we could build proteins using atmospheric N2 and lK'Ilce would not need toeat high-protein foods such as meat or fish. Ourdiet would, however, need to include a sourceofcarbon, along with minerals and water. Thus, a typical meal might consist ofcarbohydratl'S as a carbon source, along with fruits and vegetables to provide essential minerals (and additional carbon). Concept Che
A-27

Appendix A

other group of eukaryotes, choanollagellates and animals should share other traits that are not found in other eukaryotes. The data described in Oare consistent with this prediction. Figure 32.6 The sea anemone embryos could be infused with a protein that can bind to l3-catenin's DNA-binding site, thereby limiting the extent to which l3-catenin activates the transcrip· tion of genes necessary for gastrulation. Such an experiment would provide an independent check of the results shown in step 4. Figure 32.10 Ctenophora is the sister phylum in this figure, while Cnidaria is the sister phylum in Figure 32.11. Concepl Check 32.1 1. In most animals, the zygote undergoes cleavage, which leads to the formation of a blastula. Next, in gastrulation, one end of the embryo folds in· ward, producing layers of embryonic tissue. As the cells of these lay

Concept Check 34.2 1. Hagfishes have a head and skull made of cartilage, plus a small brain, sensory organs, and tooth-like structures. They have a neural crest, gill slits, and more extensive organ systems. In addition, hagfishes have slime glands that ward off predators and may repel competing scavengers. 2. My{{okunmingia. Fossils of this organism provide evidence of ear capsules and e)'e capsules; these structures are part of the skulL Thus. My{{okunmingia is considered a craniate, as are humans. HaikOu£lIa did not have a skull. 3. Such a finding suggests that early organisms with a head were favored by namral selection in several different evolutionary lineages. However, while a logical argument can be made that having a head was advantageous, fossils alone do not constitute proof. Concept Check 34.3 1. Lampreys have a round, rasping mouth, which they usc to attach to fish. Conodonts had two sets of mineralized dental clements, which may have been used to impale prq'and cut it into smaller pieces. 2. In annorl-djawk'SS vertebrates, bone served as external armor that may have provided protection from predators. Some species also had mineralized mouthparts, which coold be used for either predation or scavenging. Still others had mineralized fin rars. which may have enabled them to swim more rapidly and with greater steering control. Concept Che£k 34.4 1. Both arc gnathostomesand have jaws, four clusters of Hoxgenes, enlarged forebrains, and lateral line systems. Shark skeletons consist mainly of cartilage, whereas tuna have bony skeletons. Sharks also have a spiral valve. Tuna have an operculum and a swim bladder, as well as nexible rays supporting their fins. 2. Aquatic gnathostomes have jaws (an adaptation for feeding)

A-29

Appendix A

"• ~ ~

-

fur""" '--

Ornrth~"

,

"l

d~t I 1I \ I I

......., '

1 ))

1) ) ) I , ) I ) )

Concept Check 50.2 1. Statocysts detect the animal's orientation with respect to gravity, providing information that is essential in environments such as these, where light cues are absent. 2. As a sound that changes gradually from a very low to a very high pitch 3. The stapes and the other middle car bones transmit vibrations from the tympanic membrane to the oval window. Fusion ofthese bones, as occurs in otosclerosis, would block this transmission and result in hearing loss.

-90"

-45'

0'

I Optic

45'

90'

Fovea disk

Position along retina (in degrees away from fovea) The answer shows the actual distribution of rods and cones in the human eye. Your graph may differ but should have the follOWing properties: Only

Answers

A·W

cones at the fovea; fewer cones and more rods at both ends of the x-axis: no photoreceptors in the optic disk.

CHAPTER 51

~

•~

.. C

Figure Questions Figure 51.3 The fixed action pattern based on the sign stimulus of a red belly ensures that the male will chase away any invading males of his species. By chasing away such males, the defender decreases the chance that eggs laid in his nl'Sting territory will be fertilized by another male. Figure 51.10 There should be no effect. Imprinting is an innate behavior that is carried out anew in each generation. Assuming the nest was not disturbed, the offspring of the Lorenz followeNi would imprinlon the mother goose. Figure 51.11 Perhaps the wasp doesn't use visual cues. It might also be that ....-asps recognize objects native to their environment, but not foreign objects, such as the pinecones. linbcrgen addressed these ideas before carrying out th., pinl'COne study. \'({hen he swept away the pebbles and sticks around the nest, the wasps could no longer find their nests.lfhe shifted the natural objects in their natural arrangement, the shift in the landmarks caused a shift in the site to which the wasps returned. Finally, if the natural objects around the nest site were replaced with pinecones while the wasp was in the burrow, the wasp nevertheless found her way back to th., nest site. Figure 51.14 Courtship song generation must be coupled to courtship song recognition. Unless the genes that control generation of particular song elements also control recognition, the hybrids might be unlikely to find mating partneNi, depending on what aspects of the songs are important for mate recognition and acceptance. Figure 51.15 It might be that the birds require stimuli during flight to exhibit their migratory preference. If this were true, the birds would show the same orientation in the funnel experiment despite their distinct genetic programming. Figure 51.28 It holds true for some, but not all individuals. If a parent has more than one reproductive partner, the offspring of different partneNi will have a coefflcient of relatedness less than 0.5. Concept Check S 1.1 1. It is an example of a fixed action pattern. The proximate explanation might be that nudging and rolling are released by the sign stimulus of an object outside the nest, and th.· behavior is carried to completion once initiated. Th., ultimate explanation might be that ensuring that eggs remain in the nest increases the chance of producing healthy offspring. 2. Circannual rhythms are typically based on the cycles oflight and dark in the environment. As the global climate changes, animals that migrate in response to these rhythms may shift toa location before or after local environmental conditions are optimal for reproduction and survival. 3. There might be selective pressure for other prey fish to detect an injured fish because the source of the injury might threaten them as well. There might be selection for predators to be attracted to the alarm substance because they would be more likely to encounter crippled prey than would be predatoNi that can't respond. Fish with adequate defenses might show no chang.' because they have a selective advantage if they do not waste energy responding to the alarm substance. Concept Check 51.2 1. Natural sckction would tend to favor convergence in color pattern because a predator learning to associate a pattern with a sting or bad taste would avoid all other individuals with that same color pattern, regardless of species. 2. Forgetting the location of some caches, which consist of pine seeds buried in the ground, might benefit the nutcracker by increasing the number of pines growing in its habitat. This example points out one of the difficulties in making simplistic assumptions about the purpose of a behavior. 3. You might move objects around to establish an abstract rule. such as ·past landmark A, the same distance as A is from the starting point" while maintaining a minimum of fixed metric relationships, that is, avoiding having the food directly adjacent to or a set distance from a landmark. As you might surmise, designing an informative experiment of this kind is not easy. Concept Check 51.3 1. B.'cause this geographic variation corresponds to differences in pn'y availability between two garter snake habitats, it seems likely that snakes with characteristics enabling them to feed on the abundant prey in their locale would have had increased survival and reproductive success. and thus natural selection would have resulted in the divergent foraging behaviors. 2. Courtship is easier to study because it is essential for reproduction, but A-41

Appendix A

not for growth, development, and survival. Mutations disrupting many other behaviors would be lethal. 3. You would need to know the percentage of time that unrelated individuals behave identically when performing this behavior. Concept Check 51.4 1. Ccrtaintyof paternity is higher with external fertilization. 2. Natural sclection acts on genetic variation in the population. 3. Because females \\"ould now be present in much larger numbeNi than males, all three types of males should have some reproductive success. Nevertheless. since the advantage that the blue-thraats rely on-a limited number of females in their territory-will be absent, the yellow-throats are likely to increase in frequency in the short term. Concept Check 51.5 1. Reciprocal altruism, the exchange ofhclpful behavioNi for future similar [x,haviors, can explain cooperative behavioNi bety,cen unrelatl'd animals, though often the behavior has some potential benefit to the benefactor as \\"ell. 2. Yes. Kin selection does not require any recognition or awareness of relatedness. 3. The older individual cannot be the beneficiary because he or she cannot have extra offspring. However, the cost is low for an older individual performing the al· truistic act because that person has alfl'3dy reproduced (but perhaps is still caring for a child or grandchild). There can therefore be selection for an altruistic act by a postreproductive individual that benefits a young relative. Self.Quiz

1. d 8.

,2. a ••, ,•, ,,,

3. c

4. a

5. c

7. c

6. b

,

. -.

.. "

,

,,

.

•

"

You could measure the size of mussels that oystercatchers successfully open and compare that with the size distribution in the habitat.

(HAPTER 52 Figure Queslions Figure 52.6 Some factoNi, such as fire, are relevant only for terrestrial systems. At fiNit glance, water availability is primarily a terrestrial factor, too. However, species living along the intertidal zone of oceans or along the edge of lakes suffer desiccation as well. Salinity stress is important for spl'Cies in some aquatic and terrestrial systems. Oxygen availability is an important factor primarily for species in some aquatic systems and in soils and sediments. Figure 52.8 When only urchins were removed, limpets may have increased in abundance and reduced seaweed cover somewhat (the difference between the purple and blue lines on the graph). Figure 52.14 Dispersallimitations, the activities of people (such as a broad-scale conveNiion of forests to agriculture or selective harvesting), or other factoNi listed in Figure 52.6 Concept Check 52. t 1. &ology is the scientific study of the interactions between organisms and their environment: environmemalism is advocacy for the environment. Ecology provides scientific undeNitandingthalcan inform decision making about environmental issues. 2. Interactions in ecological time that affect the survival or reproduction of organisms can result in changes to the population's gene pool and ultimately result in a change in the population on an evolutionary time scale. 3. If the fungicides are used together, fungi will likely evolve resistance to all four much more quickly than if the fungicides are used indi\~dually at different times. Concepl Check 52.2 1. a. Humans could transplant a species to a new area that it could not previously reach because of a geographic barrier (dispersal change). b. Humans

could change a spedes' biotk interactions by eliminating a predator or herbivore spedes, such as sea urchins, from an area. 2. The sun·s unequal heating of Earth's surfaa' produces temperature variations between the warmer tropics and cold,'r polar regions, and it inf1uences the movement of air masses and thus the distribution of moiSll.lre at differenllatiludes. 3. One test would be to build a fence around a plot of land in an area that has trees of that species, excluding all deer from the plot. You could then mmpare the abundance of tree seedlings inside and outside the fenced plot over time.

them. The flocking species is probably clumped, since most individuals probably live in one of the clumps (flocks).

2.

Conn'pt Check 52.3 1, Rapidchanges in salinity can cause salt stress in many organisms. 2. In the oceanic pelagic zone, the ocean bottom lies below the photic zone, so there is too little light 10 support benthic algae or rooted plants. 3. In a river below a dam, the fish are more likely to bespedes that prefer colder water. In summer, the deep layers of a reservoir are mlder than the surface layers, so a river below a dam will be colder than an undammed river.

,

~

•~

Concept Check 52,4

Self-Quiz 1, c 2. d 3, a

10.

A type HI survivorship curve is most likely because very few of the young probably survive. 3. If an animal is captured by attracting it with food, it may be more likely to be recaptured if it seeks the same food. The number of marked animals recaptured (x) would be an overestimate, and because the population size (N) = mnlx, N would be an underestimate. Alternatively, if an animal has a negative experience during capture and learns from that experience, it may be less Iikdyto be recaptured. In thiscase,x would be an underestimate and N would be an overestimate.

Concept Check 53.2 1. The constant, spring-f,od stream. In more constant physical conditions, where populations are more stable and competition for resources is more likely, larger well·provisioned young, which are more typical of iteroparous species, have a better chance of sun~ving. 2. By preferentially investing in the eggs it lays in the nest, the peacock wrasse increases their probabiUty of survival. The eggs it disperses widely and does not provide carl' for are less likely to survive, at least some of the time, but n'quirc a lower investment by the adults. (1n this sense, the adults avoid the risk of placing all their eggs in one basket) 3. If a parent's survival is compromised greatly by bearing young during times ofstress, the animal's fitness may increase ifit abandons its (llrrent young and survives to produce healthier roungat a later time.

4. d 5. b 6. d 7. d 8. ,

/$

/ / /'

./ o

.. C

1, Higher average temperature in deserts 2. Answers will vary by location but should be based on the information and maps in Figure 52.21. How much your local area has been altered from its natural state will influence how much it reflects the expected characteristics of your biome, particularly the expected plants and animals. 3. Northern coniferous forest is likely to replace tundra along the boundary between these biomes. To see why, note that northern mniferous foresl is adjacent to tundra throughout North America. norlhern Europe, and Asia (see Figure 52.19) and that the temperature range for norlhern mniferous forest is just above that for tundra (see Figure 52.20).

Concept Check 53.3

/' 2S

SO

75'

(0{)

Kelp .bund.nce ('To CbVer) Based on what you learned from Figure 52.8 and on the positive rdationship you obscrv,-d in the field bd:wccn kelp abundance and otkr d('IlSity, you couJd hypothesize that otters lower sea urchin density, redUdng feeding of the urchins on kelp. (HAPTER 53 Figure Questions Figure 53A The dispersion of the penguins would likely appear clumped as you fJewover densely JXlpulated islands and sparsely JXlpulated ocean. Figure 53.8 If male European kestrels provided no parental Glre. brood size should not affect their survival. Therefore, the tlrree bars representing male survival in Figure 53.8 should haw simUar heights. In contrast, female survival should shU dcc{inium (Pa) Radium (Ra) Rodon (Rn) Rhenium (Re) Rhodi"m (Rh) Rubidium (Rb) Ruthenium (Ru) RutherfonJi"m (RI) Sanu.rium (Sm) Scandium (Sc) Se.borgium (Sg) Selenium (Se)

"• "" M

." ~

.".

"... "" M

."

""" """"

Silicon (Si) Si!veT (Ag) Sodium (N.) StTOmium (S.) Sulfur (S) Tantalum (Ta) Trchneti"m (Te) Tellurium (Te) Terbium fIb) Tliallium (1'1) Thorium (Th) Thulium (Tm) Tin (Su) Titanium (Til T"ngsten (W) Vranium (V) V.n.dium (V) Xenon (Xe) Ynerbium (Yb) Ymi"m(Y) Zinc (Zn) Zirconium (Z.)

8-1

The Metric System Mctric.to-English

E

•• ... '"v ':da (brachiopods) Phylum Rotifera (rotifers) Phylum Cycliophora (C)'diopnorans) Phylum Mollusca (molluscs) Class Polyplacophora (cnitons) C1ass Gastropoda (gutropods) Class Bivalvia (bivalves) Class Cephalopoda (cephalopods)

Ecdysozoa (ecd)'sozoans) Phylum Annelida (segmented worms) Class OHgochaeta (oligochaetes) Class Polrchaeta (polychaetes) Class Hirudinea (leeches) Phylum Acanthocephala (spiny-headed worms) Phylum Loricifera (Ioriciferans) Phylum Priapula (priapulans) Phylum Nematoda (roundworms) Phylum Arthro!X>da (This survey groups arthropods into a single ph)1um. but some zoologists now split the arthropods into multiple ph)'la.) Subph)1um Cheliceriformes (horseshoe crabs, arachnids) Subph)1um Myria!X>da (millipedes, centipedes) Subph)1um Hexa!X>da (insects, springtails) Subph)1um CrustaCN (crustaceans) Phylum Tardigrada (tardigrades) Phylum Onychophora (velvet ....orms) Deuterostomia (deuterostomes) Phylum Hemichordata (hemichordates) Phylum Echinodermata (echinoderms) Oass Asteroidea (sea stars) Oass Ophiuroidea (brittle stars) Oass Echinoideil (sea urchins and sand dollars) Oass Crinoidea (see lilies) Class Concentriq-doidea (sea daisies) Oass Holothuroidea (sea cucumbers) Phylum Chordata (chordates) Subph)1um Cephalochordata (cephalochordales: lancelets) Subphylum Urochrodata (urochordates: tunicates) Subphylum Craniata (craniates) Oass Myxini (hagfishes) Class Cephalaspidomorphi (lampreys) Class Chondrichthyes (sharks, rays, chimaeras) Class Acinopterygii (ray-finned fishes) Class Actinistia (coclacanths) Vertebrates Class Dipnoi (lungfishes) Class Amphibia (amphibians) Class Reptilia (tuataras, lizards, snakes, turtles, crocodilians, birds) Class Mammalia (mammals)

Oassification of11fe

E-2

I'HOTO CREDITS COH'r Image Chris

Fo~/Corbis

Unit Opening Interviews Unit One Stuart Brinin: Unit Two Zach \'eilleu~, Rockefeller University; Unit Three Maria Nemchuk; Unit Four Justin Ide; Unit Five Brent Nicastro; Unit Si~ Noah Berger Photography; Unit Seven Sk1, 50.10, and 50.11 are also from Human AllalOmyand Physiology. 5'" ed. Copyright@2oo1 Pearson Education, Inc., publishingas Pearson Ilenjamin Cummings, The following figures are adapted from Gerard I. Tortora, &rdell R. Funke, and Christine L Case, 1998. Microbiology; An 'ntrodl,etion, 6lh ed. Copyright © 1998 Pearson Education, Inc.. publishing as Pearson Benjamin Cummings: 27.6a and 43.8, The following figures are adapted from M. W. Nabors, 'ntroduelion 10 Bolany, Copyright e 2001- Pearson Education, Inc., publishing as Pearson Benjamin Cummings: 30.4, 3O.l3j, 39.13, and 41.2 (~'Cnler). The fullowing figurL'S are adapted from L. G. Mitchell, J. A, Mutchmor. and W. D. Dolphin. Zoology. Copyright tl1988 Pearson Education. Inc., publishing as Pearson Benjamin Cummings:41.8,44.9, and 51.11. Thefol· lowing figurcts. Science 185: 747·756. fig. 7. © 1974 American Association for the Ad"ancement of Science, Chapter 41 41.5 Source: R. W. Smithellset al. 1980. Possible pren~ntion of neural· tube defects by periconceptual vitamins supplementation. rancet 315: 339-340; 41.10 Adapted from R. A. Rhoades and R.G. Pllanzer, Human Physiology. 3/e, fig, 22·1, p. 666. Copyright f:l 1996. Reprinted by pennission of Brooks/Cole. a div'ision of Thomson learning: www.thomsonrights.comFax800732-2215:41.23 Adapted from I. Marx, "Cellular Warriors at the Battle of the Bulge; Science, Yol. 299, p. 846, Copyright © 2003 American Association for the Ad"ancement of Science. lUustration: Katharine Sutliff. Chapter 42 42.31 Adapted from S. L. Lindstedt et a1. 1991. Runningenergetics in the pronghorn antelope. Nature 353: 748-750. Copyright l:I 1991. Reprinted by permission of Macmillan Publishers, l.td. Chapler 43 43.5 Adaptxpression of a single antimicrobial peptide can restore wild-type resistance to infection in im· muno-deficient Drosophila mutants," f'NAS. 99: 2IS2·2157, figs. 2a and 4a. Copyright l:I2002 National Academy of Sciences, US.A. Used with permission. Chapler 44 44.6 Kangaroo r-dt data adaptt...f frnm K. 3. Schmidt-Nielson. 1990. Animal PhJsiology: Maptatioll aHd flwironmem, 4 th ,-od., p. 339. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press: 44.7 Adapted from K. B. Schmidt-Nielsen et al. 1958. Extrarenal salt excretion in birds. AmericanJoumal ofPhysiology 193: 101107; 44.20 Table adapted from P. M, T Deen ct a!. 1994. Requirement of human renal water channel aquaporin-2 fnr ,."sopressin·dependent Ctln'-'entr-"tion in urine. SeiCHeI' 264: 92-95. table I. Copyright © 1994. Reprinted with permission from AAAS: 44 EDC (visual summary) Adapted from W. S. Beck eta1. 1991. Uft: An introduction to BiokJgy, p. M9. Copyright@ 1991 HarperColtins. Reprinted by permissinn of Pearson Education. Chapler 45 45.4 j, M. Horowitz. et al. 1980. The Response of Single Melanophores to Extracellular and Intracellular Iontophoretic Injection of Melanocyte·Stimulating Hormone, &1docrinology 106, nl, fig. B. (0 1980 by The Endocrine Society; 45.22 A. Jost, Recherches sur la differenciatinn sexuelle de ['embryon de lapin (Studies on the sexual differentiation of the rabbit embryo}. Arch. Anat. Microsc. Morpho/. Exp (Archh'Cs danatomie microscopiqueetde morphologieexpfrimentale). 36: 271-316, 1947. Chapter 46 -1(,.9 Figure adapted from R, R. Snook and D. I. Hosken. 20C». Sperm death and dumping in Drowphila.. Natlm' 428: 939-941, fig. 2. Copyright ~ 20C». Reprinted by pennission of Macmillan Publishers, ltd. Chapter 47 47.18 From Wolpert. ct al. 1998, Principles of Development, fig. 8,25, p. 251 (right). Oxford, Oxford University Press. By permission of Oxford Uni,,,rsity Press; 47.21a Copyright © 1989 frnm Molecular Biology ofthe Cell, 2M ed by Bruce Alberts ct al. Reproduced by permission of Garland Science/Taylor & Francis Books, Inc.; 47.21b From Hiroki Nishida, "Cell lineage analysis in ascidian embryos by intracellular injection of a traceren~yme: ilL Up tothe tissue r,-'Strictt...fstage," DevelopmentalBioiogy, Vol. 121, p. 526, June. 1987. Cnpyrigllt ~ 1987 with permission from Elsevier, Inc.; 47.22 Copyright © 2002 from Molecular Biology ofthe Cell, 4 th ed. by Bruce Alberts ct aI., fig. 21.17, p. 1172. Reproduced by permission of Garland Sciencerraylor & Fr-~ncis 3
chose meet

e/eh

bot

g i

game ice hit

k, kw 'g

bo> quick song

0

rohe

0

0'

oy

boy "y

,

,h th

shell thin

0

hoot

uJuh

op

, I

wo = primary accent

, = secondary accent

5' cap A modified form of guanine nucleotide added onto the nucleotide at the 5' end of a pre-mRNA molecule. A site One of a ribosome's three binding sites for tRNA during translation, The A site holds the tRNA carrying the next amino acid to be added to the polypeptide chain, (A stands for aminoacyl tRNA,) ABC model A model of flower formation identifying three classes of organ identity genes that dired formation of the four types of floralorgans, abiotic (5.' -bi -ot'-ik} Nonliving; referring to physical and chemical properties of an environment. abortion The termination of a pregnancy in progress. abscisic acid (ABA) (ab-sis'·ik} A plant hormone that slows growth, often antagonizing actions of growth hormones. Two of its many effects are to promote seed dormancy and facilitate drought tolerance. absorption The third stage of food processing in animals: the uptake of small nutrient molecules by an organism's body. absorption spectrum The range of a pigment's ability to absorb various wavelengths of light; also a graph of such a range. abyssal zone (uh-bis' -ul) The part of the ocean's benthic wne between 2,000 and 6,000 m deep.

G-t

acanthodian (ak' ·an-thii'-d e·un) Any of a group of ancient jawed aquatic vertebrates from the Devonian period. accessory fruit A fruit, or assemblage of fruits, in which the fleshy parts are derived largely or entirely from tissues other than the ovary. acclimatization (uh-ktJ' -muh-tJ -za'-shun} Physiological adjustment to a change in an environmental factor. acetyl CoA Acetyl coenzyme A; the entry compound for the citric acid cycle in cellular respiration, formed from a fragment of pyruvate attached to a coenzyme. acetylcholine (as' -uh-til-ko'-len} One of the most common neurotransmitters; functions by binding to receptors and altering the permeability of the postsynaptic membrane to specific ions, either depolarizing or hyperpolarizing the membrane. acid A substance that increases the hydrogen ion concentration of a solution, acid precipitation Rain, snow, or fog that is more acidic than pH 5.2. acoelomate (uh·s(i' -Iii-mat) A solid-bodied animal lacking a cavity between the gut and outer body wall. acquired immunity A vertebrate-specific defense that is mediated by B lymphocytes (B cells) and T lymphocytes (I cells}. It exhibits specificity, memory, and self-nonself recogni· tion. Also called adaptive immunity. acrosomal reaction (ak' -ruh-sOm'-uJ) Ihe discharge of hydrolytic enzymes from the acrosome, a vesicle in the tip ofa sperm, when the sperm approaches or contacts an egg. acrosome (ak'·ruh-sOm) A vesicle in the tip of a sperm containing hydrolytic enzymes and other proteins that help the sperm reach the

,,,.

actin (ak'-tin) A globular protein that links into chains, two of which twist helically about each other, forming microfilaments (actin filaments) in muscle and other kinds of ceUs. action potential A rapid change in the membrane potential of an excitable cell. caused by stimulus-triggered, selective opening and closing of voltage-sensitive gates in sodium and potassium ion channels. action spectrum A graph that profiles the relative effectiveness of different wavelengths of radiation in driving a particular process. activation energy The amount of energy that reactants must absorb before a chemical reo action will start; also caUed free energy of activation. activator A protein that binds to DNA and stimulates gene transcription. In prokaryotes, activators bind in or near the promoter; in eukaryotes, activators bind to control ele· ments in enhancers.

active immunity Long-lasting immunity conferred by the action of B cells and I cells and the resulting Band T memory cells specific for a pathogen, Active immunity can develop as a result of natural infection or immunization. active site Ihe specific portion of an enzyme that binds the substrate by means of multiple weak interactions and that forms the pocket in which catalysis occurs. active transport The movement of a substance across a cell membrane, with an expenditure ofenergy, against its concentration or electrochemical gradient; mediated by specific transport proteins, actual evapotranspiration The amount of water transpired by plants and evaporated from a landscape over a given period of time, usually measured in millimeters and estimated for a year. adaptation Inherited characteristic of an organism that enhances its survival and reproduction in specific environments. adaptive radiation Period of evolutionary change in which groups of organisms form many new species whose adaptations allow them to fill vacant ecological roles in their communities. adenylyl cyclase (uh-den' -uh-lil) An enzyme that converts ATP to cyclic AMP in response to a signal. adhesion The attraction between different kinds of molecules. adipose tissue A connective tissue that insulates the body and serves as a fuel reserve; contains fat-storing cells called adipose cells. adrenal gland (uh-dre' -nul) One of two endocrine glands located adjacent to the kidneys in mammals. Endocrine cells in the outer portion (cortex) respond to ACTH by secreting steroid hormones that help main· tain homeostasis during long-term stress. Neurosecretory cells in the central portion (medulla} secrete epinephrine and norepinephrine in response to nervous inputs triggered by short-term stress. adrenocorticotropic hormone (ACTH) A tropic hormone that is produced and secreted by the anterior pituitary and that stimulates the production and secretion of steroid hormones by the adrenal cortex. aerobic respiration A catabolic pathway that consumes oxygen (021 and organic molecules, producing AIP. This is the most efficient catabolic pathway and is carried out in most eukaryotic cells and many prokaryotic organisms. afferent arteriole (aP -er-ent) In the kidney, the blood vessel supplying a nephron. age structure The relative number ofindividu· als of each age in a population.

aggregate fruit A fruit derived from a single flower that has more than onl' carpeL agonistic behavior (a' -gii-nis'-tik) In animals, an often ritualized contest that determines which competitor gains access to a resource, such as food or mates. AIDS (acquired immunodeficiency syndrome) The symptoms and signs present during the late stages of HIV inf~tion, defined by a spedfied reduction in the number ofT cells and the appearance of characteristic secondary infections. alcohol fermentation Glycolysis followed by the conversion of pyruvate to carbon dioxide and ethyl alcohoL aldosterone (al-dos'·tuh-rOn) A steroid hormone that acts on tubules of the kidney to regulate the transport of sodium ions (Na +) and potassium ions (K+}. alimentary canal (ai' -uh-men'-tuh-re} A digestive tract consisting of a tube running between a mouth and an anus; also called a complete digestive tract. allantois (ai-an'-to'-is) One offour extra· embryonic membranes; serves as a repository for the embryo's nitrogenous waste and funetions in gas exehange. allele (uh-le'-ul} Any of the alternative versions ofa gene that produce distingUishable phenotypic eff~ts. allopatric speciation (al' -uh-pat'·rik) The formation of new species in populations that are geographically isolated from one another. allopolyploid (al' -0-1'01'-e-ployd} A fertile individual that has more than two chromosome sets as a result of two different species interbreeding and combining their chromosomes. allosteric regulation The binding of a regulatory molecule to a protein at one site that af· f~ts the function of the protein at a different site. alpha (a) helix (ai' -fuh he' -Iiks) A spiral shape constituting one form of the secondary structure of proteins, arising from a specific pattern of hydrogen bonding. alternation of generations A life cycle in which there is both a multicellular diploid form, the sporophyte, and a multicellular haploid form, the gametophyte; characteristic of plants and SOml' algae. alternative RNA splicing A type of eukaryotic gene regulation at the RNA-processing level in which different mRNA mol~ules are produced from the same primary transcript, depending on which RNA segments arc treated as nons and which as introns. altruism (aI' -tr(Hz-um) Selflessness; behavior that reduces an individual's fitness while increasing the fitness of another individual. alveolate (ai-vI" -uh-Iet} A protist with membrane·bounded sacs (alveoli} located just under the plasma membrane. alveolus (al-ve'-uh-lus} (plural, alveoli) One of the dead-end, multilobed air sacs where gas exchange occurs in a mammalian lung. Alzheimer's disease (alts'·hi ·men) An agerelated dementia (mental deterioration) characterized by confusion, memory loss, and other symptoms.

amacrine cell (am' ·uh·krin) A neuron ofthe retina that hdps inll-grate information befor(' it is sent to the brain. amino acid (uh-men'-o) An organic mol~ule possessing both carboxyl and amino groups. Amino acids seT1fe as the monomers of polypeptides. amino group A chemical group consisting of a nitrogen atom bonded to two hydrogen atoms; can act as a base in solution, accepting a hydrogen ion and acquiring a charge of I +. aminoacyl.tRNA synthetase An enzyme that joins each amino acid to the appropriate tRNA. ammonia A small, very toxic molecule (NH 3 } produced by nitrogen fixation or as a metabolic waste product of protein and nucleic acid metabolism. ammonite A member of a group ofshelled cephalopods that were important marin(' predators for hundreds of millions of years until their extinction at the end of the Cretaceous period (65.5 mya). amniocentesis (am' ·ne-o·sen·te'-sis} A technique of prenatal diagnosis in which amniotic fluid, obtained by aspiration from a n('edle inserted into the uterus, is analyzed to detect certain genetic and congenital def~ts in the fetus. amnion (am' -ne-on) One offour extraembryonic membranes. It surrounds a fluid-filled cavity that cushions the embryo. amniote (am' -ne-ot) Member of a clade of tetrapods named for a key derived character, the amniotic egg, which contains specialized membranes, including the fluid·filled am· nion, that protl'ct the ('mbryo. Amniotes include mammals as well as birds and other reptiles. amniotic egg A shelled egg in which an embryo develops within a fluid-filled amniotic sac and is nourished by rolk. Produced by reptiles (including birds) and egg-laying mammals, it enables thl.'m to complete their life cycles on dry land. amoeba (uh-me'-buh) A protist grade characterized by the presence of pseudopodia. amoebocyte (uh.me' -buh-sl!') An amoebalike cell that mOVl'S by pseudopodia and is found in most animals. Depending on the species, it may digest and distribute food, dispose of wastes, form skeletal fibers, fight infections, and change into other (I'll types. amoebozoan (uh-me' ·buh-zo'-an) A protist in a clade that includes many species with lobeor tulx'-shaped pseudopodia. amphibian Member of the tetrapod class Amphibia, including salamanders, frogs, and ca~i1ians. amphipathic (am' .ie-path'-ik} Having both a hydrophilic r('gion and a hydrophobic region. amplification The strengthening of stimulus energy during transduction. amygdala (uh-mig' -duh-luh) A structure in the temporal lobe of the vertebrate brain that has a major role in th(' processing of emotions. amylase (am' -uh-las'} An enzyml' in saliva that hydrolyzes starch (a glucose polymer from plants) and glycogen (a glucose polymer from

animals) into smaller polysaccharides and the disaccharide maltOS('. anabolic pathway (an' -uh-bol'-ik) A metabolic pathway that consumes energy to synthesize a complex molecule from simpler compounds. anaerobic respiration (an-er-o' -bik) The usc of inorganic mol~ules other than oxygen to accept electrons at the "downhill" end of ek'Ctron transport chains. analogous Having characteristics that are similar because of convergent evolution, not homology. analogy (an-al'-uh-jc) Similarity between two sp~ies that is due to convergent evolution rather than to descent from a common ancestor with the same trait. anaphase The fourth stage of mitosis, in which the chromatids of each chromosome have separat('d and the daughter chromosom('s arl' moving to the poles ofth(' cell. anatomy The structure of an organism and its study. anchorage dependence The requirement that a cell must be attached to a substratum in order to divide. androgen (an' -dro-jen) Any steroid hormone, such as testosterone, that stimulates the development and maintenance of the male reproductive system and secondary sex characteristics. aneuploidy (an' -yu-ploy'-de) A chromosomal aberration in which one or more chromosomes are present in extra copies or are deficient in number. angiosperm (an'.je-o-sperm) A flowering plant, which forms seeds inside a pro"'ctive chamber called an ovary. angiolensin II A peptide hormone that stimulates constriction of pr~apillary arterioles and increases reabsorption ofNaCI and water by the proximal tubules of the kidney, increasing blood pressure and volum('. anhydrobiosis (an-hi' -drii-bl -ii' -sis) A dormant state involVing loss of almost all body water. animal pole The point at the end of an egg in the hemisphere where the least yolk is concentrated; opposite of vegetal pole. Animalia The kingdom that consists of multicellular eukaryotes that ingest their food. anion (an' -i -on) A negatively (harged ion. annual A flowering plant that completes its entire life cycle in a single year or growing season. anterior Pertaining to the front, or head, of a bilaterally symmetrical animaL anterior pituitary Also called the adenohypophysis; portion of the pituitary that develops from nonneural tissue; consists of endocrine cells that synthesize and secrete several tropic and non tropic hormones. anlher In an angiosperm, the terminal pollen sac of a stamen. where pollen grains containing sperm-producing male gametophytes form. antheridium (an-thuh-rid'-e-urn} (plural, antheridia} [n plants, the male gametangium, a moist chamber in which gametes develop. Glossary

G-2

anthropoid (an' -thruh-poyd) Member of a primate group made up of the monkeys and the apes (gibbons, orangutans, gorillas, chimpan~ees, bonobos, and humans). antibody A protein secreted by plasma cells (differentiated Bcells) that binds to a p;lrticular antigen; also called immunoglobulin. All antibody molecules haw the saml' Y-shaped structure and in their monomer form consist oft.....o identical heavy chains and two identical light chains. anticodon (an' -ti -ko' -don} A nucleotide triplet at one end of a tRNA molecule that rccognizes a particular complementary codon on an mRNA molecule. antidiuretic hormone (ADH) (an' -tT -di -yuret' -ik} A peptide hormone, also known as vasopressin, that promotes water retention by the kidneys. Produced in the hypothalamus and released from the posterior pituitary, ADH also has activities in the brain. antigen (an' -ti-jen) A macromolecule that eliI" its an immune response by binding to recep· tors of Bcells or T cells. antigen presentation The process by which an MHC molecule binds to a fragment of an intracellular protein antigen and carries it to the cell surface, where it is displayed and can be recognized by a T celL antigen receptor The general term for a sur· face protein, located on B cells and T cells, that binds to antigens, initiating acquired immune responses. The antigen receptors on B cells are called B cell receptor.;, and the antigen receptor.; on T cells are called T cell receptors. antigen-presenting cell A cell that upon ingesting p;lthogens or internalizing pathogen proteins generates peptide fragments that are bound by class II MHC molecules and subsequently displayed on the cell surface to T cells. Macrophages, dendritic ceUs, and B cells are the primary antigen-presenting cells. antiparallel The opposite arrangement of the sugar-phosphate backbones in a DNA double helix. aphotic zone (a' -10'·tik) The part of an ocean or lake beneath the photic zone, where light docs not penetrate sufficiently for photosynthesis to occur. apical bud (a' -pik-ul) A bud at the tip of a plant stem; also called a terminal bud. apical dominance Concentration of growth at the tip of a plant shoot, where a terminal bud partially inhibits axillary bud growth. apical ectodermal ridge (AER) A thickened area of ectoderm at the tip of a limb bud that promotes outgrowth of the limb bud. apical meristem (mar' -uh-stem) Embryonic plant tissue in the tips of roots and the buds of shoots. The dividing cells of an apical meristem enable the plant to grow in length. apicomplexan (ap' -e-kom-pleks' ·un) A pro· tist in a clade that includes many species that parasitize animals. Some apicomplexans cause human disease. G-3

Glossary

apomixis (ap' -uh-mik'-sis} The ability of some plant species to reproducl' asexually through seeds without fertilization by a male gamete. apoplast (ap' -o-plast) In plants, the continuum of cell walls plus the extracellular spaces. apoptosis (a-puh-to' -sus) A program of con· trolled cell suicide, which is brought about by signals that trigger thc activation of a cascade of suicide proteins in the cell destined to die. aposcmatic coloration (ap' -o-si-mat'-ik) The bright coloration of animals with effective physical or chemical defenses that acts as a warning to predators. appendix A small, finger-like extension of the vertebrate cecum; contains a mass of white blood cells that contribute to immunity. aquaporin A channel protein in the plasma membrane of a plant, animal, or microorgan· ism cell that specifically facilitates osmosis, the diffusion of water across the membrane. aqueous humor Plasma-like liquid in the space bern'een the lens and the cornea in the vertebrate eye; helps maintain the shape of the eye, supplies nutrients and oxygen to its tissues, and disposes of its wastes. aqueous solution (a' -kwe-us} A solution in which water is the solvent. arachnid A member of a major arthropod group, the cheliceriforms. Arachnids include spiders, scorpions, ticks, and mites. arbuscular mycorrhiza (ar-bus' -kyii-Iur mi'ko-rT' -zuh} Association of a fungus with a plant root system in which the fungus causes the invagination of the host (plant) cells' plasma membranes. arbuscular mycorrhizal fungus A symbiotic fungus whose hyphae grow through the cell wall of plant roots and extend into the root cell (enclosed in tubes formed by invagination of the root cell plasma membrane). Archaea (ar' -ke'-uh) One of two prokaryotic domains, the other being Bacteria. archaean Member of the prokaryotic domain Archaea. Archaeplastida (ar' -ke-plas'-tid-uh) One of five supergroups of eukaryotes proposed in a current hypothesis of the evolutionary history of eukaryotes. This monophyletic group, which includes red algae, green alage, and land plants, descended from an ancient protist ancestor that engulfed a cyanobacterium. See also Excavata, Chromalveolata, Rhizaria, and Unikonta. archegonium (ar-ki-go' -nc-um} (plural, archegonia) In plants, the female gametangium, a moist chamber in which gametes develop. archenteron (ar-ken' -tuh-ron) The endodermlined cavity, formed during gastrulation, that develops into the digestive tract of an animal. archosaur (ar'-ko-sor) Member of the reptilian group that includes crocodiles, alligators, dinosaurs, and birds. arteriole (ar-ter' -e-ol) A vessel that conveys blood between an artery and a capillary bed. artery A vessel that carries blood away from the heart to organs throughout the body.

arthropod A segmented ecdysowan with a hard exoskcleton and jointed appendages. Familiar examples include insects, spiders, millipedes, and crabs. artificial selection The selective breeding of domesticated plants and animals to encourage the occurrence of desirabk traits. ascocarp The fruiting body of a sac fungus (aseomycete). ascomycete (as' -kuh-mT'-SCt) Member of the fungal phylum Ascomycota, commonly called sac fungus. The name comes from the saclike structure in which the spores develop. ascus (plural, asci) A saclike spore capsule located at the tip of a dikaryotic hypha of a sac fungus. asexual reproduction The generation of offspring from a single parent that occurs without the fusion of gametes (by budding, division of a single cell, or division of the entire organism into two or more p;lrts). In most cases, the offspring are genetically identical to the parent. assisted reproductive technology A fertilization procedure that generally involves surgically removing eggs (secondary oocytes} from a woman's ovaries after hormonal stimulation, fertiliZing the eggs, and returning them to the woman's body. associative learning The acquired ability to associate one environmental feature (such as a color} with another (such as danger). aster A radial array of short microtubules that extends from each centrosome toward the plasma membrane in an animal cell undergoing mitosis. astrocyte A glial cell with diverse functions, in· c1uding providing structural support for neurons, regulating the inter.;titial environment, facilitating synaptic transmission, and assisting in regulating the blood supply to the brain. atherosclerosis A cardiovascular disease in which fatty deposits called plaqul'S d,'velop in the inner walls of the arteries, obstructing the arteries and causing them to harden. atom The smallest unit of matter that retains the properties of an element. atomic mass The total mass of an atom, which is the mass in grams of I mole of the atom. atomic nucleus An atom's dense central core, containing protons and neutrons. atomic number The number of protons in the nucleus of an atom, unique for each element and designated by a subscript to thl' left of the elemental symbol. ATP (adenosine triphosphate) (a·den'-osen trl -fos'-flit) An adenine-containing nucleoside triphosphate that releases free energy when its phosphate bonds arc hydrolyzed. This energy is used to drive endergonic reactions in cells. ATP synthase A complex of several membrane proteins that provide a port through which protons diffuse. This complex functions in chemiosmosis with adjacent electron transport chains, using the energy of a hydrogen ion (proton} concentration gradient to make AT]>. AT]> synthases are found in the inner

mitochondrial membrane of eukaryotic cells and in the plasma membrane of prokaryotes. atrial natriuretk peptide (ANP) (5.' -trc-ul na' -trc-yn-ret'-ik) A peptide hormone secreted by cells of the atria of the heart in response to high blood pressure. ANP's effects on the kidney alter ion and water movement and thereby reduce blood pressure. atrioventrkular (AV) node A region of specialized heart muscle tissue bet.....een the left and right atria where electrical impulses are delayed for about 0.1 second before spreading to both ventricles and causing them to contract. atrioventrkular (AV) valve A heart valve located between each atrium and ventricle that prevents a backflow of blood when the ventricle contracts. atrium (a'·tre-um) (plural, atria) A chamber of the vertebrate heart that receives blood from the veins and transfers blood to a ventricle. autocrine Referring to a secreted molecule that acts on the cell that secreted it. autoimmune disease An immunological disorder in which the immune system turns against self. autonomic nervous system (ot' -o-nom'-ik) An efferent branch of the vertebrate peripheral nervous system that regulates the internal environment; consists of the sympathetic, parasympathdic, and enteric divisions. autopolyploid (ot' -o-pol'-c-ployd} An individual that has more than two chromosome sets that are all derived from a single species. autosome (ot' -o-som) A chromosome that is not directly involved in determining sex; not a sex chromosome. autotroph (ot' -o-troO An organism that obtains organic food molecules without eating other organisms or substances derived from other organisms. Autotrophs use energy from the sun or from the oxidation of inorganic substances to make organic molecules from inorganic ones. auxin (ok' -sin) A term that primarily refers to indoleacetic acid (IAA), a natural plant hormone that has a variety of effects, including cell elongation, root formation, secondary growth, and fruit growth. average heterozygosity (het' -er-o-zi -go'sHe) The percent, on average, of a population's loci that are heterozygous in members of the population. avirulent Describing a pathogen that can only mildly harm, but not kill, the host. axillary bud (ak' -sit-ar-c) A structure that has the potential to form a lateral shoot, or branch. The bud appears in the angle formed between a leaf and a stem. axon (ak' -son} A typically long extension, or process, of a neuron that carries nerve impulses away from the cell body toward target cells. axon hillock The conical region of a neuron's axon where it joins the cell body; typically the region where nerve impulses are generated. B cell receptor The antig
Cytoplasmic microtubules, 757/ Cytoplasmic streaming. 117j, 118,590 Cytosine. 87j, 88. 89j, 308. 310 Cytoskeleton. 112-18 animal cell, 100/ animal morphogenesis and, 1035-36 components of. 113-18 membrane protein attachment function, 129/ plamcell.101j roles of. in support, motility, and regulation, 112 structure/function of, 113t CytOSOl. 98, 103/ Cytosolic calcium. 823 Cytotoxic T cells, 938. 943. 944/

D Dalton (atomic mass unit). 33. 52 Dalton. John. 33 Dance language, honeybee. 1124 Dandelion,804j, Sllj, 1181/ Danielli, James. 126 Dark reactions, 189 Dark responses. rod cells. 1103/ D'Arrigo. Rosanne, 753/ Darwin. Charles, 14, 15I, 260 adaptation concept, 456-57. 459 on angiosperm evolution. 628 barnacles and. 692 Beagle voyage and field research conducted by,455-57 descent with modification conc
Sustainable development, 1264 in Costa Rica, 1264-65 Sutherland, Earl W., 209 Sutton, Walter S., 286 SwallOWing reflex, 8851 Sweating, 866 S""l'den, dl:mographic transition in, 11911 Sweet receptor, 1(Y}7/ Swim bladder, 708 Swimming, as locomotion, 1115 Switchgrass,817 Symbiont, 570 Symbiosis, 570, 1202-3 commensalism, 1203 fungus.animal,648-49 lichens as example of, 649-SO mU!ualism, 1203 parasitism,IW2 protists and, 596-97, 5971 Symbiotic relationships, 801, 8011 Symbols for elements and compounds, 31 Symmetry body plans and, 659 cell division, 755-56, 7561 Sympathetic division of autonomic nervous system, 1068, 10691 properties of, 1069/ Sympatric speciation, 495-97 allopatric speciation vs., 4931 habitat differentiation and, 4%-97 polyploidy and, 495-% review, 497-98 sexual selection and, 497 Symplast, 771, 771f, 773f, 781f communication in plants via, 781-82, 7821 Symplastic domains, 781-82 Synapses, 1048, 1056-61, 1078-80 chemical. 10571 generation of postsynaptic poh:ntials, 1058 long-term potentiation and, IOgol memory, learning, and synaptic connections, 1079 modulated synaptic transmission, 1059 neural plasticity ofCNS at, 1079 neurotransmitters and communication at, 1059-61 summation of postsynaptic potentials, 1058-59 Synapsids, 721. 721f origin of, 5131 Synapsis, 254/, 257 Synaptic cleft, 1057 Synaptic plasticity, 1079 Synaptic signaling, 208, 208/, 976/ Synaptic terminals, 1048, 1057/ Synaptic vesicles, 1057 Synaptonemal complex, 257 Syndromes, 299 Synthesis stage, phage, 3851 Synthetases, 338-39, 338/ Synthetic chromosomes, bacterial, 573 Syphilis, 5691 System, 144 Systematics, 536, 5411 animal phylogeny and, 661-64, 6631 mol~ular, 542 mol~ular, and prokaryotic phylogeny, 565-70 Systemic acquired resistance, 8%-47, 8471 Systemic changes, 782 Systemic circuit, 902, 9021

Index

1-49

Systemic lupus erythematosus, 949 Systemic mycoses, 651 Systems biology, 6 applications of, to medicine, 431-32 approach to protein interactions, 431, 43Ij complex systems, 29 at kvcl of cells and molecules, 9-11 plant hormone interactions, 834-35 Systems map, protein interactions in cells, IOf Systole, 904 Systolic pressure, 907

T T1 phage, infection of E. roli by, 306-8,

306f, 307f T4 phage infection of E. coli by, 381, 381f, 384f(see alsQ Bacteriophages (phages)) lytic cycle of, 385f structure,383f P. Zambryski on, 736 Table salt, 5/Jf Tactile communication. 1124 Taiga, 1170f Tail, muscular post-anal. 699f, 700 Tansley, A, G., 1211 Tapeworms, 6741, 676 Taproots, 739, 766-67 Taq polymerase, 1248 Tardigrades, 669f, 957f Tar spot fungus, 650f Tastants,1097 Taste, 1097 in mammals, 1097, 1098f Tash: buds, 1097 TATA box, 333, 333f Tatum, Edward, 326, 327f Tau protein, 1083 Taxis, 559, 1122, 1122f Taxal,243 Taxon, 537 Taxonomy, 537. See also Systematics binomial nomenclature, 537 early schemes of, 453 extant plants, 6051 hierarchical classification, 537-38 kingdoms and domains, 551, 55:if mammals,725f possible plant kingdoms, 601, 60If three-domain system, 13f, 14 Taylor, Dick, 1116 Tay-Sachs disease, 272, 272, 277, 280 T cell(s), 913f, 936 antigen receptors of, 937-38 cytotoxic, 938 helper, 938 interaction of, with antigen·presenting cells, 939f Teen receptor, 938 Teaching, P. Zambryski on, 737 Technology, 24 prokaryotes in research and, 572-73 Tccth. See also D,'ntition conodont dental tissue, 704-5 mammal,512-13f,721 origins of, 705 Telencephalon, 1070 Tclomerase, 319 Telomercs, 318-19, 319f Telomeric DNA, 436 Telophase, 231, 233f, 236f, 256f Telophase 1. 254f. 256f

I-50

Index

Telophase 11, 255f Temperate broadleaf forest, 1171f Temperate grassland, 1170f Temperate phages, 386, 386f Temperature, 48 effects of, on decomposition in ecosystcms,1234f effects of, on enzyme activity, 155 leaf, and transpiration. 778 moderation of, by water, 48-59 negative feedback control of room, 86Ij specics distribution/disp,'rsal and, 1154 Temperature regulators, 860f Templates. viruses and, 3871, 388-90 Template strand, DNA, 311-12, 329 Temporal fenestra, 721 mammal,513f Temporal heterogeneity, 1154 Temporal isolation, 490f Temporal summation, 1058, 1058f Tendons, 857f Tendrils,74:if Termination of cell signaling, 222-23 Termination stage, transcription, 332f Termination stage, translation, 341, 342f Terminator, 332 Termites, 596, 597f Terrestrial animals, osmoregulation in, 957-58 Terrestrial biomes,1166-71 chaparral,1169f climate and, 1166 desert, ll68f disturbance in, 1166, 1167 global distribution of, 1166f northern conif,'rous forest. 1170f primary production in, 1227-28 savanna,1I69f temperate broadleaf forest, 1171f temperate grassland, 1170f tropical forest. 1168f tundra,I17 1f types of, 1168-7If Terrestrial food chain, 1205f Terrestrial nitrogm cyck, 1233f Territoriality, 1176 density-dependent population regulation through, 1187, I 187f Tertiary consumers, 1224 Tertiary structurl' of protein, 83f Testable hypotheses, 20 Testcrosses, 267 determining genotype with, 267f T. Morgan's, 293f, 295f Testes, 1005 hormonal control of, 10IOf Testicle. 1005 Testosterone, 63f, 210-13, 213f, 993, 1007, 1010 Tests, 589 Test-tube cloning, 814-15, 8141" Tetanus, 1110 Tetraploidy, 297, 298f Tetrapods, 710-13 amniote, 713-20 amphibians, 711-13 colonization oiland by, 519 derived characters of. 710 emergence of, 657 evolution of, 657-58 homologous characteristics of, 4M humans, 728-33 as lobe· fins, 710 mammals, 720-28

origin of, 512-14, 513f, 710-11 phylogeny,71Ij Tctravalence, carbon, 60 Thalamus, 1072 Thalidomide. 63 Thalloid liverworts, 60Sf Thallus, 586 Theory, 23 meaning of. 465-66 Therapeutic cloning, 416 Therapsids, origin of, 513f Thermal encrgy, 143 Thermocline, 1161 Thermodynamics, 144 biological order and disorder, and, 145 l'COsystl'ms and la....'S of, 1223 first law of, 144 second law of, 144-45 Thermogenesis, 866-67, 867f Thermoreceptors, 1091 ThermoTl'gulation, 862-68 acclimatization in, 867 aquatic,860f balancing heat loss and gain, 863-67 mdoth,'rmy, ectothermy, and, 862-63 fever, and physiological thermostat, 868 variation in body temperature and, 863 Thermostat, physiological, 868 Theropods, 716, 718 Thick filammts, 1106 Thigmomorphogenesis, 842 Thigmotropism, 842 Thimann. Kenneth, 826 Thin filaments, 1106 Thiols,65f Thompson seedless grapes, 83 If Threatened species, 1246 Threonine,79f Threshold, 1053 Thrombus, 913, 915 Thrum flower, 813f Thylakoid membrane, light reactions and chemiosmosis of, 197-98, 197f Thylakoids, 110, 11 If, 187, 189 Thylakoidspace, 187 Thymidylate synthase (TS}, 593f Thymine, 87j, 88, 89j, JOB, JOBj, 310, 310f Thymine dimers, 318, 318f Thymus, 936 Thyroid gland, 990-91, 990f Thyroid hormones, 990-91, 988 Thyroid-stimulating hormone (TSH), 988 Thyrotropin.releasing hormone (TRH}, 988 Thyroxine (T 4)' 987t, 990 in frog metamorphosis, 980f pathway for, 979 .solubility of, 977f Thysanura, 691f Tidal volume, 922 Tight junctions, 121f Time, phylogenetic tree branch lengths and, 545f Tinbergen, Niko, 1126-27, 1127f Ti plasmid, 421-22 prodUcing transgenic plants using, 421f Tissue, 738, 855-58 body plan and organization of animal, 659 cell division function of renewal of, 228f conn.'ctive, 857f, 858 epithelial,856f immune system rejection of transplanted, 948 as level of biological organization, Sf muscle, 858f

nervous, 858, 859f plant (see Tissue systems, plant) proteins spedfic to, 368 Tissue plasminogen activator (TPA), 418, 441,44if Tissue systems, plant, 742-43 dermal, 742f ground, 742f, 743 leaves, 750 meristems, 746-47 vascular, 742f, 743 Toads, hybrid zones and, 498-99, 498f Tooo.cco mosaic virus (TMV), 381-82, 382! 383! 393 Toll-like receptor (TLR), 933, 933f Tollund man, 610f TomatO,626f Tongue, taste and, 1097f Tonicity, 133 Tool usc in early humans, 730 Top-down model, 1209, 12lOf Topoisomerase, 314, 314f, 315/ Topsoil,786 inorganic components of, 786-87 organic components of, 787 Torpor, 871-72 Torsion, 679, 679f Tortoiseshell cats, 292f Total kinetic energy, 48 Totipotent cells, 1040 restricting, in animal morphogenesis, 1()4{l-41 Totipotent plants, 412 Touch, plant response to, 842-43 Toxic waste cleanup, DNA cloning and, 397f Toxic wastes, density-dependent population regulation through, 1187 Toxins, human release of, into environment, 1238-39 Trace clements, 32 Tracers, radioactive, 34f Trachea, 885, 919 Tracheal systems, 918 Trachealtubcs, ins

Biology 8ed

A Dictionary of Musical Terms, 8ed

A Dictionary of Musical Terms, 8ed

Biology

Biology

Biology

Biology

Biology

Biology

biology

Biology

Biology

CliffsAP Biology (Cliffs Ap Biology)

Systems Biology and Synthetic Biology

Discover Biology

Environmental Biology

Lichen Biology

Biology: 3

Environmental Biology

Cancer Biology

Molecular Biology

Human Biology

Marine Biology

Sphingolipid Biology

Molecular Biology

SYSTEMS BIOLOGY

Biology (SparkCharts)

GCSE Biology

Conservation Biology

Marine Biology

Biology 8ed

A Dictionary of Musical Terms, 8ed

A Dictionary of Musical Terms, 8ed

Biology

Biology

Biology

Biology

Biology

Biology

biology

Biology

Biology

CliffsAP Biology (Cliffs Ap Biology)

Systems Biology and Synthetic Biology

Discover Biology

Environmental Biology

Lichen Biology

Biology: 3

Environmental Biology

Cancer Biology

Molecular Biology

Human Biology

Marine Biology

Sphingolipid Biology

Molecular Biology

SYSTEMS BIOLOGY

Biology (SparkCharts)

GCSE Biology

Conservation Biology

Marine Biology

Recommend Documents